‘ %, -*. — a ; Fy f a by Journal of the Roval Microscopical Society CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZooLtoGeyvyY AND BOTAN DT (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia) MICROSCOPYW, S&c- EDITED BY R. G. HEBB, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P. WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A. F.R.S.E. Regius Professor of Natural History in the University of Aberdeen A. N. DISNEY, M.A. B.Sc. CECIL PRICE-JONES, M.B. Lonp. FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY AND A. B. RENDLE, M.A. D.Sc. F.LS. HAROLD MOORE, B.So. Assistant in Botany, British Museum Woolwich Arsenal Minimis partibus, per totum Nature campum, certitudo omnis innititur quas qui fugit pariter Naturam fugit.—Zzznceus. BOs Ri Bh wee R 1906 feo be OBTAINED AT THESSOCIETY’S ROOMS, | 20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W. oF Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, LONDON, W.C. AND OF MgEssrs. DULAU & CO., 37 SoHo Squarz, Lonpon, W. ie ie ff 7); Hopal Microscopical Soviety. Established in 1839. Incorporated by Royal Charter in 1866. The Society was established for the promotion of Microscopical and Biological Science by the communication, discussion, and publication of observa- tions and discoveries relating to (1) improvements in the construction and mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) Biological or other subjects of Microscopical Research. It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows of either sex. Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and description of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal knowledge. The certificate is read at two General Meetings, and the Candidate balloted for at the second Meeting. The Admission Fee is 2/. 2s.; and the Annual Subscription 2/. 2s., pay- able on election, and subsequently in advance on Ist January annually. The Annual Subscriptions may be compounded for at any time for 31/.10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year’s subscription. The annual Subscrip- tion of Fellows permanently residing abroad is 1/. 11s. 64. or a reduction of one-fourth. Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council. Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Presidents for the time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council. The Council, in whom the management of the property and affairs of the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President, oe Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary ellows. The Meetings are held on the third Wednesday in each month, from October to June, at 20 Hanover Square, W. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors are admitted by the introduction of Fellows. The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the Society, and a Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, «&c., is published bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows residing in countries within the Postal Union. _ The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects, is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 P.M. It is closed for four weeks during August and September. Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained by application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society, 20 Hanover Square, W. a 2 Ea) atron HIS MAJESTY THE KING. Past-Presidents. Elected *Srr RicnarD Owen, K.C.B. D.C.L. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1840-1 JOHN, INDUMY, et: JR OR .S.. 126. staeeeecce pane eee nemaneces 1842-3 eo RO MAS: Wide, IR Siac oo hehe . seco eee 1881-2-3. Rev. Witu1am Hy. Dauirerer, M.A. LL.D. F.R.S. 1884—5-6-7 *CHARLES TxHos. Hupson, M.A. LL.D. (Cantab.), F.R.S. 1888-9-90 Ropert BrarrHwaitr, M.D: M-R.C.S)....5. 0.2.2. 00c) cal ese KREIDL, A., ele Manpi—Immunity of Foetus .. «. 2s 2s <6 es «os wo | SOK Jackson, C. M.—Topography of Human Fetal Pancreas .. .. .. .. « « 162 Korrr, K. v.—Development of Dentine in Mammalia.. .. «1 oe oe 08 oe 1€3 ScHMALHAUSEN, J. J.—Development of Lungs in Tropidonotus .. .. .. «.. +» 163 Boum, J.— Development of External Genitals of Sheep -. «1 «swe wets «168 HeEtxy, K.—Studies on the Islands of Langerhans ees ecb co | LE: Oxner, M.—Club Cells in Epiderm of Fishes .. .. 00 00 ns Soe Swe, :SC KE Buiocu, Bruno—Foundations of Embryology .. Aco sic co, Zell! Lane- CLAYPON, Janet E.—Interstitial Cells in Ovary ‘of Rabbit. 6. 3. ee MarsHa.., F. H. A., & W. A. JoLLy—Mstrous Cycle in Dog .. a 2282 Ovary as an Organ of Internal Secretion ba 74s GrécorrE, Victor—Maturation-Divisions ue op POSS ee eee JANSSENS, F. A.—Spermatogenesis in Batrachoseps attenuaiue .. .. -..) a eee Bourn, P, & P. Anceu—Testicular Secretion 1. 1. 25 0s as joe os Same Pizon, ANTOINE —Alleged Ovulase of ideal ce gn as ithe | Gaga! Sse eee LoiseL, G.—Tozxic Properties of Seminal Fluid .. «2. oe we we wee 288 AssHETON, R.—Placentation in Ungulates .. .. .. «6 «2 oe oo of « 283 Cuarrin & Goupi.—Ferments of the Placentawe oe Vs Aes ee * Tn order to make the Contents complete, the papers printed in the ‘ Transactions’ and the Notes printed in the ‘ Proceedings’ are included here. CONTENTS. SziLLy, AUREL von—Amunion-Invagination in the Formation of Chick’s Lens .. Satvi, Grunio—Pre-Oral Gut in Bird Embryos... be np ee Nc Rexse, Aubert M.—Double Embryo of Florida Alligator. Sadhu ate ene Tur, J. J—Double Embryo of a Lizard.. .. Si eta iced. Kiswy as Yona, Eutt—Giant Tadpoles .. Goaero, Empepocte—Development of Pancreas ti im | Discoglossus pictus TorNIER, G.—Viviparous Frog... Scouu.rze, OskaAR—Influence of Light o on Pigmentation of Amphibian Ova and Larve .. : ; Boroga, I. —Urogenital System of Elasmobranchs Doncasrer, L.— Inheritance of Coat-Colour in Rats .. Moors, B., & oTHERS— Effects of Alkalis and Acids on ‘Developing Ova of Sea- Urchin... . Wuittey, E.— Effect of Acids and Alkalis on the Baggs ‘of Plaice and Sea-Urchin .. DeLace, Yves—Artificial Parthenogenesis Se RUBASCHEIN, W.—Maturation and Fertilisation in 1 Porpoise Be eso FIscHER, A.—Oolemma of Mammalian Ovum sates a ee Fics, R — Individuality of Chromosomes as Dousvuisson—Formation of Yolk in Egg of Sparrow artic ie Fst Wison, E. B., & R. Hertwia—New Theory of Sex- Production .. 1... Wison, E. B.Seeual Differences of Chromosome Groups . . ae Hugounena, J.., & A. MorEL—Formation of Hemoglobin in the Embryo nic WintrEBERT, P.—Metamorphosis Independent of Nervous sa Foret, A., & oraERs—Sexual Selection .. pete es Suita, G. "High and Low Dimorphism aia Pree Lrnmann, H.—Aortic Arches in Mammals .. .. .. Harrtoe, M.—Dual Force of the Dividing Cell .. Horst, C. C., & W. F. R. WeLtpon—Inheritance of Coat Colour in Horses CastTLe, W. K., & A. Forses—Heredity of Hair-length in Guinea-pig CastLe, W. E.— Origin of Polydactylous Race of eae BG WebDEKIND, W.— Theory of Development ve Lewis, F. T.—Aortic Arches in Mammals ot BRADLEY, O. CHarnock—Development of Sesamoid Bone .. Sainmonr, G.—Structure and Development of Ovary and Testis of Cat Broek, A. J. P. van Den—Development of Sex Structures in rape Goopricu, E. 8.—Development and Structure of Fins. br ode nick HEnRIKSEN, M. E.— Functional View of Development SCHWALBE, E.—Test- Book of Teratology : Martin, JosE Riosa Y—Bull with a Su upernumerary Limb BENDER, O.—Hypermely in the Frog - Meuexy, Lupwie v.— Origin of Supernumerary Limbs a SHEURER, CRESSWELL— Cell Communications between Blastomeres AvoupH!, H.—Behaviour of Vertebrate Spermatozoa in Solutions Lane-Ciaypon, J. E., & E. H. Srartinc—Factors A, Growth and id Activity of Mammary Glands Go} bee ge BaRpiERI, Crro—Placenta of Tragulus See GUDGER, E. W. —Breeding Habits of Pipe- -Fish : ALLEN, Benner M. —Origin of Sea-Cells of Ohrysemys ae Kostaneck!, K.— History of Division Centres in Fertilisation .. BaralL_on, E.—Impregnation and Fertilisation .. Erernop—Tr ophoblast of the Placenta... Coun, Luvwic—Absorption of the Yolk in Anguis ‘fragilis. : . Epwanrps, Cuarues L., & CLARENCE W. Haun— Gastrulation of Horned Toad .. ScHaFrrner, J. H. —Terminology of Organs in Various Conditions eo, Development Apdo. Pat, H.—Movements of Snake Spermatozoa .. Bites Sp" 0c Ftrsr, C. M.—Development of the Retina in the Salmon .. BELL, E. T. — Exper imental Studies in Development of Eye and Nasal Cavity Svock arp, C. R.—Development of Thyroid in Bdellostoma stouti .. .. Froriep, R.—Primitive occipital vertebra oe Vries, Hugo pe—Species and Varieties : their Origin by Mutation... x CONTENTS. b. Histology. TELLYESNICZKY, K. v.—Resting Nuclei and Mitosis .. . a6 0d Scuvuttze, O.—Peripheral Nervous System in Amphibian Lorie ae eae Scuneiper, K. C.—Optic Cells of Frog’s Eye : see tODy BO. oC RUBASCHEIN, W.—Double and Polymorphic Nuclei in Triton .. 0. ew He.iy, K.—Acidophil Goblet Cells in Torpedo .. DISA Sc Scumipr, J. E.— Mucous Membrane of Human Alimentary Canal wich ae Rerrerer, E E.—Structure and Development of Integument .._ .. ~ Structure and Histogenesis of Bone...» 46 sew FLEISCHMANN, L.—Structure of Tooth Canaliculi ADRS RCO A Cues Looe a Drzewina, A.—Lymphoid Tissue in Ichthyopsida «. «swe we Wotrr, M.—Nerve Elements in Amnion of Cat .. Pipe dom wea Bc Goupst EIN, Kurt, & Kurt BeRLInER—Neurological ‘Bludies Te oor oe WeriIpEnreIcH, Fr.—Structure of Amphibian Red Blood Corpuscles .. .. « SMREHER, Ernst—EHnamel Prisms .. Gee fas da% Oc Pacavut, M.—Amitosis and Multinucleate Cells in , Epithelium ne BO. foe Coyne & CavanE—Odontoclasts .. Sek RSGs Ty Cle ctoMaCDS Reinke, Fr.—Intercellular Bridges and “Leucocyte- Paths 5 si cies tess Scurippe, H.— Human Epiderm Cells, 2a a ees = y-cl ee eee ae ese GEMELLI, "Fr. A. —Infundibulum in Fishes .. .. ie gkeats Lacuesse, E.—Rod-like Gland Cells in Fishes are Sporozoa Pees Sc JADERHOLM, G. A.—Endocellular Nets in Ganglion Cells Bee Bb ab KRAUsE, R.—Nerves of Auditory Organ in Petromyzon fluviatilis .. .. « Scuarrer, Joser—Study of Cartilage Anka acie. Soe BO a Te Car.iEr, KE. Wace—Secretion in Liver Cells.. .. Witxson, E. B.—Studies on Chromosomes Bo Kormann, B.—Histology of Mammalian Nostril . wad Wee) aes Krauss, F.—Skin of Reptiles; .. -. Eye Mneiey Gems Peeten” Sect tae Epincer, L.—Amphioxus Brain .. Se seeersianea rian ele ReErrerer, Ep.—Growth and Renewal of Dermis.. Lecenpre, R. —Pathological Nature of Holmgren’s Canaliculi in Nerve Cells Rets, KARoLINA, & J. Nussaum—Structure of Gas-Gland in Swim-Bladder.. MEtcunikorr, EL.— Whitening of Hairs and Feathers in Winter .. .. «. Rapascu, H. E.—Shape of Human Erythrocytes... «2 6. ee ene Ponzio, F. —Nerve- Endings in the Lung .. PES ROOM TG Sc Meyer, E.—Plasma Cells in Human Gasserian Ganglion 30 SJOVALL, E.— Histology of Sex Cells ac ae Herericn, F.—Ciliated Epithelium in Human Papille vallate Nemiworr, A.—Fat Cells in Acipenser unten BEILING, K.— Structure of Vagina and Uterus in Mammals Rapascu, H. E.— Form of Human Blood Corpuscles .. DvrsBere, J.—Number of Chromosomes in Mun .. G1acomiINnI, ErcoLE—Suprarenals and Sympathetic System in Protopteru us Exner, 8., & H. Januscuke—Tapetum of Abramis brama : Graypon, Hf T.—Histology of Optic Nerve .... Tiles at hasice po MMaen SCH ASSOWNIKOW, $.—Histological Changes in Panereas Soe Ga) Pot Rupascukin, W.—Canals of Glandular Epithelium .. .. 2. eee SruDNIcKA, F. K. —Epidermis of Lepadogaster Roe Goce bas dos oc Ikepa, R. — Epithelium of Human Epididymis _.. 50 ipa SED ob ENGEL, C. S.—Non-nucleated Blood Corpuscles in Vertebrates... ee Surnow, A. E. v. —FErythrocytes of Siredon pisciformis .. 1. se we we Murray, J. A—Chromosomes of Lepidosiren paradozra .. .. - c. General. Farmer, J. BRETLAND, & oTHERS—Plimmer’s Bodies and pepo, Cells .. DEFLANDRE, C.—Adipogenic Function of the Liver .. .. +. . Kempen, P. N. van—Tympanic Region in Mammals .. .. «1 +e ewe Depérer, Cu.— Evolution of Tertiary Mammals 4B, teon! ade. (gots © 6b Fisouer, G.—Bronchial Tree in Birds .. .. 1. 00 «1 «2 ce Howe, G:—Toxieity of Eggs ::. ..\ see ae nee 9 ee > CONTENTS. Srromsren, F. A.— Venous System of Chelonia .. .. . ANNANDALE, Netson—Regenerated Tail in Ptychozoon homalocephalum eye Batu, W.—Taste Organs in Mouth of Crocodile .. Hacer, P. K.—Relation of Jaw Muscles to Salivary Glands in Snakes Fow er, H. W.—Habits of Sphagnum Frog At eke She “p SmaL.iwoop, W. M.—Adrenal Tumours in Frog .. .. +e ee te we OrEDER, R.—Intermazillary Glandiofeloadines-e 1c Bangs, Cuares 8.—Insects Injurious to Cocoanut Palm Nob, G.—Sensory Organs on Wings va Feut, E. Porter—New York Mosquitos Grinperc, K.— Blood-Sucking Muscidz : Brunet, G.—Efects of Parasites on Oocytes of Queen Termite Imuor, O. E.— Wing-Structure in Cicads .. a5 Buenion, E. —Polembryony and Sex- Determination < .. : LINDEN, Manta von—Assimilation of Carbon Dioxide by Chrysalids cic Spirra, E. J.—Mechanism of Compound Eye Shim “ote ee HANDLIRSCH, Anton—Palzozoie Insects ne Ferperuey, H.—Influence of Temperature on Lepidoptera oe oc oe MERRIFIELD, F'.— Effect of Temperature on Insect Development .. SSeecu dn wb Doncaster, L.—Maturation of Unfertilised Eggs in Tenthredinide .. : Harrison, L. W. H.— Variations of Lycena astrarche in Britain Toyamo, KameTaro—Mendel’s Laws applied to Silk-worm Crosses .. ScHarrrer, C.—Coleoptera and Moths of United States .. .. + LonestaFr, G. B.— Bionomics of South African Lamellicorns .. WANDOLLECEK, B.— Abdomen of Female Chafer Makrcuovx, E., & P. L. Simonp —Stegomyta fasciata ‘and Yellow Fever .. Rav., Em. "New Sense- -Organ on Head of Corethra Larve AUSTEN, EK. E.—Synonymy of Musca Marginalis : Avig, J. R., & A. Aucock—Distribution and Biology of Anopheles SILVESTRI, F. —Development of Ageniaspis Fuscicollis.. .. Dory, CuarLes—Collecting Stylopide ... Hewirt, C. Gorpon— Copulation and Oviposition in Hemiptera CarreNTER, G. H.—Irish Collembola LEISEWITZ, W.—Locomotor Cuticular Outgrowths i in Insect Larvx VERHOEFF, K. W.—Morphology of Insect Head OETTINGER, R.—Abdominal Gland-Pockets in Insects... VENEZ(ANI, A.—Structure and Function of Malpighian Tubules Foret, A Himalayan Antsy... .- : CockEreELL, T. D. A.— Fossil Hymenoptera from Colorado Marcuat, P.—Biology of Hymenopterous Parasites .. PEARSALL, R. F.— Geometridz of United States SR AED acute: Neto stare emt Pers Cuapmay, T. A.—Life-History of Trichoptilus paludum .. Lonestarr, G. B.—Rest Attitude of Butterflies .. ac Ricarpo, GERTRUDE—Genus Hematopota Hanrison, Rora M.—New Organ in Periplaneta ‘Orientalis Bangs, CHarues 8.—Insects Attacking Cocoanut Palm Bouvier, EK. L.—Hive-Bees Nesting in the Open Air .. ENDERLEIN, GUnTHER—Monogruph of Coniopterygidz oc JANET, CHaRLES—Legeneration of Muscles of Flight in Ants after Nu uptial Flight Marg, FE. L., & M. CopELAND—Sper matogenesis of aaa pa MacGiiivray, A. D.— Wings of Tenthredinoidea : SPULER, ARNOLD—Moth Parasitic on a Sloth Hinscu.er, J.—Development of Catocala ee Reitrer, E —Species of Elateride . Hessz, E.—Myiasis of Toads .._ . GiarpD, A.—Ravages of Exotic Fruit-fly 7 near Paris Weiimay, F. Cretcuton—Habits of Tsetse-flies.. .. NIELSEN, J. C.—Cause of ‘‘ Markflecke” : Leitner, M.— Hubits and Structure of Gall- -midge Rouer, E.—Antennal Sense Organs in Diptera .. Osporn, Raymonp C.—Dragon-flies in Brackish Water LEINEMANN, K.—Number of Facetsin Beetles’ Hyes .. «6 «+ «8 08 00 we oe ee oe oe . ee ee oe ee oe oe . @ «6 oe wv @u'e 6 ee ee ee ee ee oo oe e oe ee as oe XV PAGE 300 300 301 301 301 301 301 302 302 302 302 302 302 302 435 4385 436 436 436 436 437 437 437 438 438 438 438 438 439 439 439 439 439 440 548 548 548 549 549 549 549 550 550 550 550 550 551 551 551 664 665 665 665 665 665 665 666 666 666 666 606 666 xvi CONTENTS. SELLArDs, E. H.—Permian Odonata Krerp., Ators, & JOHANN Recen—Stridulation of Gryllus campestris es Orrr, H.—Spermatogenesis in Locusta viridissima .. +. Sinvestri, F —Notes on Muchilide.. .- a JACKSON, C.F. —Key to Families and Genera of ‘Thysanura ae Fexr, E. P.—Jnjurious Insects of the State of New York .. .. Frirscu, Kart—Flower-visiting Insects in Styria te B. Protracheata. Bouvier, E. L.—Monograph of Onychophora Sp bos, © 66 is Monograph on Onychophora Soy (otra oO DENDY, ArtHur—Australian Onychophora .. .. «+ ws y. Myriopoda. Verruorrr, K. W.—Variation in Scutigera .. . Bian dies Buiaceman, M. W.—Spermatogenesis of Scolopendra heros 2 Go Spermatoyenesis in Myriopoda SINCLAIR, F. G.—Structure of Platydesmide . Vernoerr, K. W.—Studies on Scutigeridz 3. Arachnida. THon, KAREL—New Excretory Organ in ena bi oc SILVESTRI, H.—Arachnological Notes .. .. Sena eeter Smirh, Frank P.—New Spider = So chia boa hob Lane, P.—structure of Hydrachnid Byes Sead eel ator sie Srranp, H.—Ovarian Eggs of Spiders .. .. 21 se we we Dau, Fr.—Classification of Spiders .. «1 ee ve wee J ACOBI, A.—Spinning Mite on Conifers .. .. St SOR ot Euuinesen, E.—South American Pseudoxcorpions Pearce, N. D. F.—On some Oribatidex from the Sikkim Himalaya. Bercer, E. W.—Habits of Pseudoscorpronidz : 20 Loman, J. C. C.—Coloured Skin Secretion in Opilionidz * OUDEMANS, A. C.—New Classification of Acarina sie Tuon, KarEL—Holothyrids G5 ada ab Bonner, A.—WNotes on Structure of Tapia: <9 ee: es dbewee tte NEWSTEAD, R.—Tick Fever in Congo Free State .. .. . «- Cour, Lion J.—Feeding Habits of Pycnogonids .. .. .. « Bovvisr, E. L.—Antaretic Pycnogonids : SG. sbue thc ScHIMKEWITSCH, Wu.— Classification of Pantopoda ssuitiise Bae BassE, ALBERT—Structure and Position of Tardigrada .. .. RosENuEIM, Orro—Chitin in Carapace of Pterygotus osiliensis Donitz, W. H.— Bovine Ticks as Carriers of Disease .. NORDENSKIOLD, Ertk—Structure of Ixodes reduvius Ricuters, F.— Revivification of Tardigrada.. es OUDEMANS, A. O.—Genital Trachex in Chernetide and Acari .. ScnimkEwITscu, W.—Development of Thelyphonus Caudatus .. BrErR.esz, A.—The Genus Gamasus and other Acari... Wiuuiamson, W.—Hydrachnid Fauna of Scotland .. .. « Cour, Lion J.—New Pyenogonid from the Bahumas .. 3 Desmatsons, H.— Collections of Spiders AY act: NORDENSKIOLD, E.—Gland System in Ixodes Mavrizio, A.— Resisting Powers of Tyroglyphine e, Crustacea. Wiuuiamson, H. Cuas.—Life- History a the Lobster .. 50 Atcock, A.—The Genus Peneus .. aad thee wirale Doury, ’R. —Sense-Organ in a Schizopod — be so 86. Os KIsutNnovye, Kamakicu1—Species of Acetes .. Buano, L.—Caprellid in Lake Geneva . : Doutrvs, A., & A. Virt—Subterranean Isopods ad ee XIIL) ee PAGE CONTENTS. Pavu.sen, J.—Galvanotaxis of Entomostraca., .. «2 «+ + «8 08 oe Soort, T.—Revision of certain British Copepoda 56 OstwaLp, W.—Seasonal Dimorphism in Daphnida .. .. Zwack, Apotr—LEphippium of Daphnia hyalina.. aC Gurney, Ropert—Life-History of Cladocera .. 5h, ee At Garstane, W.—Respiration in Sand- Burrowing Crabaeeae oh Yassin. BovvieEr, a. L. —Decapods collected by the ‘Princess Alice’ «2 ss ws we Wor, E.— Reproduction in Copepods 30 RICHARDSON, Harriet—Lsopods of North- west Coast of North America Ati, & ic Ratupoun, Mary J.—Alaska Decapods .. A IA Me re, tae VREDENBURG, E.-—Occurrence of Apus in Baluchistan. Ao. aoe sans ep doa: rss Hay, Wituiam P.—Hermaphroditism in Crayfishes THIELE, J.—Phylogeny of Crustacean Limb .. .. .. «. . ‘ e s Scorr, Tuomas—Crustacea OjMLE PROTEC LLCO TU ameter areata! sie mele) ate Brozex, ARtTHUR—Variation-Study of a Decapod .. So, ghee ae Ricwarpson, Harrret—Monograph of North American Isopods Wess, W.M., & C. Siunem—Monograph on British Wood-Lice.. Ost, J jose — Regeneration of Antenne of Wood-Louse.. ue Covribre, H.—Afinities of Hoplophoride So Me Bouvier, E. L.—Distribution of Gennadas .. .. «2 - Relationships of Gennadas.. BRUNT, L.—Phagocytosis and Excretion in Phyllopods 5 eGo. tide Arrom, C.—Parthenogenesis of Artemia salina .. RM Pecos A Rt GB a0 >» ». Artemia-salina .. oe do. V0 ZoaraF, Nicotas pe—Cervical Cap i in Nauplius of Artemia salina .. Vespovsky, F.— Reduction of Eyes in Gammarids .. «uve we new ANNANDALE, Netson—Indian Stalked Barnacles Sty User, Saee 8 dl etethes Ue Quimmor; Ai—Leposphilusilabret 2 ae ele ws ww » » Antarctic Copepods .. is SUG Mee Anprews, E. A.—Kgg- Laying Habits of Cambarus afinis. bre So homeerl acs Pree Bonn, G.—Phototropism of Larval Lobsters... GOR y MOO hesomeroS Bouvier, E. L.—Macrura of the ‘ Hassler’ and ‘ Blake’ Fin Ors Mca bor Goto, Serraro—Meristic Variation in an Isopod.. .. «2 ee we we wt Gutnyssr, A.— Hepatic Tubes of Anilocra frontalis .. 1. 22 ee we we Rossi, CARMELITA—Commensalism of two Isopods BooecoOd ewer tO. = ter "ico EstErty, C. O.—Nervous System of Copepoda... eu ewes JUDAY, Cuancey—Halocyprids of San Diego Soy co hS J) for EmmeL, Victor E.—Regeneration of Lost Parts in Lobster | CourterE, H.—Larve of Macrura Eucyphota .. +e sn wee RicHarDson, Harriet—Antarctic Isopods .. aor Quipor, A.—Male of Nicothoa astaci and the Suctorial 1 Apparatus Ea Ko.rzorr, N. K.—Spermatozoa of Decapoda Pd Rao Sc Henverson, J. R.—Coral-infesting Crab... Seite Aisi eena tay neler Kauicuewsky, M.—Malacostraca of the Gulf of Odessa os oe) t 08 Rosrnson, Marcaret—Development and i aon a Position of Nebalia GroveL, A.— New Operculate Cirriped .. 33 Zocrar, N. von—Hermaphroditism of Male ‘Apus Set toh) Vics mene Herovarp, E.—Parasitic Copepod in Amphiura squamata ART or Aes CoorrEr, A. W.—New Genus of Gymnoplea from Natal... .. «1 une Lerat, P.—Oogenesis and Spermatogenesis in Cyclops strenuus .. : Annulata. Buenion, E., & N. Poporr—Spermatogenesis of Harthworm .. .. ANNANDALE, NELSoN—Indian Species of Chextogaster te ied rate” dee Lapreyt, F.—Polian Tubes in Sipunculus .. oO ad Ozwik.irzer, C.—Regeneration of Head End of Opliryotrocha puerilis cotatas Sanz, L. ALansos y—Species of Polynoine .. .. ee den” 380 Scuuttze, E.—Regeneration in Annelida =... uu oe we ween IzuKA, Axira—Japanese Palolo .. .« eo ss a0 06 a0 «0 sa a0 IKEDA, I.—Philippine Gephyreans .. KosraNEcut, K.— Origin of Centrioles of First Cleavage Spindle in Myzostoma Dec. 19th, 1906 XVill CONTENTS. Souwartz, M.—Natural History of Tomopteride 26 be IssAKOWITSCH, ALEXANDER— Determination of Sex in Daphnide = Houms, 8. J.—Alaskan Amphipods ‘6 CoLez, Lion J. —Pyenogonids of the West Coast of North America ae Nuspaum, J.—Regeneration in Polychets .. . oe Bouxor, G.—Arttficial Parthenogenesis in an Annelid. 2 & ate Waener, F. von—Regeneration in Lumbriculus variegatus Bon Mot Piguet, Em1te—Bythonomus lemani Grube .. SALENSKY, W. —Gisophageal Pouches in Polygordius and, Saccocirrus GravigR, Cu.—Red Sea Polychets .. Watson, ArnoLp T.—Peculiar Regenerative "Process in Potamilla .. GRAvIER, Cu.—Mistaken Case of Budding in Polychets .. .. Moors, J. Peroy— Alaskan Polychets 5 Vespovskf, F. —Nephridia of Aeolosoma and Mesenchytreus Sirsa, F — Relationships in Oligochzta.. .. .. .» «= IssEL, R.—Italian Oligocheta.. . SteeoC ENRIQUES, P.—Blood Vessels of Sipunculus nudus Borquin, Jutes—Abnormality in Genital Organs of Leech .. Spiess, C.—Digestion in the Leech .._ . 5p ae Asric, Paut—Systematic Relations of Chetognatha 10.) 00 Netson, Jas. A.—Sexual Reproduction in Aflosoma .. .. «2 oe Waener, F. von—Ethology of Tubifex and Lumbriculus AvGENER, H.— West Indian Polychets .. LEFEVRE, Grorce—Arttficial Parthenogenesis in Tinlawcna Sve IzuKa, Agrra— Collateral Budding ina Syllid .. .. 21 «6 oe Lituis, R. S.—Nephridia of Arenicola .. .. .. we Sorsy, H. C.—Heteronereis of Thames Estuary Boun, "G.—Bionomies of Annelids .. a GerrouLp, J. H.— Embryology and Affinities of Sipuneutides ve Satensky, W.— Larva of Echiurus.. . : Dounoxer, H.—Cirrus and Elytron in Aphroditidas Martius, 'L. Coanertr pe—New Species of Oligochzte ee eae ee oe Le) Beet, Nematohelminthes. Souresen, L.—Spermatozoa of Ascaris megalocephala . Pieri, Gino—Cutaneous Infection with Ankylostomum Re Sracvsui, C.—Migration of Trichina Embryos ZieMANN, H.—Death from Infection with Ascaris Marcus, Harry—Rachis Nucleus in Ascaris Corti, E.—Family Mermithide : Pieri, Gino—Notes on Anchylostomum .. Tanteucu, N.— Biology of Filaria bancrofti, “Cobbold x Mayer, ALFReD—Rachis in Ovaries and Testes of Nematodes .. .. Srursperc—Anguillula Intestinalis 4°) DO Linstow, von—Ascaris halicoris Porta, A.—Cetacean Echinorhynchi Struckmann, C.—Embryology of Strongylus filaria Griees, R. EF. —Reducing-division in Ascaris Stewart, F. H.—Anatomy of Nematodes ee JAMMES, ie & A. Martin—Conditions of Development in Ascaris vitulorum Marcos, H. Maturation in Ascaris canis “oe ScnoppLer, H.—Oxyuris in Vermiform Appendia sot 08 Smipt, H.—Species of Strongylus in Gibbon .. gi ok he Ravutuer, Max—Structure of Mermis albicans v ep sadr es, Linstow, O. von—New Nematodes and other Parasites Fuurmann, O.—Teniz of Birds of Prey .. «1 sew Platyhelminthes. Piean, M.— Parasitic Turbellaria .. Vorat, WaALTER— Migrations of Planarians i: in Mountain Streame CY a cy 8) oe 'e) .8 (e anes 8. . Sieve 8.) 16iecer- Gale CONTENTS, STOPPENBRINE, F'.—Hffect of Starving on Planarians .. .. «6 «6 + Herzie, E. M.—Sexual Organs of New Polyclad ene A core ao. 9 ee Busson, Bruno—Terrestrial Planarians ag' ¢ ac) orm poo. “ae JOHNSTONE, Jas.—Parasites of Fishes .. 1. ++ +e 08 «6 oe oe Looss—New Bilharzia in Man Seeeseh, itty Oe Oana SRE Clepin Miaet Eres CuoLopKovsky, N.— Scolex of Idiogenes RW in cob aoe a) 68) Sor Pinter, Tu.—Cestode Studies dee arn NCC CIND OS woot Eo in: | 00: © oc Bouraquin, J—Mammalian Cestodes .. «sss we we wet Linton, H.— Cestodes from a Porpotse .. «2 . «+ co «» oo Kowa.ewsk1, M.—Helminthological Studies .. .. 2 +1 ee ee we GraFr, L. von—Turbellaria Acoela Sod: Site has mien she thee Sounewer, Guipo—Origin of Species in CT atalino ZSCHOKKE, F.—Dipylidium caninum in Man 60.) 00! “Gus (loo! Moc Lutuer, A.—Origin of Gonoductsin Platodes .. .. «6 «+ +s Heymann, Grorc—New Distomide from Chelonians .. Kuen, W.—New Distomide from Rana are ue Seurat, L. G.—Pearl-Producing Cestode eRe EME core) Soy mie Mrazex, Au.—Tenia acanthorhyncha, Wedl. AS ne Vie Mie TN, le dee Wor, R.— Life-History of Cyathocephalus truncatus .. SPENGEL, J. W.—Monozvie Nature of Cestoda ZscuoKKE, F.—Distribution and Geological Age of Genus Oochoristica Lithe . Nicoui, W.—Trematodes of Bivalves nO feanod toc) Mod Witneiay, J.—Excretory System in Fresh-water Triclads So sakbo polls pe SeKera, Emit—Autogamy in Rhabdocelids .. oe KEes.e, F., & F. W. Gamp_te—Zoochlorelle of Convoluta roseafensi oc VAYSSIERE, "A.—Antarctic Rhabdocelid .. 0 wee si Hi tec LaiDLaw, F. F. -—Deep Sea Nemertines .... 20 Rosserer, T. B.—Sexual Organs and Development of ¢ w | Tapeworm ne oe 3 New Species of Tapeworm eo \ boos) ae Nicot, W.—Some New and Little-known Trematodes. 1. wwe ue Tennant, D. H.—Life-History of a Trematode of the Oyster .. .«. Scuaar, H.—Structure and Development of Cysticercus .. .. «6 we Funrmany, O., & J. Bourquin—Studies on Tapeworms .. .- +s we SaBrazés, J., & orHERS—Motility of the Echinococcus Scolex 5c JANIOKI, C. v.—Mammalian Cestodes .. Sep Rach eoooaios sO Kaprocz, B.— Polyonchobothrium polypteri Leydig SQ. Ro. Roun” bite Bp Woo ttey, P. G.—Schistosoma japonicum in the Philippines oo ce Haswe.y, W. A.—Studies on Turbellaria .. : DO. oo) oe WARREN, "E.—Notes on Convoluta roscoffensis Graf NO 2 ok gone dal eto Boumic, L.—Triclad Studies ... Nets 1st Bressiavu, E.—Fresh-water Species of Polycystis .. ; oc ScuocKaeRrr, R.—Maturation and Fertilisation in Thysanozoon ‘brocchi. .. MicoLeTsky, H.—Nervous and Excretory lunges of Fresh-water Triclads Jousin, L.—Bathypelagic Nemertines .. BA Wcom nh (oo. be oot Incertz Sedis. WELLER, Stuart—New Brachiopod .. aN! Soc. ¥ Gn | do. ©0t Ennriques, P.— Oscillating Circulation in Pianta | | det ae eae Yatsu, N.— Young Discinisca .. CoM ote Mode oe LEBEDINSKY, J.—Development of Pedicellina echinata .. .. aa f 80 Scueporierr, A.—Structure of Cephalodiscus Summer, H. W.—Peculiar Variation of Terebratula transversa Sowerby .. Cuapman, F.—Devonian Spirifers .. O5° Jon Gos no. Ge LANKES?ER, EK. Ray—New Species of Cephalodiseus Bote con, oa Goby ish Lane, W. D.—Reptant Eleid Polyzoa .. .. BAU Faae dao) ito Mee Sumer, H. W.—OUld Age in Brachiopods .. Boe | BSS kc Mesnit, F., & M. CauLLery—Life- History of Orthonectids .. .. Bass.Er, Ray S. —Ordovician and Silurian Bryozoa.. .. 6. 22 we Pace, R. M.—Development of Flustrella hispida “ Fabricius) “< bn Biocumann, F perc ros of the Valdivia and Gauss Expeditions 5c Soueporierr, A —Norwegian Actinotrocha and the Affinities of Phoronis oe XxX CONTENTS. Rotifera. BravcuampP, P. ppe—Male of Eosphora digitata : Retro-Cerebral Organ in Rotifera LAUTERBORN, R.—WNorthern Marine Rotifers .. : Huava, 8. —Conochiloids, New Genus of Rotifers.. WEsENBURG-LUND, C.—Rotifera in Iceland .. .. DAA Ronse aor Kir«man, Hon. T.—Second List of Rotifera ‘of Natal. (Plate XIT.) Morray, JAmMes—Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area bar, poate RovsseEer, C. F.—Rotifera of Kew Gardens ms eee O. I1—Marine Rotifera of Norway FREEMAN, R.—Rotifera of Norfolk . 53 a Bastian, H. Coartton—Ciliated Infusorians within "Eggs ‘of Rotifer ee RovsseLer, C. F.—Contribution to our Knowledge of the Rotifera of South Africa Beavcuamp, P. Marais pE—Retro-Cerebral Organ in certain Rotifers : Morray, JAMES, & RarraELe Isseu—New Rotifers .. Mornay, J. ome Rotifera of the Sikkim Himalaya (Plates XVIIL, XIX. ) Wester, EK. T.—Rotifera from Indo-China, Sumatra and Java, ete. .. - Echinoderma. PIETSCHMANN, VIKTOR—Azial Organ and Ventral Blood Spaces in Asterids .. VicutiER, C. —Parthenogenesis in Sea-Urehin Ova : ae GopLewskI, E., jun.— Hybridisation of Sea-Urchin and Comatula ac Krerniz, E.— Muscles of Pedicellarix Perrier, Remy—Antarctic Holothurians REICHENSBERGER, A.—Structure of Pentacrinus Decorus Borcker, E. —Limnocodium in Munich Botanic Gardens .. BarRTeExts, Pa.—Skin-Glands of Echinaster Peter, Kart—Modifications in Development of Sea-Urehins REICHENSBERGER, A.—Anatomy of Pentacrinus Kauter, R.— Antarctic Echinoderms Woop.anp, W.— Holothurian Spicules or haa 2 toe Cuuss, G. C.—Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon .. Meyer, R.— Nervous System of Asteride KorHuer, R., & C. Vansy—Peculiar Larval Asterid .. TayLor, T. Grivrira— First Recorded Occurrence of Blastoidea in New South Wales Brcuer, §8.—New Brood-nursing Synaptid Coelentera. HAteEz, P.—Rheotropism of Hydroids... .. . .. «oo «2 « oe Dawyporr, C.—New Pelagic Celenterate By 20 Woopiann, W.—Spicule Formation in Aleyonium . Sn Hickson, 8. J.. & Heren M. Exeranp—Stylasterina of Siboga Expedition ne PRATT, Epirn M. —Ceylonese Aleyoniidz 2 HI, M. D.—Maturation of Ovum in Aleyonium digitatum Gorvon, Marta M. Ocinvie—Lime-forming Layer of the Madreporarian Polyp «. CARLGREN, Oskar—Ciliary Currents in Actiniaria and Madreporaria ets teste Hatt, T. S.—Victorian Graptolites .. sre Wie ce caiiets ANNANDALE, N.—New Species of Hydra Maas, Orro—Medusx from Amboina .. Wo.rteEreck, R.— Ontogeny and Interpretation of Siphonophore Colony Pratt, Epitx M.—Dvgestion in Alcyonaria .. VERSLUYS, J peer ee on Primnoidz .. pen Ogee chk OC MENNEKEING, F.—Sclerites and Canals of Primnoids 1.0. we oe Struper, ToH.— Axis of Aleyonarians : Hauiez, P.—Rheotropism in Hydroids and Bugula Browne, BE. T.—Fresh-water Medusa in River Niger .. Borcker, V.—Limnocodium at Munich.. Manrrtin, ‘José Roya y—Free- -Living Variety of “Adamsia rondeletié CONTENTS. Torrey, H. B.—Californian Shore Anemone.. .. .» «+ ++ es we we Dourrpen, J. E.—Role of Mucus in Corals Kixentaan, W ._—Jupanese Alcyonarians Heatu, Harotp—New Species of Semper’s Larva ‘fron om the ‘Galapagos Islands Torrey, H. B., & ANN Martin—Sexual sig ie a in ss aa Stmpson, J. J-—Structure of Isis Hippuris : ne Prarsg, A. §.—Reactions of Tubularia crocea Warren, E.— New Natal Hydroids Bena tae. ooh At JenninGS, H. S.— Behaviour of Sea Anemones... $5) pe VaueHan, T. WayLanp—Madreporaria Collected by the‘ Albatross’... DvuERDEN, J. E.—Septa of Rugusa .. .. ts soe VERSLUYS, J., jun.— New Type of Aleyonarian Harms, W. —Structure of Spongodes ob Hickson, Sipney J.—Precious Corals 3 at Tuomson, J. Artuur, & W. D. Henperson— Viviparity in 1 Aleyonacea sie Gravisr, Co.— New Type of Virgularid eee ee a Mobility of Virgularids .. .. .. Tornaquist, Sv. Leonn.—Studies on Graptolites .. Porifera. KirkKpPaTRICK, R.—Oscules of Cinachyra ply OA Rane Waste oep aerars Ba~ stat y Pele Studies in Spicule Formation sic Vosmaer, G. C. J.,.& H. P. Wissmann—Structure coe the Sty tyes 4 of ethya ae CHAPMAN, F.— Genus Receptaculites . Barr, L.—New Silicious Sponges Urzan, F.— Californian Sponges ANNANDALE, Netson— Bengal Variety 0 of Spongilla lacustris from Brackish Water ToPsENT, E.—New Clionid .. be poe” Vente ne THoMson, J. Artuur, & J. D. Fivprs—Antarelic Awinellid 1. 1. Protozoa. Scuneiper, K. C.—Structure and Movements of Revonaete anh youttnea* mb Martini, E. —Observations on Arcella Vulgaris 36 PROWAZEK, S.—Entameba Buccalis Yer. toa GOs Metre Abo urna yp Oe LESAGE, oe Aniehe of Dysentery .. SUT Se ALL ea oaie betel EARLAND, ArrHuR— Foraminifera of Shore-Sand of Sussex - Morray, ‘Grorce—New Ri.abdosphere .. 4 EnriQueEs, P.— Alleged Senile Degeneration in Praca 9 », Alleged Senile Degeneration in hea Fos, Anna—New Flagellate Parasites . Levatini, C.—New Flagellate Parasite of Bombys mort PROWAZEK, S.—Flagellate Parasites. us Epmonp anv SeRGENT—Trypanosome of ‘El-debab- ear oe Favre&-Fremizt, E.—New, Vorticellidz Ac aoleaol oo CRAWLEY, Howarp— Inter-relatenships of the Sporozoa PON ho. «Oe JOSEPH, H.—New Species of Chloromyzum .. «2 ++ we we ee wet Bravuut & LoEper—Glycogen in Sporozoa .. «1 ee ee we eee Scuuserc, A.—Cilia and Trichocysts .. .. «1 ~-» se «2 «+ oe Ropertson, MurieL—Pseudospora volvocis .. .. «+ «2 ae we Byuorr, K.—Trypanosoma of Rat .. ce eat ccial) Neuaeane Reis eater Gotpscum1DT, R.—Chromidia of Protozoa .. .. «2 ++ +8 ows Penarp, E Studies on Sarcodina.. . A Sea me Nos | ear Srrone, R. P.—Pathology of Balantidium Coli... onl et els Nortatu, G. H. F., & G. 8. Granam- Sarmn—Piroplasma Caine Rie rtet oe Ross, P. H. —Piroplasma in Monkey .. Eeelict Soe Aum c GA ois Faurt-Fremiet, E.—Structure of Chitoplaane ivy Protonoasenes ty, jokes RHUMBLER, L.— Ameboid Movements .. ae _ Woonrurr, LoranpE Loss—Life-History of Hypotrichous Tnfusoria VersLuys, J.—Conjugation in Infusoria oe Kounster, J., & Cu. paneer | rophoplages Spherules in 1 Ciliata . 5) 56 otc Koro1p, C. A.—New Periditd > as WaM ale et ees peel, se Ute Xxli CONTENTS. Kororp, C. A.—Structure of Gonyaulax tptacantia eee ee ers RosenFELD, A.— Flagellates in Human Alimentary CONAL 5 :aesm neues Preirrer, C.—Flagellata in Melophagus ovinus .. fer vrae Koos, R. -_Distinctions between Species of Trypanosoma... CasTELLANI, ALDo, & ArTHUR F. WILLEY—Ceylonese Hematozoa . Laveray, A., & Lucer—Hematozoa from Partridge and Turkey Lizz, Max—Babesia.. .. os Cavuurry, M., & FELIx Mesniu—Afiinities of Haplosporidia be tla ae ‘A. —Hemosporidia of Bats .. Perrin, W. 8.—Life-History of Pleistophora periplanete, Lutz and Splendore Lecer, L., & E. Hesse— Wall of Myxosporidian Spores CépEps, Castmtr— New Microsporidian from Loach Brasit L.—Reproduction of Monocystid Gregarines Eleutheroschizon duboscqi,a new Sporozoon .. .. «2 «e BERnsTEIN, J. M.—Phagocytosis of Malarial Crescents. (Plate XVI.) .. Borcert, A.—Atlanticellide aby Spe Sein Gale aes Rs eames Souvize, F. E.—Xenophyophorz .. Lister, aa. —Dimorphism of English Nummulites .. Scuvuze, F. E., & Hans THiERFELDER—Barium Sulphate in a a Rhizopod Wooprurr, L. re —Life-History of Bape Selig KEPNER, W. A. —Leptophrys .. .. 5 x Entz, Guz, jun.—Studies on Bering a LAVERAN, A.—Identity of Surra and Mbori .. SrzGEL, J.—Parasite of Acute Exanthema : Perrin, W. 8.—Life-History of Trypanosoma balbianii Rogers, L .—Development of Hepatomonas of Kala-azar : Minouiy, EB. A., & H. B. hanna aa 2 from Mucous Membrane of Human Septum nast 50 ig Lael Maver an Wooncock, H. M. — Observations on Gr egarines Smitu, G.—Castration due to Gregarines .. Pernt, W. S.—Structure and Life-History of Pleistophora ne planeta. THIESING, C.—Spirochete pallida and Syphilis .. .. PEARL, R.—Biometrical Study of Conjugation in Paramecium... ELLERMANN, V.—Rhizopoda in Human Spinal Fluid.. VassaL, J. J .. & OTHERS—T rypanosome of Horse.. NIcou.e, C., & C. Comre—Spirillum of Bat Licer, L. —Myzxosporidium of Trout .. 5 Casu, James, & JoHN Hopkinson—British Fresh-water Rhizopods : ScHRODER, OLaw—Antarctic Protozoa re Seas 33 New Species of Cytocladus Lor, J. E.—Acanthocystis pertyana Drcen, ALBERT—F'unction of Contractile Vicente c Som Lc 900 a Alveolar Structure of Infusorians .. .. se we we LAvUTERBORN, R.—New Chrysomonad Genus . 5c LaackmMAnn, Hans—Reproduction of Tintinnoder .. oc Kunst Ler, J., & Cu. GinesteE—Modifications ws Cytoplasm of Opaina ee STEMPELI, W.—Observations on Volvo... ae Wooncocg, A. M.— Hemoflagellata 56 AUERBAOH, M.—Myxobolus from Head of Haddock RoBERTSON, MurieL— Blood-inhabiting Protozoa.. Lzcer, Louis—New Myxosporidian from the Tench Laveran, A.—New Trypanosome Roux, G., & L. Lacomme—Spleen Emulsion as an n Antagonist of Nagana Trypano- somes Introduced into Dogs .. Sus KrzysZTALowIcz, E'r., & M. SrepLEcKI—Life- history of Spirochata pallida Fantuam, H. B.— The Genus Piroplasma 36 : WaRREN, 01 —Myxosporidian in South African Rotifer PAGE 321 - 321 321 321 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 323 323 323 415 448 449 449 449 449 450 450 450 450 451 — 451 451 451 452 452 452 557 557 557 557 558 679 680 680 680 680 681 681 681 681 681 681 682 682 682 682 682 683 683 683 CONTENTS, BOTANY. GENERAL, Including the Anatomy,and Physiology of Seed Plants. Cytology, including Cell-Contents. Mano, T. M.—Relation of Nucleus and Chromosomes... Bereus, J.— Achromatic Spindle of the Heterotypic Division Beraus, J., & D. M. Morrier — Heterotypic Division : GUILLIERMOND, A.—Karyokinesis in the Ascomycetes . Davis, B. M.—Studies on the Plant Cell SWELLENGREBEL, M.—Nuclear Division in Yeast . MeEREscHKOWSEY, C.—Nature and Origin of Chromatophores BIBLIOGRAPHY .. . 2 eo0 He Ricuter, O. —Micro-chemistry .. : Wutrr, T.—Protoplasmic Continwity 3 ee BLACKMAN, VY: B&G €: Fraser—Secuality of “Ascomycetes 50 s Sexuality of Uredinez Farmer, J. B. & A.C. Moorr—Nuclear Division in Renee; BIBLIOGRAPHY .. 5r Srockarp, C. — Cytology of " Nectar-Glands of Vicia Faba . Kraskovits, G.—Cell-division in Gidogonium GessarD, C., & T. ZELLNER—Chemistry of Fungi WULFF, THORILD—Studies of Protoplasmic Continuity Structure and Development. Vegetative. Tittman, O. —Hmbryo Sac and Embryo of Cucumis sativus .. Tison, A.—Mechanism of the Fall of certain Terminal Buds TizGcHEM, Px. van—Winged Stele in some Lequminosx Sarton, A.—Investigations on the Anatomy of Allied Plants bos See JEFFREY, EK. C., & M. A. CorysLer—Structure of Cretaceous Pine-avood 20 MiyaKxe —Spermalozoids of Cycas 20 OC Reproductive. CamMPBELL, D. H.—Studies on the Aracez : LopriorE, G.—Microspores of Araucaria ‘Bidwillii Marre, E. —Anatomy of the Flower of the Umbelliferze Sonarrnir, E.— Anatomy of Seeds of Acanthacez.. .. Mo.uiarbD, M.—WNutrition of Plants in absence of Carbon Dioxide BERNARD, "NozL—Symbiosis of Orchids and Fungi Pou.ocx, J. B.—Pollen-Grain of Picea excelsa Beer, R.— Development of the Pollen-Grain and Anther in ‘Onogracese Re ieee Physiology. Nutrition and Growth. REYNOLDS, J.—Germination of Seeds of the Castor-Oil Plant 5 tot CHARPENTIER, P. G.— Formation of Oxalie Acid by Sterigmatocystis nigra Trenovux, 0.—Organic Acids asa Source of Carbon in Algz Ursprune, A.— Ascent of Sap eee AST), &. OC: GT, WisersoN_“Teuneien of Silica in the Nutrition of Cereals Jost, L _—Physiology of Germination of Pollen Xxili 187 455 XXIV CONTENTS. PAGE Paut, H.—Effect of Calciwm Salts on Sphagna .. wel eee eo) Wao HEINZE, BrRTHoLp—Fungi in Relation to Atmospheric "Nitrogen =a) lee tae aoe Baur—Chlorosis in Malvacez .. ae heen ety, oe. cision eigen Mee ae Marcuat, Ex. & M.—Starch in the Bryophyta sie) Meee teen” leah eee he etcetera Nemec, B.— Direction of Growth in Hepatics .. Apeeouco. co. Sal Pavarino, L ST nicaieuias in Leaves attacked by Peronospora . as) Ge ae OUI BIBLIOGRAPHY .. Jo ceo Lasse, E.— Micro- organisms as Aids to Digestion ‘ in Drosera rotundifolia Beet sn ile Méttzr, A.—Mycorhiza and Nitrogen Assimilation .. .. .. «6 oe «2 «+ 686 Irritability. Preece, G. J., & Fitora A. Ranvo.px—Irritability in Algae .. ere. 8 Ewart, A. J.,& Jessie 8. Bayuiss—Galvanotropic Irritability of Roots 2. cout: Lerivre, J uLEs—Lffect of Light on Green Plants in absence of Carbon-diowide .. 456 Bois, D., & J. GaLLaup—Modifications of Tropical Plants in aes seis 456 Wiz.er, A.—Action of Sulphur-Dioxide on Plants... oc oe OO FuLron, Harry R., & M. Racinowski—Chemotropism of Fungi oe -» 457 ERRERA, L.— Hygroscopicity as a Cause of Physiological Action at a Distance is) 1086 Chemical Changes. Kerean, P.— The Chemistry of some Common Plants . sie, ee) “ac: Dove! pres) ace nena SouHELLENBERG, H. C.—Action of Fungi on Cellulose... oo: oeag Henry, T. A., & S. J. M. AuLD—Probable Existence es Emulein in Yeast oe | or era BIBLIOGRAPHY oe so heen RorHert, W. — Behaviour of Plants towards ‘Aluminium IIE aesoy coco de Kunze, Gustav—Acid Excretion of Roots and Fungi : 458 Fitcu, Rusy— Action of Insoluble Substances in ic: ying the Het ee Deleterious Agents .. .. aa ieee 686 Dunstan, WYNDHAM, & oTHERS—Cy yanogenesis in Plants os. Wee © fie Neocon feet eee mc ea ZELLNER, 5 .—Fat-splitting Ferment of the Higher Fungi .. .. «2 «se 0s «e 687 General. Warson, D. M. S.—On a “ Fern” Byoongim from the Lower Coal Measures oi Shore, Lancashire. (Plates 1,11, U1.) .. .. oe 1 Riotey, H. N.—Dispersal of Seeds by Wind... sien (valet [hele biok, WS IGew a psa LMejon gee mamma THISELTON-DyeErR, W. T., & oTHERS—Chinese Flora .. .. «2 0 «se oF «o 40 Baker, J. G., & oTHeRs-—Flora of Tropical Africa .. cht Lay JACKSON, Daypon, & C. M. ScunemEr—Botanical Glossary and Encyclopedia oS BIBLIOGRAPHY .. 46 Scott, D. H.—The President's Address : Life and Work of Reinard Renault. @lates1V; V-))- = ae 129 Prancer, R. Lt. — Irish Topographical Botany eye teil Musi" selss piles ve 5) (ot eC LCT Miuuspauen, C. F. & Agnes CoasE— Yucatan Plants | 255. he -- 328 BIBLioGRAPHY Et aieh) paie'h! lise | eee area souls ote em Bonnier, G. —Colour a as an n Attraction for Bees aC Prmeeceroe tos ton ais Scort, D. H.—On the Structure of some Carboniferous Ferns eee woo. co) cc LS: Noui— Graft Hybrids... 3 aa) | Cyeait! cow | bss) 1 si om OE VILLANI, ARMANDO—Nectaries of Crucifere we.) clea, vee’. eae pe lore eat ate ne aT Kanes; G.—Variation of Flowers ... +. sx sa) ces) en es Dee leet a Ceremncton Pouacct, G.—Preserving Plants .. ere toe aod.) oe. A Hemstey, W. B.—Julianiace, a New Family of Seed-plants OO Cee EG co do er/ CRYPTOGAMS. Pteridophyta. BIBLIOGRAPHY .. Soe lesen se Fase wis (non fet HaBERLANDT, G.—Chloroplast i in Selaginella acPeBASCUMR Sie iniveies isis, cNe es MmStcmmenneTeS Lyon, H. L.—New Genus of Ophioglossaces 65 as ss es) wu (ama oe ee CONTENTS. Unvrrwoop. L. M.—Alcicornium .. .. « Ciutr, W. N.—Notes on American Ferns BIBLIOGRAPHY .. A PELOURDE, F. —Anatomy of Ferns .. Fiepor, W. —Regeneration of the Lamina in “Scolopendrium Doranp, E. J—Sporangial Trichomes .. Racrsorsk1, M.—Allantodia Davenrort, G. E., & C. A. WeaTHERBy—Botr yehium PAMPANINI, R.— Cheilanthes Szovitsti Unprrwoop, L. M.—Genus Stenochlena 3 Lycopodium in the American Tropics Curist, H., & H. Levertte—Chinese Ferns .. .. Curist, H. —Ferns and Fern-allies of Costa Rica Unberwoop, L. M., & orHERs—North American Ferns BisseEw1, C. H. —The Fern Flora of Connecticut Davenport, G. E., & M. agar cael oy Saale Ferns BIBLIOGRAPHY .. Sat os Bruoumann, H —Botr -ychium Lunaria . ; Gi.pert, B. D., & orHers—North American Ferns NS Maxon, W. B-“iratie Ferns .. CHRISTENSEN, C.— Index Filicum BIBLIOGRAPHY Kuveu, A. B., & orHERs—N. orth mericin Ferns Hirronyuvs, ce & oTHERS—South American Ferns .. Matsumura, J. — Japanese Ferns .. Maren, J. H. —Norfolk Island Ferns PAMPANINI, R.—Rare Form of Asplenium Ruta-muraria :. Stosson, M.—How Ferns Grow is Scut1ze, W.—Structure of Tree-Ferns .. Kupper, W.—Bud-formation on Fern-leaves .. Scunarr, K.—Systematic Value of Sporangium- -wall .. Zorr, W.—Gold and Silver Ferns .. oA SyKzs, M. G.—-Tracheids in Node of Equi etum .. CAMPBELL, D. H.— Germination of Ophioglossum Speriicu, A.—Structure of Stolons of Nephrolepis Arser, E. A. N.—Past History of Ferns ac Hit, T. G.—Parichnos Scor, D. H.—Lepidodendron obovatum Scort, R.—Megaspore of sain ei ope BIBLIOGRAPHY .. : CHRISTENSEN, C.— Index filicum sa 55 Baker, J. G., & C. H. Wriagur—Chinese Ferns a Pawacky, J. — Ferns of Madagascar es CopELAND, KE, B.—Ferns-of the Philippine Islands Cortes, F.—Sicilian Ferns .. Ripvuey, H. N.—Ferns of Christmas Island . Eaton, A. A.—Ferns of Florida ty ss Bryophyta. FieiscHer, M.—New Families of Mosses = New Malayan Mosses .. Carpor, J.—Mosses of Formosa Herzoe, T.—Moss-Distribution in Baden Fora exsiccata bavarica .. ar Cszrey, A.—Hygroscopic Properties ‘of Mosses .. QUELLE, F.— Biology of Polytrichacex .. : Lacouture, Ca —Analytical eee to the ? Hepatics BIBLIoGRAPHY : Carpot, J _—Antaretic Mosses ... Lorske, L.— Variability in Philonotis Mi.urr, K.—European Hepaticz .. ve XXV1 CONTENTS. Hompsrey, H. B.— Development of Fossombronia.. .. CLEMINSHAW, E.., & orHERs—British Notes and Records .. Weymoutu, W. A.—Tasmanian Moases.. ScuirFner, V.—Bryological Fragments .. BIBLIOGRAPHY Nicwo.son, W. E., & ‘ornErs—Notes on British Mosees Kinpsere, N. C. — Notes on European Mosses Carport. J.— Antarctic Mosses .. : Dustn, P.—ArctictMosses.. .. BROTHERCS, V. F., & E.G. Panis—Mosses of ‘Asia Gyorrry, I. — Moses Of ARGargye) <5 sai) le ode Gin, A. CasarEs—Spanish Mosses .. . Houzincer, J. M., & A. J. Grour—North American Mosse Mey avy, C., & E. BALLE—Notes on Sphagnum CHITTENDEN, F. J.—Sphagnum in Essex Saumon, E.8., & C. H. Wricht—Flora of Kew Gardens y Meytay, C. ae Form of Orthotrichum cupulatum .. Brcqu anal P.—Germination of Moss Spores .. : GiLKINET, A.—Seruality of Spores in Dioicous Mosses Maocvicar, 8. M.—Key to British Hepatics .. Pearson, W. H.—New British Hepatic.. Incuay, W., & orneRs—British Hepatics Evans, A. W.—Hepaticz of Bermuda .. .. .. .. 33 e Hepatice of New England .. .. .. “= Hepaticx of Puerto Rico bade % Paris, KE. G.—Hepatice of New Caledonia .. Lewis, C. E—Riccia.. .. an 5 Miier, K.—Genus Scapania.. : BERKOVEC, Anna—Regeneration of Liverworts BIBLIOGRAPHY .. GOEBEL, K. — Morphology of Australasian Muscines Scuoene, K.—Moss Rhizvids ScHIFFNER, V.—WMoss Galls : MONKEMEYER, W.—Abnormal Moss- Capsules Mauneu, J.—Subterranean Moss-F lora of France . Rotu, G.—European Sphagna.. .. : Parnrer, Wi aia ESB: SLATER—British Muscines: . - Geures, A., & C. LAUBINGER—German Mosses WARNSTORF, C.—Mosses of Mark Brandenburg GLoWACKI, J.— Austrian Mosses : Be Carport, J. "Antarctic Mosses .... 46 Paris, E. G.—Muscinee of French Guiana .. 99 » African Mosses .. : Wears WW); 5. E: WuitELeccr—Australian Mosses Brirron, E. Gs & orHers—North American Mosses Paris, E. G. —Index of Mosses.. .. : ALNELL, H. W _—Jungermannia barbata and its Allies MEYLAN, oe —Hepatics of the Jura a ee CLAASEN, E .—North American Hepatics Beet ‘8c BIBLIOGRAPHY .. ae Brotuertsy, V. F.— — Classification of Mosses .. Cocks, L. J.—New British Mosses .. Srepuant, F.—New Plagiochila from Ireland Duncan, J. B.— Worcestershire Mosses .. .. «- oe IncHam, W.— Yorkshire Bryophyta 2 : Haynes, C. C., & orHERS—North American Bryophyta Miuuer, K. — Hepaties of Middle picks : Herzoc, T.—Mosses of Baden.. .. CULMANN, P.— Mosses of Zur ich Houer, A.—Moss-flora of Tyrol ScHIFFNER, V., & J. Bau MGARTNER — New Aeerean Monses ScHIFFNER, V. "_Hepaticee of Dalmatia .. PAGE 191 191 191 191 192 332 332 332 333 333 333 333 334 334 334 335 335 335 335 336 336 336 336 337 337 337 337 338 338 338 460 461 461 461 462 462 462 463 463 463 463 464 464 464 464 464 465 465 465 465 567 567 568 568 568 568 569 569 569 569 569 570 CONTENTS. Marovsouer, F.—Bohemian Mosses .. .. .- ~GyorFry, I.— Hungarian Mosses sis Mieuiorato, E.—Hepatics of Naples .. ins NEGRI, ee eee OjsSorrentoaee mia beet Merits Zopva, G.—Sicilian Bryophytes 7 Milaatstens eas Dostn, P.—Brazilian Hepatics .. Maren, J. H.—Bryophytes of Norfolk Island STePHANI, F., & orHers—Japanese Muscinex WARNSTORF, C.—New Species of Sphagnum.. Lorsker, L.—European Species of Philonotis.. ASCHIFFNER, V.—Riccardia major Ede al Cooperate StTepHanti, F.—Lophocolea .. «ws we we Covuins, J. F.—Mounting Mosses - Buoptg, L. A.—Monecism of Funaria .. . CAMPBELL, D. H.—Multiple Ee aubnes in Anthoceros Brrr, R. —Spores of Riccia glauca toe ic Warnstorr, C.—Gemmez of Amblystegium x Hacen, 1.—WMonstrous Peristomes .. .. ScuHiFFNER, V.— Variation of Form in the Bryopliyta. QUELLE, F. —Barbula fiorti : Broruervs, V. F.—Mosses of New Caledonia |. Paris, E. G.—Mosses of Tonkin and Cuyenne .. Rwwiey, H. N.—Muscinex of Christmas Island BRrorHERvs, V. F.—South American Mosses . Haynes, C. C., & orHeRs—North American Musciner Incuam, W.— Yorkshire Mosses Bt ert Ser nae pa G1BBS, T.—Luminosity DPS oo 05 6a OS Stirton, J.—New Scotch Mosses .. .. 1. os : Dou, L.—French Hepaticzx CuLMANN, P.—Swiss Muscinex Ttsrad eee eis Kern, F.—Muscinee of the Dolomites .. .. -. Jaap, O., & orHERS—German Mosses Gyorrry, L., & E. ZepeRBavER—Auslro- Hungarian Mosses Hacen, ite & OTHERS— Various Muss Notes .. earl Peirce, G. J.—Anthoceros and its Nostoc Colonies SrepHant, F'.—Lophocolea i A ckiy elmer a oe Thallophyta. Alge. ‘OLrmanns, F.—Morphology and Biology of Algz.. .. ‘Couns, F. 8.— Phycological Notes of the late Tsaac Holden Brvan, D. W.—Seaweeds.. Tecuer, C.—Effect of Bora on Marine Algz.. CHALoN, J.—Method of Drying Algzx speedily x Algz at the Caen Herbarium BranvD, F.—Cyanophycez.. .. ‘West, W. & G. S.—- Fh resh-water Algz from ti the 1 Orkneys and Shetlands Gran, H. H.—Diatoms : LAaRGAIOLLI, V.—Diatoms of the Trentino Panroosek, J.—Fossil Diatoms .. 5 Scumip._p, W.—A New Genus of Plankton Alga ee JORGENSEN, E.—Protista Plankton . = SavvaGceEau, C.—Dictyotacex and Aglaozonia : TswetT, M.—On the Colouring Matter in Phzophycer fe Lioyp, dc —Periodicity of the Sexual Cells in Dictyota dichotoma BIBLIOGRAPHY. 25) esi Seeman aes Barrsrs, E. A. L. — British Marine ‘Algae Howse, M. A .—Phycological Studies ee Rosen vINGE, L. K.— Floating Marine Alge .. .. Yenvo, K.—Principle of Systematising Coralline Borz1, A.—_New Genus of Chlorophycee .. : XXVlll CONTENTS. PAGE West, W..& G.S:.—British Desmidiacer (2. 3. ee ee te ee oo en eo Cusumay, J. A.—Desmids of New Hampshire bee co «GH WESENBERG-LuND, C.—Plankton of Danish and Scottish Lakes se Vee), boots eeu Pavittarp, J.— Phytoplankton of Lake Thaw... -» we ae ee we we we | 1986 T ANNER-FULLEMAN, M.—Plankton from Schénenbodensee .. .. .. «» « « 196 Karsten, G.—Phytoplankton of the Antarctic Ocean .. .. «2 ee we we we S198 Petxorr, St.— Bulgarian Alge .. .. .. oe mesa: co ST ENTz, G.—Peridinex denice teen boss a keee) CSO OSs ce tree ca ane ee BIBLIOGRAPHY .. Be eS ae te ae Bouury, Kk.—Fresh- water Alga of the Azores .. Re Ee Se nana ee Algz of South Patagonia wo ee Re al? ion) ae en Fritscu, F. E.—Fresh-water Algz in Kew Gardens .. .. «2 02 eee we BAO Epwarps, A. M.—Bacillariz from Texas and New Mexico PERNA enor os, 2 ul Perit, P., & H. Courret—Diatoms from near Lake ee Ss pele | cine Melton EL Puiu, R. H.—Yorkshire Diatoms .. .. - obs / Ee Vis ee es ee Simons, E. B.—Sargassum filipendula a se. lie! , oon | ieee een Fosiiz, M., & M. A. Howze—New American Coraline e Age ce sa) |e, Whee en JANSE, J. M. —Morphology of Caulerpa .; .. . POMPEY rss 3 oo 23h TOBLER, F.— Regeneration in Polysiphonia .. Pein von. feel Gaiprxoy, M. ep Chromatic Adaptation of Alge.. Premrraeee tie ys BIsLioGRAPHY .. js eel l) ata enn Kou, F. G. —Colowring Matter in the Chiromatophores of D Diatoms PEM ce HS Miu .irr, O.—Pleomorphism of Melosira . .. Pierro: coc ale Fostig, M., & oTumrs—New Coralline Algw.. .. 0 .. 05 00 ce ae ee Fosuirz, M. Remarks on Northern Lithothamnia Pec a CE is A New Squamariacea.. 20 os. as ne se ae oe ete Sauvaceav, C.—Cladostephus verticillatue ’.¢. 20 O.s 6s a ee SVEDELIUS, N.—Distribution of Marine Algz ... Jac Slece iemmeenses Norpstept, O.—Nomenclature of Desmids, and other “Algological Notes... '... owas Meyer, K. ~_Sphzroplea annulina .. . car nes) Seni tee ae ManeEv, J.—Subterranean Algal Flora of Fringe a Brssry, C. E.—Protococcoidex sa! uae ne ae, Ee er West, W. & G. S.—Plankton of some Irish Lakes 93. he oe er BIBLIOGRAPHY .. x TTR ee Couns, F. S.—Nor th American Algz oa ae. Ls keygen Shiite idea KsELLMAN, F. R.—Marine Flora of Jan Mayen.. .. Seer ec cc. 21 ARDISSONE, F., & V. SpineLtti—Marine Algz of the Mediterranean. eG) Dc. Gepp, A. & £. 8.—Marine Algz from New South Wales .. .. .» « «8 ee O16 Lucas, A. H.8.—WNorfolk Island Alge .. .. .. ook?’ cel goes ele ne MATSUMURA, J-—dapanese Algw .. se ee ws ee es INGHAM, W.— Yorkshire Fresh-water Alig® css sc wc “ain, TR We ees Sitrventus, A. J.—Fresh-water Alge from Finland .. .. «2 «- «swe ee = 876 Cusuman, J. A.—New England Desmids .. iy i foes Koczewskt, O. —Mor phology and Biology of Chara delicatula ak bulbillifera A. Braun 577 Roginson, C. B.— North American Charex .. ess byw A Groves, H. & J.—Characexe from the Cape erent wis. 1) bie, | bio 2h gan, Se YAMANOUCHI, S.—Polysiphonia violacea wele ee es) dle ae jig al err Rerzivs, G. — Spermatozoids of Fucacez sof Slab gems ey) eel! Gal) ete eee Tswerr, M —Colouring Matter of ee wa. 6s) oe) Sav) Coe Atte ai” Heypricu, F.—Actinococeus .. .. an” ae, ewes oe) Noe) en ir BRAND, F.Fibres in Cladophora... 2.0 vs. ss se) pee Geet, a) ele er Corron, A. D.—Some Endophytic Algz cc od) ise ne oe Kees.r, F., & F. W. GamMBLE—On “Zoochlorella” in Convoluta .. .. «+ «» 580 Epwarps, A. M.—Fossil Diatoms .. na) odieyt pee oe pte Soler rr OsreNFELD, C. H.—North Atlantic Plankton Sati; wee Wee. apve oun | eee etna Scur6ver, B.—Phytoplankton of Temperate Seas.. .. 1. we we ve we we 8 Fravupe, H.—Baltic Benthos and Plankton .. . zs; ae ast) an eee KerissLer, K. v.—Plankton of Lake Wirth in Cartathia a... 2 ee BIBLIOGRAPHY . aes clk. tee’ ae tare) Re Gomont, M.—How to Collect Algz .. a pepe pak tartinre, (ae. Glvas. | Ue aie ae Coins, F'. S.— Notes on Algzx = Sees Sey: ae Say cl gate Perxorr, S.—Fresh-water Algz of Bulgaria... Slegtdsety give) Re.) ese eek ear CONTENTS. MOREEET, H.—Silictan Algs . 6. os) os ws lea dd) Un Frye, T. C.—Nereocystis Luetkeana .. .. « Srroue.L, W. A.—Constantinea .. sty ae Branp, F. —COladophora crispata and the Section Aigagropila Macnee uses Stites, M. H , & orners— Yorkshire Diatomacez Ab EpWwarps, A. M.— Fossil Diatoms . OR tx oO a! roel Rovers, H.—Polymorphism of Cyanophycez .. 46 Pascuer, A.—Reproduction of Stigeoclonium OstTENFELD, C. H., & C. WESENBERG- Lunp—Icelandic "Plankton Ton, G. B. pa—Grifithsia ETNA ao. oi ipa Ga. Go Ac MAR e rete ys es ahs ke, nok vee. Le Fungi. Woronin, M.—Study of Monoblepharide .. ethene since ag! 6c Marriroio, O.— Underground Fungi of Portugal aSa ed Fac 1, J. Horace—Development of Ascus and Spore- -formition % in Ascomycetes EnGeE ss, C., & R. ApERHOLD—Observations on Claviceps purpurea Goururermonp, A — Conjugation of Yeast-Spores.. .. 5c Sarro, K.—Occurrence of Saccharomyces anomalus in the Brewing of Sake. ENGELKE, C.—Conidial Form of Aspergillus niger VuitLemin, P.—Identity of the Genera Meria and Hartigiella Sema iver alate Eriksson, JAKOB—Origin and Spread of Plant Rusts .. Pol dgoryROU Hecke, Lupwie—Infection of Cereals by the Smut Fungus eieee tak gaere las BreEFre.D, Oscar— Work on Smut Siac Meorratoe Bor 4 DIgTEL, P.—Genus Phragmidium. II. . po. nec Surry, RatpH E.—Asparagus and Asparagus Rusts in 2 California sb eos yoo Mo \ pine, D.—New Genus of Uredinee : ig Ea cane Ss Pooky node ce CLINTON, G. P., & orHers—Plant Diseases .. ‘ Pant Diseases in Britain .. bh, 55 p ADORED web sarabee Som ect h ks Nort, B.—Endophytes of Orchidez .. Sr ecitel yan Zacu, Franz—Case of Symbiosis Cavara, Fr.— Mycological Notes MicHakE., Epm., & B. Sruper-STEINHAUSLIN—G@uide to Fungology.. Moreay, A. P., "& orners—American Mycoloyy .. HOHNEL, Franz v.—Contributions to Mycology Ho.turune, M.—Plant Pathology .. Agteee Larar, F.—Handbook of Technical Mycology co oc BIBLIOGRAPHY 5 5c Perersen, H. E.—Marine Phycomycetes Be Satmon, E. 8., & R. Matre—Studies in Erysiphacez .. McAnpREw, James—Hypocrea riccioidea .. oo Buackman, V. H., & H.C. Fraser—Fertilisation in Spherotheea de) oe Cusont, G. "Biology of Stietis Punizzei.. .. * OsTERWALDER, A.—Sclerotial Disease of For sythia sc Hou.6s, L.—Underground Fungi in Hungary... .. Arxinson, G. F.—Life-History of Hypocrea alutacea .. BLUMENTRETT, Fritz—Aspergillus bronchialis .. .. . 6. +s se oe we Gaxsoro, L.—Hyphomycete Parasitic on the Vine.» \.. we vet Farneti, Ropotro—Disease of Pear-Trees PEGLION, Virtor1io—Rhacodium Cellare as a Hemiparasite Noack—Biology of Helminthosporium gramineum Eriksson, JAcos—Vegetative Life of the Rust Fungus.. Vestercren, I., & orHers—Uredinew .. ve McAtping, D. — Native or Blackfellow’s Bread Lusmorr, L. V.— Distribution of Dry-rot in Russia .. Tuomas, FR.—Growth of Fairy Rings : VUILLEMIN, P.—Parasites of Lime Trees An) ce TUZSON, J.—Diseases of the Red Beech... .. 2. as Suiepy, A. H.— Diseases of Tobacco oa) eka a eS IstvANFFI, Gy DeE— Diseases of the Vine hs Pie Ob Noack, F., & orHers—Plant Diseases ee ee oe oe oe oe eo ee XxX CONTENTS. HEINRICHER, E}.— Witches’ Brooms Saito, K.—Fungus Spores in the Atmoephere 55 | 08 BEIJERINCK, M. W.— Wounds and Gummosis in the Amygdala ac Hocxaur, J.—Poisoning by Fungi... .. . : ia eiohbdoc BIBLIOGRAPHY... ae ot mire 8 faLtmon, EH. 8.— —Urophlyctis Alfalfe. ac Outve, Epear W.—Morphology and Development of Empusa Dop, Pavt—Study of Saproleqniez .. Dancearv—Fertilisation in Mucorint HerricHer, Emin— Witches’ Broom on Cherry Saumon, E. S.—Variation in Phyllactinia corylea ee oe oe Jacosesco, Niconas—New Genus of Parasitic Fungi... .. «. «. ATEINsON, G.—Balansia and Dothichloe Viata, P., & P. Pacortet—Sporulation of Yeasts of Ascomycetous Fungi FUHRMANS, Franz—Nuclear Division in Saccharomyces ellipsoideus I. Hansen Bony, E., & L. Gavrier—Toxin of Axperg:llus fumigatus LAMARLIERE, L. GenEau DE—Deformations caused by Gymnosporangium Keuuerman, W. A., & orners—Uredinee .. RENKAUF-WEIMAR, E.—Tr acya Hydrocharidis Lagerh. Massen, G.—Revision of the Genus Hemileia Berk. .. .. .. EstrEva, D. Jost—Anomalous Fungi .. ae)! ce BrisERINcK, W., & A. Rant—Gummosis in the Amygdale 5 HACKEt, Epvarp—Poisonous Nature of the Lolium Fungus KULIscH, P., & J. Gattaup—Plant Diseases te Oe HO6OuNEL, Franz v.—Mycological Notes .. Trorrer, A.—Microfungi of Galls .. MasszEE, G.—Origin of Parasitism in Fungi... .. «1 +s ae we » Fungiof Kew Gardens .. bea MinOk co. *.de Dvranp, Ieee (og eke Vet Morcan—Systematic Notes Dumsx, P.—Pocket Atlas of Fungi pe ea aia aeeih eA e "5 — Morphological Notes al. opel ae dene dade OOS, Lop Gurcuen, F. Sreinenr, JoseEF— Mushroom Culture JAHN, BIBLIOGRAPHY .. és Buakestes, A. F —Study of Mucorini .. Ramuow, Gustav—Development of T helebolus stercoreus BouLancer, Em.—Germination of Truffle Spores.. .. .. Reum, H.— Submerged Fungus ee TET et Ota Sa Rte he OSTERWALDER: :A;, Gc. OTHERS— Yeasts” <<.) #20. 90) ose eel cee FuHRMANN, FraNz—Nuclear Division in Yeast Lutz, L ZAHLBRUCKNER, A.—A New Lichen avcutae SCHNEIDER, Orro, & Fr. Bupak—Uredinex MoA.pring, D.— Rusts of Australia.. .. Evans, I. B. PoLe—Infection Phenomena in “Uredines Hort, 8.— Disease of Bumboo .. Freeman, E. M.—Affinities of the Fungus de Lolium temulentum TREE Root Rot : Ete WAGES BamBEkKE, Cu. Van—Spores of Lycoperdon 40 Hi—Studvesan Mynomiycetes\ 4) 9s. 9-6 a6 we ee ee ee _—Symbiotie Yeast _.. aS nt toni eed other AR Monremak tint, L.— Influence of Parasites on the Biology of the Host Plant . ss Mauxv, Jacques—Subierranean Fungi .. Correo, M., & orpers — French Mycological Notas tae Lioyp, C. G., & W. W. SrovKnorGER— Mycological Notes BIFFEN, R. H., & orHEers—British Mycology ye Sd isco) o6 6 DAaNGeaRD, P. A.— Ancestors of the Higher Fungi .. .. . oo» Parkin, Joun—Fungi parasitic upon Scale-Insects TuBreur, K. von—Harmful Fungi .. .. 2 02 02 we wee Burak, Fr., & oTHERS— Plant Diseases Sree tas ML iAfete QUEEL. A.¥Rrep—Myzobacteria EE Scr ac’) Gok Be BIBLIOGRAPHY .. Ga": Nos lod ce DancEarD—Nuclear F A a ys in ie Mucorint LaGARDE, J.— Contribution to the Study of the Fleshy Discomycetes a PAGE 205 CONTENTS. Reum, H.—Pyrenomycetes of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland .. .. +. ParovurttarD, Harriot—New Genus of African Fungi VUILLEMIN, Pavt— —Origin of Yeasts : Viata & Pacorrer— Cysts of Gleosporium and their Role in the Origin of Yeasts .. Kuepann, H.—Relation of Fungi imperfecti to mus are VESTERGREN, TycHo—Notable sae Tue Guition, J. M.—Botrytis cinerea .. Gurcuen, F.—Rhacodium cellare .. Fe VUILLEMIN, apie ones Genus of Hyphomycetes an SHEAR, C. re & oTHErRs—l'redinew os Rouuanp, L. ” Notes on Mi ycenastrum corium THom, Cras. —Fungi in Cheese Ripening Nueer, F. W.—Mycological Observations Macenxkovie, Bastt1vs—Destruction of Wood by Fungi Mazimann, & orHers—Notes on Poisonous Fungi Maenin, Ant.—French Mycology . LemmerMann, E.—Fungi on Juncacez .. Bessey, ERNST A’, & J. KR. Sumsrmve—Notes on American Fungi ERIksson, Jaxos—American Gooseberry Mildew in Europe JACZEWSKI, A. DE, & OTHERS—Plant Diseases Merca.r, Haven—Report on the Blast of Rice Brzezinski, M. J— Myxomonus Betz BIBLIOGRAVHY Suita, R. & EK. — Fungus of Economic Importance 5 Rippue, Lincoun Ware —Cytology of the Entomophthoraces Fewitcen, Jon.— Fungus Flora of Luxemburg KosarorF, P.—Biology of Pyronema confluens Tscuermax, E—Ergot .. Opin, G.— Production of Stable Yeasts from Fungi 32 Artur, J. C., & F. D. Kern—North American ep of Peridermium Linpau— Hyphomycetes . KEGEL, WERNER— Fungus Parantie on Elodea McAuping, D.—Australian Rusts - STRAMPELLI, NazARENO— Infection Experiments with Ustilago Carbo JOHNSON, a —Corn Smuts and their Propagation .. Tostas, E.—Abnormalities in Agarics : Maenvs, We. Ner—Form Development in Agarics Bampeke, Cu. Van—New Belgian Bastenoniyects Lioyp, C. G.—Mycological Notes Tylostomer .. Kavreman, C. H. —Mycorhiza-producing Fungus. a BAINIER, G.—Notes on various Fungi : RetssinGer, R.—EHconomic Use of Fungi GUEGUEN, F.—New Fungus Stain .. sie Bork, M., & M. Demance—Notes on Cases of Poisoning by Fung a : ATKINSON, G. F.—Outlnes for the Observation of some of the more Common Fungi Spread of Fungus Diseases by means of Hibernating Mycelium.. sc Kevuerman, W. A., & OTHERS—American Mycology Ferraris, 'EopoRoO, & C MassaLoneo—Italian Fungi ZEvERBAUER, E., & orHERS—Plant Diseases .. BIBLIOGRAPHY . oe oe oe oe oe oe oe ee ee . oo oe oe oe Lichens. Reumu, H.—Bavarian Lichens .. .. «2 «6 oe oe Harmann, J.—French Lichens re we Pacny,G,& F. G. Papuue. seme French Tashenes 3; Cece ac © a :8))(e) «eo. . . . BIBLIOGRAPHY a 5c, Book are atts Jarti, A.—New Lichen Genus et SS ) ta ae ee can he Ses ce Lespain, BouLy DE—F'rench Lichens ae ee HOU ABD .00 STaAHLECKER, IX.—RHesearch on Silicious Lichens BA er : é Zors, W.—Chemistry of Lichens .. .. .» se oe oe oe oe oe ee oe oe . onngakes Car elie) ig ee 6 . XEXIL CONTENTS. PAGE BIBLIOGRAPHY .. .. ais. sural teak ba andere earcto Iai ctomae sama BRanDT, Tuopor—Anatomical Study of Ramalina .. PED Ae eae ise SEY? Zor‘, W.—Biological and Morphological Observations on Lichena. .: 0 ee DaARBISHIRE, O. V.—Lichens of Kew Gardens .. .. . sis Soe) Sa Neeemaeereles Fink, Broce, & R. Hepner Howz—American Lichens PPL BOE Pussies 65 Sas BIBLIOGRAPHY a wae \elel | sem 9) Sia) Capel elon) eles niaiier Rea Eamon MauHev, J ACQUES——Subterranean Tcehenen ale, \) vce) wal, bilberel caieh | ele SP keto = aa era Howe, R. Heser, & oTHERS—American Lichens . we aay es) hee Yee) Reem BIBLIOGRAPHY se Ja (RIES Migaw 4 es) ioe eae Bice a cee aes H ARMAND, Assi—French Lichens . F 5 Vine). bees eee BRUTZELMAYER, Max—Cladonia rangiferina and Cl. basillaris.. 1. .. .. .. 590 Ronogray, P. —Dye- STS An tchens” %.. on ay) \Goed\ eda, fae oe ae BIBLIOGRAPHY. = mertreern to 2. Moneuiion, E.-—French Lichens .. as a 106 Tusevr, Von, & E. ZEDERBAUER—Relation of Lichens to Trees and Soil > ee 0G SMITH, A LorRain— British Cenogoniacez .. us ee oad Soh Ue Hog, Assik—Anatomy of Collema .. oo: | (ag 6% owt Jinshan SANDSTEDE, M.—Cladonias in the Islands of the North Sea wee coe UT Fink, Bruce—Notes on Cladonia .. wel ise “ah ooh eas Merrit, G. K.—* Chemical Tests” in Determining Lichens .. 2 0s BIBLIOGRAPHY dS: | SAP ase tear Peper aetce: pclo Yoy “oteeMlbl iter yo evet Maticcoyh, | cyan canan a Myxomycetes. Napson, G., & A. RarrscHeNKo—Study of Myxomycete .. «2 « oe «8 «« 482 Schizophyta. Schizomycetes. Surrn, R. Greie—Bacillue Indurans ..0 4. 3s ce ee eee we | ww cal CanTacuzenE, J.—Defatted Tubercle Bacilli n2. csn ea lat) oe, Mo.iscH, H.—Bacteria and the Emission of Light 85 K.ue1n, E.— Bacillus Enteritidis, Gaertner, and Bacillus “pseudo- Tuberculosis, Pfeiffer 85 Mavrosannis— Differential Criterion between Cholera Vibrio and certain other Vibrios: the Action of Formalin on their Gelatin Cultures .. .. « -. 89 Winstow, C. E. A., & ANNE F. Rogers—levision of Coccacex sept eee ae (os eo Hiss, H. ~ Classification of Dysentery Bacilli ee. sh ARNOLD, Lro— Diagnostic and Prognostic Significance of Lochial Bacteria Boho els) Gripert, L.—Diagnosis of Bucteria by their Biochemical Functions .. 87 Gorpon, M. H.— Differentiation and Identification of gi sak ana and d Staphylococci 87 SMITH, E. F—Bacillus of the Olive Tubercle... .. ag) tele) Mazr, P.—Microbes in Cheese-Making .. . 33 a oS DIDLakE, M.— Bacillus Producing Red Pigment only 01 on a Single Medium .. .. 88 Scuirr-GrorGini, R.—Tubercular Disease of Olive Trees .. . Bor eee oh eld, Maccutratti, L.—Bacterium Chlorometamorphicum .. Bee cS Russ, V. K.—Anaerobic Organism Resembling the Influenza Bacillus sa ages Ernst, W.—Bacillus Renalis and the pseudo- Diphtheria Bacillus ie Man v3 Sas KARWACKI, L.—Flora of Malignant Growths = Basen EL, toux, L.— Anaerobic Bacteria producing Necrosis and ‘Suppuration é in Cattle .. 90 BARvcHELLO, L.—Intestinal Streptococcus of the Horse .. «2 «1 «2 oe « “90 Cacnerto, J.—Variety of Zoogleic Tuberculosis .. .. «« se ee we we eS Ket, E.—Observation on types of Bacillus Pestis .. .. «2 ee ee ee eS RopeE.ia, A.—Direct Microscopic Preparation of Cheese .. «» « «» « « 92 BAZAEWSEI, S. v—Two New Pigment-producing Bacteria... oe Kern, E.—Influence of Symbiosis on the Virulence of Pathogenic Microbes de SS EHRENBERG, P.— Loss of Nitrogen in Soils .. .. «6 «+ «6 8 oF of «2 Wo BIBLIOGRAPHY... Ee! Damen emanl, os CE Perorti, R. —Oligonitrophil and Mesonitrophil Bacteria Po ae cect og 7 el! Diiccent, M.—Bacteriology of Armenian “‘ Mazun” .. .. 08 « «- « « A211 BERTARELLI, E.—Capsulated Bacilli 211 Marino, M. F.—Action ae Micro- o-organisms 0 on the “Solution of B Blue Agur | in Methy- Alcohol... ZS CONTENTS. XXxlil PAGE Harrison, F. C.—New Chromogenic Slime-producing Organism 5p Paton one Pe oaater Séuncen, N. L.—Bacteria that obtain their Carbon from Methan .. .. «. «. 212 Tersounan, J. Ta.—Bacilli growing on Drigalski-Conradt Nutrient ‘Agar Sot iow eclle: Lounts, F.— Bacterium Agreste Say SOLE DEAR LE Seek Ceccar roy cotwasc! Teka Haass, E.—Actinomycetes se veh Bscatecie sitar, en alee Borint, Aa, & S.J. ZLATOGOROFF—Bacter iology of Marais: Peo Gee MOET FUHRMANN, ‘F.—New Acetic Acid- -forming Bacterium.. .. «. «© « « « 214 HeErzoa, M.— Bacillus aureus fetidus .. . Ie Cee oy eG sey er eRe tae eLO VANSTEENBERGHE, P., & Grysez—Meningococcus sha yah ele eee eee a eae Boxer, 8. —Streptococci and Diplococcit on Blood Media... «we we BOE Sacquerse, E., & F. Coevret—Paratyphoid Bacilli . 355 Prorkowsk1— Differentiation of Bacillus iia and Bacillus faecalis alealigenes 355 Tarozz1, G.—Tetanus Spores .. .. é Me Aceey oo) oS ee FOURNEL, P.—Critical Points of Steel .. ie, sa, ese, pee OL SHEPHERD, E. S:—Alwminium-Zine Alloys 2. 2. “se 2. 0s sees, pee bie SiR Soe wt hen Week eae eas). sty) hie eee eee ee GuiILiet, L.—Special Brasses .. cS Ba se” eae ee GaLLaGHER, F'. K.—The Alloys of Antimony and Tin tis plac) Saty \ Gieot Setapee samme emma SHEPHERD, E. 8.—The Tensile Strength of Copper-Tin ane wait Weiss case native eae mamma “TRON AND STEEL MaGazZINE ” cen vac, h) ees va” yarn GuILLERY—Measurement of the Elastic Limit of Maads 2) oP GuItteT, L.—Nickel-Chromium Steels .. Boe com Eats, Koursatorr & P. LrJeuNnE—Ktching Velocity of “Metallographic Reagents Bo ioe OE CaRPENTER, H. C. H., & orHErs—LIron-Nickel- Ea as aes ein ae +3) eae GOD BIBLIOGRAPHY .. ko dice dene een cate ea JUPTNER, H. voN— Questions in the “Chemistry of Trin: ast ee .. 739 Brevi, P.—Copper Steels Bs se! aei foe) fos soem Ee Law, E. F.—Briitleness and Blisters in ‘Thin ‘Steel Sheets in eee 740 Bannister, C. O.—The Relution between Type of Fracture and Micro-structure of Steel Test-pieces .. no ar 740 OsmonpD, F., & G. Carravp—Progress of Metallography since 1901 .. ... sd a wae GUILLET, i —Quaternary Steels... AMES roos G0. | Uae RosENHAIN, W.—Deformation and Fracture in Iron and Steel . Perm. vier, | Cas)! Boynton, H. C.—Hardness oe the Constituents noe Tron and Stel .. .. ... .. 742 BIBLIOGRAPHY .. oe: we. Weer tee mmm eae PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Meetine, December 20, 1905 05 ee ek ce ec te Tae ew a ale ero x January 17; “USOG i 32 OU Stes. een Pyeet Sustee) vcetip Merce tach ee eaten ne . February 21, ,, Se ee ee eRe Pee er OL eB oe 8 L, on March 21, . ee ee omen Ge ae os Acc on! ES - April 18, + Bo Pa ECE URINE rr a8 oi) ORS Y td ate Se eo » . May 16, 3 we aS OR ORE Sai teehee) vast a ea “ June 20, 9 ai Caer tcl nM. il eee SS) § eS oo9), Gls . October 17, ET Me SO). Pode Cowa tour ncte ncn lon ust % November 21, ,, Be ko Sa) Skah SRE ees naan Ser oe ieee ee cee) GENERAL INDEX TO. VOLUME:..°- 0 =. cc een esse Gee) ce ce een ae 7 re is ns = —— 2 es 2 Speen iy Maar = Ao ee has AOR j : i. - POC Ye ee ou 7 ae See \ ; 7 7 ets Mitad ~ n oped : ’ ie CO a Re y= an oe eg a “te 7 —— ve - s : ae ms> eee ate : = . hz ir ° aie Pia: JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1906. Fie, 1; Fic. 2: [To face p. 1. ee PO ry An OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. FEBRUARY, 1906. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. —+oe— I.—On a “Fern” Synangium from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore, Lancashire. By D. M. S. Watson. (Read December 20, 1905.) Puatss I. to III. THE specimens of a synangium which form the subject of this paper are contained in a slide (No. A89 of my collection) cut by Mr. Lomax, of Bolton, from a coal nodule from the Upper Foot mine, at Shore, which has been opened up by W. H. Sutcliffe, F.G.S. This slide contains in all ten sections of this type of synangium, fortunately fairly well preserved, but all, unfortunately, detached from their support. General Description—The synangium consists of from four to seven sporangia, each provided with a separate wall, grouped round a central receptacle, which is hollowed out into a cup above. The whole is surrounded by a continuous integument. The structure seems to have been fairly substantial, and to have been attached to the organ which bore it by a comparatively small base. The base apparently received a bundle from the stalk or EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Cyathotrachus altus sp. n. Fig. 1.—Transverse section, showing columella, sporangia, and spores. x 100. », 2.—Transverse section, showing the separate wall of each sporangium and columella. x 100. Feb. 21st, 1906 B rae 2 Transactions of the Society. support, and this in the sterile tissue at the base spread out into a cup of short tracheids, which approached the bases of the sporangia. The whole was of small size, measuring only 0:5 mm. in diameter, and 0°8 mm. in height. The Receptacle-—The central axis of the synangium and its base are composed of normal elongated parenchymatous cells. In the base of the fructification these cells are short, and contain, all round the margin, a cup of short tracheids, which are spirally thickened. These are typical leaf-tracheids, and they are seen to end immediately under the bases of the sporangia; they evidently served to supply the sporangia during development. I have been able to find no vascular tissue in the part of the receptacle between the sporangia, and I think it very improbable that there was any. The columella was hollowed out into a cup for a distance of about one-third of its length from the top, and into this cup it seems most likely that dehiscence took place. The columella in transverse section is seen to fit closely up to the sporangia, and was provided with ridges to fit in between them. The base of the synangium seems to have contracted, although this might conceivably be due to the obliqueness of the longitudinal sections. Its base is ragged, and seems to have been torn from its support. Of the structure of the tissue surrounding the whole synangium, nothing can be made out, except that it was probably composed of two or three layers of elongated cells. Sporangia and Spores.—The sporangia are all provided with separate walls, which, as preserved, appear as one black line. They are about 0°2 mm. in diameter in a transverse section, and are about 0°7 mm. long. In two specimens they contain spores. These spores are oval, and have no ornamentation. Their wall is preserved as a single membrane. They measure about 15 w by 12°5 yu. Similar spores occur scattered in the matrix of the section. EXPLANATION OF PLATES II. AND III. Fig. 3.—Transverse section through the top, showing the cup at the top of the columella, sporangia, and spores. x 100. » 4.—Longitudinal section, slightly oblique, showing cup at summit of columella. x 48. 5.—Longitudinal section, showing character of columella. x 48. 6.—Base of Fig. 5, enlarged, showing cup of tracheids in section. x 100 about). 1—Longtcdingl section of base, showing cup of tracheids cut tangentially so as to give a partial surface view. x 100 Figs. 1 to 5, and 7, are from photographs by Mr. W. Tams, of Cambridge. Fig. 6 is from a camera-lucida drawing by the author. ” Il IU JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1906. RIG. 3: nC. Be ‘(To face p. 2. Pn ee ht > . ~ le at oe = reser i Y _— > a a ‘ ™ Pie : >». el ~* at D ; ¢ a JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1906. PI. III. Jes Fe [To face p. 3. * . On a “Fern” Synangium. By D. M. S. Watson. 3 General Conclusions —The preceding description seems to show that the fructification belongs either to the Ferns or to the Cyca- dofilices, and I think that two years ago no one would have hesitated to say that it belonged to one of the Marattiacee. Now, however, in view of Mr. Kidston’s discovery that Crosso- theca, formerly considered to be Marattiaceous, is really the male fructification of Lyginodendron,* whose female fructification is, of course, the seed Lagenostoma,t it seems safer to regard it as of uncertain position, although belonging to either the Ferns or the Cycadofilices, and I think most probably to the Ferns. For this reason I have put the word “ fern” in inverted commas in the title. Association.—The slide contains, amongst other things, Lygino- dendron, “ Cordaites”’ leaves, and a fern leaflet, which I have not seen elsewhere. This leaflet apparently isa Pecopterts ; its structure is quite ordinary, but it bears unicellular short pointed hairs on the lower surface. The edges are strongly recurved. Comparison with other Synangia.—The synangium with which one instinctively compares this, is that known as Ptychocarpus unitus Brongn., which occurs as impressions in the Upper Coal Measures of Radstock, in Somersetshire, and with structure pre- served in the silicified material from Autun, It has been well described by Renault.{ In Ptychocarpus, however, the receptacle is not hollowed out into a cup at the top, and contains a vascular bundle rising “ jusqu’au sommet du synangium.” There is no cup of tracheids at the base in Ptychocarpus, which also has larger spores, measuring 20 p. In the recent genus Kaulfussia there is a very similar cup of tracheids in the sterile tissue at the base of the synangium. This is figured by Bower.§ In the case of Kaulfussia the tracheids seem to be more irregularly placed than in the fossil genus, and do not approach so closely to the bases of the sporangia. The Kauwlfussia synangium also resembles the fossil in the cup at the top, and in its circular form. There is, I think, no British synangium described with which this can be compared, and I think that it is advisable to give it a name for convenience of reference. With this in view, I propose that it should be referred to as Cyathotrachus altuws—in allusion to the cup of tracheids at the base, and to the great relative height of the synangium. * R. Kidston, paper read Roy. Soc. July 8, 1905, published Nature, July 13, 1905. + Oliver and Scott, ‘‘ Lagenostoma Lomazi,”’ Phil. Trans., 1904. t~ Renault, ‘‘ Bassin houiller et permien d’Autun et d’Epinac,” part IT. p. 9. § Bower, ‘Studies in the Morphology of the Spore-producing Members of Marattiacee,” Phil. Trans., series B, 1897. B 2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO LOO Li Ov Yo. A ND). BO Ase (PRIN CIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA), MICROSCOPY, Etc.’ ZOOLOGY. VERTEBRATA. a. Embryology.t Ovulation in the Rabbit.{—Walter Heape has studied the ovula- tion and the degeneration of ova in the domestic rabbit. The doe only permits coition when undergoing cestrus ; if the male be then withheld, the ova are not dehisced, but degenerate in the ovary. Ovulation usually occurs about 10 hours after copulation, but does not follow if from any cause a sufficient supply of blood to the ovaries is interfered with. The author describes the Graafian follicle, the maturation, the ovulation, the corpus luteum, the degeneration of ripe follicles, and the false corpus luteum. Maturation takes place about 9 hours after copulation ; two polar bodies are rapidly formed after the supply of nutriment to the ovum is cut off. About 10 hours after copulation the Graafian vesicle ruptures, and the ovum, entirely freed from discus proligerus cells, is shot out into the infundibulum, which now closely invests the ovary. The freed ovum is incapable of assimilating nutriment, unless it be fertilised. Spermatozoa are found at the top of the uterus horn about 2 hours after copulation, close to the infundibulum in 4 hours. It is probable that the rupture of the follicle is due to the stimulation of erectile tissue. The corpus luteum is formed by the ingrowth of cells surrounding the follicle, together with the follicular epithelium ; the ingrowth being at one time apparently a forcible rush, before which the loosened epithe- lium is driven. If a buck is withheld from a doe during several consecutive periods * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “‘ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub- lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. ¢ This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects. t Proc. Roy. Soc., series B, lxxvi. (1905) pp. 260-8. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. 5 of oestrus, most, if not all, of the older and many younger follicles then undergo degeneratiou, and this may result in more or less persistent sterility. Other causes may induce degeneration of ova, chiefly nutritive causes and competition. Ova may be constitutionally incapable of utilising the nutriment which is supplied, and on which other neigh- bouring ova flourish. When young ova degenerate under such conditions, there is a great probability that in these cases the degeneration is due to peculiarities in the constitution of those ova, and that such ova require special facilities for development. They may give rise to “sports.” It is reasonable to expect that, given the requisite quality of nutriment, the power of producing variable offspring would be widely extended, and the field for the study of variation correspondingly enlarged. There is increasing evidence that the ovary is a secreting gland, essential to the normal functions of the rest of the system, and to the normal development of sexual characteristics. There is probably a special generative ferment, or “ gonadin,” which exercises through blood a profound and far-reaching influence on the organism. Chromosomes in Relation to Determination of Sex.*— KE. B. Wilson has found that the sexes of Hemiptera show constant and characteristic differences in the chromosome groups. The cells of the female may have one more chromosome than those of the male, or one of the male chromosomes may be smaller than the corresponding one in the female. In the first case the spermatozoa are of two classes, one of which contains one more chromosome (the so-called “accessory,” or heterotropic chromosome) than the other. In the second case all the spermatozoa contain the same number of chromosomes (half the soma- tic number), but they are, nevertheless, of two classes, one of which contains a large and one a small “idiochromosome.” It may be that fertilisation by spermatozoa with one chromosome wanting, or with a small idiochromosome, results in male offspring. n Egg ~ + spermatozoon : =n (female). he Egg 5 + spermatozoon . —1=%-—1 (male). It may be that the difference between the two types of germ-cell is a matter of metabolism, primarily one of growth. Resistance to Temperature in Frog’s Eggs.{—H. Bataillon finds that the resistance to the influence of temperature increases in the course of embryonic development. It is very marked towards the closure of the blastopore. The unfertilised egg is more resistant than the fertilised egg. The spermatozoa in the seminal vesicles are more resistant than the ova in the lower part of the oviducts. The abnor- malities seem to be traceable to a modification of the plasma of the ovum. * Science, xxii. (1905) pp. 500-2. ¢ Arch. Zool. Expér., iii. (1905) Notes et Revue, ccxii.-ccxv. 6 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Physical Equilibrium of Amphibian Ova during Maturation. * E. Bataillon has experimented with eggs of frogs and toads, which, he believes, exhibit variations in osmotic pressure and turgescence in the course of their maturation. Experiments on Artificial Parthenogenesis in Vertebrata.t— E. Bataillon subjected the eggs of frog and lamprey to salt solutions and sugar solutions. The eggs of the frog formed, at the most, imper- fect blastule ; those of the lamprey formed complete blastule. The mitoses were mostly irregular, but some quite normal nuclear figures occurred. Development of Chromosomes in Teleostei.t—J. Maréchal has studied this subject in the ovary of Trigla hirundo and (asterosteus aculeatus. Briefly reviewed, the main facts made out appear to be: (1) The formation of yolk, or the trophic alterations of the growing protoplasm, are temporarily related to the beginning of a finer distribu- tion of the chromosomes. In general, as the protoplasm becomes darker and more stainable, the chromosomes begin to appear “spiny.” Soon, also, several chromatic nucleoli and many chromatin granules, lying chiefly on the nuclear membrane, appear. (2) In synapsis and spireme phases no achromatic reticulum is to be seen between the chromatic loops. When the chromosomes already show a spiny appear- ance, a few delicate threads sparingly scattered stand out between them ; these gradually multiply in order to form a ground reticulum, which is in no way achromatic. (3) Most of the loops appear as in Selachians, paired or forked. This is not so clear in Gasterosteus as in Trigla. The paper contains a note on some of the stages of the ovarian eggs in Amphiozus and in Ciona intestinalis. Ovarian Sac in Bony Fishes.§—B. Haller has studied various types of the ovary in Teleosts, and finds four conditions representing phylogenetic stages. Amongst the Salmonide, in Argentina and Mallotus occurs the most primitive state, where the ovary, projecting into the ccelome, is band-shaped, attached by a dorsal mesentery, with the formation of a lateral furrow in this band; in others (Salmo) a better passage for the eggs to the exterior is secured. This condition leads over to that where the furrow is closed and each of the two ovaries forms a sac. The attachment of the right side of this sac to the body-wall yields a fourth modification, seen in Cyprinoids. Genital Glands and their Secretions.||—G. Loisel gives a general review of our knowledge of this subject, and brings forward some new facts. As derived from the germinal epithelium he quotes excretory pigment, the glandular tissue covering the ccelome, a portion of the supra-renal, fatty bodies, Bidder’s organ, lymphoid organs, and per- haps the Wolffian bodies. The genital glands are the sisters of the * Arch. Zool. Expér., iii. (1905) Notes et Revue, ccxii—ccxv. ¢ Arch. Entwick., xviii. (1904) pp, 1-56 (4 pls., 12 figs.). t Anat. Anzeig., xxvi. (1905) pp. 641-52. § Op. cit., xxvii. (1905) pp. 225-38. ) Journ. de l’Anat. et Phys., xl. (1904) pp. 536-62. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. if true glandular organs. From the beginning of their existence, even before sexual differentiation, they elaborate chemical secretions with the same microchemical characters as the supra-renals and Wolffian bodies. In adult life they become definitely glandular. The internal secretion of the ovary, the cells of the ovary and of the corpus luteum, are described in the paper. Interstitial Testicular Gland of Horse.*—P. Bouin and P. Ancel have made a careful study of the minute structure of the interstitial glands in the testis. of the horse. The matter is somewhat complicated, for there appear to be three successive and distinct interstitial glands. 1. There is a foetal interstitial gland, strongly developed, but dis- appearing towards the end of gestation. 2. There is an interstitial gland during the juvenile immature life, but it is slightly developed, and is composed of xanthochrome cells. 3. There is an adult interstitial gland, whose presence coincides with the period of spermatogenesis. Accessory Sex Glands in Insectivora and Rodents.t—S. Grosz finds in these a variety of forms, both as regards the morphological relation of their excurrent ducts to the urogenital tract, and the histology of the secreting region. Individual forms show remarkable differences in the development of those glands which do not serve the sexual act directly, but which probably function as a means of attraction between the sexes. Such glands are perineal, inguinal, anal, and perhaps also preputial. Regeneration in Testes.{|—M. Nussbaum discusses the various ways in which reproductive organs form new germ-cells after liberating what they have produced. In the testicular canals of Teleosts, Reptiles, Birds, and Mammals, it was shown by von la Valette St. George that sperma- togonia remain inactive until the next sexual period, when they begin again to divide. In Elasmobranchs, it was shown by Semper that quite new ampullz are formed from a special region of the gonad (Vorkeim- falte) after the previously active ampulle have been exhausted. Nuss- baum finds that Anura illustrate the first mode of regeneration ; there are resting spermatogonia. But in Urodela (Salamandra maculata and Triton cristatus) the old ampullze and most of the testis undergo degeneration, and there is a new formation from the oval apex of the testes which corresponds to the Vorkeimfalte of Elasmobranchs. Formation of Eye Vesicle in Vertebrates.§ —A. Froriep describes certain peculiarities of growth in the eye vesicle of Selachians, Reptiles, Birds, and Mammals, showing that it does not arise by the invagination of a previously formed hollow ball. It never has a symmetrical ball-like form ; its development into the double-walled eye-cup is by a gradual change from its original formation as a lateral outgrowth of the brain tube. * Arch. Zool. Expér., xxxiii. (1905) pp. 391-433 (3 pls.). + Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 567-608 (1 pl.). ~ SB. Med. Ges. Bonn, 1905, pp. 18-20. § Arch. Mikr. Anat., xvi. (1905) pp. 1-11 (1 pl.). 8 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Origin of the Optic Nerve.*—J. Manouélian comes to the following conclusions on this subject. The optic nerve has two origins, a peri- pheral and a central. The peripheral origin resides in the ganglionic cells of the retina. The protoplasmic ramifications of these cells unite with those of the internal prolongations of the bipolar cells whose peri- pheral prolongations connect the rods and cones. Luminous impressions received by the cones and rods transmit to ganglion cells, whose cylin- draxial prolongations conduct to the mesencephalic centres. These cylinder-axes are the centripetal fibres of the optic nerve. These fibres give out into mesencephalic centres terminal arborisations connecting on one side with nerve-cells whose axes go to the higher centres, on the other side with the neurons with peripheral axes, and these neurons constitute the central origin of the optic nerve. This means that the cylindraxial prolongations of the cells become fibres of the nerve. Tooth-Band in Toad.t—R. Oeder has succeeded in finding a tooth- band in the maxilla of the toad. By the time the tail of the tadpole has disappeared there is no trace of this vestigial relic. Nasal Fossa of Vertebrates.{—L. Dieulafé reviews in an exhaustive manner the morphology and embryology of the nasal fossa from Amphs- oxus to man, including personal observations on all the groups. One point may be quoted, viz. the appearance of Jacobson’s organ in Mammals. It arises very early (in sheep of 10 mm., moles of 6 mm.) : it isa groove which soon becomes closed to form a cylindrical tube (in sheep 14 mm.) over a considerable part of its length. Towards the anterior extremity a part persists (Stenson’s canal) and forms a communication with the buccal cavity. Under the septal cartilage this organ is in connection with the cartilage of Huschke or Jacobson. In the human embryo of 19 mm. this organ is placed above the inferior edge of the septal carti- lage apart from the cartilage of Huschke. Gegenbaur regarded it as the exhalent duct of a septal gland. In the majority of Mammals Jacobson’s organ develops and maintains its relations, but in bats and in man it disappears. Human Skull without Intermaxillary.s—A. Fischel describes a skull in which the intermaxillary (or premaxillary) is either quite absent, or present simply as the merest vestige, and in which the incisors are absent. It is interesting to find that the maxillary processes of the first visceral arch have grown further forward than usual, sharing in forming the foramen incisivam which the intermaxillary normally surrounds, and largely concealing the defect—an instance of what is called a “regulation-process.” Pectoral Skeleton of Teleosteans.||—H. H. Swinnerton has investi- gated the development of the pectoral skeleton in the salmon and stickle- back by means of reconstruction in wax from seria! sections. The earlier stages in the two forms are fundamentally the same. The mesocoracoid * Journ. de l’Anat. et Phys., xli. (1905) pp. 458-77 (1 pl.). + Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp, 536-8. { Journ de l’Anat. et Phys., xli. (1905) pp. 300-18, 478-560. § Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) pp. 561-75 (7 figs ). || Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xlix. (1905) pp. 363-81 (1 pl. and 3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. g appears late in the development of the salmon, and is associated with the rotation of the glenoid border into a transversely horizontal position. There is no sign of a mesocoracoid during development in the stickle- back, and this is associated with the rotation of the glenoid border into: a vertical position. Those Teleosts without a mesocoracoid probably constitute a group separate and not originating from those Teleosts with a mesocoracoid. The postcoracoid process, which is so prominent a feature during development, represents the metapterygium. The so- called “interclavicle ” of the stickleback is not part of the coracoid, but arises as a separate dermal ossification. It is not homologous with the bone of the same name in the sturgeon, and should therefore receive a different name, e.g. infracleithrum. Development of Lymphatic System in Tadpoles.*—H. Hoyer gives an account of the development of the lymph-vessels and lymph hearts in the frog, and points out the probability that in all Vertebrates the primordium of this system is paired and symmetrical. b. Histology. Resting Nuclei and Mitosis.{—K. v. Tellyesniczky has investigated the condition of the resting nucleus and the origin and changes of the nuclear threads, making use of spermatogonia of the salamander. The only constant element of the living nucleus is the nuclear fluid—the ground substance of the “fixed” nucleus. It is homogeneous, but in “fillenden Fixationen” it appears as granules and masses. In the nuclear fluid are two kinds of corpuscles, nucleoli and karyosomes ; these form no constituent of casual structures. There is no justification for the theories which speak of “ linin, paralinin, cedematin, pyrenin, etc.” These terms lead but to misconceptions, and should be avoided. The karyosomes and nucleoli differ in form, substance, development, and behaviour. The substance of the karyosomes is in agreement with the idea of “ chromatin,” that of the nucleoli is in genetic relationship to fat- stuffs. The most important phenomenon at the beginning of mitosis is the diffuse distribution of all the corpuscles present. The nucleoli disappear by gradual diminution in size and without special phenomena. The karyosomes first broaden out, then become branched and vacuolated, and subsequently vanish. In both kinds of division the thread arises as a new formation, and takes its origin in a highly delicate and intricate manner from the diffusely distributed nuclear substance in the nuclear fluid. Reduction divisions are probably distinctive in character ; the threads are not so smooth, nor so sharply defined as in ordinary divisions. Various other points are discussed in this very full paper. Peripheral Nervous System in Amphibian Larve.t—O. Schultze has amongst other points investigated the history of the axis cylinder of the peripheral nerve fibre. He finds that the embryonic non- medullate sensory fibre is nothing else than a multiplicity of cells—a syncitium arising from typical neuroblasts. This syncitium does not * Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1905, pp. 417-30 (3 figs.). + Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxvi. (1905) pp. 367-433 (5 pls.). t Tom. cit., pp. 41-110 (4 pls.). 0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO arise secondarily, but by means of the maintenance of intercellular con- nections subsequent to mitotic nuclear divisions: the morphological continuity is characteristic of the peripheral nervous system. These formations, peripherally as centrally, are to be regarded as neuroblasts. They are the medulla-forming elements. There are no ensheathing so-called Schwann cells. Do the elements of the nerve system usually designated as nerve unities (erveneinheiten), so far as nerve-cell nets exist, stand in con- tinuous connection? This question is answered in the affirmative, and the author claims in it a key to the understanding of the morphogeny of the nervous system, from Ceelenterates toman. The neuron theory of to-day is false, and is supported by no observations free from objections. The right understanding of the nervous system, both in ontogenetic and phylogenetic relations, it is claimed, can be arrived at only through the view of central and peripheral neuroblasts originally of equal jvalue, and which change partly into central and peripheral ganglionic and nerve-cells and partly to elements which, through the syncitial structures of the peripheral fibre, yield peripheral nerve-fibre cells. Optic Cells of Frog’s Eye.*—K. C. Schneider has made some fresh discoveries in regard to the optic cells in the retina. He describes rod- cells, and notes that the apparently homogeneous axial substance of the rod consists of spiral fibrils with abundant branchings and of a homo- geneous cementing substance. He also deals with the green rod-cells which occur along with the violet-red rods and with the cones. Double and Polymorphic Nuclei in Triton.j—W. Rubaschkin describes in the morula of 7'riton teniatus the occurrence of double and polymorphic or “mehrblasige” nuclei. These last consist of separate nucleated vesicles which, in most cases, possess a membrane. The form of the nuclei varies according to the number, form, and arrange- ment of the vesicles. The whole complex sometimes has a ring-like form, in other cases a heaping of the elements yields a nucleus of a mulberry form. In the case of double nuclei the two vesicles are of almost identical size, but only one nucleolus is present. It is suggested that the one is a pure descendant of the egg-nucleus and the other of the sperm-nucleus. The author does not attach any important signifi- cance to these unusual phenomena. Acidophil Goblet-Cells in Torpedo.{—K. Helly claims that he has found in Selachians the equivalent of the Langerhans islets found in other animals. They are goblet-cells, whose most distinctive character- istic is that their contents are not mucus, but coarse, rounded, light- refracting granules with acidophil reaction. They occur in the stomach, gut, and pancreatic duct of Z'orpedo marmorata. They appear to be scattered between the epithelial cells, and a definite arrangement is limited only to the deeper crypts. * Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xvi. (1905) pp. 87-98 (1 pl.). + Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxvi. (1905) pp. 485-500 (1 pl.). t Tom. cit., pp. 434-9 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. il Mucous Membrane of Human Alimentary Canal.*—J. E. Schmidt finds that the cells of Paneth appear first in the gut of the human feetus in the seventh month, and in the new-born child have attained their full development. Normally they are found in the whole of the small intestine, frequently in the vermiform appendix ; practically absent in the healthy rectum, they occur here pathologically in polypi, and in the border of carcinoma. There is a specific relation to the digestion of vegetable matter. Goblet-cells are developed in the third month ; their number increases gradually ; towards the end of fcetal life they become so abundant that in the new-born child the whole rectum and vermi- form appendix are covered by an almost continuous layer of goblet-cells and mucus; the lower small intestine also shows goblet-cells in abundance. In the gut epithelium of the human feetus peculiar cell inclusions occur in the middle of pregnancy, which, on further growth, have the form and reactions of meconium corpuscles. These are emptied into the gut, so that in the new-born child there are no epithelial inclusions. The formation of these corpuscles in the gut is con- temporaneous with the beginning of swallowing movements and of the taking up of amniotic fluid in the gut canal. In the dog the same process begins only shortly before birth and ends during the first fourteen days of extra-uterine life, so that here the development of the whole series in the gut epithelia can best be followed. Structure and Development of Integument.t— E. Retterer con- tinues his account of observations on this subject. The present paper deals with the histogenesis of elastic fibrillee ; fundamental substances —e.g. cement, plasma, mucin ; covering epithelium and epidermis ; the origin of the external tegument, and the union of epidermis and the dermis ; closed follicles of the original epithelium. Some of his general conclusions from the whole research may be quoted. The covering epithelium of the external tegument develops both to the outer and inner sides. The cells of the middle and deep layers proliferate to replace those that desquamate, and to produce cellular generations which will be transformed into connective elements. A reticulated tissue is formed whose cellular individualities each contain, besides a nucleus, a cytoplasm differentiated first into laminz and anastomosed chromato- phile filaments, and secondly into a hyaloplasma in the meshes of the chromatophile reticulum. The development of reticulated tissue is the same in the region of the papillee and of the follicles. After this web is formed, the elements dissociate themselves from the dermis, the fibres become gelatinous, and the cellular remains are transformed into leucocytes. Structure and Histogenesis of Bone.{—Ed. Retterer gives an exhaustive account of the minute structure and development of bony tissue, with special reference to Mammals and Teleosts. Structure of Tooth Canaliculi.§—L. Fleischmann has studied these in man, monkey, and horse. He has made out the following points. * Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 12-40 (1 pl.). + Journ. l’Anat. et Phys., xl. (1904) pp. 493-535 (2 pls.). } Op. cit., xli. (1905) pp. 561-640 (12 figs.). § Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 501-24 (1 pl.). 12 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Neumann’s sheaths and odontoblast continuations (dental fibres) are two different well characterised formations. Neumann’s sheaths line the dentine canaliculi in the uncalcified and calcified zone, and pass over at their central ends into a lamella, discovered by K6lliker, which resists acids and alkalis like the sheaths themselves. The sheaths possess a considerable power of resisting acids and alkalis, yet they are able to resist decaying maceration only in the region of the calcified zone. Dental fibres arise directly from the odontoblasts, and run within Neumann’s sheaths. Lymphoid Tissue in Ichthyopsida.*—A. Drzewina concludes her observations on this subject. Adenoid tissue in the Ichthyopsida forms a reticular framework with leucocytes in the meshes. The reticulum is often clearly of a cellular character, and all kinds of white corpuscles known in higher Vertebrates occur, though some possess features not usual in leucocytes. There occur series of transition forms between lymphocytes and mononuclears. In those Ichthyopsida without bone marrow, the same organs generate, indifferently and simultaneously, elements of the lymphogenic and myelogenic series. The adenoid tissue is scattered through a series of organs—kidneys, wall of digestive tube, liver, pancreas, heart, genital glands, etc. It occurs either in scattered masses or as differentiated organs, comparable in a degree to the follicles or the lymphatic ganglia of the higher Vertebrates. Nerve Elements in Amnion of Cat.t—M. Wolff describes in the amnion of cat, sensory bodies which le a few millimetres apart. These bodies are ovoid, tapering at the ends; they are enclosed within a sheath in which nuclei may be seen. The nerve entering has no sheath; it winds spirally in the bulb-shaped end organ. ‘The coils show numerous swellings, band-like flattenings, and anastomose with each other. c. General. . Plimmer’s Bodies and Reproductive Cells.t—J. Bretland Farmer, J. E. 8. Moore, and C. E. Walker compare these remarkable structures in many cancerous growths with certain vesicular structures occurring regularly in the gametogenic, but not in the ordinary somatic cells. As In the case of nuclear division, so also as regards cellular inclusions, there is a striking parallelism between reproductive cells and cancer-cells. Both classes of cells are autonomous to a very high degree ; both possess the faculty of continuous or intermittent multiplication, independently of the tissue requirements of the organism; both exhibit cellular and nuclear metamorphoses which not only, mutatis mutandis, resemble one another, but differ materially from those pertaining to the normal somatic cells. Adipogenic Function of the Liver.§ —C. Deflandre discusses the relation of this function to sexual life and its mechanism. It appears to * Arch. Zool. Expér., 4 ser., iii. (1905) pp. 145-76, 187-303, 309-38 (1 pl.). t Anat. Anzeig., xxvi. (1905) pp. 658-63. ¢ Proc. Roy. Soc., ser. B, Ixxvi. (1905) pp. 230-4 (9 figs.). § Journ. de l’Anat. et Phys., xli. (1905) pp. 319-52. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 13 be principally related in both sexes to the genital function. Evidence is supplied by a law of seasonal alternation of these functions as illustrated in Helix and Limaz, in Asterias, and in Vertebrates at the time of gestation, of suckling, and the beginning of embryonic life. Histological studies reveal the migration of the fat from the hepatic to the genital glands in various molluscs, in Astacus and Carcinus ; and in higher animals the arrangement of the fat at the level of the supra- hepatic centre in the mother, and at the level of the portal vein in the foetus, indicates the passage of this fat from the liver of the mother to that of the foetus. Tympanic Region in Mammals.* —P. N. van Kempen has made an exhaustive study of the structure of the tympanic region in the mammalian skull. He discusses the development of the cavities and bones connected with the region, the associated nerves and blood-vessels, and the various conditions found in the different orders of mammals. Primitively the tympanic was a narrow ring, incomplete above, in an almost horizontal position, with its ventral wall closely apposed to the skull. The evolution from this primitive condition is traced in detail. The author maintains that the entotympanicum is quite peculiar to mammals, without representative in lower Vertebrates, and that the tympanic is derived from a membrane bone of the lower jaw, probably the supra-angular. Evolution of Tertiary Mammals.t —Ch. Depéret takes a survey of the various Eocene faunas of Tertiary mammals, and seeks to gain some greater clearness as to the actual phylogenetic events by distinguishing such evolution as took place in the area in question from the results of migrations from distant centres of dispersal. Bronchial Tree in Birds. {—G. Fischer gives a comparative account of the bronchial tree in birds. A lower ventral and an upper dorsal region, grouped round the main bronchus, are sharply distinguished. The ventral region is very regular, with 8 passages (bronchi) of large calibre. The dorsal region is more irregular and variable, with 6-10 bronchi. The large bronchi tend to spread on the external surface of the lung ; the main internal mass is formed from the bronchi fistularii. The pulmonary artery branches for the most part dichotomously, and the stronger vessels extend between the ventral and the dorsal regions. Round the lumen of the individual bronchi fistularii, short compressed bronchioles are radially disposed ; they branch dichotomously and form an air-capillary network with numerous canals of equal width. These air-capillaries form a network with the blood-capillaries. All the air-passages anastomose. There are no blind-sacs or alveoli. There are some interesting adaptive differences between the lungs of aquatic birds and land birds, between good fliers and poor fliers. Toxicity of Eggs. §—G. Loisel finds that the yolk of the eggs of the fowl, the duck, and the tortoise contains toxic substances which, * Morphol. Jahrb., xxxiv. (1905) pp. 321-722 (96 figs.). + Comptes Rendus, cxli. (1905) pp. 702-5. } Zoologica, xix. (1905) pp. 1-45 (5 pls. and 2 figs.). § Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 733-4. 14 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO when injected into the veins beneath the skin, or in the general cavity of the body, promptly cause the death of the rabbits, etc., which are experimented with. In all cases the phenomena are those of acute intoxication of the central nervous system. Venous System of Chelonia.*—F. A. Stromsten has studied the structure and development of the venous system in various American turtles. In general the development of the veins of the hepatic portal and renal portal systems is the same in turtles as in lizards and snakes. The detailed differences are discussed. Particular attention is paid to the changes which the umbilical veins undergo, and their ultimate relations to the abdominal veins. Regenerated Tail in Ptychozoon homalocephalum.t — Nelson Annandale describes a case where the distal part of the tail has been reproduced. The scales upon it are slightly smaller than those upon the uninjured portion ; the dorsal tubercles are entirely absent ; the loose membrane surrounding it is only about half as wide as is normal ; it is asymmetrical, and not divided into lobes or expanded at the tip of the tail. Taste Organs in Mouth of Crocodile.{ —W. Bath describes in the mucous membrane of the upper cesophageal region in Crocodilus nilovicus, quite free from papille, taste organs resembling those of lizards. They have the form of a short stumpy pear, with their broad base on the corium. A distinctly differentiated pore is not developed, but a shallow depression is present out of which the sense-points project. In these taste-buds, supporting-cells and rod-cells (Stiétz- und Stiftchenzellen) are distinguishable. Interiorly to the taste-buds in the corium is a mass of connective-tissue cells, whose function is probably that of protection of the associated nerve-fibres. Relation of Jaw Muscles to Salivary Glands in Snakes. §— P. K. Hager has examined a very large number of snakes, representing 24 different species, and gives a full account of their jaw musculature. The mechanism of the poison-gland and its evacuation are fully discussed. In the Colubridee and Vipers emission is effected by the contraction of the biting muscles. The most important as regards this function are the masseter and the ligamentum zygomaticum. Habits of Sphagnum Frog.—H. W. Fowler has some interesting notes on Rana virgatipes Cope, which lives amongst the sphagnum at the mouth of Mare Run in New Jersey. The males are in full cry in late April. When about to utter their call they inflate their vocal vesicles till nearly spherical, and then allow the air to escape by jerks at intervals of a second. Thus five or six raps are produced, and the sound is quite startling because of its suddenness and volume. ‘“‘ The call bears con- siderable resemblance to the noise produced by wood-choppers cutting * Amer. Journ. Anat., iv. (1905) pp. 453-85 (12 figs.). + Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, lxxiii. (1905) pp. 12-22. t Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 352-3. § Zool. Jahrb., xxii. (1905) pp. 173-224 (5 pls.). | Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1905, pp. 662-4 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 15 trees at a short distance back in the forest, and is different from the cry of any other Batrachian.” Adrenal Tumours in Frog.*—W. M. Smallwood gives an account of the macroscopic appearance and histology of a pair of adrenal tumours in a frog. There was no evidence of the normal adrenal in its usual position. The cells of the tumour were observed to be dividing rapidly, and in nearly every instance by mitosis, but atypically. They were very similar to normal adrenal cells, so that this is probably a case of an adrenal tumour developed from the entire adrenal body. The tumour is almost identical with human adrenal tumours of the papillary type. Intermaxillary Gland of Toad.t—R. Oeder finds that this gland has a bilateral primordium, and only three main efferent ducts. That of the frog is an unpaired body with 20-25 ducts opening on the roof of the mouth. Role of Fins in Fishes.t—A. Duges has some new and interesting views on the functions of fish fins. His experiments, which were carried out on Goodea atripinnis, yielded the following results. The loss of dorsal and anal fins did not affect the swimming capabilities ; removal of pectorals and ventrals caused slight disturbance at first, but the fish soon recovered and swam deliberately. Removal of tail fin caused the greatest. inconvenience : the fish at first sank to the bottom and hid, rising later. Another example was able to turn, and rise and sink, and swim forward, but less easily than others. It worked the dorsal and anal fins in place of the lost caudal. When all the fins, except the caudal, are removed, the fish can still swim, but has to keep its fin in continual motion, thus causing the whole body to tremble. The author thinks the whole of locomotion is effected by the caudal fin, and that the unpaired ones simply give precision to the general movements. The paired fins have practically no significance in locomotion: the pectorals seem to serve the purpose of producing currents to aid the gills, since they are more active when the fish is at rest than when moving. Branchial Filter of Fishes.§s—Adolf Steuer gives an interesting account of the branchial filter, with especial reference to Adriatic fishes. Unlike fresh-water forms, marine fishes show great variety in their filter apparatus. Neither phylogenetic nor known cecological factors suffice for the interpretation of the great diversity. ‘The role of the filter is mainly to close the first cleft, which is the largest, and thus to prevent the loss of food and the soiling of the gills ; but the varied and detailed action and the diversity of structure cannot be briefly summarised. There is a useful summary as to the diet of Adriatic fishes. Function of Lateral Line Organs in Fishes.|—G. H. Parker has experimented with various fishes, chiefly with Yundulus heteroditus, in order to determine the function of the lateral line. The sensory organs. * Anat. Anzeig., xxvi. (1905) pp. 652-8. + Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 538-9. } Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, xxx. (1905) pp. 107-10. § Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lv. (1905) pp. 275-99 (25 figs.). || Bull. U.S. Bureau Fisheries, xxiv. (1905) pp. 183-207. See also Zool. Zentralbl. xii. (1905) pp. 480-1. 16 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO are stimulated by infrequent oscillations in the water (about six per second), and may be of use in orientation. As regards equilibration, they are not of more importance than the skin, and far less important than eye or ear. The oscillations which affect the lateral line are between the pressures and currents, affecting the skin and the rapid vibrations affecting the ear. The lateral line organs have their origin in the skin, and may have given origin indirectly to the ear. Chemistry of Respiration in Fishes.*—G. van Rynberk gives an historical summary of the most important researches on the chemistry of respiration in fishes, and a useful bibliography. Flounders with Spinulated Scales.t—Jas. Johnstone discusses the occurrence of spinulated scales on the head and lateral line of flounders (Pleuronectes flesus). East African Fishes.{—J. Pellegrin gives an account of the fishes obtained by M. Alluaud. There is a description of a type species of a new genus, Astatoreochromis alluaudi, from Victoria Nyanza. It belongs to the family Cichlid. There is also a full description of three new species, two of Paratilapia, and one of Tilapia. A remarkable varia- bility in the Cichlid family in Victoria Nyanza is noted, although it is not so marked as in Tanganyika. There is, further, not the extra- ordinary specialisation of the dentition, but most certainly Victoria Nyanza is an evolution centre for the group. Species are little fixed, and there are numerous transitional forms-——e.g. Astatoreochromis alluaudi forms a link between Astatotilapia and Oreochromis. Gullet Teeth of Elasmobranchs.s—J. W. Spengel has examined these in an embryo of Mustelus levis, 15 cm. long. He found that these teeth are not all directed backwards, as stated by Imms. Only the dorsal teeth were so directed. Of the ventral, which are situated in the mucous membrane over the hyoid bone, only a few of the anteriorly placed ones are turned backwards; all the others point forwards. No transitional or intermediate stages are present, and there is a gap between the two types in which the epithelium forms a separating fold. Vascular System of the Lamprey.||—G. Favaro has studied various parts of the vascular system in Petromyzon marinus, the vascularisation of the branchial lamellee, the segmental arteries and veins of the trunk, and the disposition of the caudal bloodvessels. Notes on Cape Verde Marine Fauna.§—Cyril Crossland compares the Cape Verde marine fauna with that of Hast Africa. A few species are common to the two localities, but the two faunas are very distinct. As far as the evidence of the Cape Verde Islands goes, there is no fauna common to tropical seas. The scanty representation of some groups (e.g. Corals and Alcyonarians) and practical absence of certain families * Atti R. Acad. Lincei, Roma, xiv. (1905) pp. 530-4. + Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc., xix. (1905) pp. 301-3 (1 fig.). t$Mem. Soc. Zool. France, xvii. (1904) pp. 174-85 (1 pl.). § Zool. Anzeig. xxix. (1905) pp. 332-3. || Atti Accad. Sci. Veneto, Trentino-Istriana, ii., n.s., 1905, pp. 9-30 (4 figs.). q Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1905, pp. 170-86 (6 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Ly of others (e.g. Chromodoride among Nudibranch Molluscs, and Psendoceridee among Planarians), may be features indicative of a sub- tropical fauna, or indications of a different balance of life obtaining in the two oceans. Crossland has a good deal to say about the various animals which help to form the organic rocks of the shore. Tunicata. Structure of Appendicularie.*—W. Salensky gives an account of the structure of Ovkopleura rufescens, Fritillaria pellucida, and F. borealis. He discusses in particular the “house,” the oikoplasts, the buccal glands, the nervous system and sense-organs, the alimentary tract, the cardiac structures, and the gonads. INVERTEBRATA. Mollusca. a Cephalopoda. Retina of Nautilus and other Cephalopods.;—H. Merton finds that the retina of Nautilus, studied in spirit specimens, is of a somewhat unusual type. It is possible to distinguish a phzsome, a fibril, and a rod portion in connection with the optic cells. The eye of some of the littoral Annelids comes nearest that of Nautilus, which, complicated as it is in its own way, is of a more primitive type than that of the Dibran- chiata. In the Dibranchiata it is not possible to distinguish a special nerve fibril as the receptive organ in the optic cell ; there does not seem to be a terminal knob in connection with the fibril; the nerve fibre entering proximally into the optic cell can be followed to the level of the rod-socket. B. Gastropoda. Protoconch in Gastropods.{—H. Leighton Kesteven regards the ideal protoconch as including (1) the plug of the primitive shell-gland ; (2) a portion formed by the veliger; (3) a portion formed during the nepionic stage, and finally (4) a portion formed during early neanic stages. He calls these four component parts phyloconch, veloconch, nepioconch, and ananeanoconch, and he discusses their varied degrees of representation. The naticoid initial whorl and the systematic value of the protoconch are also discussed. Genital Organs of Polycera.§—H. Pohl gives an account of the minute structure of the genital system of Polycera quadrilineata, together with particulars regarding its general topography. The nidaméntal gland arises through a special differentiation of a simple “Gangschleife,” and is thus not (as was formerly believed) a special subsidiary gland of the oviduct. It is like the albumen gland, only a specialised region of it. That the eggs actually pass through the nidamental gland is certain from the shape of the spawn ribbon, which has the form of the pars constricta. There is a long ductus receptaculo * Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, xv. (1904) pp. 1-106 (12 pls.). + Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xxix. (1905) pp. 325-96 (3 pls. and 2 figs.). ¢ Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales., xxx. (1905) pp. 325-35 (2 figs.). § Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxi. (1905) pp. 427-52 (2 pls.). Feb. 21st, 1906 Cc 18 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO uterinus which here and in related Doriide bears three seminal vesicles. Their exact significance has not been made out. Genitalia of Lymnea.*—F. C. Baker describes the genital organs of Lymnea stagnalis appresa Say, and other American forms—9 species and 2 varieties. There are noteworthy differences in the length of the penis in relation to the penis sac, in the penis retractor muscles, in the colour especially of the receptaculum, and so on. The characters aid greatly in the separation of the species, but do not seem to aid materially in the establishment of higher groups. 6. Lamellibranchiata. Parasitism of Anodonta Larve.j—V. Faussek gives a full account, in Russian, of the changes which befall the Glochidia of Anodonta after they become parasitic on the fins or gills of fishes or Amphibians. Among the hosts infected he deals with Aldburnus lucidus, Perea Sluriatilis, Osmerus eperlanus, Carassius auratus, tadpoles of frog, Siredon pisciformis. Oysters of Senegambia.t—A. T. de Rochebrune has investigated the question of the fossil oysters of Senegal, and concludes that they are not Etheride, as has been alleged. The Etheride have not lived and cannot live in the Senegal and its affluents below 110 kilometres from the mouth of the river, on account of the saltness of the water. The oysters are of Quaternary age like those of Gambia. Lamarck’s Gryphea angulata is simply a deformed individual, and cannot be used for the oyster of Portugal. The name angulata must give place to G. rostralis Lamarck. Ligamentary Structures in Bivalves.s—R. Anthony has followed the development of the shell from its beginning to the adult condition in Attheria caillaudi Feruss., and has demonstrated the progress of the pseudo-plicature and the formation of the ligamentary crest which follows from it, as well as the consequent modifications of the ligament. The general conclusion is that the development of these structures in the Acephale is analogous to that in the Aitheriide—that, in fact, there is here an example of convergence. R. Anthony || has made an elaborate study of those “ pleurothetic ” bivalves, i.e. those whose sagittal plane (bucco-ventral-ano-dorsal) is parallel to the plane on which they rest. Those whose sagittal plane is perpendicular to the plane on which they rest are called ‘“ euthetic.” The pleurothetic Dimyaria are Dimyide, Chamide, Myochamide, Chamostreide, Aitheriide, Rudiste, and Chondrodontide. He shows what consequences the pleurothetic position may be said to have, e.g. a coronal symmetry takes the place of the primary sagittal symmetry ; the form tends to become rounded ; the siphonal and pedal apparatus tends to be reduced. * Amer. Naturalist, xxxix. (1905) pp. 665-79 (11 figs.). + Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, xiii. (1903, received 1905) pp. 1-141 (8 pls.). t Mem. Soc. Zool. de France, xvii. (1904) pp. 191-201. § Comptes Rendus, cxl. (1905) pp. 948-50. 4 Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, i. (1905) pp. 165-397 (3 pls., 57 figs.) ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 19 Arthropoda. Muscle-Attachment and Origin in Arthropods.*—E. Smethlage deals with this subject in a number of Insect orders, some Crustaceans, and Arachnoids. He concludes that the muscles are not fixed to the hypodermis, but directly to the chitin of the outer skeleton. Laterally, the plasma envelope surrounding the muscle-cell passes without definite boundary into the plasma of the hypodermis, the basal membrane of the latter passing round and forming the sarcolemma. Cells lying imme- diately beneath the chitin give rise both to muscle-fibrils and chitin. ‘They may be regarded as epithelio-muscle-cells, since they subserve the functions of both tissues. It is stated that in Artemia salina the muscu- lature of the extremities is differentiated from the hypodermis, and is thus ectodermal. Examination of developmental stages did not reveal anything which might be regarded as mesoderm in the sense of a special germinal layer. a. Insecta. Poly-embryony in Parasitic Hymenoptera.j—P. Marchal has found more instances of poly-embryony or germinogony. After fertilisation, and before the least hint of the germinal layers, the egg is dissociated into a number (12-100) of germs, which proceed to develop. This “specific poly-embryony” occurs in the Chalcidiide in Agentaspis Suscicollis (Dalm.) Thoms. = Meyrtus fuscicollis (Dalm.), and in A. testaceipes. It also occurs in Proctotrypide (Polygnotus minutus). Full details are given of the remarkable development. Marchal thinks that in experimental poly-embryony, in accidental or teratological embryony (true twins, double monsters), and in specific poly-embryony, the factors are the same, and that the chief one is a change in osmotic pressure at the beginning of segmentation. It is noteworthy that the individuals which arise from one ovum are of the same sex. Poly-embryony in a Hymenopterous Parasite.{— F. Silvestri ‘describes the remarkable peculiarities of development in Litomastiz truncatellus Dalm., one of the Encyrtide, which lays its eggs in those of Phisia gamma. The ova may be parthenogenetic, or they may be fertilised. In both cases there are two polar bodies formed, and the first divides into two. The three unite into one, which seems to share in the development. The parthenogenetic ova give rise to males only ; the fertilised ova give rise to females only. Two kinds of larva— asexual and sexual—are distinguished, and each egg may give rise in two different ways to a number of larve of both kinds. We have found it difficult to follow the author’s account, but a less condensed memoir is promised. Three points are emphasised—poly-embryony, the peculiar history of the polar bodies, and the dimorphism of the larve. Morphology of the Insect Head.§—S. Bengtsson maintains, with especial reference to the larva of Phalacrocera, that the insect head has * Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxi. (1905) pp. 495-514 (2 pls.). + Arch. Zool. Expér., ii. (1904) pp. 257-335 (5 pls.). t Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma, xiv. (1905) pp. 534-42. § Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 457-76 (5 figs.). bo C 20 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO four appendicular segments: (1) the mandibular; (2) the endolabial ; (3) the maxillary ; and (4) the ectolabial (“labial”’ of most authors). Structure of the Insect Ovary.*—Heinrich Ritter von Wielowieyski has investigated the structure of the ovary in various types of insects. The essential constituents are: the terminal filament, the tunica propria, the follicular epithelium, and the germ-cells, and the author discusses these in detail. The nutrition of the ova in Orthoptera (except Forficula) and in the flea is either direct through the tunica propria or by help of the follicular epithelium from the blood (panoistic ovaries). In all other groups there is a differentiation of the germinal material into oocytes and nutritive-cells. The nutritive-cells are originally germ-cells or their direct derivatives. Follicle-cells never become nutritive-cells. The nuclei of the nutritive-cells behave like those of most gland-cells. Bees and Flowers.t—J. Wery has made experiments with flowers from which the corolla was removed and others which were left un- injured. The position was changed from time to time, and the visits of the bees were counted. In June the uninjured flowers were visited by 107 insects, of which 72 were bees; the flowers without corolla, but still conspicuous, were visited by 79 insects, of which 28 were bees. Similar experiments had similar results. A glass vessel with honey was left unvisited ; artificial flowers proved as attractive as the real flowers. The author concludes that the form and colour of the flowers are indisputably more potent in attracting bees than the pollen, nectar, or fragrance. Wax-Glands of Bees.t—L. Dreyling points out that in Bombus the wax-glands are formed dorsally and ventrally, and that nearly the whole of the hypodermis of the segments shares in the secretion. In Melipona and Trigona the secretion is restricted to the dorsal surface, in hive-bees to the ventral surface. In various respects, as regards the wax-glands, the humble-bees are intermediate between the solitary and the social Apide. Wax-forming Organs in Social Bees.§—L. Dreyling gives a full account of the regions bearing these organs in the honey-bee and in Meliponide. In the workers of the honey-bee wax is secreted by specially developed skin-glands on the last four ventral plates of the abdomen. These glands are recognisable even in the pupa stage ; in the fully developed bee, after their maximum of development is reached, they gradually degenerate with increasing age. The Meliponide have the wax-secreting glands on the dorsal side of the abdomen, otherwise they are similar to those of the honey-bee. The Trigone likewise secrete wax on the dorsal side of the abdomen in segments 2-6. On the same segments wax occurs in the humble-bees also, where, however, wax-glands are developed ventrally as well as dorsally. * Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xvi. (1905) pp. 1-62 (8 pls.). + Bull. Acad. Roy. Belgique (1904) 53 pp. See also Biol. Centralbl., xxy. (1905) pp. 270-1. t Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 563-78 (6 figs.). § Zool. Jahrb., xxii. (1905) pp. 289-330 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 21 Seminal Vesicle-duct of Queen Bee.*—E. Bresslau finds that the so-called “circular muscle” or sphincter of the seminal vesicle duct does not exist. What is actually present is a complicated pump-like apparatus, whose main parts consist of a parallel pair of longitudinal muscles anda dorsally-placed, semicircular, more weakly developed, muscular band. Coloration in Polistes.;—W. E. Enteman gives a general account of this genus of wasps, and discusses variations of colour-pattern and its development, the physical and chemical character of the pigment, the geographical distribution of the types of colour-pattern, and several other factors bearing on evolution theories. Experimental Alteration of the Colours of Lepidoptera.t—Countess M. von Linden summarises past experiments, and gives an account of some which she has made bearing on the changes of coloration and marking, which can be induced by abnormal conditions during the pupa period. We notice some conclusions. The formation of dark pigments in the insect body is ultimately due to reduced oxidation in the plasma, to an imperfect metabolism in the body of the pupa. Abnormal cold and heat affect the normal irritability of the plasma, acting like narcotics. The new colour-characters of the butterfly may be so deeply rooted that they are repeated in the offspring when these are reared in normal con- ditions. The offspring of modified specimens of Vanessa ichnusoides bear the marks of disturbed metabolism and are themselves modified. Variability of Cobas Myrmidone.§—A. Pieszczek gives an account, with an exceedingly fine coloured plate, of the variations of this butterfly. Colouring Matter in Vanessa.||—Countess M. von Linden has studied this subject, and finds that the red pigment contains an albu- minoid body, a combination of a parent substance of the albuminoses and a colouring matter having the property of bile pigment. It’ recalls hemoglobin ; it changes colour with the degree of oxidation. It is present in the epiderm of the caterpillar, chrysalis, and butterfly, and also in the cells of the blastoderm. The different colours in the butter- fly’s wing correspond to different degrees of oxidation. The change of colour which is produced in the epidermis of the caterpillar and the chrysalis during development and the evolution of colour is the result of reduction and of oxidation. The pigment of Vanessa has a respira- tory significance, forming with oxygen less stable combinations. The red substance arises from chlorophyll. This transformation may happen in the plant-cells, or in the intestinal epithelium of the caterpillar, or in its skin, or in that of the chrysalis. Chlorophyllane is an intermediate product of the transformation. Digestion in Caterpillars.q—L. Sitowski has studied the process of digestion in some moth larve, e.g. of Zinea and Tineola, which feed on * Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 299-323. + Publications Carnegie Inst. Washington (1904) 88 pp. (6 pls.). { SB. Med. Ges. Bonn, 1905, Zweite Halfte, pp. 25-33. § Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lv. (1905) pp. 401-28 (1 pl). || Ann. Sci. Nat., xx. (1904) pp. 295-363 (3 pls.). 4 Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1905, pp. 534-48 (1 pl.). 22 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO fur and the like. The food consists mostly of keratin, with very little proteid, carbohydrate, or fat; yet the larve thrive well. He discusses. the reactions in different parts of the alimentary tract, the ferments which digest the keratin, the uric acid in the hind-gut, and so on. Among the results of feeding the larve with various materials is a demonstration of the interesting fact that some substances like sudan may pass into the eggs and affect the offspring. Parthenogenesis in a Beetle.*—A. A. Ssilantjew has been able to convince himself that Otiorhynchus turca may be parthenogenetic. A female, certainly not fertilised, laid hundreds of. eggs, and the larve were reared till they were 1-1 of their normal size. Over a thousand specimens were collected, but there was no male. Unfertilised Ova of Tenebrio Molitor.;—Th. Saling notes that in natural conditions the unfertilised eggs of Tenebrio molitor do not develop, but undergo a peculiar degeneration which is described. He thinks that artificial conditions will be discovered in which the unfertilised eggs do- develop as in Bombyx mori. Blind Bombardier-Beetle.{—K. Reitter describes Brachynillus varen- dorffi, g. et sp. n., a blind Carabid from German East Africa. It is adapted in an interesting way to life. in caves. It has lost its eyes, the wings are atrophied, the pigmentation is reduced to an almost mono- chrome brown-yellow, and there is notable elongation of the anterior part of the body, of the antenne, and legs. Revision of American Pederini.§—Thos. L. Casey has tackled the arduous task of revising the great multitude of species included in this tribe of Staphylinid beetles. He discusses 89 genera, of which 64 occur within the limits of the United States. Treatise on Culicide.||—-R. Blanchard gives an account of the structure, life-history, and habits of Culicids, dealing with over 300: species of Culea, Psorophora, Anopheles, etc. Special attention has been paid to the medical importance of mosquitos. Studies on Culicide.{—E. P. Felt, in his report as State Entomologist, includes a key for the identification of mosquito larve, descriptions of new or insufficiently characterised species, and some dis- cussion of the structure and phylogeny of the family. Structure of the Tsetse-Fly.**—E. A. Minchin gives a fine account of the structure of Glossina palpalis, and especially of the digestive tract, obviously of importance to those who are studying the evolution of the trypanosomes of sleeping sickness, and other tsetse-fly diseases, within the body of their invertebrate host. Figures are given of the * Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 583-6 (2 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 587-90 (2 figs.). t Wiener Entom. Zeit., 1904, pp. 178-9. § Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, xv. (1905) pp. 1-248. § Les Moustiques, histoire naturelle et médicale. Paris, 1905, 673 pp., 316 figs. q New York State Education Department, 20th Report of the State Ento- mologist, 1905, Bull. 97 (Entomology, 24) pp. 442-97 (19 pls. and 21 figs.). ** Proc. Roy. Soc., series B, Ixxvi. (1905) pp. 531-47 (6 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 23 nervous system, digestive tract, genitalia, and other structures, and a full description of all but the muscular and tracheal systems. Genital Appendages of the Tsetse-Fly.*—-W. Wesché describes the relatively large and very complex male genital appendages of Glossina palpalis Des., the host of the germ of sleeping sickness. He compares them carefully with those in other Diptera, e.g. Scatophaga lutaria. Dipterous Larve from Deep Water in Lakes.t — J. Schneider discusses the fauna of deep water in Lake Bieler, with especial reference to the Dipterous larve. He deals with the larve of Tampus, Chironomus, Simulia, and Corethra, and refers also to other constituents of the fauna, such as Candona studeri, Pisidium, Limnodrilus, and the like. Trichoptera Pupe.t{—A. Thienemann gives an account of the morphological features and their significance in pupal life, the changes taking place during the same, and the transformation to the imaginal state. Only one or two points can be quoted. Histolysis and histo- genesis are naturally effected, while at the same time there is no such thing as outer rest. Constant swinging of the abdominal segments takes place, this being necessary for breathing purposes. The result is the renewal of the water with its dissolved oxygen in the pupal case. Various structural adaptations in the abdomen are described, such as the “ lateral line” and the cleansing apparatus which averts the danger of impure particles entering during these movements. Some have a pupa case which is closed on all sides, and gas exchanges are effected by osmosis through the walls. In these cases the vitality is lowered ; the temperature of the water (mountain streams) keeps down the exchanges of material, including oxygen. Scale-insect of Rose.s—T. D. A. Cockerell describes from twigs of the wild rose (Rosa) at Coulter, Colorado, a new Coccid, Pulvinaria coulteri sp. n. In the size of its antenne on the one hand, and size of scale and ovisac on the other, it resembles P. aurantii and P. amygdah. From this last, however, it differs in the character of the skin, the second antennary joint, anterior femur, and anterior tarsus. Two New Cynipid Galls.||—E. Graeffe found near Trieste a gall which J. J. Kieffer has diagnosed as new, namely, Cynips tergestensis on Quercus robur. Graeffe describes another new form from Greece, viz. C’. moree on Quercus cerris. Monograph on Aphis ribis.f—J. H. L. Flégel gives a full account of this currant aphis, taking account of twenty-one different stages from the winter-egg onwards, and discussing not only its structure and life-history, but its habits and economic importance as well. His * Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1905, pp. 233-8 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). + MT. Nat. Ges. Bern, Nos. 1565-90 (1905) pp. 165-95 (1 pl.). t Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Syst., xxii. (1905) pp. 489-574 (5 pls.). § Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 514-15. || Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lv. (1905) pp. 370-3 (2 figs.). + es a wiss. Insect., i. (n.s.) 1905, pp. 49-63, 97-106, 145-55, 209-15, 233-7 (27 figs.). 24 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO monograph is a ‘‘ gekronte Preisschrift” of the German Entomological Society. Supposed Numerical Preponderance of Males in Odonata.*— R. J. Tillyard maintains that the prevailing view that there are far more males than females among Odonata is fallacious. The males are more conspicuous, more brilliant, mure frequently on the wing, more diurnal, and therefore more likely to be collected. The females often live apart from the males, and live a more retired life. By rearing nymphs of Lestes leda, a common Agrionid around Sydney, the author found that the ratio of the sexes was one of equality. Dimorphism in Female of Ischnura heterosticta.;—R. J. Tillyard describes the two forms of the female in this dragon-fly. The genus Ischnura consists of very fragile and defenceless forms, with limited powers of flight, and it seems probable that the second form of female, which is very like the male, may in some manner help to prevent extermination by deceiving enemies. The case is a very interesting one. Phosphorescent Collembola.t—F. Ludwig calls attention to the frequent occurrence of Sminthurus bicinctus and Entomobrya on Helle- borus fetidus and other plants. He suggests that the luminosity of some flowers and leaves may be due to Collembola, in some of which, e.g., Aphorura fimetaria, A. armata, and Neanura museorum, phos- phorescence has been proved. Y- Myriopoda. Variation in Scutigera.S—K. W. Verhoeff gives numerous details regarding the variability of Therewonema species. He found this very marked in forms from China and Japan, where it occurs even in oppositely placed parts in an individual. It is greater in the segments of the antenne than in those of the tarsus. A number of cases of discontinuous variation in the tarsal elements of various Scutigera genera are described. 5. Arachnida. New Excretory Organ in Hydrachnids.||—Karel Thon describes in Limnochares and Eulais a coxal excretory organ in the region of the second coxa. A number of wedge-like bipolar cells (schedocytes) form a spherical group round a small lumen with a simple efferent duct. The formation of the intracellular excretory granules is described in detail. In Hulais the organs are most active in the nymph period, and degenerate in the adult when the proctodzal excretory organs begin to function. In Limnochares the coxal organs continue to function actively in adult life. Arachnological Notes.{—F. Silvestri describes the young female and the male of that interesting primitive type, Kenenia mirabilis, and * Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxx. (1905) pp. 344-9. + Tom. cit., pp. 302-6. } Prometheus, vii. (1904) pp. 103-7. See also Centralbl. Bakt. Parasit., xiv. (1905) pp. 659-60. § Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 353-71. || Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xxix. (1905) pp. 465-95 (1 pl). 4 Redia, ii. (1905) pp. 239-61 (4 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 25 deals with the three Italian species of Kanenia. He also describes Acropsopilis chilensis g. et.sp. n., referred to a position among those Opilionide palpatores which have some characters of the Eupnoi and many characters of the Dyspnoi. Another new form is Opilioacarus platensis from South America, a mite belonging to the sub-order Notostigmata. New Spider.*—Frank P. Smith describes Anglia hancockiui g. et sp. n.from Yarmouth. It has affinities with the Linyphiine and the Erigonine, but the structure of the palpus and palpar organs leads the author to refer it to the latter sub-family, of which it appears to be an early type. Structure of Hydrachnid Eyes.;—P. Lang has investigated these in Diplodontus despiciens, Curviceps carneus, and other species of different genera. Hydrachnid eyes are single layered, not inverted ocelli, without vitreous body or preretinal membrane. The retina cells are in the main arranged in groups of two. Hach cell differentiates a rhabdome element, so that the rhabdomes are bipartite. Both the anterior ocelli are movable, except in those cases where movement is prevented by the enveloping chitinous capsule. In double eyes the posterior smaller visual body moves passively with the others. The movement is effected by a muscle attached to a horn-shaped lens continuation which is closely fastened to the cuticula dorsally. No accommodation is brought about by the movement, but only a change of direction of the visual axis, so that new objects are projected upon the retina. Some comparisons are made with the eyes of other Arthropods. €. Crustacea. Life-History of the Lobster.{—H. Chas. Williamson describes the larval stages of Homarus vulgaris, with finely illustrated details as to the appendages and branchiz. Some of the common variations of the megalops are noted. The processes of moulting are discussed at length, and there are many interesting notes on behaviour, spawning, hatching, as well as statistics regarding rate of growth. The Genus Peneus.§S—A. Alcock gives a revision of this genus. All the sections—genera or sub-genera—into which the old Fabrician genus has gradually become split are tabulated and briefly defined, and an attempt is made to sift all the species that have been described under the name Peneus and to distribute them to their proper sections. The paper contains further the diagnoses of nine new forms. Sense-Organ in a Schizopod.||—R. Dohrn describes on the eye- stalks of the Schizopod Hucopia a short funnel-shaped prolongation, situated on the side turned towards the median plane of the animal. It lies projecting over the eye. At the base there is a cell complex, bulb- shaped, and immediately below this an oval heap of cells about the same * Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1905, pp. 247-50 (1 pl.). + Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., 1905, pp. 453-94 (2 pls.). } Fishery Board for Scotland, 23rd Ann. Rep., part iii. (1905) pp. 65-107 (4 pls.). § Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xev. (1905) pp. 508-32. | Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 347-52. 26 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO size from which a cord passes towards the ganglion complex, filling up the inner part of the greater portion of the eye-stalk. Full details of the histology of this organ, which is probably a skin sense-organ, are given. Species of Acetes.*—Kamakichi Kishinouye describes a Japanese shrimp which seems to be a new species of the genus Acetes, and has a noteworthy peculiarity in the structure of the flagella of the second antenne. The flagellum is about twice the total length of the animal, and consists of a proximal and a distal portion. The latter is the longer, and the two parts are connected by a series of short and somewhat pris- matic joints, about ten in number and bent somewhat like the letter S. The distal portion proceeds horizontally backwards, making nearly a right angle with the proximal portion. The proximal portion is rather stiff, and its joints bear very short hairs on the inner margin. The outer margin is free of hairs, except on eight distal joints, each of which shows a pair of very long ciliated hairs. Each joint of the distal portion has a pair of long ciliated hairs on the outer margin, while its inner margin is provided with short hairs in some joints. Some joints in the proximal as well as the distal portion of the flagellum have the distal margin serrated. These serrated joints are distributed at irregular intervals. Caprellid in Lake Geneva.t—-L. Blanc found in a plankton-haul from a depth of 40 metres in Lake Geneva the femaie of a Caprellid, that is to say a distinctively marine form. It occurred along with Bythotrephes, Bosmina, and Dinobryon. It belongs to the genus Poda- lirtus, and is nearest P. minutus P. Mayer. Can it have been fortuitously introduced from the sea by a migratory bird, or is it a true inmate of the lake ? Subterranean Isopods.{—A. Dollfus and A. Viré give an account of some Isopods of subterranean regions in Europe. They appear to be to a considerable extent remnants of Tertiary fauna. Of the Sphero- mide there are four species belonging to three genera; the family Cirolanide is also represented. The authors have given special atten- tion to the sensory apparatus and brain. They find that the loss of the sense of sight is compensated by hypertrophy of the tactile, auditory, and olfactory organs. Motor cells and fibres are so multiplied in the brain that the whole surface and volume are enormously augmented. Galvanotaxis of Entomostraca.§—J. Paulsen has experimented with Cyclopide; and found that only by employing a high tension current could a galvanotaxis be demonstrated. They were found to be nega- tively galvanotactic. Revision of certain British Copepoda.||—T. Scott has been led through the study of much fresh material to make the following changes * Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1905) pp. 163-7 (2 figs.). + C.R. VI. Congr. Internat. Zool. Berne, 1905, pp. 425-9 (4 figs.). See also Zool. Zentralbl., xii. (1905) p. 748. ¢ Ann. Sci. Nat., xx. (1904) pp. 365-413 (2 pls.). § Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1903) pp. 238-44. || Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xcv. (1905) pp. 567-71. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 27 of nomenclature. Full diagnoses of the types referred to are given. Delavalia mimica 'T. Scott becomes Beatricella mimica g.n. Delavalia giesbrechti var. T. Scott, 1899, becomes D. normani T. Scott, n. n. Jonesiella hyene 'T. Scott, 1893, becomes Thompsonula hyene J.C. Thompson. . Seasonal Dimorphism in Daphnids.*—W. Ostwald has shown in detail that structural changes as well as functional changes in Daphnids are correlated with changes of temperature. Increased temperature almost always increases the fertility, the rate of reaching reproductive maturity, and so on, but it also affects the form of the head, especially at a critical period at the beginning of the second stage in the development. Ephippium of Daphnia hyalina.t—Adolf Zwack gives a detailed account of the fully-formed ephippium, its outer wall of elongated hexagonal prisms, its inner lining which consists of a simple lamella with « peculiar structure. He discusses the development of the ephippium, the sudden filling with air, and the final separation. Annulata. Spermatogenesis of Harthworm.t—H. Bugnion and N. Popoff describe the spermatogenesis of Lumbricus agricola. There are four phases: (1) A phase of proliferation, starting with the primitive germ- cell, leads to the formation of the follicle. It occurs in the testes ; it gives rise to syncytial groups of 2, 4, 8, 16 elements, and then to colonies of follicles of 32, 64, 128, or more cells, united by short stalks directed towards the centre. (2) A phase of dissociation involves a division of the follicle into groups of spermatogonia, pyriform cells with delicate stalks directed towards the centre. (3) A second phase of proliferation (segmentation) may raise the number in a stalked group from 2, 4, or 8, to 16 or 32. (4) A final phase of multiplication trans- forms a group of 32 into a morula of 64 spermatocytes round a central blastophore, and finally leads to the finished morula which has normally 128 spermatids. Indian Species of Chetogaster.$— Nelson Annandale describes Chetogaster bengalensis sp. n., the first recorded Asiatic species. The prostomium forms a large sub-circular sucker ; there is a smaller sucker at the posterior end; the cesophagus is longer than the pharynx ; there is @ sense-organ (otocyst ?) in the brain; in the first few segments the two ventral nerve cords are separate; the first pair of nephridia is larger than the others; the sete occur in bundles of 15-17 on each side of the ventral surface; the body is colourless and almost trans- parent, about 10 mm. in length, with about 20 segments. The animal usually clings to a water-snail ; the locomotion is mainly by the suckers ; the anterior setze help in seizing the prey (small crus- * Arch, Entw., xviii. (1904) pp. 415-51 (7 figs.). + Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxxix. (1905) pp. 548-73 (2 pls.). } Arch. Zool. Expér., xxxiii. (1905) pp. 338-89 (4 pls.). § Journ. and Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, i. (1905) pp. 117-20 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). 28 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO taceans) and conveying it to the mouth. There is budding from the penultimate segment, followed by fission. Polian Tubes in Sipunculus.*—F. Ladreyt has studied the two tubes which lie dorsally and ventrally on the cesophagus of Sipunculus nudus opening anteriorly into the peribuccal sinus, and posteriorly with blind ends at the beginning of the intestinal coil. They are much more complex than has been supposed, and show several differentiated regions : (1) A hematolytic region (posterior part of the ventral tube); (2) a lymphogenic region (anterior part of the gland associated with the dorsal tube); (3) an excretory region (posterior wall of the gland). They may be regarded as lympho-renal organs. Regeneration of Head End of Ophryotrocha puerilis.t—C. Czwi- klitzer reports some striking cases of regeneration in this Annelid. After removal of the first sezment, in one case, degenerative processes set in for six weeks; there was a loss of cirri, sete, and most of the parapodia ; then degeneration stopped, and a week later there was a complete regeneration of all the lost parts. If the first segment is removed, the second may take on the characters of the head, to some extent at least. When the first two segments were removed, there was no regeneration. The first segment can repair its own minor injuries very rapidly. Species of Polynoine.{—L. Alaejos y Sanz gives a descriptive account of some species of Polynoine from the coasts of Santander. Among others described and beautifully figured are the following : Lepi- donotus clava, Halosydna gelatinosa, Hermadion pellucidum, Harmothoé spinifera, and five other species of Harmothoé. Regeneration in Annelids.§s—E. Schultz, in the course of a long discussion of the various modes of regeneration which occur in Annelids, emphasises the fact that “ un-differentiation ” up to a certain limit is a general preliminary process. Before re-differentiation (sometimes on a new line) occurs, there is this process of “ un-differentiation.” Morpho- genetic processes are reversible. Some interesting experiments on starving Planarians (Planaria lactea) show that many organs and cells may return to their embryonic level. Japanese Palolo.||—Akira Izuka gives an account of some of the internal structures of Ceratocephale osawai, the Japanese Palolo. He discusses the circulatory system, the nervous system, and the nephridia, which are essentially the same as those of Nereis diversicolor described by Goodrich. Philippine Gephyreans.§—I. Ikeda Pesee on some Gephyreans collected by Professor B. Dean at Southern Negros (Philippine Islands), including Phascolosoma guadratum sp. 0., Phymosoma deani sp. n., and Thalassema manjuyodense sp. n. * Arch. Zool. Expér., iii. (1905) Notes et Revue, ccxv.- ccxxii. (4 figs.). + Arch. Entw., xix. (1905) pp. 140-7 (7 figs.). + Mem. R. Soc. Espan. Hist. Nat., iii. (1905) pp. 5-76 (12 pls. and 5 figs.). § Trav. Soc. Imp. Nat. St. Pétersbourg, xxxiv. (1904) pp. 1-137 (5 pls. and 5 figs.). || Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1905) pp. 238-52 (1 pl.). { Tom. cit., pp. 169-74 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 29 Origin of Centrioles of First Cleavage Spindle in Myzostoma.*— K. Kostanecki has made an experimental study of this question in reference to Myzostoma glabrum, and concludes that the centrioles of the first cleavage spindle are certainly derived from the spermatozoon. Nematohelminthes. Spermatozoa of Ascaris megalocephala.t—L. Scheben finds that the enigmatical refractive body is a not unimportant component of the spermatozoon, which has a role in fertilisation. Peculiar as the whole spermatozoon is, it is deducible from the typical form. The author describes the genesis of the spermatozoon from the spermatid, the fully formed spermatozoon, and the apical portion, which has been hitherto overlooked. The general result is that the spermato- zoon is much less divergent than it looks. The process of fertilisation is discussed, and an interesting case of polyspermy is reported. Scheben also describes the nutritive-cells and peculiar glandular-cells in the uterus. Cutaneous Infection with Ankylostomum.t—Gino Pieri has made experiments which, along with those of other workers, lead him to the following conclusions. Man is infected either by ingestion of the mature larva, Leichtenstern, or by its active penetration through the skin. This. applies to Uncinaria americana Pieri as well as to Ankylostomum duode- nale Looss. The dog is infected (1) when it ingests mature larve of Dochinius trigonocephalus Leuckart, or of D. stenocephalus Railliet ; (2) when the mature larve of D. trigonocephalus are deposited on the skin (Looss), or are inoculated hypodermically (Calmette and Bréton), or are injected into the peritoneal cavity (Lambinet). Pieri’s experiments show that the mature larve of D. trigonocephalus infect the dog, whether deposited on the skin or injected hypodermically. Penetration through the skin seems to produce more certain and abundant infection than introduction through the mouth. Migration, of Trichina Embryos.§—C. Staubli concludes from his observations, which support those of Akanazy, that the embryos pass from the gut into the lymphatic system and thence to the thoracic duct. With the lymph current, helped perhaps by their own movements, the embryos gain the blood-vessels and are passively borne to the muscula- ture, becoming most abundant in muscles which are very active and have an abundant blood supply. Platyhelminthes. - Parasitic Turbellaria.|-M. Plehn describes, from the blood of carp and tench, two Rhabdoccele Turbellaria about 1 mm. long. One, larger, has pointed hook-like bristles on the edge of the body in a * Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1905, pp. 411-16. + Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxxix. (1905) pp. 397-431 (2 pls. and 3 figs.). t Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma, xiv. (1905) pp. 547-54. § Vierteljahrschr. Nat. Ges. Ziirich, 1. (1905) pp. 163-76. || Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 244-52. 30 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO regular row, Sanguinicola ormata, g. et sp. n.; the other, which is more common, is without hooks, S. inermis, sp.n. They are the type of a new family, Rhynchostomida, whose diagnosis is as follows. Rhabdo- ceelida with pharynx entirely reduced; at end of straight foregut are 4-6 large ceca in a rosette formation. Mouth at the tip of the . proboscis-like anterior end. Two sex openings present, ovaries distributed over the greater part of the body, surrounding the testes which are limited to a medium strip. The copulatory organ is reduced to a blunt papilla. The brain is absent; so also are sense-organs. There are two longitudinal nerve-trunks with an anterior commissure. The excretory pore is at the hinder end; the two main lateral trunks unite into a single short exhalant duct. Migrations of Planarians in Mountain Streams.*—Walter Voigt continues his studies on the distribution of species of Planaria in the mountain streams of Rheinland. He distinguishes (@) migrations of individuals, both occasional and periodic, and (0) gradual alterations in progress since the last glacial epoch in the distribution of particular species. The factors prompting migration are discussed in detail, e.g. the search that a species makes for its particular optimum temperature. Effect of Starving on Planarians.;—F. Stoppenbrink has made some interesting experiments on fresh-water Triclads, e.g. Planaria gonocephala, P. alpina, Dendrocelum lacteum, and Polycelis nigra. The effect of reduced nutrition is seen externally in reduction of size and change of form. Gradually all the cells become smaller, the dispensable organs degenerate and disappear. There is no great disrup- tion in the nervous, alimentary, and excretory systems, or in the paren- chyma, musculature, and epithelium, but the gonads undergo total degeneration, first the yolk-glands, then the copulatory apparatus, finally the ovaries and testes. There is no phagocytosis. The involu- tion of the genital system is in the inverse order of its development. Sexual Organs of New Polyclad Genus.{—E. M. Herzig describes the genital organs in Laidlawia trigo*opora g. et sp. n., whose configura- tion presents certain peculiarities. There are five pairs of ovaries and an accessory female genital pore, which opens near the posterior end on the dorsal side, leading into a bursa in which sperms were found. Terrestrial Planarians.$—Bruno Busson gives an account of the structure of Pelmatoplana willeyi sp. n., from Loyalty Islands, and some South American species of Geoplana. Parasites of Fishes.||—Jas. Johnstone reports on various internal parasites and diseased conditions in fishes. He discusses Distomum {?) valdeinflatum Stossich, from the muscles of Pleuronectes limanda ; * Verh. Nat. Ver. Rheinland, lxi. (1905) pp. 103-78. + Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxxix. (1905) pp. 496-547 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). ¢ Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 329-32. § SB. Akad. Wiss. Wien, exii. (1903, received 1905) pp. 375-429 (1 pl. and 5 figs.) || Trams. Liverpool Biol. Soc., xix. (1905) pp. 278-300 (4 pls, and 5 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 31 Gasterostomum gracilescens Rudolphi from the brain membranes of Gadide, with its final host in Lophius; Gasterostomum sp. from the “muscles of the plaice, and another from the cockle which also contains Cerearia fissicauda. Among the Cestodes noted are the following: Dibothrium (= Bothriocephalus) punctatum Rudolphi in brill, ete. ; Tetrarhynchus tetrabothrius van Beneden from the pike and dogfish, and T. erinaceus van Beneden from the gurnard. The author also notes Echinorhynchus acus from the haddock, and Lymphocystis johnstonei Woodcock (a sporozoan) from flounders. Pearl-like concretions in gurnard, etc., are probably due to Tetrarhynchus cysts. New Bilharzia in Man.*—Looss points out that Schistosoma cattoi described by John Catto (1905), is the same as Schistosomum japonicuin described by Katsurada (1904). It is remarkable that the same new parasite should have been found about the same time at Singapore and in Japan. Looss gives some account of the new form. Scolex of Idiogenes.,—N. Cholodkovsky has found a species of Tdiogenes (I. grandiporus from Otis tetrax) with a well-developed scolex with 104 hooks, a discovery which makes it possible to refer this genus to its place in the system, namely, close beside Dilepis. Cestode Studies.{—Th. Pintner gives an account of the ‘frontal glands” which develop on the wall of the bladder-worm stage of Rhynchobothrius adenoplusius sp. n., and extend over the scolex- primordium. Their primary openings are on the most anterior margin of the scolex; they attain their maximum activity when the scolex is fully formed within the bladder; they afterwards begin to atrophy. Over the whole surface of the larval body there are very numerous unicellular glands—which the author calls ‘“ Finnendriisen.” The integument of the animal is fully discussed, and there are notes on the structure of Amphilina and the cuticle of Tenia saginata. Mammalian Cestodes.$—J. Bourquin gives a detailed account of the anatomy and histology of Bertia studeri, B. elongata, and B. plastica, parasites from Z’roglodytes niger and Galeopithecus volans. The paper includes a discussion of the differences of the first-named from B. mucronata and B. conferta, to which it bears several resemblances. Cestodes from a Porpoise.|—E. Linton describes bladder-worms from the mesentery of Lagenorhynchus acutus, probably the same as Chamisso found long ago, and Rudolphi described in his synopsis as Cysticercus delphint. Another form which Rudolphi described in his history of Entozoa as Cyst. delphini should be referred to the genus Phyllobothrium. The final stage of the form here discussed, for which the title Tenia chamissonii is proposed, is probably in another mammal, e.g., Orcinus orca. * Centralbl. Bakt. Parasit., xxxix. (1905) pp. 280-5. + Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 580-3 (5 figs.). } SB. Akad. wiss. Wien, cxii. (1905) pp. 541-97 (4 pls.). § Revue Suisse Zool., xiii. (1905) pp. 415-506 (3 pls.). || Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XXVlii. (1908) pp. 819-22 (1 pl.). 32 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Helminthological Studies.*—M. Kowalewski continues his helmin- thological researches, and describes Hymenolepis arcuata from the intestine of Fuligula marila, and H. parvula from the common duck. Rotatoria. Male of Eosphora digitata.;—P. de Beauchamp describes the structure of this male, which is remarkable in being less degenerate than usual. Its form is like that of the female, its size is not much less. Its corona, brain, foot, muscles, excretory canals, etc., are very like those of the female. The gut is a cul-de-sac without mastax, with only two regions, quite empty, probably non-functional. In_ the posterior half of the body lay the large globular testis, containing numerous spermatozoa of large size. This male was previously seen, but not described, by C. F. Rousselet. Incertz Sedis. New Brachiopod.t—Stuart Weller describes a Paraphorhynchus, a new genus of Brachiopods from the Kinderhook fauna of the Mississippi Valley. The genus is established to include some rather large, coarsely plicate, Rhynchonelloid shells, usually with simple plications, and with the entire surface covered with very fine radiating striz. Oscillating Circulation in Phoronis.§—P. Enriques describes what he calls the oscillating circulation in Phoronis psammophila, the blood showing what may be called a rapid ebb and flow first in one direction and then in the other within the vessels —an apparently unique phenomenon. Young Discinisca.||—-N. Yatsu brings forward additional evidence to show that the structure in the larval Brachiopod Discinisca which Blochmann maintains to be the nephridium is really the otocyst or statocyst. There is a distinct pair of nephridia, probably appearing about the stage with five pairs of cirri. Anteriorly they open near the lateral ganglia, and run along the ventral body-wall. Posteriorly they dilate into funnels, which are suspended by the ileo-parietal bands. The otocysts are small and inconspicuous as compared with those of Lingula of the same stage, and it is probable that their precocious diminution in size is correlated with an earlier attachment of the larva. Echinoderma. Axial Organ and Ventral Blood Spaces in Asterids.4(/—Viktor Pietschmann has studied the difficult problem of these structures in starfishes, and has come to the following conclusions : 1. The axial organ, a local proliferation of the interbrachial septum, consists of three’ parts histologically and functionally different : (@) The * Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1905, pp. 532-4 (1 pl.). + Arch. Zool. Expér., iii. (1905) pp. ccxxv.—ccexxxili. (3 figs.). ¢ Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, xy. (1905) pp. 259-64 (1 pl. and 7 figs.). § Atti R. Accad. Lincei Roma, xiv. (1905) pp. 451-4. | Zool. Anzeig., xxix, (1905) pp. 561-3 (2 figs.). q Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xvi. (1905) pp. 63-86 (2 pls. and 5 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 33 main median portion is the seat of lymphocyte formation, and the con- nection with the oral blood-ring is similar; (6) the upper lateral appendix probably forms no lymph-cells, but, as it contains muscular elements, has probably some contractile capacity ; (c) the lower distal portion is an.excretory vesicle. 2. The median lymph-forming portion is united to the oral vascular plexus in the annular septum by the connecting portion already men- tioned ; the axial sinus opens into the internal oral perihzemal canal. 3. There are muscle-fibres in the annular and in the radial septum. 4. The blood-spaces in the rays occur especially in the transverse bands and lateral “ Kélbchen,” from which blood channels pass to the tube-feet, forming an annular sinus at their ends. Parthenogenesis in Sea-Urchin Ova.*—C. Viguier re-states his conclusion that in the course of one season the eggs of the sea-urchin pass through a succession of stages: (1) even when apparently ripe they may after fertilisation produce ova whose development is soon arrested ; (2) when fertilised they form perfect larvee, when not fertilised they do not develop; (3) when fertilised they form perfect larvee, but they may also produce parthenogenetically less advanced larve; (4) they may develop much in the same way whether fertilised or not; (5) the fer- tilised ova are arrested or lag behind the parthenogenetic ova. Hybridisation of Sea-Urchin and Comatula.f—E. Godlewski jun. states that he has succeeded in rearing plutei from Hehinus-ova fertilised by Antedon-spermatozoa when the sea-water is altered in its alkalinity by adding some solution of sodium hydrate. In spite of the nuclear union there is in the larva no hint of paternal characteristics. Fer- tilisation and mingling of hereditary characters are two quite distinct processes. It seems to the author unjustifiable to regard the chromatin- substance as the sole vehicle of the hereditary qualities. The experi- ments show that the ovum-cytoplasm must count for much. Muscles of Fedicellarie.t—E. Kiernik has found in Paracentrotus and Parechinus (as Hamann did in Kchinus acutus) six neuroderm organs, two for each blade. In the adductor muscles there are true striped muscles along with smooth muscles. The extensors and flexors consist entirely of smooth muscle fibres. Antarctic Holothurians.§—Rémy Perrier reports on the collection in the Museum of Natural History in Paris, and discusses the question of bipolarity. His view is that we cannot speak of a bipolar fauna, though there are bipolar species, whose distribution must be separately interpreted in each case. In most cases the bipolar species are the relics of very widely distributed species, whose inter-tropical representatives have been eliminated by the keen struggle in tropical regions or by relatively recent climatic changes. * Arch. Zool. Expér., iii. (1905) Notes et Revue, pp. cevii—cexii. + Bull. Internat. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1905, pp. 501-6. $ Tom. cit., pp. 520-32 (1 pl.). § Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., ser. 9, i. (1905) pp. 83-146 (5 pls. and figs.). Feb. 21st, 1906 D 34 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Cceelentera. Rheotropism of Hydroids.*—P. Hallez has shown that Bougain- villea ramosa Van Beneden, grown in troubled waters, develops a large number of stolons and takes on an appearance very different from the normal, so different that it has been described as a separate species, B. fruticosa Allman. He has also experimented with Hudendrium and Halecium, and the result of reaction to the movements of the water (the rheotropic reaction) is especially an excessive development of stolons which serve to consolidate the colony. But though this proliferation of the stolon system changes the appearance of the colony, it is not more than a secondary effect. New Pelagic Celenterate.;—C. Dawydoff describes Hydroctena salenskw g. et sp. n., three species of which he found at the Moluccas. In its umbrella, velum, manubrium, and some other features it resembles a craspedote medusoid, but in its aboral sensitive organ, its tentacular apparatus, and in some details of its gastrovascular system (e.g. an axial unpaired canal towards the aboral pole, two special lateral or tentacular canals) it suggests the Ctenophora. The author’s general view of the affinities of his new type may be indicated in this scheme : Hydroctena ——_———Ctenophora Hydromeduse (especially we dagen: : Narcomeduse). ING tenoplana—Celoplana—Turbellaria Spicule Formation in Alcyonium.{—W. Woodland finds that a spicule first appears in the cytoplasm of a scleroblast as a small spherical concretion, and remains approximately spherical until the division into two of the nucleus. It then becomes somewhat dumb-bell like, and the two nuclei usually travel to its opposite ends. In the next stage it somewhat resembles a caudal vertebra, and like preceding and succeeding stages is enclosed in a granular protoplasmic sheath containing two nuclei, which are usually situated at the extremities. As to the various forms of adult Alcyonarian spicules, the author makes two suggestions. Growing spicules situated in a mass of mesogloeal substance far removed from any limiting surface must, owing to the proximity of other spicules, endodermal canals, and other heterogeneities of constitution of the sur- rounding medium, necessarily be subject to an aggregate of influences which tend to produce irregularity of form ; and the second is that the extension of a growing body into a surrounding resistant medium is most easily effected by the protrusion of more or less acute processes which, in virtue of their acuteness, are best able to cleave a passage. Porifera. Oscules of Cinachyra.S—R. Kirkpatrick has some notes on this genus of Tetractinellids, with especial reference to C. barbata Sollass specimens of which were obtained by the ‘ Discovery’ from the Antarctic. * Comptes Rendus, cxli. (1905) pp. 727-30. + Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, xiv. (1903, received 1905) pp. 1-16 (1 pl.) Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xlix. (1905) pp. 283-304 (2 pls. and 2 figs.). § Ann. Nat. Hist., xvi. (1905) pp. 662-7 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 3D The specimens are spheroidal or ovoidal in shape and with a root-tuft ; the surface bristles with a pile-like coat of spicules, which are mostly protriznes. Arranged round the sides of the sponge are flask-shaped recesses with oval or circular orifice, and with the margins '!guarded by a fringe of needles rising above the general surface ; on the upper part of the surface are smaller orifices, likewise surrounded by a spicular fringe. Sollas regarded the flask-shaped recesses as being either vestibules or cloacas, and called them oscules for convenience of description. Kirk- patrick concludes that in the seven species of Cinachyra the depressions on the surfaces are probably in every instance poral vestibules, the oscules being separate and distinct. Studies in Spicule Formation.*—W. Woodland has studied in particular the spicule formation in Sycon coronata and S. ciliata. His results are very different from those of Maas, as may be thus shown : MAAS. Each monaxon arises in a single mother-cell. There is never more than one cell on the smaller monaxons. The large monaxons have nu- merous formative cells upon them, derived from the dermal layer de novo. The triradiates arise each in a single mother-cell as a concretion, but at a later stage they bear several formative cells. WoopDLaAND. No trace of the spicule occurs until the mother-cell has con- stricted into two nucleated por- tions. There are never less than two. The largest monaxons, in the two species studied, have never more than two formative cells; when there are four, as in some Ascons, these probably arise from the original mother-cell (or cells). The triradiates are derived from three mother-cells which have asso- ciated together, and built up by their six division products. There are no additional formative cells. The author expounds two laws of spicule formation :—(1) the necessity of the proximity of the cell-substance to the site of lime secretion ; and (2) in Calcarea, the necessity of the presence of two masses of dermally- derived cell-substance, between which the young spicule is deposited. From these he proceeds to explain the existence of the three kinds of spicules characteristic of calcareous sponges, showing not only why the three kinds occur, but also why other kinds do not. The modes of dis- position and secondary forms of the spicules are the inevitable results of environmental influences operating during the course of each indi- vidual ontogeny. Protozoa. Structure and Movements of Protoplasm.j—K. C. Schneider discusses the structure and movements of the plasma in Foraminifera, * Quart. Journ. Micr. Soc., xlix. (1905) pp. 231-82 (3 pls. and 11 figs.). + Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, xvi. (1905) pp. 99-118 (4 pls.). D 2 36 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Radiolaria, Heliozoa, Amcebee, Infusorians, Gregarines, etc. On this concrete basis he erects an elaborate theory. The hyaloplasm consists of “'Tagmas” and a homogeneous fluid intertagmal substance of lipoid character, in which considerable quantities of water can be taken up. This lipoid is the “ Arbeitsubstanz”’ which has to do with movement. Various theories of plasmic movements are discussed—the surface tension theory and the coagulation theory especially. But they are rejected as inadequate. There is a specific living substance with specitically vital behaviour, and the tagmas are alive, with a directive role in relation to the physical and chemical metabolism which goes on around them. We regret that we cannot at present do more than notice this emphatically vitalistic theory of protoplasm and its movements. Observations on Arcella Vulgaris.*—K. Martini gives a full account. of the process of encystation, including the degeneration of the nucleus and the nucleolus-like bodies. Some interesting degenerative phenomena are described ; it seems that over-feeding may beacause. The question of the secondary nuclei is discussed at length. Entameba Buccalis.t—S. Prowazek describes this amaba which occurs in the cavities of hollow teeth. It varies in size from 6-32 p and differs from Z. coli in possessing a clearly differentiated ecto- and endoplasm, and in its reproduction. Amebe of Dysentery.{—A. Lesage describes and compares with Entameba coli an amceba from the mucus of dysenteric patients in Saigon and Toulon, which he regards as specifically different. Its distinctive feature appears to be the nature of its ecto- and endoplasm, the absence of multiplication of the nucleus into 8 parts (as occurs in E. coli) and of the characteristic cysts of Z#. colv. Foraminifera of Shore-Sand of Sussex.§—Arthur Harland gives an account of his gathering of Foraminifera from the shore-sand between tide-marks at Bognor, Sussex. It proved to be an unexpectedly rich collection, predominantly milioline, including no fewer than 140 species, of which many are of rare occurrence in Britain, 15 are recorded for the first time, and one is new— os Post-embryonal Stages of the Laminariacez. Univ. Califorma Publications, 1905, 14 pp., 3 pls. Simmons, H. G.—Ytterligare om Faeréarnes hafsalgvegetation och om hafsal- gernas spridning. (Additions to the marine flora of the Faeroés, and on the distribution of marine alge.) Bot. Notar., 1905, pp. 193-208. SteuR. A.—Neuere Arbeiten ueber Plankton. (Recent literature on plankton.) Verh. k.k. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien. lv. (1905) pp. 497-508. 55», Ueber das Kiemenfilter und die Nahrung adriatischer Fische. (On the gill-filter and the nutriment of fishes in the Adriatic.) [Reference is made to diatoms, Peridinez, and other alge found in the stomach of fishes from the Adriatic.] Tom. cit., pp. 275-99. Tansuey, A.G., & F. E. Fr1tscH—tThe Flora of the Ceylon Littoral. New Phytologist, iv. (1905) pp. 1-17, 27-55 (figs. and 1 pl.). ToBpueR, A.—Die a ae aa der Florideen. (The formation of carpo- spores in Floridee.) Naturw. Wschr., 1905, 6 pp., 27 figs. WaGER, H.—The present ‘state of our knowledge of the Cytology of the Cyano- phycee. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci., 1904 (1905) pp. 802-3. WETTSTEIN, R. vVON—Das Pflanzenleben des Meeres. (Plant life of the sea.) Schrift. Ver. Verbr. Naturw. Kenntniss Wien, xlv. (1905) 3 figs. in text). YENpDO, K.—Preliminary List of Japanese Fucacee. [Article in Japanese ; names in Latin.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo, xix. (1905) pp. 149-61. ZERNOV, S.—Sur le changement annuel du plancton de la Mer Noire dans la baie de Sebastopol. (On the annual change of the plankton of the Black Sea in the Bay of Sebastopol.) Bull. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, sér. 4, xx. (1904) pp. 119-34. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. tl Fungi. (By A. Lorrain Smite, F.L.S.) Study of Monoblepharidee.*—M. Woronin had prepared before his death a series of drawings and notes on Monobdlepharis. W. Franzschel has edited and published the paper. Woronin describes how he was led to search for the fungus on plant remains taken froma pond. These he kept under observation in clear water, and found growing on them numerous Phycomycetes and more or less developed plants of Mono- blepharis. He selected M. spherica for detailed description. It grew in tufts of non-septate filaments with rhizoids at the base. A septum was formed in the hyphe just below the oosphere. In this species the antheridia were hypogynous. The fertile hyphe produced several oogonia at the tips of branches, the branching being sympodial. In the antheridium 4—6 spermatozoids were formed, each with one long cilium. They escaped by a papilla, and either swam away or attached themselves to the oogonium, moving round the outside till the apex was reached. The wall of the oogonium was then dissolved, and fusion took place between the two sexual bodies. The resulting zygote developed inside the oogonium, or it passed out through the opening at the top. When mature it is yellowish-brown in colour, with colourless warts on the surface. The oospore usually remains attached to the oogonium in Monoblepharis spherica ; in M. macrandra they are often found separate. The germination of M. spherica was not observed. In addition to M. spherica Woronin found two other species, M. polymorpha and M. macrandra. Very complete descriptions of the figures drawn by Woronin were found among his papers, and are published in full, adding greatly to the value of the work. In these notes is contained a description of the zoosporangia and zoospores not included in the text. Underground Fungi of Portugal.j—O. Mattirolo publishes a list of truffles and other subterranean fungi collected in Portugal, and adds a series of notes and observations on these plants. He finds that they correspond with the similar flora of the Mediterranean region both in Europe and in North Africa, just as the aerial vegetation of these lands is much alike. None of these southern species have the same colora- tion as those found in the north. They vary from white to violet or chestnut brown, while the truffles in the north are black or dark brown. The area of distribution of the different forms varies with the distribu- tion of the plants on the roots of which they grow, and that again is determined by climate and by the character of the soil. Mattirolo records 10 species, all of them edible fungi. Development of Ascus and Spore-formation in Ascomycetes.{— The intention of J. Horace Faull in starting his research on Ascomycetes was to extend our knowledge of the ascus in other species, only com- paratively few having been examined as yet. The most favourable * Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, ser. 8, xvi., No. 4 (1904) 24 pp., 3 pls. + Atti Reale Accad. Lincei, cccii. (1905) pp. 384-6. ¢ Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxxii. (1905) pp. 77-113 (pls. 7-11). 72 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO forms he worked with were Sordaria pinicola, Neotiella albocincta, and Hydnobolites sp., an underground fungus. Many other forms were examined, and the results are summarised. He finds that the asci bud out from the penultimate cells of the ascogenous hyphe only in some forms; in others, as in Sordaria pinicola, they rise from the terminal cell ; in a few species they rise apparently from any cell. In every case that was definitely determined there was fusion of two nuclei in the young ascus ; the conjugating elements, though not sisters, might be the daughters of sister-nuclei. Bodies corresponding to Guilliermond’s metachromatic corpuscules were noted in the ascus. They disappear before the spores are matured. The spindles were found to be of intranuclear origin, the centrosomes and asters of extranuclear origin. The chromosomes vary in number for different species from four to eight. The spores are delimited by a plasma membrane directly after the last mitosis in the ascus. The nucleus, after it has acquired a wall, takes a pear-shaped form with a beak, the centrosome being at the beaked end. The formation of the spore membrane begins at the centrosome end of the nucleus, and develops towards the opposite pole. An outer second membrane is also formed, and lies against the surrounding epiplasm. Retraction of the beak follows after the wall is completed, and the nucleus assumes its spherical form. There was no evidence to support Harper’s finding, that the astral rays fused to form the spore membrane ; they were constantly seen within the spore and apart from the wall. Within the spores karyokinesis may take place, with or without the formation of septa, according to the species of fungus. In Podospora an enucleated, elongate part of each spore is cut off, the nucleus passing to the end of the spore where septation takes place. The writer discusses at length the bearing of these facts on the origin of the Ascomycetes. ‘He concludes that the phenomena of spore-formation, as discovered by him, are not incompatible with the view that homologises the ascus with the oomycetous zoosporangium. Though there is undoubted nuclear control in the formation of the spores in the ascus, even the shape of the nucleus changing in the process, there is probably nuclear control also in the Zygomycetes and Oomycetes, where the cleavage masses are always nucleated. Faull claims that his observations “‘indicate that the process of delimitation of the spores is practically the same in both cases—a cleavage,—and that the plasma membranes of the spores are the same.” He thinks possibly the Ascomycetes may have arisen from some such phycomycetous group as the Peronosporineze or Saprolegniinee. Observations on Claviceps purpurea.*—C. Engelke has been making a series of culture experiments with ergot, and states that he was unable to obtain cultures from the conidia of the fungus. He secured spores that were ejected from the perithecia, and with these he obtained a pure growth with which he was able to inoculate rye plants. Infection only took place before pollination, and only on the stigma. There was no infection through the stomata. Honey-dew is entirely * Jahresb. Nat. Ges. Hann., 1905, pp. 70-2. Seealso Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 377-8. wf ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73 the product of the stigma, increased somewhat by the excitation of the attack of the fungus. R. Aderhold * has been working at the same subject, studying the conditions of the development of the fungi from the sclerotium. They grow most readily under a very slight coating of earth. Deeply buried sclerotia were never seen to germinate, but they could persist in that condition unimpaired in vitality till the following year—after that the power of growth had gone. - Conjugation of Yeast-Spores.t—A. Guilliermond again takes up the question of fusion in the spores of certain species of Saccharomyces. He describes the method employed in growing, fixing, and staining the yeasts, and gives an account of the results observed for each form. He devoted special study to S. Ludwigii. The ascus of this species contains four spores, which constantly unite in pairs in the interior of the ascus. A germinating tube is then formed, which pierces the ascus wall and cuts off a succession of cells like the budding of other species. In other cases the spores each form a germinating tube, and fusion may take place later between two tubes, or there may be no fusion at all. Guil- liermond then describes the fusion of the nuclei. There is a slightly different procedure in S. Johannisberg ii. More than half the number of spores conjugate at the time of germination, but fusion is not so con- stant between spores of the same ascus. In the Schizosaccharomycetes and the Zygosaccharomycetes, fusion as a rule takes place between two cells at the formation of the ascus. In some forms there are often cases where no fusion takes place, showing a tendency to apogamy. Many deviations from the usual development are noted by the author, and comparison is drawn between these cases of fusion in yeasts and the sexual fusion noted in the Ascomycetes. He has no doubt that these fusions are veritable conjugations, though the sexuality is of a somewhat rudimentary character. Occurrence of Saccharomyces anomalus in the Brewing of Sake. K. Saito found this yeast constantly in specimens of saké from numerous localities. He grew it in various cultures, and describes at length its appearance and habits of growth. The formation of endogenous spores was easily induced ; they are cap-shaped, and are 2-4 ina cell. Saito tested the effect of carbohydrates in the cultures and also the products of fermentation. In all of these, the saké yeasts resembled Saccharo- myces anomalus. The writer is not sure of the part played by the yeast in the preparation of saké, but he thinks that the aroma is very probably due to its presence. Conidial Form of Aspergillus niger.s—C. Engelke describes an alternative form of the fungus hitherto known as Sceptromyces opizi, or Botrytis sceptrum. The development of this second form is induced by low temperature, moisture, and lack of nitrogen in the substratum. * Arb. Biol. Abt. Land. Forstw. k. Ges. Amt., v. (1905) p. 31. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 378-9. t Rev. Gén. Bot., xvii. (1905) pp. 337-76 (4 pls. and 11 figs.). ¢ Zeitsch. Angew. Mikrosk. Klin. Chemie, xi. heft 5 (1905) pp. 119-29. S 4 ahresb. Nat. Ges. Hann., 1905, pp. 107-9. See also Ann. Mycol., iii.{(1905) p. 373. 74 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The form with which he experimented, Sceptromyces, was found growing on chestnut husks. From it he grew Aspergillus niger, and from a culture of the latter he again produced Sceptromyces. Identity of the Genera Meria and Hartigiella*— A disease of leaves of the larch was found by P. Vuillemin to be caused by a fungus that developed its fruits underneath the stomata. The fertile hyphe pass out through the pores and bear the spores in the open. He named the fungus, which was new to science, Meria Laricis. It was at a later date again discovered and described first as Allescheria, and then as Hartigiella. Lindau, in his recent Kryptogamen-Flora, places the fungus among the Botrydez. Vuillemin does not agree with this classification. He considers the fungus to be the type of a new family, Hyposto- macez, characterised by the formation of a fungal layer under the stoma. He thinks that some other fungi described as Hyphomycetes, Melanconiacez, and Spheeropsidez, ought to be placed in the new family. The fertile hyphee are not exhausted by the formation of spores, their membranes become thickened, and they are transformed into a mass of persistent cysts, something like the resting spores of the Ustilaginee. Origin and Spread of Plant Rusts.t— Jakob Eriksson continues the discussion on the mycoplasma theory of the origin of rusts, and criticises the opinions of those writers who have opposed this theory. Eriksson does not deny that in certain cases uredo sori may persist during the winter, but he insists that it is not proved that the disease is propagated by the uredospores, and questions the capacity of the air to convey them. There are three distinct periods of attack: in late autumn -or winter, in early spring, and towards the end of June, the latter being the most widespread and harmful. All of these he states are due to mycoplasma in the seed. He further points out that in other parasites we have perennial mycelium, which provides for the continual growth of the fungus; in these cases spores are dispensed with, and a similar life-history is to be found in rusts. Infection of Cereals by the Smut fungus.t—Ludwig Hecke ex- perimented with the ears of wheat and barley, and found that the fungus gained entrance by the stigma, and when the infected seeds were sown the following year the smut fungus was produced. Hecke found the fungus in the young embryo of the seed, in the scutellum, at the vegetative apex, and in the first formed layers of the leaves. He thinks it probable that the Zoliwm fungus is also a form of smut. Work on Smut.§—Oscar Brefeld has issued a further portion of his work on filamentous and yeast fungi. This part deals with the smut of cereals. He has made a special study of the infection of the different plants attacked by smut. He has proved by experiments that the smut spores of wheat and barley only infect the young fruit. They alight * Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 340-3 (8 figs.). + Arkiv Bot. k. Svenska Vet. Akad. Stockholm, v. No. 3 (1905) pp. 1-54. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 471-3. $ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., xxiii. (1905) pp.248-50 (1 pl.). § Untersuch. aus dem. Ges. der Mykologie, heft xiii. Brandpilze iv. (Munster, 1905) 74 pp., 2 pls. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 16 on the stigma, the hyphe penetrate to the developing ovule, and remain there until the following season. When the seed is sown, the fungus develops along with the host-plant, and becomes first visible as smutted heads of wheat or barley after the time of blooming. The smut spores of oats are much more resistant, and retain their vitality for some years. The method of infection is also quite different ; the spores germinate on some saprophytic substance, manure of some kind, and directly infect. the young plants. The spores of these plants are, like the pollen of their hosts, wind-borne. The smut spores of the maize also develop as saprophytes, and produce conidia, which are carried by the wind to the host plant ; they alight on the young and tender portions of the plants and penetrate into the tissues. The disease appears on the. area infected by the spores. Brefeld includes in his survey the smut of Melandrysum, which appears in the anthers, and the smut of water plants such as Phragmites. The spores of the former are carried, as the pollen is carried, by butterflies. In plants like Phragmites the water conveys the spores to new hosts. The author concludes with a consideration of the part played by filamentous fungi in the assimilation of free nitrogen. He is of opinion that such assimilation is confined to the Rhizobiz of the Leguminose. Genus Phragmidium. II.*—P. Dietel has followed up a previous paper on this genus by a still more extended study of species. The material used was from herbaria in Berlin, Leipzig, and Paris. He calls attention to the uredo form and to the paraphyses which often vary a good deal and are of service in determining species otherwise very much alike. The diagnoses and descriptions of a number of new species are given. A list of the species recognised as such by the author is given with their host-plants. There are 16 on species of Rubus, 15 on Rosa, 10 on Potentilla, one of which grows also on Fragaria, the remaining 5 are parasites of Geum, Ivesia, Poterium, and Sanguisorba. Asparagus and Asparagus Rusts in California.j—Ralph E. Smith has published an account of this Uredine, giving a history of the disease, a description of the various spore forms of the fungus, and an account of the spraying experiments. Dew is essential to the germination of the spores, and dusting with fine sulphur while dew is on the plants has been found to be effective in checking the spread of the fungus. After September the rust is kept down by the parasites Darluca filum, Tuber- cularia persicina,and Cladosporium sp. The latter is a new record. New Genus of Uredinew: Uromycladium.t— The rust found hitherto on species of acacia belong to the two genera Uromyces and Ravenelia. D. McAlpine records a new genus which occurs on Australian acacias. The teleutospores of Uromycladium are borne at the tips of a branching sporophore, each branchlet bearing one to three spores with a colourless vesicle or cyst below the spores. With the * Hedwigia, xliv. (1905) pp. 330-46. + Bull. California Agric. Exper. Stat., clxv. (1905) pp. 1-100. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 513. ~ Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 303-23 (4 pls. and 5 figs. in text). 76 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO exception of two species, uredospores and teleutospores have both been re- corded. No ecidia have been found, but on several acacias spermogonia have been noted. The writer describes 7 species belonging to the new ‘genus. The development of the spores is traced, and they are compared and contrasted with the spores of Uromyces and Ravenelia. The writer thinks that the function of the sterile cysts is one of adhesion. They are gelatinous, and would aid in fixing the spore on the leaf until germination took place. The uredospores are borne singly ; they are larger than the teleutospores, and have several germ-pores. There are no paraphyses. Plant Diseases.*—G. P. Clinton in his botanical report describes first of all the fungal diseases that occurred in Connecticut during the preceding year, especially on cultivated plants. He devotes a section to the discussion of Peronoplasmopara cubensis, the blight of musk melons and cucumbers. It attacks all species of Cucurbitaceee, and is of wide distribution. A third section deals with Phytophthora infestans. A case of conifer disease f is recorded from Yorkshire, caused by Herpotrichia nigra. The leaves are attacked and killed ; the fruits of the fungus and small sclerotia are developed on the leaves. A new disease of potatoes { has been noted, due to Spherella tabifica, already recorded as doing damage to beets and turnips. The leaves are attacked first, then the mycelium passes down the stem and enters the tubers. Ewert § gives advice as to combating the fungus Gleosporium ibis. The disease follows usually on dry hot weather, and attacks the oldest leaves. Pruning to encourage a new and vigorous growth is of advantage ; the selection of immune varieties and the use of fungicides are also recommended. In a further paper, Ewert || describes an attack on roses by the rust Phragmidium subcorticium. A damp season was distinctly favourable to the growth of the fungus. He describes the varieties that were able to resist the parasite. C. Brick] records disease of cherry trees in the Rhine country, and gives as the cause the fungus Cytospora rubescens which acts on the tree in much the same way as JVectria cinnabarina, causing gummosis. Removal and burning of diseased branches, protection of wounds by tar, and supply of water to the trees in dry seasons, are recommended. Fungicides are of no avail. F. W. Neger** has made a series of notes on timber-infesting fungi. At Mariental, near Kisenach, he found many hornbeams of which the * Rep. Conn. Agric. Exper. Stat., 1904 (May 1905) pp. 311-84 (pls. 18-37). See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 372-3. + Journ. Board of Agric., xii. (1905) pp. 177-8. t Tom. cit., pp. 37-8. § Naturw. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw., iii. (1905) p. 200. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 405. || Tom. cit., pp. 249-52. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 405. q Verh. Naturw. Ver. Hamburg, 1904 (1905) pp. 66-7. See also Ann. Mycol., lii. (1905) p. 381. ** Hestschr. zur Feier 75 Jahreg. Besteh. Forstlehr. Kisenach, 1905, pp. 86-98. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 381-2. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. TE branches were killed by Zrpex obliquus. He describes the fungus and its effect on the woody tissues. Another fungus, Lasiobotrys Lonicere, he found was subcuticular in crowth ; the fungus could hardly therefore belong to the Perisporiacez, which are all superficial forms. R. Aderhold * contributes a paper on the question of the utility of burying harmful fungi. It might be beneficial if care were taken not to turn over the ground again in spring. This remedy is still more doubtful in the case of sclerotia, that retain their vitality for several years. In discussing the spread of rust on maize and cereals, J. C. Arthur f points out the prevalence of Puccinia Sorghi in the uredospore stage, while the zecidium, recently discovered on Ovalis, is very rare. He thinks. that the uredospores must cause most of the spread of the disease. G. Delacroix { recounts the work done at the station for vegetable pathology in France. In the first part he describes the parasitic fungi that have recently been recorded as attacking cultivated plants, such as melons, almonds, etc., and in the second part some new species that have been found on the cultivated plants of warm climates. Most of the species described are new to science. W. H. Lawrence § describes blackspot canker and blackspot apple rot, a disease that grows in the bark and sapwood of the tree, where it forms a stroma and pustules of Macrophoma curvisporum. When the fruit is attacked spots are formed on which the pustules of the fungus make their appearance. Fr. Kruger || finds that “ ring-scab” of sugar beet is due to an Oospora which enters by wounds caused by an insect. In slight attacks the superficial tissues alone are affected, but in more serious cases the deeper tissues are reached and the vessels are laid bare. Unfavourable conditions of the soil are the chief causes of the disease. Plant Diseases in Britain.{—A case of potato leaf-curl has recently occurred at Kew. It is due to a black mould, Macrosporium Solant, which forms velvety black patches on the leaves and haulms. In some instances the mycelium passes down the haulm into the tuber, which may again reproduce the disease. Young sprouts are readily infected by the fungus. Attention is also called ** to the white rust of cabbages. The fungus Cystopus candidus attacks many species of Cruciferze, both cultivated and wild. Shepherd’s purse is the commonest host, and should be eradicated. Advice is given tf as to the best treatment of vines afflicted with * Arb. Biol. Abt. Land. Forstw. k. Ges. Amt., v. (1905) p. 35. See also Ann. Myool., iii. (1905) p. 382. t+ Proc. Soc. Prom. Agric. Sci., xxvi. (1905) pp. 94-8. See also Bot. Centralbl.,. xcix. (1905) p. 486. ¢ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 168-204 (with figures), § Journ. Mycol., xi. (1905) pp. 164-5. { Arb. Biol. Abt. Land. Forstw. k. Ges., iv. part. 3 (1904) 1 pl.,9 figs. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 506. q Journ. Board of Agric., xii. (1905) pp. 476-8 (1 fig.). ** Tom. cit., pp. 480-1 (2 figs.) tt Tom. cit. pp. 494-6 (2 figs.). - 78 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO “white rot.” This is caused by the fungus Contothyrium diplodiella, which most frequently attacks the fruit and destroys every grape on the. bunch. Occasionally it spreads to the branches, causing pale-coloured patches. The best remedy is to burn all diseased parts of the plant, and to spray at intervals with permanganate of potash. Endophytes of Orchidee.*—B. Noel has isolated the fungus from the roots of several orchids, the presence or absence of which determines the ripening of the seeds. The writer was able to distinguish the different fungi from each other. The one on Phalenopsis for instance was able to form sclerotia, and is compared with Rhizoctonia Solant. Case of Symbiosis.j—Franz Zach found a fungus growing sym- biotically with an Hrinewm on lime leaves, due to a gall mite. The gametes, copulation, and swarm-spores of the fungus were observed, but the systematic position is still uncertain. Presumably the mite, by irritation of the host plant, induces a suitable substratum for the fungus, and the fungus pierces an opening through the cell wall by which the mite is enabled to pass through and reach further food supplies. Mycological Notes.{—Fr. Cavara takes exception to A. P. Morgan’s criticism of his genus G7bellula, even while adding a new species to it. He thinks Morgan has misunderstood his diagnosis, and that the species Gibellula capellaris Morgan cannot be considered as belonging to the genus. Cavara also draws attention to Claussen’s work on Boudiera. He lays great stress on the cytological value of the paper, but suggests that Claussen has made a mistake in the determination of the fungus on which his observations were made. Cavara considers it to be a species already described by Van Tieghem as Ascodesmis nigricans. The writer gives full reasons to justify his criticisms. Guide to Fungology.—Edm. Michael § has just issued the third volume of a work dealing with the principal larger fungi, edible and poisonous. He describes the common forms of fields and woods, and also describes a few rare plants, such as Clathrus cancellatus. The chief characteristics of the fungi are pointed out, and the 131 drawings are arranged on 10 plates for use in schools. B. Studer-Steinhaiislin || has drawn and described the most important edible fungi of Switzerland. Attention is also directed to poisonous forms that might be mistaken for the others. American Mycology.—A. P. Morgan 4 publishes a new species of Kalmusia and a note on Peziza pubida, the synonymy of which is doubt- ful as the various spore measurements of: species show great divergences. J.J. Davis ** has found anew species of Synchytrium on the leaves of Scirpus. It produces little distortion of the host. * Comptes Rendus, cxl. (1905) p. 1272. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) p. 383). + Jahresb. k. k. Franz.-Josefs-Staatsgymn. Saaz (1905) p. 1-5 (2 pls.). See also Bot. Centralbl. xcix. (1905) pp. 407-8. t~ Ann. Mycol. iii. (1905) pp. 362-5. § Zwickau, Sax. (Forster and Borries) 1905. || Die Wicht. Speisepilze der Schweiz. 3 Aufl. (Berne, 1905) 24 pp. (12 col. pls.). q Journ. Mycol., xi. (1905) pp. 153-4. ** Tom. cit., pp. 154-6 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 79 K. W. D. Holway* redescribes the rust hitherto recorded on plants of Salvia in North America. He adds diagnoses of several new species that he himself has discovered. Joseph F. Clevenger t publishes preliminary notes on the genus Phyllachora ; 44 species occur in North America and of those he has examined 22. The notes deal largely with the differences between the size of the spores in the specimens examined and of evidently similar species recorded by authors. The writer supplies fuller diagnoses in several instances. D. D. Sumstine { considers that Gomphidius rhodoxanthus ought to be placed in the genus Boletinus. He gives his reasons for the suggested change and the various synonyms of the fungus. Contributions to Mycology.s—Franz v. Héhnel describes a new species of Hzidiopsis. He hazards the opinion that Stypella may be identical with Haidiopsis. He records and describes several new species, and gives notes on some species of Corticiwm and also on Actinonema Rubi, which has been recorded under various names. The new genera he has discovered are: Acanthostigmella (Pyrenomycete), Didymascina Hysteriine), and Zhyrsidina (Melanconiee). Héhnel finds that the spot disease of Robinia chronicled by many observers is due to a Phleospora. The fungus has been placed in five other genera by various authors. Hzxosporium Ononidis Auersew, which thas been imperfectly described, is a Cercospora with elongate brownish septate spores. Plant Pathology.||—M. Hollrung’s account of the diseases of plants recorded in 1904 has just been issued. The volume includes an account of the ravages caused by animals as well as by fungi or other plants. The first division is devoted to the general consideration of phyto- pathology. Then follow special pathology and the diseases that attack the various plants. These are discussed, the views and discoveries of the various workers are stated, and the methods of cure considered by them to be most effective. Plant hygiene occupies a more important place in the volume than heretofore, owing to the attention that is being directed to the producing of immune varieties, and to studying the soil and other conditions that help to keep the plants healthy and resistant. Under plant therapeutics are discussed the various means that have been tried to stamp out disease during the year : certain fungi are found use- ful in exterminating animals, and some insects and ants are encouraged that prey on other insects or on plants considered undesirable. Fungi- cides and insecticides are also passed under review. A full index completes the volume. Handbook of Technical Mycology.4/—F. Lafar has issued the seventh part of this work, beginning the fourth volume. A. Kloecker writes the chapters on Saccharomycetes and Schizosaccharomycetes, giving an account of their development and life-history. F. Lafar and P. Lindner * Journ. Mycol., xi. (1905) pp. 156-8. + Tom. cit., pp. 159-64 (1 pl.). t Tom. cit., pp. 165-6. § Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 323-39. || Jahresb. Pflanzenkr., vii. (1904). Berlin: Paul Parey, 1905, viii. and 374 pp. §| Handbuch der technischen Mykologie, lief 7, Jena, 1905. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 424. 80 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO take up other points in the science of yeasts: their culture, physiology, spore-formation, etc. H. Will, of Munich, treats of the chemistry of the cells and their contents : cell-wall, nucleus, vacuoles, granules, etc. BAINIER, G.—Sur deux Penicillium. (On two species of Penicilliwm.) Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 126-30 (1 pl.). BERGAMASCO, G.—Basidiomiceti ed Ascomiceti. (A list of 51 fungi collected by the author in the spring of 1905 in the wood of the Camaldoli.) Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xii. (1905) pp. 652-6. Buytt, AXxEL.—Norges Hymenomycetes. (Norwegian Hymenomycetes examined and finished after the death of the author, by EK. Rostrup.) [The number of species is 1197. There are several new to science. | Vidensk. Selbsk. Skr. I. Math. Naturw. Cl., No. 6, 1904 (Christiana, 1905) pp. 1-164. See also Bot. Centralbl. txcix. (1905) p. 504. Brumpt, E.—Sur le Mycétome a grains noirs, maladie produite par une Mucedineée du genre Madurella n.g. (On the mycetomy of black grains, a disease produced by a mould of a new genus, Madurella.) C.R. Soc. Biol., 1905, pp. 997-8. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 469. Busak, Fr., & J. E. KABat—Mykologische Beitrage III. (Mycological con- tributions.) [Diagnoses of 19 new species of micro- fungi from Bohemia. ] Hedwigia, xliv. (1905) pp. 350-8. Viertes Beitrag zur Pilzflora von Tirol. (Fourth contribution to the ‘fungus flora of the Tyrol.) [Diagnoses of new species are given, and critical notes on many of the forms recorded. | Oester. Bot. Zeitschr., lv. (1905) pp. 73-9, 181-6, 239-45 (1 pl.). CHELCHOWSKI, S.—Rosa maczna agrestu. (Gooseberry mildew.) (Polish.) [An account of the further spread of this fungus, Spherotheca mors-uv@. | Wszechswiat (Weltall). Warschaw, 1905, No. 29, pp. 452-5. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 486. Trufle Warszawskie. (The truffles of Warsaw.)! [The author found the so-called truffles were Rhizo- pogon and Scleroderma. ] Tom. cit., No. 33, pp. 525-6. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix., pp. 486-7. Curnton, G. P.—The Ustilaginee or Smuts of Connecticut. [A discussion of the life-history of smuts, and descriptions of species that occur in the region. With a list of hosts and 7 pages of figures. ] Conn. State Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey, Bull. v. (1905) pp. 1-43. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 487. COPELAND, EK. B.—New Species of Edible Philippine Fungi. [Diagnoses in English of the various species of Coprinus, Psalliota, and Lepiota.] Depart. of the Interior, Bureau of Goy. Lab., Manila, 1905, pp. 141-6 (3 pls.). Costantin & Lucet—Recherches sur quelques Aspergillus pathogénes. (Re- searches on some pathogenic species of Aspergillus.) Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, ii. (1905) pp. 119-71 (1 pl.). ” ” ” ” ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 81 CROSSLAND, C.—Fungus Foray at Maltby. [An account of the annual meeting of the mycological section of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Society. | Naturalist, 1905, pp. 337-9. a », - Yorkshire Naturalists at Pocklington. [Includes a report of the fungi for the district. ] Tom. cit., pp. 267-9. ag % Yorkshire Naturalists at Barnsley. [Includes a report of the fungi for the district. ] Tom. cit., pp. 295-6. - * New Yorkshire Mould: Myxotrichum deflexum. Tom. cit., p. 254. $5 3 Fungi. [Notes on various new records of Yorkshire fungi. | Tom. cit., pp. 189-90. Dorp, Paut—Sur un nouveau Champignon, parasite des Coccides du genre Aspidiotus. (A new fungus parasite on the Coccidee of the genus Aspidiotus.) [The fungus is a Hyphomycete, Hyalopus Yvonis.] Bull. Sci. France & Belgium, xxxix. (1905) pp. 135-40 figs. 1-3). See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 505. Duss, Le R. P.—Flore Cryptogamique des Antilles Frangaises. (Cryptogamic Flora of the French West Indies.) [List of fungi includes a number of new species, determined by Patouillard.] Lons-le-Saunier, 1904, pp. 211-304. ERIKSSON, JAKOB—Den Amerikanska Krusbarsmjédaggen pa Svensk mark. (The American gooseberry mildew in Sweden.) [The disease was introduced from Denmark with young gooseberry plants. | Medd. k. Landtbr. Akad. Exper. k. Landtbr. Akad. Handl. Tidsskr. Stockholm, No. 87 (1905) pp. 1-16 (1 pl.). See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 505. Fartow, W. G.—Bibliographical Index of North American Fungi—Abrothallus to Badhamia. [Contains a list of fungi and references, with occasional notes by the author. ] Carnegie Institution of Washington, i., pt. 1 (1905) 312 pp. FRIEDEL, J EAN—Quelques remarques sur l’influence de l’acidite et de l'alcalinite sur deux Aspergillees. (Some remarks on the influence of acidity and alka- linity on two species of Aspergillus.) Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, lii. (1905) pp. 182-3. Gat3s, R. R.—Middleton Fungi. [A general account of fungi; the species occurring at Middleton are included in Mackay’s Fungi of Nova Scotia. ] Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci., xi. (1905) pp. 115-21. GiBB, THOS.— New Yorkshire Fungi. [A note on two Pyrenomycetes, one of them, Sordaria (Philocopra) pusilla Mout. & 8., new to Britain.] Naturalist, May 1905, p. 139. HEIMERL, ANTON—Beitrag zur Flora des Eisacktales. (Contribution to the Flora of the Hisach Valley.) [A long list of fungi is included in the flora. |] Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lv. (1905) pp. 444-74. La¥rar, F.—Handbuch der technischen Mykologie. (Handbook of technical mycology.) [Omelianski and J. Behrens write further chapters on Bacteriology and Physiology ; F. v. Tubeuf takes up the fungi that destroy wood. | Jena, 1905, lief vi. LavuseEerRt, R.—Die Schwarzfleckenkrankheit (Rhytisma acerinum) der Ahorn- blatter. (The black spot disease of maple leaves.) [The dead leaves on which the fungus matures should be gathered and destroyed. ] Biol. Abt. Land. Forstw. k. Ges., No. 29 (1904) 4 pp. (2 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 506-7. Feb. 21st, 1906 3 a 82 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Lurz, L.—Sur une déformation de l’appareil sporifére du Sterigmatocystis nigra. dans certains milieux artificiels. (On the deformation of the sporophore of Sterigmatocystis nigra in certain artificial media.) Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 131-6 (1 fig). Mackay, A. H.—Fungi of Nova Scotia. A Provisional List. [The habitat of the species is indicated, with the locality. A few new species are described. ] Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci., xi. (1905) pp. 122-43. Maenus, P.—Die Pilze (Fungi) von Tirol, Vorarlberg, und Liechtenstein. (Fungi of Tyrol, Vorarlberg, and Liechtenstein.) [Magnus writes of the Fungi, Schizomycetes, and Myxomy- cetes. The other authors are v. Dalla-Torre and Ludwig Grafen von Sarnthein. | Innsbruck : Wagnersche Universitiats-Buchhandlung, 1905, liv. and 716 pp. See also Hedwigia, xlv. (1905) Beibl. p. 9. 9 » Zwei parasitische Harpographium-Arten und der Zusammenhang einiger Stilbeen mit Ovularia oder Ramularia. (Two parasitic species of Harpographium and the connection between some: Stilbez and Ovularia, or Ramularia.) Hedwigia, xliv. (1905) pp. 371-5 (5 figs.). 3 +f Uber die Gattung, zu der Rhizophydium Dicksonii Wright gehort.. (Concerning the genus to which Rhizophydium Dickson Wright belongs.) [The fungus grows on Ectocarpus; Magnus establishes for it a new genus, Hurychasma.]| Tom. cit., pp. 347-9 (8 figs.) MAirRE, RENE—Notes sur quelques Champignons nouveaux ou peu connus. (Notes. on some new or rare fungi.) [New records are given, new hosts for parasites, changes of name are in- dicated, and new species are described. } Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 137-67 (5 figs.). Mv pomeoke W. A.—A Key to the Brown Sessile Polypore of Temperate North merica. [The author makes three groups of Polyporacee : the Polyporee, Fomitez,. and Agaricacee. The key deals with the first group.] Torreya, Vv. (1905) pp. 194-5. Noetui, ALBERTO—Contribuzione allo studio dei micromiceti del Piemonte. (Contribution to the study of the micromycetes of Piedmont.) [The author records 199 species. One, Amphispheria Heraclei, is new to science. | Malpighia, xix. (1905) pp. 329-72. Nomura, H.—Intorno alla ruggine del Rengesé (Astragalus sinicus) et a due nuovi Micromiceti patogeni del gelso. (Concerning the disease of the ‘“‘ Rengesd”’ (Astragalus sinicus) and two new pathogenic micromycetes of the mulberry.) Atti Istit. Bot. d. Pavia, ix. (Genn 1904) pp. 13-14. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 508-9. PAMMEL, L. H.—Some Fungus Diseases common in Iowa during the Season of 1904. Proc. Soc. Prom. Agric. Sci., xxvi. (1905) pp. 69-82. of ” The Cedar Apple Fungi and Apple Rust in Iowa. [An account of the fungus Gymnosperangiwm parasitic onapples. - Bull. Iowa Agric. Exper. Stat., lxxxiv. (1905) pp. 1-36. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 509-10.. PATOUILLARD, N.—Champignons algéro-tunisiens nouveaux ou peu connus (Algero-Tunisian fungi new or little known.) Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 117-22.. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 83 Prcx, C. H,—Report of the New York State Botanist. [New records are published for a large number of fungi, and many of the names have been changed. } Bull. N.Y. State Museum, xciv. (1905) pp. 1-58 (10 col. pls.) See also Bot. Centralbdl., xcix. (1905) p. 489. RreuM, H.—Contributiones mycologice ad floram Hungaria. [The contributions include the descriptions of many new species and varieties. There is one new genus of Pyrenomycetes, Lojkania, closely allied to Neopeckia.] Novenytani Kozleményak, iv. (1905) pp. 1-6. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) p. 376. Rick, J.—Fungos dos arredores de Torres Vedras. (A list of fungi for Torres Vedras.) Brot. Rev. Sci. Nat. Collegio de S. Fiel (Portugal) iv. fasc. 3 (1905) pp. 159-63. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 512. Rouuanp, L.—Adherence de l’anneau et de la volve dans les Psalliotes, Psalliota arvensis et Psalliota Bernardi. (Adherence of ring and volva in Psalliota arvensis and Ps. Bernardi.) Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxi. (1905) pp. 123-5. Sarro, K.—Tieghemella japonica sp. n. [This new species arose from spores collected in the saké-brewing chamber. Description and diagnosis are given.] Zeitschr. Angew. Mikrosk. Klin. Chemie, xi. heft 6 (1905) pp. 143-9. SHERMAN, HELtEN—The Host Plants of Paneolus Epimyces Peck. [This fungus is parasitic on species of Coprinus.] Journ. Mycol., xi. (1905) pp. 167-9 (1 pl.). STEIDLER, HMERICH—Hymenomycetes moravici. (Moravian Hymenomycetes). [A number of new species are described. ] Zeitschr. Méhr. Landesmus. V. Briimn, heft 2 (1905) 15 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 384. STRACHEN, JAs.—Occurrence of Peziza Adae in Ireland, with a Note on the Con- ditions attending its Growth. Trish Naturalist, xiv. (1905) pp. 185-7 (1 pl.). ZELLNER, J uL1Uus—dZur Chemie des Fliegenpilzes (Amanita Muscaria), (On the chemistry of the Fly Agaric, Amanita muscaria.) SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math. Naturw. Cl., cxiv. abt. 116 (1905) pp. 253-73. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 474. Lichens. (By A. Lorrarn SMITH.) Bavarian Lichens.*—H. Rehm has studied the lichen flora of the Keuper formation in Middle Franconia. He gives a map and description of the district. The crustaceous rock forms are largely those that grow on sandstone. The lichens were found on very old oaks and pear trees, while Cladonias grew in wide stretches on sandy soil. He found 380 species in the neighbourhood. French Lichens.t—J. Harmand has issued the first part of a system- atic and descriptive catalogue of lichens for the whole of France. He gives in the introduction an account of their nature and habitat and of * S.A. Denkschr. k. Bot. Ges. Regensburg, ix., n.s., iii. (1905) 59 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 515-16. + Lichens de France. Paris: Paul Klincksieck, 1905, xxiv. and 156 pp. (7 pls.). @ 2 84 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the vegetative and reproductive organs. He discusses also the question of classification, and selects, as the most comprehensive, the one followed by Nylander and Hue. This first part includes the lichens with blue- green algee down to the end of the Collemaceze. An index is provided of the groups dealt with. Some French Lichens.—G. Pagny * writes a note on the occurrence of Usnea longissima in a fertile condition in the Vosges, the first collection of the fruiting form in France. One of the specimens measures 44 metres, another 24 metres. F. G. Parriquet writes on the Cladonias of the French flora. He informs his readers first of all as to his interpretation of the terms species, variety, and form. He then divides his plants into 43 species, grouped into 16 sections. He describes some 66 plants. ALorHIin, N.—Bidrag til Kannedomen om Skanes Lafflora. (Contribution to the knowledge of the Lichen-Flora of Schonen.) [186 species are recorded. ] Arkiv Bot., ii. No. 6 (1904) pp. 1-30. See also Bot. Centralbl. xcix. (1905) p. 475. BRITZELMAYR, Max.—Ueber Cladonia degenerans Fl. und digitata Schaer. (On Cladonia degenerans and Cl. digitata.) [The author describes the different recognised forms, and adds critical and descriptive notes. | Hedwigia, xlv. (1905) pp. 44-52. Duss, L. R.-P.—Flore Cryptogamique des Antilles Frangaises. (Cryptogamic Flora of the French West Indies.) [The Lichens have been determined by?Ed. Wainio; there are a few new species. | Lons-Le-Saunier, 1904, pp. 305-22. FERNANDEZ, D. MANUEL LLENAS y.—Enumeracion y distribucién geografica de los Peltigeraceos en Catalufia. (Hnumeration and geographical distribution of Peltigeraceew in Catalania.) Bol. Real. Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat., v. (1905) pp. 168-75. Navas, R. P.—Notas lichenologicas IV. Los Cladoniaceos de Espafiola. (Licheno- logical notes IV. The Cladoniez of Spain.) Op. cit., iv. (1904) pp. 226-36. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) p. 387. Schizophyta. Schizomycetes. Bacillus Indurans. —R. Greig Smith gives the following description of B. indurans sp. n., a bacterium which has the novel property of hardening gelatin. Rods with rounded ends, varying in size from 0*4— 2°2 w. They are actively motile and the flagella are numerous and peritrichous. They are negative to Gram, and do not form spores. The colonies are mostly white, flat, and round, while the medium gradually assumes a reddish mahogany hue and also is rendered insoluble. On potato the growth is scanty and yellowish, the medium becoming * Bull. Soc. Sci. Nancy, 3rd ser., vi. (1905) 6pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix, (1905) p. 429. + Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, lix. (1905) 76 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 429. $} Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxx. (1905) pp. 339-43. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 85 purplish and later brownish. Bouillon is rendered turbid with the formation of a surface ring and a coherent sediment. Indol is formed, and nitrates reduced to nitrites. Milk remains unaltered. Defatted Tubercle Bacilli.*—J. Cantacuzene finds that dead and defatted tubercle bacilli are toxic. Injection of a big dose rapidly causes death with hypothermia, necrosis of the immigrant leucocytes, de- generation of the renal epithelium, of the heart and muscle, and a marked eosinophilia. In smaller doses, the effects produced are eosinophilia, hypothermia, emaciation, formation of abscesses, and enormous enlarge- ment of the spleen. The tuberculous new formations caseate and are finally completely absorbed by the agency of giant-cells. The inoculated animals react to tuberculin for several weeks. The defatted bacteria when treated with Gram’s iodine solution lose their toxicity, and injection of such an emulsion imparts a considerable tolerance. The absorption of the defatted bacteria and of the tuberculous deposit is hastened by daily injections of potassium iodide, which stimulates the phagocytic power of the mononuclear leucocytes. Bacteria and the Emission of Light.j—In a small brochure, H. Molisch deals with the subject of emission of light by plants. The production of light is confined to fungi, bacteria and Peridinze in the plant world. The author determined that the luminosity of meat is caused by a bacterium, and showed that the bacterium can generally be produced in a few days by partially immersing a piece of meat in brine. The emission of light from wood has been traced to the same source, and similarly decaying leaves of oak and beech may become luminous. The connection between nutrition, growth, and luminosity has been studied by Beijerinck. As to the teleological factor in the production of light, little is known except that it is an oxidation process. The author postulates a substance, photogen, that produces light waves in the presence of oxygen. Bacillus Enteritidis, Gaertner, and Bacillus pseudo-Tuberculosis, Pfeiffer.t—tThe chief differential characters, says E. Klein, between the bacilli of the Gaertner group and the Bacillus pseudo-tuberculosis are the following: The former are motile and multiflagellate ; B. psewdo- tuberculosis is non-motile. The former produce gas in gelatin shake cultures ; the latter do not. The former produce a uniform turbidity in broth and in phenol broth; the latter form granules and flocculi, the broth remaining clear. In MacConkey’s fluid the former produce acid and gas; the latter do not. Subcutaneous injections of B. pseudo- tuberculosis give rise to chronic granulomatous inflammation; while injections of B. enteritidis cause acute septiczemic infection. Differential Criterion between Cholera Vibrio and certain other Vibrios: the action of Formalin on their Gelatin Cultures.§— Mavrojannis shows that formalin in gelatin cultures fixes the gelatoses * Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) pp. 699-714. + Die Lichtenwickelung in den Pflanzen. See Nature, Nov. 23, 1905, p. 85. t Trans. Patholog. Soc., lvi. (1905) pp. 132-5. § Journ. de Phys. et de Path. gén., vi. (1904) pp. 273-7. See also Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt., xxxvii. (1905) p. 270. 86 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (representing the first stage of pepton formation) but not:the peptons. Cholera bacillus liquefies gelatin but with formalin gives fixed gelatoses ; the vibrios of Finckler, Prior, Deneke, and Metchinkoff, on the other hand, liquefy gelatin which does not solidify with formalin, consequently here exists an important aid in distinguishing closely allied vibrios. Epidemiologically, however, this unfortunately is of little value, since 10-12 day old cultures are necessary, and the formalin must act for at least as long a time. Revision of Coccacee.*—C. E. A. Winslow and Anne F. Rogers suggest the following classification :— Family—Coccaceze Sub-Family—Paracoccaceze (new sub-family) Genus 1—Diplococcus 5 2—Streptococcus Sub-Family—Metacoccacez (new sub-family) Genus 3—Micrococcus » 4—Sarcina », 9—Ascococcus Classification of Dysentery Bacilli.j—H. Hiss divides the dysentery bacilli into four groups, according to their fermenting actions: (1) Bacillus of Shiga and Kruse ferments monosaccharides quickly and occa- sionally maltose ; (2) bacillus y ferments monosaccharides and mannite in 24 hours, and sometimes maltose; (8) Strong’s Philippine culture easily ferments monosaccharides and mannite, comparatively quickly saccharose, and gradually maltose; (4) Flexner’s Manila culture and Duval’s Baltimore culture, readily ferment all the above and dextrin. Typhoid bacilli do not ferment saccharose, and further are motile and so can be distinguished from (4). Classification is supported by the agglutination reaction. The Shiga-Kruse bacillus possesses several well- known and easily distinguished varieties, if not different species. Diagnostic and Prognostic Significance of Lochial Bacteria.{— Leo Arnold’s examination of lochia in 36 normal and 26 febrile puer- peral women resulted in the following conclusions : 1. Absence of streptococci excludes the most severe puerperal affections, the fever arising from extragenital causes, e.g. retained secretion, sapraemia, gonococcal infection, or more rarely coli, diphtheria, or tetanus. 2. Presence of streptococci, numerous and in long chains, more so in the uterus than vagina, denote frequently severe infection : (a) chains of four frequently occur in normal puerperal women ; (0) chains of more than four cocci in vaginal lochia suggest infection and cause febrile or subnormal temperature ; (c) chains of more than four cocci in uterine lochia occur only in fever, though it is impossible to diagnose severity from length of chains. 3. The prognosis varies directly with the number of phagocytes. * Technology Quarterly, xviii. (1905) pp. 240-6. + Journ. of Med. Research, xiii. (Dec. 1904). See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt., XxxVii. (1905) p. 273. ¢ Munch. Mediz. Wochenschr., 1904, No. 48., See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Ref., xxxvii. (1905) pp. 274-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 87 Diagnosis of Bacteria by their Biochemical Functions.*+— L. Grimbert says that the fermentative activity of a micro-organism is its most constant property, and a knowledge of biochemical function is extremely important for determining species. The practical rule is that each form which assumes another constant function deserves a new name ; cultural characters are only of secondary importance. The choice of media is important ; owing to complicated composition (defying chemical analysis) uniformity is impossible. Glucose in bouillon is the chief cause of alkali or acid production. Pepton after 48 hours inoculation with B. coli should give the indol reaction, and it ought not to be mixed with nitrogenous substances (hence peptonised bouillon is excluded) or carbohydrates or nitrates. The choice of ferment- able media is to be restricted to the simplest and most characteristic substances, e.g., coagulated albumen for trypsin production, milk as a coagulation index, pepton for indol reaction, urine for production of ammonium carbonate by urobacteria of Miguel, nitrates to distinguish true denitrification ferments (Bacillus pyocyaneus liberates nitrogen from pepton solution) from indirect denitrificators, which only work in amido- containing media, e.g. bouillon. The best medium for this is pure potassium nitrate 1 part, pepton 1 part, distilled water 100 parts. Carbohydrates are valuable if chemically pure, and should be mixed with pepton. Solid media, the reaction of which is never constant, are not to be used. Fluid media are to be neutralised with calcium carbonate. The plan of research includes general biology and morphology, cultural characteristics in various media, biochemical characters, agglu- tination phenomena, and animal inoculation. From personal biochemical research he discusses finally :— 1. Bacillus orthobutylicus and its differentiation from other anaerobic butyric acid ferments. 2. Friedlinder’s pneumobacillus which acts energetically on glycerin and dulcitol, producing in certain cases levo-lactic acid. Two groups of this bacillus are distinguished, viz.: Frankland’s bacillus, with no action on glycerin and dulcitol, and Grimbert’s bacillus, one variety of which attacks glycerin and dulcitol, the other glycerin alone ; both groups with mannite give levo-lactic acid. 3. Identity of Friedlinder’s bacillus with B. lactis aerogenes. Cha- racters common to both are—immobility, presence of capsules, non- liquefaction of gelatin, no indol formation, and energetic action on carbohydrates. 4. B. tartaricus (Grimbert 1897) and its energetic action on tartrates and carbohydrates (producing acetyl-methyl-carbinol). 5. The action of B. coli and typhosus on nitrates, which are only indirect denitrificators, working only in the presence of amido com- pounds. Differentiation and Identification of Streptococci and Staphylo- cocci.j—M. H. Gordon reports the results of his observations on a large number of streptococci obtained from various sources, particularly as * Archiv de Parasitol., vii. pp. 237-305. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt, Ref., xxxvii. (1905) pp. 263-5. + Local Goy. Board Supp. Medical Officer’s Rep,, 1903-4, p. 388. 88 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO regards their biochemical actions on certain organic compounds, which serve to differentiate and identify the varieties of these organisms. He has selected nine tests for this purpose, viz. litmus milk, neutral red broth, and broths containing respectively saccharose, lactose, raffinose, inulin, salicin, coniferin, and mannite, and as additional tests in special ‘cases he uses broths containing rhamnose, glycerin, and sorbite; the reactions of the various streptococci to these tests are given in tabular form. The author has applied similar methods of observation to staphylococci obtained from different sources. Although this group of cocci admits of subdivision into three main types according as the colour’ of the colonies is white or grey, yellow, and orange or golden, the author finds that the varieties found in these types may be differentiated and identified by their biochemical reactions, and he has established nine tests for this purpose, viz. liquefaction of gelatin, clotting of milk, peptonising of milk, reduction of nitrates to nitrites, changing of colour of neutral red broth, production of acid in litmus broths containing respectively lactose, maltose, glycerin, and mannite. Bacillus of the Olive Tubercle.*—E. F. Smith, referring to a paper by Schiff, in which it is stated that the bacillus of the Olive Tubercle coagulates milk and readily forms spores which are very resistant, surviving 15 minutes exposure to 120° C., finds, after long continuous observation of three different strains of this organism, that it does not produce spores in broth, none being visible under the Microscope, and cultures are sterilised by exposure for 10 minutes at 50° C.; he finds also that milk is neither coagulated nor rendered acid, but gradually becomes alkaline. By inoculating healthy plants with cultures of this organism tumours resulted, control inoculations failing. He thinks that no olive tubercles can be produced with pure cultures of the spore- bearing organism of Schiff; this bacillus has peritrichous flagella, or is non-motile, whereas the true olive knot organism is motile and has several polar flagella. Microbes in Cheese-Making.t—P. Mazé finds, from the results of his researches, that cheese-making depends entirely on lactic fermenta- tion and the phenomena that accompany it. Lactic acid fermentations eliminate or hinder all the other fermentations liable to be present in the milk ; they facilitate the drying of the cheese, and communicate to the casein the aroma of butter and cheese. When the refining of the cheese commences, the lactic acid ferment dissolves a part of the casein, but the other ferments also act in the process, as shown by the casease they produce, and by the ammonia they set free. The best cheeses con- tain neither lactic acid nor ammonia, since these favour a too complete solution of the casein and the formation of nitrogenous matters and toxic products dangerous to the consumers. He advocates the employ- ment, in cheese-making, of pure cultures of ferments and pasteurised milk. Bacillus Producing Red Pigment only on a Single Medium.{— M. Didlake has isolated from the reservoir water of Lexington, Ken- * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 198. + Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) p. 481. ¢ Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 193. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 89 tucky, a bacillus, 5 ~-8 » long, 1°5 broad, that produces on Soy agar (a solid medium of agar added to an infusion made from the roots of the Soy bean with 4 p.c. saccharose and + p.c. asparagin) a characteristic raspberry-red pigment that later acquires an iridescent lustre, but though growing, yet with difficulty, on other media such as ordinary agar, gelatin, potato, etc., no pigment production was observed on any occasion ; in the reservoir water there is a faintly reddish growth form- ing a deposit. The organism is very actively motile, and retains this motility on Soy agar for 5-6 weeks, whereas on ordinary agar all motility is lost within a week ; on ordinary media the bacilli become much dis- torted ; spore formation was not observed ; milk remained uncoagulated, and there was no production of acid or pigment; gelatin was not liquefied ; in glucose media there was no production of gas. No reference is made as to the pathogenic action of this organism. Growth is most favoured by room temperature; incubation at 37° C. retards both growth and pigment production. An agar medium made by sub- stituting an infusion of Alfalfa roots for that of the Soy bean roots behaved as ordinary nutrient agar medium, no red pigment being formed. Tubercular Disease of Olive Trees..*—R. Schiff-Giorgini finds that the Bacillus olee, which produces this disease, is a motile aerobe, having many flagella, and forming spores. Primitive tubercles occasion the production of metastatic tubercles by the wandering of the active bacteria along the vessels. The bacillus extracts amylase which the plant hydrolyses by a further process. The infected plant protects itself from the action of the parasite by mechanical and chemical means, pro- ducing bast and cork at the seat of infection, and “Thyllen” in the invaded vessels ; the sap of the living cells, within a certain distance from the seat of infection, acquires a lytic, agglutinative, and fatal action for the organism ; this action is lost on boiling. Bacterium Chlorometamorphicum.t—L. Macchiati isolated from a green deposit in a closed flask of distilled water an organism to which he has given the name B. chlorometamorphicum. It occurred as non- motile rods, 7y-10 long and 44-5, broad; multiplied only by division : spore formation was never observed. If the aeration of the water is unfavourable, the bacillus appears in a coccal form. It stains readily with aqueous solutions of basic dyes. The author considers that the aerobic form of this bacillus occurs in the air, the anaerobic in the earth. He was unable to show that the green colour of the deposit was due to the organism. Anaerobic Organism Resembling the Influenza Bacillus.{—V. K. Russ observed short rods with bipolar staining, together with short streptococcal chains in pus obtained from an abscess in the buttock ; aerobic and anaerobic cultures were made on blood-, serum-, glycerin-, and glucose-agar plates, and incubated at 37° C. The aerobic cultures gave negative results, but on the anaerobic glucose-agar plates after three days there appeared a number of very small round dew-drop-like * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 200. + Tom. cit., p. 268. £ Op. cit., Orig., xxxix. (1905) p. 357. 90 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO colonies, with finely granular, faintly yellow cupped centres, from which fine streaks radiated to the clear and colourless periphery. The bacillus is a short rounded rod, in length about three times the breadth ; in old cultures it forms long unsegmented threads; it stains well with the ordinary aniline dyes, but not by Gram; it is not acid-fast; it has molecular but no true motility, and no flagella could be demonstrated ; spore formation was not observed. No growth was obtained, either under aerobic or anaerobic conditions, in the usual fluid media, except- ing glucose broth, in which medium, under anaerobic conditions, a granular deposit appears after three or four days, the medium itself remaining clear. Optimum temperature 30°-37° C. It was non- pathogenic for mice. Bacillus Renalis and the Pseudo-diphtheria Bacillus of Man.*— W. Ernst, in a note on Pyelonephritis diphtheritica bovis and the Bacillus renalis observes the similarity of this organism to the pseudo-diphtheria bacillus of man both in morphological and in cultural characters. Both are non-motile aerobic bacteria with tendency to pleomorphism ; in culture there is no production of acid, or of indol ; growth is especially good in neutral or slightly alkaline urine, urine agar, or urine broth ; guinea-pigs are unaffected after inoculation. Flora of Malignant Growths.t—L. Karwacki has made cultivations from a number of malignant growths and has isolated various organisms, the cultural and staining characteristics of which he describes and com- pares with those of the organisms that have been isolated from similar growths by other investigators. He has studied especially the staphy- lococci and streptococci, and has noted the various results obtained with agglutination experiments made with different sera. Anaerobic Bacteria producing Necrosis and Suppuration in Cattle.t—L. Roux refers to 27 cases of necrosis and suppuration amongst cattle, and gives account of the organisms either present or isolated in each case. He found aerobes, B. coli communis, B. vulgaris, and strepto- cocci, and anaerobes, B. necrophorus (Actinomyces necrophorus, Lehman and Neuman), spore-headed bacilli or pseudo-tetanus bacilli allied to B. putrificus coli (Bienstock) and to B. saprogenes carnis (Salus), an anaerobic variety of B. pyogenes bovis (Kunnemann), also a spirillum. Experimental necrosis was best obtained by inoculating a bacterium of the aerobic group with one of the anaerobic group or a toxin of the spore-headed bacillus, into the muscle of a pigeon. Intestinal Streptococcus of the Horse.s—L. Baruchello found a saprophytic streptococcus in 92 examinations of the intestinal contents of 87 horses ; he also isolated the same organism from a donkey. Kaffein broth was employed for purpose of isolation ; the streptococcus stains by the ordinary dyes but not by Gram ; cultures were obtained on agar and glycerin-agar ; on gelatin, which did not become liquefied ; on serum, and on potato; milk was slowly coagulated ; there was no production of indol, nor gas in sugar media. It is a potential anaerobe ; it is * Centralbl. Bakt., Ref. 1te Abt., xxxvi. (1905) p. 148. + Op. cit., Orig. 1te Abt., xxxix. (1905) p. 369. ~ Tom. cit., p. 531. § Tom. cit., p. 569. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 91 pathogenic for mice, and in strong doses also for guinea-pigs, its virulence being increased by repeated transmission through these animals ; it has specific agglutinating properties, by which it may be differentiated from other streptococci. The author considers that it is commonly present in the intestine of the horse, that it is usually harmless, but that under certain conditions, either alone or in conjunction with B. coli, it becomes harmful and infects the animal. Variety of Zoogleic Tuberculosis.*—J. Cagnetto describes a case of zoogleic tuberculosis attacking a guinea-pig, which showed many points of resemblance to the case of pseudo-glanders. At the autopsy purulent nodules of varying sizes were seen on the surface and in the depth of the liver and spleen, between the serous layers of the mesentery, and in the lungs. A film preparation made from the exudate, stained with Loeffler’s blue, showed that the pus was composed of polymorpho- nuclear leucocytes, mononuclear cells, and lymphocytes, but no giant cells. Included in, but more often lying free between the cells, were large and small bacilli, some resembling cocci; these stain badly with Loeffler’s blue; they had no tendency to form chains or threads. Cultures made from the pus in neutral pepton broth, soon became clouded at 35° C., and after 36 hours an iridescent pellicle was formed, which later sank as a grey flocculent deposit ; the culture had no odour ; in glucose, saccharose, and lactose broth there is a strong production of acid ; there is no formation of indol. In gelatin stab cultures, small white colonies appear along the track, the medium not undergoing liquefaction, and no gas being formed. It grows slowly in milk without changing its reaction; after 6-8 days at 35° C. the liquid separates into a layer of serum and a flocculent portion of coagulated casein. On potato, by the second day, there appeared a moist grey growth that later assumed an orange-yellow colour. The chief morphological character of the organism is its pleomorphism, varying from coccal forms to round-ended rods 3p long by 0°7u—-0°9 broad, showing two and three vacuoles ; the rods stain with ordinary dyes, but not by Gram ; there is slight motility in hanging drop; no spores have been demonstrated ; vitality and virulence are long retained in artificial media. It is patho- genic for pigeons and white mice, but especially for guinea-pigs, in which animals it produces an orchitis like that produced by the B. mallet. The author considers that this organism does not belong to any of the three types of pseudo-tubercle bacilli as defined by Preisz, but should be regarded as a pseudo-glanders bacillus. Observations on types of Bacillus Pestis—H. Klein has described two types of Bacillus pestis differing in morphological, cul- tural, and physiological characteristics. (1) The human type of cylindrical bacilli, very virulent for man and for rodents, and showing granular opaque colonies on gelatin. (2) The rat type of oval or coccal- like bacilli, with tendency to involution forms, showing translucent growth on gelatin, and having markedly less virulence for guinea-pigs and presumably also for man, and which rapidly lose their virulence on * Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) p. 449. + Local Goy. Board Supp. Medical Officer’s Rep., 1903-4, p. 368. 92 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO artificial media. These two types do not otherwise differ, and both produce plague in rodents. The author has shown that type (2) has been derived from type (1) by a series of passages through the rat, and that this attenuated variety of Bacillus pestis can be experimentally produced, and will breed true. Direct Microscopic Preparation of Cheese.*—A. Rodella has applied the method devised by Gorini of making stained preparations of fresh and also alcohol-hardened sections of cheese in various states of ripeness, and which can be compared with the results of cultural experiments, to the examination of Emmenthal and Gorgonzola cheeses. The author also makes impression preparations by pressing small por- tions of cheese between two slightly warmed slides on which impressions of the cheese are left, and after removing the fat by chloroform and alcohol, can be stained and compared with the section preparations. He finds that bacteria are collected in colonies of varying sizes, which are distributed irregularly throughout the cheese ; occasionally these bacterial collections include several varieties of organisms; that the intervals between the collections is usually not quite free from micro- organisms. Two New Pigment-producing Bacteria. t—S. v. Bazarewski de- scribes a bacillus and a coccus that produce pigment. Bacillus brunneus rigensis, isolated from soil, is an oval motile rod 1*7y-2°5p long by 0°75 » broad, with long flagella; it stains by the ordinary dyes but not by Gram’s method ; spore production was not observed ; in old cultures capsules are formed ; brown granular colonies are formed on gelatin, which is completely liquefied within a week ; the growth on agar is white, the condensation water is clouded and has a brown deposit, and in old cultures the whole mass of the agar assumes a brown colour; broth is clouded after two days at room temperature, showing a brown pellicle and later a brown deposit, the medium remaining alkaline ; on potato there is a yellow growth, which later together with the potato takes a dark brown colour ; milk remains unchanged ; there is no production of gas or indol; it isa potential anaerobe; optimum temperature 30° C.; it is not pathogenic for white mice ; the brown colour is soluble in water and alcohol, but insoluble in ether, and unchanged by concentrated nitric acid. Micrococcus citreus rigensis, isolated from the air of the laboratory, as round isolated cells 1*2-u—1°5 diameter ; stains by ordinary dyes, but not by Gram’s method ; forms slow-growing sulphur-yellow colonies on gelatin, which commence to liquefy after 10-14 days ; on agar it forms a sulphur-yellow growth, the condensation water remaining clear with a yellow deposit ; on potato there is formed a slimy growth of a deeper yellow than the growth on gelatin, and the potato itself remains un- changed ; milk remains unchanged ; there was no production of acid, gas or indol; it is a firm aerobe; optimum temperature 30° C. ; it is pathogenic for white mice. The yellow pigment is insoluble in water, alcohol, ether, chloroform, and benzine. * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 143. fiom .e1bi; ao. 10 ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 93 Influence of Symbiosis on the Virulence of Pathogenic Microbes.* KE. Klein finds that a culture of B. typhosus, which, in a certain dose, is not capable of living and multiplying in the peritoneal cavity of a guinea-pig, can be made to grow there, and to act virulently, if it be introduced into the animal symbiotically with either SB. enteriditis of Gaertner, B. coli from ice cream, B. enteriditis sporogenes, or B. carnis ; that Vibrio cholere has its vitality and virulence enhanced by symbiotic introduction into a guinea-pig with B. coli from ice cream, or with B. carnis ; and that a similar enhancing influence is exerted on B. diph- therie by Streptococcus pyogenes. Loss of Nitrogen in Soils.;—P. Ehrenberg inoculated 100 c.cm. of pepton solution with 10 c.cm. of soils obtained from various sources. The flasks were incubated at 30° C. for eight days; the solutions were then filtered and the total nitrogen content compared with that of the inoculated solution before incubation. He finds that the apparent loss of nitrogen by the putrefaction of the pepton solution inoculated with soil, is explained rather as an absorptive action than as a biological con- sumption of the nitrogen. KLEIN, E.—Vitality of the Typhoid Bacillus in Shell-fish. Trans. Pathol. Soc., lvi. (1905) pp. 231-8. * Local Gov. Board Med. Officer’s Rep., 1903-4, Supp., p. 431. + Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 154. 94 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO MICROSCOPY. A. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (DrStands. Beck’s New Portable Dissecting Microscope.t — This dissecting Microscope is made in a portable form, with all the necessary apparatus packed into the thickness of the wood, so that when folded there are no FiG. 1. projections or loose pieces. The size when folded is 9 by 32 by 14 in. Fig. 1 shows the instrument ready for use, and fig. 2 how it is hinged and folded back when not in use. The table has a circular aperture for the reception of a white porcelain saucer or a piece of transparent glass. Fie. 2. The lens carrier consists of a tube which fits into a socket in the table. It has a double arm at the end of which the lens is fitted. At the lower end of this is a lever, which forms a focusing adjustment. * This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. + R. and J. Beck’s Special Catalogue, 1905. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 95. Reichert’s New Stand VII.*—This model (fig. 3) has a circular stage, and a bent arm which serves at the same time asa handle for carry- ing. There are the usual fittings and adjustments. HIG. os Reichert’s New Handle Microscope.t—This stand (fig. 4) has an inclination of 45°, a large circular stage, and an extra large curved bar * Reichert’s Special Catalogue, 1905, p. 7. t+ Tom. cit., p. 8. 96 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO which serves as a handle for carrying. There are the usual coarse and fine adjustments, and the accustomed substage fittings. C REICHERT, WIEN. Fic. 4. (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Nernst-Paul Optical Electric Lantern.*—This compact and portable lantern (fig. 5) is constructed entirely of metal, and may be connected to any electricity supply system. It does not require any special prepara- tion or external appliances. It is specially adapted for travelling, as * R. W. Paul’s Special Catalogue, 1905. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 97 the whole apparatus, ready for use, can be carried in one hand. The measurements of the case are 18 by 7 by 7 in., and the weight 15 lb. Fig. 5. Nernst-Paul High-power Electric Projector Lamp.*—This pro- jector lamp (fig. 6), which is a high-power illuminant for the lantern, takes a current of about three amperes, and in the same lamp a burner Fia. 6. may be used suited either for direct or alternating current, or for pres- sures of 100, 200, or 250 volts, a different burner being required for each of the systems of supply. Nernst-Paul Electric Science Lantern.j—This lantern (fig. 7) is adapted for horizontal or vertical projection, the whole apparatus being mounted on trunnions. When used for vertical projection the lantern is turned into the upright position, so that one reflector only is needed and brilliant illumination insured. The change from one position to the other is effected instantaneously. The metal stand has levelling * R. W. Paul’s Special Catalogue, 1905. t Op. cit. Feb. 21st, 1996 : H 98 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO feet and substantial clamps for fixing the lantern, the body of which, as well as all the working parts, is of metal. PATENT Fic. 7. Adjustable Microscope Lamp.*—R. W. Paul exhibited at the November; Meeting an adjustable Miscroscope lamp adapted for the Fie. 8. B-type Nernst lamp of any required voltage (fig. 8). It is readily fixed in place by means of the screw collar at the back of the lantern ; the * R. W. Paul’s Special Catalogue, 1905. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 99 latter has a double tubular body and a knob by which it may be handled. The feet of the tripod are drilled for screwing to the table, and are pro- vided with leather pads. Glass tinters and a ground-glass screen are supplied, and these are fixed to the front of the lantern by means of clips. Aitchison Photometer.*—This photometer is for measuring the loss of light by absorption and reflection in binoculars and telescopes. The instrument comprises, a lamp placed between two screens, the lamp being movable along a finely divided scale, and the screens are set at _ the extremes of a triangle, of which the scale forms the base. The other sides of the triangle converge upon the observation telescope, which consists of a triangular box with tubes projecting from each side. The tubes facing the screens carry object-glasses, while the third is arranged as an eye-piece. Two prisms are so arranged in the telescope that the light from each screen is made to illuminate half the field as seen in the eye-piece; the illumination of the field therefore varies according to the distance of the lamp from the screens. If a binocular or telescope be placed between one of the screens and the observation tele- scope, the light can be so moved that the two halves of the field are equally illuminated, and the loss of light is calculated by a reading from the scale. Beck’s Large Bull’s-Eye Condensing Lens.— This is shown in fig. 9, on stand, with raising motion and souEs ; the lens being over the centre of stand. Beck’s Iris Diaphragm.—This (fig. 10) is attach- able to the above apparatus. Fias. 9, 10. Sauver’s Bridge Object Holder.—This consists of a bridge-shaped plate of metal which is placed on the stage of the Microscope (fig. 11). The Fig, 11. specimen is held by rubber bands so that its flat surface is held against the under-surface of the bridge, the hole therein allowing of its ex- amination. It is made by R. & J. Beck. (4) ,Photomicrography. Portable Photomicrographic Camera.—This instrument (fig. 12), which was exhibited at the October Meeting, 1905, by E. Moffat, is suitable for travellers, and is only a few ounces in weight ; it will pack up with travelling Microscope in case, and when placed horizontally i is quite reliable with oil immersion lenses up to 1000 diameters. A isa telescopic tube, made in three lengths of 6 in. and of aluminium for lightness. * Catalogue, Optical Convention, p. 230, fig. 1. H 2 100 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO B, a plate with screw to fit into socket on lid of Microscope case ; C, a square of + in. mahogany with hole 3 by 3 in. in centre ; D, two small guides on each side of hole with stop to hold focusing screen and afterwards the dry plate when making the exposure; E, a cloth bag of thin light-tight material, or black kid leather bellows with light stiffen- ing ; F, elastic band to grip around ocular. No dark slide is necessary ; Fig. 12. simply cover the plate when making exposure with an ordinary focusing cloth of dead black material, which will be found quite sufficient even for the finest work. ; WHITE, T. CHaRTERS—Photomicrography as an Aid to Dental Research. Brit. Dental Journ., xxvi. (1905) pp. 1045-8. (6) Miscellaneous. Cinematograph and Microscopy.*—At a meeting of the Society of Arts, F. Martin Duncan showed examples of the successful application of the cinematograph to microscopical investigation, illustrating the * Journ. Soc. Arts, liv. (1905) pp. 26-8. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 101 circulation and rotation of protoplasm and the movement of the chloro- phyll bodies within the cells of the leaf of Hlodea; the circulation of the blood in the web of the frog’s foot and in the tail of the goldfish. The lecturer also exhibited microbioscope pictures of Hydra viridis, various birds, beasts, and reptiles in motion, and of the life and work of the wood ant. B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. Endo’s Fuchsin Agar.t—K. Fiirntrat finds that when fuchsin solution has been decolorised by sodium sulphite, the colour can be restored by the addition of the smallest quantity of either a mineral or organic acid, but the colour can again be removed by a further addition of sodium sulphite or by excess of acid ; the colour can also be restored by the addition of formalin, but can only be removed again by excess of sodium sulphite ; the solution decolorised by sodium sulphite regains its colour on warming, but on cooling the colour is again lost ; fuchsin solution is decolorised by a relatively large addition of acid, but if mineral acid is used the colour is not restored on heating. Endo’s medium consists of lactose nutrient agar coloured red with fuchsin, and to which sufficient sodium sulphite has been added to render it colourless when cool. On this medium the colonies formed by SB. typhosus are small and colourless, whereas in the same period of time those formed by #. coli are large and of a deep red colour, which is diffused in the medium ; after 15 hours growth these organisms may be differentiated. The author finds that single surface colonies of B. typhosus after 36 hours exhibit a faint pink colour, especially if the medium is more than two weeks old ; that the colonies of B. coli and the surrounding medium begin to decolorise after 24 hours, and in the course of the next day all colour is lost, especially with grouped colonies, the isolated colonies retaining the red colour for a much longer time ; the colonies of B. coli lose their colour more quickly if colonies of B. typhosus are grown simultaneously on the same plate. The author applies the results of his observation on the chemistry of fuchsin to explain these bacteriological phenomena. Modification of Endo’s Medium.{—W. Gaehtens has modified the fuchsin agar medium devised by Endo for the differentiation of B. typhosus and 8B. coli by the addition of caffein, which hinders the growth of &. coli. He gives full details of the method for preparing his medium. After many trials of various doses of caffein and of degrees of alkalinity, he finds that the addition of 0°33 p.c. of chemically pure crystalline kaffein to Endo’s medium of an alkalinity of 1°5 p.c. normal sodium hydrate, (? + 1°5 N) serves best to considerably hinder * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes ; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c. ; (6) Miscellaneous. + Centralbl. Bakt. Orig., xxxix. (1905) p. 487. t Tom. cit., p. 634. 102 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the growth of B. coli without affecting the development of B. typhosus and B. paratyphosus. Electrically-controlled Low Temperature Incubator.*—L. A. Rogers has described the following arrangement for a low temperature incubator. It is adapted from a small refrigerator (fig. 13) by putting in an insulating partition between the ice box and the lower chamber ; a 5 inch lead pipe C is coiled in the bottom of an ice box, and in the RuBBER BLOCK. IG—é B0x INVAR CLL L LLL LLL LLL (LILITLELLSLEDSITAADEEDDSADDEDSDEDDADED A : COIL. Cc Wo00 BASE Ip) O/lL AT BACK ——- REGULATOR. RUBBER BLOCK. i/ e OC HEATING COILS. c E ! UO Fie. 13. Fic. 14. lower chamber D D; the ice rests on the coil C which is connected with areservoir A containing a float valve, to insure a constant pressure ; the other end of the pipe is connected with the waste. A slow current of water through the coil will reduce the temperature of the lower chamber below 20° C.; the temperature may then be raised and maintained at any desired point by an electrical device. This consists of a resistance coil for heating, a bimetallic regulator connected with a low voltage circuit obtained from resistance coils, and a circuit-breaker operating the heating circuit. The regulator is composed of two strips of brass and ivar (a nickel-steel alloy) each } by } by 15 inches, riveted together and * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 236. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 103 attached firmly at one end to a block of hard rubber (fig. 14), the other end moving freely over a similar hard rubber block, to which is fastened the screw closing the current ; the adjustment of the tempera- ture is secured hy movement of the screw. The low voltage current is best obtained from a series of resistance units connected in a lighting circuit (fig. 15) ; a 32 c.p. lamp A connected in series with a number of coils of small iron wire, B B, answer the purpose. The circuit passes to the regulator C, then to the magnet of the circuit breaker D, and back to some point on the wire resistance, which is regulated by changing the connection H until it gives a current just sufficient to operate 'the magnet ; the regulator should be so arranged that the heating circuit is closed when the magnet pulls the armature F up against the binding post E. LINE 0 VOLTS a 110 VOLT G HEATING COIL. Bre. 15: Observations on the Drigalski-Conradi Method of Diagnosing Typhoid Bacilli.*—Ed. Monti has shown that by means of the Drigalski- Conradi medium, or other chosen media, or even the agglutination reaction, a positive diagnosis of a typhoid-suspected colony cannot be assured. For on this media there grow different colonies which resemble typhoid bacilli and more or less agglutinate with typhoid serum ; and, further, typhoid colonies can be found which agglutinate less actively than other species (Lipschiitz, Klinger, etc.). With our present knowledge of the biology of typhoid bacilli it is useless to hope to make a certain diagnosis in 16-20 hours, or even to separate and identify the specific organism from the feeces or urine. To control the suspected colony thoroughly necessitates 2-3 days. Further, a negative result with the Drigalski media does not exclude the presence of typhoid. The author could find the specific germ only in 5 out of 12 cases. His repeated negative results agree with those of Lipschiitz, Krause, * Arohiv Sci. Med., xxix. No.4. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xxxvii. (1905) p. 267- 104 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and Stertz, who examined the feeces and urine, and of Fickers and Hoffmanns, who experimented with the natural feeces and also with feeces mixed with typhoid bacilli. The method therefore serves only as a useful confirmation in the hands of an experienced laboratory worker. New Method for Differentiating Eberth’s Bacillus from Pseudo- typhoid and Colon Bacilli.*—Trapani says that in neutral glycerin the growth of typhoid and other pathogenic organisms is inhibited, whilst pseudo-typhoid and coli are uninfluenced. His method is as follows :—Typhoid, pseudo-typhoid, and colon bacilli are emulsified in distilled water and placed for one hour in the thermostat at 30° to destroy the clumps. Neutral glycerin tubes are then inoculated and incubated at room temperature, shaded from light, for 48 hours. The two latter flourish prolifically, but the former grows either not at all or very sparsely, owing to the clumps not having been perfectly destroyed. Technique of the Gruber-Widal Reaction.t —— Ernst Schottelins describes a simple and cheap means of obtaining blood for Widal’s re- action. The blood is absorbed from the puncture on to a densely rolled gauze or sponge swab, which is fixed on toa glass or metal needle, which in its turn is fastened toacork or rubber stopper. This fits into a tube, and prevents evaporation. The plasma is separated from the clot by centrifugalising, and removed with a pipette. Glucose in Pneumococcus Cultures.t{— R. Turroé finds that the presence of grape-sugar in liquid media is very conducive to the growth of pneumococcus. It is also inhibitory to other organisms, and may be used in quantities of 8-10 p.c. Pure cultures may be obtained directly from sputum. Caffein Enrichment Method.s—C. Birt draws the following in- ferences from his investigations on the action of cultivation media con- taining caffein :—(1) 0°5 p.c. caffein in 1 p.c. pepton water does not always restrain the development of the B. coli communis ; (2) 0°5 p.c. caffein in 1 p.c. pepton water inhibited the growth of 26 out of 31 races of B. typhi abdominalis examined ; (8) 0°5 p.c. caffein in 1 p.c. pepton water completely arrested the development of 18 varieties of dysentery bacillus; (4) caffeinated media are of service in isolating streptococci and staphylococci; (5) Negative results with caffeinated media cannot be relied upon to exclude the presence of 5. typhi abdo- minalis in water or dejecta. SmitH, BERTRAM G.—Collection and Preparation of Material for Classes in Elementary Zoology. [An excellent and practical article; very useful for a course of elementary invertebrate zoology. | American Natwralist, xxxix. (1905) pp. 779-89 (1 fig.). * Gaz. Osped. Clin., 1905, No. 58. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt., xxxvii. (1905) p. 268. + Miinch Med. Wochenschr., 1905, No. 15. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt., XXXvil. (1905) p. 268. t Journ. Physiol. et Pathol. gén., vi. (1904) pp. 718-19. . § Brit. Med. Journ. (1905) ii, pp. 1110-11. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 105 (2 Preparing Objects. Fixing and Staining the Goblet Cells in the Epidermis of Fishes.*—M. Oxner found that only two fixatives gave good results. These were Apdthy’s (equal parts of a saturated solution of sublimate in 4 p.c. sodium chloride and 1 p.c. osmic acid) and Johnson’s (in the same proportions as used for the Golgi reaction, but without the platinum chloride). The fixing time was from 15-24 hours. The material was cleared up in chloroform, cedar-wood oil, or xylol. The sections were stained with iron-hematoxylin, hematein IA, and after-stained with acid rubin, orange G, orcein, light green 8.F., or with erythrosin, saturated aqueous solution of kreso-fuchsin, with subsequent differentia- tion in picric acid. Acid rubin was found to be very effective. Victoria blue stained the goblet-cells dark blue, the rest of the tissue being unaffected. Apathy’s gold method, alcoholic safranin, Apdthy’s rubin 8, were also of much service. Demonstrating the Heart and Arteries of Rhipidoglossa and Docoglossa.t—J. Spillmann fixed most of the animals in aqueous or alcoholic solution of sublimate. For the heart muscle Flemming’s fluid and osmic acid were used with good result. Picro-acetic (saturated solu- tion picric acid and glacial acetic acid in equal parts) was employed for fixing the kidney. Owing to the brittleness of the material, difficulties were “experienced with the paraffin imbedding, but these were obviated by using cedar-wood oil instead of xylol. At first the sections were stuck on the slide with glycerin-albumen, but this method was after- wards superseded by warm water. The preparations were dried (? incubated) for 2 days, and then coated with a thin layer of collodion. The best stain was iron-hematoxylin, but Bohmer’s and Delafield’s hematoxylin were also used. Safranin was employed for detecting nuclear fission in the pericardiac glands. Demonstrating Spermatogenesis of Scolopendra heros.{—M. W. Blackman, when studying the spermatogenesis of Scolopendra heros, fixed the material with Flemming’s chrom-osmic-acetic mixture or with Gilson’s nitric-acetic-sublimate. The latter gave the better results. After a fixation of from 48-60 hours the objects were washed for several hours in running water, and then dehydrated in graded alcohols. The combined celloidin and paraffin method of imbedding was used. The sections made with the Minot microtome were fixed to the slide with albumen. The paraffin was then removed, and in some cases the celloidin also. The sections were stained with Heidenhain’s hemato- xylin, either alone or in conjunction with Congo red. Other stains used were Bismarck brown, cyanin, methyl-green, methyl-green-acid- fuchsin, Flemming’s tricolour stain, and others. (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes. Acetone-celloidin Method of Rapid Imbedding.S—F. Scholz places pieces not thicker than 3 mm. in pure acetone for half an hour. They * Jena Zeitschr. Natur., xl. (1905) pp. 589-646 (5 pls.). + Tom. cit., pp. 537-88 (3 pls.). $} Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xlviii. (1905) 138 pp., 9 pls. § Deutsch. med. Wochenschr., xxxi. (1905) pp. 419-20. 106 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO may then be transferred to celloidin, though it may be necessary to pass certain material through alcohol-ether for 15 minutes. The pieces remain in a thin celloidin solution for 4—5 hours, at 37°-40°. They are then transferred to a thicker solution for 2-3 hours, after which they are placed in thick celloidin. In the last condition they are submitted to the action of chloroform vapour in a closed vessel. In about 14 hours they will be of the consistence of cartilage. The blocks are next further hardened in alcohol for some hours. Using a Lathe as a Microtome.*—Having a few micro-sections to: cut, and being in possession of a small lathe, W. Gribben made the fixture shown in figs. 16 and 17, which enabled him to hold in the slide- rest the razor. By locking the lathe-spindle, to prevent its rotation, the Razor Blade object to be cut could be held in a chuck, while the cross-slide of the rest was used to give the cut, and the longitudinal slide to give the feed. Both screws of the slide-rest were provided with micrometers reading to 0*001 in., but the cross-slide screw was removed during the cutting to give a more rapid cut. The fixture, shown in figs. 16 and 17, is made of two steel bars, A and B, riveted together, and the two pieces of +-in. sheet-brass, © and D, which have each a cavity cut out to admit the razor-blade, as shown in section in fig. 17. The flat steel bars E and F are screwed fast to C and D, and the flat side of the razor-blade is held firmly against E and F, by the two capstan-head screws G and H bearing on the concave side of the blade. C and D are held on the round part of B by the two pinching screws K and L, and by loosening these screws, C and D may be swivelled around B, as a centre to alter the clearance angle of the razor. OC is graduated into spaces of 5° from 0°-30°, the graduations being read by means of the straight line M scratched on B. * Optical Instrument Monthly, i. (1905) pp. 13-14 (8 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, ‘MICROSCOPY, ETC. 107 C and D are so shaped that when the clearance angle is 10°, the cutting edge of the blade is approximately in line with the centre line of A. The fixture described above was all the author had to make for microtome work. The slide-rest was already provided with a boring- tool holder, which is a cast-iron fixture fitting the slide-rest in place of the usual tool-post, and having a $-in. round hole in it, parallel with the upper slide, and at the same height as the lathe-spindle. This hole is split on one side, and has pinching screws to close the split and clamp the round boring tools securely on the round shank A of the razor- holder. This arrangement admits of turning A on the boring-tool holder, so as to bring the razor edge vertical to give a straight cut, or with an oblique edge to give a drawing cut. © and D may be moved along to different parts of B in order to bring different parts of the cutting-edge into action. When necessary to loosen © and D, this is Fia. 18. done while the razor is clamped in place, so that C and D will be properly located in regard to each other. This fixture in conjunction with a lathe makes a fairly good micro- tome, if the requirements are not too exacting, as it cannot be used for the best or for riband work. Triepel’s Cylinder-Rotation Microtome.*—This has been designed by H. Triepel, and is made by the firm of G. Miehe, of Hildesheim. It is shown in fig. 19 one-third of the full size. A strong-walled hollow cylinder, 107 mm. external diameter, is firmly connected with a base- plate. The cylinder is supported on three uprights, and within it is a second hollow steel cylinder, 115 mm. in height and 80 mm. in external diameter. Its upper and lower ends are both closed by brass plates. To the under plate a small disk of hardened steel is screwed on, by means of which the inner cylinder rests on the micrometer screw. The steel cap. of the screw is also hardened. The raising arrangement is of the usual kind. Rotation through the space of one tooth raises the cylinder 2 yp. The object-holder is secured on the upper plate of the inner cylinder. * Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 118-25 (8 figs.). 108 SUMMARY OF GURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO In section-cutting the cylinder with object is rotated, whilst the knife remains motionless. The knife is fastened on a massive four-sided prism, which is somewhat reduced at the upper end. This prism is 23 cm. high, and stands on the right-hand side of the cylinder, some- what behind the horizontal middle line. On its front side the prism carries the bearing in which the axis of the winch rotates. On the left hand of the axis there is a toothed wheel, made of vulcanite, whose cogs engage in vertical flutes which are fitted on a projection of the upper plate of the inner cylinder, and which reach, collar-like, over the outer cylinder. Rotation of the winch causes a translation movement il | er | a _]— IP: =) aber om? Fie. 19. of the cylinder in the ratio of 2:1. The object-holder is so arranged that it can be set once for all at a certain distance from the cylinder axis. After the cutting of a section, further rotation of the winch in the same direction brings the object-holder into position for the next section. The application of a lubricant is superfluous, or only necessary after very long use of the instrument. It is to be noted that the object is moved with accurate perpendicularity against the knife-edge. The knife can also be arranged for oblique sections. The accuracy of the section- cutting is stated to be remarkable, and approximates very closely to theory. The absence of oil-layers removes a difficulty met with in many microtomes, and this improvement was a great consideration with the inventor. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 109 (4) Staining and Injecting. Staining Spirocheta pallida.* — K. Reitmann advises fixing the film in absolute alcohol for 10 minutes, and, after washing in distilled water, mordanting for 5 minutes in 2 p.c. phospho-molybdic acid. After washing with 70 p.c. alcohol and distilled water, the film is stained with hot carbol-fuchsin. The preparation is then treated in the usual way. G. Giemsa recommends that 1-10 drops of a 1: 1000 solution of potassium carbonate should be added to the water before it is mixed with the staining solution. The stain should be allowed to act for from 15-60 minutes. K. Herxheimer and H. Hiibner stained films with a filtered aqueous solution of Nile blue B. R. (1:1000) for from 16-24 hours. The Spirochete stained dark blue. When treated with Capri blue (1 : 1000) the Spirochete were grey. M. Oppenheim and O. Sachs stained films without any preliminary fixation, with hot carbol-gentian-violet solution (5 p.c. carbolic acid to 10 p.c. alcoholic solution of gentian-violet). The films were then washed and dried. The Spirochete are blue, and seem thicker than when treated by other methods. Staining Neurofibrils.;—By use of Bielschowsky’s method of re- ducing the ammoniacal silver with acetic acid,{ which he says is less complicated and more certain than Ramon y Cajal’s method, Wolff claims to show that the ‘contiguity but not continuity” view of the nerve dendrites is not supported. The dendrites are merely peculiarly differentiated sensory terminals in which there is not the slightest dis- continuity of neuroplasm or fibrils to be demonstrated. Successful results are conditional on minute care. Method :— 1. Fixation in 6-10 p.c. neutral formalin. Wolff has got good results with weak acid reacting formalin. Previous treatment with Flemming’s solution, Miiller, etc., does not matter if carefully washed out for several days with distilled water. 2. Wash out thoroughly with distilled water. The pieces should not be more than 2 mm. thick. Sections are best cut on the freezing microtome, but may be silvered en bloc, or imbedded in paraffin and the cut sections silvered. 3. Preparatory silvering. The sections, block or paraffin cut sections, placed in 2 p.c. AgNO, solution in dark for two or more days. 4. Wash for few minutes. ). Characteristic silvering. To 10 p.c. silver nitrate is added 40 p.c. caustic soda, drop by drop, until no further grey-brown precipitate appears. This precipitate is then dissolved in as little ammonia as possible, and diluted with 4 or 5 times its volume of distilled water (to be made fresh and used with horn needles and instruments only). In 4-2 or more hours the yellow tone changes to a more or less deep red brown. 6. Wash in distilled water for short time to remove excess of silver. * Deutsche med. Wochenschr., 1905. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Ref. xxxvil. (1905) pp. 507-8. + Biol. Centralbl., xxv. (1905) pp. 679-687. ¢ Journ. Psychol. u. Neurol., 1905. bs 110 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 7. Treatment with acetic acid: 5 drops in 10 cm. distilled water only until red-brown colour changes to yellow. 8. Reduction in 4-5 p.c. formalin of the more firmly combined silver (i.e. with the neurofibrils). Control under low magnification until the nuclei appear unstained on a brown and black background. Failure is denoted by nuclei more or less blackened and Nissl’s spindles in the cytoplasm. It is impossible to exactly control reduction in blocks, which take from 1-6 hours according to size. A small piece of the margin should be teased and examined. 8a. Imbed in paraffin with melting point of 45°-50°. 9. Fixation of the silver picture : All sections obtained in any way and treated as above are washed in tap water for 1-2 hours, and placed in a faint yellow watery gold chloride solution (1—0°5 p.c.), neutralised with lithium carbonate. The groundwork varies with the reaction of the gold solution, red if acid, faint blue if alkaline or neutral, whilst the impregnated fibrils are deep reddish violet or dark blue. 10. Wash for a short time in tap water, then in 5 p.c. sodium ‘carbonate for 5-15 minutes, and finally in tap water for 6-12 hours with frequent changing. 11. Dehydrate ; clear in xylol. Mount in balsam without applying any heat. Note.—If the neurofibrils do not stain by this method, the tissue is not spoilt for other staining methods. Staining of Spirocheta vel Spironema Pallida.*—El. Metchnikow and Em. Roux remark that too much importance should not be attached to the tint assumed by the Spirocheta pallida when stained by Giemsa’s method, nor to the number of turns of the spiral. They accept the view that the Spirocheta of Schaudinn is the cause of syphilis, and regard the disease as a chronic spirillosis with relapses. It has been recently suggested to alter the name to Spironema pallida, on account of the numerous differences between the microbe of syphilis and true Spirochete, such as plicatilis and refringens. Demonstrating the Parasites of Smallpox.t—Siegel recommends a mixture of 7 parts of eosin (1: 15000), and 1 part of Giemsa’s azur ii. (1: 1000) for staining Guarnieri’s bodies. The sections are left in the mixture for 2 hours, and are then mounted in balsam. The parasites are extremely small, and sporulate in the cytoplasm, a point which distin- guishes them from the sporozoon of foot-and-mouth disease, which sporulates in the nucleus. AMBRONN, H.—Ueber pleochroitische Silber-Kristalle und die Farbung mit Mitallen. [With suitable treatment, anistropicand pleochroic crystals are formed from solutions of silver nitrate ; hence there exists a labile form of silver the crystals of which do not belong to the regular, but to another (possibly the rhombic) system.] Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 349-55. HEIDENHAIN, M.—Ueber die Massenfarbung Mikroskopischer Schnitte auf Glim- merplatfen. [Treats of the author’s method of staining numerous sections on mica plates for class purposes. | Tom. cit., pp. 330-6 (2 figs.) * Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) pp. 673-98 (2 figs..) + Abhandl. k. Preuss. Akad. Berlin, 1905. See also Brit. Med. Journ. (1905) ii. Epit. 260, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 111 (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Parallel Brass Rings.— A series of six parallel brass rings, for mounting specimens parallel with plasticin, is shown in fig. 20. The specimen is laid flat surface downwards on a plate of glass or other = aD Sp | ee G Fic. 20, flat surface, and a ring somewhat deeper than the specimen placed around it. A 3 by 1 in. glass slip with a small piece of plasticin is then pressed upon the specimen till it touches the brass ring. The rings are made by R. and J. Beck. (6) Miscellaneous. New Method of Obtaining Anti-Bodies.*—H. Loeffler recommends, after many years extensive research, that the specific material (albumen, blood, bacteria, or tumour) be heated to dryness at a temperature suf- ficiently sustained: to kill all living matter without injuring the anti- bodies’ activity, and then powdered and inoculated into animals. Fowl albumen, blood, and spore-bearing bacteria are heated for half-an-hour at 150°, non spore-bearing bacteria for 2-3 hours at 120°. Albumen- and blood-precipitins, agglutinins, bactericidal and bacteriolytic material, were thus obtained. A similarly obtained mammary carcinoma serum (asses’ serum) precipitated not only carcinoma cells, but also normal gland-cells ; and, further, its inoculation into cachectic patients produced a visible improvement of the general condition and a local reaction, but without any retrogression of the malady. Methods of Microscopical Research: Vegetable Histology.t+— This work, by Abraham. Flatters, is of inestimable value to the student of practical botany. It is no mere compilation of untried methods, but bears throughout the impress of experience. The author has selected for description a few, but yet sufficient, methods which in his hands have proved successful, and adequate attention is given to the technical minutiz on which good results so much depend; thus saving the student who follows out the instructions much tentative labour and bad results. The first part deals with technique generally applicable. After mentioning the importance of collecting specimens at proper times and under suitable conditions, the author dwells at some length on the methods of fixation, the object of which is “to preserve dead tissues in as nearly as possible their natural conditions in the living state.” And to emphasise still further this important preliminary to all satisfactory and correct work, two illustrations show the marked contrast between good and bad fixation. Chapter II. treats of apparatus and methods of work. The author’s * Deutsche med. Wochenschr., 1904, No. 52. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt., XxXxXvii. (1905) p. 265. + London and Manchester: Sherratt and Hughes (1905) 4to, x. and 116 pp., 23 pls. and 29 figs. 112 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO microtome, ingenious and simple, with its ready method of calculating the thickness of sections, is illustrated and described in detail even to the often difficult setting of the knife. Terse but adequate instructions for imbedding in paraffin and celloidin are given, and the art of cutting sections in three planes, viz. transversely, radial-longitudinally, and tangential-longitudinally, in order to obtain a solid picture, illustrated. “Staining consists in differentiating the various composing tissues . and is governed by the chemical affinities of tissues which vary with age.” With this introduction the art of staining is explained, and in Chapter III., instead of a bewildering list of innumerable stains, 13 stains and counter-stains are described, with their formule and full details for manipulation—“a list which is very limited, but one which will be found sufficiently extensive for the general worker.” The technique is completed by formule of mounting media and cements, and illustrated descriptions of mounting cells and an ingenious turntable for ringing ovals. Chapter IV. systematically deals with type preparations selected to show plant structure from root to flower, including the growing cell and its contents, and every preparation has its corresponding illustration in the plates. These plates still further enhance the value of the text, and consist of 100 beautifully coloured microphotographs specially prepared for this work. One misprint occurs in the text of fig. 35 (7). _ When we recall the pitfalls of laboratory work and the days when tissues were cut by hand, held in a piece of pith, and the attempts at elucidating sections, which varied considerably with the operator’s skill, by the aid of text or diagrams, we can only put down this work in full agreement with the author’s prefatory remark that ‘“ had such a work been at my disposal twenty years ago, I feel sure that I should have been spared years of persistent hard work and many disappointments.” Clinical Diagnostic Bacteriology.*—A. C. Coles’ work on the blood is so much appreciated that his recent excursion into bacteriology insures a respectful consideration. After dealing with technique, the author treats of the various acid-fast bacteria in respect of their morpho- logical characters and their degree of resistance to acid, alcohol, and other decolorisers, and then describes his method of differentiating the tubercle bacillus from all other acid-fast tubercle organisms. The method amounts to this: stain with hot carbol fuchsin for about 7 minutes, and decolorise for about 4 hours or more in Pappenheim’s solution, or the author’s modification thereof, or in 25 p.c: sulphuric acid for 16-24 hours. Other organisms treated of are the Gonococcus, Ducrey’s bacillus, Pneumococcus, the microbes of influenza, meningitis, diphtheria, plague, actinomycosis, anthrax, relapsing fever, and parasitic fungi affecting the skin and hair. The last 20 pages are devoted to serum and cyto- diagnosis.. Most of the work is given up to discussion on the acid-fast, and more or less acid-fast red staining bacteria, about which the author gives evidence of much practical knowledge and experience. The work will be found to be extremely helpful to those who are anxious to obtain an insight into the difficult questions discussed and explained. * London: J. and A. Churchill, 1904, viii. and 237 pp., 2 col. pls. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. BES Nature through Microscope and Camera.*—This admirable intro- duction to the marvels of microscopy and photomicrography is the work of R. Kerr and A. E. Smith, the former contributing the descriptive portion, and the latter being responsible for the illustrations and the chapter on photomicrography. There are two Introductions, one by Professor Sims Woodhead, the other by the author. In the latter Mr. Kerr wisely remarks, that the more our young men take up intel- lectual pastimes the better it will be for the nation. After discussing the illustrations and high possibilities with the Microscope, and giving practical hints on photomicrography, the rest of the volume is devoted to describing and illustrating Radiolaria, Foraminifera, Insecta, Diatoms, botanical specimens ; human hair, skin, bone, muscle, lung, and blood ; mites, bacteria, hooklets of tapeworm, and silk. Most of the illustrations are extremely good, but exception must be taken to Plates 47 and 51, which do not fairly represent the human skin or the blood-corpuscles. The former gives only a rough idea of structure, and the latter shows an early stage of degeneration. Notwith- standing such trivial blemishes, the work must be described as being admirable in respect of general get-up, description, and illustration. Bacteriological Technique. — ‘“ Bacteria in Relation to Plant Diseases,” by Erwin F. Smith, is a notable example of how thoroughly the American Government appreciates the value of scientific work. The first volume, which deals with methods of work and general literature of Bacteriology, exclusive of plant diseases, is one of the most complete and practical treatises that have been published on bacterio- logical technique. It would be beyond the limits of our space to enu- merate even the outline of methods of work as given in this volume. It must suffice to say that every aspect of a bacteriological examination has been considered, and every phase of the routine of laboratory work mapped out in such a way that almost a neophyte could, with the aid of this text-book, conduct a bacteriological inquiry with hope of success. The volume is copiously illustrated, and the bibliography extensive. Methods in Plant Histology.t—This work, the first edition of which was noticed in this Journal, 1901, p. 604, has been much im- proved and augmented by the author, C. J. Chamberlain. More atten- tion has been given to collecting material, and the chapters on the paraffin and Venetian turpentine methods have been revised and much enlarged. Other new chapters deal with micro-chemical tests, freehand sections, special methods, and the use of the Microscope. This volume, which is half as large again as its predecessor, should be highly esteemed by botanists. Dreyer, G., & Jex-Buaks, A. J.—On the Agglutination of Bacteria. Mém. Acad. Roy. Sci. et Let. Danemark, i. (1905) pp. 219-60. ‘RicuteEr, O.—Die Fortschritte der botanischen Mikrochemie seit Zimmermanns “Botanischer Mikrotechnik.”’ [An exhaustive review of the progress in vegetable microchemical technique, to which is appended a very copious bibliography. ] Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 369-411. * London: Religious Tract Society, 1905, 194 pp., 65 pls. + Carnegie Institution, Washington, D.C., U.S.A., Publication No. 27 (1905) 4to, 285 pp., 31 pls. and 146 figs.). } Univ. of Chicago Press, 2nd ed., 1905, x. and 262 pp., 87 figs. Feb. 21st, 1906 I 114 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Metallography, etc. The Quenching of Steel.*—Semozay gives a lengthy account of his: investigations into the effect upon the hardness of steel and the position of the critical range, caused by varying the conditions of quenching, such as. temperature, duration of heating, rapidity of cooling, and dimensions of the mass quenched. Hardness was measured by the Brinell method. The critical temperatures were determined by taking cooling and heating curves, the junction of the thermocouple being inserted in a central hole. In the first series of experiments the samples (40 mm. by 10 mm. by 10 mm.) were heated in an electric furnace to the required tempera- ture, and quenched. In the second series the steel was heated to a temperature above the critical range, cooled slowly to the required tem- perature, and quenched. Curves showing the relation between quenching temperature, and hardness are given. In the third series the length of time during which the steel had to be maintained at a given temperature to produce the same degree of hardness on quenching was determined. In the experiments upon the effect of variation in the size of the speci- men, heating was carried out in a lead bath of large capacity. The steel was quenched in air, in oil, or in water. The author gives his conclusions at considerable length. A notable omission from the data given is the analysis of the steels employed in this research. Corrosion Grooves in Boiler Plate.,—C. Frémont and F. Osmond point out that the existence of local corrosions in boilers can only be accounted for by irregularities either in original structure or resulting from conditions of construction or service. Corrosions have been classified according to form, (1) in spots (‘ pustulaire”’) ; (2) in grooves. The former are probably due to original non-homogeneity of the metal, such as inclusions of slag, sulphides, etc. It might be supposed that the mechanical stresses to which a boiler is subjected when in service cause local strains which lead to irregular oxidation. The authors show how maximum stresses are localised at certain points and lines owing to the method of construction of a boiler. It is along these lines that corrosion grooves are found. The authors advance arguments which tend to show that strain effects in the metal do not account for the grooves. A much more probable explanation is that the plate first becomes covered with a layer of oxide; this oxide is not deformable, i.e. is brittle, and the slight elastic bending of the plate causes the oxide to crack along the line of maximum stress. A clean surface of steel is thus exposed, and oxidation goes on more rapidly. The small corrosion groove thus set up: is a line of weakness: stresses are still more localised along it, the re-formed oxide is cracked, again exposing a line of bright metal for oxidation. Corrosion grooves are much more dangerous in plates of poor quality than in good material. The authors give an account of the investigations, carried out on four old locomotive boilers, which led to the above conclusions, and illustrate their paper with a number of photo- micrographs. * Rev. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 737-74 (46 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 775-88 (25 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 115 Effect of Chromium in Steel.*—F. Osmond criticises Carpenter’s statement that chromium does not confer upon steel the property of being self-hardening.¢ After re-stating his former results which led to the opposite conclusion, the author points out that the temperature to which his chromium steels were heated when the self-hardening effect was obtained, was considerably higher than that employed by Carpenter. Hither this fact, or a difference in the rate of cooling, may account for the discrepancy in the conclusions reached by Carpenter and the author. Mechanical Properties of Single Crystals of Iron.{—F. Osmond and ©. Frémont obtained some iron in abnormally large crystals, from an old steel rail which had been in use as a guide for a damper in a furnace-flue for 15 years, and had thus been subjected to thermal con- ditions favourable to the development of crystallisation. The metal contained 0°06 p.c. carbon. A tensile test-piece was obtained, the effective portion of which was constituted almost entirely by two crystals. Two compression test-pieces were cut from a single crystal. Stress-strain diagrams are given. Brinell hardness-tests were made on different faces of a crystal, giving somewhat different results. Statical bending and shock tests showed that the angle made by the cleavage- plane with the axis of the test-piece had great influence on the results, and that brittleness only appeared under impact. Nickel-Manganese Steels.$—Having completed a general investiga- tion of the ternary steels (alloys of iron, carbon, and a third element), L. Guillet has taken up the study of the quaternary alloys, starting with nickel-manganese steels. Assuming the possibility of deducing their properties from those of nickel steels and manganese steels, the author gives equations from which the constitution (whether pearlitic, marten- sitic, or containing y-iron) of a steel of given analysis, may be calculated. Three series of alloys were prepared, the first containing 0°15 p.c. carbon, nickel 2 p.c., 12 p.c., or 30 p.c., manganese 5 p.c., 7 p.c., or 15 p.c. ; the second containing 0°75 p.c. carbon, nickel and manganese both varying as in the first series. The members of the third series have analyses which cause them to be placed on the limit of two groups. Certain of the alloys could not be rolled. As in the author’s former researches, the alloys were examined micrographically and mechanically in three states : (1) as forged (or normalised by slow cooling from 900° C.) ; (2) quenched; (3) annealed. Numerous tables of the results of tensile, shock, and hardness-tests are given. As in nickel steels, etc., alloys containing y-iron are transformed by cold working, the y-iron changing to martensite in a greater or smaller degree. Similar effects result from cooling in liquid air. The author considers that his deduc- tions as to the constitution and properties of these alloys, taking the properties of the nickel steels and the manganese steels as data, are fully borne out by the results of his experimental work. Nickel-manganese steels may for many purposes replace nickel steels. * Rev. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 798-9. + See this Journal, 1905, p. 776. ¢ Rev. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 801-10 (12 figs.). § Tom. cit., pp. 825-41 (1 diagram, 20 photomicrographs). Kim 116 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. Papers read at the Metallurgical Congress, Liége.*—L. Descroix gives a summary of these papers and the discussion which followed their reading. “ Hffect of Liquid Air Temperature upon Iron, etc.”—A further con- tribution by R. A. Hadfield to the study of this subject.f “Influence of Titanium upon Cast Iron and Steel.” —P. Delville gives an account of the work of previous investigators, and describes his experiments in which titanium thermit (a mixture of oxides of iron and titanium with aluminium) was added to liquid metal in the ladle. The oxides are reduced, titanium passing into the metal, the temperature of which is raised by the reaction. Blowholes are diminished and sounder castings obtained. The effect on the chemical composition of the steel is slight ; mechanical tests appear to be somewhat improved. A notable result of the addition is the elimination of nitrogen, which passes into the slag as cyanide. The presence of some form of carbon favours this reaction. “ Influence of Arsenic on Cast Iron and Steel.” —P. Delville concludes that arsenic resembles sulphur in its effect upon iron and steel. In basic steel 2 As+S should not exceed 0°1 p.c. “ Technique of Microscopic Metallography” ; “ Metallographical Exami- nation of Iron and Steel.” —The first of these articles by H. le Chatelier has been noticed previously.{ In the second the author points out the value of metallography to the metallurgical industry. In steel of good quality very little can be seen by microscopical examination. It is in defective metal that the most definite structures are developed. “Special Steels”; “ Metallic Alloys."—Two papers by L. Guillet, summarising his extensive researches. ArtH, G., AND LeJEUNE, P.—Sur un métal préhistorique trouve dans les environs de Nancy. [Analysis, photomicrographs, etc., of amass of steel weighing about 300 kg., found in the earth. Carbon 1°2 p.c., silicon 1°7 p.c.] Rev. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 789-92 (4 figs.). ARNOLD, J. O.—Steel as an Igneous Rock. Iron and Steel Mag., x. (1905) pp. 408-13. BrixBy, G. T.—Crystalline and amorphous states of metals. Tom. cit. pp. 419-25. GuILLET, L.—A practical and scientific study of the properties of bronzes, brasses, and special copper alloys. Eng. Mag., xxix. (1905) pp. 940-2. PoRLIER, A.—Sur la composition d’un boulet en fonte des fossés de la Bastille. Rev. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 793-4 (1 fig.). Pricr, M.—Frictional characteristics of bearing metal and their relation to miorostructure. Eing. Mag., xxix. (1905) pp. 592-4. * Rey. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 846-58. + See this Journal, 1905, p. 775. } Tom. cit., p. 669. 117 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. MEETING HELD ON THE 20TH OF DECEMBER, 1905, aT 20 HANOVER Square, W. Dr. D. H. Scorr, F.R.S., erc., PRESIDENT, IN THE CHAIR. The Minutes of the Meeting of the 15th of November, 1905, were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations to the Society (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last Meeting, was read, and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors. From Chamberlain, Chas. J. Methods in Plant Heo ey he Author 2nd edition. (Chicago,1905) . Coles, Alfred C. Clinical Diagnostic Bacteriology. (8vo, London, 1904) . The Publishers. Farlow, Wm. G. Bibliographical Index of North ae can Fungi. Vol.i., part 1. (Washington, D.C., 1905) The Author. Kerr, Richard. Nature through Microscope and Camera. (8vo, London, 1905) . Pantocsek, Josef. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Fossilen The Auth. Bacillarien Ungarns, ITI. Theile. (8vo, Pozsony, 1905) pge Slides mounted by Andrew Pritchard... : ', N. D. F. Pearce. Smith, ErwinF. Bacteria in Relation to Plant Diseases. Cay negie Institution Vol. i. (Washington, D.C., 1905) } of Washington. The Publishers. The President’ called attention to a donation of slides prepared about fifty years ago by the late Mr. Andrew Pritchard. These had been presented to the Society by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, and were exhibited under Microscopes in the room. Mr. J. Rheinberg called attention to an exhibit consisting of a fine series of about twenty photographs of diatoms taken with the Zeiss apparatus for photomicrography with ultra-violet light. They had been given to him by the designer of the apparatus, Dr. August Kohler of Jena, and were of peculiar interest as being one of the first series of diatoms which Dr. Kohler had taken. After referring to the arrangement for photomicrography with ultra- violet light,* and the great increase in resolving power consequent on being able to utilise light having a wave-length of 275 uy,t Mr. Rheinberg mentioned that he had heard that the first experimental photographs were taken about the year 1900 with objectives made from quartz and fluor-spar. Now the objectives and other lenses were made * See this Journal, Aug. 1905, pp. 513-18. + 1 uu = one millionth of a millimetre. 118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. wholly of one material, viz., fused quartz. That Dr. M. von Rohr should have been able to compute Microscope objectives free from spherical aberration from one material only was a remarkable achieve- ment. The photographs shown included a set of four of Amphipleura pellucida, taken under varying conditions with a 1*7 mm. monochromatic objective of N.A. 1°25, using light from the cadmium spark. The resolving power of this objective was therefore as great as that which an objective used with ordinary white light would have were it possible to give ita N.A. of 2°5. One of these photographs of Amphipleura pellucida, taken with oblique light from the condenser, showed the diatom clearly resolved into dots. There were also five photographs of Surirella gemma taken with the same objective, and attention was called to the beautiful crispness and sharpness of the images, and also to the way in which the black and white dot effect came out. Along with the photographs were comparison photographs of the same diatoms, giving the same magnification, viz., about 1800 diameters, taken with a 2 mm. apochromatic objective of N.A. 1°40, using light from a magnesium spark (A = 383 py). The difference in the appear- ance of the images was very apparent. Mr. Rheinberg remarked that the photographs showed that diatoms behaved in the ultra-violet light of the cadmium spark much as in ordinary light, but pointed out that many other substances transparent to ordinary light were more or less opaque to the light in question. For instance, it had been found that the fibres of the crystalline lens of the eye, certain cell membranes of plants, etc., were opaque to this light, and therefore yielded totally different images, which in some cases were Clearer. Taking this into account, besides the increased resolving power, he thought the new method of photomicrography was not only one of the most interesting, but also one of the most, if not the most notable ad- vance in practical microscopy of modern times, and one, moreover, which might be very far-reaching in its consequences, as the first step having now been successfully accomplished as regards the use of monochromatic light of shorter wave-length than the ordinary, the future held the possibility of continuous gradual progress in this direction, accompanied by greater and greater resolving power. The President thought that what Mr. Rheinberg had described was certainly a very important advance in photomicrography. Mr. C. L. Curties said that the photograph of Amphipleura resolved into dots was one of the finest yet shown, but this was not the first time this diatom had been so resolved, for he remembered that a photograph showing the dotted structure was made by Mr. Gifford, and also that Dr. Spitta not only exhibited a photograph, but also the diatom itself in the adjoining room. They were, of course, not so distinctly resolved as the specimens now exhibited by Mr. Rheinberg. Mr. Rheinberg said that he had not been aware that A. pellucida had already been resolved into dots. Whether new detail were seen, or whether merely an increased crispness were visible in the image, depended on the nature and degree of fineness of the structure being viewed. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 119 Dr. Hebb read a letter from Mr. Pearce with reference to the slides by Andrew Pritchard, presented to the Society. A description of these slides, and also of an objective by James Smith, written by Mr. Parsons, was read to the Meeting. Dr. Hebb also read the following letter from Mr. Nelson :— “Tt may interest you to hear that the flagella of the tubercle bacillus can be seen with a dry lens. The apochromatic 4 mm. (long tube), by Zeiss, and the 7a (short tube), by Leitz, both will demonstrate the flagellum. There is nothing of particular interest in this of itself, but there is one point worth noting, which is that it is only the bacilli stained with fuchsin that will shine on a dark ground, other objects in the field such as nuclei stained blue, hardly show up at all upon a dark ground. Therefore, if the flagellum was, as has been said, some other object stained blue and lying fortuitously against the bacillus, it never would -have been seen upon a dark ground. The image is necessarily a difficult one, even shining as it does with the fuchsin in it, but unless it was an integral portion of the bacillus and took the stain with it, it would be perfectly invisible.” A paper on “ A Fern Fructification from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore, Lancashire,” was read by Mr. D. M. 8. Watson, and illustrated by lantern slides. The President said it would be within the recollection of some of the Fellows present, that in his address in January, 1905, he attempted to deal with the question, “‘ What were the Carboniferous Ferns?” and he then pointed out that many forms which were thought to be ferns were not so, but were seed-bearing plants of the class now known as pterido- sperms. ‘Things had gone on much further since then, and some persons might now answer the question, “ What were the Carboniferous Ferns ?” by saying that there were none! If he had known of Mr. Watson’s specimens at the time of his address he should have brought them before the Society as examples of a true fern-fructification. Our knowledge had advanced in the meantime, and it was now known that Crossotheca, a synangic fructification, constituted the male organs of the pterido- ‘sperm, Lyginodendron, a discovery due to Mr. Kidston. He believed there were many of these fructifications which had been regarded as sporangia of ferns which were really the pollen-bearing organs of pteridosperms. He was inclined to refer Miss Benson’s genus Telangium to Crossotheca, and to agree with her as to its belonging to some form of Lyginodendron. As regarded the example brought before them that evening, he did not think from the data that it was possible to express an opinion as to the group to which it really belonged. Its general resemblance to Z'elangium had rather struck him, but after all this might be only superficial. When he first saw Mr. Watson’s sketches he thought the specimen was a Ptychocarpus, a fructification hitherto regarded as that of a Marattiaceous fern. The author, however, had shown sufficient reasons for placing his specimens in a new genus. Professor F. W. Oliver remarked that the communication of Mr. Watson’s paper to the Royal Microscopical Society was appropriate, as 120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. the study of paleo-botany had made such immense strides since the Microscope had been drawn into its service. Turning to the subject of the paper, he said that much interest attaches to synangia of the Paleozoic age. Within the last few days Mr. R. Kidston had demonstrated with unerring certainty that the long sought pollen-bearing fructification of Lyginodendron was of this nature, whilst in the case of Cycadeoidea (Bennettites), another and more advanced branch of the Cycadian alliance, Dr. Wieland had shown some time ago that the male fructification was. such as we now find in recent Marattiaceee. Under these circumstances it seemed not inappropriate to consider whether any light was thrown. on the morphological nature of the seed itself. Reference was made to the older view of C. A. Agardh, and also to that of Prantl, who com- pared the seed with a monangial sorus. An outline was given of Miss M. Benson’s suggestion that the seed should be interpreted as a modified synangium or sporangial cluster, in which the peripheral sporangia had become sterilised to form the integument. That proposal at the time it was made did not gain universal acceptance, for one reason because of the difficulty encountered in proving that the synangium to which Miss Benson had given the name Jelangium really belonged to Lyginodendron. Now, however, that we know for certain that representatives of two distinct groups of the earlier Cycadian forms possessed synangia as their male organs, the hypothesis undoubtedly gained in force. It was not likely to be lost sight of by fossil botanists. Mr. E. A. Newell Arber said he would like to add his testimony to the great interest of this paper. He had hoped that this new synangium would throw some light on the great question of the day—‘‘ What were the Carboniferous Ferns ?” He must confess, however, that the affinities of this new fructification seemed to be altogether doubtful. It was im- possible to decide, in the present state of our knowledge, whether it was the male organ of a Pteridosperm, or the fructification of a true Fern. He would like to ask Mr. Watson whether he had any information as to the mode of dehiscence of the sporangia, and especially as to the type of frond on which they were borne. He was struck by certain points of resemblance between the new synangium and Ptychocarpus, and although the present fructification differed in certain important features from the synangia known under that name, he would rather expect to find that it was also borne upon a frond of the Pecopteris type. If this was the case, it was somewhat remarkable that the fructifica- tion of such a frond should have been discovered from such a low horizon as the Lower Coal Measures, in which comparatively few members of the Pecopteridez are known tooccur. Hesuggested that an examina- tion of further sections by Mr. Watson might afford some evidence as to the type of frond associated with these synangia, and thus perhaps con- firm the distinct suspicion as to its nature suggested by a comparison between this new and interesting synangium and Ptychocarpus. The President fancied Mr. Watson would tell them that these specimens had only recently been discovered, and everyone knew how long one must search before finding the connection between a fructification and the plant to which it belonged. He remained still rather sceptical as to Miss Benson’s theory of the ovule, which Professor Oliver had brought PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. T2t before them, though he agreed with her as to the attribution of her specimens. Mr. Watson said that personally he thought it was most probably the fructification of a true Fern, probably a Pecopteris, but at present there was no evidence at all to show whence it came. The President thought the Society had been fortunate in having not only so interesting a paper as Mr. Watson’s, but also one which had brought out such valuable remarks from authorities on the subject. Dr. Hebb gave notice, on behalf of the Council, that at the next Meeting a motion would be made for the purpose of suspending By- law No. 36, so as to enable Dr. Scott to be elected President of the Society for a third year. -- Nominations for Council and Officers of the Society, to be submitted for election at the next Meeting, were then made, and Mr. J. M. Allen was appointed an Auditor on behalf of the Council. Mr. C. L. Curties was then proposed by Mr. Marshall, seconded by Mr. Taverner, and unanimously elected Auditor on behalf of the Fellows of the Society. Notice was given that the rooms of the Society would be closed from December 23 to January 1. The following Objects, etc., were exhibited :— The Society :—Slides mounted by Andrew Pritchard, 7 of Scales and Hairs, and 15 various objects mounted in balsam. Mr. J. Rheinberg :—A series of 20 photographs of Diatoms taken by Dr. Kohler with the Zeiss apparatus for photomicrography with ultra- violet light. Mr. D. M. 8. Watson :—Transverse section of Cyathotrachus altus sp. n. from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore, and Lantern Slides in illustration of his paper. 123 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. ANNIVERSARY MEETING, HELD ON THE 17TH OF JANUARY, 1906, AT 20 HANOVER SQUARE, W.. Dr. D. H. Scort, F.R.S., Erc., PRESIDENT, IN THE CHAIR. The Minutes of the Meeting of the 20th of December, 1905, were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. Pursuant to notice given at the preceding Meeting, Dr. Hebb moved the suspension of By-Law No. 36, for the purpose of enabling the Fellows to elect Dr. Scott as President of the Society for a third year. Mr. J. J. Vezey having seconded the motion, it was put to the Meeting, and carried unanimously. The President having appointed Mr. J. T. Pigg and Mr. Gardiner as Scrutineers, the ballot for Officers and Council was proceeded with. The List of Donations, exclusive of exchanges. and reprints, was read, and the thanks of the Society were voted to the donors. From Frame containing Six Micro-Daguerreotypes taken with the Electric Light by Léon Foucault in 1844 .. . jee SS Fifteen Slides of Oribatide .. . ol. 1. Mr. N. D. F. Pearce. The President regarded the donation from M. Nachet as exceedingly interesting. Personally, he was greatly surprised to hear that the electric light had been used in photomicrography so far back as 1844. M. Nachet had been a Fellow of the Society for over a quarter of a century, and he thought their special thanks were due to him for sending them this valuable present. The following letter from M. Nachet accompanied the donation :-— 17 Rus St. SEVERIN, PaRIs. 14 Janvier, 1906. MONSIEUR LE PRESIDENT, J’ai le plaisir de pouvoir offrir a la R.M.S. quelques photographies microscopiques qui sont probablement des plus anciennes que |’on puisse trouver. Ces photographies sont executées sur plaques d’argent d’apres la méthode publiée par Daguerre en 1839. Moins de trois ans aprés, notre grand physicien, Léon Foucault, alors jeune étudiant en médecine, imagina avec son maitre, le Dr. Donné de la Faculté de Paris, d’appliquer la photographie microscopique a la reproduction des préparations anatomiques et des éléments des liquides sanguins et autres. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 123 Aprés deux ans de travail,‘ces photographies furent reproduites par la gravure dans le bel atlas de microscopie qu’ils publierent en 1841. C’est avec un microscope analogue a l’ancien microscope solaire que Foucault commenga ces belles photographies, mais fatigué des variations constantes de la lumiére solaire, il imagina d’appliquer la lumiére électrique, et créa alors, la premiére lampe a point lumineux fixe et le microscope photo-électrique 4 condensateur, décrit dans la préface de atlas, par son maitre et collaborateur le Dr. Donné. Ces photographies sont donc contemporaines de Daguerre et de la premiére application de la lumieére électrique aux études scientifiques. Ces plaques originales qui sont venues en ma possession, peuvent soutenir la comparaison avec les reproductions microscopiques faites actuellement ; elles sont presque toutes datées et signées de la main de Léon Foucault. C’est une vraie satisfaction pour moi, M. le Président, de pouvoir enrichir la collection de la Société Microscopique par la présence de ces témoins des efforts faits par les anciens micrographes. Veuillez croire, M. le Président, & mes sentiments les plus respectueux. ALFRED Nacuet, F.R.M.S. Some excellent micro-photographs of Diatoms and Podura scales were sent for exhibition by Mr. T. A. O’Donohoe, who states they were all taken with a Swift Portable Stand, Zeiss Apochromatic Objective 2 mm. N.A. 1°30, Oil Lamp, and a very cheap enlarging Camera. Mr. O’Donohoe also sent some remarks made by Mr. Nelson upon these photographs, from which the following extracts have been made :— The Amphipleura pellucida is an excellent photograph of the so-called strize ; the black lines are nice and thin. The Surirella gemma.—The black dot picture is excellent. The Podura scale is excellent, especially in the upper part to the left hand. The structure upon the membrane is shown. This proves that the focus was right. Pleurosigma angulatum.—The x 2000 photograph is a long way the best. There is a part where the silex is admirably rendered with round holes in it and slightly darker edges. I think this is as good a representation of angulatum as any I have ever seen. You will notice that this is really a black dot picture, for if the hole had been smaller the dark fringe of the edge of the hole would have met and made a black dot. The size of the fringe depends upon the working aperture, that is, upon the size of the disk of light illuminated at the back of the objective. The white dot images at the top and bottom of the photograph are ghosts, the focus being too long. The bit near the nodule is good, but not so good as the part indicated above, because it exhibits a tendency to run into lines. 124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. The Report of the Council for the year 1905 was read by. the Secretary, as follows :— REPORT OF THE COUNCIL FOR 1905. FELLOWS. Ordinary.—During the year 1905, 19 new Fellows have been elected and 1 re-instated, whilst 6 have died and 14 have resigned. Honorary.—The following were elected Honorary Fellows at the Meeting in March last: Professor William Gilson Farlow, Professor Herbert 8. Jennings, Professor Edmund B. Wilson, and Professor R. W. Wood, all of the United States. The Council regrets to have to announce the deaths of Professor Abbe (of whom an obituary notice by Mr. J. Rheinberg appeared in the Journal for April), Dr. P. T. Cleve, and Professor A. von K6lliker. The number of Honorary Fellows is now 42. The list of Fellows now contains the names of 414 Ordinary, 1 Corresponding, 42 Honorary, and 82 Ex-Officio Fellows, being a total of 539. FINANCE. The Treasurer regrets to report that the amount received for Subscriptions during the year is nearly £45 below that for 1904. As. the number of Fellows has not decreased, the diminution is chiefly due to the fact that many more are in arrears than formerly, indeed there is over £100 overdue. This is much to be regretted, for it not only makes it more difficult to arrange the finances of the Society, but it seems to show that the habit of unpunctual payment on the part of some Fellows is growing ; in addition to which the amount of clerical work is greatly increased by this laxity in payment, as at least three notices have been sent to every Fellow in arrears. The Council would be sorry if it should become necessary to follow the custom of other Societies in this matter and publish the names of those who have not paid their Subscription ; but it is certain that something of the sort must be done unless the evil is corrected. JOURNAL. The Journal, somewhat larger than in recent years, contains seven papers, two of which, on Metallography, indicate the advances made in the application of the Microscope to the industrial arts. All the papers attain the standard of previous years. Ten less lengthy, but perhaps not less important and useful communications are included in the “ Notes.” The Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology, Botany, Microscopy, and Metallography is continued on the same lines as hereto- fore. The thanks of the Council are due to the Editorial Staff, among them being two ladies distinguished in Botany, for their unremitting attention and excellent contributions. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 125 LIBRARY. The Library is in better order than at the corresponding period of last year, mainly owing to a grant for binding given by the Council— though in this direction a good deal remains to be done. It has been found impossible to afford the luxury of a printed catalogue. INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS. The Instruments and Apparatus in the Society’s Collection continue to be in good condition. During the past year the following additions have been made :— Jan. 18.—An Adams’ Lucernal Microscope by W. and 8. Jones; an Old Portable Microscope. Both presented by Lieut.-Col. Tupman. April 19.—An Old Portable Microscope by W. and S. Jones. Presented by Mr. W. 8. Rogers. May 17.—An Old Microscope by Nathaniel Adams. Presented by Mr. J. E. Haselwood. June 21.—A Pocket Botanical and Universal Microscope by W. and S. Jones ; a Wilson Screw-barrel Microscope ; an Old Portable Micro- scope by Shuttleworth. All three presented by Mr. C. Lees Curties. Oct. 18.—An Old Wilson Screw-barrel Microscope. Presented by Major Meade J. C. Dennis. Nov. 15.—A Lucernal and Solar Microscope by Adams. Presented by Mr. Wynne E. Baxter. CABINET. During the past year 24 mounted slides of Seeds of Orchids, Diatoms, etc., were presented by Mr. W. M. Bale, a Fellow of the Society, and 22 Slides made by the late Andrew Pritchard, were kindly presented to the Society’s Cabinet by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, of Grant- chester. ‘T'welve of these slides are early specimens of mounting in balsam, the objects being inserted between slips of ordinary glass about $3 by 1 inch. The Treasurer also read his statement of accounts, and the duly audited Balance Sheet for the same period. Mr. Disney moved, “ That the Report and Balance Sheet now read be received and adopted.” He regretted to hear the Treasurer’s remarks as to the number of subscriptions in arrear, but hoped that the progress of affairs during the coming year would be such as would put the Treasurer in a more cheerful frame of mind at the next Annual Meeting. The adoption of the Report and Balance Sheet having been seconded by Mr. Radley, the motion was put to the Meeting by the President, and carried unanimously. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY 126 ‘suoppny { saILYay) saa] ‘Oo NUTTY NOSVY ‘(¢ "PO01I00 0 04 CUBS OY} pug puL ‘petoljtiem 8A0qe se SOIPUNOGE 841 PopyI9A o8]8 9ABY aM : AVOI00g otf} JO Woyssossod 044 Ur sraqONOA 043 Y4TA oUTUS 9q} persdmoo pus ‘4“unoooy Zuloso10) oy} pourmtexe OABY OM, “LOINSDALT “ANIMA “PP ‘9061 ‘§ Asnnune 8 OL 6L61F LPG BOR i vps he Sete es ste ate ‘sjuo) Jed eaayy, erpuy C IE STg * ** ‘syueg9 sad syexy pue SOIT, 89/8 YJNOG MeN 0-0. 007 =: ‘syu9Q sed sary, yo0}g uoTzeIod.109 weysuty40 x G0 00% SO aS Et ee “kee UE, WcO pe? F "sJUaWsaQUT 6 OL 80FIs 6 OL 8041F 6 Dik oL ee on ee ee ee ee ee ee 906I 0} eouBleg iT) IL LI Z ee oe or ee ee oe ee peumyor xB, euloouy “ 09 9 s* (sivek 043) peumoe JO YO0}g uo quay “ OD) O0G =e Ess AS eae ages yWsodeq woxy UMBIPyTM Se aie ere aay og Mma sosuedxg Ayoq puv oFejs0g 9 FI F SHOT JO 481] pus ‘sonsoyeyey ‘syurday « - ts 0 c ie ae oe ae oe oe ee ee ee 9oUBINsUyT OIL] “ 0 c c ee ee oe ae 8y00q sn[ding jo aIBg “6 “cc (6 g ral cI oe o oe oe oe .- ee on oe AroU01}81g “cs 0 0 09 oe oe .. oe on CPUGIICTICRCYNahte IOJ sjd1a0ey7 “ 0 OL eI ee on Og oe - ae sSUTPIOT! 468 SyuemIYyserjoyy “ 4 el 912 oe - “eo - ee oe ee ee [suimor jo a[8g “ 0 0 002 oe on on oe oe oe yueg 48 yisodaq uo pee, g “ 0 0 0¢ oe oe - ee oe oe **({]oMspeq a) Aoesoy 6 5.6 “Lee * ceinep Jed So], BIPUT “89T 78g Jo eseyomdg. | G FEG@e> se +s we 4. ‘079 “syU9UI48eA UT UO ysorojuy * Diet 069) | 8 gl 419 ———— 6 8 90 ‘' ** ** o8ejsog pue Suu OSaN Ses Ee esas? ae ee gaan 8 OT &€ eer fee ca SmOIzV.1ISN] |] Pl) Tay Sg sb eli Ce SO6I 9 9 LSIF oe o. oe ee oe ee sunipy | 9 Z ¥£ oe oe oe ee ee ee ee F06L —lsuInop jo sosuedxg “| 08 8 ee ee COT OS Bre A a ee ee Me ee Sarpuiqyoog “ —Ssuordiosqng jenuuy “ 0 8 66 oe oe ee og oe oe Oo oe peseqoind syoog “<6 9 ZL &% ee oe oe oe oe oe oe CEM § surpunodwmog “ 0 61 ISl oe oe o. oe oe ee Suryz0dayy pus SOLIB[BG 6 | 0) SI 6g ee oe ee oe oo oe ee ee 8090,7 uOIssIuIpy “ DeO 2B EE SS Pek ae ae te ae °0}0 ‘8[BOD “quay Ag | ees ae) hae ate a ge POEL Woy oousyeg oy, peers Cia “GO6T [ne ees *GO6T ‘ID “S06T ‘OH ISTE ONIGNA WVHA HHL YOX INAWALVIS HSVo “AGE PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. P27 The Scrutineers having handed in the result of the Ballot, the following Fellows were declared to have been duly elected as Officers and Council of the Society for the ensuing year :— President—Dukinfield Henry Scott, M.A. Ph.D. F.R.S. F.L:S. Vice-Presidents—Wynne KH. Baxter, J.P. F.G.S. F.R.G.S.; A. N. Disney, M.A. B.Sc.; George C. Karop, M.R.C.S.; The Right Hon. Sir Ford North, P.C., F.R.S. Treasurer—J. J. Vezey. Secretaries—Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL.D. D.Sc. D.C.L. F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S.; R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P. Ordinary Members of Council—Jas. Mason Allen ; Conrad Beck ; Rey. Edmund Carr, M.A. F.R.Met.S.; J.W.H. Eyre, M.D. F.R.S. (Edin.) ; A. D. Michael, F.L.S.; Henry George Plimmer, F.L.S.; Thomas H. Powell; C. Price Jones, M.B.(Lond.); P. E. Radley; Julius Rheinberg ; Charles F. Rousselet; Henry Woodward, LL.D. F.R.S. F.G.S. F.Z.8. LInbrarian—Percy H. Radley. Curator—Charles F. Rousselet. Dr. Scott said he should like to thank the Fellows of the Society for the honour they had conferred upon him by electing him as their Presi- dent for a third year, an honour which he quite realised was a special one, and one to which he had no claim ; indeed, it never entered his head that he would be so elected until the proposal was mentioned to him a short time ago. But although he felt particularly pleased and honoured by this act of theirs, he felt it the more because he was very conscious of his own deficiencies. One thing which always struck him very strongly was the extreme importance of the work which the Society did on the Physical and Optical side. It was perhaps upon this side that the centre of gravity of the Society lay, and it was here especially that he felt himself deficient. He was much gratified, however, that, as a purely Biological President, he had been able to give them satisfaction. Mr. A. D. Michael having taken the Chair, the President delivered his Annual Address—taking for his subject “The Life and Work of Bernard Renault,” illustrating the subject with Lantern Slides, including photographs of Renault and his laboratory, as well as some examples of his work in Paleeo-botany. Mr. Michael said they had heard with great interest the account of the work of the somewhat ill-requited French investigator of Fossil Botany, and he was quite sure that nobody could have been more com- petent to deal with such a subject than their President. It would not only be a valuable record of Renault’s work, but it would embellish their Journal and be a record of value in times to come. He had great pleasure in moving a hearty vote of thanks to the President for his Address, and in asking him to allow it to be printed and circulated in the usual way. Mr. J. J. Vezey had much pleasure in seconding this vote of thanks for the Address, which had been very interesting, but which Fellows would no doubt be able more fully to appreciate when they saw it printed in full in the Journal. He should like also to couple with this motion 128 FROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY, a vote of thanks to Dr. Scott for his consent to remain the President of the Society for another year. The subjects he had brought before the Society in the past year had been of great interest and to many of the Fellows quite new. The President had referred to his own want of knowledge of the “ brass and glass” side of the Microscope, but it must be remembered that questions relating to the optical construction of the Microscope, however interesting and important, would be of little value were it not for the practical application of the instrument to the pur- poses of scientific research and demonstration. As the President could not very well put this to the Meeting himself, it was submitted by Mr. Vezey, and unanimously carried. The President said he was greatly obliged to Mr. Michael and to Mr. Vezey for the extremely kind words in which they had moved and seconded this vote of thanks, and to all present for the kind way in which they had received the address. He had felt some pleasure in bringing this subject before them, not only on account of the interest he took in the kind of work done, but because he was glad to be able to do something to honour the memory of a worker whose contributions to the subject of fossil botany had been so considerable, and whose work had been so little appreciated in his lifetime. He believed, however, that it was contemplated to do him some posthumous honour by naming a street in Paris after him, and that a number of letters had been written by members of the French Academy supporting this idea. A vote of thanks to the Honorary Officers of the Society for their services during the past year was moved by Mr. Maurice Blood, seconded by Mr. A. 8S. Hoole, and unanimously carried. The President said he had depended entirely upon the Officers of the Society for the conduct of its affairs, and he had never known a society to run so smoothly as this. Personally he was called upon to do very little, so that the successful working of all their business was entirely due to the Officers. Mr. J. J. Vezey, in responding to this vote on behalf of the Hon. Officers, said they were very much obliged for this expression of approval, and it was a great pleasure to hear what the President had just said as to the smoothness with which the work of the Society had been carried on by the help of the Officers. Votes of thanks to the Auditors and Scrutineers were then moved by Mr. Frank Orfeur, seconded by Mr. Taverner, and on being put to the Meeting by the President, were carried unanimously. New Fellows.—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows : Messrs. P. Murrell and Frederic J. W. Plaskitt. The following Objects were exhibited :— The Society :—A frame containing six micro-daguerreotypes of blood, milk, etc., taken with the electric light by Léon Foucault in 1844. The President :—A number of Lantern Slides, including photographs of Renault and his laboratory, in illustration of his Address. JOURN.R.MICR S0C.1906 PLIV. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. APRIL, 1906. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. +o Il—The President's Address: Life and Work of Bernard Renault. By DUvuKINFIELD H. Scort, F.R.S. (Read January 17, 1906.) Pratss IV. anv V. I have chosen this subject for my address this year for two reasons. First, because Bernard Renault did more than any other man— with the possible exception of my late friend Professor W. C. Williamson, for whom we may perhaps claim an equal place—to make known the structure of fossil plants by microscopic investi- gation ; and secondly because he was an Honorary Member of our own Society. It is a source of great satisfaction to me that we were able to do him this honour, conferred within six months of _ his death, for in his own country his merits, though realised by his scientific colleagues, by no means received the public recognition they deserved. On several occasions the subject of the structure and relationships of extinct plants has been brought before you, by others as well as by myself, and it is not, I trust, inappropriate that we should give our thoughts this evening to the career of one who, in his own field of research, acted so consistently in the spirit of our motto: “Minimis partibus, per totum Nature campum, cer- titudo omnis innititur.” Bernard Renault was born at Autun on March 4, 1836, of respectable middle-class parentage. After a creditable career as schoolboy and student, he became Bachelor of Science at the Autun College in 1854, and Bachelor of Letters the next year. He then April 18th, 1906 K 130 Transactions of the Society. entered the Institut Brenot at Dijon, where he was soon after- wards appointed Professor of Chemistry and Physics. For some time he was known to the scientific world as a chemist, and his publications for the first few years of his career were all on chemical subjects. An important Thesis on Electrolysis obtained for him in 1867 the degree of Doctor of Physical Science at Paris, and a post at the Normal School of Cluny. But in the mean time Renault had begun the work to which his mature life was to be devoted. The neighbourhood of his native place, Autun, was formerly extraordinarily rich in silicified remains of plants, which in certain fields lay on or near the surface of the ground, so as to be turned up by the plough in such quantities as to be compared to the débris of a forest. Seventy years ago these precious fragments were even used for mending roads. It seems that when Renault began to interest himself in these specimens they had already become comparatively scarce, but enough re- mained to repay industrious search, and besides, there were impor- tant collections previously made, notably those of M. Faivre and the Abbé Landriot. It appears to have been the former, an ardent local collector, who introduced Renault to the laborious work of preparing the fossil specimens for examination. Throughout his life Renault was in the habit of making his own preparations—an extraordinarily slow and difficult task, especially when the petrify- ing material is hard silica, as is the case with these French specimens. Unfortunately, he had little or no assistance, and his work, in spite of his incomparable industry, was restricted by this mechanical difficulty. Renault made a practice of communicating his discoveries and preparations to Adolphe Brongniart, the great founder of scientific Paleobotany, who at that time was Chief Inspector of Mines at Paris. It was sometimes part of the great savant’s official duty to inspect the Normal School at Cluny, where Renault was then in charge of - the chemical teaching, and was thus only able to give his leisure moments to Fossil Botany. Brongniart is said to have found some consolation in these meetings with his enthusiastic disciple for the dulness of an official visitation. The late M. Roche, the friend and collaborator of Renault, who unhappily has not long survived his distinguished colleague, and to whose biography of his friend I am deeply indebted, gives a vivid account of fossil-collecting in the stony fields of the Autun country. During the holidays, Renault was to be found almost every day “beating the fields for specimens, an exercise in which he found rest from his indoor work. With his geologist’s satchel on his back, and his big hammer in his belt, he knew how to lead us in his train; he always returned with loads beyond our strength. Next day we witnessed his delight, when, after a thorough washing of the blocks, he found some parts preserved. The bad pieces, The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 131 which he did not want, were remorselessly thrown into the gutter.” (Roche, 1905, p. 17.) One day, when Renault was accompanied by his friend Grand’Eury, another illustrious paleobotanist, who happily is still with us in full vigour, a curious incident occurred. Grand’Eury, as they approached a good locality, asked his friend, “What do you want me to find?” “A Stgillaria with its bark on,’ replied Renault. In a minute or two Grand’Eury picked up a block, and without examining it said, “There’s the Sigi/laria you asked for.’ Chance had favoured him. Renault cleaned the specimen according to custom; it revealed itself as a magnificent Sigillaria spinulosa, which formed the subject of one of his best known memoirs, written in collaboration with Grand’Eury. (Renault, 1874.) It was ten years before another piece was found, and no more has been met with since then. Those who have worked at such subjects may be able to recall coincidences almost as sur- prising. It was from the permocarboniferous deposits,both at Autun and at Grand Croix near St. Etienne, that Renault drew most of the material for his detailed studies. But he was able to add to the resources of palzobotanical science by the discovery of a fossil- iferous bed at a much lower horizon. At Esnost, twelve kilometres from Autun, there had been some prospecting for coal as long ago as 1812. Renault examined the débris from the abandoned pits, and was able to show that they contained fossils of Lower Carboniferous age, of the stage unfortunately called Culm on the Continent, though the original Culm of Devonshire, from which the name is taken, is now known to have been of much later date, as Mr. Arber has shown. In the Lower Carboniferous of Ksnost, Renault made important discoveries of petrified plants, including specimens of Archwocalamites, the most ancient type of Equisetales, Lepidodendron and its cones, with other Lycopodia- ceous remains, the fern-like Diplolabis with its fructifications, and other fructifications of the groups, now so problematic, allied to Ferns. Renault had scarcely started on his paleobotanical career, when he was called away on duty of a very different and sterner character. One of his earliest and most important discoveries, that of the anatomical structure of the remarkable genus Spheno- phyllum, was communicated to the French Academy on May 30, 1870. As no one of my generation is likely to forget, war was declared by France against Prussia on July 15 of that year. During the succeeding siege of Paris, the illustrations to the Sphen- ophyllum memoir were lost, and its publication long delayed (till 1873). Renault himself, however, had no leisure for scientific regrets. “When the terrible year arrived,” says M. Roche, “Renault, esteemed by all, and well known for his honourable K 2 132 Transactions of the Socrety. character, was designated by the Committee of National Defence, sitting at Lyons, to organise the defence at various points of the Sadne-et-Loire. This mission was full of difficulties, in the midst of the orders and counter-orders coming from every quarter, and representing the unhappy disorder resulting from an improvised de- fence. Though constantly called from one point to another, search- ing for cartridges which were abundant just where they were not wanted, he succeeded in giving satisfaction to administrators over- whelmed by the critical position ; he received the greatest eulogies.” Though Renault does not appear to have been exposed to the dangers of actual war, he none the less had to suffer severely for his country. On his way to Autun, then threatened by the Prussians, he was seized with smallpox, so prevalent under the evil conditions of war-time, and for some days was given up by the doctors. His friend, M. Penjon, Professor of Philosophy at Lille, came to his assistance during his illness; Renault did not forget his timely aid, and commemorated him in the name of the now famous fossil fructification, Cordaianthus Penjoni (Roche, 1905, p. 7). During his convalescence, Renault once more found recrea- tion in collecting and preparing the fossil plants of his native district. With the return of more peaceful times an important change took place in Renault’s position. In 1872 he was summoned by Brongniart to the Museum of Natural History at Paris—the field of all his future labours. He co-operated with his great chief in the classical work on silicified seeds, published posthumously under Brongniart’s name in 1881 (Brongniart, 1881). For the first four years Renault had no other title than that of “Préparateur,” but in January 1876 he was officially nominated “ Assistant Naturalist at the Museum, attached to the Chair of Botany, Organography, and Physiology.” This modest post was all he obtained to the day of his death. Few men so distinguished have received such miserably inadequate recognition from their official chiefs, an injustice which his learned countrymen cannot speak of without indignation. Renault had no laboratory at first; after a time, however, he induced the architect of the museum to put up for him, under the head of “repairs,” two little glazed wooden boxes, one on each side of the portico of the botanical and geological department. Chevreul, the venerable director of the museum, was indignant when he first saw this inartistic excrescence on the architecture of his building. The little boxes are shown in the accompanying photograph, taken by my friend, Professor F. W. Oliver, last April. The one to the left was the workshop where Renault cut his fossil sections, that to the right was the laboratory proper, where his microscopic work went on, and where he received his scientific visitors. “ Renault’s cage,’ as the laboratory was jocosely called, led WAR 1906. JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. ‘O][OdINJVN SdIOJSIH{,P FESN| EY} JO OoIydod 9yz ur ‘AadozeAoqey pue doysysdoAM S8,}[NBuSYy ws, : sat +6; XR . ae ape es dines - sain oan ~ : ei i is [To face p. 132. The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 133 constituted to the end of his life his only official quarters. It looks exactly like a porter’s lodge, and the savant whom it sheltered was often addressed by strangers as the concierge, a comic situation which he thoroughly enjoyed. Visitors to the laboratory, as I know to my ¢ost, were sometimes the victims of the same mistake, and were not always equally capable of dealing with the position. In this tiny laboratory the material result of Renault’s labours is now deposited, in the form of no less than 7000 preparations showing the structure of fossil plants, almost all of them, as I understand, the work of his own hands. He utilised, of course, at the same time the great collections of the museum. “The fossil impressions,” as M. Roche says, “ were his herbarium, the silicified wood his anatomical material.” The eminent physiologist, Paul Bert, interested himself in Renault’s work, and it was through his efforts that the latter was authorised to give a course on Vegetable Palaeontology, undoubtedly the most important course of lectures ever given on this subject. It extended over five years, from 1879-83, and was almost wholly based on his own researches. After every lecture there was a demonstration of the actual specimens and preparations, and each hearer received a copy of the illustrations prepared for the course. The lectures of the first four years were published at Renault’s own expense, and form his famous “Cours de Botanique Fossile,” a classical work, which will always be indispensable to the student of fossil plants. The groups dealt with are exclusively the fossil Vascular Cryptogams and Gymnosperms. Then, as now, there was much difficulty and dispute as to the true boundary between these two divisions, though the position of the contested frontier has somewhat shifted since those days. The limits of the “Cours” are still those within which the real triumphs of fossil botany have been won. A smaller and more popular manual was published in 1888, “ Les Plantes Fossiles.” It was a great misfortune that the course was never resumed. Paul Bert wished to have a Chair of Vegetable Paleontology founded for Renault, which was obviously the right thing to do; but this, and all other efforts on his behalf, were unhappily frustrated. Simultaneously with the commence- ment of this course, in 1879, Renault brought out his important work, “Sur la Structure Comparée de quelques Tiges de la Flore Carbonifére.” Besides other investigations of much value, this memoir contains his wonderful account of the complete structure of the fossil Gymnospermous family, Cordaitez, in all their organs reproductive as well as vegetative, perhaps the most remarkable redintegration of a wholly extinct group of plants which has yet been accomplished. The “Tiges Comparées” was his main thesis for the degree of Doctor of Natural Science. Renault’s work went on amid depressing conditions of neglect and even hostility. Iam neither able nor willing to dwell on the 134 Transactions of the Society. nature of these discouragements, but it is right that they should be referred to in order that we may do justice to the indomitable pluck and perseverance which enabled him to work on, in spite of all depressing influences, with undiminished energy and zeal. It is, however, deeply to be regretted that owing to the want of proper assistance his work was seriously hampered, and much valuable material remained unutilised at the time of his death. Apart from the scientific papers—200 or more in number—to some of which I shall refer in the second part of this address, we may mention the great “Etude sur le Terrain houiller de Com- mentry,” published in 1888-90, in which M. Zeiller co-operated, a complete account of a rich flora of Upper Coal-Measure age. A work of even greater importance from a general point of view was the “ Bassin houiller et permiend’ Autun et d’Epinac: Flore Fossile.” The first volume, limited to Ferns, was by M. Zeiller, and appeared in 1890. The second, accompanied by a magnificent atlas of over 60 plates, is the sole work of Renault; it appeared in 1893-6, and deals with all groups of paleozoic plants, and more especially with their internal structure. In this great book his work may be said to have culminated, though the stream of his publications flowed vigorously to the last. Renault appears to have been as successful in the character of a public lecturer, especially at his native town of Autun, as he was in the field of original investigation. M. Roche speaks of him as “a great populariser of Science.” Owing chiefly to his influence, Autun became a scientific centre of an importance almost un- paralleled in the case of a provincial town. Renault’s health began to be seriously affected in the year 1902, when he was much troubled by retinal hemorrhage, which for some time compelled him to forego the use of Microscope or lens—a painful deprivation to so zealous an investigator. This affection of the eyes was but a symptom of severe internal mischief, and the end soon approached. It is a comfort to learn that the patient suffered little and never realised his danger, his friends, who were well aware of his critical condition, studiously keeping the know- ledge from him. He preserved his consciousness to the last, with- out any anticipation of death, and passed away on October 16, 1904. The French Academy had always recognised the value of ' Renault’s work, as shown by various prizes awarded him, at dates ranging from 1873 to 1902. Since his death I hear that it has been proposed to name one of the streets of Paris after him, an honour often conferred on deceased men of science in that capital. I have had the privilege of seeing a large number of letters from Members of the Academy vigorously supporting this proposal. For the photograph of Renault reproduced in this address I am indebted to his cousin, Madame Bocquet Renault, who, I under- The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 135 stand, was accustomed to help him in his work as secretary. The photograph was taken in 1888, when he was 52 and in full vigour. The only time I met Renault myself was five years later; he then already looked appreciably older. On that visit I found him just emerging from his workshop, where he was evidently in the act of preparing some of his fossil sections. He was exceedingly kind in showing me the most interesting things in his collection, and I remember he at once convinced me of the truth of one of his conclu- sions, as to which we in England had been somewhat sceptical up to that time, namely that the fossil named Astromyelon by Williamson was really the root of Calamites (Renault, 1885 and 1896). The generous and candid treatment which I experienced on that occa- sion at Renault’s hands was the more admirable, as he evidently regarded me as an emissary from the enemy’s camp, for I was then working in conjunction, as a junior colleague, with Williamson, his old rival and often his opponent. The position might have been difficult, but Renault happily possessed a sense of humour, and any divergence there may have been on scientific questions only added a certain piquancy to our personal relations. Renault’s work as a paleobotanist was far too extensive to be dealt with as a whole within the limits of a Presidential address. The most that can be attempted is to give a few illustrative examples. As M. Zeiller points out, the work of Renault falls naturally into two divisions (Zeiller, 1904); the first embracing his investi- gations of the higher fossil plants, more especially the structural specimens from Paleozoic strata, while the second was concerned with fossil micro-organisms, Bacteria, Fungi, and the lower Alge, and their action, especially in relation to the production of coal in its various forms. The second pericd coicides approximately with the last ten years of his life; but the two lines of work overlapped, his re- searches on the higher plants continuing to the last, concurrently with the investigation of micro-organisms. I shall here limit my remarks almost wholly to the former, which is more familiar to me, and is also, without question, of more assured value. 1. BOTRYOPTERIDE. Renault’s first paleeobotanical paper (dated 1868, but published in 1869) is on a Fern-like petiole (Anachoropteris pulchra), from the Upper Coal-Measures of Autun (Renault 1868). He noted, among other points, the presence of pitted elements in the wood— a rare character among true Ferns. Though of no great importance in itself, this early work stands in close relation to one of his most fertile lines of research. 136 Transactions of the Society. A little later, in a memoir dated 1869, but not published till after the war, in 1871 (Renault, 1869), the structure of stem and petiole is described, and their relations determined, in the two genera Zygopteris and Anachoropteris (Z. Brongniartw and A. De- caisnet). The genera are well distinguished by their petiolar struc- ture, though the stem with its single vascular cylinder, recalling that of some of the Filmy Ferns, is of similar organisation in both. At the same time the petioles of other species of Zygopteris were described. This was an excellent piece of work, and we shall see to what it led. A few years afterwards, in 1875, Renault announced the dis- covery of a new genus, Botryopteris (Renault, 1875), giving an accurate account of the anatomy of the stem, although he had only a single fragment to work with. This is, perhaps, the simplest type of stem known, the vascular cylinder consisting merely of a solid strand of tracheides, and affords the rare case of a Paleozoic plant differing in the direction of greater simplicity of structure from its probable nearest allies in the recent flora. This, however, even in the case of Botryopteris, only applies to the stem. Renault further described the characteristic petiole, and, what was more important, was able to identify the fructifications, dense masses of large, pyriform sporangia, each with a broad, band-shaped “annulus.” He found that they were grouped in tufts on the branches of a naked rachis, indicating dimorphism of the fertile and sterile fronds. As regards the affinities of the new genus, Renault pointed out, with remarkable acumen, analogies with the Hymenophyllacez, Osmundacee, and Ophioglossacez, inferring that there was a relation to all three groups, and coming to the conclusion that Botryopteris was intermediate between the true Ferns and the Ophioglossacee. His views appear fully justified in the light of later research. The next year (Renault, 1876) the fructifications of Zugopteris were discovered, and proved to present a clear affinity with those ot Botryopteris, though differing in well-marked generic characters. In the Cours de Botanique Fossile (Renault, 1883), the two genera are treated as the representatives of a distinct family, the Botryopteridexe, which from that time onwards has played a more and more important part in the taxonomy of the Paleozoic flora (Renault, 1891 and 1896). Although some of Renault’s conclu- sions, especially as to the heterospory of the family, may not have been substantiated, one of his greatest services to science was the recognition of this group—far more extensive, probably, even than he imagined. At the present time they are regarded by many authorities as the most important representatives of the primitive Filicineze, which long preceded the advent of Ferns, in the narrower sense, as we know them at the present day. The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 137 2. PECOPTERIDEA. At the present moment much of the interest of Paleozoic botany centres in the Pecopteridez. The discoveries of the last three years have transferred so many of the so-called Ferns to the ranks of seed-bearing plants, that doubts have even been expressed whether, at least in the older Carboniferous strata, there were any true Ferns at all. Apart from the Botryopteridez, a group which some would separate from the Ferns proper, the last refuge of the true Ferns has hitherto been found in the genus Pecopteris. This stronghold, it is true, was rudely shaken when, in April of last year, M. Grand’Eury discovered fronds of Pecopteris Pluckeneti laden with seeds! The species, however, is an aberrant one, and cannot decide the fate of the genus as a whole. A large number of the species of the form-genus Pecopteris are known to have borne fructifications of the type commonly recognised as Marattia- ceous. The sporangia are somewhat massive, without a definite annulus, and, in the more characteristic cases, are united together, like the carpels of a multilocular ovary, to form compound fructi- fications known as synangia. While our knowledge of the external characters of such fructifications is chiefly due to Stur, Zeiller and Grand’Eury, it is to Renault, more than anyone else, that we owe an acquaintance with their internal organisation, which he described in Sculecopteris polymorpha, Ptychocarpus unitus, Pecopteris geriensis, P. oreopteridia, P. eaiqua, Sturiella intermedia, and others (Renault, 1883 and 1896). The case last mentioned is particularly interesting, as here the sporangia, though grouped in definite synangia, possess a kind of annulus, thus showing a remarkable combination of characters. Renault’s observations undoubtedly tended stronely to confirm the idea of the Marattia- ceous affinities of the fossils in question. Whether this view, once, as it seemed, so unassailable, can hold its ground, or whether we shall have to admit that all these fructifications, like Crossotheca Honinghausi, were but the pollen-bearing organs of Pteridosperms, cannot yet be decided. In either event, the ultimate decision will rest, In no small degree, on the accurate data afforded by Renault’s researches. 3. NEUROPTERIDEA. The building-up of our knowledge of this family, now re- cognised as one of the main divisions of the Pteridosperms, has been the work of many investigators, among whom Renault claims an important place. It was he who first demonstrated the anatomical structure of the leaves of Newropteris and Alethopteris, and was able to show that their petioles were identical with the petrified specimens long previously named Myeloxylon by 138 Transactions of the Society. Brongniart. The evidence for this conclusion is fully stated in the “Cours de Botanique Fossile” (Renault, 1883), where it is shown that the type of petiole previously known as Myeloxylon Landriotw, was characteristic of Alethopteris, while the structure of M. radiatum belonged to species of Neuropteris, and perhaps also of Odontopteris, results which confirmed the acute suggestions already made by M. Grand’Eury. Some years previously Renault had prepared the way by a detailed study of the structure of the petioles in question (Renault, 1874) which he then re-named Myelopteris. The reason for this change in nomenclature was his conviction that these organs belonged to Marattiaceous Ferns, an opinion which he still main- tained in 1883, though by that time evidence had already been brought forward in Germany to show that Myeloxylon was the petiole of Medullosa, a genus of stems then regarded as Cycadean. We now know that the Neuropteridez or Medullosee were seed- bearing plants, approaching the Cycads, but retaining characters indicative of affinity with Ferns in a wide sense. Renault’s idea of Marattiaceous relationship, in fact, is still tenable, for the latest view, expressed by a high authority, is that the Pteridosperms (including Neuropterideze) had a common origin with the Maratti- aceee. Almost at the close of his life, Renault recognised the new position which the question had assumed, for in his last published work, presented to the Academy on May 15, 1904, in maintaining the multiple origin of Phanerogams from different Cryptogamic phyla, he cites the Medullosee, and especially Colpoxylon aeduense (Renault, 1896), the structure of which he had himself revealed, as probably connecting the Ferns with the Cycads (Renault, 1904). The plants which Renault, by his anatomical researches, so largely contributed to reconstruct, constituted a most remarkable group. The often massive stems, with a complexity of structure scarcely to be paralleled among recent plants, bore enormous petioles, often 6 inches in diameter, branching out into great com- pound leaves suggesting some huge Angiopteris or Osmunda; on the fertile pinne of these fern-like leaves were borne the seeds, resembling those of Cycads, and sometimes, as it appears, of an immense size. The strange and unfamiliar appearance presented by a female Cycas in fruit, can give us but a faint idea of the bizarre habit of the extinct family. 4. CORDAITEZ AND POROXYLEZ. The wonderful reconstruction of the Cordaitee by Renault and Grand’Eury, the former working from anatomical characters, the latter from external features, has already been referred to, and is familiar to all students of Fossil Botany. It was their work which, The President’s Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 139 for the first time, gave us a clear conception of Paleozoic Gymno- sperms. While Grand’Eury, with his admirable restorations, re- vealed the habit of these great trees, now only distantly recalled by that of some Southern Conifers allied to the Kauri Pine of New Zealand, Renault made known the minute structure of every organ of the plant, and afforded a sure basis of comparison with other groups. The result was to show quite clearly that the characteristic Gymnosperms of Paleozoic times were not, as had been supposed before, members of the Coniferee, but a quite distinct family, com- bining, in various respects, the characters of Coniferee, Cycadacee, and the family which we now call Ginkgoales, represented in living vegetation by the Maiden-hair Tree alone. While stem and root on the whole present a Coniferous structure, the leaves, apart from their simple form, are almost purely Cycadean ; the very peculiar male catkins (e.g. Cordaianthus Penjoni, above referred to) most nearly suggest those of Ginkgo, with which the female organs have likewise some analogies, though so far as the seed is concerned, a comparison with Cycads is equally admissible (Renault, 1879). The investigation of the female fructifications yielded, perhaps, the most striking results of all, for here, in the pollen-chamber of the ovule (in Cordaianthus Grand’ Euryi) Renault first found the multicellular pollen-grains to which so much interest attaches, and found evidence that their growth and differentiation went on after they had entered the ovule. To this subject we shall return in the following section. The Cordaitez, this highly developed, but at the same time synthetic Gymnospermous family, extends back in time to the Devonian period, a fact always to be borne in mind by the paleo- botanist, as showing the enormous antiquity, even of highly organised seed-plants, and thus inculcating caution in our phylogenetic speculations on their origin. Side by side with them, as we now know, lived a great multitude of Fern-like Spermophyta, with apparently far more primitive characters than the Cordaiteze, but not, so far as has yet been proved, of greater antiquity. At the present stage of our knowledge we cannot doubt that the Pteridosperms represent most nearly the earliest type of Seed-plant, but this is a morphological inference, and is not as yet immediately given by the geological record. The family of the Poroxylez, discovered by Renault (Renault, 1879), and fully investigated by him in conjunction with Professor Bertrand (1886), is of extreme interest, as tending to connect the Cordaiteze with lower groups. Our knowledge is here, for the most part, anatomical, though M. Grand’Eury has once more stepped in, and is enabling us to recognise these plants in the form of impressions, and, as he believes, to identify their seeds. The differences between this group and the Cordaiteze cannot here be fully discussed ; in general vegetative structure there is 140 Transactions of the Socrety. an extensive agreement, but the stem retains a “ Cryptogamic” character in the presence of strands of centripetal wood. Renault himself regarded the family as standing, on this account, a step nearer to the Lycopods; in the light of our present knowledge we should rather compare them with the Pteridosperms. However that may be, the extraordinarily perfect knowledge of their anatomy, which we owe to Renault and his colleague, has given the group a crucial significance in the discussion of Gymnospermous affinities. 5. Fossit PoLLEN-GRAINS. In the course of his work with Brongniart on the wonderfully preserved silicified seeds of Autun and St. Etienne, Renault dis- covered the constant presence of a pollen-chamber—i.e. a definite excavation in the tip of the nucleus, adapted for the reception of the pollen-grains. Guided by his observations on Paleozoic seeds, he was able to detect the same organs in those of their nearest living allies, the Cycads, in ignorance of the fact that this discovery had already been made by Griffith, thirty, or perhaps even forty, years before. In the pollen-chamber of the various fossil seeds the pollen-grains, which were to effect their fertilisation, are often found in an excellent state of preservation, as we have already seen in the case of Cordaianthus. In this position especially, though also when still contained in the microsporangia, the pollen- grains proved, in many instances, to have a multicellular structure. This at least was the interpretation which Renault put upon the septate appearance which they present. Attempts have been made to show that the apparently multicellular structure is due merely to the occurrence of folds in a contracted inner membrane, but recent work has completely confirmed Renault’s view, and in many cases, at any rate, there appears to be no doubt that a body consisting of several cells was really present within the pollen- grain. The analogy with the male prothallus and antheridium of a cryptogamic microspore is manifest, and was at once perceived by Renault. In the Gymnosperms of the present day, the cor- responding structures, though present, are less conspicuously developed. This discovery, so interesting in itself, led its author to form certain hypotheses as to the method of fertilisation, which are of remarkable interest in the light of subsequent results. In ex- amining a seed named Atheotesta, probably belonging to a Pterido- sperm, Renault, in 1887, observed the minute structure of the multicellular pollen-grains in the pollen-chamber. He found that both in the outer wall of the grain, and in the septa between its cells, there were perforations. He suggests that the latter may represent the traces of insertion of multiple pollen-tubes, or—and The Presidents Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 141 this is the important point—“ that they served for the passage of mobile bodies analogous to antherozoids” (Renault, 1887, p. 156). If the second hypothesis should be confirmed, “it would correspond,” he says, “to an interesting phase in the evolution of plants which is absolutely wanting in the recent vegetable kingdom.” At the close of the paper he adds: “We do not regard as impossible the existence in the past of pollen-grains, which, instead of effecting fertilisation by means of a tube, dis- charged into the pollen-chamber of the appropriate seeds anthero- zoids capable of performing this function ” (p. 158). Thus the study of the phenomena presented by Paleozoic fructifications led Renault to anticipate, by some ten years, the great discovery made at Tokyo by Ikeno and Hirase, that in the lower seed-plants the cryptogamic or animal mode of fertilisation by motile male cells still persists. The hypothesis was not one thrown out at hazard, but was deliberately entertained, as shown by Renault repeating it on other occasions still previous to the Japanese discovery (e.g. Renault, 1896, p. 276). The case affords a striking example, both of the acumen of Renault himself, and of the value of paleobotanical evidence in its bearing even on the more minute points of morphology. M. Roche informs us that the scientific work left uncompleted at the time of Renault’s death, relates chiefly to the fecundation and reproduction of permocarboniferous plants. 6. THE QUESTION OF SECONDARY Woop. In Dicotyledons and Gymnosperms, as we all know, both wood and bast possess the power of indefinite growth in thickness, by means of a layer of permanently, or periodically, active tissue, the cambium, which constantly adds new elements to both. On account of this method of increasing the mass of their vascular tissues, the name of Exogens was formerly applied collectively to the two classes in question. The capacity for exogenous growth, or as we now call it, the production of secondary wood and bast, is at the present time, no doubt, a great characteristic of the higher plants, though still by no means limited to them. Among the Vascular Cryptogams now living, instances of secondary growth in thickness are rare (e.g. Botrychium, Isoetes, and in a smaller degree Psilotum), and were not clearly recognised at the time when the structure of fossil plants first became the subject of scientific study. Hence, when the great Brongniart found that in Sigillaria and Calamodendron exogenous growth certainly took place, he was led to give up the view of their Cryptogamic affinities, and to class them with Gymnospermous Dicotyledons. The secondary wood, in fact, was looked on as a decisive Phanerogamic character, and 142 ‘Transactions of the Society. plants which possessed it were, ipso facto, identified as seed-bearing plants; the only question which remained was to determine the particular seeds which belonged to them, and on this quest much ingenuity was expended. Brongniart’s views were quite justified at the period when they were first expressed, and we cannot perhaps wonder that he, the greatest authority on everything relating to fossil plants, was un- willing to give them up. Although evidence rapidly accumulated showing that Paleozoic Cryptogams, such as Lepidodendron among Lycopods and Calamites among Equisetales, possessed secondary wood. Renault’s loyalty to his great master prevented him, during most of his scientific career, from accepting these results. He en- deavoured to draw a sharp distinction between the true Cryptogams, with which he classed Lepidodendron and Calamites, and the Phane- rogams simulating them such as Sigillaria and Calamodendron. If evidence was adduced to show that a Lepidodendron produced secondary wood, Renault denied that it was proved to be a Lepidodendron, and transferred it to Sigillaria. A Calamite with the same character was placed in the Phanerogamic genus Anthropitys or Calamodendron. It so happened that our country- man Williamson became the great champion of the Cryptogamic nature of the Sigillarias and Calamodendree, and ultimately proved beyond doubt that the Lycopods and Equisetales of the Paleozoic generally possessed secondary wood, and were thus adapted to the arborescent habit which they so commonly assumed. Hence a warm controversy sprang up between the English school as repre- sented by Williamson, and the French, among whom Renault was the leading spirit. M. Zeiller, in his obituary notice of Renault (Zeiller, 1904) says: “ His interest in the Equisetinez and Lycopods was stimu- lated by his disagreement with Williamson as to the position of the Calamodendrez and Sigillariz, in which the secondary wood, centrifugally developed, seemed to him, as it did to Brongniart, to constitute a Phanerogamic character.” ‘This view is strikingly expressed, for example, in his Stigmaria memoir of 1882, where he speaks of the phanerogamic characters of the Sigillarias as “ already established” by the structure of their vegetative organs. M. Zeiller continues : “Owing to the very fact of this disagreement, science has been enriched by admirable works from both sides, and if the facts have appeared to confirm the opinion of Williamson, the discoveries on the Pteridosperms recently made in England have gone to show how well founded was Renault’s prescience, as to the existence of forms, similar in their outward aspect to certain types of Cryptogams, and yet belonging to Gymnosperms by their fructifications.” | Renault’s views became considerably modified in his later years, and he convinced himself (for he was very slow to be convinced by The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 143 others) that Cryptogams with secondary wood really existed—e.g. in the Calamarian Macrostachya (Not. sur les Calamariées, 1898). In fact, he came to regard both the Sigillarieee and the Calamariez as transitional groups between Cryptogams and Phanerogams, some of their members approaching one side and some the other. Though we cannot now accept his conclusions in detail, the broad idea of the existence of such a “debatable land” in the Palaeo- zoic flora is an eminently fertile one. It is a striking fact that in some Lepidodendrex, plants nearly allied to the Sigillarias, but which Renault would have placed on the Cryptogamic side of the line, organs closely analogous to true seeds have been discovered. In his latest work (May 1904) Renault speaks of certain Calamariee as “Cryptogams with cambium” and thus definitely adopts the Williamson position, though, unfortunately, without recognising Williamson’s work in establishing it. At the same time he still inclined to attribute seeds such as Stephanospermum to plants of the Calamarian group. There is no objection in prin- ciple to this conception of the existence of spore-bearing and seed-bearing members of the same family—it is to a great extent realised, as we now know, among the carboniferous Lycopods. In the case of the Calamariez, however, the evidence for the occur- rence of the seed-bearing habit is as yet very inadequate. It is, in any case, a gratification to an English paleobotanist to realise that, at the close of Renault’s career, there was no longer any fundamental difference of view between himself and his fellow- workers in the same field. The illustrations of Renault’s great work which I have selected, may serve in some degree to indicate his place in the history of science, but are altogether inadequate to give any idea of the extent of his labours. , Even in the particular field which we have rapidly traversed, investigations of the highest importance have been left untouched, as, for example, his first demonstration of the structure of Spheno- phyllum, representing a wholly extinct class of Cryptogams; his magnificent investigation of the organisation of Calamarian fructi- fications ; his work on the Cycadoxylez, a family perhaps inter- mediate between Pteridosperms and true Cycads; his detailed anatomical studies on Sigillaria and Stigmaria; and other researches too numerous to mention. Besides all this, there is the vast mass of work of his later years on the micro-organisms of Paleozoic age, to which an incredible amount of labour was devoted. The investigation of fossil Bacteria, at any rate, appears a somewhat thankless task; in favourable cases, as, for example, that of Bacillus vorax (Renault, 1896, p. 472) occurring in vegetable débris of Lower Carboniferous age, there appears to be no doubt as to the nature of the organism, which 144 Transactions of the Society. shows the spores enclosed within its cells; in other cases, however, the meagreness ot the morphological characters available for the distinction of fossil Bacteria, leaves us in some doubt as to the value of the results attained. Renault’s work further extended to the investigation of Tertiary floras. The remarkable stained wax casts which he obtained of fossil flowers and fruits from the travertine of Sézanne, are an interesting feature of the Museum Collections. His reputation, however, will always rest mainly on his study of the higher Paleeozoic plants by the anatomical method, a line of work the full value of which has only begun to be recognised by botanists within the last few years. As investigators, Renault and his distinguished English rival Williamson had much in common, not only in their like enthusiasm and devotion to their work, but also in a certain obstinacy when confronted with the opinions of others, combined with complete honesty and openness of mind in accepting the results brought home to them by their own observations. REFERENCES. Only a few of Renault’s most important works, and those specially cited, are given. A very full bibliography, with a résumé of many of his works by Renault himself, and selected illustra- tions, will be found in M. Roche’s “ Biographie,” cited below. RENAULT, 1868. Sur un pétiole de Fougére fossile du terrain houiller supé- rieur d’Autun, l Anachoropteris pulchra. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 5, ix. (published in 1869). F # 1869. Sur quelques végétaux silicifiés d’Autun. Etude dela tige et des pétioles des Zyyopteris, ete. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 5, xii. (publ. in 1871). % 1870. Sur Vorganisation de rameaux silicifiés appartenant A un Sphenophyllum. Description de la tige des Spheno- phyllum. Comptes Rendus, lxx. p. 1158. 3 1878. Recherches sur lorganisation des Sphenophyllum et des _ Annularia. Ann. Sci. Nat Bot., sér. 5, xviii. $5 1874. Etude du genre Myelopteris et du Sigillaria spinulosa (the latter in conjunction with Grand’Eury). Recueil des savants étrangers. Acad. Sci., lxxviii. p. 870. a 1875. Recherches sur les végétaux silicifiés d’Autun et de St. Etienne. Etude du genre Botryopteris. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 6, 1. % 1876. (1) Recherches sur la fructification de quelques végétaux pro- venant des gisements silicifiés d’Autun et de St. Etienne (Zygopteris, ete.). Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 6, iii. 33 », (2) Recherches sur la végétaux silicifiés d’Autun et de St. : Ktienne. Nouvelles recherches sur la structure des Sphenophyllum et sur leurs affinitiés botaniques. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 6, iv. 5 1879. Structure comparée de quelques tiges de la Flore car- bonifere. Nouvelles archives du Muséum, ii., 2° série. The President's Address. By Dukinfield H. Scott. 145 RENAULT, 1881. Cours de Botanique Fossile :— le Année: Cycadées, Zamiées, Cycadoxylées, Cordaitées, Poroxylées, Sigillariées, Stigmariées. a 1882, 2° Année: Lepidodendrées, Sphénophyllées, Astéro- phyllitées, Annulariées, Calamariées. x 1883. 8e Année: Fougéres. bie) OOD: 4° Année: Coniferes, Gnetacées. Bronenrart, A., 1881. Recherches sur les graines fossiles silicifiés. Paris. RENAvtt, 1882. Etudes sur les Stigmaria, rhizomes et racines des Sigil- laires. Ann. Sci. Géol., xii. 1883. Considérations sur les rapports des Lépidodendrons, des Sigillaires et des Stigmaria. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot., sér. 6, xv. 1885. Nouvelles recherches sur le genre Astromyelon. Mém. de Soc. d’Hist. Nat. de Sadne-et-Loire, 1885. RENAULT ET BERTRAND, 1886. Recherches sur les Poroxylons. Arch. Bot. du Nord de la France, 1886. RENAULT, 1887. Note sur le genre Mtheotesta. Mém. de Soc. d’Hist. Nat. de Sadne-et-Loire, 1887. a 1888. Les Plantes Fossiles. Paris. RENAULT ET ZEILLER, 1888-1890. Etude sur le terfain houiller de Com- mentry, avec Atlas, Bull. de la Soc. de 1!’Industrie Minérale. RENAULT, 1891. Note sur la famille des Botryopteridées. Soc. d’Hist. Nat. d’Autun, Bull. 4. 1895-1898. Notice surles Calamariées. Soc. d’Hist. Nat. d’Autun, Bull. 8 (1895), 9 (1896), 11 (1898). : 1896. Bassin houiller et permien d’Autun et d’Epinac: Flore Fossile, fase. 2, avec Atlas. Etude des gites minéraux de la France. 1901. Sur quelques Cryptogames hétérosporées. Soc. d’Hist. Nat. @Autun, Bull. 14. 1904. Quelques remarques sur les Cryptogames anciennes et les sols fossiles de végétation. Comptes Rendus, exxxviii. ZEILLER, R., 1904. Bernard Renault, Notice Nécrologique. Rev. Gén. des Sciences, Décembre 15, 1904. Rooue, A., 1905. Biographie de Bernard Renault, avec extrait de ses notices scientifiques. Autun. ” PP 32 ” ) 3) April 18th, 1906 L 146 Transactions of the Society. III.—On an Improved Form of Metallurgical Microscope. By WALTER RosENHAIN, B.A. (Cantab), B.C.E. (Melbourne). (Read February 21, 1906.) Prate VI, THE importance which the microscopic study of metals has steadily acquired during the past ten years has led to the development of a special form of Microscope suited for the requirements of this class of work ; the development of these instruments has, however, been almost entirely confined to progressive modifications of the standard type of Microscope as used for other purposes. While it is undoubtedly possible to obtain very satisfactory results in the study of metals by means of a good Microscope of the ordinary type, provided with certain special attachments, limitations and disadvantages soon become evident, and even the most specialised metallurgical Microscopes hitherto available do not overcome the most serious of these difficulties. On the other hand, as the author has endeavoured to show elsewhere,* the design of the standard Microscope does not, in certain respects, satisfy the demands of correct mechanical design; and while it may, perhaps, be fairly urged that the optical requirements necessitate the sacrifice of mechanical perfection, such a contention does not apply to the metallurgical Microscope, which is intended primarily for the examination of opaque objects by reflected light. These considera- tions have led the author to design the instrument here to be described, on lines which differ very considerably from those of the standard type of Microscope. The main differences between the requirements of the ordinary Microscope and the instrument intended for metallurgical purposes, arise from the fact that the apparatus for the use of transmitted light, which is so important in the former, is not required at all in the latter, while, on the other hand, the appliances known as ver- tical and oblique illuminators are essential for metallurgical work, and are rarely used for other purposes. Further, the specimens to be examined with the metallurgical instrument are sometimes of considerable weight and size, and it may be desirable to examine them by means of long-focus lenses (3-inch), so that a very wide range of separation between stage and objective is required. In the older metallurgical Microscopes this last requirement has * “The Mechanical Design of Instruments,” by W. Rosenhain, Proc. Optical Convention, London, May 1905. JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1906. Pl. VI ——s ay Rosenhain Metallurgical Microscope. [To face p. 146. Improved Metallurgical Microscope. By Walter Rosenhain. 147 been met by applying a rack-and-pinion focusing motion to the stage of a Microscope of the ordinary type. An additional advan- tage was also secured in this way by making it possible to keep the aperture of the vertical illu- minator attached to the lower end of the body-tube in one position, for which the illuminant and condensers, or optical bench, had been properly and permanently adjusted. Taking a further step in the same direction, the author has designed the present instru- ment with a body-tube rigidly fixed to the limb of the Micro- scope, both the coarse and the fine adjustment being applied to the motion of the stage. The general appearance of the instrument will be readily gathered from the illustrations, plate VI. and figs. 21 and 22, which show the Microscope in three positions ; it will, therefore, only be neces- sary to describe the details of the various special features of the in- strument. Base and Limb.—The base is approximately triangular in plan, and has been designed to give the greatest possible stability with a minimum weight, while allowing perfectly free access to the milled heads attached to Fig. 22. the stage, even when the latter is in its lowest possible position. A portion of the base projects, and is so shaped as to provide a firm bearing for the limb when the Microscope is being used in 2 i 2 148 Transactions of the Society. a horizontal position, as for photography, a very great degree of rigidity being thereby secured in the position where it is most required. The height required for this foot or support is kept low by hinging the limb about an axis placed only 78 mm. (3 inches) above the base; this axis is made very massive, in order to secure both ample stiffness and to provide a large bearing sur- face, so that, with a good fit, the friction is sufficient to sustain the limb at any angle, more especially since the position of the axis is such as to bring the centre of gravity of the inclinable por- tion of the instrument vertically above the axis at an inclination which only differs slightly from 60°, according to the position of the stage. In the vertical position, the limb itself bears against a recess suitably formed in the base. In practice, the entire instru- ment may be readily carried about by means of the handle provided in the limb, without fear of displacing anything—even with a high- power objective, the focus remains in adjustment. The limb itself is made of a deep T-girder section, the broad flange of the T forming the bearing for the large dovetailed slide which carries the stage, and also providing a rigid attachment for the tube. The depth of the T is proportioned to the bending stresses likely to be developed by the weight and manipulation of the instrument, the back of the limb thus assuming a curved outline. The web of the T section is cut away in two large openings, thus saving weight and reducing the whole limb to a close approximation to a rigidly braced girder, while one of the openings provides a most convenient handle, by which the entire instrument may be safely lifted. The Stage—The stage is carried by a stiff bracket attached to a massive slide, moving, by rack and pinion, along the broad flange of the limb; the milled heads attached to the pinion—which consti- tutes the coarse-adjustment of the Microscope—are carried on long stout stems, so as toclear the base when the stage is racked down; in the vertical position the separation available between the end of the body-tube and the stage surface is 95 mm. (3? in.), while if the instrument be slightly inclined, this may be increased to 120 mm. (4? in.). An important advantage of the construction here described lies in the fact that the relative position of stage and tube is as rigidly secured with the largest separation as when the stage is close up to the tube; in the older instruments, as soon as the body-tube is racked up to any considerable extent, the bearing between tube and limb is reduced, and a serious amount of looseness results. The stage bracket carries at its outer end, concentric with the optic axis of the instrument, the fine adjustment. The details and construction of this portion of the instrument are exactly similar to any good fine-adjustment, except that the whole arrangement is inverted, and the moving plunger carries the stage direct. The great advantage of this arrangement is that all the weight that Improved Metallurgical Microscope. By Walter Rosenhain, 149 ‘comes upon the fine-adjustment is carried centrally, while any slight irregularities of bearing surfaces or motion are not magnified, as in the ordinary construction, by a considerable overhang of the moving parts; the resulting fine-focusing motion is consequently remarkable for a crisp decisiveness and absence of all wavering which is most refreshing in use, while the favourable conditions of wear under the circumstances described should go far to lengthen the life of the more delicate parts. The stage itself combines all the advantages of a simple flat stage, free from all encumbrances upon its surface, with complete mechanical movements and complete rotation about the optic axis. This result is secured by placing the mechanical stage movements below the stage plate itself; the movements themselves consist of two broad dovetailed slides, at right-angles to one another, actuated by rack-and-pinion movements controlled by milled heads fixed below. Even when an inch of mechanical movement has been used, the stage may still be completely rotated. The author regards a stage capable of such complete rotation and free from all encum- brances upon its surface as almost essential to the better class of metallurgical work; the interpretation of the microscopic images is often only possible by the use of various forms of oblique illumination, some of which will be mentioned below, and when these are applied it is usually necessary to test the effect of vary- ing orientation of the specimen by rotating the stage; under such circumstances it leads to much annoyance and loss of time to find that the rotation is blocked, or the light obscured by a projecting fitting on the stage, just at the point which it is most important to observe. Another advantage of the arrangement of movements adopted in the present instrument is to be found in the fact that all the milled heads regulating the focus and the position of the Specimen lie within easy reach of one hand; thus it is quite easy to use one of the mechanical movements of the stage with the thumb and one finger, while keeping the object in focus by moving the fine-adjustment with the little finger of the same hand, par- ticularly as the wrist may rest comfortably on the table if the instrument is not too much inclined. In the instrument as at present constructed the rotation of the Stage is provided with neither centring screws nor mechanical movement, a firm clamp, acting in any position, being alone pro- vided. The centring screws have been omitted in order to economise space, a centring nose-piece being provided as an integral part of the body-tube, while the author does not consider that mechanical rotation of the stage is essential for metallurgical purposes. The Body.—As has already been indicated, the tube of the Microscope is rigidly attached to the limb, all focusing motions being carried out by means of the stage. A considerable increase of 150 - Transactions of the Society. rigidity results from this arrangement, and it is particularly con- venient that manipulations at the eye-piece end of the tube may be carried out freely without fear of disturbing the focus of the objective or even—as sometimes happens—accidentally pushing the body-tube bodily down upon the specimen ; where it is desired to attach a small camera to the Microscope body direct, this rigidity would also be a great advantage. In the present instrument the body is made of unusually thick tube, and thus serves to support the necessary illuminating apparatus by means of slides placed outside three apertures open- ing at the front and both sides of the lower end of the tube. The Illuminator—In all metallurgical Microscopes hitherto constructed, with the exception of a peculiar instrument designed by H. Le Chatelier, the illuminator has been employed as a detach- able fitting; in the present instrument, the illuminator is an integral part of the body-tube. The advantage secured by this means lies in the absence of a movable attachment intervening between the objective and the tube and inevitably introducing a certain amount of looseness. In the present instrument the objective is screwed direct into the lower end of the body-tube, or into a centring nose-piece directly placed in the end of the tube. In addition to the gain in rigidity, this arrangement makes it easy to interchange one illuminating appliance for another without in any way disturbing the focus of the objective, while with the older arrangement a change could only be made by removing the illuminator and objective; the new instrument thus provides a valuable facility for investigating the effects of different methods of lighting upon the microscopic appearance of various structures— a process likely to lead to valuable results in interpretation. The illuminator proper consists of a short slide fitting into any of the three sets of dovetails corresponding to the three open- ings of the tube; to the slide itself is attached a short swinging arm carrying a spindle capable of rotation with slight friction. When the slide isin position, the spindle projects horizontally into the tube, the outer end being furnished with a substantial milled head. The inner end of this spindle is provided with an axial hole, into which the small holders with various reflectors fit inter- changeably. By moving the slide up and down, by moving the swinging arm backwards or forwards, and by rotating the milled head, the reflector may be placed in any position or at any desired angle. These adjustments are of the greatest value in securing uniform illumination and the suppression of undesirable internal reflections, while special modes of illumination, corresponding somewhat to the dark-ground effects with transmitted light, may be obtained. For the most brilliant and uniform illumination, with a minimum of internal reflections, the author finds a reflector of thin silvered glass, placed so as to cover a little less than half Improved Metallurgical Microscope. By Walter Rosenhain, 151 the aperture of the objective, by far the best, giving decidedly better results than the prism illuminator which is so much employed. In order, however, to enable the observer to study the effects of oblique lighting with high-power wide-angle objectives, a whole series of reflectors of different shapes and sizes is provided for the instrument ; these are illustrated in fig. 23. It has already been pointed out that the illuminator slide fits into the dovetailed grooves provided outside each of the three openings in the body tube, so that the Microscope can be placed in any of the three positions relatively to the source of light; once the relative position of Microscope and illuminant has been properly adjusted, no change will be required when objectives of different foci, or specimens of different thickness, are used. Inter- changeable with the illuminator slide, a series of other slides is provided. One of these carries an iris diaphragm on a swinging arm ; this is inserted on the side facing the illuminant, and serves pore hee ge CF gars ae Fie. 23. to stop down the incident beam, if required; the use of the slide and of the swinging arm making it possible to adjust the aperture of the iris to the position found most desirable for the reflector of the illuminator. The ring carrying this iris is also fitted with a standard objective screw-thread, by means of which lenses may be attached ; perhaps the most important use of a lens applied at this point is the application of a negative lens for the purpose of pro- ducing critical illumination. Im the ordinary course the best means of obtaining critical illumination for opaque objects, is to employ a source of light of considerable area, such as an in- candescent gas burner with an opal chimney, and to place this source of light on a level with the aperture of the illuminator and at a distance from the reflector of the illuminator equal to the distance from the reflector to the back conjugate focus of the objective. Under these circumstances, the image of the source is formed by the objective itself upon the surface of the specimen. The image of the source, as formed by the objective at the eye- 152 Transactions of the Society. piece end, is then the full natural size of the source, and is seen by the eye magnified by the eye-piece only. By using a large source as indicated above, the whole field can be uniformly illuminated, and in the author’s experience such lighting is preferable to any other for all “ vertical illumination” work on metals. If a small source of light is used, such as an electric arc, this direct method is not available, particularly as it would not be practicable to bring an arc so near the Microscope. One means of attaining the desired object is to utilise the light of the source, by means of a suitable system of lenses, to form a small bright disk of the required size, upon a translucent screen placed at the proper distance from the Microscope, and then to use the image of this screen for critical illumination. Another method is to throw a real image of the source to a point close to the illuminator aperture and then to interpose between the image and the illuminator a suitable negative lens giving an enlarged virtual image of the source at the proper distance from the illuminator ; with a proper choice of foci for the various lenses, it is possible in this way to obtain a critical image of the are large enough for the image of one crater to fill the field as seen by the eye or in the camera; but such spreading of the light necessarily entails loss of intensity, so that the use of critical illumination for photo-micrography of metallic specimens still entails some difficulties. For visual purposes, however, it not only yields the best results, but also furnishes the simplest method of illumination, no condensers whatever being required if a large source be used. With objectives of focal lengths up to about 25 mm. (1 in.) the use of the internal reflector or “vertical” illuminator furnishes the most satisfactory results; but from that focal length onwards the distance between objective and specimen is large enough to allow of the use of external reflectors. If normal illumination is required it can be obtained by interposing a reflector between the objective and the specimen. The advantage of doing this is that all internal reflections are avoided,and a beam of wider angle can be condensed on the specimen by suitable condensers than could be obtained from these long-focus objectives. The external reflector may take the form either of a thin glass slip covering the entire field of view and inclined at about 45° to the optic axis, or it may take the form of either a metallic reflector (Sorby), or a silvered glass reflector covering about half the aperture of the objective. So far as the author’s experience goes, the thin glass reflector gives the most uniform illumination, but its presence distinctly interferes with the definition. In the present instrument any of these reflectors may be carried on the lower end of a long slide which fits into the grooves outside the illuminator openings of the body- tube ; the lower end of this slide carries a wide ring completely surrounding the objective, but out of contact with it, and upon Improved Metallurgical Microscope. By Walter Rosenhain, 153 this ring the mountings of the various reflectors can be slipped ; the reflectors are thus held independently of the objective, so that the fitting of adapters to various objective mounts is obviated, while the height and position of the reflectors can be varied at will. For general oblique illumination a silver parabolic Lieberkuhn is frequently used, and this is mounted to fit upon the outside of the Ting at the lower end of the slide just described. With this Lieberkuhn in position, a fitting for other reflectors may be placed inside the ring carried by the slide, and to this fitting any of the reflectors already described for use above the objective, may be readily fitted. Although the parabolic Lieberkuhn is much used for general oblique illumination, and certainly gives some very pleasing effects, the author regards it as a somewhat undesirable form of illuminating appliance, because its indications are very difficult to interpret; the light is focused upon the object from a great number of directions, and all surfaces inclined in such a way as to throw any of this light into the objective accordingly appear more or less bright. For this reason the author prefers to employ oblique light falling upon the specimen—if not as a strictly parallel beam, yet at least from one general direction. Rotation under such lighting frequently enables the observer to form correct judgments as to the relative heights and inclinations of various portions of the field. Sometimes the relative orientation of different crystals, or other surface markings, may be shown in a very striking manner by the simultaneous use of three beams of oblique light incident upon the specimen from three different directions, and distinguished from one another by their colour. For this purpose beams of light from three sources may be focused upon the specimen and coloured glasses interposed ; in the present instrument this is facilitated by means of three slides for holding the coloured glasses or films, these slides again fitting the three sets of dovetail grooves in the body-tube. Eye-pece Focusing Attachment—When a visual eye-piece is used for purposes of photo-micrography, it is usual to focus the objective on the field visually, the objective being arranged to work at its proper tube-length under those conditions ; the alteration of focus which is required to yield a real image on a screen is then obtained by altering the distance between the objective and the object, thus tending to throw the primary image formed by the objective to a point further from the eye-piece end of the tube. In doing this the objective is caused to work at a tube-length which is considerably shorter than that for which it is best corrected, so that its optical performance is impaired to some extent. If the eye-piece in question is of such a construction that the real image from the objective is actually formed in the tube outside the eye-piece, then the proper method of changing the focus 154 Transactions of the Society. from that required for direct vision to that required for photo- eraphic projection, will obviously be to move the eye-piece out- wards until the image formed by the objective lies sufficiently far beyond the principal focus of the eye-piece. Some eye-pieces are constructed in this way, being simply aplanatic magnifying glasses ; in the commonest case, however, of the Huyghenian eye-piece, the rays from the objective pass into the collecting lens of the eye- piece before actually coming to a focus, and for these eye-pieces the rational mode of focusing for photography would be to move the back lens of the eye-piece only, provided that this lens were individually corrected adequately as a photographic lens. A near approach to this state of affairs is attained in the projection eye- pieces supplied with a focusing scale, but even with these, the use of the fine-adjustment is still required for focusing accurately. In order to obviate the derangement of the objective when the WS iS VN @ as el sid | L : Fic, 24 instrument is required for photography, the present Microscope is fitted with a spiral focusing motion which enables the operator to focus by moving the eye-piece alone—a process which makes it possible to use ordinary eye-pieces for photographic purposes in a much more rational manner. The movement of the eye-piece is actuated by the rotation of a milled collar at the upper end of the fixed body-tube, and this collar is grooved for the reception of a driving band, whereby the operator can focus while observing the ground glass screen of the camera. While the design of the instrument here described has been. arrived at entirely with the aim of providing an instrument specially perfected for metallurgical purposes, it is recognised that it may be desired to use the instrument for the examination of sections or other objects by transmitted light. For this purpose a special attachment is provided, consisting of a bracket which can be attached to the stage bracket, carrying a right-angled reflecting prism, iris diaphragm, and a swing-out condenser, with spiral focusing motion, together ‘constituting a high-class illuminating Improved Metallurgical Microscope. By Walter Rosenhain. 155 system. Upon the stage itself, and therefore partaking of its mechanical movements, is fixed a second or raised stage with apertures to fit over the condenser just described. With this attachment the only disadvantage is that the range of separation between tube and stage is diminished by about 50 mm. (2 inches), but since the maximum separation is still 70 mm. (23 inches) this diminution will hardly be felt for work with transmitted light. All the advantages of extreme rigidity and concentric fine-adjust- ment are of course retained when the instrument is used for trans- parent objects, so that where one instrument is to be used for both classes of work, the considerable gain for the study of opaque objects which this Microscope is believed to afford, would more than outweigh the slight disadvantages, if any, which will be found in using it for transparent objects. In conclusion, the author would express his indebtedness to Messrs. R. and J. Beck, Ltd., for the skilful manner in which they have worked out all the details of the instrument from the sketches and specification supplied to them. 156 NOTES. Photography of Diatoms. By T. A. O’Donoxor. Puate VII. AT the January Meeting I exhibited three photographs of Plewro- sigma angulatum, and one each of Surirella gemma (black dots), Amphipleura pellucida, Coscinodiscus asteromphalus, and Podura scale. These were all taken direct at an amplification of 2000 ‘diameters, except the Amphipleura pellucida, which was magnified 1500 times. Two photographs of the Plewrosigma angulatum ~were further enlarged to 3700 times. The illumination was furnished by an ordinary oil lamp with Zin. wick. Watson’s parachromatic condenser was used to pro- cure direct axial cones, except in the case of the Amphipleura pellucida, tor which Watson’s immersion condenser N.A. 1°30 was used to obtain the necessary oblique illumination. The exposures ranged from 2 hours without a screen, as in the ease of the Pleurosigma angulatum herewith reproduced, to 6 hours with the F line screen, as in the case of the Podura scale also re- produced. These long exposures of course necessitate a very good fine-adjustment in the stand. Mine is the portable histological stand made by Swift for and exhibited by Mr. E. M. Nelson at the meet- ing of the R.M.S., held December 18, 1895. It is fitted with Campbell’s differential screw. The lens used is a Zeiss apochromatic 2 mm. N.A. 1°30 with a Zeiss 4 com- pensating ocular, as my 2 projection ocular would not give the required amplification. I use an enlarging camera, costing a few shillings, extending to 40 inches and sliding on a home-made optical (?) bench fitted with a home-made fine-adjustment, which answers well enough for low-power work, but which was detached altogether in taking the photographs now under consideration. I focused in the air with an achromatic hand reading-glass, and passed backward and forward, touching the fine-adjustment of the Microscope until the desired result was obtained. This pro- cess requires patience and perseverance—two excellent qualities to acquire. For the Podura scale and Coscinodiscus asteromphalus I used an axial cone of 0°5; for the Pleurosigma angulatum, 0°65; for the VIi- 1906. Pt, R. MICRO, SOC. JOURN. FODURASGALE. AU AS ,' WA AN oy TEEER ES CNet ; RRR NHE: ory UNSC OO ROU SNNNIN: “ RAMEE RRR R PHENO A GN fee ees ad Hate Sete ¢ 7 > £ is 3a Aestteadee a SESS. Py . ey, yy Ny Ms ULATUM. G PTEUROSIGMA AN T. A. O’Donohoe, Phot. Notes. 157 Surtirella gemma, 0°75; and 1°30 with crescent stop for the Amphi- plewra pellucida. The Pleurosigma angulatum, Surirella gemma and Amphipleura pelluecda were taken from the yellow (realgar?) mounts of Thum. The Coscinodiscus asteromphalus was mounted in styrax. The Barnet extra rapid orthochromatic plates were mostly used. Dark Field Illumination. By J. W. Gorpon. Wuen lecturing at the Royal Institution on February 10 last, I demonstrated the production of dark field illumination in a picture thrown by a projection Microscope, the darkening of the- field being, in fact, produced by the introduction of a diffraction fringe. My object was to obtain the improved resolution, which is, on theoretical grounds, to be expected on a background illumi- nated by diffracted light; but, in fact, I found in rehearsal that I obtained such strongly accentuated representation of refracting surfaces, that I was obliged to confess that the experiment succeeded too well, and the result which I had looked for was masked by an unexpected effect, which at that ime I could not explain. The experiment seemed to me to be none the less in- teresting on that account, and I therefore showed it as a matter of curiosity, believing that I was then demonstrating it in public for- the first time. A week or two later I lighted by chance upon a reference which sent me toa paper contributed by Professor Téppler to Poggen- dorff’s Annalen for the year 1867 (p. 33), and there I found my experiment described, with immaterial variations, and fully and most lucidly explained. It then appeared that the diffractor which I had been using was equivalent to a post-objective stop. In the case of the projection lantern the objective angle was considerably wider than the condenser angle, and therefore dark field illumination could not have been obtained—if I had tried to get it—by the: usual expedient of a stop in the aperture of the condenser. But. for the same reason, a stop shutting out the middle of the objec- tive darkens the field, while allowing strongly refracted rays to pass round its edge in the marginal zone of the objective; and. thus an alternative position was indicated for the dark field stop available for use with objectives of high N.A. 158 Notes. This was to me a new and highly interesting light upon the subject of the illumination of the microscopic object, and, having the good fortune to fall in with Professor Wright, I mentioned the matter, and Toppler’s paper of 1867, to him. He quite shared my interest in Toppler’s paper, but told me that the post-objec- tive stop had in fact been made and used, although not ex- tensively. But our discussion of the subject did not end there. We considered how far the generalisation could be carried which enabled the microscopist to choose alternative positions, suitable to the specific requirements of his optical system, for his dark field stop; and the theory of the matter, when considered from that point of view, very soon yielded the following deductions. 1. The stop must be placed where the aperture of the instru- ment is largest, when measured by its projection on the image plane of the instrument. 2. Whether placed in the aperture of the condenser or in that of the objective, the stop will be imaged in the Ramsden circle of the instrument. 3. If a small opaque disk, having the shape and dimensions of that projected image of the stop, be placed in the exact position occupied by the image, and the original stop be removed, the new disk will shut out exactly the same field light which the original stop shut out in its original position, and so will produce the same dark field in the observer's eye. 4, Here is a very convenient and very simple apparatus oe producing dark field illumination ; for a small stop can easily be mounted in a suitable position ioe the eye lens and, so placed, will serve to produce dark field with wide-angled lenses. It is obviously unsuitable for narrow-angled lenses, since in that case a stop at the top of the instrument would cut off some—or all, in the case of a full-sized stop—of the light intended to enter the eye. These we considered to be conclusions of so great importance as to demand full experimental verification, a task which I under- took, and have now brought to a stage in which I venture to think that the results will be of interest to the Fellowship of the R.M.S. Accordingly, I have now to report as follows :— 1. A convenient form of stop for use in this way is easily made by breaking up a small mass of mercury into globules, and mount- ing one of these globules on a cover-glass held in the exact plane of the Ramsden cirele. For permanent use the globule may be mounted in balsam between two cover-glasses. The precise level is of great importance. Above or below it, the stop appears as a blemish in the optical field, with dark field edges and an opaque centre. Accurately placed in the Ramsden circle, it darkens the whole field evenly and is nowhere opaque. It may be centred or placed excentrically for the purpose of obtaining symmetrical or asymmetrical illumination, as required. Notes. £159 2. The size of the stop must be determined with reference to the size of the Ramsden circle, and to the particular result re- quired. I find a range of globules running from 53, in. to 34 in. very convenient, the steps varying by 54, in. among the smaller members of the series, and +45 in. among the larger. A stop equal in size to the Ramsden circle gives a black field, upon which only such details are shown as represent highly refractive bodies or objects having a geometrical structure which can be imaged by their own diffracted light. A Pleurosigma angulatum depicted in this latter way, when the central beam is entirely shut out by a top stop covering the whole Ramsden circle, is one of the most beautiful objects that can be presented to the eye. A smaller stop will produce darkening of the field and some degree of strengthening of the definition, and may be very advantageously employed to moderate the glare of excessive illumination. The great advantage of a central stop for this purpose as compared with the common alternatives—as compared, that is to say, with closing down the iris diaphragm or racking down the condenser—arises from the circumstance that moderation of the light is obtained by means of the central stop without any loss of resolving angle, and also with some actual increase of defining power. 3. Beside the common purposes of producing dark ground, and controlling the illumination to which these top stops can be applied, there is another, which seems to contain the promise of future achievements. By working the iris diaphragm against the stop, it is possible to produce a thin hollow cone of light, which has an extraordinary power of bringing out the stereoscopic detail of an object. Blood corpuscles seen in this way, for example, are no longer flat rings, but rounded forms with sculptured surfaces. Indeed, it was for this precise effect that Toppler devised his experiment, and few experiments have succeeded more completely. No microscopist will ever forget the first time that he looks under these conditions of illumination into the internal structure of a Triceratium favus mounted dry. Mr. Nelson, to whom I have communicated the substance of the above statement, is good enough to furnish me with a reference to this Journal for 1878, page 186, where there is a Note by the late Mr. J. W. Stephenson upon the appearance of P. angulatum when seen under a wide-angled lens with a stop placed immediately behind the objective to shut out the dioptric beam. But Mr. Nelson adds that stops of this kind, although they had a vogue about that time, soon after went out of use. That this should be the case is quite easy to be under- stood. The necessary adjustments cannot possibly be made with a stop placed on the tube of the Microscope; and the actual experiment which Mr. Stephenson demonstrated—of showing an object by its own diffracted light—although extremely pretty, 160 Notes. involves so much false colour and spurious detail as to be of no practical value. The real merit of a post-objective stop is to give accentuated value to the widely-refracted light on the principle explained in Toppler’s paper, and its practical value in this way can hardly be overstated. But the only practicable position in which to mount it is just above the eye-lens in the Ramsden disk. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO meee) Ty, OG Ye) SING IOP TS Oe in Ne (PRINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA), MICROSCOPY, Etc." ZOOLOGY. VERTEBRATA. a. Embryology.t Improved Method of Artificial Parthenogenesis.{—Jacques Loeb has combined a solution of sodium-chloride with ethyl acetate, and finds that the combination is so effective in inducing artificial parthenogenesis that 100 per cent. of the eggs develop. The effective factor in the ethyl acetate seems to be the acetic acid. Formation of Centrosomes in Enucleated Egg-Fragments.$S—N. Yatsu finds that enucleated fragments of the eggs of Cerebratulus lacteus, subjected to calcium chloride solutions, form rayed systems, in- cluding centrioles. It is not possible to induce the formation of rays before the nucleus has resolved itself to form the first directive spindle. Origin of a Rete Mirabile.||—J.Tandler has studied the develop- ment of the arterial rete mirabile in the sinus cavernosus of the pig. It arises by budding from the wall of a primarily simple vessel, not from the persistence of capillaries. In more general terms, the network is due to secondary formation, not to the persistence of an embryonic condition. Development of Primitive Kidney in Chick.{—HE. Grafe has in- vestigated some points in the development of the kidney and its vessels. * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial ‘‘ we,”’ and they do not held themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub- lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects. ¢ Univ. California Publications, ii. (1905) pp. 83-6, 89-92. § Journ. Expér. Zool., ii. (1905) pp. 287-312 (8 figs.). See also Zool. Zentralbl, xii. (1905) p. 551. | Verh. Anat. Ges. xix. Vers. See also Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) Erg. heft, pp. 153-5. q Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1905) pp. 143-280 (5 pls. and 17 figs.). April 18th, 1906 M 162 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO There is in the genital part of the primitive kidney an increase of malpighian bodies and tubules. These new formations arise by budding of the Wolffian duct or of the primary tubules, and break through, secondarily, into the Bowman’s capsule. Only a few subsequently get: into connection independently with the Wolffian duct. The malpighian bodies increase by division of the primary ones. The formation of the glomerulus of the secondary malpighian bodies does not go on i loco, but is effected by a budding of the primary vas afferens. The vasa efferentia originate the venous network of the primitive kidney. Other points are considered in the paper. Three-weeks’ Human Embryo.*—-4. P. Gage describes an embryo of this age, from a study of which she notes several interesting points. There are twenty-nine myotomes. The developmental stage of the central nervous system shows with definiteness the position of the neuropore and its relation to the hypophysial region, from which it is possible to determine the front end of the brain-tube and of the body. This is in the region of the hypophysis, and consequently parts which in the exigencies of growth have gone beyond this point are morphologically posterior to it, e.g. the eye and olfactory region. Embryology of Sturgeon.t—A. Ostroumoff describes the develop- ment of the cloaca and urinogenital sinus in Acipenser ruthenus. The cloacal opening and the communication of the Wolffian ducts are in existence in the stage with 30 somites, i.e. 70 hours after fertilisation. The cloaca consists of two divisions separated by an intra-cloacal membrane : a hinder one opening ventrally outwards, and communicat- ing on both sides with the Wolffian ducts, and an anterior one in com- munication with the gut cavity. The hinder division represents the origin of the sinus urinogenitalis. Dorsalwards, this division is in close communication with the anterior end of the tail-gut, which directly opens into the gut cavity. Later, the connection between sinus and tail- gut is interrupted by the in-pushing of the intra-cloacal membrane ; still later, after hatching, the communication between the tail-gut and hind- gut is obliterated, and the tail-gut disappears. Immunity of Fetus.{—A. Kreidl and L. Mandl find, as the result of an experimental study upon goats, that the foetus in the later stages and the newly-born young react to treatment with ox-blood with the formation of a specific hemolysin. Topography of Human Fetal Pancreas.s—C. M. Jackson gives an account of this, based upon a study of fifty examples, ranging in age from two months up till full time. The various modifications of form, and position of parts at different stages of growth, are fully treated. In the earlier stages of development, the body of the pancreas appears somewhat flattened in form, with anterior and posterior surfaces. The inferior surface develops through contact with the underlying intestines. * Amer. Journ. Anat., iv. (1905) pp. 409-43 (5 pls.). t+ Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1905) pp. 515-7 (2 figs.). ¢ SB. Akad. wiss. Wien, cxiii. (1904) pp. 285-306. § Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) pp. 488-510. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 163 in the third month, the inner portion appearing first, the outer slightly later. From the third month onward the body of the pancreas is (wholly or partly) prismatic in 90 p.c. of all cases. Development of Dentine in Mammalia.*—K. v. Korff finds that the ivory cells do not share in forming the collagenous dentine ground- substance, but that they develop, by means of a secretory activity, only the tooth-fibres which keep open the nutritive canals, i.e. the dentine canals. The dentine at first is not homogenous, but is composed of fibrils of connective tissue of the tooth pulp. The fibrils radiate peri- pherally towards the upper surface of the pulp, and become felted with the fibrils of the basal membrane which lies upon the enamel-cells. The basal membrane thickens by the addition of fibrils which are always growing from the interior of the pulp. In the zone of the ivory-cells the fibrils of the pulp pass into the spaces between them. They here form intercellular collagenous strands which split into fibrils, and these merge into the fibrils of the dentine ground-substance. Development of Lungs in Tropidonotus.t—J. J. Schmalhausen has studied this in 7’. natriz. In the adult a small left lung (2-4 mm.) is present, which has a typical snake’s lung structure, and is connected with a bronchus provided with cartilaginous rings. Both lungs arise simultaneously, or almost so, but the right grows very much faster than the left, whose growth extends throughout the whole embryonic period. In connection with the strong development of the right lung, there is a displacement of the gut to the left and ventralwards, besides a twisting of the right lung upon its axis, so that the left lies upon the ventral face of the right. Histological differentiation also proceeds more rapidly in the right than in the left lung. All this is in accordance with Mehnert’s formula, according to which the origin of retrogressive organs tends to be later, and their development and histological differentiation is slower than in progressive ones. The latter, contrarywise, are subject to a hastening of the processes of development, which expresses itself in the earlier origin, in the more rapid succession of one histological stage after another, and in the rapid increase in size of the organ. The left lung in 7. natriz isa good example of the greater variability of a rudimentary organ, e.g. it exhibits variation in its rate of growth and in its time of origin. Development of External Genitals of Sheep.t—J. Bohm finds that the first appearance of the sexual organs in the sheep is in embryos of 1:1cm. The phallus ridge is not ectodermal, but endodermal in origin. The epithelial lamelle of the phallus ridge do not diverge, hence there arises neither a sex groove nor distinctly projecting sex folds. The sinus urogenitalis never opens out into a sex groove. The male sexual organ does not arise by longitudinal growth of the genital pro- tuberance, but the small phallus is displaced navel-wards, and transformed into glans and plandarium. The urethra arises by energetic growth of the endodermal basis, independently of the raphe. The female phallus * Arch, Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1905) pp. 1-17 (1 pl.). + Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) pp. 511-20 (8 figs.). t Morphol. Jahrb., xxxiv. (1905) pp. 248-320 (2 pls. and 60 figs.). M 2 164 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO is differentiated into clitoris and clitorium. The urogenital orifice is not to be characterised as the sexual groove. The edges of the orifice develop into the labia vulue. The sex-thickenings do not become labia vulve, but come to lie in front of the clitoris and completely alter in appearance. Studies on the Islands of Langerhans.*—K. Helly has made some investigations on the development and structure of these bodies, and concludes that they are present in all the vertebrate groups. They are organs sui generis, and as such fundamentally different in histological structure from the true pancreas. In development they arise from an epithelium which is not specifically differentiated as pancreas. No transitions between the two types occur at any period of their develop- ment, nor in the mature condition. Consequently, the view that they represent a kind of reserve material for the regeneration of the pancreas- cells cannot be held. ‘It will be observed that these views are, on the one hand, markedly oppossed to those of Dale, while, on the other, they confirm the work of Diamare, Rennie, and others. Club Cells in Epiderm of Fishes.;—M. Oxner has investigated the form, distribution, origin, and function of the peculiar club cells oc- curring in the epiderm of Cyclostomes and bony fishes. Within the Teleostei they are found in Physostomi (except Salmonide) ; they may be present or absent in very nearly-related families. It is not certain whether the formations occurring in Gadide and a few marine Acanthopterygii are to be regarded as true club-cells. In the genera in which they are present, they occur in the whole covering layer, with the limitation that they are always absent on the barbules and, with few exceptions, on the skin of the lips. Where they occur on the lips, they extend also to the epithelium of the tongue, of the mucous membrane and even of the pharynx of very young individuals. The distribution is not at all regular. They are most numerous on the head and neck region, and fewest on the pectoral and caudal fins. They are special unicellular gland-cells of protective function, they are able to form a kind of scurf over a wound, in eels they act as excretory glands, and they appear to have other functions as well. b. Histology. Neurological Studies—Kurt Goldstein { gives an account of the structure of the brain of Teleostean fishes, especially of the cerebral hemispheres and thalamencephalon. Kurt Berliner § discusses the minute structure and the development of the cerebellum in various Vertebrates. Structure of Amphibian Red Blood Corpuscles.||—Fr. Weidenreich has studied the erythrocytes of the salamander and the frog. There isa distinct cellular membrane, but no demonstrable plasmic structure. The erythrocytes of amphibians differ from those of mammals in form and * Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxvii. (1905) pp. 124-41 (1 pl.). + Jena Zeitschr., xxxiii. (1905) pp. 589-646 (5 pls. and 1 fig.). t Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxvi. (1905) pp. 135-219 (5 pls. and 28 figs.). § Tom, cit., pp. 220-69 (1 pl.). || Tom. cit., pp. 270-98 (1 pl. and 2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 165 nucleus, but not otherwise. The form is conditioned by a marginal fold of the membrane, which is fixed by acid re-agents, whereas in very weak salt solution it is not fixed, and allows the disk to swell up into a sphere. Enamel Prisms.*— Ernst Smreher has investigated the enamel prisms and the cementing substance of the enamel in human teeth. The enamel fibres are not as a rule prismatic hexagonal structures, but pillars of irregular form. The author explains how the form arises in the course of development. Amitosis and Multinucleate Cells in Epithelium.t—M. Pacaut has found, especially in Rodents, the frequent occurrence of multi- nucleate cells in many-layered epithelium, e.g. of the cesophagus. The nuclei (2-4) usually remain apposed ; they are formed by amitotic division, which is in most cases entirely normal. Odontoclasts.t — Coyne and Cavahé describe giant multinucleate phagocytic cells which help in the destruction of teeth. On the decay- ing surface of a tooth affected by caries, the fragments of enamel and ivory are seen to be surrounded by a finely granular clear envelope com- posed of these odontoclasts. Outside these there is a cellular zone of uninucleate, small, embryonic cells, which give rise to the odontoclasts. A microbic infection may be the “primum movens,” but the actual destruction and absorption are due to the odontoclasts. c. General. Pecilogony.§ —A. Giard has collected and discussed instances of what he calls peecilogony, that is, the occurrence in identical or nearly- related species of quite distinct modes of development, which are usually correlated with different conditions of life. Cranial Nerves in Petromyzon.||—J. B. Johnston has investigated the components of these nerves in the Ammocetes of P. dorsatus. In the arrangement of the cranial nerve-components Petromyzon agrees in general with fishes, but shows some marked primitive characters. One or two of the special features demonstrated may be quoted. The profundus nerve retains its independence, but has added to it the equivalent of the rami ophthalmici superficiales trigemini and facialis of fishes. The visceral sensory component is very small in the facialis, but large in the glossopharyngeus and vagus. A sympathetic trunk and ganglia are present in the head. Head-Ganglia and Sensory Line in Selachia.{— W. Klinkhardt has studied the development of these in Spinaa niger. He describes the ectoderm folds, and the origin therefrom of the sensory lines of * Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 312-31 (8 pls.). + Verh. Anat. Ges., xix. Vers. See also Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) Erg. Heft, pp. 144-5. ¢ Loc. cit. See also Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) Erg. heft, p. 205. P§ Bull. Scient., xxxix. (1905) pp. 153-87. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xii. (1905) p. 773. | Morphol. Jahrb., xxxiv. (1905) pp, 149-203 (1 pl. and 18 figs.). q Jena Zeitschr., xxxiii. (1905) pp. 423-86 (3 pls. and 6 figs.). 166 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the head, the ganglia and their relation to the ectoderm, and the histogenesis of the nerves. He has also some notes on the sensory lines in Yorpedo. These arise as straight parallel-walled tubes, upon which lateral swellings develop on one side. These later reach the surface as open lateral tubules. Nerve-bulbs are situated opposite the points of origin of these side tubules. They are without doubt sensory structures, which in the course of phylogeny have arisen from corre- sponding structures situated on the surface. Hardening of Teeth Enamel in Man.*—V.v. Ebner has studied the changes in enamel during hardening. As a rule, hardening takes place slowly, and is effected by a fluid stream (Sdftestrom) of dentine into the inter-prismatic cement substance. The typical Retzius lines —contour lines—occurring in persistent teeth, as also the contour bands in milk-teeth, are due to a stoppage in the development of the enamel at an early stage of its growth. The formation of the enamel prisms stands in a much closer relation to the vital activity of the enamel cells than the formation (in many respects similar) of the prism layer of the mussel shell to the epithelial cells of the mantle edge. The typical arrangement and direction of the prisms are due to an inherited self- differentiation of the enamel cells; on the other hand, the form of the prisms seen in cross section admits of a mechanical explanation. Red Blood Corpuscles of Amphibia.—F. Meves ¢ gives an account of various alterations of form undergone by the red blood cells of frog and salamander when exposed to ammonia fumes and solutions. J. Dogiel,t also, shows that under the influence of various physical and chemical agents, the form and composition of the red blood corpuscle may vary. Some indication also of the possibility of artificial initiation of mitosis of these and other tissue-elements has been found. The Hemocele Theory.§—F. Vejdovsky has investigated the re- lations of the vascular system in the Enchytreide, and in the light of the facts elucidated discusses the hemoccele theory. To the question as to whether the hemoceele is a remnant of the original blastoccele, or is an extra-intestinal mesoblastic schizoccele, he gives the following answer. The vascular system cannot be traced to the blastoccele ; its most primitive constituent part, viz. the gut sinus with its outer cellular boundary, is an integral part of the endoderm. Neither can it be explained as schizoccele (in Huxley’s sense), because it does not arise in the mesoblast ; the mesodermal muscular layers represent a secondary envelope upon an endodermal structure. It is, in fact, a cavity swi generis, only fittingly distinguished as hemoccele, which, nevertheless, is no new formation, since its original constituents—the blood-fluid and the enclosing vasothelium—arise from the endoderm. Life-History of Blennius pholis.|—W.C. McIntosh describes the egg, which possesses a disk for adhesion, and gives particulars of growth * Arch, Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1905) pp. 18-81 (4 pls.). + Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) pp. 177-86 (17 figs.). t Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., Ixxxii. (1905) pp. 171-81 (1 pl.). § Tom. cit., pp. 80-170 (5 pls.). | Op. cit.. Ixxxvi. (1905) pp. 368-78 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 167 and colour-changes from about 19 mm. onward to 85 mm. examples. The intervening larval and post-larval stages have not been observed. This blenny appears to be particularly hardy, and a striking instance of one (given up for dead after a railway journey and a night in-doors in a close vessel) is quoted. It was placed in seaweed in a dry vessel, and the following day, on showing signs of life, was put in sea-water. It revived, and lived until killed a month later. It appears also to be able to live in fresh-water for long periods without inconvenience. Eyes of Periophthalmus and Boleophthalmus.*—W. Volz gives an account of the structure and special physiology of the eyes of these fishes. There is an active adaptation to sight at a distance, which is effected by the approximation of the lens to the retina. In repose, the lens lies near the cornea. By contraction of the cross-striped muscles around the sclerotic cartilage it is pushed backward, and thus approaches the retina, to which it may lie so near as to practically obliterate the posterior eye-chamber. This accommodation is effected when the fishes are on land. Pectoral Girdle in Fishes.}—B. Haller discusses this subject with special reference to the Teleostei. Regarding the scapula in Salmo, he is of opinion that this was not originally a component of the primary shoulder girdle. It very probably corresponds to a basal. To this basal is joined secondarily the radii, which, well developed in Acipenser, less so in Amia, fall completely away in Teleostei. In Acipenser, Polyodon, and Amia, the scapula is joined as a cartilaginous piece to the primitive shoulder girdle. The large scapular opening in Acipenser, and the smaller one in the same place in Ama, are not comparable with one of the foramina on the shoulder girdle in Selachii. The latter are related rather to those on the coracoid in Teleostei. Function of Parathyroids.{— F. Pineles has something to say on this subject. He investigated these bodies in the cat, rabbit, and ape. In the cat he found that they are essential to life. Their removal causes fatal tetanus ; frequently phenomena of paralysis are also induced. Even large portions of thyroid cannot replace them. The ape also exhibited symptoms of tetanus, but a more chronic course of the disease was manifested, possibly due, it is suggested, to the presence of. similar organs situated elsewhere in the body. Results in the case of the rabbit were uncertain. Secretion of the Preen Gland.§—Margarete Stern has studied the glandula uropygii of birds. It resembles the sebaceous glands of mammals in structure, function, and development. There is a true secretory process, by which a characteristic product is formed out of fat. The peripheral cells are always being formed anew and the central cells are always degenerating, but the breakdown of the cells occurs after the secretion has been formed in them. Rohmann’s analysis shows that the secretion consists of a minute quantity of fat (triglyceride of fatty acids), * Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxii. (1905) pp. 331-46 (1 pl.). + Arch. Mikr. Anat., lxvii. (1905) pp. 231-68 (2 pls. and 6 figs.). t SB. Akad. Wiss. Wien, exiii. (1904) pp. 199-238. § Arch. Micr. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 299-311 (1 pl.). 168 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO but mainly of the fatty acid (palmitin and stearin) “ester” of octadecyl alcohol, and another substance soluble in chloroform. Migrations.*—T. Southwell points out in an interesting paper that the periodic movements which we are accustomed to call “ migrations ” are of widespread occurrence, and by no means confined to birds. He gives the following instances : the mackerel and the herring (very local movements in both cases), the lemmings, the field mice, the eared seals, and most cetaceans, e.g. the bottle-nose whale (Hyperoodon), the white- beaked dolphin, and the right whale. Nidamental Organ of Dogfish.t—V. Widakowich describes the structure and function of the nidamental organ in Scyllium canicula. The structures implicated are the modified internal wall of the oviduct, and four kinds of glands. There is a white albumen gland, a reddish shell-gland, between these a large tubular mucus gland, and finally numerous small mucus glands in the wall of the oviduct. The complex tubular structure of the glands is described in detail. The shell is built up of many thin lamellee, which seem to arise from the coalescence of cylindrical threads. Metamerism in Integumentary Structures.t—Otto Grosser dis- cusses alleged cases of metameric arrangement in integumentary struc- tures, e.g. scales in reptiles and stripes in mammals. His results are somewhat negative. In none of the instances is the metamerism really demonstrable, unless perhaps Mayer’s case of segmentally arranged transitory scales in young embryos of Scyllium and Pristiurus. The apparent segmental arrangement is probably secondary, and due to mechanical factors. Dorsal Gland of Dendrohyrax.§—Th. Mollison gives an account of this gland, which secretes a scent substance having a musky smell. The smell is not sufficiently strong to be effective in repelling enemies ; its function is more likely to attract individuals of the same species. Its position is marked by a brighter spot amongst the hair. The hairs upon this spot do not arise over the gland, and the distal portions only are brightly coloured. The gland is probably functional only at certain times, e.g., the pairing season, since even in the adult its duct is closed by an epithelial plug. Morphology of Reptile Brain.||—L. Unger gives an account of the cerebrum in Gecko. One or two of his special points may be quoted. He has demonstrated the presence of a non-medullate commissura septi, forming a continuation of another non-medullate commissure which radiates into the hemispheres. There is a bundle of fibres of the Fasciculus septa-parolfactorius uniting the septum with the area parolfactoria. Secretion in Urinary Ducts in Mammals.{—O. V. C. EH. Petersen describes secreting gland-cells in the ureter, pelvis renis, and vesica of * Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Nat. Soc., viii. part 1 (1905) pp. 15-21. + Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., Ixxx. (1905) pp. 1-21 (2 pls.). } Tom. cit., pp. 56-179 (8 figs.). § Morphol. Jahrb., xxxiv. (1905), pp. 240-5 (1 pl.). || SB. Acad. Wiss. Wien, cxiii. (1904) pp. 141-60 (2 pls.). q Anat. Anzeig., xxvii. (1905) pp. 187-99 (4 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 169 various mammals. He also found glycogen in the cells of the various regions of the urinary duct system in the horse and ass. In other animals the ureter and vesica epithelial-cells coloured brown with potassium iodide; only in a few isolated cells was this brown colour localised in granular masses. Action of Radium Rays on Skin.*— Beitrige zur Kenntnis der Pilzflora im Kaukasus. (Contributions to the knowledge of the fungus flora of the Caucasus.) [162 species are recorded, including 14 Mycetozoa, with one new species, Trichia ovalispora.]- Tom. cit., pp. 315-25. + A Potoromyces loculatus Miill. in Herb. [Criticism of an Australian genus, named by Cooke and Massee Diploderma glaucum.] Tom. cit., pp. 326-7 (2 figs.). Jaap, Ort o—Beitrage zur Pilzflora von Mecklenburg. (Contributions to the fungus flora of Mecklenburg.) [The fungi were collected in the neighbourhood of Warne- munde. } Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 391-401. 208 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO JAAP, OTto—Fungi selecti exsiccati. (Series vi. Nos. 126-50.) [Fungi from Brandenburg, Schleswig-Holstein, Denmark, and Switzerland, are included; several new species are recorded. | Hamburg, November 1905. See also Bot. Centralbdl., ci. (1906) p. 104. Kock, G.—Septoria Lycopersici auf Paradiespflanzen und Phyllosticta Cyclaminis auf Cyclamen persicum. (Septoria Lycopersicti on tomatoes, and Phylosticta Cyclaminis on Cyclamen persicum.) [Description of two leaf diseases. ] Zeitschr. Landw. Ver. Oesterr., 1905, p. 572. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) pp. 271-2. KuxiscH—Ueber das diesjahrige Auftreten der Peronospora am Rebstocke be- sonders auf den Trauben. (On the occurrence of Peronospora on the vine, and especially on the grapes, during the current year.) Nat. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw , 1905, heft 9. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) pp. 655-6. LAuUBERT, R.—Die Kropfkrankheit (Plasmodiophora) des Kohls und ihre Bekam- pfung. (‘‘ Finger and toe” on turnips, and methods of prevention.) Praktische Bldtter fiir Pflanzenbau und Pflanzenschuta, iii. (1905) heft 7, pp. 73-9. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xy. (1905) pp. 652-3. Linp, J.—Ueber einige neue und bekannte Pilze. (On some new and previously known fungi.) Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 427-32 (1 fig.). Macnus, P.—Notwendige Umanderung des Namens der Pilzgattung Marssonia Fisch. (Necessary change of the name of the fungus genus Marssonia Fisch.) [As the name Marssonia had already been used for a genus of Phanerogams, Magnus changes the name to Marssonia P. Magn.) Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 88-99. MorGAn, A. P.—North American species of Marasmius. Journ. Mycol., xi. (1905) pp. 201-12. Murpgiuu, W. A.—The Polyporacee of North America. The described species of Bjerkandera, Trametes, and Coriolus. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxii. (1905) pp. 633-56. REHM—Ascomyeceten exs. Fasc. 35. [Notes and descriptions of 25 species. ] Ann, Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 409-17. Savours#, PIERRE—Recherches experimentales sur les mycoses internes et leurs parasites. (Experimental researches on internal mycoses and their parasites.) [These are species of Mucor, Rhizopus, and Aspergillus. | Arch. Parasit., x. (1905) pp. 5-70 (20 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbi., ci. (1906) pp. 11-12. S1gMuUND, WILHELM—Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Wurzelbrandes der Rube. (Con- tributions to our knowledge of root disease of the beet.) [A study of the effect of Phoma and Bacillus mycoides on the roots. ] Naturw. Zeitschr. Land, Forstw., iii. (1905) pp. 212-21. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) pp. 273-4. Stirt, A.—Bemerkungen iiber den Giirtelschorf der Ruben. (Remarks on the girdle scab of beet.) [The writer discusses Kriiger’s statement that scab was caused by Oospora.] Wiener Landw. Zeitung, 1905, p. 712. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) p. 654. SrRaszuR, P. Prus—Dritter Nachtrag zur Pilzflora des Sonntagberges (N.0.); 1904. (Third contribution to the fungus flora of Sonntagberg.) [Species 857-1088 are recorded, many of them with full diagnoses. There are several new species described by Bresadola.] Verh. k. k. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien, lv. (1905) pp. 600-21. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 209 Sypow—Mpycotheca germanica. (Fasc. viii.—ix. Nos. 351-450.) [A list of the species is given, and notes on several species ; one only is new. } Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 418-21. THAXTER, RoLAND—Preliminary Diagnoses of new species of Laboulbeniacew. VI. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., xli. (1905) pp. 303-18. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 548-9. U zu, H.—Mitteilung iiber Krankheiten und Feinde der Zuckerriibe in Bohmen im Jahre 1904, (Contributions on the diseases and enemies of sugar-beet in Bohemia in the year 1904.) [They are mostly insects that are dealt with. Riizoctonia violacea was the principal fungus disease. ] Zeitschr. Zuckerind. Béhmen, xxix. (1905) p. 399. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) pp. 272-3. VrLLER—Zum Auftreten der Peronospora viticola im heurigen Jahre. (The occurrence of Peronospora viticola in the current year.) Oesterr. Landw. Wochenbl., 1905, No. 32. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) p. 655. Viata & PacottrEet—Nouvelles recherches sur l’anthracnose. (New researches on anthracnosis.) [An account of yeasts, etc., that cause the disease. ] Revue de Viticulture, xxiv. (1905) 65 pp., 7 pls. and 85 figs. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 13-15. WEHMER, C.—Versuche iiber Mucorineengarung. II. (Research on mucor fermen- tation.) [The mucor experimented with was M. javamcus.] Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) pp. 8-19. W uitsh, EK. A.—A Preliminary Report on the Hymeniales of Connecticut. [The paper gives keys to the genera and families, and a list of species. ] Bull, Conn, State Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey, iii. (1905) pp. 1-81 (40 pls.). See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 549. Wize, C.—Die durch Pilze hervorgerufene Krankheiten des Ritibenrusselkafers (Cleonus punctiventris) mit besonderer Berucksichtigung neuer Arten. (Disease of the turnip weevil (Cleonus punctiventris) caused by fungi, with special con- sideration of new species.) Polish. [A considerable number of fungi attack the weevil; three are described. ] Bull. Int. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1904, No. 10, pp. 713-26 (1 pl. and 11 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 624. . | Lichens. (By, A. Lorrain SMITH.) New Lichen Genus.*—A. Jatta has found among the lichens collected in Chili by G. F. Scott Elliot a new form with a very sparse lichen thallus somewhat resembling the thallus of a Cenogonium. He considers it to be the type of a new genus, Amphiloniopsis. The apothecia are lecanorine, of a beautiful orange colour; the spores are fusiform, three-septate. The fungus grew on the spines of Cereus peruvianus. Jatta places this genus along with Amphiloma and Lepro- loma in the tribe Amphilomei. French Lichens.t—Bouly de Lesdain has collected lichens during July and September for three years in succession in the neighbourhood * Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital,, xii. (1905) pp. 482-7 (6 figs.). + Bull. Soc. Bot. France, v. (1905) pp. 602-28. April 18th, 1906. i 210 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of Versailles, and he now publishes a list of the species he has found. The tree forms are particularly well represented. In many cases the author gives a complete description of the species; nearly always he gives the chemical reactions. ‘There are 188 species and 48 forms or varieties recorded. Research on Silicious Lichens.*—KE. Stahlecker considers that the form and anatomy of the lichen thallus are influenced by the chemical constitution. On rocks composed of various constituents, the anatomi- cal form of the plant is modified so that the hyphal layer in comparison with the gonidial layer is stronger, especially where there is a larger proportion of basic substance present, as for instance of lime. On stratified rocks the silicious lichens grow most readily on the face of the stone, at right angles to the strata. Fresh surfaces are favourite localities, while weathered surfaces are avoided. The more acid the substratum and the drier the fungus, the larger are the separate gonidia. If the hyphe are stronger, then the gonidia are weaker. Lichens are not found alone on the rocks, and therefore other factors influence their development. Chemistry of Lichens.j—W. Zopf publishes a further contribution on this subject. In Spherophorus collected from granite he had found spherophorin, spherophoric acid, and fragilin. Another collection of the same lichen from gneiss has enabled him to verify his previous findings, and to describe more definitely the properties of the new substances. From the thallus of Biatora mollis, collected on sandstone, he has isolated diffusin acid, a substance similar to that which he found in Platysma diffusum. A section of Gyrophora polyrrhiza becomes red on the application of calcium chloride. Zopf finds that this is due to the presence of lecanoric acid. He found, in addition, two other sub- stances, umbilicar acid and gyrophor acid. He examined several other lichens, and gives an account of the chemical constituents, and of their colour reactions. JAAP, O.—Einige Neuheiten fiir die Flechtenflora Hamburgs. (Some new records, from the lichen flora of Hamburg.) Allgem. Bot. Zeitschr., vi. (1905) pp. 150-1. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) p. 549. Kovar, F.—Beitrag zur Flechtenflora der Umgebung Saars in Mahren. (Contribu- tion to the lichen flora of the neighbourhood of Saars, in Mahren.) Russian. S.A. Vestuik Klubu privod. v. Prost. za rok, 1906 (1905) 8vo, 16 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 73. W AINIO, E.—Lichenes expeditionis G. Amdrup (1898-1902). [A contribution to our knowledge of Arctic lichens. ] Meddel. om. Grinland, xxx. (1905) pp. 125-41. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) pp. 489-90. * Inaug. Dissert. Stuttgart, 1905, 8vo, 44 pp., 1 pl. See also Ann. Mycol., iii. (1905) p. 489. + Liebig’s Ann, Chemie, cccxl. (1905) pp. 276-309. See also Bot. Centralbl., xcix. (1905) pp. 588-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, rata b Schizophyta. Schizomycetes. Oligonitrophil and Mesonitrophil Bacteria.*—R. Perotti, adopting the method employed by Beijerinck for the bacteriological analyses of soils, has examined the soil of the Roman Campagna with especial reference to the oligonitrophil and mesonitrophil bacteria—that is, those organisms that can develop in media entirely free from or only contain- ing a limited amount of nitrogen. From his results he is led to consider the connection of these organisms with the value of fallow land in the practice of rotation of crops, and believes that this last has a biological explanation, and depends on the organisms found in the soil. Bacteriology of Armenian “ Mazun.”+—M. Diiggeli, from the results of his researches on the bacteriology of Armenian “ Mazun,” a highly estimated form of fermented milk, concludes that three different kinds of micro-organisms are to be met with, viz. yeasts, long rods of lactic acid-forming bacteria, and organisms resembling B. guntheri L.and N. The yeasts that were isolated fermented lactose, with the formation of acid, alcohol, and aromatics ; the lactic acid bacteria gave with lactose an abundant production of acid. Biologically, ‘‘ Mazun ” is allied to “ Kefir,” “ Sauersteig,” ‘“ Kisereisauer,”’ etc., in all of which there is an association of yeasts and strong lactic acid-producing organisms ; though it is not possible to assign the specific agent in the production of ‘‘ Mazun,” it appears that this association of organisms is not of the nature of a symbiosis. Capsulated Bacilli.{—E. Bertarelli classifies the capsulated bacilli into two main divisions, each comprising several sub-groups, according to their biochemical actions on the different sugars, and the agglutinat- ing reactions they produce with immune sera. Action of Micro-organisms on the Solution of Blue Azur in Methyl Alcohol.s—M. F. Marino, after discussing the constitutions of eosin-methylen-blue solutions, finds that when placed in broth-cultures of certain micro-organisms these solutions are dissociated. On to the surface of a broth-culture of B. anthracis some eosin-methylen-blue solution is poured in such a manner as not to mix with the liquid; a control tube of uninoculated broth is similarly treated. The two tubes are left at the temperature of the laboratory. After five minutes the coloured layer in contact with the culture has changed, a pink zone appearing above the culture liquid, and after several hours showing as a pink ring surmounted by a layer of blue. The blue in contact with the living microbe has been reduced, and so allows the eosin to become visible. In the control tube no change has occurred. ‘This effect, which has been observed in a number of different cultures, is most marked when the culture is most active and abundant. The reaction * Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xiv. (1905) p. 623. + Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 577. t Op. cit., Ref. 1te Abt., xxxvii. (1005) p. 333. § Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) p. 816. 212 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO serves to distinguish various strains of bacteria that do not grow with the same activity, and to detect the increased or diminished vitality of cultures, and it also allows one to estimate the value of different media ; the energy of the reduction is measured by the depth of the pink zone. The rapidity of the reduction is not proportionate to the pathogenic virulence of the organism, but depends on the number of the organisms present. The reaction is favoured by a temperature of 35° C. The author suggests that this reaction might be useful in detecting the presence of microbes in liquids in which on microscopic examination their presence could not be detected. New Chromogenic Slime-producing Organism.*—F. C. Harrison and B. Barlow isolated from oily butter a chromogenic microbe that formed slime and crystals, and to which they gave the name B. visco- fucatus. The organism is a non-motile rod, 1°0 w-1°8 » long by 0°6 w-0°9 » broad, occurring singly or in chains, with a tendency to pleomorphism ; after the formation of slime a capsule was observed ; no spore formation was noted; it stains by ordinary dyes and by Gram’s method. On gelatin plates to which various carbohydrates were added, the colonies after five days were 1 mm. in diameter, and liquefaction had commenced; the colonies were slimy, and much pig- ment had developed, showing blue or violet with sucrose, dextrose, mannite, and maltose, and green with galactose, dextrin, and starch ; gelatin without carbohydrates developed only a yellow-green tint. On agar it formed white slimy colonies, but no pigment; on 1-20 p.c. sucrose agar there was a deep blue pigmentation. In milk, after 25-40 hours at 18°-22° C., there appears a grey-blue coloration, which becomes bright blue and later disappears; there is much slime pro- duced, and late peptonisation of the medium. On potato at 22° C. it forms a yellowish-white slimy growth, the medium becoming a bright dark-blue after 4—5 days, and later becoming ochre-yellow or rust colour. The pigment was extracted from an agar culture in 50 p.c. alcohol, the solution being blue to wine colour; it was soluble in water, but not in benzin or chloroform. The slime after separation was soluble in cold water, and after heating with dilute acid it re- duced Fehling’s solution. Bacteria that obtain their Carbon from Methan}.—N. L. Séhngen has demonstrated that the absorption of methan by plant life is due to a micro-organism. By means of an arrangement of two Erlenmeyer flasks, and a special carbon-free fluid medium (which he inoculated with slop-water or grave-water, and to which he admitted a known mixture of oxygen and methan, the whole being placed at 30°-37° C.) he obtained after 2-4 days a pellicle growth; on analysing the gaseous mixture when the culture was a week old, he found that the methan had entirely or partly disappeared, whereas an appreciable amount of CO, had been produced. The bacterial pellicle was composed chiefly of one variety of bacterium : short stout rods, motile only in young cultures, provided with one flagellum. This organism the author has named B. methanicus ; by growing this bacterium in his apparatus he was able to show that methan was the only source from which it could obtain carbon. * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) p. 517. + Tom. cit., p. 513. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 213 Bacilli. growing on Drigalski-Conradi Nutrient Agar.*—.J. Th. Terburgh obtained from the analysis of canal and other waters in Amsterdam, 61 pure cultures of organisms grown on Drigalski-Conradi plates. Of these 18 were red colonies, 16 showing cultural relationship to the Coli group, but exhibiting many variations, and 2 being gelatin liquefiers were assigned to the Proteus group. The remaining 43 cultures had blue colonies; of these, 2 showed a faint red coloration round the blue, and belonged to the spirilla, but did not liquefy gelatin ; 9 colonies showed coccal forms; 15 belonged to four groups—BS. pyocyaneus (2), B. fluorescens liq. (4), B. fluorescens non-liq. (6), and B. proteus vulgaris (3), so that this last group was represented in both the red and the blue colonies. The organisms of 3 colonies resembled those of B. typhosus, but could be differentiated both from this and from the B. paratyphosus by their agglutinating reactions. The re- maining 14 cultures showed many varieties. Bacterium Agreste.t—F’. Lohnis has isolated from agricultural soil on mannite-soil-agar cultivations, a nitrogen-fixing organism morpho- logically resembling B. pestis, but which is non-pathogenic and possesses active motility. He has named this organism B. agreste. The colonies appeared after 1-2 days at 30° C., as light grey transparent circular or oval drops, of 6 mm. diameter, composed of round-ended rods 3p broad by 1p—2» long ; they stain by the ordinary dyes, but not by Gram’s method, and often show polar staining; they rarely form threads or chains ; they are actively motile and have peritrichous flagella ; room temperature is more favourable to growth than a temperature of 37° C.; gelatin is not liquefied ; milk is unchanged, but, on shaking, it appears slimy and thready; on potato it forms a white to yellowish-white growth ; indol production was noted; glucose and lactose were not fermented ; in glycerin-saltpetre-soil extract the nitrogen of the saltpetre is fixed in organic form within six days ; no pathogenic action could be observed. Actinomycetes.{—E. Haass reviews the position and subclassification of this group of organisms, and refers to the classing according to source, cultural characters, microscopical appearances, the resistance to heat, the presence or absence of pathogenic properties ; he refers also to their relationship to the true bacilli, to B. tuberculosis and B. diphtheria on the one hand, and on the other to the moulds; he concludes that the family of the Actinomycetes stands between the Schizomycetes and the Hyphomycetes. Bacteriology of Measles.§$—Ag. Borini examined the blood, and bronchial and conjunctival secretions of children affected with measles. From blood cultures was obtained a small slender bacillus ; in glycerin- agar and on defibrinated blood it formed punctiform, transparent, greyish- white colonies. It did not coagulate milk or form CO, or indol. When cultures were injected into animals these died in 3-6 days, with pneumonia or pleurisy. * Centralbl. Bakt., Orig. 1te Abt., xl. (1905) p. 258. ) Womacitisp: Lia, t Tom. cit., p. 180. § Riforma Med., June 24, 1905. See also Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xl. (1905) pp. 194-7 (1 pl.). SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO S. J. Zlatogoroff * cultivated from the blood of measles: patients a bacillus 0°4-0°7p long and from 0°2-0°4y broad. It is stainable by the usual anilin dyes and also by Gram’s method. It is but little motile and occurs in pairs and irregular groups. The ends of the rodlets are rounded and stain more deeply than the central parts. In liquid media it forms a flocculent deposit, the supernatant fluid remaining clear. It grows best at incubation temperature, is aerobic, and does not form pores. It soon dies out, and does not cultivate well in solid media. New Acetic Acid-forming Bacterium.j—F. Fuhrmann describes a new organism, the Acetobacter plicatum, which converts ethyl-alcohol into acetic acid, and which he obtained from one of the vats in wine experi ments. In wine gelatin at 22° C. it forms almost circular, raised colonies of a light yellow glittering colour. It is non-liquefying, and grows in the depths of the medium as spherical colonies, which spread upwards and reach the surface, where typical characteristic growths occur. In neutral gelatin broth it grows well, but is best seen in stab cultures as concentrically arranged circular opacities 1 c.cm. below the surface, and deeper still as small punctiform colonies. Films stained with methylen-blue show rods 1°4 to 1°6m by 0°4-0°6 4, which from alcoh ol-free gelatin stain a homogeneous blue, but on wine-gelatin show bipolar staining with an almost unstained centre. On a wine or bouillon-gelatin slope, there appears a fused, delicate, whitish-yellow growth, with finer growths running transversely to the streak. On beer-gelatin, growth is similar but more slimy, and after a time the culture reddens. On “alcohol-free” beer-gelatin it grows only if neutral or acid, but on alcoholic beer-gelatin strongly alkaline with caustic soda, acid formation occurs, and the culture clears. On bouillon and beer-agar slopes there is a thick, light yellow, opaque growth. Stained films from agar cultures at 28°-30° C. show rods 0°75 » by 0°6 », mostly with a capsule which does not stain with iodine or give the cellulose reaction. Only a sparse growth occurs on potato. In sterile wine con- taining 3°5 p.c. alcohol, a network forms in the depth and radiates to the surface, forming there a whitish-grey tenacious mould 8-10 mm. thick, and fluid remains clear; the mould gives no starch or cellulose reaction. The zoogloea structure differs on “ alcohol-free” beer and wine. On “alcohol-free” beer, cane or grape sugar favours the mould- growth, but on alcoholic beer grape sugar is unfavourable. Ata high tem- perature only slight changes occurred. At 40° C. some threads were 50 p long, but not branching, and a low temperature gave only slight evi- dence of degeneration into short rods, though some staining peculiarities resulted. Sometimes pale blue staining rods, with the wall bulged by a clear space surrounded by a dark blue staining border, favoured the idea of spore formation. Acetobacter plicatum thrives in wine with 11 p.c. alcohol, and beer containing 9°5 p.c. if the temperature is between 22° and 25°C. Generally speaking, a lower temperature is necessary in wine and beer containing * Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xxxvii. (1905) pp. 249-51. t Op. cit., 2te Abt., xv. (1905) No. 12. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 215 much alcohol, whilst in media poor in alcohol a higher temperature is better. Bacillus aureus fetidus.*—M. Herzog describes a new pathogenic bacterium which was isolated from the liver and heart-blood. The microbe is a bacillus 0°6-2 » long, and from 0°5-0°8 p» thick ; often in pairs, capsulated, non-motile, easily stainable, but not by Gram’s method. It liquefies gelatin, forms a golden-yellow pigment. The colonies on solid media are yellow, round, and smooth. It coagulates milk. All cultures, aerobic and anaerobic, exhale a foetid cheesy odour ; they are killed by heating for 10 minutes to 62°. * Zeitschr. f. Hygiene u. Infekt., xlix. (1905) p. 356. 216 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO MICROSCOPY, A. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1) Stands. Watson and Sons’ Club Microscope.{—In appearance this instru- ment (fig. 25) is very similar to the Van Heurck model manufactured by Watson and Sons, but the idea has been to simplify the general details, and to provide in it such mechanical conveniences as are desired by an amateur, omitting the refinements that are only required by and of im- portance to the expert and critical worker. The tripod foot has a spread of 9 in. ; the stage is 5 in. in diameter, and has mechanical and rotary movements; the substage has rackwork to focus and screws to centre, and can be turned aside from the optic axis with the apparatus contained in it when desired. The instrument is of full size, measuring in height 12% in. when racked down. Watson and Sons’ Praxis Petrological Microscope.{—This is a Petrological Microscope (fig. 26) of continental model, with the horse- shoe foot and the upright pillar cast inasolid piece. The body contains an analyser prism and a Klein’s quartz plate. The polariser, which is carried in a plate beneath the stage, can be turned aside from the optic axis when desired. The coarse-adjustment is by diagonal rack-and- pinion, and the fine-adjustment is Watsons’ standard lever pattern. Watson and Sons’ School Microscope, 1905 Model.§ — Several modifications have been made in this instrument (fig. 27). The foot and the upright are cast in one solid piece, also the stage and the limb are cast solid. The stage has been fitted withan ebonite covering, and although the instrument is made with a coarse-adjustment by diagonal rack-and-pinion only, provision has been made for the subsequent addition of fine-adjustment should it be desired. Reichert’s New Large Mineralogical Stand.||—This instrument (fig. 28) differs from the one described in the Journal, 1905, p. 245, in that the limb is altered to the handle form, and the fine-adjustment located therein for greater security. * This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (8) Illuminating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation; (6) Miscellaneous. + W. Watson and Sons’ Catalogue, 1906, p. 36. t Tom. cit., p. 84. § Tom. cit., p. 68. || Reichert’s Special Catalogue, 1905-1906, p. 11. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 217 \ i mie, 218 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO > NA 3 ‘e = r a ll i ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 219 any wet or dry use, and Mr. Woodward said that this lens ex would resolve Amphipleura pellucida. Fic. 29. When this report was received in England it made a great stir, and opticians were most anxious to equal, if not excel, this result. Hence the origin of the lens. It is of a peculiar construction, having a single front and back, and a triple middle. This triple has a central biconcave dense flint lens which corrects the aberration of the entire lens. The plan of this lens is figured on the right-hand half of fig. 6 on page 163 of the “ Monthly Microscopical Journal,” vol. ix., 1873, which appears to be an abstract of the Proceedings of the Royal Society, 1873, No. 141. The present example differs slightly from the figure inasmuch as it has its back lens turned round the other way, so that its flat side is next the object. These lenses did not prove successful, and were soon given up. Similar objectives were made by Powell and ‘Lealand, but they dis- continued their production after they had brought out their “ new formula” which had separate fronts for dry and water immersion work. This Ross lens is a } by measurement ; its aperture is 0°81 dry, and 0°83 wet, so that it would be quite incapable of resolving Amphipleura pellucida. The figure attached is not to scale, but is given to show the form of the lenses. Howland’s Instrument for Centring, Marking, and Testing Lenses.*—C. W. Howland has patented this instrument, which is in- tended to centre, or decentre lenses, as desired. It also axis-marks cylindrical lenses, so that they can be cut to any axis without adjusting the lens-cutter. The instrument also shows the strength of prismatic lenses, and it tests finished prescriptions, indicating whether they have been filled correctly. The frame of the instrument comprises a stand with a bed, on which are three brackets (fig. 30). At one end is a fixed bracket with a sight tube, anda blinker for the eye notin use. The standard at the other end carries a protractor, in which is a target revolvable by turning a rod at the right-hand side of the bed, looking towards the target. The same serves as a push-and-pull rod to adjust the position of the target along the bed, according to the focus of the lens. At the left side is a link, pivoted to * Optical Instrument Monthly (New York) i. No. 3 (Aug. 1905) pp. 24-6 (1 pL. and 8 figs.). 222 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the middle bracket, or lens rest, and containing one or more notches, intended to engage a pin and hold the target-carriage at a fixed distance when testing prismatic power. The lens rest comprises a ring carrying a glass plate, against which the lens to be tested, marked, etc., is held by hand or otherwise on the optical axis extending from the sight tube to the target centre. Pivoted to the bottom of the middle bracket is an arm holding a little shaft placed at right angles to the vertical plane, through the axis of the instrument. This shaft carries three marking Fie. 30. pins, which, when the arm is lowered, strike an ink-pad, and, when the arm is raised, stamp the lens at three points in the same straight line coincident with the horizontal major axis of the lens. During the swing of the arm the shaft carrying the ink-pins executes a quarter-turn, under the influence of a cord which passes over a drum on the shaft and is kept taut by a spring. The rotation of the shaft is limited by stop-fingers. The marking pins are yielding, so as to compensate for the amount of projection of different parts of the surface of the lens. Detailed descriptions of the use of the instrument are given. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 223 (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. High-Angle Condenser Carrier for Petrological Microscopes.*—In connection with their Petrological Microscope, Watson and Sons have recently introduced a new arrangement for quickly removing the upper portion of the condenser from the field of view without the removal of the polariser or other apparatus. The upper portion of the condenser mount, containing the lens which produces the high-angled convergence, is carried on a holder which is fitted into the stage itself. This holder can be immediately turned on a pivot so as to bring the condenser into the optical axis, or remove it therefrom. When high-angled convergent light is required, the holder is turned so as to bring the condenser to the centre of the stage—it is then just below the surface. The polariser is then pushed upwards, and in so doing lifts the condenser from its holder and carries it upwards to the surface of the stage. When the condenser is not required, the polariser is lowered until the condenser rests once more on its holder, when it can be at once turned aside. Miller Sub-Stage Spark-Gap Lamp for the Microscope.t—T. I. Miller has arranged this apparatus (fig. 31) for photographing thin sec- Fia. 31. tions of minerals while fluorescing. It is not possible to give exact dimensions of the apparatus, because these must vary with the require- ments of the Microscope selected. A piece of vulcanite 2 in. thick and about 1 in. wide, is made with a base for two metallic terminal balls each 33; in. in diameter, and mounted on pins having a tapered point. These pins are driven into holes drilled in the vulcanite. Two wires of thin copper are then wound around the pins, and connected to the secondary of a 4-in. induction coil. This “lamp” is fastened to the sub-stage of the Microscope by machine screws, which loosely fit through the slots. By this construction it is quite easy to adjust the spark to the centre of field, or entirely out of field. The balls may be made of various metals, and provided with tapering holes to fit the pins, thus making it easy to use various metals whose spectra and effect on the mineral section are * W. Watson and Sons’ Catalogue, 1906, p. 79. + Optical Instrument Monthly (New York) i. No. 3 (Aug. 1905) pp. 13-14 (8 figs). 224 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO known to be quite different. The balls must be mounted just high enough to be a little below the level of the top of the Microscope stage. The secondary of the induction coil is stepped up with a half-pint Leyden jar. An ordinary telegraph key was found most convenient for making and breaking the current. The mineral sections are ground as thin as possible, washed free of balsam, and then cemented around the edges to ordinary slides. The slides are reversed when placed on the Microscope stage, and the section should lie just clear of the balls. Some Notes on Laurent Polariscope Readings.*—G. W. Rolfe and C. Field have made two series of rotation measurements of two standard quartz plates on a Laurent polariscope, one set with the light designed to be used by the Laurent polariscope, sodium-chloride light filtered through a section of bichromate crystal; the other set with sodium- chloride light passed through a Lippich ray filter. The instrument used was a Laurent “large model,” made about 1888 by Léon Laurent, of Paris. The authors conclude that it is imperative, in stating that the light factor of a saccharimeter is a certain value, that reference should be made (1) to the exact nature of the light used in the rotation read- ings; (2) the saccharimetric standard of the scale of the quartz-wedge instrument; (3) the nature of the substance measured; and (4) obviously, the temperature at which the comparisons are made. Quartz-Plate Readings in Saccharimetry.t—G. W. Rolfe gives his reasons for considering that the Landolt-Lippich polariser is not as satisfactory for instruments for general laboratory use as the Laurent, because the former requires that all extraneous light be rigidly excluded, and seems much more sensitive to small variations in intensity of the sodium flame than does the Laurent. Only under constant conditions of temperature and light intensity, and with a rigid exclusion of all ex- traneous light, can good results be obtained with the Lippich polariscope. A New Spectrometer: its Uses and Advantages.t—V. H. Mac- kinney has designed a new form of spectrometer, whose main features may be tabulated as follows :— (a) Both tubes are auto-collimating telescopes, and both are made to rotate in the horizontal plane. (6) The illuminant is central above the prism table, and hence, once set, is constant on the slits whatever position they may occupy round the circle. There is a shade below to prevent stray light from interfering with the observations. The advantages gained by these new features may, to start with, be briefly tabulated as follows :— (a) The refractive index of a prism can be determined whatever its angles may be, for the new instrument adapts itself for determin- ing it by any of the following methods :—(1) position of normal incidence ; (2) minimum deviation ; (8) critical incidence ; (4) return path (Abbe) method. * Technology Quart. Proc. Soc. Arts, Massachusetts, xviii. (Sept. 1905) pp. 219-93. t Tom. cit., pp. 294-9. ¢~ Paper read before Optical Society, London (Feb. 1906) 8 pp., 13 figs. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 225 (6) By having two auto-collimating telescopes, not only is a check obtained by taking an observation through one eye-piece and then through the other, but a further check is readily obtained by passing the light through the prism in a similar but opposite manner. (c) The error due to auto-collimation is eliminated when method (1) (normal incidence) is employed, by taking the mean of two observa- tions—with illuminating prism and cross-wires to right and left, or vice versa, of field respectively. The same applies to the “critical incidence ” method, which, however, is not apt to produce such accurate results, owing to the difficulty met with in placing the cross-wires to exactly cut the half-light and half-dark field. Optical Bench for Illumination with either Ordinary or Mono- chromatic Light.—The firm of R. and J. Beck has designed a small optical bench for microscopical illumination, which is suited for use with the Rosenhain Microscope, as well as for other purposes, and has a series of very handy adjustments (fig. 32). It consists of a 30-in. steel bar mounted on two strong tripod feet by means of two sliding uprights which can be raised or lowered and clamped at different heights, in fittings carried in the tripod feet, so that the bar can be placed at different heights above the table, or can be pointed either upwards or downwards. All the pieces of the apparatus slide along the steel bar, and are accurately aligned to the same centre or axis. Hach piece can be clamped in any position. At one end A is a Nernst lamp with a single upright filament giving from 100-230 candle-power. It can be used with a slight modification in the burner on any current from 110-220 volts, but to give the highest candle-power should be used with the highest current. Next to the lamp is an achromatic and aplanatic condenser B, 12 in. diameter, which is corrected to give a well-defined image of the filament on the slit C; this is adjustable by means of a screw. An achromatic collimating lens D collects the light from the slit C and emits it in a parallel bundle to a Thorp’s diffraction grating on a prism, with rotating adjustment and brass cover, which transmits a April 18th, 1906 Q 226 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO normal spectrum, which is again focused by means of an achromatic condensing lens F upon either the vertical illuminating apparatus of the Rosenhain Microscope, upon the surface of an object, or upon the mirror of an ordinary Microscope. It is generally advisable to interpose a screen with a broad slit in the focus of this lens if but one coloured light is required, especially if the bench is being used to illuminate a substage condenser for transmitted light. Such a screen is most con- veniently carried on the Microscope itself, but in the case of the vertical illuminator of the Rosenhain Microscope it is made to slide into the fittings of the body. The above describes the bench as used for monochromatic illumina- tion, but for ordinary illumination the diffraction grating and prism E, with the condenser F and the slit C, are removed. An iris diaphragm and a water cooling chamber G may be used, and if desired a 4-in. lantern condenser may be used instead of the condenser B. A mirror on carrier H may be supplied to fit the. bench. A lantern carrier and projection lens convert the whole apparatus into a most convenient and serviceable optical lantern. An incandescent gas lamp may be supplied in place of the Nernst lamp. (4) Photomicrography. Method for Determining the Exact Colour for Light Filters.— E. Moffat communicates the following easy method for determining the exact colour of screen required to photograph successfully a faintly stained slide of Bacteria, etc. Place some crystals of chlorate of potash or salicin (the crystals of which give a good range of colour) under a Microscope, and examine by polarised light. Revolve one of the prisms till any one of the crystals matches exactly the stained preparation : now turn the prism round 90°, when the: complementary colour will appear. This will show the exact tint required for the screen, and will produce the greatest amount of “darkness” or contrast, e.g., bacilli stained faintly blue will require a very dark orange screen, or if stained faintly red, a dark green will be required; the lighter the stain, the darker must be the screen, and vice versa, in order to produce a sharp image on the photographic plate. Hence the saving of time in using the polari- scope to determine the required depth of tint. Isochromatic plates must be used in conjunction with these screens. To prepare the screens fix unexposed dry plates in the dark room and stain with any suitable dye. (5) Microscopical{Optics and Manipulation. Artificial Double Refraction, due to Mlotropic Distribution, with Application to Colloidal Solutions and Magnetic Fields.*—T. H. Havelock, after reviewing the methods of artificially obtaining double refraction, and after investigating the theory of their formation, sum- marises the sections of his paper thus :— 1. The formal investigation of artificial double refraction in colloidal solutions as due to a deformation of the medium, consisting of a change in the packing of the colloidal particles. * Proc. Roy. Soc., Series A, lxxvii. No. A 515 (Feb. 1906) pp. 170-82. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. ypal 2. The possibility that such deformation may be produced by mechanical stress as arising from the possession of a certain amount of rigidity by such solutions. 3. The analogy between the effects so produced, and the double refraction due to a magnetic field. MaiILvARp, L.—Le Loi de la Refraction et le principe de la moindre action. [An interesting historical review of the theories of refraction. ] Bull. de la Soc. Vaudoise des Sci. Nat. (Lausanne), xli. (Sept. 1905) pp. 173-95 (7 figs.). Mounsect, A. H.—On a Scale of Colour-Values and a new Photometer. Technology Quarterly, xviii. (1905) pp. 60-72 (10 figs.). RouR, von M.—Die Optischen Instrumente. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner (1906) v. and 130 pp. ScHNEIDER, J., & J. Just—Ultramikroskopie der Oleosole. [On the application of ultramicroscopy for testing the purity of oils and oleaginous mixtures. ] Zeitschr. Wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 481-530. THorp, T.—Replicas of Diffraction Gratings. Nature, \xxiii. (1905) p. 79. WALLACE, R. J.—Ditto. Astrophysical Journal, xxii. No. 2. See also Nature, Ixxiii. (1905) p. 21. ZSiIGMONDyY, R.—Zur Erkenntniss der Kolloide. Ueber irreversible Hydrosole und Ultramikroskopie. (Anaccount of the nature and properties of colloid solutions or hydrosols, and of the investigation by the method of ultramicroscopy.) Jena: Gustav Fischer (1905) vi. and 185 pp. (6) Miscellaneous. Advances in Microscopy: The Microscope at Work.*—J. W. Gordon dealt first with the subject of metallography, which he traced to Dr. Sorby’s work in Sheffield in 1864, illustrating its use in engineering by a number of lantern slides lent for the purpose by Mr. J. HE. Stead, F.R.S., exhibiting the microscopic structure of steel. From this topic an easy transition served to introduce the subject of the changes which the surface of a polished piece of metal undergoes in the process of polishing. This part of the lecture was illustrated by photographs lent by Mr. G. Beilby, of Glasgow, who has made a special study of the physical condition of metals as affected by heat, and par- ticularly by the treatment which they undergo in the polishing process. His inquiries show that enormous forces, comparatively speaking, are brought to bear upon the exquisitely thin film of metal which is directly affected by the polishing operation in the act, for instance, of knife cleaning ; and as the result of the hard usage to which this surface film is subjected it carries permanent traces of having been spread like a fluid over the solid foundation of underlying metal. A very remarkable series of photographs illustrated this point, and showed how a polishing tool left the surface of a piece of brittle metal like antimony in streaks like the brush marks of paint. The next topic dealt with was the application of the Microscope to the healing art—and here the lecturer selected for special notice the * Lectures at the Royal Institution, Feb. 1906. 228 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO work recently accomplished by Professor A. E. Wright. This relates to the employment of the Microscope as a part of the physician’s equip- ment in the ordinary work of treating such diseases as arise from microbic invasion. It is well known that nature’s remedy for such diseases is found in the activity of a certain type of white blood cor- puscle, itself a microbe of a very militant order, which voraciously devours the smaller microbes of the morbid kinds. It is found, however, that this phagocyte is not always on the alert, and Professor Wright’s investigations have led him to the conclusion that the secret of the phagocyte’s activity is to be sought in the composition of the blood serum. He has, accordingly, devised a system of measurement for the stimulating property of the blood fluids. A minute sample of the patient’s blood furnishes the required specimen of serum, and to this serum is added a pure culture of the noxious bacterium. This mixture being placed in an incubator, a certain number of phagocytes are let loose, and allowed to play in it for a regulated period of time. A sample of the mixture is then withdrawn and examined under a Microscope, and some 50 or 60 specimen phagocytes are taken, from which an average is deduced of the amount of execution which the phagocyte can do in that medium. If the result of that examination is satisfactory, then the patient’s blood is in such a condition that inoculation treatment can be successfully applied. If, however, the phagocytes prove not to be very keen in seizing and appropriating their destined prey, then the system of treatment has to be directed to improving the condition of the patient’s blood before commencing the inoculation treatment. A photo- graph of a phagocyte with ingested tubercle bacilli, enabled the audience to appreciate the precision of this method. The Microscope adapted to Special Duty.*—In his second lecture Mr. Gordon referred first to a topic which, under pressure of time, was omitted from the previous lecture, that is to say, the limit of visibility. This subject has been much under discussion in recent times, and Lord Rayleigh has of late investigated it with very remarkable results. It now appears that objects such as a bacterium or that minute appendage called a flagellum, which many bacteria carry, may be seen although attenuated much beyond the point hitherto commonly supposed to be the inferior limit of microscopic vision. The importance of this fact lies in the circumstance that many bacteria are so minute that it is difficult to make out their distinctive features, and the study of these delicate but vitally important forms of life, taxes our present Microscopes to the limit of their capacity. The lecturer next demonstrated by means of a Microscope, lent for the purpose by Mr. ©. Baker, the appliances which are employed in the metallographer’s Microscope to illuminate the surface of an opaque object such as a polished slab of metal, describing particularly the construction of the vertical illuminator and the method of focusing adopted under these conditions. He then passed to consider modifications directed to improving the resolving power of the instrument, and showed by a very striking experiment how a thin film of some transparent body, such as * Lectures at the Royal Institution, Feb. 1906. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 229 a drop of water hanging upon the surface of a glass plate, can be ren- dered conspicuously visible by cutting down the image-forming beam in a particular position. The experimental result goes somewhat beyond the theoretical explanation at present available. The experiment itself had been designed with the idea of introducing a diffraction fringe into the field of the instrument and utilising the high resolving power which such a fringe is, on grounds of theory, supposed to possess. But the increased visibility of the image shown up in this way is so very pro- nounced that there is reason for thinking that the diffraction fringe does not completely explain it. The result is to exhibit a transparent object under the aspect known to microscopists as dark field illumina- tion, but without any of the appliances commonly employed for bringing about that result.* Another appliance directed to the same general object of improving the resolving power of the Microscope is the apparatus devised by Dr. A. Kohler for utilising ultra-violet light having a wave-length of about sooo in. A description of this apparatus has already appeared in this Journal, 1905, pp. 103 and 513. The exclusion of glass from the optical system makes it impossible to obtain the ordinary corrections for chro- matic aberration, and the objectives prepared for use with this instrument are accordingly designed as monochromatic, that is to say, they are correct for one particular wave-length only. This elaborate instrument is at present in the probationary stage, and it does not seem possible to speak as yet with confidence of its capacity for high-power work. But its use at moderate magnifying powers has shown that light of the particular wave-length mentioned is arrested by certain tissues which are quite transparent to ordinary visible light, and in that way structure can be demonstrated in unstained specimens by the aid of colour reactions by latent stains, as we may say, to reveal which ordinary light would be wholly inoperative. Special attention was drawn by the lecturer to this very notable property of monochromatic light and to the simplification of the correction problem accomplished by the production of mono- chromatic objectives. In both these particulars he thought that the principles exemplified by Dr. K6hler’s design might usefully be extended to instruments designed for working with monochromatic light within the range of the visible spectrum. The last subject dealt with was a photomicrographic apparatus recently introduced by Messrs. Beck. This is designed to meet the requirements of practising engineers and doctors, and reduces the appa- ratus and procedure employed in the production of a photograph of a microscopic object to extreme simplicity. A full description was given at a recent meeting of the Society, and may be found in the Journal, 1905, p. 651. Quekett Microscopical Club.—At the Meeting held on Jan. 19, the President, Dr. E. J. Spitta, F.R.A.S., F.R.M.S., in the chair, the Hon. Sec. announced that two papers had been communicated by Mr. T. B. Rosseter, F.R.M.S., on “ Drepanidotenia undulata,’ and on “ Drepanidotema sagitta.” * This experiment forms the subject of a Note on p. 157 of this Journal. 230 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Mr. R. T. Lewis, F.R.M.S., delivered a lecture on ‘“ The Senses of Insects,” dealing more especially with sight and hearing. The 40th Annual General Meeting was held on Feb. 16. The President delivered the Annual Address, taking as his subject ‘‘ The Rela- tive Merits of the Short and Long Tube for Microscopes.” The short tube was probably introduced by Oberhauser, certainly before 1857. The advantages claimed for each form were dealt with, and the Presi- dent, in conclusion, said he considered the short tube to be the ideal stand, as it could quickly be converted to the long form, and objectives corrected for either tube-length alternately employed if desired. The 429th Ordinary Meeting was held on March 16. Mr. C. D. Soar, F.R.M.S., delivered a lecture on “The Life-History of Fresh- water Mites (Hydrachnide).” The various stages—ovum, larva, nymph, and adult, were described and illustrated with the aid of the lantern. Of the sixty genera known, we have information regarding the life- history of only five. B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects,' including Culture Processes. Differentiation of the Bacillus putrificus.t—A. Rodella discusses the results obtained by Achalme and others in the differentiation of B. putrificus and allied anaerobic organisms by their ferment action on certain hydrocarbons. He finds that the fermentation of hydrocarbons does not alone serve to differentiate either the nine bacilli studied by Achalme, nor the other anaerobic micro-organisms that have the property of fermenting albuminoid substances ; that in the classification of these anaerobes the fermentation of hydrocarbons is to be considered, but especially the fermentation of proteid substances. ‘The author found that in nearly all milk cultures lactose remained unaltered even after four weeks, and he considered that the fatty acids that were formed were derived from the fermentation of the casein. Some bacilli form with casein only butyric acid, others valerianic acid, and others caprionic acid. Culture of Bacillus lepre.t—P. Emile Weil finds that for the cultivation of the Bacillus lepre, it is necessary to select exclusively cases of tuberculous leprosy, and especially those that show recent tuber- cles. The surface of a tubercle being first washed with ether, is abraded with a sterile scarifier, and into the leprous mass is introduced a fine sterile pipette, which removes a short cylinder of yellow matter con- taining the bacilli. From this the culture tubes are inoculated ; the media employed being glycerin glucose agar in various proportions, but always rendered neutral or alkaline, to which was added human pleuritic serum. Egg agar was also found especially useful. The tubes were incubated at 39°C. Growth appeared in about 15-20 days. * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes ; (4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &e. ; (6) Miscellaneous. + Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) p. 804. $ Tom. cit., p. 793. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 251 Magnesium Phosphate in the Preparation of Media.*—-A. Cache recommends the following method for the preparation of bouillon. Take 250 grm. of meat, 500 grm. of water, and 1 grm. of MgNH,PO,, and allow the mixture to stand in a flask for 24 hours in thecold. On filtering, 500 grm. of meat extract are obtained, the alkaline reaction of which is then estimated. Add 1 p.c. of pepton and 0°5 p.c. of NaCl, thoroughly shake the mixture, and place in autoclave for 2 minutes at 120°C. After filtering, when cool, there is obtained a clear fluid slightly alkaline to litmus. In this medium the author finds that micro-organisms develop better and retain their virulence longer than in media prepared after the usual method. Early Diagnosis of Typhoid Fever.t—H. Conradi has devised a method by which a diagnosis of the presence of Bacillus typhosus in the blood can be demonstrated in not more than 32 hours. It is based on the observation that the blood im vivo is less bactericidal than 7 vitro, under which latter condition substances are developed which exert a disinfectant action as a result of coagulation. Coagulation is prevented by the use of bile, the important components of which in respect of this action are due to glycocholate and taurocholate of sodium. The medium consists of bile, 10 p.c. pepton, and 10 p.c. glycerin. The blood is obtained by pricking the ear, and allowing it to pass into a capillary pipette containing a small quantity of bile fluid. From the capillary pipette the mixture is transferred to a small glass tube containing 2-3 c.cm. of the pepton-glycerin-bile medium. The process of transfer- ence is continued until the ear ceases to bleed. The proportion of blood used must be as 1 to 3 of the medium. The tube is incubated at 37°C. for 10-16 hours, and cultures are then made on the Drigalski- Conradi agar plates.{ New Method of Differentiating Bacillus typhosus and Bacillus coli.—L. 8. Dudgeon read a preliminary communication before the Pathological Society on the use of urotropin medium as a means of diagnosis between B. typhosus and B.coli. Froma series of experiments he found that the most suitable strengths of urotropin were 0°1 p.c., 0°5 p.c., and 1°0 p.c., more especially in a broth medium. He had also employed the same strengths of urotropin in agar, both for slants and for plating. He had experimented with cultures of B. typhosus obtained from two cases of bone abscesses, and stock cultures isolated from the spleen in cases of typhoid fever. The results were constant. B. typhosus grew well in 0°1 p.c. urotropin broth, fairly well in 0°5 p.c., but the growth was delayed ; 1 p.c. urotropin broth was always sterile, whereas B. coli obtained from cases of peritonitis and cystitis gave an abundant growth in 0°1 p.c. and 0°5 p.c., and a fair growth in 1 p.c. If a tube of 1 p.c. urotropin broth were inoculated with the typhoid bacillus and meubated at 37°C. for 24 hours, and then considerably diluted (twice and three times), and then reincubated, no growth resulted in any case. A paratyphoid bacillus (Kral) was found to grow well on * Centralbl. Bakt., Orig., 1te Abt., xl. (1905) p. 255. + Deutsche. Med. Wochenschr., Jan. 1906. See also Brit. Med. Journ., 1906, i. pp. 339-40. t See this Journal, 1902, p. 371; 1904, p. 369; 1905, p. 259. § Brit. Med, Journ., 1906, i. pp. 143-4. 232 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 0-1 p.c. urotropin agar, a very slight and delayed growth occurred in 0°5 p.c., while only one colony was obtained on 1 p.c. at the end of 11 days’ incubation at 37°C. A paratyphoid bacillus (L.) gave a good growth in 0-1 p.c. urotropin broth, a fair growth in 0°5 p.c., and a faint growth in 1 p.c., which was considerably delayed. A paratyphoid bacillus (8.) gave a similar result in 0°1 p.c. and 0°5 p.c., but failed to grow in 1 p.c. urotropin broth. B. pyocyaneus gave an: abundant growth in all three strengths of the urotropin medium. The author stated that these experiments were being continued and various modifications were being tried. New Method of Isolating Bacillus typhosus from Infected Water.*—H. 8S. Willson’s method is as follows. A stock solution of alum in distilled water, 10 grm. to 100 c.cm., is used; 0°5 grm. alum is added to each litre of infected water. The whole is well stirred, and a known quantity with- drawn and centrifuged for 15 minutes at 2000 re- volutions, the supernatant fluid save 1 c.cm. poured off, the residue stirred and plated on the Drigalski- Conradi medium and incubated at 42° C. for 24 hours, the resulting colonies being tested by the agglutination method and subcultures. Numerous experiments were performed with water infected to a known amount, and some on a large scale in gal- vanized iron tanks. In these tanks the bacilli died out in 6 days, owing to the action of the zinc-iron coating. In conclusion, the author advocates the con- version of the suspected water into a nutrient medium (water +1 p.c. nutrose + 05 p.c. caffeine +0°001 p.c. crystal violet) by the caffeine method, which enriches the 4. typhosus at the expense of the other organisms; but on account of the vari- ability in action it should be supplemented by.the precipitation process. Fia.{33. Method for keeping Cultures Alive indefi- nitely.t—P. Murillo records the following method for keeping cultivations of bacteria alive for protracted periods. A collodion sac made in the usual way is fitted over the lower end of a piece of glass tubing. The tube is adjusted in the neck of an Erlen- meyer’s flask by means of a perforated rubber stopper. The tube and the flask are then filled with a suitable quantity of broth, and after the tube has been plugged with cotton wool the whole apparatus (fig. 33) is sterilised. Inoculations are then made in the usual way. The appa- * Journ. Hygiene, v. (1905) No. 4. + Bol. Inst. Alfonso XTIL., i. (1905) pp. 180-91 (5 figs.). 3 ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 233 ratus was originally devised for keeping diphtheria bacilli alive, but it was found that the broth in the flask soon became highly virulent owing to diffusion from the sac, and that bacteria remain alive much longer in this apparatus than had been anticipated. Gaa@n, SrrepHEN Dr M.—The Bacteriolysis of Peptones and Nitrates. [Deals with the biochemistry of sewage purification.] Technology Quarterly, xviii. (1905) pp. 5-39, (2) Preparing Objects. Demonstrating the Structure of Corals.*—F. Menneking, in his research on certain Corals, used material which had been preserved in spirit and decalcified with sulphuric acid. The material was then hardened in graded alcohols and imbedded in paraffin. The sections were stained with hemalum. Besides the ordinary paraffin imbedding, the author also adopted Schcenemann’s method f for bone, with good results. Trichloracetic Acid as a Fixative.t—M. Heidenhain recommends the use of trichloracetic acid for fixing tissue. From an experience of ten years he has found its action very satisfactory in from 5-10 p.c. solution. Its one defect is that it makes connective tissue swell up, but this inconvenience is obviated by after-treatment with absolute alcohol, which should be frequently changed and allowed to act for a considerable period. Presence of Negri’s Bodies in Rabies.§S—A. Bongiovanni obtained negative results when experimenting on rabbits with fixed virus; in the controls with street virus Negri’s bodies were always present. The parts examined were cornu ammonis, cerebellum, Gasserian and spinal ganglia. The pieces were fixed in Zenker’s fluid, and the sections stained by the methods of Fasoli,|| of Mann, with Ehrlich’s acid-hematoxylin, and with Heidenhain’s iron-hematoxylin. . Part of the research was to ascertain the effect of radium. The results show that the action of the rays delayed the activity of the virus and postponed the inevitable termination. Demonstrating the Phenomena of Maturation in Oogenesis and Spermatogenesis.f—P. Lerat used Cyclops strenuus only in his re- searches, obtaining the specimens chiefly from pools and puddles. The water was filtered, and after the removal of such animals and plants as could be descried, the Cyclops were found in the stem of the funnel. These were killed by immersion in Gilson’s fluid for about 10 minutes and afterwards washed in water for about half-an-hour. Cyclops strenuus was then picked out under a Microscope. Fixation and imbedding were performed in test tubes, a procedure which lent itself to an easy change * Archiv Natur., xxi. (1905) p. 246. + See this Journal, 1903, pp, 107 and 371. ¢ Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 321-4, § Atti R. Accad. Lincei., xiy. (1905) pp. 454-62. || See this Journal, 1905, p. 386. q La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 163-98 (4 pls.). 234 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of fluids and also prevented loss of the animals. When this manipula- tion was finished the test tube was broken and the paraffin block extracted. It was found to be important to keep the animals in one-third alcohol for 10 minutes, and for 6 hours in 50 p.c. alcohol, and to carry the imbedding through slowly. Some difficulty was experienced in making sections, as the carapace was easily fractured though the internal parts were easily manipulated. The best stain was Heidenhain’s iron- hzematoxylin. Demonstrating the Presence of Indigo.*—-H. M. Leake, for his investigation on indigo-yielding plants, placed pieces of the material in the following mixture : acetic acid 2 c.cm., sulphuric acid 1 c.cm., ammo- nium persulphate 0°5 grm., water 100 c.cm. According to size the pieces remained in the fixative for from 4-12 hours. They were next placed for 3-4 days in 50 p.c. alcohol, changed daily. The sections varied from 4-12 » inthickness. They were stained in Delafield’s hematoxylin and decolorised with hydrochloric acid alcohol. They were next placed for an hour or so in 1 p.c. Griibler’s water-soluble eosin ; then absolute alcohol, xylol, and balsam. The indigo contents of the cells were clearly shown. Demonstrating the Structure of Nucleoli and Chromosomes.t— T. Martins Mano used Phaseolus vulgaris and Solanum tuberosum, the grains and tubercles of which were germinated at different temperatures. The material was fixed in Hermann’s, Bouin’s, or Perenyi’s fluid, the first mentioned giving the best results. Sections from 5-74 p thick were stained with Heidenhain’s hematoxylin, either alone or with Congo or Bordeaux red, with light green and safranin, with Delafield’s heemato- xylin and picric acid, and other dyes. Heidenhain’s hematoxylin gave the details of nuclear structure more clearly than other solutions. Studying the Nervous System of Asterias rubens.{—R. Meyer obtained the best staining results from the use of molybdic acid heema- toxylin and Malory’s hematoxylin after fixation in sublimate acetic acid (saturated solution of sublimate in hot sea-water, 100 parts, and 2 parts of acetic acid). An excellent fixation and staining reagent was found in a mixture of 1 part of 1 p.c. osmic acid and 3 parts of the above- mentioned sublimate acetic acid. After 12-15 hours the objects were washed in sea-water for 6 hours and then for a similar period in pyro- ligneous acid, followed by another course of sea-water. The sublimate was removed in iodine alcohol, and after dehydration in alcohol the material was passed through chloroform to paraffin. Observations on the Structure of Pleistophora periplanete.§— W.S. Perrin examined the living plasmodia inhabiting the malpighian tubules in normal salt solution. Films were prepared by cutting the tubules into small pieces and spreading them on a coverslip. After * Ann. Bot, xix. (1905) p. 297. + La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 57-76 (3 pls.). } Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool., lxxxi. (1906) pp. 96-144 (2 pls.). § Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xlix. (1906) pp. 615-33 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 235 drying and fixation in alcohol they were stained with Giemsa’s modifica- tion of the Romanowsky-Nocht stain. The best results were obtained by leaving the films overnight in a mixture of an aqueous solution of eosin and azur ii. (10 parts of a solution of 1 grm. eosin B.A. in 1000 c.cm. water and 1 part of a solution of 0°8 grm. azur ii. (Griibler) in 1000 c.cm. water.) After staining, the coverslips were washed in tap water, then dipped in alcohol, washed again in water, dried, and mounted in cedar-wood oil. A second method was to cut up the tubules in a very small drop of filtered egg-white and fix with osmic acid vapour, or with a mixture of boiling sublimate and alcohol in the proportion of 2 to 1. After osmic the film was washed in water, after sublimate in the water plus iodine, the film being in each case previously passed through graded alcohols, or stained straightaway in Delafield’s hematoxylin. The excess of stain was then washed out in acid alcchol and the film mounted in balsam. Preparing Unfertilised Eggs of Tenthredinide.*—L. Doncaster obtained eggs of different ages, noting the time when any row of eggs was laid. In this way series of eggs of all ages up to about 4 hours were preserved. In most cases a row of eggs was imbedded entire, and the eggs cut one after another still attached to the leaf. The best fixa- tive was found to be Petrunkewitsch’s modification of Gilson’s solution (water 300 c.cm., absolute alcohol 200 c.cm., glacial acetic acid 90 ¢.cm., nitric acid 10 ¢.cm., sublimate to saturation). The difficulty of saturat- ing the eggs with paraffin was obviated by transferring the eggs from absolute alcohol to cedar oil, where they were allowed to remain for a considerable time, and then passing through xylol, xylol-paraffin, to paraffin. The only stain that gave satisfactory results was Heidenhain’s iron- hematoxylin. Studying Bucephalus Haimeanus.t—D. H. Tennant found that the best fixative for Bucephalus was Flemming’s chrom-osmic-acetic mixture (weaker formula). Tissues were allowed to remain in this reagent for 24 hours, and were then washed in running water for a similar period. For Gasterostomum a cold saturated aqueous solution of sublimate, warmed to 35°, was the most satisfactory. The most successful stains were Flemming’s triple stain (safranin, gentian-violet, and orange G), and Heidenhain’s iron-hzematoxylin and eosin. Demonstrating the Development of the Oculomotor Nerve of the Chick. {—F. W. Carpenter first opened the orbital cavities and placed the whole head in vom Rath’s mixture. After 3-5 days the material was carried through several changes of 70 p.c. alcohol, and then the head preserved in a mixture of alcohol and glycerin. Certain portions of the orbit were also fixed in Zenker’s fluid or in osmic acid. These were dehydrated in alcohol and paraftin-sections made, and when Zenker’s fluid had been used, were stained in acid fuchsin. The ciliary gasserian, and sympathetic ganglia were treated with 0°05 p.c. chromic * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xlix. (1906) pp. 561-90 (2 pls.). -+ Tom. cit., pp. 635-90 (4 pls.). ~} Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xlviii. (1906) pp. 141-230 (7 pls.). 236 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO acid for 2 or 3 days. They were then dissociated with needles, and stained with acid fuchsin. The most satisfactory results were obtained from vom Rath’s fixa- tive, and the Heidenhain iron-hematoxylin stain. The formula for vom Rath’s fluid is 200 c.cm. saturated solution of picric acid, 1 grm. platinum chloride dissolved in 10 c.cm. of water, 2 c.cm. glacial acetic acid, 25 c.cm. of 2 p.c. osmic acid. In this mixture embryo chicks were kept for 3 days or more, the fluid being once changed. They were then washed for a minute in two changes of methyl-alcohol, and placed for from 24-48 hours in a 0°5 p.c. solution of pyrogallic acid. They were then passed through graded alcohols up to absolute, cleared in xylol, and imbedded in paraffin. No further treatment was required for the sections, though it was found advisable to leave the balsam uncovered. The iron-hematoxylin was used after fixation in Zenker’s fluid, or in saturated corrosive sublimate to which 1 p.c. glacial acetic acid had been added. Other stains used were brazilin and Delafield’s hematoxylin. Golgi’s impregnation method and intra vitam staining with methylen- blue were not successful. Van Gieson’s was used for studying the formation of the sheath of Schwann. A combination of iron-hematoxylin and van Gieson brought out the cytoplasmic processes of the cells accompanying the nerve-fibres, as well as those of the mesodermal cells. Demonstrating the Connection between Epidermis and Cutis in Saurians and Crocodiles.*—F. Krauss fixed pieces of skin in Carnoy’s fluid, saturated solution of sublimate, picro-sublimate-acetic acid, Flem- ming’s fluid, and Zenker’s fluid. Decalcification was effected with 5 p.c. trichlor-acetic acid, or with nitric acid alcohol (1-4). The fixed material was imbedded in celloidin or in celloidin-paraffin. To obtain thin sections (3-4 ) it was necessary to brush the section-surface over with mastic. This procedure could be used only with the paraffin sections ; for the celloidin-paraffin, thick gum arabic solution was used. When gum was used, the sections stuck on the slide had to remain in water a long time to remove the gum completely. The sections were stained with alum-carmin-hematoxylin, by van Gieson’s, Unna’s, and Weigert’s methods. The following modifica- tion of Weigert’s method gave good results: alcohol-methyl-violet solution and anilin-water, 15-30 minutes; wash in salt solution, then iodo-potassic iodide solution for 30 seconds or 15 minutes, according to the effect desired (epithelial staining or collagen), 10 p.c. aqueous solu- tion of tannin for 3-5 minutes; dry on blotting-paper, and decolorise in a mixture of xylol, 4 or 5 parts, and anilin oil, 1 part. The foregoing procedure may be preceded by alum-carmin. The elastic fibres were stained by Weigert’s, or by the Unna-Tanzer method. Studying Sperm-Cells of Decapods.t—N. K. Koltzoff found that the best preservative fluids were sublimate-acetic acid (5 p.c.), or subli- mate alone. Fresh and salt water were used as solvents. Satisfactory * Arch. Mikrosk. Anat., lxvii. pp. 319-63 (2 pls. and 14 figs. in text). t+ Tom. cit., pp. 364-572 (5 pls. and 37 figs. in text). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 237 results were also obtained with Zenker’s and Bouin’s fluids. Solutions containing osmic acid were found to be unsuitable. For staining the sections, Heidenhain’s iron-hematoxylin or Benda’s modification thereof, were mostly employed ; previous treatment with Bordeaux red was sometimes satisfactory. The Biondi-Heidenhain triple stain gave beautiful results, but the colours faded in about a year. Cover-glass preparations were made by mixing a small quantity of sperm taken from the testis, or from the receptaculum seminis, with a little sea-water, and fixing for several minutes in osmic acid vapour. These were stained by the Biondi-Heidenhain triple stain, or by Ranvier’s gold and formic acid method. The author strongly recommends that the living cells should be examined in serum, sea-water, or other isotonic fluid, as thereby impor- tant details are easily seen, the which are lost by fixation. The figures given on the plates were drawn with the Zeiss apparatus under magnifica- tions of 1400 and 3500. Fixing Pyrosoma.*—A. Korotneff treats the eggs and embryos of Pyrosoma for a good half-hour with half saturated solution of sublimate in sea-water. After careful washing, the material is immersed in Perenyi’s fluid for an hour, and is then transferred to alcohol. Staining with alum-carmin was found to be useful, and immersion of the material in 5 p.c. formalin occasionally had the effect of completely dissolving the yolk and setting free the embryo. Demonstrating Structure of Nephridia of Arenicola.+—R. S. Lillie fixed adult material for 15-80 minutes in Hermann’s fluid, and then transferred to Whitman’s modification of Merkel (equal parts of 1 p.c. chromic acid and 0°25 p.c. platinum chloride) for 1-3 hours. The material was next washed, and then transferred to alcohol as usual. The treatment with Hermann’s fluid prevents excessive blacken- ing, and the reduced osmium may be further removed by immersing the sections for some hours in a mixture of 1 part hydrogen peroxide and 3 parts alcohol. The most satisfactory stain was Heidenhain’s iron- hematoxylin countered with erythrosin. The best mounting medium for examination with oil-immersion objectives was found to be inspis- sated cedar-oil. Larve were best fixed by immersing them for 2-5 minutes in Hermann’s fluid, followed by Merkel’s fluid for 1-3 hours. Young larvee of the swarming stage were treated with Hermann’s fluid for two minutes, followed by Merkel’s for 1 hour. Such larve should be imbedded as soon as they are fixed, otherwise the yolk becomes very brittle. Demonstrating the Endings of the Auditory Nerve in Petromyzon fluviatilis.{—R. Krause fixed the material in Flemming’s, Hermann’s, Zenker’s and Carnoy’s fluids. Exposure to the vapour of a mixture of equal parts of 4 p.c. osmic and acetic acids was specially favourable, the preparation being transferred after 10 minutes to 40 p.c. alcohol. * Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, xvii. (1905) pp. 295-311 (38 pls.). + Tom. cit., pp. 341-405 (4 pls.). } SB. k. Preuss, Akad. Wiss., xlviii. (1905) pp. 1017-19. 238 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Sections were stained with the Ehrlich-Biondi triple stain, with Heidenhain’s iron-hematoxylin, and those that had been treated with osmic acid fixative were previously bleached with peroxide of hydrogen (5-10 p.c. in 70 p.c. alcohol). Staining the tissue en masse was simple and satisfactory. The pieces fixed in Zenker’s fluid were washed in running water for 24 hours and then immersed for a like time in 0°2-0°5 p.c. hematoxylin solution, which contained about 50 p.c. alcohol. After frequent washing the pieces were transferred to graded alcohols. For the finer details this procedure was especially effective. Pieces fixed in Carnoy’s fluid may be treated in a similar way. They are transferred from the alcohol- chloroform-acetic acid mixture to absolute alcohol and then through down-graded alcohols to distilled water. The pieces are then stained in the previously described iron-hematoxylin solution for 24 hours, after which they are transferred to a solution consisting of 0°25 grm. potas- sium monochromate and 0°25 grm. potassium bichromate, dissolved ‘in 100 c.cm. distilled water. (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes. Reichert’s New Microtome, with Double Bearings.*—The advan- tage claimed for this instrument is that the bearings of the knife-carrier Fig. 34, are double and are of a trapezium shape, owing to the different lengths of the four arms forming the bearings. In consequence the knife or * Reichert’s Catalogue, French edition, 1905-6, p. 15. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 239 razor has an almost straight movement, a great advantage for sectioning delicate objects. The direction of the knife movement is indicated by C.REICHERT, |W, 7_~ TE Fig. 35. the dotted lines (fig. 35). The instrument (fig. 34), like that shown in the December Journal, 1905, p. 766, has a handle and a heavy base. Preparing Liver for Demonstrating Hepatic Ferments. *—H. W. Carlier killed the animals (white rats) with coal-gas, and then washed out the blood vascular system very thoroughly with normal saline- solution. The injection vessel was then filled with picro-corrosive formalin warmed to body temperature, and about half a litre passed through the animal. When the animal was cold the liver was dissected out, cut up into small pieces, placed in graded alcohols, beginning at 50 p.c. to chloroform and paraftin. The most useful staining methods were Mann’s methyl-blue-eosin, toluidin-blue-eosin, MacAllum’s method for unmasking albuminoid iron, and Heidenhain’s iron-alum-hematoxylin. The sections were cleared in inspissated turpentine and mounted in turpentine balsam. (4) Staining and Injecting. Demonstration of the Flagella of Motile Bacteria.t—E. W. Duck- wall, after describing the necessary refinements he employs in the making of suitable cultures, according to the variety of motile organism under * La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 431- 56 (17 figs.). + Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt., Ref., xxxvii. (1905) p. 360, 240 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO examination, advises the following method. Round cover-slips thoroughly cleaned are preserved ready for use in absolute alcohol. A mordant is composed of 2 grm. of dry tannic acid, 5 grm. cold saturated solution of sulphate of iron, 15 c.cm. of distilled water, 1 c.cm. saturated alcoholic solution of fuchsin, and to these he adds }—1 c.cm. of a 1 p.c. solution of sodium hydroxyl; the mixture after filtration being of a red-brown colour, and to be used within 5 hours after its preparation. A stain of carbol-fuchsin, prepared by adding to 1 grm. of granular fuchsin in a flask 25 c.cm. of warm alcohol, shake, allow to stand for several hours, and then dilute 4 or 5 times with a 5 p-c. solution of carbolic acid. A small loopful of previously boiled distilled water made cloudy with the culture of the organism is placed on a cover-slip, which is held culture- side upwards in forceps and passed through a Bunsen flame ; sufficient mordant is then poured on it to cover the surface; after 4-1 minute the mordant is washed away with tap water; a small quantity of alcohol is dropped on to the surface and again washed away ; then pour on the stain and allow it to remain about 4 a minute, then warm until it steams ; when the slip is completely dry, treat with xylol and mount in xylol-balsam. Demonstration of the Indol and Cholera-red Reactions.*—W. B. Wherry finds that nitrites and also probably nitrates gain entrance to artificial media from various sources—certain waters, “ peptones,” and filter papers ; and that a sufficient quantity of nitrites may be absorbed from the air of the laboratory to yield a distinct indol reaction on the addition of 0°5 c.cm. of chemically pure sulphuric acid. He therefore recommends that media used in testing for indol or cholera-red_re- actions should be examined for nitrates and nitrites before use. The author finds that the cholera spirillum does not produce nitrites in nitrate- and nitrite-free “‘ peptone” solutions. The cholera-red reaction is not specific ; it must be distinguished from the purple-coloured indol reaction. Method of Producing Chromatin Staining in Sections.t — W. B. Leishmann recommends the following method for staining chromatin in sections. The sections (5) being fixed in the usual manner, are well washed, after the final alcohol bath, with distilled water to remove all traces of the alcohol, the excess of water being blotted away, and whilst the section is still moist a drop of fresh blood serum is placed on it and allowed to soak into it for 5 minutes; the excess of serum is then blotted away and the remainder is allowed to dry as a film on the section. A mixture of 2 parts of Leishmann-Romanowsky stain and 3 parts of distilled water is poured on to the section and allowed to stain for 1-1} hours, the stain being renewed from time to time, and is finally washed off with distilled water. For purposes of decolorisation and differentiation two solutions, freshly prepared with distilled water, are used : (a) acid solution, 1 : 500 acetic acid, which removes excess of blue and brightens the red tint of the chromatin; (0) alkaline solution, 1 : 7000 caustic soda, which dissolves out the excess of eosin from the * Bureau Goy. Lab. Manila, No. 31, May 1905, p, 17. t Journ. Hygiene, iv. (1904) p. 434.% + o ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 241 tissue. These two solutions are used alternately, commencing with the acid, the section being frequently observed under a low power until the desired colour contrasts are obtained ; the cell nucleus being seen of a deep Romanowsky red colour, and the rest of the tissue pale pink or a light blue; the section is washed in water and rapidly dehydrated, and then mounted in balsam. Glycogen Staining.* — L. F. Driessen stains the glycogen in animal tissues by the following method. Celloidin or paraffin sections are transferred from alcohol to an alcoholic cochineal solution or to Mayer’s carmin solution. They are next treated with 95 p.c. alcohol and absolute alcohol (3 minutes) after which they are placed in iodin- carbol-xylol solution for 83-5 minutes. If overstained, they are washed in carbol-xylol. The preparations are mounted in balsam. The iodin-carbol-xylol mixture is prepared by placing equal parts of Lugol’s solution and carbol-xylol in a test tube and shaking vigorously. Some few drops of the supernatant iodo-xylol are pipetted off and placed on the section, by which it is cleared up and the glycogen stained. The section is then mopped up with blotting paper, and mounted in balsam. Section Staining by Romanowsky’s Method.t—K. Sternberg fixes the material in alcohol and stains the paraffin sections with Giemsa’s modification of the Romanowsky method. Immediately before use, the 0:4-0°5 c.cm. of the solution is diluted with 20 c.cm. of boiled distilled water. After a lapse of 20-24 hours the sections are washed in water and differentiated with 0°5 p.c. acetic acid. They are again washed and then treated with alcohol, and finally passed through xylol and mounted in balsam. Staining and Mounting Ossifying Cartilage.t—M. Heidenhain, when demonstrating the ossification of cartilage, fixes, and at the same time decalcifies, small pieces in 5 p.c. trichlor-acetic acid, and after-hardens in absolute alcohol, which must be repeatedly changed. The pieces are imbedded in celloidin, and sections 20-25 wu thick are cut. The sections are stained with Delafield’s hematoxylin, and afterwards with borax-carmin. ‘The preparations are best mounted in glycerin jelly made as follows :—Gelatin 45, water 210, glycerin 35, absolute alcohol 70 parts. The gelatin is first dissolved in the water, the glycerin is then added, and the mixture filtered out at a temperature of 56°. To the clear filtrate the absolute alcohol is added drop by drop, the solution being vigorously stirred the while. Air-bubbles may be avoided by fishing the sections out of the warm and liquefied medium, and placing one on a cover-glass and pressing this firmly down on the slide. Staining the Chromophilous Cells of the Hypophysis cerebri.s— G. Cagnetto gives the following procedure. Fix one half of the hypo- physis in 10 p.c. formalin for 3-4 days. Transfer to chromic acid * Centralbl. allgem. Pathol. u. pathol. Anat., xvi. (1905) pp. 129-81. + Tom. cit., pp. 293-4. { Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 325-30. § Tom. cit., pp. 539-43. April 18th, 1996 R 242 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO solution 0:1 p.c. for 2 days, and then for 2 days more to 0°25 p.c. On removal wash for a long time in running water. Follow this by graded alcohols to dehydration ; xylol; paraffin. The sections, after removal of the paraffin, are to be treated hot for 5-10 minutes with an anilin- water solution saturated with acid-fuchsin. This solution is made by dissolving at a temperature of 70°-80° C. 3 c.cm. of anilin oil in 100 c.cm. of distilled water. When cold, 2 grm. of finely powdered acid-fuchsin are slowly added. After standing for 24 hours and then filtering, the mix- ture is ready for use. The stained sections are then washed in running water, after which they are differentiated for 4 or 5 minutes with a satu- rated aqueous solution of picric acid. Differentiation is followed by washing again in running water, then rapid dehydration in absolute alcohol ; xylol; and balsam. This method is very successful for thyroid and pancreas, as well as. for the pituitary body. Intra-vitam Stains for Nervous Tissue.*—A. Leontowitsch finds that Thiopyronin, a rose-coloured pigment with bluish fluorescence, stains Remak’s fibres well, and suggests that a combination with me- thylen-blue might prove useful. Gentianin and thionin blue, G;O extra, gave results comparable with those of methylen-blue. The commercial articles must be purified before use by crystallising out two or three times from hot 90 p.c. ethyl-alcohol. Stain for Photomicrography.—E. Moffat recommends the follow- ing stain for photomicrography: fuchsin 0°06 grm., methylen-blue 0:04 grm., alcohol (90 p.c.) 5 c.em. Add aqueous solution of carbolic acid 5 p.c., to make up to 25 c.cm. Make films from cultures in the usual way and flood with the filtered stain ; warm gently, wash well, dry in air, and mount in balsam. This solution is a very powerful stain, and used as above gives. excellent results with diphtheria, anthrax, cocci, and other bacteria, rendering these organisms very easy to photograph when the film is prepared from a pure culture. The solution when diluted is serviceable for section staining. New Method of Demonstrating Spirocheta Pallida in Hereditary Syphilis.t—C. Levaditi proceeds as follows. Pieces about 1 mm. thick are fixed in 10 p.c. formalin for 24 hours. They are then washed and hardened in 90 p.c. alcohol for 24 hours. The alcohol is next removed in distilled water, after which the pieces are impregnated in from 1°5— 3:0 p.c. silver nitrate. The impregnation is carried out at 38° C. for from 3-5 days. After removal the pieces are washed in distilled water and thereupon placed for 24-48 hours at room temperature in the following reducing mixture : pyrogallic acid 2—4 p.c., formalin 5 c.cm., distilled water 100 c.cm. On removal the pieces are washed, dehydrated in alcohol, and paraffin sections made. The sections are stained (1) by Giemsa’s method and differentiated * Physiologiste Russe, iv. (1905) pp. 5-8. + Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) pp. 41-68 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 243, in absolute alcohol, to which a few drops of oil of cloves are added ; they are then cleared up in oil of bergamot and xylol and mounted in balsam ; or (2) they are stained with a saturated solution of toluidin blue and differentiated in alcohol, to which a few drops of Unna’s ether- glycerin mixture are added. They are then cleared in bergamot oil and xylol, and mounted in balsam. By this method the spirochaete are stained black or almost black. The illustrations show very clearly the effect of the procedure, and also that the organisms are extremely numerous. (5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. Clockwork-driven Turntable—This ingenious instrument, which was exhibited at the November Meeting, 1905, is the invention of A. Flatters and W. Bradley (fig. 36). It is driven by a simple clockwork Fig. 36. arrangement, and one of its interesting features is that it is capable of turning rings of any proportions from 0 to 3 by 14 in. On its under surface the turntable has a pair of dovetails, which slide in a dovetail fitting attached to the top of the vertical spindle, rotating with it and causing the turntable to rotate also. Below the dovetailed fitting is a small steel disk attached to a sliding piece that can be moved to the right or left out of the centre of the vertical spindle by means of long set-screws. The distance the steel disk is moved out of the centre line of the vertical spindle determines the length of the ovai. Attached to the under-side of the table are two studs projecting downwards, each having a small roller on its lower end that is in contact with the steel disk. When the latter is moved to the right or left it presses against a roller, and shifts the table out of the R 2 244 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO centre to the same extent. The disk also acts as a guide to the rollers, and thus controls the movement of the table. Standing on the clockwork behind the turntable, and parallel to the front, is a sliding-bar carrying a pointer that can be adjusted to any required position. This pointer acts as a guide for the brush, and the distance the point is placed from the long axis of the oval determines the width of the oval. It is necessary to place the guide for the brush opposite the point at the long axis. An arm-rest is placed in position for the brush-hand. By the use of this instrument it is possible to run round a needle point or strike a straight line, besides making circles and ellipses. A diamond may be attached to the pointer for cutting cover-glasses. To set the apparatus to turn any oval :—(1) Let the end of the pointer rest over the centre of the table when it is in mid-position ; (2) turn the table half round so that a glass slip is end-on to the operator; then (3) shift the pointer to the right until it is over the end of the short axis of the oval; (4) turn the table back to its original position ; (5) decentre the disk on table, moving it to the left by means of the long set-screws until the pointer is over the end of the long axis of the oval. Mounting Diatoms.*—H. v. Schénfeldt has used syndeticon (the best Norwegian isinglass) with gratifying results. The medium is com- posed of acetic acid (64 p.c.) 25 grm., syndeticon 4 grm., absolute alcohol 5 grm., isobutyl-alcohol 3 grm. The isinglass is first mixed with the acetic acid and the other ingredients added afterwards gradually. The mixture is then filtered. With a glass rod drawn to a fine point a minute drop of the fluid is deposited on a perfectly clean cover-glass, on which it at once forms a perfectly transparent layer. After the diatoms are oriented it is merely necessary to breathe on the surface of the film. This firmly fixes the Diatoms, and the rest of the procedure is well known. (6) Miscellaneous. ' Measurement of Trypanosomes.t—A. Lingard has adopted the following system for measuring Trypanosomes for a number of years. The fixed points selected between which measurements have been carried out are the following (fig. 37) :— 1. Between the posterior extremity of the parasite and the centre of the blepharoplast. 2. The centre of the blepharoplast to a point corresponding with the posterior edge of the nutritive nucleus. 3. From the posterior to the anterior edge of the nutritive nucleus. 4. From the anterior edge of nucleus to the anterior end of the body. 5. The length of the free flagellum. 6. The maximum width of the body. * Zeitschr. angw. Mikrosk., xii. (1906) pp. 247-50. ¢ Journ. Tropical Vet. Sci., i. (1906) pp. 5-14 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 245 The result of the first five measurements added together give the length of the parasite. For the sake of comparison the mean of each of the above five measurements of Z’rypanosomata of any one species Fic, 37. are first taken, and then the percentage value of each measurement is calculated, taking the mean total length as 100. This method affords a basis for the comparison of the various species. Metallography, etc. Pressure and Percussion Figures on Plastic Crystalline Metals.* It is known that figures of definite form, related to the orientation of the crystal, are developed by forcing a sharp point into brittle crystalline substances. I. Osmond and G. Cartaud have employed the same method on metallic crystals. The point of a sewing-needle was pressed by means of a lever into the faces obtained by cutting a crystal of iron in different planes. The pressure employed was 1600 grm. The figures were examined microscopically, and are described by the authors, with diagrams and photomicrographs. The method may be put to practical use in determining the orientation of crystals, sections of which are exposed in a polished imetallic surface. Nickel-Vanadium Steels.t—L. Guillet has examined 32 steels con- taining 2—30 p.c. nickel, 0°2—7°5 p.c. vanadium, 0°14—1°2 p.c. carbon. He classifies them in six groups: (1) pearlitic ; (2) containing carbide and ferrite ; (3) martensitic; (4) containing martensite and carbide ; (5) containing y-iron ; (6) containing y-iron and carbide. Vanadium ex- hibits the tendency, previously observed in vanadium steel, to combine with the carbon, forming a carbide. The effect of vanadium upon mechanical properties is beneficial only in the case of pearlitic steels, in which the maximum tensile stress and elastic limit are raised. The favourable effect is intensified by suitable heat treatment. Addition of vanadium to y-iron steels diminishes their capacity of resisting shock. Nitrogen in Steel.{—In view of the interest aroused by H. Braune’s recent researches, translations or reprints of three papers are here given. In the first, by H. Tholander, originally published in 1888, differences * Rey. Metallurgie, ii. (1905) pp. 811-15 (9 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 870-81 (16 photomicrographs). ~ Tom. cit., pp. 882-99. 246 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO between Bessemer and open-hearth steel are ascribed to the higher per- centage of nitrogen in the former. In the second (Boussingault, 1861) methods of estimating nitrogen in iron are given. The third (Allen, 1880) gives some results of analyses. H. Le Chatelier (editorial note) states that the variations in percentage of nitrogen in steel are now proved to be due to the processes of manufacture. Overheated Steel.*—J. E. Stead and A. W. Richards distinguish between overheating and burning, the former merely resulting in the formation of large crystals, the latter producing incipient disintegration. Three steels, containing 0°06 p.c., 0°48 p.c., and 0°44 p.c. carbon, were selected for the author’s researches. One-inch square bars of each were subjected to (1) overheating at 1300° C., (2) reheating after (1) to 880°-950° C.; (3) annealing at 850°-950° C.; (4) sorbitic treatment (0°44 p.c. steel only), which consisted of heating to 900° C., quench- ing in water, and reheating to 330°C. Mechanical tests (tensile, bending in various ways, and Wohler reversal of stress tests) carried out on the normal steels and on each steel treated as described, indicated that “ overheating reduces the power of the steel to resist fatigue, that reheating such steel more than restores the original good qualities of the rolled bars, and that when the steel has the carbon in the sorbitic con- dition its power of endurance is more than doubled.” Portions of a wagon axle were also heat treated in different ways, the results of mechanical tests indicating that the fatigue-resisting properties of the steel could be greatly increased by suitable treatment. The authors advance the hypothesis that the weakness of overheated steel is due to the presence of large masses of ferrite, a constituent which has a low elastic limit. The good qualities of sorbitic steel appear to be due to the absence of ferrite. Metallography applied to Foundry Work.j—A. Sauveur recom- mends a vertical photomicrographic camera. Details of manipulation are given. The author also describes t the microstructure of cast iron. Rate of cooling probably influences the size of the graphite particles in grey iron. Corrosion of Condenser Tubes.§—Brass condenser tubes (70 p.c. copper, 30 p.c. zinc) frequently cause trouble through rapid corrosion. A. H. Sexton points out that in tubes which have a short life owing to this cause, the zinc has usually dissolved out much more quickly than the copper. Coarse crystallisation of the brass appears to have no effect on the rate of corrosion. The great variations in the rapidity of corro- sion of tubes are not due to any differences in the tubes themselves, but to the conditions to which the tubes are subjected in use. The deposi- tion of carbon or other electro-negative bodies on the surface of the tube sets up electrolytic action and leads to rapid corrosion by the sea water. The Thermal Transformations of Carbon Steels.||—The experi- mental work described in this paper, largely a repetition of that carried * Tron and Steel Mag., x. (1905) pp. 385-404 (9 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 413-19 (2 figs.). $ Op. cit., xi. (1906) pp. 119-24 (4 figs.). § Eng. Mag., xxx. (1905) pp. 211-25. | Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., Ixviii. (1905, 2) pp. 27-83 (17 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. , 247 out some years ago by Osmond and others, was apparently undertaken by the authors, J. O. Arnold and A. McWilliam, with the object of verifying or disproving the conclusions then reached. The three steels employed contained respectively 0°21, 0°89, and 1°78 p.c. carbon, the total percentage of elements present, other than iron and carbon, being very small. The critical ranges of these steels, on heating and cooling, were determined. Samples were heated to different temperatures, quenched, and microscopically examined. By quenching a piece of the 0°89 p.c. C steel when it was passing through the Ac. 1-2-3 change, a section showing both pearlite and hardenite was obtained. Dark etching boundary lines between these two constituents are identified by the authors with Osmond’s troostite. The authors give their reasons for declining to accept martensite, troostite, sorbite, and austenite as con- stituents ; they do not object, however, to the terms “ troostitic struc- ture,” “martensitic structure,” etc. In an appendix, definitions of the constituents of steel are given. Fe,C of cementite and Fe,C of pearlite are stated to be physically different substances. Excellent micrographs, which have apparently been drawn and not photographed, illustrate the paper. Important contributions to the discussion were made by J. E. Stead and H. le Chatelier. J. E. Stead expressed the opinion that the evidence in favour of the allotropic states of iron was now overwhelming. The term “ eutectoid,” as applied to steel of pearlite composition, was to be preferred to “saturated.” Martensite, as a homogeneous solid solution of carbon or carbide of iron in iron, should be recognised as a constituent. H. le Chatelier accepted the authors’ experimental results as being in harmony with previous observations, but disagreed with some of the theoretical explanations put forward. The alleged insolubility of cementite in hardenite up to 900° C. was improbable. The claim of troostite and austenite to be recognised as constituents is defended. The authors’ assumptions as to the constitution of these bodies were purely gratuitous, and not supported by any evidence. The explanation of the separation of graphite in high carbon steel was contrary to well known facts of chemistry. An alternative explanation is advanced. The authors of the paper replied to these criticisms at some length. The Presence of Greenish-coloured Markings in the Fractured Surfaces of Test-Pieces.*—H. G. Howorth has examined, microscopi- cally and otherwise, a large number of defective test-pieces from gun forgings. The defects were due to the presence of foreign matter, resembling Siemens-Martin slag, usually yellow or green in colour. Two substances, which appear to be sulphide and silicate of manganese, were distinguished in the coloured matter. The Nature of Troostite.t—C. Benedicks, regarding this constituent as a product of transformation of martensite, dismisses Boynton’s hypothesis that troostite is B-iron, as untenable. Troostite appears to be a pearlite with ultra-microscopically small particles of cementite, con- taining also more or less hardening carbon, and offers an interesting analogy to the colloid solutions. * Journ. Iron and Steel. Inst., lxvili. (1905, 2) pp. 301-19 (18 figs.). + Tom. cit., pp. 352-70 (2 figs.). 248 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. The Influence of Nickel and Carbon on Iron.*—G. B. Waterhouse has investigated the properties of a series of ten steels, containing about 3°8 p.c. nickel, the carbon varying from 0°4-1°83 p.c. Cooling and heating curves were taken, and mechanical tests and microscopic exami- nation were made on the steels heat-treated in various ways. The chief conclusions arrived at are—(1) nickel raises the tenacity of steel without materially lowering the ductility: the elastic ratio is only slightly greater than in carbon steels ; (2) cementite of the formula FeNi;C occurs in these steels; (3) the eutectoid ratio appears to lie at about 0°7 p.c. C. ANDREWS, T.—Wear of Steel Rails on Bridges. Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., Ixviii. (1905, 2) pp. 320-51 (23 figs.). ARNOLD, J. O.—The Department of Iron and Steel Metallurgy at the University of Sheffield. Tom. cit., pp. 13-26 (14 figs.). Bumst4ap, H. A.—The Heating Effects produced by Rontgen Rays in different Metals, and their Relation to the question of Changes in the Atom. Am. Journ. of Sci., xxi. (1906) pp. 1-24 (5 figs.). CARLISLE, S. F.—Micrographic Examination of Steel, and Construction of Apparatus used. [A somewhat elementary account of the apparatus designed and fitted up by the author, and of the micro-examination of various kinds of iron and steel. | Clarkson Bulletin, ii. (1905) pp. 14-17 (6 figs.). DerscrRo1x, L.—Abstracts of Papers read at the Metallurgical Congress, Liege. Rev. Metallurgie, iii. (1906) pp. 24-47. DILuNER, G., & A. F. ENSstTROmM—Researches on the Magnetic and Electric Properties of various kinds of Sheet Steel and Steel Castings. [Some interesting photomicrographs of high silicon and aluminium steels are given. | Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxviii. (1905, 2) pp. 408-46 (13 figs.). Dumas, L.—Reversible and Irreversible Transformations of Nickel Steel. Tom. cit., pp. 255-300 (10 figs.). GuiuueEt, L.—The use of Vanadium in Metallurgy. [A summary of the available information on this subject, in- cluding a brief account of the author’s previously published work on vanadium steel, nickel-vanadium steel, etc.] Tom. cit., pp. 118-65 (23 figs.). Steel used for Motor Car Construction in France. [The properties of numerous alloy steels are reviewed. HEx- cellent photomicrographs illustrate the paper.] Tom. cit., pp. 166-203 (10 figs.). The Industrial Future of Special Steels. Iron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906) pp. 89-95. LOUGUININE & SCHUKAREF r—Etude thermique des alliages de l’'aluminium et du magnésium. Rev. Metallurgie, iii. (1906) pp. 48-60 (1 fig.). Osmonp, F.—Nomenclature of the Constituents of Steel. ” ” ” ” Tom. cit., pp. 101-3. READ, T. T.—Cooling Curves of Metallic Solutions. Tron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906} pp. 96-9 (3 figs.) STANSBIE, J. H.—Solutions of Solids and Solid Solutions. Tron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906) pp. 112-19. TaLsBotT, B.—Segregation in Steel Ingots. Journ. Iron and Steel. Inst., lxviii. (1905, 2) pp. 204-47 (6 figs.). * Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., xviii. (1905, 2) pp. 376-407 (6 figs.). 249 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. MEETING HELD ON THE 21ST OF FEBRUARY, 1906, aT 20 HANovER SquarRE, W. Dr. D. H. Scort, F.R.S., erc., PRESIDENT, IN THE CHAIR. The Minutes of the Annual Meeting of the 17th of January, 1906, were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. The List of Donations to the Society (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received since the last Meeting, was read, and the thanks of the Society voted to the donors. From Herdman, W. A. Report to the Government of Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster Fisheries of the Gulf of Manaar. Parts» The Royal Society. Ill. and IV. (4to, London, 1905) . Thomas S. Clarkson School of Technology The Author. “( The Director of the Clarkson Bulletin. Vol. ii. (Potsdam, N.Y., 1905) ee Warming, Dr. Eug. (Hon. F.R.M.S.) Dansk Planteveekst. (8vo, Copenhagen and Christiania, 1906) 5 E é Mr. Griffiths gave a short account of the method which he had successfully adopted for mounting delicate vegetable tissues in xylo- balsam so as to prevent osmotic action. The specimens were first dehydrated by steeping successively in various strengths of alcohol and subsequently in mixtures of xylol and alcohol. Specimens which were specially delicate were previously fixed with picric acid and after washing a sufficient quantity of this would remain to slightly stain portions. In illustration of the subject an excellent sample of Spirogyra in con- jugation was exhibited under the Microscope. The precise point at which the staining should be done is determined by the alcoholic strength of the stain. The President, in moving a vote of thanks to Mr. Griffiths, said he had seen the specimens before the meeting, and was glad to find that the difficulty usually experienced in mounting these delicate objects had been so successfully overcome. Mr. Beck exhibited and described a new pattern optical bench, for illumination with either ordinary or monochromatic light, the various parts of which, together with the methods of using them, were explained in detail. Dr. Hebb exhibited an objective intended to be used either ag a wet or dry lens, which was designed by Mr. Wenham in 1870, and made by 250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Messrs. Ross. Descriptive reports on this objective by Messrs. Ross and by Mr. Nelson were read to the meeting. Mr. A. D. Michael said he perfectly well recollected this lens being brought out, and Mr. Wenham specially selected one for him and seemed to be very proud of it at the time. He had sent it to Mr. Nelson for examination, but neither he nor Mr. Nelson considered it a very great success, and though he still had it he scarcely ever made use of it. Mr. Walter Rosenhain then described at considerable length a hew form of Metallurgical Microscope which, together with various pieces of accessory apparatus, was exhibited to the meeting, a lantern picture of the instrument being shown upon the screen in further illustration. Mr. Jenkins said that there were several points in which an ordinary Microscope proved inconvenient in the work of examining metal sections, and, so far as he could see, these drawbacks had been succes- fully overcome in the instrument which Mr. Rosenhain had designed with so much care and skill. He thought that the greater steadiness of the fixed tube would be a great advantage, especially for photography. The qualities of the new Microscope, however, could only be truly appreciated by experience, and he should very much like to have an opportunity of trying the instrument himself in comparison with that he now used. He thought, however, that it would be well to say that if anyone purposed taking up the study of micro-metallurgy, he need not be deterred from doing so by the idea that it was necessary to have any elaborate instruments for the purpose, since very good results could be obtained by a simple means. What they wanted most in micro- metallurgy were objectives which would give them a flat field ; but he understood that opticians objected to make these, since the properties which gave flatness of field were, he was told, incompatible with certain other optical properties expected in present-day lenses for general use. The optical firms feared that if they made objectives which would satisfy metallurgists as to flatness of field, their reputation would suffer with those whose work was of a more general nature; but he thought that if they engraved round the objective some such word as “ Metallurgical ” this would sufficiently explain that it was designed for a special purpose, and their reputation would then be unaffected. With respect to the optical bench, which was exhibited in conjunc- tion with the Microscope, this was no doubt a very good arrangement, but was it necessary for any ordinary work? In his work he used a Nernst lamp, a simple condenser, and a Beck’s cover-glass type of ver- tical illuminator, and he found no difficulty in getting thoroughly satisfactory photographs up to 1000 diameters. _ Dr. Carpenter thought they were very much indebted to Mr. Rosenhain for bringing this instrument before them, and that they ought to recognise that he had attempted, what had not been attempted before, to make an instrument which was perfectly adapted for all requirements of this class of work, which was increasing in importance every year. If the advantages which were claimed for this Microscope were borne out by experience, Mr. Rosenhain had certainly placed PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 251 metallurgists under a very great debt of gratitude, and in common with the last speaker he should very much like to have an opportunity of practically testing the merits of the instrument. As regards one point he would like to ask for rather fuller information, and that was in reference to vertical illumination under high powers such as X 1500. In the instruments at present in use they got, on the whole, the best definition with a cover-slip placed in the axis of the tube of the Micro- scope, but the illumination was not very good. Another method was to have a prism illuminator at the side of the tube, but this, although improving upon the illumination given by a cover slip, was only satis- factory with low powers, because the light was slightly eccentric and it was very difficult to get good definition at high magnifications. If Mr. Rosenhain could give them good vertical illumination with high powers he had certainly achieved a brilliant success. Mr. Beck said there was one point about this Microscope which rendered it more easy to make a flat field objective, because in this case, the tube length was always the same, and the corrections could be made for this given tube-length. Objectives were corrected for a certain tube length, and if the Rosenhain Microscope be properly used, the image would always be formed at this distance. This being so, it would be possible to produce a lens which would give a flat field in one plane, although there would always be a slight difference between the margin and the centre, and the central definition would have to be slightly impared in quality. In making comparisons of photographs as to their flatness of field, it was of great importance to see that the angle of field included was the same, otherwise such comparisons were valueless. There always would be a limit to the flatness of the field under any circumstances. In the Microscope before the meeting an iris diaphragm had been placed just above the objective by which its aperture could be cut down. This was frequently of great use to increase penetration or depth, and to assist in cutting off internal reflection. Mr. Rosenhain said he was of course aware that such an instrument as he was exhibiting could only be appreciated by trial, and he hoped that those interested would have an opportunity of trying it; he felt convinced that they would find it much simpler in use than it might appear in the description. As regards flatness of field, he thought that in practice it was a difficulty that was not felt very much, provided the lens were otherwise well connected and that a high eye-piece or a long camera were employed. If it were really found that the want of flatness was a serious matter, it could be overcome to some extent by using not the approximately flat, and frequently slightly convex specimens ordinarily prepared, but specimens deliberately prepared with a slightly concave surface. As regards strictly vertical illumination at 1500 diameters, he did not know if that could be attained with anything but the clear glass disk, but with the silvered half-disk illuminator a very even and practically central illumination could be obtained even with the highest powers, the adjustability of the illuminator especially lending itself to this purpose. The ideal illumination would be with parallel axial light, but when working with a Microscope objective as condenser, it was impossible to obtain parallel light, owing to the spherical aber- 252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY, ration arising under such conditions, so that “ critical” illumination, with the light converging as nearly as possible upon the centre of the field, was the best available. On the motion of the President, a vote of thanks was passed to Mr. Rosenhain for bringing this instrument before them, and for so clearly explaining its construction. Mr. Dollman’s paper, on “ A Method of producing Stereo-photo- micrographs,” was read by Mr. Earland, and a number of examples were shown in illustration. ‘ . A paper on “ A Simple Method of taking Stereo-photomicrographs, and of Mounting the Prints without Cutting,” was also read by Mr. H. Taverner, the subject being illustrated by a drawing on the board and by a number of mounted specimens. Mr. Rheinberg said that, as the hour was late, he would not take time by discussing in detail any matters of theory, as regards stereoscopic effects with the Microscope, but he would like to say that he thought Mr. Taverner’s simple and practical method of stereo-photography would be found to be one of much value. Though he thought the reason which led Mr. Taverner to use a circular aperture on one side of the objective, in place of using the whole semi-aperture—as had been done by Mr. Dollman and others before—only in small part accounted for the improved effect, he considered there was a very distinct advantage in this innovation. There was an interesting little point of theory involved in it, which seemed so far to have escaped notice, but which it would not be difficult to substantiate at the right time, and which he was hopeful might be turned to advantage in other directions, as well as the one in question at present. The President said he had seen some of these photographs, and they were extremely successful and beautiful; he thought they were very fortunate in having heard these two papers. A vote of thanks was then passed to Mr. Dollman, Mr. Harland, and Mr. Taverner. Mr. Rousselet said he had received a second list of Natal Rotifers from Mr. Kirkman, amongst which was one new species, Copeus trian- gulatus, specimens of which were exhibited under a Microscope in the room, and a drawing made by Mr. Dixon Nuttall would be published with the paper in the Journal. Mr. Wesché said he had examined the slide, and found this was a marked new form—the two little processes described showed a thickness of skin approaching to the character of a lorica. It was a very interest- ing addition to the fauna. The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. Kirkman for his paper, and to Mr. Rousselet for communicating it. The President called attention to an interesting exhibition of Oribatidee presented by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, and shown under a number of Microscopes in the room. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY, 253 New Fellows.—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows: Messrs. Jesse Drinkwater, George Reginald Marriner, and Edalji Manekji Modi. The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :— The Society :—The following slides of Oribatidee, presented by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce—Cepheus bifidatus, Dameus sufflerus, Notaspis pilosa, NV. sculptilis, Nothrus anaunensis, N. crassus var. Morden, N. glaber, N. invenustus, N. monodactylus, N. Targioni, N. Tectorum, Oribata omissa, O. rubens, Serrarius microcephalus. Messrs. R. and J. Beck :—Optical bench for monochromatic light. Mr. A. Earland :—Stereo-photomicrographs taken by Mr. William P. Dollman, in illustration of paper by the latter. Mr. W. Griffiths :—The following slides of stained vegetable tissues mounted in balsam—Peziza Willkommu ; section of perithecium ; asci and spores, stained with osmic acid; Spirogyra in conjugation, stained with picric acid and hemotoxylin, mounted in xylol-balsam ; Zygnema, stained with hematoxylin, mounted in xylol-balsam. Dr. Hebb :—An Old Dry and Water-immersion }-in. Objective by Ross. Mr. Walter Rosenhain :—New Metallurgical Microscope and Lantern- Slide of the same, in illustration of his paper. Mr. C. F. Rousselet :—New species of Rotifer from Natal, Copeus triangulatus, mounted specimens, in illustration of paper by Hon. Thos. Kirkman. Mr. Henry Taverner :—Stereo-photomicrographs, in illustration of his paper. MEETING HELD ON THE 21ST OF Marcu, 1906, aT 20 HANOVER Square, W.., THe Ricut Hon. Sir Forp Norn, F.R.S., erc., VICE-PRESIDENT, IN THE CHAIR. The Chairman said that before they commenced the business of the evening, he had, with much regret, to announce that since their last Meeting a month ago, they had lost by death their Treasurer, Mr. John Jewell Vezey. He -had been a Fellow of the Society for some twenty- seven years, and for many years a Member of the Council, and for the last six or seven years their Treasurer. He was a man who took great delight in science and literature, and was not only a most active and useful and valuable Member of this Society, but also belonged to many others, among which the Royal Institution, the Society of Arts, the British Astronomical Association, the Royal Photographic Society, and the Quekett Microscopical Club, might be mentioned. This would give some idea of his versatility ; and he was equally active and energetic in matters connected with the Church and with philanthropic undertakings of various kinds, especially the Miller Hospital, in Greenwich Road, to 254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. which he gave a great deal of time and active assistance—and he was, in fact, there at the time of his death, which took place very suddenly. He was Chairman of the General Committee of that hospital, by which his loss will be very much felt. He was also a very good man of business and universally liked, and was frequently consulted by friends who wished for his advice, and his good common sense and sincere sympathy were ever ready for all. It was said of him that when asked a favour (which is often rather a strain upon friendship) he would do it if he could, and that in a manner which seemed as if he was the person receiving the favour rather than conferring it. All would agree in regretting his loss, an expression of which had been conveyed to his widow by their Secretary on behalf of the Society. His death would leave a gap in many places, which it would be very hard to fill. The Minutes of the Meeting of the 21st of February, 1906, were read and confirmed, and were signed by the Chairman. The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints re- ceived since the last Meeting) was read, and the thanks of the Society were voted to the donors, especially to Messrs. Carl Zeiss for their very valuable presentation of a copy of the collected treatises of the late Professor Abbe. Webb, W. M. and Sillem, C. The British Woodlice. (8vo, London, 1906) Winton, A. L. and Moeller, J. The Microscopy of Vegetable Foods. (New York, 1906) 4 The Weer Gesammelte Abhandlungen von iemst Abbe. Zweiter “Band. : The Publishers. (8vo, Jena, 1906) Messrs. Carl Zeiss. Gli Insetti. Vol. i., fase. 1-18. (4to, Milan, " 1906) Socata aaa Libraria, Milano. The Chairman announced that the Council had appointed Mr. Wynne E. Baxter to be the Treasurer of the Society, in succession to the late Mr. Vezey. Mr. J. W. Gordon exhibited and described a new retro-ocular or top stop, which he had devised for the purpose of obtaining dark ground illumination with high powered objectives, and increasing “the definition of highly-resolved images in a bright field. He explained that attempts to obtain dark ground illumination in the ordinary way when high powers are used, do not answer because of the wide angles of the high- powered objective, and the necessity, under ordinary conditions, of dark field production for a condenser of wider angle. His new arrangement for getting over this difficulty consisted in placing the stop in the Ramsden circle of the ocular; and if this was accurately adjusted, a satisfactory dark ground could be obtained with an objective of the widest possible angle. The stop was fitted in a small cell which would take stops of various forms and dimensions. When a small stop—less than the Ramsden circle in diameter—was applied, bright field illumi- PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 255 nation was obtained with improved definition, so that the contour of blood corpuscles, for instance, could be seen in a way which could not be obtained with ordinary illumination. Accessory mechanism enabled a camera to be fitted to the arrangement. One use of this method was to get a really dark ground with high magnification, but a still more valuable result was the strengthening of the definition in a bright field without reducing the angle, and consequently without loss of resolving power. On the motion of the Chairman, the thanks of the Society were unanimously voted to Mr. Gordon for the exhibition of his very ingenious contrivance, and for the explanation of it which he had given. Mr. C. F. Rousselet read a paper entitled, “* A Contribution to our Knowledge of the Rotifera of South Africa,” illustrating the subject by a large number of lantern slides of the organisms described, and of the localities whence they were obtained, as well as by specimens exhibited under Microscopes in the room. The Chairman, in moving a hearty vote of thanks to Mr. Rousselet for his communication, said he was sure all present would be glad to join in expressing their appreciation of the very interesting account which Mr. Rousselet had given of his trip to South Africa, and of the excellent photographic illustrations which he had shown to them of the places he had visited. Mr. Joseph M. Coon exhibited and described a new form of finder, which could be used on any Microscope and with high powers, a special feature of the apparatus being that an object registered on one Micro- scope could be found on any other. The contrivance was shown in use attached to several Microscopes, and was further explained by drawings on the blackboard. The thanks of the Society were voted to Mr. Coon for his interesting exhibition and explanation. Mr. N. D. F. Pearce’s paper on “Some Oribatidee from the Hima- layas,” was read by the Secretary. Mr. A. D. Michael said this was a very interesting paper, because we had hitherto known absolutely nothing about the Oribatide of Sikkim, and very little indeed of those found in the tropics. The wide distribu- tion of these creatures was very remarkable, considering that they were so very slow moving, living chiefly in mosses and similar kinds of vegetation, for in searching material from various parts of the world, he had generally found British species among them—and in the paper before them there were no widely different types from those found in England at the present day. A less careful observer might have classed many more of them as British species, but the author had picked out minute differences with great skill, although the differences were not in any instance very wide. To get any record at all was very interesting, for Sikkim was a luxuriant and gloriously situated district lying between 256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. our own frontier and the barren wastes of Thibet. He thought it was very good work to get this record of species so curiously resembling our own. Most of them were very small and inconspicuous, and it was rather curious also to notice that most of the tropical species were, on the average, smaller than those found in more temperate climates. The thanks of the Society were unanimously voted to Mr. Pearce for his paper. Mr. E. M. Nelson’s paper on ‘The Limits of Resolving Power for the Microscope and Telescope,” was taken as read. The Chairman said this paper would be printed in the Journal, and they felt assured that the results arrived at by Mr. Nelson would prove very interesting on careful perusal, although perhaps rather too technical to be usefully read at a Meeting. The thanks of the Society were unanimously voted to Mr. Nelson for this communication, and a further vote of thanks to Mr. Pillischer for the loan of a number of Microscopes, was proposed by the Chairman and unanimously carried. The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :— Mr. Joseph M. Coon.—New finder for the Microscope, and the following slides to exhibit the use of the finder :—Eggs of Sandhopper, Equisetum arvense, growing point of barren stem, human ovary, micro- pyle of embryo of ovary of lily ; photomicrographs. Mr. J. W. Gordon :—Retro-ocular or top stop for use with high powers. Mr. C. F. Rousselet :—Lantern slides, and the following Microscope slides of South African Rotifers, etc., in illustration of his paper :— Rotifera various, from Alexanderfontein, Kimberley ; Brachionus furcu- latus§ 9 and B. furculatus var. inermis, without spines, from Koorn Spruit, Orange River Colony ; Desmids, Diatoms, and Ploesoma lenticu- lare, from railway water tank, Norton, Mashonaland ; brachionus pala var. dorcas, from Bulawayo Waterworks ; Pedalion mirum, and Tetra- mastix opolensio, from Matapos, Rhodesia ; Desmids, Diatoms, Brachionus angularis var. caudatus, Polychetus Collinsi, and various other Rotifera from Victoria Falls, Zambesi River; Lacinularia racemovata, from Rhodesia. New Fellow.—The following was elected an Ordinary Fellow: Mr. Herbert Bibbey. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. JUNE, 1906. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. IV.—A Simple Method of Producing Stereo-Photomicrographs. By W. P. DoLumay. (Read February 21, 1906.) Puate VIII. I WILL endeavour to put in as concise a form as possible the principal points in the production of the stereo-micrographs that will be shown this evening. The method is very simple. I have made a hobby of stereoscopic photography since 1865, and as well have handled many Microscopes, optical work being always an attraction to me. Some twelve or more months ago a friend called my attention to an article on stereo-photomicrography in the “ British Journal of Photography Almanac” for 1894, by the then editor, the late Mr. J. Traill Taylor, who therein explained several methods of producing stereograms of microscopic objects. I adopted what I thought the simplest method, that of obscuring by a semicircular shield half of the objective in use. I had a cloth-lined brass tube with one end half screened (blackened, of course), made to slip over the lens, and to revolve smoothly on the mount. As the objectives vary in diameter, the tube was made to fit the widest one, and strips of cardboard were cut to make the tube fit the smaller ones. In the case of photo-objectives—I have used these from 2-in. to 6-in. focus—a semicircular shield of thin blackened brass can be dropped against the diaphragm between the combinations, and this is certainly the better place for the screen. I have used a 2-in, Dallmeyer portrait combination (which is specially good for June 20th, 1906 . s 258 Transactions of the Society. this work), a 43-in. Unar, and a 6-in. Goerz. I use a f 5°6 dia- phragm with the Dallmeyer, that of 78 with the Unar, and f 8 with the Goerz. Of course, for low magnifications of a rough object it is advisable to work with a low power—the 44-in. focus lens was used for most of the prints exhibited—but for larger objects a 6-in. lens would define better. The little Dallmeyer lens is a marvel for definition and flatness over the small field used. I have had extra tubes made for my Microscope (a Van Heurck by Watson) to take the place of the lower rackwork tube and the upper sliding tube, which carry the photo lenses—the Dallmeyer at the bottom of the draw-tube, the Unar (for which I had a new mount made so as to get it inside the tube), about 134 in. down the tube from the top, and the Goerz outside on the eye-piece end of the Microscope. These adaptations enable the lenses to be carried at the suitable distances from the object on the stage, and allow sufficient rackwork for focusing. When the distance is too great (as it will be in low-power work) for the hand to reach the focusing pinion, I have to use a Hooke’s joint focusing rod, but for the _ higher powers I have a long rod on the other side (the right) of the camera with a pulley wheel near the end, over which and the fine-adjustment screw-head runs a cotton thread-loop, which I find quite effective for monocular work, even with a +4, objective. The camera I use is a whole plate one, with a long bellows, and for long-distance work a telescopic attachment in front (made of rolled brown paper). The upright position of the plate in the camera is the more convenient for photographing opaque objects requiring to be lighted from the front and side, and in this case the objective should be divided horizontally. For transparent objects lighted centrally from the back, the plate may be horizontal, and the lens divided vertically. I effect the reversal of the images on the plate—so that the prints will not require to be cut, and so simplify the mounting—by using a carrier in the dark slide (the whole plate slide allows this to be done) in which the plate (5 by 4 in.) can be placed 24 in. out of centre, so as to receive the image from the right hand (or upper) half of the lens on the left hand (or lower) half of the plate. The opening in the carrier should be 4 in. by 4 in., a piece of glass 2} in. by 4 in. filling the otherwise unoccupied end. A screen (of blackened card or thick paper) with an aperture in the centre of 2} in. by 3 in. should be placed in the carrier, to protect one half of the plate while the other is being exposed. After exposing one side of the plate, the slide is taken into the dark room, and the plate moved to the other end of the carrier. Then the screen on the objective is moved half round (or, in the case of a lens in the draw-tube, the tube is given a semi- revolution without disturbing the focus), and the second exposure can be made, POLYZOA (IDMONEA RADIANS). W. P. Dollman, Phot. Producing Stereo-Photomicrographs. By W. P. Dollman. 259 An important thing to remember when photographing opaques, is that, to secure even illumination of the two halves, the illu- minant must be on the same level as the centre of the objective. For the lighting of large transparent objects, when using the 44-in. and 6-in. objectives, I have had a cell, which carries a 44, 6, or 8-in. focus uncorrected condenser, fitted to the large aperture under the main stage of the Microscope, and brought as near as possible to the object. For the smaller objects I use an achromatic condenser of 1:0 N.A. This can be altered in power by removing the top combination, or, if necessary, using only the lower of the three lenses, As illuminant, I use acetylene (the finest light for all ordinary work), from a special burner I had made, limelight, and sometimes sunlight (parallel rays), through a_ heat - absorbing medium. On the platform carrying the apparatus I have marked a scale from 0 to 49 in., with the zero at the level of the Micro- scope stage. This, with the aid of tables for the various lenses used, enables me to work to definite magnitudes, and also to calculate approximately the focus of all objectives that can be used without an eyepiece. By the way, low power micro-objectives are almost invariably very wrongly named —a nominal 3-inch being only 2°3-inch, a so-called 2-inch only 1°5, and soon. Ido not think I need say anything about exposure, as that depends upon colour or brightness of object, illumination and magnification. I use ordinary developers, such as would be suitable for landscapes, using such as would give hard results to accentuate feeble contrasts. Chromatic plates, with or without a yellow screen, are used, and where suitable a malachite green light filter when monochromatic light is desirable. A good deal of my apparatus is makeshift—that is, diverted from other uses—but is effectual. My optical outfit is of the best, both in low and high powers, condensers, etc. In this description I fear I have been rather diffuse, and have detailed a lot that perhaps everybody knows all about; but I thought it expedient, owing to my great distance from the place where this will be read, to be a little particular. I ought to have mentioned before, but forgot till I thought I had finished, that (as the major conjugate focus is being used) all non-symmetrical photographic lenses, such as “Unars,” “Stig- matics,” and portrait combinations, should be reversed on the Microscope (the front combination being presented to the plate), to enable them to perform at their best. NortH ADELAIDE, SoutaH AUSTRALIA. 260 Transactions of the Society. V.—A Simple Method of taking Stereo-Photomicrographs, and Mounting the Prints without Cutting. By H. TAVERNER. (Read February 21, 1906.) Pratss IX., X. anp XI. In November 1903 I had the pleasure of exhibiting to the Fellows of this Society two photographs of the hairs on the leg of a water-mite, which I had taken through the right and left tubes of a binocular Microscope, in order to demonstrate that the two images were not identicai. I did not bring the matter forward as a new discovery, but simply because the object was particularly suited to demon- strate the fact, which I knew was disputed by some microscopists. The photos in question were too small to be viewed stereoscopic- ally, and I therefore exhibited under a stereoscope at the same time two photos of the same subject, taken by a different method with a magnification of over 200 diameters, which proved that the two dissimilar images combined to form a stereoscopic picture. The method then adopted for the production of the photos was to cover the front of the objective with a cap (fig. 38), by means of which exactly one half of the front of the lens was cut off. The rotation of this cap through 180° allowed separate pictures to be taken by the right and left halves of the lens. I did not pursue the matter further at the time; but shortly before Christmas last I wanted a similar photo for a friend, and it then occurred to me that the axial rays of light were detrimental to the formation of a stereoscopic image, and that if I could stop them out, I should obtain better results stereoscopically than by my former method. I therefore tried the experiment of cutting ~ out all the central rays of light by means of a stop placed behind the objective, having a circular aperture, so situated that its inner edge was outside the optic axis of the lens (fig. 39). The resulting photos were a decided improvement on those obtained by my former method ; and on showing these to Mr. Rheinberg, he confirmed me in my intention of experimenting with stops of smaller aperture. I do not think I need say anything further on this point, EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX. Water-mite (Ecpolus papillosus Soar) female. x 30. Collected and mounted by H. Taverner. Photographed with a 2:5 mm. stup. Beck’s 1}-in. objective and No. 1 eye-piece. WATER-MITE (ECPOLUS PAPILLOSUS, SOAR). H. Taverner, Phot. : yore ; str of - ol > eee oe PE rai = 7 — , i aed 1 FORAMINIFERA (ORBULINA UNIVERSA). H. Taverner, Phot Stereo-Photomicrographs. By H. Taverner. 261 except to mention that all the photographs on exhibition to-night were taken with stops having circular apertures of 24-4 mm. in diameter, and with the inner edge of the aperture in no case more than 1 mm. from the optic axis of the lens. It will be found necessary to vary the size of the aperture in the stop according to the thickness of the object to be photographed, and the objective in use; but the best results, without distortion or exaggerated stereoscopic relief, are to be obtained by the use of a stop having— 1. The largest possible aperture that will give sufficiently sharp detail in the picture. 2. The inner edge of the aperture as near the optic axis of the lens as will give sufficient stereoscopic relief, and at the same time the truest appreciation of the thickness of the object, or third dimension. For convenience in working, Mr. Curties has made for mea small piece of apparatus which screws into the nose-piece of the Fic. 38. Fic. 39. Microscope, and is itself of the nature of a secondary nose-piece, to facilitate the changing of the stops. It is fitted with a swing-out arm, carrying a ring which holds the stops, and which revolves through 180° exactly, thus changing the aperture in the stop from one side of the optic axis to the other, for the purpose of making the two exposures. Except for this revolution of the stop, the two photos are taken without any alteration whatever in focus, illu- mination, position of object or apparatus, except, of course, the dry plate. To obtain the two pictures on one plate in the correct position for printing and mounting without cutting, I use what is known as a repeating back, a specimen of which is exhibited here this evening. One picture is taken at a time, that on the left half of the plate, with the aperture in the stop to the left of the optic axis, and that on the right half of the plate, with the aperture in the stop to the right of the optic axis. The images are now on the negative in the correct positions for printing and mounting, with- EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Foraminifera (Orbulina wniversa), showing internal Globigerine structure. x 25. Mounted by Mr. A. Earland. Photographed with a 2°5 mm. stop. Beck’s 14-in. objective and No. 1 eye-piece. 262 Transactions of the Socrety. out any further trouble. This description is correct for the 4-inch objective, and all lower powers used with an eye-piece, but may, possibly, have to be reversed with higher powers. In conclusion, I should like to add that particular care must be taken in fitting the nose-piece, so as to secure the true horizontal alignment of the apertures when the stop is revolved from one side of the optic axis to the other. If the apertures are not truly aligned, the finished prints will not superimpose properly, and will not be clear and sharp. I may, perhaps, also mention that my only trouble has arisen from a difficulty in obtaining equal illu- mination of both pictures with transparent objects by transmitted light, but as my photos have been taken without an optical bench, this difficulty may not arise when one is used. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Foraminifera. Various species from Timor Sea, 50 fathoms. x 25. Mounted by Mr. A. Earland. Photographed with a4 mm. stop. Beck’s 1}-in. objective and No. 1 eye-piece. FORAMINIFERA FROM TIMOR SEA. Taverner, Phot. > ._ x] 2 * The author finds that it is really best, always to place the focusing mark on clear space of cover-glass, as it is easier found; a very fine dot or cross of Indian ink or gentian-violet in Holles glue is very durable and suitable. m2 276 Transactions of the Society. To find an object already registered: focus on focusing mark, adjust pointer over registering mark, move slide so that pointer stands over part of label indicated by register—then the object should be in field of objective. The slide must be kept in contact with bar or stops on stage. If the Microscope has only spring clips to stage, the pointer has two points, or other equivalent means of adjustment, parallel with the ruling in label. The right-hand point is set to registering mark, left-hand point on line continuing from it horizontally, the objective being focused as before; the only necessary variation in use being to remember to indicate with the right-hand point, and keep slide in such position that both points are equidistant from any horizontal line on label. The slide may be moved vertically or horizontally, but must finally be adjusted parallel to its first position, or the object will not be in field. 277 OBITUARY. LIONEL SmiITH BEALE, F.R.S., etc., President R.M.S., 1879-80. Treasurer R.M.S., 1881-90. LIONEL SMITH BEALE was born in 1828, in a house close to the Church of St. Paul, Covent Garden. He received his early educa- tion at a private school at Highgate, and later at King’s College, with which institution he was closely associated till his death. In 1847 he went to Oxford as anatomical assistant in the museum to Henry Acland. He held this appointment for two years, and then returned to London, where he took his M.B. degree in 1851. In 1852 he established a laboratory, where he taught normal and morbid histology and physiological chemistry. In 1853 he was appointed Professor of Physiology at King’s College, and in 1869 Physician to King’s College Hospital and Professor of Pathological Anatomy. . Professor Beale was made a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1857, at the early age of twenty-nine, and two years later he received the Fellowship of the Royal College of Physicians. He joined the Society in 1852, was President in 1879-80, and Treasurer from 1881-90. In 1896 he resigned his appointments at King’s College and King’s College Hospital, owing to a slight attack of cerebral hemorrhage; he was then made Emeritus Professor of Medicine and Consulting Physician to the hospital. From this seizure he never properly recovered, and finally succumbed to another attack of hemorrhage on March 28 of the present year. In 1859 he married Frances, daughter of Rev. Peyton Blakeston, M.D., F.R.S., and leaves a son, Mr. Peyton T. B. Beale, Surgeon to King’s College Hospital, a Fellow of the Society, and for many years Demonstrator of Histology, and Lecturer on Biology in King’s College, London. Beale’s work is variously estimated, but, like that of some others, is less appreciated in this country than abroad. As a physician, there is no doubt that he was extremely able, though his methods were different from the ordinary. He examined patients with rapidity, apparently carelessly, and arrived at a correct conclusion in much less time than many take to elaborate an erroneous diagnosis. As Medical Adviser to the Clerical and Medical Assurance Company, he made many thousands of examina- tions, and his results were used as an actuarial basis for estimating the probabilities of life. 278 Obituary. To the microscopical world he is best known by “How to Work with the Microscope,’ and “ The Microscope in Medicine,” both of which have run through numerous editions. He also wrote on “ The Liver,” “ Kidney Diseases, Urinary Deposits, and Calculi,” “Slight Ailments and their Treatment,” “The Mystery of Life,” “The Ultimate Nerve-Fibres distributed to the Muscles and to some other Tissues,” “ Life and Vital Action in Health and Disease,” and other works on religion and science. Though some of his views were generally unacceptable—e.g. on Vitality, Bioplasm, etc.—there can be no doubt to any one who has examined his reproductions of things observed by kim under the Microscope, that he was a most faithful delineator, as well as an accurate and acute student, in many respects in advance of his time. And though it may not be possible to draw the same conclusions as he did, the facts remain, and they show conclusively that he was a great pioneer in microscopical cytology, histology, and physiology, and particularly in high-power work prior to the day of immersion objectives. His method of preparation was, briefly, as follows. The tissues were stained either by immersion in “ Beale’s carmin fluid,” or by injection of an alkaline carmin solution through the aorta. In the latter case this was in due course followed by a Prussian- blue solution, which remained precipitated in the blood-vessels. The tissues were then scaked in acid-glycerin, thus causing the carmin to be precipitated in a very fine form in every particle of “bioplasm,” or living matter, the carmin in the non-living, or “formed ” material, being washed out by soaking in dilute glycerin. The pieces of tissue for examination were then soaked for many months in glycerin of increasing strengths, and finely teased out preparations were eventually mounted in pure glycerin. Many of these preparations were investigated under a ;}, dry objective, and it is worth while noting that some of the actual specimens made fifty years ago are still extant and in excellent preservation. Much of his work was done on the Hyla and the maggot of the blow-fly, and the method adopted for staining is practically the same as that recently come into vogue and known as “ supravital.” COMMUNICATIONS MADE TO THE RoyaL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY BY THE LATE PROFESSOR LIONEL S. BEALE.* 1. A Simple Form of Portable Microscope, with Lever Adjustment, which may be adapted to several diffrent purposes. Trans. Micr. Soe. London, iv. (1856) pp. 13-14. 2. On a Portable Field or Clinical Microscope. (Read Dec. 10, 1860.) Op. cit., ix. (1861) pp. 3-4. * A portrait of the late Professor Beale is given in Journal R.M.S., 1886, facing p. 625. Obituary. 279 3. On the Formation of the so-called Intercellular Substance of Cartilage, and of its relation to the so-called Cells, with Observations on the process of Ossification. (Read March 1, 1863.) Op. cit., xi. (1863) pp. 95-104. 4. Observation upon the Nature of the Red Blood-Corpuscle. (Read Dec. 9, 1863.). Op. cit., xii. (1864) pp. 82-43. 5. On the Germinal Matt+r of the Blood, with Remarks upon the Formation of Fibrin. (Read Dec. 9, 1863.) Tom. cit., pp. 47-63. 6. On the Structure and Formation of the Sarcolemma of Striped Muscle, and of the exact relation of the Nerves, Vessels, and Air-Tubes (in the case of Insects) to the Contractile Tissue of Muscle. (Reid June 8, 1864.) Tom. cit., pp. 94-108. 7. Nutrition from a Microscopical Point of View. (Read May 8, 1867.) Op. cit., xv. (1867) pp. 75-85. 8. On the Germinal Matter of the Ovarian Ova of the Stickleback. Tom. cit., xv. (1867) pp. 85-6. 9. Protoplasm and Living Matter. (Read before the R.M.S., April 14, 1869.) Monthly Microscopical Journal, i. (1869) pp. 277-88. 10. The Nerves of Capillary Vessels and their probable Action in Health and Disease. (Read Dec. 6, 1871.) Op. cit., vii. (1872) pp. 4-9; con- cluded in viii. (1872) pp. 55-66. 11. On the Relation of Nerves to Pigment and other Cells or Elementary Parts. (Read Dec. 6, 1871.) Op. cit., vii. (1872) pp. 45-7. 12. Beale’s Nerve Researches: Dr. Beale in Reply to Dr. Klein. (Read May 1, 1872.) Tom. cit., pp. 253-5. 13. The President’s Addre~s: Living Matter. (Read Feb. 11,1880.) Journ. R.M.S., iii. (1880) pp. 202-24. 14. The President’s Address: The Microscopic Limit and Beyond. (Read Feb. 9, 1881.) Op. cit., i. series 2 (1881) pp. 180-202. 15. The Constituents of Sewage in the Mud of the Thames. (Read Jan. 10, 1884.) Op. cit., iv. series 2 (1884) pp. 1-19. JOHN JEWELL VEZEY, Treasurer R.M.S. 1844-1906. JOHN JEWELL VEZEY was educated at a private school, and for some forty years was engaged in business as a wharfinger in Mincing Lane. He was extremely versatile, and educated himself in science, music, and theology. Unostentatiously but enthusias- ticaliy religious, he devoted much time to the service of the Church, while his practical benevolence was shuwn by the interest he took in the Millar Hospital, at Greenwich, where he had honorary charge of the electrical department, and spent two evenings a week in administering electrical treatment to the sick poor. Mr. Vezey took great interest in the doings of scientific societies, and was a constant and assiduous attendant at the meetings of the Society of Arts, the Royal Institution, Royal Microscopical Society, Quekett Microscopical Club, Rontgen, and Royal Photographic Societies. To Mr. Vezey the Royal Microscopical Society is much in- debted not only for the interest he took in its proceedings, but for 280 Obituary. the energy he displayed in helping to organise and make the Meet- ings of the Society more interesting. When elected Treasurer, on the demise of Mr. Suffolk in 1900, his business capacity was soon found to be of enormous value in dealing with the financial affairs of the Society. His death, which occurred with great suddenness while en- gaged in his charitable work at the Millar Hospital, deprives the Society of a much respected Fellow, who as Member of Council and Treasurer, rendered invaluable service to the Society. His genial presence will be sorely missed, and the gap left by his death hard to fill. 281 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO .Os0 iO Ge Yoov AN Di yb Orly Ar Nay (PRINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA), MICROSCOPY, Eve." ZOOLOGY. VERTEBRATA. a. Embryology.t Foundations of Embryology.t—Bruno Bloch has made a scholarly contribution to the history of Embryology, in which he deals with the “foundations,” if they are worthy of that title. His chapters discuss (1) the Hippocratic school, (2) Aristotle, (3) Galen, (4) from Galen to the beginning of the sixteenth century, and (5) thence to Harvey. Interstitial Cells in Ovary of Rabbit.§S—Janet E. Lane-Claypon has studied the origin and life-history of these elements. A large number of germinal cells become imbedded in the subjacent mesoblast. Of these the great majority undergo transformations up to a certain stage. This stage having been reached, they may pass through the necessary processes of ovogenesis, or they may become modified to form either follicle cells or interstitial cells, this last process being the chief fate of those near the periphery, whilst ovogenesis occurs in those more centrally situated. The interstitial cells are thus potential ova, capable of becoming ova should the appropriate stimulus be given. This stimulus is pro- vided by pregnancy, during which the interstitial cells undergo en- largement in size, exceeding that of a primordial ovum. About the twenty-third day some of the interstitial cells become cut off near the * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial ‘‘ we,’”’ and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part*of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actwally pub- lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects. t Nova Acta Leopold-Carol. Acad. Halle, Ixxxii. (1904) received 1906, pp. 217- 334. § Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvii., No. B 514 (1905) pp. 32-57 (1 pl.). 282 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO periphery, and pass through the nuclear transformations of ovogenesis, becoming true ova. Cstrous Cycle in Dog.*—F. H. A. Marshall and W. A. Jolly point out that the bitch is moneestrous, and has typically two sexual seasons in the year, while the wild species in their natural state have only one sexual season annually. The domestic cat has three or four sexual seasons in the course of the year: it is polycestrous, and may have four heat-periods in a single sexual season ; the wild cat probably experiences only one sexual season in the year. The lioness, failing pregnancy, may have several annual sexual seasons, at the same time being polycestrous ; bears, polecats, and seals, and probably most other carnivores, appear to be monecestrous and breed once a year, but the otter, in captivity at least, is polycestrous. The histological changes which the uterus undergoes during the cycle may be divided into the following periods :— 1. Period of rest : : : . anoestrum. 2 crowth and congestion : a ” af : 5 I procestrum. a es destruction . : si) 4 recuperation { cestrus. j 4 : : ‘ * (metoestrum. Ovulation in the bitch takes place after external bleeding has been going on for several days. It occurs during the period of cestrus, but is quite independent of insemination. The hypothesis that the entire procestrous process is of the nature of a preparation for the lodgment of the ovum is in accordance with the facts. The authors note that no systematic investigation as to the vitality of spermatozoa in mammals has been hitherto attempted, but they have ascertained that the period of survival in the male passages of rabbits is probably not more than ten days. Ovary as an Organ of Internal Secretion.t—F. H. A. Marshall and W. A. Jolly conclude that the ovary is an organ providing an internal secretion, which is elaborated by the follicular epithelial cells or by the interstitial cells of the stroma. This secretion circulating in the blood induces menstruation and heat. After ovulation, which takes place during cestrus, the corpus luteum is formed, and this organ provides a further secretion whose function is essential for the changes taking place during the attachment and development of the embryo in the first stages of pregnancy. Maturation-Divisions.t — Victor Grégoire has set himself the laborious task of summarising the main results which have been reached in regard to maturation-divisions in plants and in animals. Having done so, he attempts a synthesis, or, where that is not possible, a balance-sheet of the results. His general conclusion is, that ina large number of cases the processes conform to one scheme, whieh Wie calls “heterohomeotypic.” The gist of this scheme is as follows :— 1. The two constitutive branches of the definitive chromosomes (1) separate from one another in each chromosome at the first kinesis. * Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvi., No. B 511 (1905) pp. 395-8. ¢ Loe. cit. t La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 221-376. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 283 2. The daughter-chromosomes (1) undergo towards the end of the metaphase, or during the anaphase, a longitudinal division. 3. The daughter-chromosomes (1), thus constituted, preserve their autonomy during the interkinesis. They become the chromosomes (II), and the longitudinal anaphasic halves become the constitutive branches of chromosomes (IT). 4. These branches, and consequently the longitudinal anaphasic halves, separate in each chromosome in the second figure. Spermatogenesis in Batrachoseps attenuatus.*—F. A. Janssens communicates a third study on the spermatogenesis of this Batrachian. He deals especially with the history of the auxocytes. It is extremely probable that the 12 chromosome-branches (anses de bouquet) result from the fusion in pairs of the 24 chromosomes of the last somatic kinesis, and that the double chromosomes of the prophases of the heterotypic division result from the longitudinal cleavage of the anses de bouquet. Testicular Secretion.j—P. Bouin and P. Ancel relate some experi- ments on guinea-pigs which go to show that the results of castration (on the development of the skeleton and accessory genital organs) may be attenuated by sub-cutaneous injections of extract of the inter- stitial gland of the testis. The material for injection was obtained from several large mammals. Alleged Ovulase of Spermatozoa.{—Antoine Pizon discusses Piéri’s theory of a soluble ferment (ovulase) contained in spermatozoa and pro- vocative of segmentation. His experiments do not in the least confirm Piéri’s view : there is no evidence of any such ferment. Toxic Properties of Seminal Fluid.§—G. Loisel has studied ex- perimentally the toxic properties of seminal fluid from many animals. There is, he thinks, no doubt that the testes secrete or excrete toxic substances especially affecting the nervoussystem. It may be that some toxalbumin carried by the spermatozoa acts as an excitant to the pro- toplasm of the egg. Placentation in Ungulates.||R. Assheton points out that the for- mation of the placenta in Ungulata vera is founded on a system of foldings of the subzonal membrane (or of the trophoblast only), which fit into corresponding grooves in the walls of the uterus, without thickening of the trophoblast layer of the blastocyst, and with- out destruction of maternal epithelium or other tissue (Sus). Certain parts of the crests of the ridges are produced by local amplification into true villi, into which the splanchnopleure of the allantois subsequently extends (Hquus, Bos, etc.). This plicate placenta (Ungulates, and perhaps Cetacea, Sirenia, Proboscidea) is contrasted with the cumulate type (in Rodents, Insectivora, Hyracoidea, Primates, Chiroptera), in which the placenta is formed by the heaping-up or thickening of the * La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 379-425 (7 pls.). + Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 232-4. t Op. cit., cxli. (1905) pp. 908-10. § Tom. cit., pp. 910-12. || Proc. Roy. Soc., lxxvi. No. B 511 (1905) pp. 393-4. 284 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO trophoblast layer, among the cells of which accumulation extravasated maternal blood circulates. The Carnivora are perhaps intermediate, and the sheep’s placenta is at that end of the series of plicate forms which closely approaches the cumulate type. The elephant’s placenta at half term and at full term closely approaches that of the sheep, but that of Hyraz is typically cumulate. Ferments of the Placenta.*—Charrin and Goupil adduce some facts which suggest that the placenta has a glandular function. It can re- tain and modify various substances, or continue processes elsewhere begun. There is evidence of a glycolytic substance (forming alcohol from glucose) and also of a proteolytic fermentation. Amnion-Invagination in the Formation of Chick’s Lens.,—Aurel von Szilly notes that in many cases during the formation of the lens- vesicle there is an invagination of a small portion of the amnion. The same was also noticed in connection with the development of the auditory vesicle. Pre-Oral Gut in Bird Embryos.{—Giunio Salvi has made a detailed study in many birds of that part of the anterior gut which precedes the formation of the stomodzum, and is known as the pre-oral gut. Double Embryo of Florida Alligator.s—Albert M. Reese describes what is probably a unique case, the occurrence of two embryos in the egg of the alligator. The egg was of the usual size; the yolk was single and of the usual size ; the two embryos were entirely distinct, but lay so close together that their vascular areas were flattened against each other. About 15 pairs of mesoblastic somites were visible, and the neural canal was practically inclosed. Double Embryo of a Lizard.||—J. J. Tur describes a double- embryo in a Javanese lizard (Mabwma multifasciata), which apparently arose from a common blastoderm with two gastrula-invaginations, probably far separate though included in one area pellucida. Giant Tadpoles.f—Emil Yung describes some giant tadpoles of Rana esculenta, collected in August from a quiet shallow part of the Aire, near Geneva. Not only were they unusually large, but the intes- tine was unusually long in proportion to the body. While tadpoles hatched artificially had an intestine 122 mm. in length (8°62 times the length of the body), the giant tadpoles had an intestine 235°8 mm. in length (12°71 times the length of the body). Similar figures are given for different stages. The author thinks that the length of the intestine is mainly related to the volume and weight of the nutritive contents of the gut. The giant tadpoles had the intestine absolutely filled with the rich mud of their habitat. * Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 595-7. + Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 231-4 (4 figs.). ¢ Atti Soc. Toscana Sci. Nat. Pisa, xxi. (1905) pp. 83-158 (1 pl., 22 figs.). § Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 229-31 (1 fig.). || Arbeit. Zootom. Lab. Warschau Univ., xxxiii. (1904) pp. 1-35 (1 pl. and 33 figs.) (Russian.) See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 117-18. q Arch. Sci. Phys. Nat., xx. (1905) pp. 595-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 285 Development of Pancreas in Discoglossus pictus.*—Empedocle Goggio gives a full account of the early development of the pancreas in this anurous Amphibian. It takes its origin from three primordia, one dorsal to the intestine, the others disposed laterally at the region of the liver. The history of these primordia, e.g. the fusion of the dorsal with the right ventral, is traced. Viviparous Frog.t—G. Tornier describes Pseudophryne vivipara sp. n., from German Kast Africa, which is interesting in being the only known viviparous frog, and also inasmuch as the other species of the genus are recorded from Australia. In the enlarged lower ends of the oviducts there were 30-37 almost fully formed young frogs, with head and mouth of the definitive form, with conical legs of considerable size, with the anus between and above the hind legs, with a large mass of still unused yolk in the body cavity, with a long cylindrical tail not adapted as a locomotor organ. Influence of Light on Pigmentation of Amphibian Ova and Larve.{—Oskar Schultze has made numerous experiments bearing on this interesting question. In the case of Rana esculenta, Triton teniatus, and Salamandra maculata, subjected to different sets of rays, he found no demonstrable influence on the development or condition of the larvee. Eggs of Rana fusca, R. esculenta, and Bufo cinereus reared in com- plete darkness showed no deviation from the normal, either as regards length of development or degree of pigmentation, but larval salamanders kept in the light showed a progressive decrease in the darkness of the pigmentation. Schultze admits that in certain cases the illumination has undoubtedly an influence on pigment formation, but in general it must be said that the formation of pigment is so intimately bound up with the hereditary constitution that there is no dependence on the degree of illumination. Urogenital System of Elasmobranchs.§—I. Borcea has made a detailed embryological and anatomical study of the urogenital system in representative types of Elasmobranchs, and shows that there is no hiatus between Anamnia and Amniota in the evolution of this system in the vertebrate series. We cannot do more than refer to a few points to which the author directs special attention: the distinction between segmental canal and renal canaliculus; the significance of islands of lymphoid tissue found in some types alternating with the segments of the kidney ; the participation of the primary ureter in the formation of the terminal part of the segmental canals and of the renal canaliculi, - and in the formation of the definitive ureter ; the differences in the two sexes and the modifications associated with sexual maturity ; the necessity of distinguishing (@) the glandular portion composed of secretory canals (segmental canals or renal canaliculi derived therefrom), and (0) an efferent portion formed by the primary ureter and _ its derivatives ; these two portions have a distinct origin though they both * Atti Soc. Toscana Sci. Nat. Pisa, xxi. (1905) pp. 33-48 (1 pl.). + SB. k. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, xxxix. (1905) pp. 855-7. t Op. cit., xlii.—xliv. (1905) pp. 917-28 (2 figs.). § Arch. Zool. Expér., iv. (1906) pp. 199-484 (2 pls., 103 figs.). 286 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO arise as evaginations from the same part of the mesoderm. Three types of kidney development are represented by Acanthias, Scyllium, and Raia. Inheritance of Coat-Colour in Rats.*—L. Doncaster gives the results of experiments which dealt chiefly with the power of albinos to transmit colour or pattern when mated with coloured individuals, and with the nature and relations of certain of Crampe’s types of colour. Albino rats are not all similar in constitution; some carry the determinant for brown, others black, and others, again, both brown and black. So also with pattern ; some carry the piebald character, some the “ self” (or “ Irish”). There seems to be no doubt that the brown forms (Crampe’s types 1, 2, 3) correspond exactly with the similar black forms 7,6, and 5, but are less simple to work with, since they may contain recessive black. A point of some interest is the great diversity of different litters from the same pair. Where enough offspring are reared the results are in fair accord with Mendelian expectation, but in indi- vidual litters this is often far from being true. Large numbers of young, therefore, must be reared from each pair before the true pro- portions are known with any accuracy. b. Histology. Intercellular Bridges and Leucocyte-Paths.t—Fr. Reinke discusses the connection between intercellular bridges (and gaps) in epithelium and the paths of migratory leucocytes. It may be that in cases like the epithelium of an amphibian gill-plate, the epithelial cells were directly in contact and formed a syncytium, and that the cells were first separated by the immigration of leucocytes. Bridges and gaps were thus formed as secondary results—as ‘“‘ paths of wandering cells.” Increased lymph pressure, associated with vigorous growth, would help. Indeed, three factors must be recognised : (1) the wandering cells, (2) the pressure of the lymph stream, and (3) the contraction of the protoplasm. The role of tropisms must be recognised : “ epitheliophily ” between epithelial cells brings about a syncytium ; epitheliophily on the part of leucocytes brings about immigration ; ‘“ leucocytophoby” on the part of the epi- thelial cells induces “cytochorism”; and, finally, there is a “ karyo- phoby ” between the leucocytes and the epithelial nuclei. Human Epiderm Cells.t —H. Schridde describes a remarkably regular arrangement of the protoplasmic fibres connecting the different cell layers of the human epidermis. These fibres, diagrammatically represented, are in the form of an ellipse in the lower layers, and more nearly circular towards the surface. At the points of crossing in the deeper layers there is no thickening, but in the more closely situated surface layers there is. Here, also, in the middle of the section of the protoplasmic fibres in the intercellular spaces, occur knob-like enlarge- ments, the ‘‘ Ranvierschen Knétchen.” Incidentally, it is noted that the cerato-hyalin of the stratum granulosum frequently occurs in a clearly * Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc., xiii. (1906) pp. 215-28. + Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 369-78 (3 figs.). $ Arch. Micr. Anat., lxvii. (1905) pp. 291-301 (1 pl., 3 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 287 rhombic crystalline-like form ; whether actual crystals are present is not certain. Infundibulum in Fishes.*—Fr. A. Gemelli has made an histological study of the infundibular region in lamprey, sturgeon, salmon, and carp. His most important point is that the nervous lobe of the hypophysis is in these forms most definitely separated off from the glandular lobe, and shows in its minute structure a remarkable approximation to sensory structures such as epiphysis and olfactory mucous membrane. The possibility of its being in part a sensory organ is suggested. Rod-like Gland Cells in Fishes are Sporozoa.t—H. Laguesse main- tains that the “ Stabchendrtisenzellen”’ described in various organs of fishes by Marianne Plehn are really Sporozoa. Thélohan and Laguesse described the occurrence of these parasites in many fishes in 1892, and Laguesse named one of them (in-1895) Rhabdosphora thélohani. Endocellular Nets in Ganglion Cells.{—G. A. Jiiderholm asserts that the statements of Donaggio, Cajal, etc., that the neurofibrils form nets in the ganglion cells (especially motor cells), is untenable. He has investigated the subject, and finds that different results are obtained by different methods of fixation. The method which gives figures nearest to the actual condition of the cells is that of Bethe. Nerves of Auditory Organ in Petromyzon fluviatilis.§s—R. Krause describes the relations of the nerve-endings in the neuro-epithelium, the minute structure of the hair-cells of the crista and macula, and discusses the homology of these hair-cells and ciliate cells, between which he recognises many agreements. Study of Cartilage.||—.Josef Schaffer continues his study of the different forms of cartilage. He describes in detail the cartilaginous tissue in Myzine glutinosa, and the cartilage-like vesicular support- ing tissue in the same animal. Reference is also made to the hard cartilage-tissue in lampreys, and there are some notes on the mor- phology of the skull in the hag. Secretion in Liver Cells.{—E. Wace Carlier discusses the process of secretion of ferments by the liver cells of the white rat, and describes some of the changes observable in the cells during digestion. The liver cells are called upon twice during the period of digestion to produce ferments ; the first secretion of zymogen (15 minutes after the com- mencement of a meal) is purely psychic in origin and perhaps reflex ; the second secretion commences in about an hour after complete re- covery from the effects of psychic stimulation (between the fifth and sixth hour after feeding) ; the amount of the second secretion, and the time required to recover from it, depend entirely on the nature of the food ; the liver cells work as producers of ferment in relays ; vacuo- * Journ. de l’Anat. Physiol., xlii. (1906) pp. 77-86 (1 pl.). t+ Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 414-16. $} Arch. Mikr. Anat., xvii. (1905) pp. 103-23 (2 pls.). § SB. k. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, xlviii. (1905) pp. 1015-32. "|| Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xxx. (1905) pp. 155-258 (3 pls.), q La Cellule, xxii. (1905) pp. 431-56 (2 pls.). 288 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lation, often excessive, occurs in the liver cells immediately after re- covery from psychic secretion: it is chiefly due to the presence of glycogen in the cells; the precipitate produced in the cytoplasm by fixing reagents varies somewhat with the nature of the food; changes described as due to poisons are in some cases merely normal changes due to functional activity. c. General. Photogenic Marine Animals.*—W. ©. M‘Intosh notes that since he gave his British Association Address, sixteen years ago, on the phos- phorescence of: marine animals, noteworthy progress has been made only in two departments—(1) as regards the role of photogenic bacteria, and (2) in the extension of our knowledge of luminous fishes. As a general rule, phosphorescence in marine animals shows itself under four conditions, three of which are connected with structure :— 1. The animals present special cells which, under certain circum- stances, secrete a phosphorescent mucus. 2. The special cells produce light without mucus or other visible secretion. 3. The animals emit light under the action of the nervous system without special differentiation of the tissues. 4, The phosphorescence is due to photogenic bacteria. The author in his luminous lecture gives a wealth of examples of these various kinds of “ phosphorescence.” Pelagic Animals.t—C. Apstein has written a little book for travellers giving an account of the open-sea animals and their distribution, dealing also with the colour of the sea, phosphorescence, and the like. Genesis of Protoplasmic Motion and Excitation.{—T. Brailsford Robertson sketches a theory. Loeb and others have shown that proteids take up ions to form a loose compound (ion-proteid), These ion-proteid molecules must always be breaking down, and there must be a number of free ions in any protoplasmic body, and therefore a difference of potential between it and its medium. If changes in surface tension take place, movements must follow, but since the number of free ions in a protoplasmic body must always be changing, or subject to change, the surface tension must also change. This mode of accounting for movements is used to interpret gal- vanotaxis, chemotaxis, muscle-contraction, plant movements, etc. “ It is probably capable of explaining the whole of the vast complex of facts which have been gathered together under the head of phenomena of con- tractility and irritability.” Activity of the Isolated Heart.s—M. Lambert finds that by using Ringer’s fluid the excised heart of the frog may be readily kept spon- taneously beating for five days. The chief cause of arrest in such cases * Zoologist, x. (1906) pp. 1-20. t+ Das Tierleben der Hochsee. Kiel (1905) 115 pp., 174 figs. See also Zool. Zentralbl.. xiii. (1906) pp. 160-1. ¢ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Australia, xxix. (1905) pp. 1-56. § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 597-9. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 289 is the exhausting of reserves, and it seems likely that the beating could be sustained longer with a still more suitable—aseptic and nutritive— fluid. Physiology of the Pancreas.*—-H. G. Chapman has made a number of experiments leading to the following conclusions. Secretins from the Echidna; Wallaby, Australian water-tortoise, and Ibis, are active upon the dog in causing a flow of pancreatic juice. Secretin does not appear to cause pancreatic secretion in the Echidna. The flow of pancreatic juice produced by pilocarpine is inhibited by atropine, while the flow produced by secretin is not so inhibited. Stimulation of the vagus nerve does not inhibit the secretion due to secretin. The pressure under which the fluid is secreted in the pancreatic duct is equivalent to 9 inches of the juice. Pancreatic juice may be activated by leucocytes so that it acts upon proteids. Nature of the Thymus.t—Ph. Stohr maintains that the thymus is from beginning to end an epithelial organ, just like a salivary gland. It is no cradle of leucocytes, as some have tried to show. Rare Abnormality in Man.{—Gaetano Cutore describes in a man of fifty-eight the rare abnormality known as “ Perobrachius achirus.” The left arm was greatly reduced, and showed a complete absence of the bones of the carpus, metacarpus, and phalanges. Vestige of Notochord in Skull of Centetes.s — W. Leche calls attention to a strand-like structure which occurs in the adult skull of Centetes ecuudatus in the median line in a ventral groove in the anterior portion of the basisphenoid and posterior portion of the presphenoid in front of the pituitary fossa. The vesicular supporting tissue and the facts of development appear to Leche to make it clear that in Centetes (and also in Hriculus) there is even in the adult skull a persistent vestige of the notochord. New Species of Orycteropus.||— Hinar Lénnberg describes Orycte- ropus ertkssoni from Northern Congo, and has been able to throw new light on the peculiar teeth. It seems that the crowns are rudimentary, and are in a short time completely worn off. The functional teeth are thus the homologues of the roots of former teeth and of the roots of normal mammalian teeth. Thus “the seemingly insurmountable barriers derived from the dentary system of the Tubulidentata, which appeared to exclude them from all other Mammalia, are broken down to a reasonable height.” It does not seem impossible that the ancestors of the Tubulidentata are to be found among the Condylarthra or some related types of early mammals. Aquatic Genus of Muride.J—Oldfield Thomas describes Anotomys leander g. et sp. n., from Ecuador, which is evidently closely allied to * Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxx. (1905) pp. 92-100. + SB. Phys. Med. Ges. Wiirzburg, 1905, No. 4, pp. 51-60. } Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 222-9 (2 figs.). § Tom. cit., pp. 235-7 (1 fig.). || Arkiv f. Zool., iii. (1906) No. 3, pp. 1-35 (1 pl. and 12 figs.). q Ann. Nat. Hist., xcvii. (1906) pp. 86-8. June 20th, 1906 U 290 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Ichthyomys. It is less specialised for an aquatic, piscivorous life in shape of brain-case and structure of incisors, but more so in the loss of ear-conch, character of fur, and peculiar build of muzzle. This entire suppression of the external ear-conches is an almost unique character in Muride, the only forms in which it is found being the mole-rats Ellobius and Myospalax (Siphneus). Wild Cat in Ireland.* —R. F. Scharff has collected satisfactory evidence from various sources as to the former existence of wild cats in Ireland. In particular, he has examined a large collection of cat remains from certain caves near Ennis, in County Clare. There can be no doubt, he says, that a wild cat did exist in comparatively recent times in Ireland, which, however, was not identical with the European Felis catus, but with the African Felis ocreata Gmel., which had not a bushy tail. From this species, it would appear, the majority of domestic cats in Ireland have been derived. Original Type of Canide.t—Albertina Carlsson investigates the problem as to whether Otocyon caffer is the original form of the canine race or not. A negative answer is given, and in support of it no less than thirty-two structural facts are adduced to show that it is less primitive than other living Canide. Of features which might be brought forward for the opposite view, seven tooth characters are enumerated. Interlocking of Primary Feathers in Flight.{—C. C. Trowbridge shows that when hawks are killed in coasting flight, a large percentage of the emarginate primaries are found firmly interlocked. The webs show well-defined ‘‘ notches” where the edges of the interlocked webs have rested against one another. The interlocking of the primaries makes the end of the wing more rigid when the wing is employed as an aeroplane in coasting flight, produces a curvature of the wing which gives the bird better control in the air, and keeps the primaries partly extended without muscular exertion on the part of the bird. Relation of Wind to Bird Migration.$—F. Smith describes an unusual flight of sparrow-hawks in Michigan, which appears to have been initiated and whose direction was probably determined by a north-east wind. Antarctic Birds.||W. Eagle Clarke reports on the birds of the South Orkney Islands, etc., collected by W. 8S. Bruce on the ‘Scotia’ Antarctic Expedition. The series of bird-skins is one of the most im- portant ever made in the Antarctic Seas, and, with 143 specimens, represents 16 out of the 18 species now known to frequent the South Orkneys and their vicinity. Some interesting descriptions are given of the penguin rookeries, and of the behaviour of the birds in courtship and in caring for the young. The ringed penguin, hitherto regarded as being nowhere an abundant species, was found to have its metropolis * Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., xxvi. (1906) pp. 1-12 (1 pl.). t+ Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Syst., xxii. (1905) pp. 717-54 (16 figs.). t Amer. Journ. Sci., xxi. (1906) pp. 145-69 (19 figs.). § Bull. Michigan Ornithol. Club, v. (1904) pp. 77-8 (1 fig.). | Ibis, vi. (1906) pp. 145-87 (11 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 291 at the South Orkneys, where the summer population on Laurie Island alone was estimated at not less than one million birds. Among the im- portant results we may note the finding of the eggs of the familiar Cape petrel (hitherto unknown to science) and of the chicks and young of the ringed penguin (Pygoscelis antarctica) and the snowy petrel (Pagodroma nivea), the remarkable extension of the known range of the Macaroni penguin (Catarrhactes chrysolophus), and of Fregetta melanogaster, which was undoubtedly breeding. There are some beautiful plates by H. Goodchild. Skeleton of Tail in Birds.*— HE. D. van Oort has made a study of the osteology of the tail in representatives of the main orders of birds, and has studied the development in the partridge, the black-headed gull, the moor-hen, and other forms. He discusses the taxonomic value of his results. Semicircular Canals in Birds.t—J. Laudenbach has investigated the semicircular canals in a representative series of birds. They are least developed in swimming birds, best developed in the swallow. Experi- mental as well as anatomical results lead the author to conclude that the degree of development of the semicircular canals is correlated with the precision and nicety of equilibration in flight. Habits of Necturus.t{—Albert C. Eycleshymer has studied Mecturus maculosus Rafinesque. The adults vary from 12-18 in. in length ; the coloration is very variable, and probably can be changed by the in- dividual animal ; the environment to which the animal is best adapted is not known; a casting of the epidermis was observed in winter; the time of egg-laying varies greatly with the temperature; the eggs were first deposited in those localities where the water is shallow, and exposed for the greater part of the day to the sun; the period of egg-laying usually covers two or three weeks; during egg-laying the males are never found with the females, and where they remain is unknown; the period of egg-laying covers many hours, and probably, in some cases, days. Structure of Eye of Frog.§—D. Tretjakoff gives with considerable detail an account of the structure of the anterior region of the frog’s eye. In the triangular chamber are two protractor lens-muscles and two tensors of the choroid. The protractors affect materially the form of the chamber, of the ciliary body, and the vascular distribution of the episcleral net. These vessels are arranged so that the main mass of arterial blood streams to the dorsal section of the annulus pericor- nealis ; the main mass of venous blood flows in the ventral section. The iris of the frog is distinguished by the presence of the “ pupilar knot,” a derivative of the cavity of the eye vesicle; in the adult this contains a thickened modified stroma: in the embryo it is a purely epithelial formation. * Tijdschrift Nederland Dierk. Ver., ix. (1905) pp. 1-144 (5 pls.). + Ber. Kiew Nat. Ges., xvii. See also Physiol. Russe, iv. (1905) p. 64. ~ Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 123-36. § Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., Ixxx. (1906) pp. 327-410 (83 pls. and 19 figs.). U 2 292 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Unity of Gnathostome Type.*—Howard Ayers assumes a hypo- thetical group (Haeckel’s Prospondylia) as the stock from which the Leptocardia and the Archicrania both arose. From the latter are de- veloped all the Craniate forms, which are usually classified in two main divisions, the Cyclostomata and the Gnathostomata. But in 1894 the author showed that the so-called tongue apparatus of the Cyclostomes, particularly the Myxinoids, was developed by a transformation of the maxillo-mandibular apparatus of some Gnathostome ancestor. Other reasons strengthen his conviction that al the Craniata are Gnatho- stomes, and that the only living Acraniate is Amphioxrus. Ichthyological Notes.;—T. Wemyss Fulton describes two young conger-eels in the Leptocephalus-stage from the Moray Firth—rarities in British seas ; a larval /verasfer from the North Sea—another rarity ; a sting-ray (7rygon pastinacea) from the Dornoch Firth—a-very rare fish in Scottish waters ; and a pilchard from the Moray Firth which is equally rare. He notes that the sprat shed at least 5000 eggs, but it is one of the least fecund of fishes, and, so far as is known, the least. fecund of all fishes whose eggs are_pelagic. He reports an albino plaice in which pigment was almost entirely absent; it lived for about a year, and differed from its neighbours in clinging to the side of the hatching- box close to the surface of the water. A reversed action of the gill- cover in plaice is also recorded. Vendaces of British Lakes.|—C.T. Regan describes Coregonus vandesius from Lochmaben, and (. gracilior sp. n. from Derwentwater and Bassenthwaite lakes, Cumberland. The former, which by some authors is united with C. albula of Northern Europe, can be separated from its nearest continental allies by several distinctive features. C. gracilior, though closely allied to the Lochmaben form, is by no means identical with it. South American Cichlide.§—C. T. Regan completes his account of the American Cichlide in the British Museum. The paper consists of a revision of the genera Cichla, Chetobranchus, and Chetobranchopsis, and includes a synopsis of all the genera of the family, together with a discussion of their distribution and probable relationships. Dentition of Characinoid Genus Piabuca.|—W. S. Rowntree calls attention to certain interesting features in the dentition of this genus. The teeth are of singular beauty, being arranged in uniform series, and having spatulate crescentic crowns edged with minute gold-tipped serra- tions. Two points of some significance which have not been appreciated by other observers, are the existence of additional teeth not in series with the others, and the presence of teeth in the maxilla as well as in the premaxilla. In respect of this latter condition, Piabuca occupies a somewhat central position in the Characinide, in which family all inter- mediate stages are now shown to exist between the presumably primitive * Amer. Nat., xl., (1906) pp. 75-94. + Fishery Board for Scotland, Report 22, part iii. (1904) pp. 281-7 (1 pl.). t~ Ann. Nat. Hist., xcviii. (1906) pp. 180-2 (1 pl.). § Tom. cit., pp. 230-9. || Tom. cit., pp. 240-3 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 293 condition in which the maxilla bears teeth throughout its length, and that where the maxilla is toothless, and so reduced as to be practically excluded from the gape. Notes on Loricariid Fishes.*—C. T. Regan finds that Plecostomus horridus Kner., is probably P. tenuicaudata Steind. ; it is certainly dis- tinct from P. emarginatus C. and V. gee the first formula being applicable when the posterior focus of the objective is behind the posterior face ; the second, when it is in front of it, which happens when the objectives are somewhat strong. If the magnifying power P be defined as on a previous occasion, § these formule become P B fie dist Coal * Comptes Rendus, cxli. (1905) pp. 1004-6. t+ Archives d’Anatomie Micr., 1904, pp. 274, 285. See also this Journal, 1905, p. 500. t Tom. cit., p. 298. See also this Journal, 1905, p. 500. § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 773-5. | Soc. de Biologie, viii. (July 15 and Dec. 10, 1904). See also Archives d’Anatomie Micr., 1904, p. 270; and this Journal, 1905, p. 500. | Comptes Rendus, Noy. 27 and Dec. 11, 1904. See also this Journal, 1905, 500. Pp. 364 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 3. Lastly, as the power is also the enlargement produced at unit distance from the posterior focus of the objective, it can be evaluated directly by determining the position of this posterior focus (i.e. the foco- facial posterior distance), then by measuring the enlargement produced at a decimetre further, or at any other unit of distance. The author gives a sample table of results obtained with a certain number of objectives of different strengths. Cheap Glass Lenses.*—A cheap and simple way of obtaining large lenses suitable for photographic and such-like work, is to form a combination of ordinary watch, or clock glasses, with water or other suitable liquid. Two glasses, whose edges must be well ground so as to fit well when placed in contact, are dipped into the liquid and removed, filled with it, as a whole. The edges are then wiped dry, and moistened with water-glass, which, helped with a little hydrochloric acid, sets quite hard, so that the “lens” can be freely handled. This process is assisted by the use of a peculiar brush, having two pencils on one shaft. As this brush is passed round the periphery, the front pencil wipes off the superfluous fluid, and the following pencil applies the water-glass. By means of a glass disk and a watch-glass, a plano-convex lens can be made, and several other forms are possible. BERGER, E.—Ueber das bei meiner binokularen Lupe verwendete Linsen-system. Deutsche Mech. Zeit., 1905, p. 155. Brass, A.—Die Linsenfassungen. [Discusses several errors sometimes made in lens-mounts, and emphasises the necessity of lamp-blacking their inner sur- faces. ] Central. Zeit. Opt. Mech., xxvii. (1906) pp. 15-17 (10 figs.) op », Die Zusammensetzung von Linsensystemen. [A popular explanation of certain principles. ] Tom. cit., Nos. 4-7, pp. 31-3 (2 figs.). (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. A New Application of the Abbe Condenser.t — F. K. Studniéka reminds his readers that the Abbe condenser presents a real, reversed image of the source of illumination. If an object, such as a micrometer scale, be suitably interposed, an image of this will be similarly formed on the stage, and may be applied to measuring an object there. In this way, by the help of a proportionately stronger objective, a series of magnifications can be obtained which are very convenient for drawing, and for the preparation of various objects. The size of the image formed above the front-lens (viewed from above) of the condenser depends on the distance of the object from the under-lens; the image is smaller as the distance is increased. Thus it will be seen that the series of magnified images thrown on to the stage will vary from zero toa maximum. This image can be combined with various powers of objective, eye-piece and tube-length, and thus the series of attainable effects is practically infinite—although only observations in the middle of the field will be free from sensible distortion. Instead of the con- denser, weak achromatic objectives might be used. A difficulty would, * Central. Zeit. f. Opt..u. Mech., xxvi. (1905) pp. 261-2. t+ SB. k. Bohm. Gesell. der Wiss., 1905 (iv.) 4 pp. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 365 no doubt, lie in the construction of a suitable adjustable stage for the object ; the author, however, sees his way to a proper design. He sum- marises the advantages of this proposal as :— 1. The facility for orientating objects which can be afterwards. examined in the usual way. 2. The formation of graduated magnifications by which an operator who wishes to draw from a weak magnification can easily select the most suitable power. . 3. The property possessed by the Abbe (thus used) in combination with an objective of forming an erect image. 4, If a plane mirror be used, and the object inserted between the light-source and the mirror, an erect Microscope becomes virtually a horizontal one, and may thus be used, for example, as an aquarium microscope. 5. As the magnification may be zero, the arrangement may be: applied to the drawing of objects in their natural size. Post-Objective Stop.*— At the March Meeting, J. W. Gordon exhibited a new form of post-objective stop for the Microscope, an illustration of which is now given (fig. 46), together with a description of the various parts. Fia. 46. Cell carrying the mercury globule which forms the stop. . Pivot on which the cell-carrying arm swings. Excentric for swinging the arm, and so giving a transverse travers- ing adjustment to the stop. . Propelling screw for giving a longitudinal traversing motion to the pivot B and so to the stop. . Supporting screw for adjusting the height of the swinging arm and of the stop carried by it. . Mounting ring, provided with a set screw, for clamping the fitting to the draw-tube of the Microscope. obo OW Use of the Cooper-Hewitt Lamp as a Source of Monochromatic Light.t—C. Fabry and H. Buisson warmly recommend this lamp, which is on the principle of an electric arc in mercury vapour. Its spectrum resembles that of the older mercury vapour lamps. The light is fixed, * See this Journal, 1906, pp. 157-60. + Comptes Rendus, cxlii. pp. 784-5. 366 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO and of uniform intrinsic luminosity. The yellow and green rays are fine enough to give interferences observable to a difference in step of 22 cm.—i.e. in the neighbourhood of the number of order 400,000. The old form of mercury arc (Perot-Fabry model) gives almost the same result immediately after hghting. But, after a few minutes’ action, probably in consequence of vapour-heating, the rays widen out, and the limit of interference falls almost to half of its primitive value. In the Cooper-Hewitt, on the contrary, the first state is indefinitely maintained. The yellow rays give especially clean interferences, and the phenomena of disparition, or of successive doubling when the two rays are simulta- neously employed, are observable to very great differences of step. The fact that the lamp is constructed for industrial purposes is found to be an advantage. Davis, D. J. A.—A Method of Microscopic Observation by means of Lateral Illumi- nation. Trans. Chicago Pathol. Soc., vi. (1904) p. 90. GRE1L—Beleuchtungsapparate mit Nernstchem Glihlicht. Anat. Anzeig., Ergdnzungsh., xxv. (1904) p. 178. KaLxXHNeE, A.—Ueber das Woodsche Lichtfilter fiir ultraviolette Strahlen. Phys. Zeitschr. vy. (1904) p. 415. Puiicer, A.—Die Quecksilberlampe als ultraviolette Lichtquelle. Tom. cit., p. 414. Anon.—Vorrichtung zum Wechseln der Bilder im Projektionsapparat. Deutsche Mechan. Zeit., 1905, p. 127. (5) Microscopical{Optics and Manipulation. Ultramicroscopy of Oleosole.*-—J. Schneider and J. Just have been investigating the appearances presented, when viewed by ultramicroscopic methods, by finely divided particles of gold and other noble metals in a viscous, yet completely homogeneous, transparent, and combustible fluid. For this purpose fats and ethereal oils were treated with chlorides of the metals, and the products of reaction ultramicroscopically studied. The authors summarise their conclusions as follows :— 1. The ultramicroscope is adapted to the determination of the identity and purity of oils and to the testing of oil-mixtures. 2. The oils are tested with the ultramicroscope after they have been surrounded with oleosole of the noble metals by means of their reactions with compounds of the latter. 3. In the ultramicroscopic study observation was made of the points and groups sparsely aggregated in the whole cone ; the determination of the diameter of the interference rings produced by any slight alteration of the fine-adjustment ; the especial examination of ringless or ringed points and groups, with and without the analyser. 4, In the examinations made of commercial oils the various forms assumed by the fat, as distinct from the oil, under the ultramicroscope were a distinct hindrance to the observation of the metal particles ; the use of ultramicroscopes with heating arrangements were necessary for further work. 5. The effect of the reaction is affected by many circumstances, * Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 481-530, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 367 especially by the solution-medium, temperature, movement, time, and quantity of oil. Light-influence was only observed in the case of silver. 6. The best results were obtained in the ultramicroscopical tests of oils after reaction with gold chloride. In the case of amicroscopic particles there was a reddening; a blue colouring resulted with sub- microscopic and microscopic particles, combining into a_ blue-black precipitate ; a yellow coloration followed with other submicroscopic and microscopic particles, which combined into a shimmering and gleaming golden mass. One form only, or two, or all three together can be met with. 7. From silver solutions either amicroscopic particles precipitated, causing a blue colour of the cone, or submicroscopic and microscpic particles. With the silver reduction, moreover, the reaction with the sulphur contained in many oils gives cone-coloration by reason of the amicroscopic particles. 8. In reactions with ruthenium chloride the result is either a yellow or a red cone-colouring with the amicroscopic particles, or the sub- microscopic and microscopic particles segregate themselves. 9. Tests with osmic acid and with platinum chloride gave no practi- cally useful results, and other more favourable conditions for reaction and test are to be sought. 10. The desired connection of the ultramicroscopical condition with a property expressible in figures or a quantitative reaction was not found, and the question, how fine is the emulsion of which an oil is capable - with a given reagent under existing conditions, still remains open. A Simple Method for the Determination of the Refraction-Index of Liquids.*—A. Pauly shows how this quantity can be found without costly apparatus and from a small quantity of fluid. The equation on which the calculation is based is : we n= /& sin? V + w? cos? V where w and & are respectively the major and minor semi-axes of the ellipsoid of rotation, the refractive index, and V the angle between the radius vector and the major axis. In calcite the principal refractive indices (with sodium light, w,,) are w,,=1°6585, &,=1°4864 ; all indices between these values lie on the ellipse. If then a section be taken parallel to the principal axis, all intermediate indices can be calcu- lated if the angle of inclination of the ray be determined. A drop of the fluid under investigation is placed on the calcspar plate and under a coverglass. The polariser is then applied to determine the angle of rotation. The ray through the Nicol now passes in a known direction, and only the refractive index parallel to this direction is effective, and, as the fluid is isotropic, it is the same in all directious. The object-stage with this preparation is rotated until the inequalities of the upper plane or the limits of the periphery disappear. Let A be the angle read off on the circumference of the object-stage at the disappearance of the inequalities, and let B be the reading when the inequalities again dis- * Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 344-8 (1 fig.). 368 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO appear after continued rotation. Then V=4 (A -B) is the angle which the desired refractive index forms with the principal index. The index can also be found graphically when a series of determinations has been made. In this case a curve is drawn whose horizontal co-ordinates give n at intervals from 0°01—0°01, and the vertical co-ordinates give the angle V at intervals of 10°. Intermediate values would be read off in the usual way. The author gives some tables of results. Microscopical Axial-angle Determination of very small Crystals.* E. Sommerfeldt, after describing some of the methods bearing on this subject, recommends as a simple mode the insertion of a scale in a suitable place under the object-stage and parallel to it. This should be used with Lasaulx method, and then both images and scale are well defined. The firm of Fuess has, at the author’s suggestion, connected this scale with a condenser, which consists of three plano-convex lenses, the lowest of which carries the scale on its plane-face. The condenser is so calculated that a scale thus placed is sharply defined in the axial image. | Ultramicrescopical Investigations upon the Colours of Rock Salt.t—H. Siedentopf points out (1) that it is possible to colorise perfectly colourless specimens of rock salt by a process of heating in a vacuum tube in the presence of sodium or potassium vapour (Heraens), and (2) that it is possible by a process of ionisation to affect the colour of a coloured specimen, or impart a tint to a colourless one (Goldstein, Becquerel, Holzknecht, and others). This latter process, however, only seems to produce a surface effect. Siedentopf adopts the method of Heraens by which six or eight rectangular prisms of perfectly clear and clean rock salt, about 10 by 5 by 3 mm., were placed in a completely vacuous combustion tube, and heated for some time to 600° C., so as to render the crystal entirely water-free. By means of a distillation tube consisting of several bulbs united by capillaries, sodium or potassium was distilled over into the presence of the heated rock salt until about a cubic centimetre, with a bright gleaming surface, was adjacent to the crystals. Special care was taken that the surfaces of the crystals should not be soiled with alkali vapour. The evacuation was once more performed, hydrogen at reduced pressure introduced, and the special preparation tube melted off. Fig. 47 shows this preparation tube as supplied by Carl Zeiss.t Its use will be readily understood from the foregoing. The heating is most conveniently done in one of Heraens’ vertical electric furnaces, which should be maintained at a constant temperature of about 50-80° below the boiling point of the alkali-metal. This would be about 680° C. in the case of sodium, and about 590° C. for potassium. This temperature is an optimum, for, at a lower tem- perature, too little alkali vapour would be produced, and, at a higher * Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxii. (1905) pp. 356-62 (4 figs.). ¢ Ultramikroskopisch Untersuchungen iiber Steinsalzfarbungen. Verhand. der Deutschen Physikal. Gesell., vii., No. 1421 (1905); also as a separate tract under above title. Braunschweig, Vieweg & Sohn. } Special circular, Priparatenréhre zur Herstellung optischer Resonatoren aus metallischen Natrium im Steinsalzkristallen. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 369 temperature, the alkali vapour re-distils out of the salt whereby the crystal is decolorised. The temperature is also limited by the melting point of the salt (about 800°), and by the bending temperature of the combustion tube (about 700°). After the heating the preparation tube is taken out.of the furnace and allowed to cool in a vertical position in order to avoid external smearing of the coloured crystals with alkali vapour. The excess of alkali settles down in the trough-shaped bottom of the tube. After cooling, the tube is carefully snapped off, without breaking the crystals, which are then rapidly rinsed with water and dilute hydrochloric acid and then dried. For microscopic examination, the preparation is then ready; but for ultramicroscopic in- vestigation they must, on two adjacent surfaces, be polished as carefully as possible free from scratches and the polished surfaces made permanent by means of cover- glasses cemented on. The ultramicroscopical examination is performed by the usual apparatus, and Siedentopf concludes that rock salt coloration is essentially due to separation of ultra- microscopic metallic sodium crystalline particles, mostly needle- or flat-shaped, and partly pleochroitic, which are irregularly distributed within the ultramicroscopic cleavage planes and which vary from cubic centimetre to cubic centimetre of the crystal. He gives his reasons in full for his conclusions, re- jects the hypothesis of sub-chloride formations, and refers to the phenomenon of electric resonance previously noted by W. Wood.* The author adds a coloured plate comparing the results of artificial and natural colorisation as furnished by his ultramicroscopical analysis. Sco oo oes SS SSS < Soo Se es 2 oS aoe Some Simple Questions on the Images of Microscopes and Tele- scopes.t—At a recent meeting of the Physical Society, W. B. Croft stated that: “It may have been noticed that when a Microscope is focused visually, an image is formed on the focusing-glass of a camera, into which the microscopic eye-piece is inserted after removing the camera-lens. This image remains more or less in focus at variable positions of the camera-screen. Although it is not always perhaps true, yet it is surprising how often the pencil emerging from a Microscope eye-piece behaves like a single concentrated line of light. A mounting of the proboscis of a fly was focused visually, then a camera was put on the end of the Microscope, and the screen was racked out to six positions over a range of about 6 in. At these positions six photographs were taken, of which the two’ smallest pictures were inferior to the others. It was claimed that this defect was due to imperfect exposure and uneven illumination. If the visual focusing had made pencils slightly diverging instead of parallel, the larger pictures should have been the more imperfect. These pictures were obtained with a 1-in. objective. * Phil Mag. (6) iii. (1902) p. 396. ¢ Proc. Phys. Soc. London, April 27, 1906. June 20th, 1906 B 370 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Next, a diatom, Ziceratium favus, was photographed with a i-in.-. objective. With a visual focusing two photographs at different distances. were taken ; these were similar to one another and to what was seen. The same diatom then had a slightly different visual focusing, with the same result as before in the two pictures. Finally, two diatoms with fine markings were focused visually and at two positions ; the markings. came out clearly in the photograph. The object of showing the results was not to make out that the emergent pencil was ever actually, or always approximately, a single line of light, but to intimate how often the author had found, when projecting from an optical eye-piece, that no change can be detected in the definition of the image as the screen of the camera is moved. If a camera-lucida is placed on the eye-piece, the image of a stage-micrometer can be thrown on a scale at 10 in. distance or at 40 in. distance. The parallel rays emerging from the eye-piece give the image of a point along a direction, at no definite position. The image can be imagined at 40 in. distance as easily as 10 in.” Mr. Croft also showed some photographs taken from sections of the: human eye ; he indicated that a divergent pencil from a small aperture or from a convex reflecting surface of large curvature will give the Purkinje figures as bright radiating lines, whereas the usual method of sending light through the side of the sclerotic gives them as shadows. Brass, A.—Grundesetze der Optik. [This treatise is continued and concluded.] Central. Zeit. Opt. Mech., xxvi. Nos. 20-4 (Oct. 15 to Dec. 15, 1905). KERBER, A.—Zur Theorie der schiefer Biischel (Zweiter Beitrag). Zeit. f. Instrumentenk., xxv. (1905) pp. 342-3.. M8tyER—Das Ultramikroskop. Band i., No. 1.. PrytTz, K.—Mikroskopische Bestimmung der Lage einer spiegelnden Flache. [The principle of this method is optical contact. It was noticed in this: Journal for 1905, p. 756.] Tom. cit., pp. 386-7. See also Ann. d. Physik, xvi. (1905) p. 735.. WILSING, J.—Ueber die Zweckmassigste Wahl der Strahlen gleicher Breunweite: bei Achromatischen Objektiven. ; [Discusses the theory of complete achromatism, and describes several kinds. of glass whose constants would lend themselves to such a result.] Tom. cet., pp. 41-8.. (6) Miscellaneous. Quekett Microscopical Club.—At the 430th ordinary meeting of the Club, held on April 20, Mr. F. P. Smith brought forward two papers —“ JOURN.R.MICR.SOC.19 O6.P1. XIV. ry O al <— 2 5 5) 5a, FR.Dixon-Nuttall del.ad nat West, Newman lith. South African Rotifers. JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. AUGUST, 1906. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. IX.—Contribution to our Knowledge of the Rotifera of South Africa. By CHarLes F, RoussELET, Curator and F.R.M.S. (Read March 21, 1906,) Pratses XIV, anp XV, SoutH Africa is the country of big game, big distances, and big things generally, so that very small creatures such as Rotifera have a poor chance of being noticed, and, indeed, seem to have been almost entirely neglected or passed over by naturalists, travellers, and by the Afrikanders themselves—possibly because they do not afford sufficient sport for shooting, or for the line, or because they do not possess skins, or carry horns or tusks which might be nailed on the wall as trophies. And yet the Rotifera form a not incon- siderable part of the fauna of that vast country. The very first mention of a Rotifer in South Africa, as far as I can discover, is contained in a paper published in 1891 by Fleet- Surgeon V. Gunson Thorpe, R.N, (19),* describing a new species, * The numbers in brackets refer to the Bibliography at the end. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV. Fig. 1.—Brachionus furculatus Thorpe. x 130. » 2— 4 bs f Variety with only one posterior spine, x 130. » oe oe a is Variety with reduced spines. x 130. » 4.— p . var. iermis Rousselet. x 150. 3» P re Thorpe. Lorica of male, dorsal side. x 180. 3) 04.— 5 i F » ventral side. x 180. » 6,—Cathypna leontina Turner. x 250. Aug. 15th, 1906 2D 394 Transactions of the Society. Brachionus furculatus, found by him in a pool near Simons Bay, Cape of Good Hope. Then in 1893 the same author, in a short note on the “ Recorded Localities for Rotifera ” (20), mentions the follow- ing additional six species observed by him in South Africa— Philodina citrina Ehrbg. Cape of Good Hope. Brachionus pala Ehrbg. me dorcas Gosse ; urceolaris Ehrbg. a angularis Gosse _,, - Metoyidia solidus. Delagoa Bay. 3) 3) ) ” 2) 9 In 1901 the Hon. Thomas Kirkman, of Natal, published in this Journal a “List of some of the Rotifera of Natal” (11), in which 52 species are enumerated for that Colony, and quite recently the same author has sent a “Second List of Natal Rotifera” (12) to this Society, containing 21 additional species. Lastly, Mr. Wm. Milne, of Cape Colony, published in 1905 a short paper with notes on “Some New South African Floscules”’ (15), mentioning seven species. This is the sum total of the pub- lished accounts of South African Rotifera. Within the last few months Mr. Milne has, at my request, sent me a list of species which he has observed in his district of Uitenhage, and which I have incorporated in the general list of South African species given at the end of this paper. The visit of the British Association for the Advancement of Science to South Africa in the autumn of last year afforded me a welcome opportunity of visiting this interesting country, and of making collections of Rotifera in various and widely separated parts, the results of which are embodied in this paper. I may state at once, however, that several circumstances prevented my search- ing for and collecting as much as I should have desired, so that my results can only be taken as a small contribution to the Rotiferous fauna of these vast regions. In the first place, the time of our arrival in South Africa, August, corresponds with the early spring, when no rain has fallen for many months, and the whole country, except only the south and west coast district, is very dry—all pools, ponds, and even rivers, in the interior are dried up. It was not easy to find suitable collecting grounds, as we visited no lakes or large pieces of water. In the second place, we rushed through the country at a great rate in order to get through the pre-arranged programme on the appointed days, from Capetown to Durban, and from Durban to the Zambesi and Beira, a distance of over 4500 miles, stopping only very few days at the principal towns. Then on arrival anywhere, every hour of the day had been set apart for some function, reception, luncheon, lecture, or visit to battlefields and places of interest. An umbrella being quite unnecessary at The Rotifera of South Africa. By Charles F. Rousselet. 395 this rainless season, I carried my collecting stick everywhere with ‘me, and the net, with bottle attached, in my pocket, so as to be able to take advantage of every opportunity that might present itself, From August 18 to September 17 the greater part of the time was spent in the railway train, which formed our travelling hotel and headquarters, only getting off and staying a few days at Durban, Pietermaritzburg, Johannesburg, Bloemfontein, Kim- berley, Bulawayo and Victoria Falls, and a few hours at Salisbury, Umtali and Beira, being everywhere received with the greatest hospitality. I had taken with me a small folding binocular Micro- scope, but examination of the living material was quite out of the question, as there was absolutely no time or opportunity of doing so, and therefore I preserved the collected material mostly in the train in the following manner. After condensing the Rotifera as much as possible with the net in the usual way, I filled a some- what tall 3-ounce bottle and added a little 25 p.c. formalin and a very few drops of osmic acid; this killed all the animals and sent them to the bottom; after allowing the bottle to stand for half-an- hour, I carefully poured away the clear upper part of the water, and then transferred the remainder with sediment into a smaller bottle, adding again a little of the formalin. When the animals and debris had again settled at the bottom, the subjacent water poured away or removed with a pipette, I filled a small tube bottle with the remainder, and after allowing this to settle once more for half-an-hour I removed half of the clear water with a pipette and filled up the tube bottle with 23 p.c. formalin; thus the contents were finally preserved in about 1 p.c. formalin for examination at home. As this rough method of preservation, the only one available under the circumstances, has given fairly good results, I have described it in detail; of course all the Rotifers are fully con- tracted, but all the forms could readily be identified, and the shape of the loricated forms is well preserved. In the absence of osmic acid, formalin alone, or even alcohol, might be used in the same way. It would, however, be preferable, if time permitted, to narcotise the Rotifers first with a few drops of 1 p.c. solution of 8 Eucaine for a quarter of an hour before killing. The different localities where I was able to collect being situated in widely separated areas, hundreds of miles apart, I will give a separate list of the species found in each locality, which may be useful to future collectors in the same districts. Capetown afforded but a poor opportunity of searching for Rotifers ; the four days we stayed there were spent in attending to the meetings and business of the British Association, and in viewing this beautiful town and country around. Unfortunately, I discovered too late, after I had climbed 3000 feet to the top of 2D 2 396 Transactions of the Society. Table Mountain without my net, that the Capetown water supply is derived from two large reservoirs which have been constructed on the top of the mountain. Having lost my way, and seeing the lake in the distance, I went to a small house near it where I found the keeper, a Dane, who told me that he had lived there with his family in charge of the reservoirs eleven years, and that often in the winter he was snowed up for ten days or a fortnight at a time, Every cloud that passes over Capetown settles on Table Mountain and forms the “Table Cloth”; in consequence of this the plateau and valleys on the top of the mountain are very moist, and covered with vegetation, heathers and brushwood, and I even saw some extensive bogs there from which, no doubt, the Cape- town water derives its slightly brownish tint. From the lakes the water is led by iron pipes into lower reservoirs at the foot of Table Mountain and on the highest ground of the town. One of these is situated close behind the Mount Nelson Hotel, and from it I obtained— Syncheta pectinata Ehrbg. Abundant, Anurea aculeata var, valga Ehrbg, Few. Cladocera were very abundant in this water, and their lively movements astonished the keepers, who informed me that this water was delivered to the town without further filtration. In the garden fountain of the Mount Nelson Hotel I found only— Anurea hypelasma Gosse ; and on the top of Signal Hill, a short distance behind the signal station, from a small cattle-pond I obtained— Hydatina senta Ehrbg. Abundant. Brachionus Bakeri Ehrbg. Abundant. Callidina sp. ? These rather small B. Bakeri vary from the common European form, in having the posterior spines of the lorica turned more or less upwards. The same pond contained a large ciliated Infusorian, in shape like a three-pronged arrow-head, which I believe to be new. The above six species were the only Rotifers observed at Capetown, but I am quite sure that a much greater number could have been found had I had more time and better opportunities. The large ornamental basin in the Public Gardens had just been emptied when I arrived with my net to examine the water, so that I lost this opportunity. Leaving Capetown on the Friday evening, August 18, by train, I arrived in Durban on the following Tuesday morning, August 22, without stopping more than half an hour at any place on the way The Rotifera of South Africa. By Charles F. Rousselet. 397 As the Hon. Thomas Kirkman has been, and still is, working at the Rotifera of Natal, I made no collections either at Durban or Pieter- maritzbure, preferring to leave this field entirely to him, and he has since then sent in a second list of Natal Rotifers, which has been read at our last meeting (7). After -visiting Colenso and Ladysmith, we journeyed to Johannesburg, arriving there on August 28, where we were most hospitably entertained by the inhabitants, and a large number of papers were read in the various sections during our five days’ stay. Here I endeavoured with but little success to find suitable pools or reservoirs of water. I went to a large reservoir of clear water, triangular in shape, walled up on two sides, which, I think, must have been near the City and Suburban Gold Mine. I examined the water in various places, but could see no living creature in it of any kind; looking round, I saw various mountains of white sand from the mines, and, considering that all these refuse heaps had been treated with cyanide of potassium, and that the rainwater flowing down their sides runs into the spruit which feeds this reser- voir, it was not difficult to account for the absence of all animal life in the water. I also tried to reach a town-water reservoir, situated on high ground in the north-east district, but it was closed all round, so that I could not get at the water. Finally, my host kindly sent me for a long drive through the northern suburbs, where I came to a spruit and a farm with a small reservoir of water, and here I found the following species of Rotifers— Syncheta pectinata Ehrbg. Copeus cerberus Gosse. Hydatina senta Ehrbg. Euchlanis oropha Gosse. Metopidia lepadella Ehrbg. August 31 was set aside for an excursion to Pretoria, and there, in the grounds of the Zoological Gardens, I found the aquatic birds’ pond quite green with Huglena viridis, and from its water obtained the following species of Rotifers— Brachionus pala Ehrbg. Abundant. e furculatus Thorpe. Abundant, Metopidia rhomboides Gosse. Brachionus furculatus was a most interesting find, as this large species had not been seen since Fleet-Surgeon Gunson Thorpe (19) first discovered it in Simons Bay in 1890, and it has not yet been recorded from any place outside South Africa. The male was also present in abundance, and I can confirm Surgeon Thorpe’s state- ment that the male has a distinct lorica, spineless, much smaller 398 Transactions of the Society. and different in shape to that of the female (Pl. XIV. fig. 5). All other known Brachionus males are soft bodied, without lorica. The greatest characteristic peculiarity of this species is that the glassy transparent lorica of the female (Pl. XIV. fig. 1) has the two outermost of the six occipital spies greatly prolonged, and further, has two large more or less curved latero-posterior spines. I also found in the water the variety already noted by Surgeon Thorpe, in which the posterior spines are wholly wanting, and the latero-anterior spines reduced in size. The difference in appearance of the two varieties is very striking, and yet they seem to belong to one species, as intermediate forms are found, and even some with only one posterior spine on the left side (PI. XIV. figs. 2,3). I cannot, however, agree with Surgeon Thorpe’s statement that the posterior spines are shed when adult life is reached, for I have seen numerous very young specimens of both varieties, showing that each of them reproduce their own kind; this being so, it will be best to distinguish this spineless variety by a distinctive name, and I propose to call it Brachionus furculatus var. inermis Nn. Var. (Pl. XIV. fig. 4). Subsequently I found rather larger specimens of this species in two places in the Orange River Colony, as mentioned below. Although there is a distant resemblance to 6. Baker and might be confounded with it, B. furculatus does not belong to the B. Bakeri group, the structure of the lorica being of a different type. The sizes of the largest specimens are as follows: Over all, including posterior spines, 578 yw (3); in.), without posterior spines, 340 w (as in.); greatest width, 265 w (4 in.); the female egg, 142 w by 105 w (x45 by ads in.); lorica of male, 142 w (+4; in.); var. “inermis,” length 272 pw (g's in.), width 204 wu (+45 in.). Pl. XIV., figs. 1-5, shows this species and its varieties. From Johannesburg we travelled to Bloemfontein; the Bloem- spruit which traverses the town was dry, and was being excavated and regulated to prevent the repetition of dangerous floods during the rainy season. On September 3 a day excursion to visit the Government Experimental and Stud Farm at Tweespruit, some 58 miles east of Bloemfontein near the Basutoland border, enabled me to make some good collections of Rotifers. Our train stopped for twenty minutes at Sannah’s Post, celebrated through the disastrous Boer surprise attack on an unsuspecting British column on the march in the late war, when seven guns were lost. The Boers were hidden in the dry bed of the Koorn Spruit, a small rivulet and tributary to the Modder river, excavated by water in the level plain and quite invisible at twenty yards’ distance. At the spot where the column intended to cross the spruit and where the fight took place I saw a pool of water in the river bed, which I examined, and found it swarming with Rotifers, water-fleas and pond life generally ; I secured a bottle-full of the condensed water and The Rotifera of South Africa. By Charles F. Rousselet. 399 afterwards obtained therefrom the following ten species of Rotifers— Brachionus furculatus Thorpe. ¢ and 9 abundant. as var. enermis Rousselet. Abundant. quadratus Rousselet. Few. ss angularis Gosse. Few. Syncheta pectinata Ehrbg. Abundant. a tremula Ehrbg. Few. Polyarthra platyptera Ehrbg. Very abundant. Triarthra longiseta Ehrbg. Abundant. Anurcea aculeata var. valga Ehrbg. Abundant. cochlearis Gosse. Few. ” 9 The Tweespruit is a small rivulet which runs through the grounds of the Government Experimental Farm some miles beyond Thaba Nchu, and is a tributary to the Caledon river. It had been dammed up at one spot, but the dam had been damaged and partly washed away; still a large pool of water was left, and from this I obtained the following species of Rotiters— Brachionus furculatus Thorpe. ¢ and ? abundant. re “3 var. inermis Rousselet. Abundant es quadratus Rousselet. # angularis Gosse. Syncheta pectinata EKhrbg. Euchlanis oropha Gosse. Cathypna luna Ehrbg. Anurea aculeata var. valga Khrbg. In both these localities B. furculatus was very abundant and the specimens much larger in size than those found at Pretoria. The var. inermis and the males were also plentiful. The other kinds show no difference from the same European species, except perhaps that the posterior spines of Anurea aculeata var. valga are somewhat larger than usual. Our next stopping place after twenty-four hours’ railway journey was Kimberley, more celebrated for its diamonds than for its Rotifers. We crossed the Orange River three times on our journey, and I much regretted not to be able to collect in the pools of water which I could see in the river bed when crossing the bridges; a flow of water was scarcely perceptible. Kimberley is a notoriously dry place, and formerly, in the early days of diamond digging, four shillings were paid for a cask of water. At the diamond mines the water used for washing the blue diamontiferous ground is pumped up from the deep workings, collected in settling tanks, and used over and over again. The only suitable pool or lake I could find here was one at Alexanderfontein, a pleasure resort some six miles 400 Transactions of the Society. out, which is reached by an electric tram. Here there is an orna- mental lake in the gardens of the hotel, and therefrom I obtained Six species of Rotifers— Polyarthra platyptera Ehrbg. Very abundant. Euchlanis oropha Gosse. Few. Diaschiza gibba Ehrbg. Few. Cathypna luna Ehrbg. Few. Pierodina patina Ehrbg. Abundant. Brachionus Bakerit Ehrbg. Abundant. On the afternoon of September 7 we left Kimberley for Bula- wayo, and alter a long journey through the very dry and more or less desert country of Bechuanaland reached our destination on the morning of the 9th. There was no opportunity for collecting during this journey, though I might probably have been successful had I known then that it is possible to collect Rotifers by the hose which feeds the engine from the iron or wooden railway water- tanks at the stations, a discovery which I made later in Rhodesia. Bulawayo is an embryo city, a town of magnificent distances, which stands in an open plain where fifteen years ago some bushes and a few blades of grass only grew. The plan of the town, with its broad avenues and streets, looks imposing, but a closer ac- quaintance reveals the fact that only the central business part is covered with a fair number of substantial houses, with a building here and there at the corners of streets; the remainder are blank stands or numbered plots of land to let, awaiting tenants. The town, however, has six hotels, three clubs, five churches, a public library and a Natural History Museum, which was opened during our visit by Professor Darwin; so there can be no doubt that it will grow in extent and prosperity as time goes on. A small stream called Matjesumshlope river runs through a portion of the town set apart for a large park, but at the time of our stay it had ceased running, and presented a very dry bed of sand. My search for a pond or pool of water at this dry season was altogether hopeless, so I turned my attention to the waterworks of the town. The water supply of Bulawayo is drawn from a series of reservoirs formed by damming several breaks in a natural chain of granite kopjes some three miles to the east of the town. Unfortunately I had no opportunity of visiting these reservoirs, but the water is brought to the town by a main flowing into a large tank situated close to the station ; from here it is pumped through a filter and distributed in EXPLANATION OF PLATE XY. Fig. 1.—Cathypna ungulata Gosse. x 225. » 2.—Tetramastix opoliensis Zacharias. x 210. » 3—Brachionus pala var. dorcas. x 160. » 4.—Jaws of unnamed Notommatoid Rotifer from Victoria Falls. x 250. JOURN.R.MICR.SOC.1906. Pl. XV. ER.Dixon-—Nuttall del.ad nat. ; West, Newman lith. South African Rotifers. The Rotifera of South Africa. By Charles F. Rousselet, 401 the town. The water in this tank was coloured green by a minute alga, Microcystis ceroginosa, and in the sample I brought away I afterwards found the following five species of Rotifers— Conochilus dossuarvus Hudson. Abundant. Brachionus pala var, dorcas Gosse.. Abundant. % angularis var. caudatus Barrois and Daday. Anurea aculeata var. valga Ehrbe. » cCochlearis (forma micracantha) Gosse—Lauterborn. The SB. pala var. dorcas found here is remarkable for very long and very narrow anterior and posterior spines, as represented in Pl. XV. fig. 3, the European species having rarely posterior spines. B. angularis var. caudatus is a variety not yet found in England, but described by Barrois and Daday from Syria (2); the posterior protuberances guarding the opening of the foot are here prolonged into slightly diverging spines of considerable length. One day of our stay at Bulawayo was devoted to an excursion to the “ World’s View,” a rounded granite mountain in the Matoppo Hills, where Cecil Rhodes’s grave is situated, and commanding a grand view of a magnificent series of hills formed of huge and fantastic granite blocks and masses of rock. a * / x | os + elle 3 » caudatus Collins x spicatus Hudson x x Cyrtonia tuba Ehrbg. x Proales descipiens Ehrbg. xe » petromyzon Khrbg. x » daphmcola Thompson x » sordida Gosse x Furcularia longiseta Ehrbg. Te a x a forficula Ehrbg. x Hosphora aurita Ehrbg. . é x x a naias Khrbg. . : x 2 digitata Khrbg. : x 3 elongata Ehrbg. ¢ x Diglena forcipata Ehrbg. : Xai » biraphis Gosse x » grandis Khrbg. . x » mustelia Milne . x | | » uncinata Milne . x » stlphaGosse . | xX » Hudson Glascott x | | Proima. Loricata. | | Rattulus rattus Ehrbg. . es 7 bicristatus Gosse x a mucosus Stokes | x | xX 35 carinatus Lamarck . . x * pusillus Lauterborn . : | x Diurella porcellus Gosse ‘ ieox | x * tigris Miller 5 | BS | x 3 Dixon-Nuttalli Jennings : Be 5 stylata Eyferth | x } | 412 Transactions of the Society. DISTRIBUTION OF ROTIFERA IN SoutH AFRICA—contiuvued. and e | eS oa | = a 3 \se\@e|e\a| 3 2 \se|e8\ 2/4) 2 |e gal | 8 | E | | Diurella tenwior Gosse . : 5 : : : sel x | a sejunctipes Gosse.. ‘ : : : i | x | Dinocharis tetractis Khrbg. . | x Wess} os Polychaetus (Dinocharis) Collinsi Gosse . x [tall eX Scaridvum longicaudum HKhrbg. : x x fe eudactylolum Gosse lex Diaschiza lacinulata Khrbg. x A gibba Ehrbg. . x e< i) 33 a eva Gosse : : xa ni exigua Gosse . | 4 a gracilis Ehrbg. | x caca Gosse Kell Stephanops muticus Hhrbg. x 5 imtermedvus Burn - : : 3 || x | Salpina ventralis Khrbg. . : : : : a | | x 5 macracantha Gosse : : < : | xX | os eustala Gosse x Euchlanis triquetra Khrbg. 28) || aes Pr macrura Khrbg. Xx a dilatata Khrbg. : 5 : : x % oropha Gosse . - ; ; ; : 4 | S< ie Ser me< x as propatula Gosse | | x Ploesoma lenticulare Herrick . : “ | x Cathypna luna Ehrbg. . : - : : oan liao Xaloe 4 rusticola Gosse ; : ; ~ x 6 leontina Turner ~ ungulata Gosse x Distyla flexilis Gosse . - : : 5 0 ; | Ne » Ludwigr Eckstein a : : : 6 x | » Hornemanni Ebrbg. . ‘ : ‘ : ; angularis Gosse x x SCANS The Rotifera of South Africa. By Charles F. Rousselet. 413 DISTRIBUTION OF ROTIFERA IN SoutH ArRiIcA—continued. Cape Colony : Orange River Colony. Transvaal. Natal. Cape Colony. Wm. Milne’s List. Rhodesia, Brachionus angularis var. caudatus Barrois and Daday . | | Noteus quadricor "nis Ehrbg. . : : : aa Ci 1600.090 Sy Dee 1000.000 > 490 - 1.000.000 ~ D> SSSSSsssss Fig. 53. line X X, their distance from the central line X X divided by the radius of the circle on which the arm C swings is the sine of the angle of deviation, and is therefore proportionate to x or Sy § Xr SnO=p=_ . e (2) when s = one of the divisions of scale E, and R = radius of circle. Tenths of an inch have been selected as being a convenient 420 Notes. measurement to make the divisions of the scale E, and the neces- sary length of the radius of the circle on which the divisions must be read is given as follows. It is assumed that 1 division of +, inch represents zopdq065 of an inch, therefore 2 5 x = 10 : ; : toy Therefore from (2) and (3) s ——— — 5 i , A= 10°A This shows the radius of curvature that is required in making the instrument, and a series of parallel lines ruled on the scale parallel to the base line, 4, of an inch apart, complete its graduation. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ene) lecO. Gr Yor) AND » B-Oe Tr ANY (PRINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA), NEE OSC OP YY," hire? ZOOLOGY. VERTEBRATA. a. Embryology.t Effects of Alkalis and Acids on Developing Ova of Sea-Urchin.t B. Moore, H. E. Roaf, and E. Whitley point out that in nearly all cases of malignant disease the secretion of hydrochloric acid by the gastric glands is stopped or greatly reduced. ‘This effect is not due to local conditions in the stomach : it occurs wherever the growth is situated. It is due to a change in the distribution of salts in the plasma whereby the alkalinity is increased or the concentration in hydrogen ions diminished. Addition of small amounts of alkalis or alkaline salts to the medium in which sea-urchin eggs are developing, causes at first an increase in rate of growth and division, but as the amount is increased, there is irregu- larity in the size and shape of the cells produced—nuclear division gets ahead of cytoplasmic division. With further increase, division stops. Accompanying the increased stimulus to nuclear division, there are many atypical forms of mitosis, as in malignant growths. The minutest amount of added acid has an inhibitory effect upon growth and nuclear division. The extreme limits at which life and cell-division are possible lie close together, indicating that the cell is extremely sensitive to even slight changes in the hydrogen and hydroxyl ion concentration. Effect of Acids and Alkalis on the Eggs of Plaice and Sea- Urchin.§—E. Whitley has made experiments on the effect of acid, alkali, and certain indicators in arresting or otherwise influencing the develop- * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “‘ we,” and they do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub- lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country, ¢ This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects. : } Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvii., No. B 515 pp. 102-36 (80 figs.). § Tom. cit., pp. 137-49. 422 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ment of the eggs of Pleuronectes platessa and Echinus esculentus. He finds that the amount of variation from the normal concentration of hydrogen and hydroxyl ions in sea-water which the eggs of the plaice will tolerate is very small. A disturbance of the equilibrium towards the acid side is much more fatal than the opposite. A progressive development of resistance to unfavourable action of the environment takes place in proportion to the age of the eggs. Phenolphthalein is deadly to the eggs of the sea-urchin, but harmless to those of the plaice, while dimethyl quickly kills the latter, and appears, if anything, to have a favourable influence upon the development of the former. Artificial Parthenogenesis.*—Yves Delage points out that the mode of action of the various agents which induce artificial parthenogenesis is still uncertain. Diverse methods have similar results, and no one is effective in all cases. Even an osmotic pressure greater than that of the sea-water, which is usually very effective, is not indispensable, for Delage’s experiment with starfish ova, subjected to the influence of carbon dioxide in diluted sea-water, “ hypotonic” in relation to the normal sea-water, was successful. Much seems to depend on the variable condition of the eggs themselves, and on the temperature of the medium. Acidification is favourable to parthenogenesis in the ova of starfish, unfavourable in the case of the sea-urchin (Strongylocentrotus). The mixture which gave best results was thus composed : sea-water, 3 c.cm.; solution of pure NaCl, 45 c.cm.; distilled water, 72 c.cm. ; sulphite of soda, 5 drops. Delage has reared plutei which lived for 2-6 weeks, and one of the starfish larvee obtained by the carbon-dioxide treatment lived for over four months. Maturation and Fertilisation in Porpoise.+—W. Rubaschkin notes that the guinea-pig has an ovulation soon after parturition, and may then be inseminated. If copulation does not occur the vagina closes till the next cestrus. The maturation is for the most part in the ovary. Two polar bodies are always formed. After the appearance of the second directive spindle, the ovum passes into the Fallopian tube, where, or in the lower part of the oviduct, fertilisation takes place. The process of fertilisation is described. Oolemma of Mammalian Ovum.{ — A. Fischer describes the oolemma of the mammalian ovum as a product of the epithelium which surrounds the ovum; its growth is from within outwards in peripheral layers; it is a spongy, homogeneous sheath formed of a feltwork of threads from the epithelial cells ; and it is penetrated until the period of maturation by fine processes connecting the epithelium with the ooplasm and playing a nutritive role. Individuality of Chromosomes.§—R. Fick has subjected to a searching criticism the whole framework of conclusions in regard to * Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 1201-4. + Anat. Hefte xxix. (1905) pp. 503-57 (4 pls.). See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) p. 215. t Tom. cit., pp. 555-89 (1 pl.). See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) p. 214. § Arch, Anat. Physiol. (Anat. Abth.) 1905, pp. 179-225. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 206-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 423 chromosomes and their individuality, and finds it lacking in scientific security. It seems to him that in every animal there is a peculiar manceuvring of the chromatin, adapted to the physico-chemical exigencies of the case. As regards inheritance, we only see the gross manceuvres of regiments, so to speak, and we cannot argue from that to the behaviour of individual combatants. Formation of Yolk in Egg of Sparrow.*—Dubuisson finds that just before the formation of the vitellus begins, the central zone of protoplasm, originally homogeneous, becomes vacuolar. The periphery remains an annulus of granular protoplasm. The nucleus lies tangentially to this annulus, quite eccentrically. Yolk plates begin to be deposited peri- pherally, and continue to appear in centripetal order in concentric layers. Different types of yolk-plates are described, and account for the old distinction between “white yolk” and “yellow yolk.” The yellow yolk is a more evolved condition of the white yolk. There is also a less important centrifugal formation of yolk. New Theory of Sex-Production.j—E. B. Wilson discusses the theory recently developed by R. Hertwig,f which is antagonistic to the view that sex is already determined in the fertilised egg. Issakowitsch has shown that in Simocephalus sex production shows a definite relation to temperature changes. At 24° C. there is a continuous production of parthenogenetic females, with only an occasional male; a reduction to- 16° C. quickly leads, and a reduction to 8° C. immediately leads to the appearance of males and to the production of winter eggs. Starvation brings about the same result. Von Malsen has shown that in Dinophilus an elevation of temperature from 10°-12° C. to 25° C. changes the ratio of male and female eggs from 1:3 to 1:1°75 oreven 1:1. R. Hertwig, working with frogs, was inclined to think that higher temperatures favoured the production of females, and found that over-ripeness or under-ripeness of the eggs led in every case to a large excess of males. In one case of under-ripe eggs 40 larvee successfully reared were all males. Hertwig’s general theory is that the ratio between the nuclear and the protoplasmic mass () tends towards a normal value that is in the long run constant for the species, though it undergoes cyclical changes both in the individual cell and in successive generations of cells. In ordinary or “functional” growth the value of i decreases, in the sub- sequent “divisional” growth it rises above the normal, in cell-division the normal ratio is approximately restored. In long continued vegeta- tive or asexual reproduction there is a gradual permanent increase in the value of : a nuclear hypertrophy, which is remedied by conjugation. In the male F is assumed to have a higher value than in the female, and * Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 776-7. + Science, xxiii. (1906) pp. 189-91. t Verh. Deutsch. Zool. Ges., 1905. 494 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO any influence that tends to increase this value, whether in the gametes, zygote, or developing embryo, favours or determines the production of the male condition. In over-ripe and under-ripe ova the ratio i has a high value. Wilson points out that the central assumption rests on a very small basis of fact, and he proceeds to show that even that small basis is unconvincing. He concludes that Hertwig’s theory is without real foundation. Sexual Differences of Chromosome Groups.*—H. B. Wilson brings forward evidence to show that ‘‘idiochromosomes” play a definite role in sex production in Hemiptera. In at least four genera, Lygeus, Euschistus, Canus, and Podisus, both sexes show the same number of chromosomes, but the small idiochromosome is present only in the male. Stevens, it is pointed out, has independently made a similar discovery in Zenebrio, so that the phenomenon is of wide occurrence in insects. The author concludes that the heterotropic or “accessory” chromosome has become unpaired in the male sex through the disappear- ance in that sex of its mate, and regards this as a complete explanation of the fact that in forms possessing the heterotropic chromosome the male number is odd, and one less than the female number. He believes that these facts may give the basis for a general theory of sex-production. Formation of Hemoglobin in the Embryo.t—L. Hugounenq and A. Morel have studied in this connection the developing egg of the fowl. Heematogen, probably belonging to the paranuclein group, has at first a number of functions in the egg. It contains, besides an albumen and a ferruginous pigment (subsequently differentiated as hemoglobin), a reserve of sulphur, phosphorus, carbonate of lime, and magnesia. Metamorphosis Independent of Nervous System.{—P. Wintrebert finds that the larvee of Salamandra maculosa proceed normally with their metamorphosis in spite of the destruction of a posterior portion of the spinal cord and spinal ganglia. In spite of the absence of medullary centres the tail of the larvee of Rana and Alytes exhibits the normal phenomena of regression. Sexual Selection.s—A. Forel alludes to recent criticism, e.g. by Groos || and Lameere §, of Darwin’s conclusion that female animals sometimes choose the more decorative males. He admits that there is some justice in the criticism, but thinks that it tends to go too far, A case in support of Darwin’s position is given. A peahen that had never seen a peacock was brought into the presence of one outside the breeding season. She flew rather than ran to him in the greatest excitement, and circled round about him in obvious admiration. He remained quite cold and reserved until the advent of spring brought them together. * Journ. Exper. Zool., iii. (1906) pp. 1-40 (6 figs.). + Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 848-9. { Tom. cit., pp. 1262-4. § Zool. Jahrb., xxiii. (1906) pp. 319-20. | Hessische Blatter f. Volksunde, iii. heft 2, 3. § L’Evolution des ornements sexuels, Bruxelles, 1904. > ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 425 Forel thinks that there was no question of any direct sexual excitement ; the peahen was simply filled with esthetic transport at the novel sight of such a beautiful cock. High and Low Dimorphism.*—G. Smith supplies data showing that the differentiation of the males of many species of Arthropods into high and low forms is of wide occurrence in distantly related groups which show a high degree of sexual differentiation. The high and low dimorphism may be facultative, as in those cases in which the low male by growth passes through an intermediate condition to the high male ; or definitive, as in those cases where growth ceases on the assumption of the mature condition. The extent of development of the secondary sexual characters, i.e. their “highness” or ‘“ lowness,” is strictly corre- lated with that of the primary sexual development. This latter is largely influenced by particular conditions of life, e.g. by nutrition and by the presence of particular parasites, and it appears that such in- fluences have operated continuously in specific differentiation. As we are here dealing with the reproductive organisation, there is not the same & priori difficulty in the transmission of such affections as exists in cases where the body only is influenced. Aortic Arches in Mammals.{—H. Lehmann finds that in both pig and rabbit embryos six aortic arches arise. In the pig there is a com- plete fifth arch on about the twenty-first day of development. There are also two entodermal pouches between the fourth and sixth arches. The rudimentary fifth in the rabbit, arising at about eleven-and-a-half days, is less complete. Remnants of the first and second transitory arches are persistent in the pig, so that parts of six aortic arches exist simulta- neously. The subclavians begin from the dorsal aorta and shift forward in front of the union of the aortic roots. The pulmonary arteries arise as symmetrical vessels from each sixth arch, and in the pig become asymmetrical by union of the stems from both sides, reaching the con- dition figured by Rathke. This is, however, a secondary condition, their symmetrical origin having been pointed out by Bremer. b. Histology. Dual Force of the Dividing Cell.t—M. Hartog records a series of experiments upon the forces of the dividing cell. His more important conclusions may be briefly indicated. ‘The cytoplasmic figure of the dividing cell isa strain-figure, under the action of a dual force, analogous to magnetism, and still more to statical electricity ; without prejudice as to its nature, it is termed “ mitokinetic force,” or “ mitokinetism.” By comparison with magnetic models, it is found that the spindle-fibres and astral rays, the Hautschicht of the cytoplasm, the nuclear wall, and the free chromosomes along the cell-spindle, must all be of high permeability to mitokinetism as compared with the other structures of the cell. Detailed comparisons with magnetic models are given. It is found * Mitth. Zool. Stat., Neapel, xvii. (1905) pp. 312-40 (2 pls. and 13 figs.). + Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxii. (1905) pp. 387-434 (4 pls.). t Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvi. (1905) pp. 548-67 (3 figs.). Aug. 15th, 1906 bo ey 426 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO that a spindle figure can only be obtained in a field with the two unlike poles of a dual force. Diffusion, osmosis, and surface tension cannot be the forces involved in the spindle. Further, since an isolated magnetic pole cannot exist, it is obvious that the cell-fields, being in three dimensions, and with isolated unlike poles, cannot be due to magnetism. It is not impossible that the field may be produced by statical elec- tricity, but of this at present there is no proof. Studies on Chromosomes.*—H. B. Wilson finds that the chromo- somes which have been called by Montgomery ‘“ heterochromosomes ” in Hemiptera, include three distinct forms, provisionally termed (a) the paired microchromosomes, or m-chromosomes ; (0) the idiochromosomes ; (¢) the “accessory,” or heterotropic chromosomes. The structure, re- lations, and behaviour of these are discussed in the present two papers, and it is concluded that the facts support the general theory of the individuality of chromosomes, the theory of Montgomery in regard to synapsis, and that of Sutton and Boveri regarding its application to Mendelian inheritance ; and they point towards a definite connection between the chromosome group and the determination of sex. Histology of Mammalian Nostril.t— B..Kormann gives a com- parative account of the histological structure of the nasal vestibule in various domestic mammals, and of the diverticulum nasi of the horse. The vestibulum nasi differs as to its extent in different mammals: it is covered by a many-layered flattened epithelium and with a papillary body, and contains glands reaching to the sub-mucosa. These are tubular glands of a serous character. The covering of the wall of the diverticulum nasi of the horse is not a mucous membrane. It isa direct continuation of the outer skin, from which, however, it is dis- tinguished by the possession of only quite thin and weak hairs. It contains numerous sebaceous glands in the corium, and abundant sweat- glands in the sub-cutis. Between this integumental layer and the true nasal mucous membrane, which has ciliated epithelium, there is a small band of vestibular mucous membrane very rich in serous glands. Skin of Reptiles.t—F. Krauss has investigated the relations of epidermis and cutis in Lizards and Crocodiles. He describes the de- velopment of the cutis from the rete Malpighi, and notes in the skin of many adult reptiles—especially in the looser connective tissue of the scales—frequent suggestions of embryonic conditions. As such may be quoted gelatinous tissue between the cutis and epidermis. The relation between the epithelial fibres of the epidermis cells and the connective tissue fibres below the epithelium is also described. Amphioxus Brain.§— lL. Edinger describes various hitherto un- known features in the central nervous system of Amphiorus. The central canal of the spinal cord shows an anterior widening—the brain vesicle whose degree of development in mature animals appears to be * Journ. Exper. Zool., ii. (1905) pp. 371-405 (7 figs.) and 507-45 (4 figs.). ¢ Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 5-16 (1 fig.). ¢ Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1906) pp. 319-63 (2 pls. and 14 figs.), § Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 417-28 (15 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 427 variable. This anterior cavity is broader and lower than the spinal canal. It is lined by epithelium which is continuous with that of the latter. An account is given of the olfactory nerve, the frontal organ, the pigment spot and its nerves, the ganglionic dorsal apparatus, and the dorsal giant cells of the frontal section—the oblongata of authors. Growth-and Renewal of Dermis.*—Ed. Retterer concludes that the phenomena of embryonic development and adult histogenesis are practi- cally the same as regards the dermis. The germinal epithelium furnishes superficially the mucous or corneous elements, and, internally, the cells which are transformed into denser connective tissue (dermis) and reti- cular tissue (lymphoid). The epithelium is the initial tissue, forming epidermic elements which are desquamated off, and deeper elements which form, add to, and replace the constituents of the dermis. Pathological Nature of Holmgren’s Canaliculi in Nerve Cells.t R. Legendre maintains that the “Saftkanilchen” which Holmgren described in 1900 in the snail—fine prolongations from interstitial cells entering the nerve cells—are well-known neuronophagous phenomena, due to a kind of phagocytosis on the part of the neuroglia cells. Structure of Gas-Gland in Swim-Bladder.{—Karolina Reis and J. Nusbaum give an account of the minute structure of the epithelial body or gas-gland of species of Ophidiwm, and of the disruptive process by which gas is evolved. They also discuss the “ oval” which functions as an elastic pressure-regulator, evaginating and invaginating, and thereby affecting the gaseous content of the bladder. Whitening of Hairs and Feathers in Winter.§—El. Metchnikoff adheres to his previous conclusion that “‘ chromophagous”’ cells transport the pigment from hairs into the skin or to the surface. The theory that the blanching is due to gas cannot suffice, for the gas is only in the medullary portion of the hairs. He has made observations on Lepus variabilis, Lagopus albus, and L. alpinus, on a hen which began to turn white, and has found the chromophagous cells at work. Shape of Human Erythrocytes.|—-H. E. Radasch finds that the majority of the erythrocytes in the circulating blood of foetus and adult are bell-shaped. On exposure to air the bells collapse and become disks. c. General.i Origin of the Deep-Sea Fauna.{—A. HE. Ortmann argues that the present deep-sea fauna—adapted to very low temperature—must have had an origin subsequent to the polar cooling, which probably occurred in Tertiary ages. Part of the fauna may be autochthonous, adapted from previously existing Mesozoic or pre-Tertiary forms which had * Journ. de l’Anat, Physiol. xlii. (1906) pp. 297-304. + Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp, 1265-7. t Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 177-91 (2 pls.). § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 1024-8. | Anat. Anzeig., xxvili. (1906) pp. 600-4. q Highth Internat, Geograph. Congress, 1905, pp, 618-20. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 302-3, 2 © 2 428 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO peopled the deep sea before it acquired a low temperature. Another part may be referred to a Tertiary migration from littoral regions at both poles: the northern contingent derived from an ancient Mesozoic Medi- terranean fauna, the southern contingent derived from an ancient. Pacific fauna. Another, but less probable, mode of origin would be a direct migration from tropical littoral faunas. Slime-Formation in the Sea.* — C. Cori describes the occurrence of immense quantities of slime in the Gulf of Trieste in the summer of 1905. It was so marked that it lessened the number of pelagic organisms, smothered many littoral forms, and fouled the nets of the fishermen. It was mainly due to encysting Peridines, and secondarily to Bacillariaceee. Anhydrobiosis, Parthenogenesis, and Phototropism.j—G. Bohn calls attention to the fact that Giard has induced artificial partheno- genesis in the eggs of starfish by physical and chemical dehydration, and subsequent exposure to the exciting action of the sea-water. So, Bohn points out, there is physical and chemical dehydration in supra- littoral animals, like Littorina rudis and Harpacticus fulvus, when the tide is out, and an extraordinary excitation when the tide comes in again. There is very marked negative phototropism ; there are ex- tremely active movements which have an optic origin. There is an established vital periodicity determined by the tides, for even in an aquarium, although the desiccation or intoxication persists, the creatures awake from their torpor, and with mathematical precision make for the shaded regions. We do not follow the argument, but the author says there is a complete parallelism between artificial parthenogenesis and phototropism. Fauna of Natal.{—Ernest Warren presents the first report of the Natal Government Museum, which shows in the text and by the illustra- tions what arrangements have been made to preserve and exhibit for museum purposes the fauna and flora of Natal. The report, which says much for the industry and thoughtfulness of the director, includes. catalogues of ethnological exhibits, and of the mammals, birds, reptiles, amphibians, fishes, invertebrates, fossils, etc. Peripheral Nervous System of Mammals.S—K. S. London and D. J. Pesker have investigated various embryos of white mice as regards. the nerve endings in striped and smooth muscle, and especially in heart muscle. They describe the finer structure of the ganglion cells. of the heart, and the sensory cells of the inner ear. In the tympanal wall of the cochlear canal the outer and inner hair cells develop as cells. pointed at the lower end. Gradually from the ganglion cells there grow out spiral fibrils which are directed to the lengthening point of the * Archiv Hydrobiol. Planktonkunde, i. (1906) pp. 385-91. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 300-1. + Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 1260-2. { First Report of the Natal Government Museum, year ending December 1904, (Pietermaritzburg, 1906) 185 pp., 14 pls. § Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1906) pp. 303-18 (3 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 429 forenamed cells and which presumably unite with them. In the process of development there is an evident stimulus towards the formation of a fibrillar net from the granular content of the protoplasm of the sense- cell. Eye of Spalax typhlus.*-—J. Szakall describes the degenerate eye of this “ blind mouse.” There is no eyelid opening ; the eye lies ina closed conjunctival sac ; and the light can only enter through the skin. All the essential parts are present, but they remain undifferentiated. Thus the anterior and posterior basal membranes are lacking in the cornea ; the choroid is not separated from the sclerotic ; the ciliary bodies are wholly due to folds of the pigment layer of the retina; the retina is relatively undifferentiated ; the lens is a mass of irregular cells, under- going disruption ; the anterior wall of the lens is directly apposed to the posterior surface of the cornea; the arteria hyaloidea, as an embryonic vestige, is always demonstrable ; the eye-muscles are quite absent, but the Harderian gland is unusually large. Relationships of the Tarpan.t—J. Cossar Ewart concludes that the Tarpan, once common in the east of Europe, cannot be regarded as a true wild species. It may be assumed that the Tarpan herds were derived from at least three primitive stocks, viz. (1) from a variety or species identical with or closely related to the wild horse (Aquus prejvalskit) still surviving in Central Asia; (2) from a variety having the characteristics of the Celtic pony (/. ¢. celticus); and (8) from a variety resembling the forest horse (H. c. typicus). The variety of characters seen in the Tarpans suggests this multiplex origin. Experi- ments in progress may settle what part Prejvalsky’s horse had in forming the Tarpan. The author adheres to his general view that domesticated horses have had a multiple origin, and include plain as well as striped forms amongst their less remote ancestors—have not, in fact, as Darwin thought, descended from a single dun-coloured, more or less striped, primitive stock. Arrangement of Bronchial Blood Vessels.{—W. 8. Miller gives an account of the arrangement of the vessels in the bronchi and their relation to the pulmonary vessels. They are directly connected with the pulmonary vein, and can be only partially injected from the pulmonary artery when the pulmonary vein is clamped, and then by a backward flow along the venous radicles which arise from the bronchi. Cranial Nerves in Chick.§—F. W. Carpenter gives an account of the anatomy, histology, and development of the oculomotor nerve, the ciliary ganglion, and the abducent nerve in the chick. There is also a discussion of the migration of the medullary cells, the histogenesis of the neuraxons, the nature of the ciliary ganglion, and the homologies of the oculomotor and abducent nerves. * Math. Nat. Ber. Ungarn., xx. (1905) pp. 272-88 (5 figs.). + Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxvi. (1906) pp. 7-21 (3 pls. and 2 figs.). { Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 432-6 (3 figs.) § Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xlviii. (1906) pp. 141-229 (7 pls.). 430 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Notes on Sea Snakes.*—T. V. R. Aiyar communicates some in- teresting notes on some sea-snakes caught at Madras. They occur all the year round, but are more abundant during the cold weather (October to February). Big snakes generally approach the shore at night. The small head and attenuated neck are specially adapted to penetrate into crannies among the rocks. In the young there are often bright bands and streaks which grow dull afterwards. Almost all the forms are fish- eaters, but crustaceans were also found in the gut. The ecdysis takes place in piece-meal fashion, and the interesting fact is noted that some specimens kept in fresh-water underwent the process of moulting more or less like the land snakes. Not a few bore barnacles and epizoic hydroids. Once out of their native element, the sea-snakes generally become quite helpless and appear blind, except Distera viperina. Cranial Nerves of Varanus Bivittatus.t—Grace B. Watkinson supplies a marked deficiency in our knowledge by giving an anatomical account of the cranial nerves in this lizard. The whole subject has been much neglected as far as Reptiles are concerned. Reptiles and Amphibians of Russia.t—A. Nickolsky has published a detailed account (in Russian) of the Reptiles and Amphibians of the country. Tadpoles Caught by Bladderwort.s—W. Bath describes the capture and imprisonment of small tadpoles by the bladders of Utricularia vulgaris. Sometimes the head is caught at the “door,” sometimes the tail, sometimes the tadpole gets quite inside. The imprisoned animals may live for some days inside the bladder. Meristic Variations in Toad.|—Seitaro Goto describes some inte- resting variations in the vertebral column of Bufo vulgaris, e.g. bifid transverse processes of third vertebra; fusion of seventh and eighth ; sacrum formed by ninth vertebra on the right side, and by the ninth and tenth on the left ; sacrum formed entirely by the tenth, the ninth being small and fused to the tenth. He also reports the occurrence of two spleens with separate arteries. Fossil Flying Fishes.¢—O. Abel describes under this title the “ vanoids,” with large pectoral fins, occurring in the Trias of Austria, Germany and Italy, e.g. Thoracopterus mederristi and Cigantopterus telleri g. et sp. n., and Dollopterus (Dolichopterus) volitans. There is a marked convergence in shape and in pectoral fins to the modern Hzo- cetus. A consideration of the so-called “flying fishes” of the chalk (Chirothriz) leads the author to believe that they were inhabitants of deep water, and did not use their fins for skimming through the air. The whole question of the adaptation of fins for “flight” is discussed. * Journ. and Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, ii. (1906) pp. 69-72. + Morph. Jahrb., xxxv. (1906) pp. 450-72 (8 pls.). t Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg, xvii. (1905) pp. 1-517 (2 pls.). § SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 153-5 (2 figs.). | Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1906) pp. 267-81 (8 figs.). q Jahrb. k.k. geol. Reichanst., lvi. (1906) pp. 1-88 (3 pls., 13 figs.). See also Geol. Mag., Decade V., iii. No. 6 (1906) pp. 271-2. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 431 Respiration in Bony Fishes.*—Taco Kniper has experimented with Barbus fluviatilis, Telestes muticellus, and Cyprinus auratus. Inspiration involves the opening of the mouth, the lowering of the floor of the mouth, and a moderate dilatation of the operculum. In this phase the gill-clefts are closed, and the water enters only by the mouth. Expiration involves closing the mouth, raising the floor of the mouth, a posterior dilatation of the operculum and the associated membrane. In this phase the gill-clefts are open, and the water passes out only by them. At the end of expiration there is a rapid approximation of the oper- culum to the body, ending the respiratory series of movements. ‘The mouth begins to open again, and a new inspiration sets in. German Carp in United States.t—hL. J. Cole discusses this subject from the economic standpoint. In a very full paper he gives much interesting information regarding the habits of Cyprinus carpio, such as migrations, hibernation, vitality, feeding, and breeding ; its diseases, parasites, and enemies ; its economic relations and food value, etc. Its presence in the United States does not appear to be greatly appreciated, although it is recognised that, like the English sparrow, it has come to stay and cannot be exterminated. Suggestions are made as to how to use it to the best advantage. Saw of the Sawfishes.t—P. Pappenheim discusses the significance of the saw in Pristiophorus and Pristis. The few observers who have seen the animals living have not reported the real use of the saw. In the stomach of Pristiophorus, Pappenheim found vertebrae, jaw-frag- ments, etc., of fish; in Pristis he found cycloid scales, vertebrae, remains of crustaceans, etc. The articulation of the skull with the vertebral column is peculiar in Pristiophorus, and allows a vertical movement of the skull, as well as a rotation on its long axis. It seems likely that the saw is used primarily for rapid grubbing and burrowing in the mud and gravel. There may also be an accessory protective function, but there is no evidence of the saw being used as a weapon for ramming. Abnormal Dogfish.$—-G. P. Mudge describes a strange abnormality in Scyllium canicula. The stomach was turned inside out and everted into the pharyngeal cavity. That the condition was a permanent one is shown by the great length of the lieno-gastric artery and by other con- ditions. At quite an early stage in the differentiation of the primitive gut, the proximal loop of the stomach probably became gradually everted, this eversion setting up on one side a tension upon the lieno-gastric artery which grew with the growth of the everted sac, and, on the other side, a tension upon the proximal loop of the stomach near its junction with the distal loop, which resulted in the formation of a peculiar tri- angular invaginated ceecal pouch. * Atti Rend. R. Accad. Lincei Roma, xv. (1906) pp. 385-94 (9 figs.). - t+ Dept. of Commerce and Labor, Bureau of Fisheries: Appendix to Report of Commissioners of Fisheries, Washington, 1905, pp. 523-641 (3 pls.). 3 SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 97-102. § Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 278-80 (1 fig.). 432 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Accessory Fins in Raia batis.*—J. Rennie records two cases of Raia batis in which in the mid-dorsal line there occurred accessory fins of somewhat complex structure. Although median in position, they appear to be of the nature of paired fins. In one a combination of fin structures occurred which is representative of different phylogenetic stages in the evolution of the Elasmobranch fin. Chorda Tympani in Microtus.t—V. E. Emmel has made out the following in the development of the chorda tympani in Microtus. In the earlier stages it passes behind and underneath the spiracular cleft. In later stages.it occupies a position over and in front of the closed end of the spiracular cleft. It is, therefore, a post-spiracular nerve, and is to be considered as the homologue of a post-trematic nerve of fishes and amphibians. Jaw and Branchial Muscles in Elasmobranchs.{—G. EK. Marion describes the mandibular and pharyngeal muscles of Acanthias and Raia. In the latter, as might be expected from its shape, a few muscles are developed which are not found in the dogfish. These are the levator and depressor of the rostrum, and the cerato-hyomandibularis, which from its position seems adapted to the protrusion of the jaws. Apart from these the two forms studied agree very closely. The deeper ventral longitudinal muscles of Raia are described for the first time. Membranous Labyrinth in Sharks.§—Charles Stewart describes this organ in five genera not dealt with by Retzius in his monograph. There is a considerable resemblance in the labyrinths of Notidanus and Lemargus. In Lamna cornubica there is fusion of portions of the two divisions of the utricle, forming a structure which has a close superficial resemblance to the sinus superioris utriculi of Teleosts; the cavities, however, remain distinct. Alopecias vulpes shows a similar characteristic ; here the resemblance to the Teleostean sinus is even more marked. Structure and Relations of Mylostoma.||—C. R. Eastman points out the intimate structural resemblance between Mylostoma and Dini- chthys, and, taking these forms as typical examples of Arthrodires, com- pares their general organisation with that of Neoceratodus and other Dipnoan fishes. Evidence is given for associating Arthrodires with Dipneusti, and their relations to fossil and recent members of the sub- class are considered. A summary is also given of the leading facts in the evolutionary history of Dipnoans since their first appearance in the Lower Devonian until their decadence, bordering upon extinction, in the modern fauna. Acromerite of Amphioxus.4—B. Hatschek finds that the “rostral episomite process ” in Amphioxus contains an elongated cavity, extending laterally to the notochord, and representing a direct continuation of the * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 428-31 (2 figs.). + Journ. Comp. Neurol. u. Psychol., xiv. (1904) pp. 411-17. } Tufts College Studies, ii. (1905) No. 1 (Scientific series) pp. 1-34. § Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxix. (1906) pp. 407-9 (1 pl.). || Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1. (1906) pp. 1-29 (5 pls.). { Morphol. Jahrb., xxxv, (1906) pp. 1-14 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 433 first myoceel. The “rostral episomite process” contains no special “myomerite.” The so-called first myomerite, which in young larve extends without limitation in a long rostral myomerite process, does not go so far forward in the fully formed animal, but ends about the cerebral vesicle. From its anterior margin a long triangular anteriorly pointed tendon is given off, which is attached to the median wall of the episo- mite process. The first scleroccel extends only as far forward as the muscle ; it is not only dorsally but also ventrally closed off from the myocosl, being only connected with it ventrally at the posterior end of the segment. At the anterior margin of other typical myomerites there are tendon- fibres which penetrate into the myoseptum in front. The last episomite gives off posteriorly on each side a hollow “ ter- minal episomite process,” extending laterally along the notochord. In its median wall there is a delicate terminal tendon continued from the last myomerite. The last myocoel is imperfectly separated from the penultimate myoccel. Tunicata. New Genus of Synascidian.*—Asajiro Oka describes Aphambran- chion, a new genus of Synascidian from the coasts of Japan. It is, perhaps, to be regarded as within the family Distomidee, if the diagnosis of the family is somewhat enlarged. The most striking peculiarity is that the branchial sac is very degenerate and almost indistinct. The thorax is so relatively minute that it appears simply as an inconspicuous appendage at the anterior end of the well-developed abdomen. Extremely small point-like apertures arranged in transverse rows represent the branchial clefts, and there is no dorsal lamina. This interesting new type is named Aphambranchion japonicum. Development of Diplosoma spongiforme.t—A. Pizon has studied the complex phenomena of budding in this Diplosomid, which differ in their sequence from those in D. listeri. Particular attention is directed to the singular process of visceral bipartition, which the author calls “ displanchtomy.” INVERTEBRATA. Mollusca. a Cephalopoda. Eyes of Cephalopods.t—C. Hess finds a very sensitive optic purple in the retina of many genera, e.g. Loligo. It very closely resembles the similar pigment in Vertebrates. In all cases the colour of the fresh retina is brown to brownish-red ; the colour of the preserved retina differs according to the illumination of the eye in the last hours of life. Three stages in the differentiation of the Cephalopod retina are dis- tinguished :—(a) with uniform thickness and uniformly close rods (Loligo, * Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1906) pp. 253-65 (1 pl.). + Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 463-5 (1 fig.). ¢ Arch. ges. Physiol., cix. (1905) pp. 393-439 (4 pls.). See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 192-3. 434 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Todaropsis, Illex) ; (b) in most cases with an area of most distinct vision, in which the rods are thicker and usually longer ; (¢) in Chun’s deep-sea forms with a fovea-like area of most distinct vision, in which the rods are very long and narrow. B. Gastropoda. Eyes of Pulmonate Gastropods.*—G. Smith has made a study of the morphology and histology of the eyes in several Gastropods. His leading conclusions are as follows. The pigment cells of the retina of Helix and Limaz are indifferent, the pigment-free cells are sensory. Each sensory cell gives off proximally one neurite to the optic nerve, and probably one or more branched processes which attach the cell to the capsule. The fibrillee of the rods are normal structures of the living cell, and are doubly refractive to light. The neurofibrille form a net- work within the cell, uniformly distributed or massed into main paths through it. Appearances of pigment migration in the pigment cell of the retina of Planorbis trivovis were observed. Achatinellid Fauna of Molokai.t— Fr. Borcherding begins a systematic account of the Achatinellids from this Sandwich Island-—an interesting study of numerous species and varieties in a relatively small area. Structure of Acmea testudinalis.t—M. A. Willcox publishes the first part of an anatomical account of this limpet, in which he deals at length with the superficial features, such as the blood-vessels seen with- out dissection. , British Nudibranchs.§ — C. Eliot communicates notes on twenty- nine British Nudibranchs, including Coryphella beaumonti sp. n. and Janolus flagellatus sp. n.(?). The specimen recorded in the list of British forms as Berghia cerulescens must be removed from the list, as the specimen is Facelina coronata, but Staurodoris verrucosa may be added. A number of other points are cleared up in the paper. Mutation in Molluses.||—F.C. Baker points out that in certain Molluscs, e.g. Lymnea, “the species seem to be unstable, that is, they have a tendency to vary, not in a given direction, but in many directions at the same time. ‘These seem to come under the head of Mutants or sports.” ‘Where the mutation theory seems to fit in very nicely in explaining the very large amount of variation in the fresh-water pulmo- nates, we must not be too hasty in applying this new theory, founded as it is upon plant variation, to animal life.” 5. Lamellibranchiata. Natural History of Margaritifera panasese.{—A. W. Allen gives some notes on this small oyster, which occurs in New Guinea waters. * Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xlviii. (1906) pp. 233-84 (4 pls.). + Zoologica, xix. (1906) heft 48, pp. 1-104 (5 pls. and 1 map). t Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 171-87 (4 figs.). § Journ. Marine Biol. Ass., vii. (1906) pp. 333-82 (2 pls.). || Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 327-34 (4 figs.). q Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxix. (1906) pp. 410-13. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 435 Its early existence appears to be precarious. Deposits of young shells of fifty to the square foot, after five or six months were found almost com- pletely devoured. A peculiarly insidious enemy is a small whelk, which pierces a neat hole in the thin shell, generally in the neighbourhood of the attachment of the adductor muscle. The result-is loss of power to close the shell against the enemy, and every returning tide washes up numbers of young shells perforated in this way. The oyster does not appear to be altogether passive as regards its enemies, for where the situation is an exposed one the young form makes a tour in search of a cranny where it can hide. They often, however, only survive a few months, the secluded spots selected proving too small for their growing shells. For the purposes of locomotion a modified foot, like a muscular thread, is protruded from the byssal cleft. It gropes and tests the ground in every direction, eventually fixing itself and drawing the oyster after it. The latter then rests on its flatter, right side. Power of in- dependent movement is confined to shells of six months age or under. The foot atrophies during the latter part of the bivalve’s existence. On the other hand, the formation of new byssi is possible, and, if occasion demands it, occurs in shells of almost any age. The author makes an interesting comparison between the present species, MW. margaritifera, and M. maxima. These three show grades of modification in hinge- teeth characters (rudimentary or absent), in nature of byssus, and in presence or absence of a modified foot. Arthropoda. a. Insecta. Polyembryony and Sex-Determination.*—E. Bugnion calls atten- tion to the fact that in Encyrtus fuscicollis all the individuals hatched from one parasitised caterpillar are usually of the same sex. P. Marchal observed the same in the individuals of Polygnotus minutus which issue from one parasitised Cecidomyid larva. The fact is a natural consequence of the polyembryony. As in the case of identical twins, the sexes of the products of one ovum are the same. When one parasitised cater- pillar includes two or three ova of Hncyrtus, and therefore several chains of embryos, both males and females may be hatched out. The partial abortion of one chain may result in unequal numbers of both sexes. As Bugnion points out, the facts seem to show that in this case the sex is pre-determined im ovo. Assimilation of Carbon Dioxide by Chrysalids.t—Maria von Linden has experimented with chrysalids of Papilio podalirius, Sphinx euphorbie and Lasiocampa pini, and with caterpillars of Botys urticata and Vanessa urtice, and has been led to conclude that when the atmo- sphere surrounding them contained 5-30 p.c. of carbon dioxide, there was often an absorption of that gas, accompanied (in spring) by an exhalation of oxygen. This process of assimilation occurs oftener during the day than at night, but respiration is more intense during the * Arch. Sci. Phys. Nat., xx. (1905) pp. 699-702. + Comptes Rendus, cxli. (1905) pp. 1258-60. 436 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO night. The investigator believes that the chrysalids can utilise carbon dioxide as green plants do, but one may be pardoned for desiring con- firmation before accepting this momentous conclusion. Mechanism of Compound Hye.*—E. J. Spitta suggests that the multiple images produced by the insect’s eye are due to pin-hole effects. “Tt would seem that if the facets of the cornea were considered as nothing but little holes—filled, it may be, with some non-refractive material—all the difficulties about the focusing arrangement are at once swept away ; for it is well known that every image is to a more or less degree in focus with a pin-hole. This would seem to imply that a very perfectly defined image is afforded by the insect’s compound eye.” The reason for the variation of the diameters of the facets is to enable the insect to possess a differential selection of optical arrangements. A criticism is made of Exner’s experiment of photographing through an insect’s eye from which retina and pigment were removed, and the eye- cavity filled with glycerin and water—thus making a lens. “It may be said that the photograph was obtained in spite of the cornea being present.” Paleozoic Insects.t—Anton Handlirsch has made a study of the North American Carboniferous and Permian insects in the U.S. National Museum, and gives a revision of all previously described species, 345 (137 re-named or new) in 169 genera (109 new). There is a striking agreement with European forms. Only one order (Blattoidea) extends into the Mesozoic; all the other orders are replaced in the younger formations by more specialised types. The Paleodictyoptera, which Handlirsch considers the stem group of all winged insects, appear first and decrease from the oldest beds to the younger, while the connecting links or transitional groups between the Paleodictyoptera and modern insect groups appear later than their conjectural ancestors, attain their maximum in the middle beds, and with the close of the Paleozoic again vanish. Influence of Temperature on Lepidoptera.t—H. Federley has made many experiments on the influence of changed temperature on the markings and coloration of Heterocera. Thus, low temperature favours black pigments, e.g. in Saturnia pavonia; warmth changes the grey markings of Lymantria dispar & into brown, and so on. The scales are very modifiable in shape, size, and number. Of this many illustrations are given. According to the author, the thermal influence operates in part by altering the pressure of the hemolymph ; in part, perhaps, by directly affecting the metabolism in the plasma of the scale mother-cells. Effect of Temperature on Insect Development.S—F. Merrifield discusses this subject, illustrating his conclusions by reference to various experiments. There appear to be various degrees of response to changes in temperature; some species react with great regularity, on others * Journ. Quekett Micr. Club., 1906, pp. 263-8. + Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, xxix. (1906) pp. 661-820. { Festschrift fiir Palmen, No. 16 (Helsinfors, 1905) pp. 1-118 (3 pls. and 7 figs.). See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 329-81. § Trans. Entomol. Soc., 1905, pt. 5, pp. Ixxxiii.-cxi. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 437 warmth appears to be expended in vain. Cold appears to be necessary to mature winter pupa, e.g. Thais polyxena and Rumia luteolata kept at 27° C. for part of the winter nearly all died. In contrast to winter pupe killed by the absence of cold are quoted summer pupe of Selenia tetralunaria and of Araschnia levana, which were kept, retarded, and changed in facies, but uninjured by a low temperature, for more than four months, and those of Zonosoma punctaria for more than six months. Other points considered in this interesting paper are the question of the transformation of single- and double-brooded types, and the alteration of colour and pattern by temperature. Maturation of Unfertilised Eggs in Tenthredinide.*—L. Don- caster describes the maturation process and early development of par- thenogenetic eggs in saw-flies. There appear to be several fundamental differences from the process in bees. In the saw-flies the conjugation of the polar nuclei takes place only in the male-producing species, and the group of chromosomes which results ultimately disintegrates ; but the fact that it commonly divides into two groups lying side by side may be compared with the production of “double nuclei” in the bee. The number of chromosomes in all the divisions is constant, and no trace was seen of tetrads or dyads to indicate the occurrence of reduction. The somatic number of chromosomes is the same (at least up to the formation of the blastoderm) as the number in the polar mitoses. Variations of Lycena astrarche in Britain.t—L. W. H. Harrison finds that Lycena astrarche Brgstr. and the variety artarerzes are connected by transition forms. The typical form in the south of England entirely resembles the Continental form, and has two genera- tions annually. In the north of England, especially in Durham, there are distinct varieties, and one brood in the year. They approach the variety artaverxes, and have a longer larval period. The typical form is to be found on the stork’s bill, the Durham variety on the rock-rose. The variety salmacis predominates in Durham, and the adults show sexual dimorphism, which is absent in artaxerxes, the predominating variety in Scotland. Harrison’s general conclusion is that L. astrarche and artaxerxes are geographical varieties. Mendel’s Laws applied to Silk-worm Crosses.{ — Kametaro Toyama finds that some of the characters of silk-worms, e.g. colours of cocoons and larval markings, strictly follow Mendel’s laws, while others do not. As the result of crossing the disintegration of parent characters takes place. Each character thus produced behaves exactly like an independent character, breeding true to parents. Conversely, the combination of two characters takes place, and the forms produced remain constant when bred together. Bateson’s theory of allelomorphs is confirmed. The behaviour of a character when crossed, however, depends in some degree upon the characters of its ancestors, since in one case (Siamese “ whites” x Siamese “ yellows”) no disintegration of the * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 196 (1906) pp. 561-89 (2 pls.). + Bull. Soc. Lépidopt. Genéve, No. 1 (1905) pp. 30-2. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) p. 331-2. ¢ Biol. Centralbl., xxvi. (1906) pp. 321-34. 438 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO parent characters takes place, while in other cases (Japanese “ whites” x Siamese “ yellows” or “ Japanese “ whites” x European “ yellows ’’) it may often be observed. Sometimes it happens that both dominant and recessive characters, even sexual ones, appear as active characters in an individual body. Coleoptera and Moths of United States.*—C. Schaeffer gives some notes on new genera and species of Coleoptera found within the United States. Short descriptions of the Mexican species are given. There is also recorded a list of Bombycine moths from the Huachuca Mountains, Arizona. H. G. Dyar describes several new species of moths, also from Arizona. Bionomics of South African Lamellicorns.;—G. B. Longstaff gives some interesting notes on certain species of Cetoniine and Hopliine. These beetles apparently play a large part in the fertilisation of flowers, and amongst the examples referred to are some protectively coloured like the plants they visit, cases of mimicry, e.g., Gametis balteata resembles certain Lycoid beetles which are very distasteful to Kestrels and Baboons. An interesting case is that of Heterochelus 8, which has greatly elongate and denticulate hind legs. These project above the florets when the beetle is busy burrowing into the disks of Com- positee with its body almost completely buried. They resemble the widely separated jaws of an ant-lion, and on being touched can give a very respectable pinch, inflicted by the formidable teeth upon the inner margins. These legs were probably in the first instance adapted to assist the male insect in grasping its mate. Abdomen of Female Chafer.t—B. Wandolleck gives a comparative account of the morphology of the abdomen of the female in sixteen species of Cerambicide. Although there appear to be three types, these are connected by intermediate forms, so that a fundamental similarity exists in all. Stegomyia fasciata and Yellow Fever.§—H. Marchoux and P. L. Simond find that there is a possible hereditary transmission of the amaril virus in Stegomyia fasciata. An infected mosquito may produce eggs which give rise to infected individuals. But this does not play an important role in the propagation of yellow fever. The mosquito is not infected either by blood from hemorrhage, or by vomit, or by faces ; larvee reared in water with dead bodies of infected mosquitos are not infected. The virus may be artificially passed from mosquito to mosquito, but this does not occur in nature. The adult insects kept in contact with the dead bodies of infected forms are not infected. Unlike many other Culicidee, the female Stegomyia fasciata does not die after its first oviposition. New Sense-Organ on Head of Corethra Larve.||— Em. Radl describes a peculiar sensory organ on the head of this larva. It has * Museum Brooklyn Inst. Arts and Sciences, i. (1905) pp. 141-86. t+ Trans. Entom. Soc. London, 1906, pp. 91-5, t Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxii. (1905) pp. 477-576 (1 pl. and 32 figs.). § Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) pp. 16-40. || Zool, Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 169-70 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 439 proximally an expansion of nerve-fibres inclosed in a special wall, and distally a darker “ nucleus” in the middle of which lies a rod-like some- what refractive body. The nerve-fibrils come into close association with this peculiar body, and distally a thin process passes to the hypodermis. Besides the eyes, the antennz, the sensory hairs described by Weismann, the brown-spot which Leydig regarded as a third rudimentary eye, and the organ described, there is also a minute chordotonal organ, so that the head is extremely well equipped. Synonymy of Musca Marginalis.*—H. E. Austen clears up the synonymy of this much-described species. Its systematic position is now fixed in the genus Pycnosoma, in which there are two species, P. marginale and P. chloropyga. These, together with Musca domestica, it appears, were partly responsible for the spread of enteric fever among the British soldiers during the late war in South Africa. Distribution and Biology of Anopheles.t— J. R. Adie and A. Alcock record the occurrence of Anopheles (Myzomyia) listoni in Calcutta in December and January. Some experiments were made in order to discover natural enemies of the larve. In one cage where there were twelve larve and a single rapacious larva of a dragon-fly (Ceriagrion coromandelianus) all the Anopheles larvee disappeared, and an adult dragon-fly hatched out in due course. Development of Ageniaspis Fuscicollis.{—F. Silvestri has studied the development of this parasitic Hymenopteron, whose poly-embryony has been investigated by Marchal. It is an “ endophagous” parasite of Prays olcellus. In the maturation of the parthenogenetic ova, as in the fertilised, two polar bodies are formed. The whole of the protoplasm of the ovum does not take part in forming embryonic cells, for a polar portion, in- cluding the polar globules, assumes a protective and nutritive function as regards the embryonic portion. Collecting Stylopide.§—Charles Dury gives a useful hint. In the genera Xenos and Stylops, the adult female is larviform and never leaves the body of its host (wasp, bee, etc.), but the male pupa projects. A wasp so infected should be confined in a jelly tumbler with a cheese- cloth cover over the top; in the bottom of the glass there should be placed a round bit of blotting paper and a piece of screen wire, raised up from the bottom. When the Xenos emerges it falls through the false bottom of wire. Otherwise the wasp would bite it in pieces. The wasp should be fed with jelly and water, put on the cheese-cloth cover in one small spot with a camel’s hair brush. Copulation and Oviposition in Hemiptera.||—C. Gordon Hewitt has observed these phenomena in several aquatic genera. In Nepa cinerea, where there is a terminal respiratory siphon, the chief interest in * Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., xcix. (1906) pp. 301-4). + Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvi. (1905) pp. 319-21. $ Atti Rend. R. Accad. Lincei Roma (1906) pp. 650-7. § Ohio Nat., vi. (1906) p. 443. || Trans. Entomol, Soc. London, 1906, pp. 87-90 (1 fig.). 440 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO the copulatory process lies in the mode of disposition of this siphon, which consists of two closely apposed grooved setze. Coitus appears to last for some time, and the female does not appear to mind the presence of the male, as she goes on feeding. Corixva in oviposition emits a minute drop of fluid, which fixes the egg to the plant. The egg is then laid with the micropyle furthest away from the point of attachment, and the female swims away. The general conclusion arrived at from observations on the behaviour of these insects is that there does not appear to be any sexual selection in the Hemiptera—Cryptocerata. Irish Collembola.*—G. H. Carpenter describes two new species of springtails of the family Entomobryide, viz. Zsotoma hibernica sp. n., and Entomobrya anomala sp. n. The latter is somewhat aberrant in structure, forming in many respects a connecting link between typical members of its genus and Orchesella. B. Prototracheata. Australian Onychophora.j—Arthur Dendy points out that the correct nomenclature of the Australian species of Onychophora is as follows :— 1. Peripatoides leuckarti Saenger (with 15 pairs of walking legs ; oviparous ; characteristic of N. 8. Wales, with a variety occidentalis Fletcher, in Western Australia). 2. Ooperipatus oviparus Dendy (with 15 pairs of walking legs; oviparous; characteristic of Victoria, but extending northwards to Queensland). 3. Ooperipatus insignis Dendy (with 14 pairs of walking legs; viviparous ; characteristic of Tasmania and Victoria). yy. Myriopoda. Structure of Platydesmide.{—F. G. Sinclair discusses some points in the anatomy of Platydesmus mexicanus, the extremely small head almost concealed beneath the tergal plate of the neck, a peculiar (visual) sense-organ on the head, the mouth-parts, the narrow intercalated dorsal plate on the segments, and the nervous system. The author calls atten- tion to the great diversity of form in the Myriopod brain. He regards the Platydesmide as an aberrant group allied to the Polydesmide. Studies on Scutigeride.§$—K. W. Verhoeff has made a study of the Scutigeride in the Berlin Zoological Museum, and discusses their morphology, taxonomy, and “hemi-anamorphosis.” ‘Two new genera, Podotherena and Tachytherena, related to Therenonema and Therenopoda, are established. 5. Arachnida. Bovine Ticks as Carriers of Disease.||—W. H. Dénitz discusses in particular the species of Rhpicephalus which are responsible for * Scientific Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc., xi. (1906) pp. 39-42 (1 pl.). + Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 175-7. t Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xlix. (1905) pp. 507-19 (1 pl.). § SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 9-60 (1 pl.). | Tom. cit., pp. 105-34 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY, AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 441 carrying the germs of Texas fever and African Coast fever in cattle. Twelve species are described, including R. kochi sp. n. The remarkable copulatory process, in which the proboscis of the male is inserted into the vulva, is discussed. The genus Boophilus of Curtice includes R. annulatus and R. decoloratus, which differ markedly, especially in their mode of life, from other species of Rhipicephalus. The author also describes Hamaphysalis neumanni sp. n., H. flava Neumann, Hyalomma egyptum L., Amblyomma eburneum Gerstiicker, and Ixodes ovatus Neumann. Structure of Ixodes reduvius.*—Erik Nordenskiéld describes the skin and its glands, the circulatory and respiratory systems of this tick. Revivification of Tardigrada.t—F. Richters reports on the revivi- fication of species of Macrobiotus, Milnesium, and Echiniscus from dry moss. In some cases re-awakening on re-moistening occurred in 15-60 minutes after 9-22 months. Genital Trachee in Chernetide and Acari.{—A. C. Oudemans describes in Cyta latirostris an indubitable tracheal system, which has its origin in the vestibulum of the genital apparatus, and probably has an exclusively respiratory function. The ram’s horn-like structures seen in connection with the genitalia in Chernetidz have probably a tracheal origin, though the author does not therefore conclude that they are wholly respiratory. €. Crustacea, Egg-Laying Habits of Cambarus affinis.$—EH. A. Andrews describes the egg-laying of this American crayfish. In general they resemble those of Astacus. There are four periods of activity—cleansing, glairing, extrusion, turning. “The activities of the female include a prolonged use of special tools to cleanse the surfaces later covered by the secretions of the ‘ cement-glands,’ a long continued maximum contraction of the abdomen, a habit of lying supine and externally inert during oviposition, and a long rhythmic alteration of poses associated with the fastening of the eggs to the abdominal appendages. After this follow the weeks of aeration and care of the eggs till they hatch.” In the fastening of the eggs the secretion of the “cement glands” seems of chief impor- tance, but local activities of the eggs may possibly play a part. Phototropism of Larval Lobsters.||—G. Bohn discusses the complex behaviour of larval lobsters in regard to light. (1) Hatched at night, they are in the morning drawn towards light. (2) But exposure to light changes this reaction, and in the course of the first day the larvee come and go from illumined to obscure objects in the aquarium. (3) After several days they group themselves opposite the largest obscure surfaces. All the movements of repulsion and attraction and rotation take place rapidly and precisely, as if irresistible. The orientation in relation to light comes about by complex rotatory movements, varying according * Zool. Anzeig, xxx. (1906) pp. 118-25 (8 figs.). t Tom. cit., pp. 125-7. t Tom. cit., pp. 135-40. § Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 343-56. || Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 963-5. Aug. 15th, 1906 24 442 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to external and internal conditions. It seems to the investigator that the eye functions, before the otocyst, as an equilibrating organ. Macrura of the ‘ Hassler’ and ‘ Blake.’ *—-H. L. Bouvier makes a preliminary report on some of the undescribed free-swimming Macrura of the American expeditions ‘ Hassler’ and ‘ Blake.’ Among the Peneidee the most interesting type is Neopencopsis paradoxus g. et sp. n., which has no exopodites on the last two pairs of limbs. Another instructive form is Archipencopsis vestitus g. et sp. n., related to Penwopsis and Hemipencopsis. A transition between Artemisia and Haliporus is repre- sented by Parartemisia g. n. Among the Stenopide there is a new species of Richardina (R. inermis), which differs from the other three species in being without an armature of spines. Meristic Variation in an Isopod.j—Seitaro Goto reports the occurrence of asupernumerary thoracic segment (eight instead of seven) in a species of Zigia. The occurrence of a supernumerary segment in a Malacostracan is very rare. Hepatic Tubes of Anilocra frontalis.[—A. Guieysse finds that in this Isopod the physiologically enigmatical “hepatic tubules” have eculiar cells in which the lobed nucleus enters into close connection with the cytoplasm. Commensalism of Two Isopods.§—Carmelita Rossi calls attention to the occurrence of Jara kroyeri M.-Edw. on the body of Spheroma serratum Fabr. The occurrence of a species of Jais (J. pubescens) on another Spheroma (S. gigas) has been previously recorded. The author thinks that parasitism is out of the question, and points out that the integument and limbs of Spheroma serratum bore a notable number of Vorticellids and other Infusorians, which form the favourite and ordinary food of Jera. Therefore the association is nearer com- mensalism (convivenza). Nervous System of Copepoda.||—C. O. Esterly communicates some facts regarding the peripheral and central nervous system in fresh-water Copepoda. Each esthetask-bearing joint of the anterior antenne of both male and female of Diaptomus contains a group of cells which stain with methylen-blue. It can be seen that peripheral processes arise from such cells, and unite into a single strand to enter the esthetask. The so-called tactile bristles on the antenne do not show such characters, but in the furcal bristles of a species of Cyclops, structures, probably nervous, have been found. The rostrum of Diaptomus is probably sensory in function. In several cases bipolar cells occur far back in the abdomen, whose central processes unite before entering the thorax and pass as a single fibre far forward towards the brain. Halocyprids of San Diego.{— Chancey Juday reports on the plankton Ostracods of San Diego belonging to the family Halocypride. * Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 746-9. ¢ Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1906) pp. 279-81 (1 fig.). + Bull. Soc. Philom. Paris, v. (1905) pp. 207-11. See also Zool. Zentralbl. xiii. (1906) p. 207. § Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 107-9. || Univ. California Publications, iii. No. 1 (1906) pp. 1-12 (2 pls.). q Op. cit., No. 2 (1906) pp. 13-38 (5 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 443 He gives a diagnosis of the family and a key to the genera (Archicon- checia Miiller, Conchecia Dana, and Halocypris Dana. Ten species are described, C. ritteri being new. Annulata. Sexual Reproduction in Mlosoma.*—Jas. A. Nelson describes the rare occurrence of sexual reproduction in this primitive Oligochet. Ina number of specimens ten were found with sex-elements ; four contained ova only, three contained male elements only, three contained both. The spermatogenesis is discussed, and one point is especially noteworthy —the appearance of a large nucleolus in the spermatocytes of both orders and in the spermatids. This indicates the very unusual occurrence of a long resting stage between the two maturation-divisions, and also a long pause before the metamorphosis of the spermatid into the spermatozoon. It is not known what conditions determine the occurrence of sexual reproduction. Ethology of Tubifex and Lumbriculus.t—F. von Wagner com- municates some ethological notes on these Oligochets. Thus 7udifez, much more than Lumbriculus, is an inhabitant of mud. Autotomy is much less important in Z'wdifex than in other related forms ; its wide- spread abundance makes this capacity less necessary. The astonishing energy of Z'ubifex, which may continue in active movement for four hours without interruption, is commented on. The author discusses the highly developed autotomy of Lumbriculus, the tube-making of Tubifer, and the frequent association of the two forms. The excellent illustra- tions of Z'wbifex in its natural surroundings deserve special notice. West Indian Polychets.t—H. Augener reports on a collection of about eighty Polycheets collected by the ‘ Blake.’ About a third of the Species were previously described by Ehlers in his “ Florida Annelids ” (1887). The majority of the species are West'Indian and mid-Atlantic forms; four are known from the Mediterranean ; about a dozen are known from mid-Europe and North Europe, and also for the most part from North American coasts; five are known also from the West African region. Twenty-one families are represented. Artificial Parthenogenesis in Thalassema.§—George Lefevre finds that the ova of Zhalassema mellita Coun, exposed for a short time to dilute solutions of acids, may undergo normal development, although the rhythm of division is more or less disturbed, and may give rise to normal larve. The reduced number of chromosomes, after normal maturation-mitoses, persists, and was repeatedly verified in late blastula- and gastrula-stages. In some cases, however, only one polar body was extruded ; in some cases neither was formed. Upon sectioning these eggs, it was found that either one or both maturation-mitoses had taken place well below the surface, without accompanying cytoplasmic division. Many abnormal * Ohio Nat., vi. (1906) pp. 435-8 (5 figs.). + Zool. Jahrb., xxiii. (1906) pp. 295-318 (1 pl.). { Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xliii, (1906) pp. 91-196 (8 pls.). § Science, xxiii. (1906) pp. 522-4. 24 2 444 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cleavages and nuclear divisions without cytoplasmic divisions were ‘ observed, and ciliated bodies unlike normal embryos were often formed. Nematohelminthes. Rachis in Ovaries and Testes of Nematodes.* — Alfred Mayer extends the recent observations of Marcus, and finds that there are numerous nuclei in the rachis of the gonads of both sexes in Ascaris megalocephala and A. lumbricoides. He compares the rachis with the nucleated cytophore in the spermatogenesis of various invertebrates, such as Clitellio. Anguillula intestinalis.| — Stursberg discusses the case of a German field labourer whose feces showed the Rhabditis embryos of this Nematode. He had repeatedly drunk water from the cooling- canals of a manufactory in which foreigners were at work. ‘Ascaris halicoris.t—Von Linstow describes Ascaris halicoris Baird from the pylorus of the dugong. Cetacean Echinorhynchi.§—A. Porta gives a full account of the structure of Echinorhynchus capitatus von Linstow, from Pseudarca crassidens Gray and Globicephalus svineval Flower. Four other species from Cetaceans—Z. porrigens Rud., #. pellucidus Leuck., H. turbinella Dies., and #. brevicollis Malm.—are compared with #. capitatus, and the author proposes to include the five in a new genus, Bulborhynchus. Embryology of Strongylus filaria.||—C. Struckmann gives an account of the oogenesis, spermatogenesis and fertilisation in this Nematode. In both oogonia and spermatogonia there are twelve chromo- somes which form tetrads, equivalent to bivalent chromosomes. There are two large, two medium, and two small tetrads. The phases of ovum and sperm maturation agree in the behaviour of the chromatin as regards reduction. The tetrad forms of the first reduction spindle are characteristic and are comparable to the chromatic elements of Ascaris. In fertilisation the sperm does not after entering the egg penetrate far, but remains near the periphery, and here the male pro- nucleus is developed. The pronuclei arise mostly at opposite poles, and only approach the centre of the egg for the formation of the first segmentation spindle. Platyhelminthes. Sexual Organs and Development of a Tapeworm.{—T. B. Rosseter gives some details regarding the generative organs in Drepanidotenia undulata (Krabbe). This tapeworm, which occurs in a number of avian hosts, in the present instance was found in 7’urdus musicus. The develop- ment of the 6-hooked embryo was followed within the uterus, where it * Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 289-97 (6 figs.). t+ SB. Niederrhein. Ges. Nat. Bonn, 1905, Section B, pp. 28-9. { Journ. and Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, i. No. 10 (1905) pp. 258-60 (1 pl.). § Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 235-71 (63 figs.). || Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Anat., xxii. (1905) pp. 577-628 (3 pls. and 18 figs.), q Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1906, pp. 269-74 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 445, finally “ evolves itself into a medusiform body or 6-hooked brood. These six hooks, placed at equal distances, support the velum from the interior of the invaginated gastrula cavity.” The author thinks his observations give support to the view that Cestodes have “ possibly never advanced beyond a gastrula stage in their development.” New Species of Tapeworm.*—T. B. Rosseter describes Drepanido- tenia sagitta sp. n., from Anas boschas. The scolex is pyriform and perforated at its base by a circular orifice. This is a naturally formed inverted cavity from whose sides spring the muscles which elevate and retract the rostellum. This organ is long, flexible, attenuated, and armed with sickle-shaped hooks. There are four oval suckers so placed around the scolex as to give the head an arrow-like appearance. The most dis- tinctive internal feature appears to be the “ spatuliform monotestis.” Some New and Little Known Trematodes.t—W. Nicoll comments on the neglect of the study of Trematodes in Britain, and offers some contributions. He describes Eehinostomum secundum sp. n. from the intestine of Larus ridibundus and L. argentatus ; Zeugorchis acanthus g. et sp. n., from the bursa fabricii and cloaca of Z. argentatus, which differs widely from Echinostomum ; Levinsenia similis (Spelotrema simile) Jagerskold ; and Psilostomum redactum sp. u., from the intestine of Gasterosteus aculeatus. j Life History of a Trematode of the Oyster.{—D. H. Tennant has elucidated some points in the early development of Bucephalus haimeanus, a parasite of the oyster. Experimental evidence has shown that B. haimeanus is a larval stage of Gasterostomum gracilescens. Germ- cells arise within the sporocyst wall of the latter, give off small cells which may be regarded as polar bodies, segment and develop into the cercaria of B. haimeanus. It is further shown in other cases that supposedly different species are physiological varieties of the same species. The presence of sporocysts and cercaria of G. gracilescens in the oyster prevents the formation of reproductive elements, and also renders the host incapable of withstanding adverse conditions. 5B. haimeanus thrives best in oysters living in brackish water. Its growth is inhibited by increased salinity. Incertz Sedis, _ Life-History of Orthonectids.s—F. Mesnil and M. Caullery have studied Rhopalura pelseneert and compared its life-history with that of Dicyemids. There is a phase of asexual multiplication in the host, in the form of plasmodia, whence sexual individuals arise at the expense of “cell germs.” Then there is a phase of propagation, from one host to another, secured by the sexual individuals which are ciliated and pro- duce ova. These develop, doubtless after fertilisation, in the interior of the body of the mother, into ciliated larve, known only in R. ophiocome Geard and R. pelseneert C. and M., but doubtless of * Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1906, pp. 275-8 (1 pl.). t+ Ann. Nat. Hist., xvii. (1906) pp. 513-27 (2 pls.). ¢ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 196 (1906) pp. 635-90 (4 pls.). § Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 774-6. 446 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO general occurrence. These larve are evidently the agents of infection of new hosts, where they give rise to plasmodia. It is suggested that the vermiform individuals (agamontes) in Dicyemids correspond to the plasmodia in Orthonectids, and the infusoriform individuals (herma- phrodites ?) correspond to the sexual individuals of Orthonectids. Rotifera. Retro-Cerebral Organ in certain Rotifers.*—P. Marais de Beau- champ describes a structure lying dorsal to the “ brain” in representa- tives of Euchlanine, Rattuline, Colurine, Gastropodine, and Notom- matine. It is a glandular organ, bifurcated in front at least, with two apical apertures, and forms a secretion which stains during life with neutral-red. In Notommata and related forms it is intimately connected with the brain and eye, and probably has a secondary sensory func- tion. Its secretion has the form of bacteroid granules. In Copeus and Eosphora there are two auxiliary cells, which seem to be derived from the brain. New Rotifers.t—James Murray figures and describes Callidina vesicularis, a new Bdelloid Rotifer from moss, characterised in par- ticular by the possession of § teeth in the jaws, six pairs of very large and prominent vibratile tags, and two blunt processes in first foot-joint, and small spurs, separated by wide interspace. James Murray { further describes, in a“ List of Rotifera of the Forth Area,” Stephanops microdactylus, a minute new species having a single long style on the dorso-posterior part of the body, and a long narrow foot ending in two very minute toes. Raffaele Issel§ describes Notommata najas var. termalis, a new variety which the author found living in various hot springs in Italy in company with the very rare Huchlanis plicata Levander, at temperatures ranging from 45°-87° C. No other species of Rotifers were found in these thermal waters. Echinoderma. Antarctic Echinoderms.||—R. Koehler makes a preliminary report on the forms collected by Charcot. They are very different from those of the ‘Belgica’ or ‘Southern Cross’ collections. The Asteroids are peculiarly interesting, e.g. Répaster charcoti g. et sp. n., an Archiasterid characterised by the delicacy of the marginal plates, and Cryaster antarc- ticus g. et sp. n., remarkable in the complete absence of a dorsal skeleton —which requires a new family, Cryasteridee. The author notes the absence of any similarity with Arctic Echinoderm fauna. Holothurian Spicules.—W. Woodland gives an account of the development of the spicules of Cucwmaria, of the mode of deposition of * Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905), pp. 961-2. t Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ix. (1906) pp. 259-62 (1 pl.). ¢ Ann. Scot Nat. Hist., 1906, pp. 89-93 (5 figs.). § Atti Soc. Ligustica Sci. Nat. e Geogr., xvii. (1906) pp. 1-72 (1 pl.). || Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 113-15. { Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 196 (1906) pp. 533-59 (8 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 447 the spicules in 7hyone fusus, and a note upon a stage in the scleroblastic development of the plate-and-anchor spicules of Synapta inherens. Ceelentera. Rheotropism in Hydroids and Bugula.*—P. Hallez has subjected various hydroids for 4-75 days to variable currents of water, with controls in vessels not agitated. He has experimented with species of Obelia, Sertularella, Hydrallmania, Antennularia, etc. The results are not affected by the rates of the current. One of the chief results is an abundant production of hydrorhize, which, by budding rapidly, form new colonies. In Bugula, too, an exaggerated production of roots is induced. Fresh-water Medusa in River Niger.;—E. T. Browne records the occurrence in the river Niger of Limnocnida tanganice, a fact of some interest in view of the distance of this river from the Great African Lakes. He thinks that with a sea stretching across the Soudan in the Eocene period one can account for the presence of Limnocnida in both these regions. This solution of the problem removes the need to speculate about the Medusz ascending the Niger from the Atlantic and migrating across Africa. Limnocodium at Munich.t—E. Boecker reports the occurrence of the fresh-water Medusoid Limnocodium in the Victoria Regia tank in the Botanic Gardens at Miinchen. The specimens seemed to be exclusively males. The hollow tentacles did not seem to have their bases imbedded in the jelly, as Giinther stated. Infusoria, algze, amoebae, etc., were observed in the stomach. Free-living Variety of Adamsia rondeletii.s—José Rioja y Martin describes some colour varieties of this common sea-anemone, and notes also that it often occurs altogether apart from mollusc-shells and the hermit-crab, namely, on Zostera marina. Linares has named this free-living variety, libera. Californian Shore Anemone.|—H. B. Torrey described Bunodactis xanthogrammica, which has a wide range along the entire Pacific coast of North America, and shows considerable variability. It has been described under at least four different specific and five generic names, but the author clears up the synonymy. The characteristic green colour of the species is found only in individuals exposed to the sun ; it is due to a unicellular alga in the endoderm of the column wall, mesenteries and tentacles. Under wharves or in caves the alge, though present, do not develop so luxuriantly, and the polyps are correspondingly pale. The material for the illustrative plate was destroyed in the recent fire in San Francisco, but the plate will be forthcoming later on. * Comptes Rendus, cxli. (1905) pp. 840-3. + Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xcix. (1906) pp. 304-6. t Biol. Centralb., xxv. (1905) pp. 605-6. § Boll. R. Soc. Espaii. Hist. Nat., v. (1905) pp. 457-9 (1 pl.). | Univ. California Publications, iii. No. 3 (1906) pp. 41-5 (1 pl.). 448 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Role of Mucus in Corals.*—J. E. Duerden finds that the outer surface of coral polyps is covered with a thin mucus layer, which entangles objects falling on it. When first extruded it is thin and watery, becoming firmer later. From time to time it gets broken up into shreds, which are wafted off the disk by the exhalant currents from the stomodeum, carrying with it adherent foreign particles. Nutritive substances and extractives placed upon the polyp increase the amount of mucus, and also result in an opening of the mouth and the institution of an inhalant stomodzal current by reversing the dominant outward beat. of the stomodzeal cilia. At the same time, the mucus is drawn down along with its entangled nutritive or non-nutritive particles into the stomodeum. Ingestion in coral polyps is thus purely mechanical, de- pending upon whatever substances are capable of producing an inward beat of the cilia, the opening of the mouth, and the exudation of mucus. An inhalant current being established, objects are carried into the polypal cavity without regard to their nutritive value, and independently of any peristaltic motions on the part of the stomodzum. ‘Japanese Alcyonarians.t—W. Kiikenthal gives diagnoses of a number of new Japanese species :—Anthelia japonica, Clavularia (three sp.), Vidalia (five sp.), Aleyonium gracillimum, Dendronephthya (six sp.), Gersemia marenzelleri, Eunephthya japonica, E. spiculosa, Siphonogorgia dofteini, and S. splendens. New Species of Semper’s Larva from the Galapagos Islands.[— Harold Heath describes under the title Zoanthella galapagonensis a new species of Semper’s larva, but is unable to offer any suggestion as to its relationships. Porifera. _ Bengal Variety of Spongilla lacustris from Brackish Water.§— Nelson Annandale describes Spongilla lacustris var. bengalensis n. from brackish water at Port Canning in Lower Bengal. There is a total absence of branches. The spicules most nearly resembled those of Pott’s variety montana. The gemmules were very distinctly of two sizes, scattered indiscriminately, not grouped, and without large air-cells. The green colour was due to a multicellular alga. Enormous numbers of gemmules formed a scum on the surface of the pools, and some seemed to have been carried to a distance by the wind. Protozoa. Atlanticellide.|—A. Borgert establishes a new family of Radio- larians (Tripylea) which he calls Atlanticellide. The diagnosis reads :-— “'Tripylea, with a free vesicular central capsule not inclosed in skeleton ; the skeleton is absent, or forms an oval appendage of the central capsule ; * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 196 (pp. 591-614). + Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 280-9. { Tom. cit., pp. 171-5 (4 figs.). § Journ. and Proc. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, ii. (1906) pp. 55-8 (1 fig.). || Ergebn. Plankton Exped., iii. (1906) pp. 117-28. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 449 in the latter case there is in the main axis a hollow, clapper-like, median portion composed of hollow, but peculiarly chambered spines ;_ the spines. are disposed singly or in pairs in cruciate arrangement around the main axis.” There is only one main opening in the central capsule ; parapylea are absent. It is the presence of a pheodium-like pigment-mass that: points to affinity with the Tripylea. The family is represented by the genus Atlanticella, with three species. There seem to be near affinities with the Medusettide. The habitat of the Atlanticellidz is especially in the deeper regions of the Atlantic ; they appear to be absent in the cold northern regions. Xenophyophore.*—F. E. Schulze discusses a peculiar group of Rhizopods from abyssal regions, e.g. Psammetta erythrocytomorpha,. Psammina globigerina, Stannoma dendroides. They are not sponges, as has been suggested, but represent a group of Protozoa within the Rhizopod class, and near Foraminifera. The term Xenophyophore. refers to the characteristic utilisation of extrinsic foreign bodies such as. the spicules of Tetraxonid sponges. Dimorphism of English Nummulites.t—J. J. Lister finds, from an examination of the Nummulites of the Eocene beds of the Isle of Wight and Hampshire, proof of the existence of alternating members of “a pair” of forms in the life-history of a species. The two modes of reproduction come into marked contrast, the asexually produced megalo- spheres being approximately proportional in size to the protoplasmic volume of the parent while the microsphere probably arising as a zygote is uniformly small throughout. In several of the species examined, as. the microspheric member of the cycle preponderates in the life-history, the megalospheric member decreases, not only in proportion to the size of the microspheric form, but in proportion to the megalospheric members of other species in which the two forms attain approximately equal sizes. Barium Sulphate in a Rhizopod.{—F. HE. Schulze and Hans Thier- felder note that in a peculiar abyssal Rhizopod, Xenophyophora, the cytoplasm includes minute refractive granules which consist of barium sulphate with traces of calcium sulphate. The only other known case of barium in organisms is in some marine plants (“‘ Forchhammer ’’). Life-History of Hypotrichous Infusoria.§—L. L. Woodruff has investigated this in Oxytricha, Pleurotricha, and Gastrostyla. In one culture as many as 860 generations were attained. All the cultures gave incontestable proof that the forms studied pass through cyclical periods of greater and less general vitality as measured by the rate of division. The periods of depression lead to death if the culture is subjected con- tinuously to the same environment. Minor fluctuations, termed rhythms, occur in the division rate ; they are periodic rises and falls due to some * Wiss. Ergebn. Deutsch. Tilfsee Exped. Valdivia, xi. (1905) pp. 1-55 (8 pls.) See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 238-42. + Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvi. (1905) pp. 298-319 (3 pls.). t~ SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 2-4. § Journ. Exper. Zool., ii. (1905) pp 585-632 (3 pls.). 450 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO unknown factor in cell-metabolism, from which recovery is autonomous. A cycle extends over a varying number of rhythms, and ends in extinc- tion of the race unless it is “ rejuvenated” by conjugation or changed environment. Seasonal and temperature changes have no apparent in- fluence on the cyclical fluctuations of vitality. Variation in temperature, however, undoubtedly affects somewhat the daily rate of division, if not directly at least through the food supply. The physiological and struc- tural changes which appear at periods of low vitality are described. It is also noted that under varying conditions structural modifications occur which are in no way abnormal, and that those observed most frequently in “wild” Infusoria are not so constant as is usually supposed. Leptophrys.*—W. A. Kepner describes a form which, except for the absence of nuclei and the variable size of the vacuoles, corresponded with Leptophrys elegans, described by Hertwig and Lesser. It is suggested that these investigators mistook ingested monads for nuclei. Locomotion is effected by more or less active amceboid movements. “ An active large individual tosses itself about very much as a cloud of smoke is distorted by a current of air.” After the animal gorges itself with diatoms, desmids, and monads, it encysts. Division into two was observed, but no trace of a nucleus was seen. As Penard suggested, it seems likely that Leptophrys is but asynonym for a species of Vampyrelia. Studies on Peridinee.t—Géza Entz, junior, gives an account of the Peridineze captured in the plankton of Quarnero and Quarerola, enumerating fifty-nine forms, and discussing the variations of species of Ceratium. He gives a detailed account of the plates of Phalacroma jourdant and Ceratocorys horrida,and shows the homologies of the plates in Phaleeromez and Ceratiz. The process of division in these families is also discussed. Identity of Surra and Mbori.t—A. Laveran has shown that the Trypanosomiasis which Cazalbon called Mborz, and which chiefly attacks dromedaries in French Soudan, is due to the same parasite as Surra (Trypanosoma evansi). Structurally, the two Trypanosomes are the same, and animals immune to Surra are immune to Mbori, and vice versa. The Trypanosome of Mbori is, however, slightly less virulent than that of Surra. Parasite of Acute Exanthema.§—J Siegel has found in the whole group of so-called acute exanthematous diseases a flagellate parasite, with naked body, at least two distinct nuclei, and 1-3 flagella. The multiplication occurs by repeated division of the nucleus (sporulation), and also by longitudinal division. In Vaccinia the parasites not only occur in the affected parts of the skin, but swarmin the blood. Guarnieri has given the name Cytorrhyctes to these organisms. * Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 335-42 (8 figs.). + Math. Nat. Ber. Ungarn., xx. (1905) pp. 96-144 (66 figs.). t Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 1204-7. § SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 195-7 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 451 Life-History of Trypanosoma balbianii.*—W. 8. Perrin gives an account of the life-cycle of this parasite of the oyster. With the ex- ception of the growth of fresh individuals from the cysts, the whole developmental cycle takes place in the gut of a single host. In the crystalline style the Trypanosomes undergo longitudinal division as the normal method of multiplication. When the style disappears, gametes are formed and conjugation follows. Intra-epithelial stages in the gut do not appear to occur. Transmission of the parasite appears to take place by cysts alone. Development of Hepatomonas of Kala-azar.j—L. Rogers has suc- ceeded in developing the Leishmann-Donovan body in acidified blood with much more uniform results than in his earlier experiments, where citrated blood was used. He has absolutely failed to find any indica- tions of an undulating membrane or of the migration of the micro- nucleus such as Novy and MacNeil witnessed in the development of bird trypanosomes. The conclusion is arrived at, that the organism is not a trypanosome, but belongs to the order Hepatomonas. A relatively low temperature (22° C.) is essential to development, which would in- dicate that infection is only likely to take place in India during the colder part of the year. Sporozoon from Mucous Membrane of Human Septum nasi.{— EK. A. Minchin and H. B. Fantham describe Rhinosporidium kinealyi g.et sp.n., from a tumour in the nose of a native patient at the Medical College Hospital, Calcutta. The new parasite is an annectant form, which shows marked affinities with the typical Neosporidia and also with the simpler Haplosporidia. Ameeboid trophozoite stages in the sub- mucous connective tissue increase in size, form cyst-walls, and give rise to uninucleate pansporoblasts, each of which develops Ja spore-morula. In many cases the cysts burst and scatter the spore-morule in the sur- rounding tissue. ‘This probably represents the usual method of en- dogenous reproduction: The order Neosporidia should be extended to include Rhinosporidium and the Haplosporidia, and may then be subdivided into (1) Cnidos- poridia (Doflein), with pole-capsules in the spore (Myxosporidia sens. strict., Microsporidia, and (?) Sarcosporidia) ; and (2) Haplosporidia, without pole-capsules in the spore, including Rhinosporidium and other forms previously referred to this section. Observations on Gregarines.§—H. M. Woodcock gives an account of investigations on Diplodina (Cystobia) irregularis Minch., parasitic in Holothuria forskali, on D.(C.) minchinii Woodcock, from Cucumaria pentactes and C. planci, and on the trophozoites of Diplocystis schneideri from a new host, Periplaneta orientalis. A fairly complete account of the life-history of D. irregularis is given. This species and D. minchinit are quite motionless forms. Hach adult is really a “couple,” Diplodina being a neogamous Gregarine, or one in which precocious association * Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxxvi. (1905) pp. 368-75. + Op. cit., xxvii. (1906) pp. 284-93 (1 pl.). t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xlix. (1905) pp. 521-32 (2 pls.). § Op. cit., No. 197 (1906) pp. 1-100 (6 pls.). 452 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO occurs. The phenomenon of association in general is discussed, the conclusion arrived at being that it is not a primitive but an acquired condition. The power of cytotactic attraction has become so developed and specialised in Gregarines, that it is now most probably necessary before sporulation can take place. Castration due to Gregarines.*—G. Smith gives some notes on the life-history of Aggregata inachi sp. n. No trace of conjugation prior to encystment, nor of two nuclei together in one cyst, was found. Amongst the sporozoites found free in the body of the crab a tendency to form associations was noted. The presence of the parasite in the male Jnachus is associated with the occurrence of external hermaphrodite characters and with the disintegration of the testis, only the vesiculz: seminales remaining. The assumption of the hermaphrodite characters would appear to take place at the moult following the liberation of the sporozoites into the body cavity. Structure and Life-History of Pleistophora periplanete.;—W. S Perrin gives some particulars regarding this Myxosporidian parasite of Periplaneta orientalis. There are two very definite phases in the life- history : a schizogonous phase, characterised by almost excessive multi- plication, with a view to auto-infection; and a sporogonous phase, characterised by the cessation of growth and trophic activity, and the formation of resting spores. This by no means agrees with Schaudinn’s division of the Sporozoa, where the Myxosporidia are placed in the Neosporidia, in which spore-formation continues during the trophic phase. Another point of interest in the life-history of Pleistophora periplanete is afforded by the existence of residuary nuclei, which, together with the protoplasm of the pansporoblast, die off, while sporulation is being effected. The author regards it as possible that these residuary nuclei represent reduction bodies. Spirochete pallida and Syphilis.{—C. Thiesing adduces various considerations which lead him to doubt whether this form is etiologi- cally connected with syphilis, and whether it is a protozoon. He regards it as a harmless saphrophyte, and as a plant, not an animal. * Mitth. Zool. Station Neapel, xvii. (1905) pp. 406-10 (1 pl. t+ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 196 (1906) pp. 615-33 (2 pls. t SB. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1905, pp. 205-17 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 453 BOTANY. GENERAL, Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants. Structure and Development. Vegetative. Winged Stele in some Leguminose.*—Ph. van Tieghem has in- vestigated the stele of certain Leguminose, and finds among the sub- tribe Spartieze the normal type and three modifications, viz. (1) stele winged by the pericycle; (2) stele without wings, but accompanied by meristeles derived exclusively from the pericycle; (8) winged stele accompanied by meristeles derived exclusively from the cortex. Hach of these modifications is found in several genera, e.g. the first in Hrinacea and the Furze, the second in Sarothamnus and Spartium, which are thus shown to be nearly related to one another. On the contrary, certain genera share their species among these modifications and the normal type ; the species of these genera are therefore more remote from one another than would be expected for members of the same genus. The author suggests that where the flower and fruit show little agreement, e.g. in the Brooms and Trefoils, there should be a thorough investigation of the vegetative structure, especially of the stem ; species with different structure should be placed in different genera; and also, perhaps, where flower and fruit permit, those with the same structure should be united in the same genus. Reproductive. ds Pollen-Grain of Picea excelsa.j—J. B. Pollock finds that in the pollen-grain of Picea excelsa the prothallial cells vary in number from one to three ; the former obtains in the majority of cases, while the latter is rare. The position varies, but is usually in a continuous row with the stalk cell and central cell. Since the membranes of prothallial cells sometimes persist after the disappearance of the protoplasm, they are ‘then probably of cellulose. In double pollen-grains, the 3-4 cells lying along the dorsal side are not to be regarded as a prothallium of unusual size, but as the smaller portion of a pollen-grain divided into two unequal portions, each of which is a potential antheridium. The cells of the larger portion are similar to those in a typical pollen- grain; the smaller portion varies more, but has a distinct resemblance to the typical antheridium. The author concludes that variation in the pollen of Gymnosperms and of Angiosperms indicates reduction by gradual modification, due to disuse of vanishing structures. Suppression of the male gametophyte in * Journ. de Bot., xix. (1905) pp. 185-97. + Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 253-81 (1 pl.). 454 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Gymmnosperms is advantageous where photosynthesis is impossible. The division of the second male nucleus in the egg of some Gymnosperms, and its fusion with the segmentation nucleus in Abies balsamea, favours the view that the endosperm of Angiosperms is a modified gametophyte. Extremes in variation in the male gametophyte are found, on the one hand, in Araucaria with 20-44 cells, and, on the other, in Cryptomeria japonica, which not only has no vegetative prothallium, but the wall between the tube nucleus and the primary spermatogenous nucleus is transitory. Development of the Pollen-Grain and Anther in Onagracee.*— R. Beer finds that in the pollen-grains of some Onagracez the young cell-membranes contain cellulose and pectose, but the sporogenous cell- membranes gradually come to be formed only of pectose. The pollen- mother-cell wall is of pure callose. The first two divisions of the pollen-mother-cell have seven chromosomes, afterwards there are four- teen. The first membrane formed directly by the protoplast is of pectose, deposited upon but distinct from the callose wall. Within this membrane a secondary thickening of pectose is formed. The inter- stitial bodies are special, thin areas on the first pollen-membrane, which are afterwards covered with mucilage ; later on, the latter may give rise to a dense, closing disk, as in: Hnothera, or to lamine, as in Gaura. Both the first pollen-wall and the secondary thickening layer are attached to the protoplast when first developed, but the greater part of subsequent growth of both membranes takes place by intussusception, after they are completely separated from the protoplast. The material required for their growth is derived from the protoplast, which when nearly exhausted is replenished by the disintegrated nuclear material of the tapetum. If this material is insufficient, further development ceases. The pollen nucleus remains in connection with the interstitial bodies by means of cytoplasmic threads, and just here the intine starts growth. In Gaura Lindheimeri and Epilobium tetragonum the intine contains both pectose and cellulose, but in Ginothera cellulose is almost or entirely absent. ‘The interstitial disk and laminz are eaten away, suggesting the action of an enzyme. The mature pollen-grains are held together by fibrils derived from the mother-cell wall. Physiology. Nutrition and Growth. Ascent of Sap.t—A. Ursprung has experimented with beech stems, and draws the following conclusions as to the part played by the living cells in the ascent of sap. All experiments upon stems, pedicles, etc., tend to show that living cells assist in the production of force for raising the sap, and that the co-operation of the living cells of the wood is necessary for a long time. In older beech twigs, the living cortical cells have no influence on the sap ascent, and even in the youngest parts their influence cannot be important. For the necessary transmission through the length of one decimetre, only a very small * Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xix. Abt. 1 (1906) pp. 286-313 (3 pls.), + Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlii. (1906) pp. 503-44. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 455 fraction of the conducting tissue is needed if the wood-cells of the portion in question are living ; while the whole of the conducting tissue does not transmit sufficient water if these cells have been destroyed. Function of Silica in the Nutrition of Cereals.*—A. D. Hall and C. G. T. Morison, as the result of investigations on barley, conclude that silica, although not an essential constituent of plant food, plays a part in the nutrition of cereals, such as barley, which contain normally a considerable proportion of silica in their ash. The effect of a free supply of soluble silica is manifest in an increased and earlier forma- tion of grain, and is thus similar to the effect of phosphoric acid. The silica acts by causing an increased intake of phosphoric acid, to which the observed effects are directly due. There is no evidence that the silica within the plant causes a more thorough utilisation of the phosphoric acid that has already been assimilated, or itself promotes the migration of food-materials from the straw to the grain. Physiology of Germination of Pollen.t—L. Jost finds that ger- minating pollen-grains may be placed in three classes. (1) Those re- quiring nothing but water for germination, much mineral matter being injurious. To this group belong Grasses, which can only germinate in minute quantities of pure water. (2) Those requiring a very dilute solution of a definite chemical substance, which is contained in the stigma. In a few cases this substance is levulose, in others organic acids, but in most cases it is unknown. (3) Those which germinate only in a sugar solution of definite concentration. In this case it is still unknown whether the sugar is nutritive, or whether it prevents excessive absorption of water owing to its osmotic properties. It may act like levulose, or it may neutralise the poisonous effects of certain mineral substances, or it may exercise both these functions. Similar results may be expected in connection with the germination of fungus spores. Effect of Calcium Salts on Sphagna.{—H. Paul gives a preliminary account of his observations on the effect of lime-salts upon Sphagna. He reviews the work of previous authors, notably that of C. A. Weber, from whom he differs entirely. Weber holds that calcium salts are not inimical to the nutrition of Sphagna, but that he has found them to flourish, and one species to fruit, even when irrigated with water rich in calcium carbonate. Paul, on the other hand, finds Sphagna very sensitive to solutions of calcium carbonate, though the species vary in this respect. Calcium sulphate they can tolerate in fairly large quantities. Details of Paul’s experiments are promised in a further paper. Fungi in Relation to Atmospheric Nitrogen.§—Berthold Heinze has conducted a series of experiments with various fungi on artificial culture media to test their power of assimilating nitrogen from the air, and so aiding in the enrichment of the soil. He comes to the conclusion * Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvii. (1906) pp. 455-77. t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiii. (1906) pp. 504-15. t Op. cit., xxiv. (1906) pp. 148-54. § Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 41-63. 456 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO that though they do not directly collect nitrogen, yet, indirectly, they are of immense importance, as they furnish carbon material in the form of mannite, glycogen, etc., to the nitro-bacteria. The fungi experimented with were Phoma Bete, Aspergillus niger, Penicillium glaucum, and Mucor stolonifer. Irritability. Effect of Light on Green Plants in absence of Carbon-dioxide.*— Jules Lefevre has experimented with Lepidiwm sativum grown in arti- ficial soil containing amido-compounds, and watered with water free from CO,. One set of plants was placed under a bell-jar, in presence of baryta, and in full sunlight, while a second set was under similar conditions, but in darkness. The dry weight of the first set was greatly increased compared with the previous dry weight when grown in air under similar conditions ; the second set died in a week, and its weight was slightly less. The author concludes that the synthesis performed by green plants in absence of CO,, and in an amido-soil, becomes impossible in the absence of light ; also, this synthesis is essentially a chlorophyll function. Modifications of Tropical Plants in changed Surroundings.j— D. Bois and J. Gallaud have investigated the reason for deterioration in the commercial products of such plants as Cinnamomum Camphora, Ficus elastica, etc., When removed from their native habitat to surroundings which appear to be favourable to their cultivation. Their experiments were carried out upon various species of Huphorbia, and they conclude that there is no ground for attributing the change to accidental, in- dividual variations. They find that in both the secretory and support- ing tissues (which are the chief sources of the commercial products), marked and rapid changes occur, directly resulting from differences in external conditions, such as heat, humidity, etc. More attention must be paid to these points, if better success is to attend the acclimatising of such plants. Action of Sulphur-dioxide on Plants.t}—A. Wieler finds that different plants and organs are unequally sensitive to sulphur-dioxide, but that all plants within 8 kilometres from the source of pollution have the dioxide in their leaves. It enters through the stomata, and exerts an adverse influence on photosynthesis, owing to its direct action on the chloroplasts. Transpiration is unaffected. Injured plants decrease in height, and have premature autumnal coloration and leaf-fall. The author considers that the dioxide unites with metabolites, especially aldehydes, with liberation of sulphuric acid, and to the latter the injury is due. Indirectly the dioxide affects the soil by removal of its basic constituents, thus causing an accumulation of humic acids. Plants ex- posed to the action of a high percentage of the dioxide for a short time are acutely affected and past remedy. Those under the action of a low percentage for a long time exhibit the same characters as when * Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) pp. 1035-6. + Tom. cit., pp. 1033-35. } Berlin: Borntraeger, 1905, vii. and 427 pp. See also Nature, lxxiii. (1906) pp. 385-6. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 457 suffering from defective nutrition ; application of manures, especially basic ones, is recommended as a remedy. Chemotropism of Fungi.*—Harry R. Fulton gives a preliminary sketch of the views held and the results obtained by previous workers in this field of research. He carried out his own experiments with some fourteen fungi, parasitic and saprophytic. He employed capillary tubes filled with certain chemical substances, to test the influence of the substances on germinating spores. He also used the mica-plate method, piercing the plate with holes, and coating the under-surface with gelatin mixed with the test solution. From all these experiments he concluded that positive chemotropism scarcely exists. All of the fungi tested showed a tendency to turn away from a medium in which hyphe had grown previously. Various fungi showed positive hydrotropism, while, in some cases, an overabundance of moisture caused a negative reaction. Fulton considers that the drying up of the moisture in which spores have germinated on the leaf, may be the factor that impels growth towards the stomata. M. Racibowskif has grown Aspergillus niger in solutions containing various chemicals, but chemomorphism, he found, was induced only by thiosulphate, chloroform, and iodine. In thiosulphate solution the fungi is not poisoned, but no spores are produced. The conidiophore is formed, but sulphur drops congregate in the end of the hyphe and hinder further growth. The plants grown in chloroform fructified to four generations. The growth of the hyphe was, however, considerably affected ; swollen cells were found full of protoplasm, the ends of the hyphe were slender, and bore repeatedly forking branches. Spores were numerous, and the sterigmata of old conidiophores became globose at the ends. In weak solutions of iodine, growth was not materially altered ; in a stronger mixture, no spores were formed, and abnormal growths of the filaments took place. Very large cells were found filled with pro- toplasm, and the membrane gradually thickened. Iodine reacted similarly on the growth of Zhamnidium elegans. Chemical Changes. Behaviour of Plants towards Aluminium.{—W. Rothert finds that plants take up aluminium in varying quantities if in suitable form, such as soluble salts and certain insoluble ones such as phosphate. The whole or greater part is retained in the roots. The small amount of suitable salts present in soil accounts for the presence of so little aluminium in plants. Soluble salts act injuriously except in very dilute solutions, also in specifically large quantities, yet plants often take up surprisingly large quantities of soluble salts, if the anion has no injurious effects (e.g. chloride). In some cases small quantities of aluminium salts exert a stimulating effect on plant development. Aluminium can only be taken out of solution into tissues up to a fixed limit of concentration, which is independent of the concentration * Bot. Gazette, xli. (1906) pp. 81-108. + Bull. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, No.10 (1905) pp. 764-78. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 499-501. t Bot. Zeit., lxiv. (1906) pp. 43-52. Auy. 15th, 1906 2H - 458 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of the surrounding solution and apparently also of the nature of the solution. Once taken up it is retained for some time. Acid Excretion of Roots and Fungi.*—Gustav Kunze finds that the roots of higher plants do not excrete mineral acids ; that the solvent action of the soil is due to organic acids alone, and as the amount of acid in many plants is infinitesimal, the plant relies on mycorhiza for the desired effect. By cultures of roots and hyphe on marble he found that the latter had pierced deeper into the stone; he found also that humic acid played only a small part in the corrosion of minerals as compared with fungus hyphe. He examined further the action of lichens on rocks. Among granite lichens it was discovered that the mica con- stituent suffered least from hyphe. By growing Penicillium on litmus paper soaked in a nutrient solution he was able to determine the abundance of the acid, and that it was oxalic acid. Plant roots grown in the same conditions gave only a slight acid reaction on the paper. Hence he concludes the enormous importance of fungus hyphe to the higher plants. General. Colour as an Attraction for Bees.t—G. Bonnier has experimented with bees for the purpose of testing whether the colour of flowers is the source of attraction. The author considers that previous workers have not given sufficient consideration to the social organisation of bees. He finds that among the workers leaving the hive are some which seek for honey, etc., and then point it out to the rest of the colony. These seekers are very numerous in the early morning, but later on they become plunderers. If honey, placed on variously coloured cards, is set near the hives in early morning, the seekers soon discover it ; if it is later, when the seekers are less numerous, the plunderers will continue their appointed tasks, and the honey will remain untouched for a long time. These results are independent of the colour of the cards. All experiments tend to show that when bees have taken up their work for the day, they are usually unaffected by honey, etc., even if placed on conspicuously coloured flowers or cards in the vicinity of their labours. CRYPTOGAMS. Pteridophyta. (By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.) Botrychium Lunaria.t—H. Bruchmann gives detailed observations on the prothallium and sporophyte of Botrychium Lunaria. Whereas Ophioglossum vulgatum is propagated by numerous suckers, this method of growth is lacking in B. Lunaria: every sporophyte is the direct pro- duct of a gametophyte. Hence the minute prothallia must be sought with a lens beneath the surface where a sporophyte has lately shed its spores ; it is useless to search beneath young plantlets, for these have * Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlii. (1906) pp. 357-93. t Comptes Rendus, exli. (1906) pp. 988-94. t Flora, xevi. (1906) pp. 203-30 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 459 already lived for some years underground and have lost all connection with the prothallia. After an allusion to the previous work of Irmisch, Campbell, and others, the author describes how and where he gathered his own material; and then discusses in detail the structure of the gametophyte and sporophyte, the latter being treated from three points of view—the older plant, the embryo plant, and the rare occurrence of branching. North American Ferns.*—B. D. Gilbert gives an account of the North American varieties of Polypodium vulgare, founded on a com- parison with critical specimens from Europe supplied by Druery and Christ. He describes 15 varieties and forms, and arranges them in four groups according to whether the fronds are normal or branched or crested, or have the pinnz more or less lobed. One variety and three forms are new. B. M. Rooney + describes the “resting” of Botrychium, and the results of her observations on B. Virginianum. On each sterile plant, even in the bud, she found the abortive sporangium, which differs in size, shape, and colour from the healthy fruiting sporangium of fertile plants. She believes that the number of years for a plant to be fruitful or sterile varies; there is no regular alternation. No such abortive sporangium was found on Ophioglossum vulgatum. W. N. Clute { describes briefly a form of Osmunda cinnamomea which differs slightly from var. inc7sa Hunt, and is designated by the author as var. bipinnatifida. W. C. Dukes § records Botrychium biternatum from a locality west of Mobile, Alabama, and gives a short account of its growth from August to April. W. N. Clute,|| criticising certain customs of botanical nomenclature, especially the citation of authors’ names=—one for the original species, as well as another for the latest combination of ‘genus and species—takes exception to sundry species ascribed to the recently founded Sceptridium on the score that they merit only varietal rank. He also describes the small Polypodium piloselloides§ common in the West Indies. His check list ** of North American fernworts is continued from T'richomanes to Asplenium. E. J. Winslow tt records some objections to the distribution assigned to the species of Botrychium in the first instalment of the check list above mentioned. W. Scott’s tt instructions on the cultivation of ferns from their spores are reproduced from “ Gardening.” Exotic Ferns.§§—W. R. Maxon describes a new species of Lycopodium from Guatemala, under the name of ZL. dichaeoides. It is related to L. aqualupianum, and is represented in the collection of O. F. Cook and R. F. Griggs by No. 251, and in that of Robert Hay by No. 3268. * Fern Bulletin, xiv. (1906) pp. 33-41. + Tom. cit., pp. 42-44. t Tom. cit., pp. 44-5. § Tom. cit., pp. 45-6. || Tom. cit., pp. 46-8. { Tom. cit., p. 59 (1 pl.). ** Tom. cit., pp. 56-8. +t Tom. cit., pp. 48-50. it Tom. cit., pp. 50-5. §§ Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, xvili. (1905) pp. 231-2, 239-40, 2H 2 460 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The same author proposes a new name, Christensenia, for the Asiatic genus Kaulfussia, since this latter name had been already appropriated twice before for genera belonging to Polygalacee and Composite. Kaulfussia aesculifolia is now to be known as Christensenia aesculifolia (Blame) Maxon. Index Filicum.*—C. Christensen has issued the ninth fascicle of his Index Filicum, carrying forward the alphabetical enumeration of species. and synonyms from Polypodium Beckleri to Polystichum aculeatum. The end being thus nigh at hand, he begs subscribers to call his attention to any omissions or errors which they have observed in the work, that he may be able to insert them in the appendix which will appear in the next part, and which will be followed by the remaining sections of the book—the systematic enumeration of genera and the alphabetical catalogue of literature. MERRILL, EH. D.—The Flora of the Lamao Forest Reserve. [Contains a list of 114 Pteridophytes from this Philippine forest ; 17 of the species are endemic. | Philippine Journ. of Scv., i. supp. 1 (Manila, 1906) pp. 13-24. Bryophyta. (By A. GEPP.) Morphology of Australasian Muscinee.t—K. Goebel continues his studies of the Archegoniatee by some detailed observations on the morphology and biology of a number of Australasian Bryophytes, collected by himself some eight years ago. Among the mosses with radial symmetry he discusses Dawsonia, Lyellia, Dicnemon, Mesotus and Leptostomum, and among the bilateral forms he treats of Hriopus, Pterygophyllum, Cyathophorum, Mittenia, Rhizogonium and Orthor- rhynchium. Dawsonia is regarded as a primitive member of Poly- trichaceze, being less differentiated in the gametophyte ; moreover, in the sporophyte the peristome has always been misunderstood ; it has clearly the same origin as that of other mosses, and is of Polytrichaceous character. The distinction between Nematodontez and Arthrodontez is dropped. The capsule is dorsiventral, and when mature is horizontal. The affinity of Mesotus to Dicnemon is maintained on the ground of their multicellular spores, and on account of the presence of peculiar protonema-threads or of mucous cells on the leaves. The occurrence of dwarf male plants in these genera has been demonstrated. Turning now to the liverworts, we find detailed investigations of the following : Gottschea ; hepatics with paraphyllia (e.g. Marsugidium setulosum, Chandonanthus squarrosus, etc.) ; marsupiferous Jungermanniacez, in- cluding the types represented by Zylimanthus and Tsotachas, etc. ; Radula uvifera with its heterophylly ; Hymenophytum and the differ- entiation of its thallus; Blyttia wxiphioides ; Metzgeria saccata with its curious water-sacs ; 7'rewbia, which is not rare in New Zealand ; Moerkia Cockaynii, a new species ; Marchantia foliacea with its relatively xero- philous structure ; Anthocerotee, especially A. giganteus (a transition to. * Copenhagen: Hagerup, 1906, pp. 513-76. + Flora, xevi. (1906) pp. 1-202 (114 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 461 Dendroceros), and the water-retaining outgrowths of A. arachnoideus. The author points out the frequency of similar structures in parallel groups of the hepaties, citing such instances as leaf-formation, water- sacs, paraphyllia, mucous papille, premature spore-germination, etc. Moss Rhizoids.*—K. Schoene discusses the germination of moss- spores and the biology of moss-rhizoids, with special reference to the rhizoids of the protonema, prefacing his paper with a summary of previous work on the subject. He gives the results he obtained by the culture of spores and protonemata on various nutritive solutions, em- ploying some eight of the commonest species. By the omission of nitrates and phosphate he obtained in both cases a profuse growth of rhizoids of Funaria hygrometrica, and no, or very little, chloronema respectively. The other mosses behave quite differently, producing growths that contain no chlorophyll, and correspond with neither rhizoid nor protonema. The author treats also of the form, meaning, and function, of the rhizoids, and of the obliquity of the transverse walls, and of the mechanical advantage they confer upon the plant. Moss Galls.j—V. Schiffner continues his studies begun last year on moss galls. He has found them occurring on 27 species, including both acrocarpous and pleurocarpous, but never on any species of liverwort. All the instances recorded occur on European specimens. The galls are caused by the attack of a Nematode worm, 7'ylenchus Davainii Bast., and though they are formed on such different species of mosses, they all show the same structure and occur in the same position—namely, at the growing point of a vegetative shoot. They are in the form of bulbous buds, and show, in the cell structure of the enveloping leaves, much similarity with the male buds of the respective species. The galls are almost without exception entirely independent of the inflorescences. As a rule, the growing point is destroyed by the gall, but the author records an instance in which the shoot continued growing through the gall structure ; the species in question was Dicranwm longifolium. Fungal hyphe and rotatoria are found in the galls sometimes as well as the Nematodes, but the author regards these as being chance visitors. There is no symbiosis between the moss and the Nematode, nor is it a case of true parasitism, but merely what the author terms ‘“ room-parasitism.” At the same time there is distinct injury done to the host, which never fruits, but becomes bushy in a manner reminding one of the witches’ broom of higher plants. Abnormal Moss-Capsules.t—W. Ménkemeyer describes abnormal specimens of Dicranella varia and Brywm saxonicum Hagen, in which the capsule shows two, sometimes three, lids divided from one another by a hollow cylinder. There is also a multiplication of peristomes, one on the margin of the theca growing upwards in a normal manner, while the other is inserted on the margin of the lid and grows downwards. Many of the teeth of one peristome had united with the teeth of the * Flora, xevi. (1906) pp. 276-321 (figs.). + Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 159-72. t Tom. cit., pp. 178-81 (2 pls., 6 figs. in text). 462 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO other peristome. The plants of Bryum saxonicum showed even more complicated conditions than those of D. varia ; and the details are fully described and figured. In neither species were any spores present in the lid. The author suggests that the phenomena described are due to regeneration arising as the result of mechanical injury to the lid-cells when young. ‘Two instances of cleistocarpy are described and figured for Bryum saxonicum and Pogonatum nanum. Subterranean Moss-Flora of France.*—J. Maheu publishes the result of his studies on the flora of caves, wells, and other subterranean localities of France. The work has been an arduous one, and has taken the author more than seven years, while even now he does not suggest that his work is in any degree complete. His object is to study the origin of the flora in question, the modifications which result from the change of environment, morphological variations, and above all the action of different factors on the reproductive organs. The Muscinew form a large part of the flora of caverns and abysses, and they are treated at some length in the paper, under the headings of: general facts, affinities, geographical distribution, deformations observed on subter- ranean species, hepaticee, and general results. In the section describing deformations, the organs are dealt with separately, and figures illustrate the points of interest. The mosses found in caves either do not possess a sporogonium, or if this is present it does not produce spores. Certain species become phosphorescent ; but none are ever found in total dark- ness. In damp and cold caverns which are exposed to the north, the species found are those of a boreal nature, Hylocomium triquetrum, Hypnum Schreberi, H. cuspidatum, etc., i.e. species not found in warmer caves. Details are given as to the conditions which govern the occur- rence of certain species, and the whole subject is treated with great thoroughness. European Sphagna.t—G. Roth has now completed his work on European mosses by bringing out a volume on the Sphagna. He had hoped to include also all the foreign species, but as time pressed, he published the European species without further delay. A short account of Sphagnaceee is followed by the systematic treatment, in which each species is fully described with its varieties, forms, and distribution. Actual keys are not given, but these are replaced by the headings of the groups and by the drawings. British Muscinex.— W. H. Paintert publishes a joint list of 146 mosses and 53 hepatics collected by himself and by Salter in Cardiganshire during 1903-4 ; localities and altitudes are given. M. B. Slater § gives an account of the mosses and hepatics in the second edition of J. G. Baker’s “ North Yorkshire,” which forms the third volume of the Botanical series of the Transactions of the York- shire Naturalists’ Union. In his introduction Slater reviews the moss- literature published in this country, especially as concerns the Yorkshire * Ann. Sci. Nat., sér. 9, iii. (1906) pp. 45-92. + Die Europiischen Torfmoose. Leipzig: Engelmann, 1906, 80 pp., 11 pls. t Journ. of Bot., xliv. (1906) pp. 166-71. § Hull: Brown and Sons, 1906, pp. 417-671. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 463 flora, and then gives an enumeration with localities of all the mosses hitherto recorded for North Yorkshire, following Braithwaite’s system of classification. The sphagna and hepatics are treated in similar fashion, Horrell’s and Pearson’s plans of arrangement being followed respectively. German Mosses.—A. Geheeb* publishes notes on an arboreal form of Gymnostomum rupestre, on a short-leaved form of Dicranoweisia crispula, on some rare mosses of the Rhoengebirge, on his projected “ Bryologia Atlantica,” on .the recently deceased moss-expert, Rudolph Ruthe, who collected in Prussia, and devoted himself especially to Fontinalis and Bryum. C. Laubinger f publishes some additions to the moss-flora of Nieder- hessen and Miinden, which form the first appendix to a treatise published in 1903. A number of rare mosses have been found in fruit. Fontinalis dolosa Cardot is recorded. Ina second paper the same author enumer- ated the mosses in Pfeiffer’s herbarium at Cassel. Mosses of Mark Brandenburg.t—C. Warnstorf continues his publication on this subject, thereby finishing his account of the Muscineze of this province, the fruit of some five years’ close labour. The present part carries on the work from Plagiothecium to the end, and closes with supplements to the first and second volumes. The first volume, published in 1903, contained the Hepaticee and Sphagnaceee. The descriptions of the species are long and detailed, and each is followed by an abundance of distributional and biological notes. Elabo- rate keys to the families, genera, and species are provided, and important characters are illustrated by figures. The author has discarded the old divisions of acrocarpous and pleurocarpous mosses, preferring to follow Fleischer’s system which is founded on the structure of the peristome, the main groups being Haplolepideze and Diplolepidez ; but he retains the Cleistocarpi for practical reasons. Austrian Mosses.§—J. Glowacki makes additions to the moss-flora of Bosnia, Herzegowina, Dalmatia, and Montenegro, as the resuit of collections made by himself in those countries. The mosses are grouped together under the name of the locality in which they were found. Some of the species were already recorded, but they are included in the - list, thus making it more or less complete ; 172 species and varieties are new records for the localities in question, and of these, 2 species and 1 variety are new to science. The nomenclature followed is that of Limpricht in the new edition of Rabenhorst’s ‘ Kryptogamenfiora,” Bd. iv. Antarctic Mosses.||—J. Cardot has determined the mosses collected by the ‘Charcot’ Expedition to the Antarctic in 1898. Three localities have furnished all the specimens—namely, the Islands of Wiencke, * Rev. Bryolog., xxxiii. (1906) pp. 42-4. + Abh. Ber. Verein. Nat. Cassel, xlix. (1905) pp. 50-80, 81-102. } Kryptogamenfiora d. Mark Brandenburg, Abt. 1 ii. (1906) pp. 833-1160 (figs.) § Verh. k.k. Zool. Bot. Gesell. Wien, liv. (1906) pp. 186-207. || Rev. Bryolog , xxxiii. (1906) pp. 33-5. 464 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Wandel and Hovgaard ; 13 species are recorded, among them being one novelty, Brachythecium Turqueti, and two new varieties. All the plants collected were sterile. Muscinee of French Guiana.*—E. G. Paris publishes a list of mosses and hepatics collected in this region in 1905, between Kourou and Remire. The pleurocarpous mosses are, with one exception, species common in the warm and temperate zones of Eastern inter-tropical America; but the interest of the collection lies in the six species of Calymperes, all of which are new. Up to the present only five species had been recorded for the three Guianas. Hight hepatics are recorded, of which two are new. African Mosses.t—E. G. Paris publishes a list of 25 mosses and 12 hepatics collected by Pobeguin in West Tropical Africa in the French Niger Protectorate. Hight of the mosses and two hepatics are new, and have been determined with the help of Brotherus and of Stephani respectively. Australian Mosses.t—W. W. Watts and T. Whitelegge continue their catalogue of the frondose mosses of Australia and Tasmania, col- lated from available publications and herbaria records. The present part, No. II., completes the acrocarpous species. It includes plants from the Melbourne herbarium, and records 918 species, belonging to 44 genera. North American Mosses.$—E. G. Britton publishes a sixth chapter of notes on nomenclature of mosses, basing her remarks upon Brotherus’ work in Parts 222 and 223 of Engler and Prantl’s Pflanzenfamilien, and calling attention to the points in which Brotherus has arrived at conclu- sions similar to those recently arrived at by herself. A. J. Grout || replies to a criticism by E. G. Britton (in the same journal in September 1904, p. 78) as to the determination as Plagiothe- cium Grout Card. of a specimen referred to Raphidostegium recurvans by other experts. The same author § publishes notes on and descriptions of sundry species, among them being 7Z'’etraplodon australis, a new form of Anacamptodon splachnoides, Burnettia fabrofolia (sp.n.), B. subcapillata, which has figured under Homalothectwm, and five other genera. P. M. Towle ** gives the dates of maturing of the antheridia and archegonia and spores in three species of Mnium, together with other facts in their life-history. Index of Mosses.tj—E. G. Paris publishes the final part of the second edition of his alphabetical index of the mosses of the whole world. In it are recognised 14,067 species and 397 genera. A map, tables of distribution, and a concise summary, are appended. In the * Rey. Bryolog., xxxiii. (1906) pp. 35-8. + Tom. cit., pp. 38-42. ~ Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xxx. (1905) pp. 91-163. § Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 37-40 (1 pl. and figs.). | Tom. cit., p. 42. q Tom. cit., pp. 42-6 (1 pl.). ** Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 54-6. +t Index Bryologicus, ed. 2, Hermann (Paris, 1906) fase. xxvii. pp. 137-60, tables and map. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 465 tables the number of endemic species of each genus in the several twenty regions are shown, as well as the more or less pandemic species ; and the inter-relationships of the regions are discussed in the summary. Jungermannia barbata and its Allies.*—H. W. Arnell, when searching among the Barbate group of Jungermannia in his own herbarium with a view to discovering, if possible, Swedish specimens of J. Baueriana, a new species established by Schiffner, and recently recorded for Finland and Norway, found that he possessed several examples of the plant from four provinces of Sweden. It occurs in rather dry shady places on silicious rocks. It is a good species, but variable, and absorbs many outstanding forms of J. /ycopodioides, J. Floerkei, and J. barbata. The true differences between J. Baueriana and these latter species are pointed out by the author, who has been forced to the conclusion that J. Baweriana represents the primitive species of the whole group. This assumption he illustrates with a pedigree table, wherein the first descendants of J. Baueriana are J. lycopodioides, J. Floerket, and J. barbata. J. barbata remains without issue; but from J. lycopodioides proceed in direct descent J. quinquedentata, J. exsecta, and J. eaxsecteformis: while from J. Floerkei spring two lines, one constituted by J. atlantica, J. gracilis, J. Binsteadii, J. herjedalica and J. polita, and the other by J. quadriloba, J. Kunzeana and J. obtusa. His reasons for this assumption are stated, and critical notes on each of the species are given. Hepatics of the Jura.t—Ch. Meylan issues a supplement to his catalogue of the hepatics of the Jura, which was published five years ago. The number of species is now raised from 87 to 115, most of the addi- tions being species which shun the limestone, and which were found on humus, or in bogs, or on silicious soil, the flora of the calcareous soil being restricted or monotonous. The very rare Haplomitrium Hookeri may be more common than is supposed, but is excessively difficult to detect in the sterile state. North American Hepatics.t—H. Claasen publishes a revised key to the species of liverworts recognised in the sixth edition of “ Gray’s Manual of Botany.” It is a continuation, or rather, amplification, of the key published last year in the same journal. The genera are arranged alphabetically, and the characters, by which the species under them are discriminated, are more detailed than is usual in a key with the purpose of rendering determination more easy and more precise. BroruHeERuvs, V. F.—Engler und Prantl’s Die Naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien. Musci. (Engler and Prantl’s Natural Families of Plants. Mosses.) (Continuation. Spiridentacez, Lepyrodontacex, Pleurophascacez, Necke- racee. | Leipzig: Engelmann, 1906, lief 224, pp. 769-816 (33 figs.). Gerpp, A.—The Dates of Hooker’s “ British Jungermannie” and “ Musci Exotici.” [Affords means for determining the date of publication of any species or plate in these works. | Journ. of Bot., xliv. (1906) pp. 176-8. * Bot. Notiser, 1906, pp. 145-57. + Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 489-503 (fig.). t Ohio Naturalist, vi. (1906) pp. 530-40. 466 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO HeERZzOG, T.—Die Laubmoose Badens. (The moss-flora of Baden.) J [Continuation. | Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 409-24. MeERRILL, KH. D.—The Flora of the Lamao Forest Reserve. [Contains a list of 23 mosses and 11 hepatics from this Philippine forest ; three of the mosses are endemic. | Philippine Journ. Sci., i. supp. 1 (Manila, 1906) pp. 10-13. MoéNKEMEYER, W.—Bryologische Wanderungen in der Rhénim Juli1905. (Bryo- logical wanderings in the Rhéngebirge.) [The author alludes to Geheeb’s description of the moss-flora of Milseburg, in which 222 species are recorded. In the present paper 12 species are added to the flora, and the habitats of other species are described. Thirty-five hepatice are also recorded for that region. ] Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 182-9. STEPHANI, F.—Species Hepaticarum. [Continuation, containing descriptions of Leioscyphus (5 species), Southbya (3 sp.), Arnellia (1 sp.), Gongylanthus (11 sp.), Clasmatocolea (6 sp.)] Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 377-92. Warts, W. W.—Australian Mosses. Some Locality Pictures. (Continuation. ] Bryologist, ix. (1906) p. 41. Thallophyta. Alge. (By E. S. GeEpp.) Colouring Matter in the Chromatophores of Diatoms.*—F. G. Kohl continues his studies on this subject, and in the present paper he states definitely that the pigment of diatom chromatophores consists of (1) chlorophyll, with the same spectrum of absorption as that of the higher plants; (2) carotin; (8) xanthophyll. The author criticises the work of Molisch on the subject, and considers the presence of leuco- cyanin in diatoms is merely hypothetical. No such substance as diatomin exists at all in plants. There is no reason to consider the colouring of the chromatophores of diatoms, as differing from that of the chromato- phores of the leaves of Phanerogams. Reasons for his conclusions are given by the author, with details of his experiments. The paper closes with a reply to the criticisms of M. Tswett. Pleomorphism of Melosira.;—O. Miiller discusses the pleomorphism, auxospores, and resting spores of Melosira. Beginning with a short account of collections sent to him from Iceland by C. H. Ostenfeld, and from Ziirich and Neu-Ruppin by other savants, he sums up the observa- tions of previous authors on the pleomorphism of JMelosira and sundry other genera, modifying some of his own former conclusions. He de- scribes a new species, I. islandica, with its varying forms, auxospores and their germination ; and the same for the new sub-species, IM. /el- vetica, and for M. italica Kuetz. The latter is the first fresh-water species in which resting spores have been found, these having previously been recorded as MW. levis, a species which must now be cancelled. A new sub-species of J. italica is described in all its forms ; it is called M. subarctica, The development of the auxospores has been carefully ‘** Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 124-34. + Pringsheim’s Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlii. (1906) pp. 49-88 (2 pls. and figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 467 studied in five species, and their characters are summed up in a synop- tical form. The author gives a list of other species which require further investigation. Finally the author states that although the chains of Melosira islandica and of M. ttalica exhibit a pleomorphism of the indi- viduals, yet after the formation of auxospores the species reverts to its normal form. The purport of the pleomorphism is not yet understood. New Coralline Algz.—M. Foslie * describes some new species and varieties of Lithothamnion and Lithophyllum, mostly from the Antarctic region, collected by the ‘Gauss,’ the ‘ Discovery,’ the ‘ Antarctic’ and the ‘Scotia.’ Species from Port Phillip and the West Indies are added. Another paper gives further descriptions of new species and of a new genus, Litholepis, which is intermediate between JJelobesia and Mastophora. Litholeyis contains three species, L. (Melobesia) caspica and L. (Melobesia) bermudensis already described, and a new species, L. Sauvageau. Notes follow on Goniolithon, Heteroderma, and Der- matolithon. A number of dead nodules of Lithothamnion were brought up by excavators in the harbour of Vard6é in East Finmark, and these are described by the same author ¢ as a new species, L. Varddense, approach- ing in habit ZL. norvegicum f. nodulosa. Living specimens of Litho- thamnion are no longer found in the harbour. Seven new species and three varieties from the West Indies are described and figured by M. Foslie and M. A. Howe.§ Some of these are sterile, but the plants possess well marked distinctive characters in outward form or internal structure. Finally, in a short paper eighteen new species and some varieties are described by M. Foslie || from various parts of the world. Remarks on Northern Lithothamnia.f—M. Foslie publishes a detailed account of the Norwegian species of Lithothamnionee and Melobesiez. The paper opens with some interesting observations on the group, in which the author gives his reasons for the reduction of species and the formation of new forms. He considers that Litho- thamnia are largely influenced by outside conditions, and that plants which have been made types of new species are in reality but peculiar forms of existing species. There are three principal agents which mili- tate against normal development in this group: (1) larger crustacea and boring mussels which break and otherwise damage the plants ; (2) boring algee, especially Ostreobium Queketti Born. and Flah.; (8) friction from strong currents, reducing branched plants to compressed globular masses. Lithothamnia flourish best where there is a firm bottom and the tidal action is fairly strong, without being excessive. Full descriptions are given of species and forms, with their respective synonymy, followed by copious critical notes. * Kel. Norsk. Vidensk. Selsk. Aarsb., 1904, 4 pp. + Op. cit., Skrift, 1905, No. 5, 9 pp. ¢ Tom. cit., No. 2, 4 pp. § Bull. New York Bot. Gard., iv. (1906) pp. 128-36 (14 pls.). || Kgl. Norsk. Vidensk. Selsk. Aarsb., 1905, 8 pp. 4G Op. cit., Skrift, 1905, No. 3, 138 pp. 468 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO New Squamariacea.*— M. Foslie describes a new species which he refers with certain doubt to Peyssonnelia, under the name of P. (?) compacta. It forms part of Heydrich’s Sporolithon mediterraneum, and may also be identical with the same author’s Polystrata dura from the Island of Tami. It approaches very nearly to Peyssonnelia polymorpha (Zan.), and may perhaps be a variety of that species ; but to decide this point on sterile material is impossible, and the fruit of P. compacta is still unknown. P. compacta has a crust-like thallus, up to 5 mm. thick, very closely and firmly adherent to the substratum, though the author has seen no rhizoids. It is very hard and stony, being encrusted with carbonate of lime. In structure it approaches both Polystrata dura and Peyssonnelia polymorpha, though the cells are a little larger than in the former and a little smaller than in the latter, The plant occurs in the Adriatic and Mediterranean. Cladostephus verticillatus.;—C. Sauvageau publishes the first part of a detailed account of this plant, in which he treats of the structure, growth, and ramification of the erect shoots (‘“ pousses indéfinies”’) ; a further paper will deal with the branches, or “ pousses définies.” The branching is never dichotomous, as has been supposed by some authors. An erect stem, arising from a creeping thallus, produces at irregular intervals similar shoots to itself, and these all bear branches arranged verticillately. The ramification, taken as a whole, shows so much variety that the author proposes to constitute a special group for Cladostephus within Sphacelariaceze, under the name of Polyblastze, parallel to Hemi- blastee and Holoblastee. The indefinite shoots (‘‘pousses indéfinies”’) are plagioblastic ; the verticillate branches are hemiblastic, or meri- blastic ; the branchlets of these are holoblastic ; and the fruit-bearing shoots are microblastic. Distribution of Marine Algz.t—N. Svedelius has made some interesting observations on the likeness that exists between the marine vegetation of the West Indies, the Indian and the Pacific Oceans. He deals with the work of other authors on this subject, and is himself of opinion that the reason for the similarity in the three floras is to be sought in the historical development of the distribution of land and water on the borders of North and South America, where it is seen that the Caribbean Sea is merely a creek, so to speak, of the Pacific Ocean, or a strait connecting the two great oceans of the world. Nomenclature of Desmids, and other Algological Notes.§—O. Nordstedt proposes that 1848 should be the starting point from which to reckon the nomenclature of Desmids, and his reasons for this are shown by an historical review of the work done on the group since 1810. He lays down the following rules: (1) The nomenclature begins with the “British Desmidiacee,” by Ralfs, in 1848. (2) The authors of names given earlier, but accepted by Ralfs in “ British Desmidiaceee,” must always be quoted as such, unless the identification of the name in (a * Kel. Norsk. Vidensk. Selsk., Skrift, 1905, No. 1, 9 pp. (fig. in text). + Act. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, lxi. (1906) 26 pp. (figs in text). t Bot. Notiser, 1906, pp. 49-57. § Tom. cit., pp. 97-124. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 469 Ralfs’s “ British Desmidiacese” and in the works of the older authors be very doubtful. (8) The following earlier specific names have priority, and must be retained : Clostervum Libellula Focke (if removed from Penium) and Desmidium cylindricum Grev. (Didymoprium Ralts, 1845). Three other short notes are entitled “ Aphanochete or Her- posteiron,” ‘“ Tribonema or Conferva,” and “ Myxonema or Stigeo- clonium.” The paper is in English. Spheroplea annulina.*—K. Meyer has made a study of the develop- ment of this alga, especially as regards the germination of the oospore, the formation of the zoospores, the spermatozoids, and the egg-cells ; he has also studied the systematic position of the species. The author gives a detailed description of the development of the antheridia and oogonia, and then proceeds to the oospore and its germination. This may take place according to one of two different types, and both are described ; the number of zoospores is always four, and not, as other authors have suggested, a varying number. As regards the systematic study of S. annulina, the author finds that the recognised varieties (formerly regarded as species) are so uncertainly defined, and the species itself is so variable, that he considers there is only one species of Spheroplea, S. annulina, with two extreme forms, Braunii and crassi- septa, and a series of intermediate forms between. Subterranean Algal Flora of France.t—.J.Maheu has made a study of the entire flora of the caves, wells, and other subterranean localities of France. The environment is not conducive to the development of algee, those most commonly represented being species of Hematococcus, Protococcus, Palmellaceze, and Diatoms. The species are poor in chloro- phyll, reduced in size, and sometimes so polymorphous as almost to constitute new forms. The author notes that the colour of certain species varies from green to red, according to the degree of darkness in which they live, and while some genera cannot live without a certain amount of light, others are able to develop in total obscurity. This paper includes some interesting observations on the occurrence of bac- teria in subterranean streams, and the influence on public health that these are able to exercise throughout a large area. Protococcoidee.{—C. EH. Bessey continues his work on the structure and classification of algae, and in the present paper he deals with the Protococcoidez, prefaced by a key to the four orders of Chlorophycee. Keys are given to the families and genera of Protococcoidex, and the relationships of the genera in each family are indicated by diagrams. Each genus is described, and measurements of the cells are given. Other classifications of the green alga are discussed and compared in tabular form, notably those of Engler, Blackman and Tansley, West, and Oltmanns. Then follow remarks on the relationship of the green algze to the lower animals, and a chart to show the mutual relationships of the genera of Protococcoidex. * Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscow, xix. (1906) pp. 60-84 (2 tables). + Ann. Sci. Nat., sér. 9, iii. (1906) pp. 93-8. { Trams. Amer. Micr. Soc., xxvi. (1905) pp. 121-36 (1 chart), 470 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Plankton of some Irish Lakes.*—W. and G. 8. West continue the account begun in 1902 of the plankton collected by them from Irish lakes. The previous paper treated of Lough Neagh and Lough Beg, while the present one deals with plankton from the most important lakes in the west and south-west of Ireland. The flora of these lakes is com- pared with that previously recorded from Lough Neagh and Lough Beg. Some of the pelagic organisms had never before been observed in the British Isles. The authors divide their subject into two parts, one being a detailed account of the plankton of the loughs investigated, and the other a systematic account of the more important algze of the plank- ton. In the first part, sixteen of the loughs are described shortly, and mention is made of any peculiarities exhibited by the plankton, with the dominant forms contained therein. Special note is taken of the forms of Ceratium hirundinella O. F. Miill., the abundance and variation of which is a striking feature of the fresh-water plankton of Great Britain and Ireland. The diversity of form is greater in Ireland than in the west of Scotland, or in the Orkneys and Shetlands ; indeed, it is not uncommon to have two or even three distinct forms in one lake. Figures are given of nine different forms. The second part of the paper deals specifically with those alge of the plankton deserving of special mention, either for their abundance or rarity, or for some pecu- liarity which had hitherto escaped observation. Five new species are described, and three new varieties. Four quarto plates show photo- micrographs of plankton, and two show figures of alge. Cort, C. J—Ueber die Meeresverschleimung im Golf von Triest im Sommer 1905. (On the sliminess of the sea in the Gulf of Triest in the summer of 1905.) Arch. Hydrobiol. u. Planktonk., i. (1906) No. 3. Kyuin, H.—Biologiska iakttagelser rérande algfloran vid Svenska Vastkusten. (Biological observations on the algal flora of the west coast of Sweden.) Botan. Notiser, (1906) pp. 125-837. Macovel, G., et J. ScRIBAN—Contributions a l’etude de la flore des lacs d’eau douce de la Dobrogea. (Contributions to the study of the flora of the fresh- water lakes of the Dobrogea.) Ann. Sci. Univ. Jassy, iii. (1906) pp. 239-43. Miauta, W.—Thome’s Flora von Deutschland. V. Kryptogamen. (Flora of Germany. Cryptogams.) [Diatomacez continued. Navicula—Mesotenwm.] Gera: Zezschwitz, 1906, lief 27-9, pp. 257-352 (15 pls.) StapLER, E.—KEin kleiner Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Stisswasseralgen von Dalmatien. (A small contribution to a knowledge of the fresh-water alge of Dalmatia.) [The results of an examination of algal material, collected by Beck v. Mannagetta in several places in Dalmatia. The author includes all known records from that country. ] SB. Nat. Wiss. Med. Ver. ‘‘ Lotos,” Prag., xxv. (1905) pp. 236-44. TANNER, FULLEMANN—Sur un nouvel organisme du Plancton du Schenenbo- densee. (On a new plankton organism of the Schonenbodensee.) [Rophidium Chodati Tanner.] Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 156-8 (figs.) ZACHARIAS, O.—Das Plankton als Gegenstand eines zeitgemassen biologischen Schulunterrichts. (Plankton as a subject for modern biological instruction in schools.) Arch. Hydrobiol. u. Planktonk., i. (1906) 98 pp., 17 figs. * Trans. Roy. Irish Acad., xxxiii. (1906) pp. 77-116 (6 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. A471 Fungi. (By A. Lorratn Situ, F.L.S.) Study of Mucorini.*—A. F. Blakeslee continues his researches on the Mucorini, and his recent paper deals with the germination of the zygospore. - His aim was to find at what stage the sexual character of the thallus was determined. In a species like Sporodinia grandis, which is homothallic, the germination of the zygospores is also homothallic. In Mucor Mucedo, which is heterothallic, all the spores in a given spor- angium produced from one zygospore are of the same strain, either (+) or (—), so that segregation of sex is completed before the sporangium isformed. In another heterothallic form, Phycomyces, the differentiation of the spores in any sporangium is only partial. In addition to (++) and (—) heterothallic spores, other spores are formed in this species which produce homothallic mycelia. The latter has a peculiarly velvety appearance owing to the presence of coiled and contorted outgrowths, which the writer terms pseudophores ; sporangia are rarely formed, and only on the comparatively stout and less coiled outgrowths. Zygospores are also occasionally formed on the same mycelium; usually they are only partially developed. It has not yet been determined if this homo- thallic nature is fixed. If the mycelium is transplanted from this homothallic strain the character is retained, but spores from the sporangia are again either (+) or (—). In nature the homothallic mycelium is probably rare, and disappears in the course of a few sporangial generations. Development of Thelebolus stercoreus.t — Gustav Ramlow has worked out this minute Ascomycete. He gives first of all an account of the researches and results of other workers on the same plant, and then describes the methods he employed and the stains he used. The most successful cultures were on agar with dung decoction. ‘The first beginnings of fruit formation show coiled hyphe like a screw which grows up from the vegetative mycelium. Septa only appear in the coil when the ascogonium has reached a considerable size and the enveloping hyphe have begun to grow round it. These last arise from the stalk hypha near the ascogonium. No communication is ever seen between the ascogonium and any other hypha; no fusion of cells takes place. One of the ascogonium cells grows more vigorously than the others, and the neighbouring cells also increase to a less extent. The cell that has thus grown to so great a size is the young ascus. When more than one ascus appears in the mature fructification there is, as Brefeld showed, really a compound fruit formed, the result of two (or more) ascogonia which have developed in close proximity. The development of the large ascus is aided by the nutritive material stored in the neighbouring cells which are rich in contents. The cytology of Thelebolus was also carefully worked out by the author. Hach vegetative cell is uninucleate : further details of these nuclei were not noted. Before the septa are formed in the young * Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 1-28 (1 pl.). + Bot. Zeit., lxiv. (1906) pp. 85-99 (1 pl.). 472 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING 'TO ascogonium two nuclei are visible, which increase to four and eight. After septation, one cell retains two nuclei—the large ascus cell. These two nuclei fuse together asin other asci; they are probably cousin-nuclei of the second degree. Then the fused nucleus multiplies by division to some 1026. They are so minute that it was impossible to see details, but spindle and diaster were plainly visible, showing the normal mitotic division. In spore formation it was noted that there was no previous splitting or division of the plasma as in the Phycomycetes ; the nucleus lay at the apex of the newly formed spore as in other Ascomycetous spores, and between the spores there were remains of the epiplasma ; the spores are therefore the result of free-cell formation. The author insists on the Ascomycetous character of the fungus. It differs from Rhyparobius so far that each ascus is the product of a separate ascogonium, but it stands in the same relation to Rhyparobius as Spherotheca does to Erysiphe. Also the development is apogamous. As in some other Ascomycetes, sexuality has disappeared. Germination of Truffle Spores.*—Em. Boulanger watched the ger- mination of the spores take place in the ascus itself. The brown exospore bursts, generally towards the equator, and becomes destroyed. The spore then puts out a germinating tube. Fe Submerged Fungus.t—H. Rehm describes a Discomycete that he found growing on branches under water. It has been classed by him in the genus Psilopezia, rather than in Humaria or Peltidium in \which it had been placed. The fungus has no marginal wall. Yeasts.{—A. Osterwalder has carried out a systematic examination of fruit and vine yeasts. He examined them microscopically, noting the size and form of the cells, and made cultures of the different species, both streak cultures and giant colonies. He isolated eight different species, and the results of the cultures, fermentations, etc., are recorded in a series of tables. Th. Bokorny § has examined the behaviour of various yeasts with regard to colouring matters and metal salts. Yeast cells attracted and stored silver nitrate in extremely weak solutions. Similar results were obtained with copper salts. The quantity of poison required to kill the cells by acting on the protoplasm has not been determined. With colouring materials, he found that a minute percentage of methyl-violet coloured the cells without injuring them ; a larger quantity coloured them more quickly but finally killed them. In another paper || Bokorny gives the results of further work on the erowth of yeasts in solutions containing mineral substances, his aim being to determine the nature of the influence exerted by the poison on the * ©. R, Soc. Biol. Paris, lx. (1906) pp. 42-3 (2 pls.) See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 416. + Mitth. Bayer. Bot. Gesell., (1905) No. 34, p. 423. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 450-1. ¢ Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 36-52 (1 pl.). § A. Br. H. Zeit., Aug. 1905. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 257-8. || Wellend. Zeitschr. Spir. Ind., Juli1905. Seealso Centralbl. Bakt , xvi. (1906) pp. 239-40, ZOOLUGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 473 cell contents. If a trace of yeast cells from a culture is placed in distilled water with a definite mixture of mineral and sugar solution, the mineral is taken up by the protoplasm of the cell and death follows; but if a large quantity of yeast is placed in the same mixture no harm is done. Heinrich Zikes* describes a new species of “anomalous” yeast, Willia Wichmann. It has the peculiar cap form of the other members of this group. The author describes the characters of the group, and then gives the history of the new species which was isolated from the soil in the neighbourhood of Vienna. Nuclear Division in Yeast.;—Franz Fuhrman has made a cyto- logical study of Saccharomyces ellipsoideus 1. Hansen. He compares his results with those recently published by Schwellengrebel, and finds that though they agree in the main there are some small differences to be noted. He finds that division results in two equal daughter-nuclei ; Schwellenberg had noted a difference in size and that the smaller nucleus migrated to the newly formed cell. He sums up the phases of karyo- kinesis thus :— 1. Formation of knot stage, increase of chromatic substance, and disappearance of nuclear membrane. 2. Formation of apparently four chromosomes. 3. Arrangement of chromosomes in monaster, and formation of achromatic spindle (perhaps with centrosomes). 4. Division of chromosomes into daughter-chromosomes. 5. Formation of diasters. 6. Polar deposition of chromosomes, resembling the knot stage. 7. Return of each daughter-nucleus to the resting condition. The writer never detected any case of nuclear fusion in his prepara- tions. As to the budding stage, in general, it begins at a later period than nuclear division. In most cases it began with the monaster stage, but it sometimes took place earlier. -He found it very rarely occurring at the same time as the diaster stage. Migration of the nucleus occurred most frequently at the knot stage, after which a resting period ensued. Symbiotic Yeast.{—L. Lutz published in the Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, 1899, p. 68, an account of “Tibi,” a symbiotic growth of a yeast and bacillus that is used in Mexico, along with sugar, to form a fermented liquor. The yeast is named Saccharomyces Radaisii, the bacillus is 5. mexicanus. THis object has been to attempt the associa- tion with other bacilli, but he was only successful with B. subtilis. The two organisms formed the small creamy balls which produced the fermentation. The association in the case of other bacilli was not stable, and one symbiont gradually displaced the other. The function of the bacilli is to form an anaerobic environment for the yeast. A New Lichen Parasite.s—A. Zahlbriickner found that the fruit of the lichen Caloplaca callopisma was deformed by the presence of a fungus which growson the hymenium. From the hyphe of the fungus * Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 97-111. + Op. cit., xv. (1906) pp. 769-77 (1 pl.). t Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 96-8. § Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 141-6 (1 pl.). Aug. 15th, 1906 Ww onl 474 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO there arise vertical branches ; these fork, and at the top of each fork a two-celled spore is borne. Zahlbriickner names the fungus Lindauopsis Caloplace g. et sp. n., a Hyphomycete near the genus Didymaria in the Mucedinaceze-Hyalodidyme group. Uredinee.—Otto Schneider* has made a prolonged study of Melampsora, the rust of willows. He records the results of 38 different series of infection experiments, and has, in the course of his work, established several new form-species. He finds a general morphological resemblance between the different willow Melampsore, though bio- logically they are widely different. Another series of experiments on rusts has been carried out by Fr. Bubak,t extending over two years. He has proved that Uromyces Poe forms an Aeidium on Ranunculus auricomus. He considers that U. Pow may represent six or eight biological species. Uromyces graminis on Melwa ciliata has its Medium on Seseli glaucum. The other experiments served to confirm results already obtained, or they were without success. Rusts of Australia.{—D. McAlpine has published a book which ~ contains a record ofall the rusts of Australia so far as they are known at present. The first part of the work deals with the general aspect of the subject, describing the fungi with their vegetative and reproductive phenomena, and the different kinds of spores, with their probable origin and development. The indigenous species are distinguished from those that have been introduced; they are mostly autcecious, and complete their life history on one host-plant. Only four native species, so far, have been found to be hetercecious. The author discusses the question as to the method of infection and the spread of rust, and he also advises as to the means of combating the disease. The second part of the book, from chapter xx. onwards, deals with the classification of the fungi in the order Uredinesws. The technical terms are explained, and diagnoses are published of all the species, native or introduced. Infection Phenomena in Uredinee.s—I. B. Pole Evans describes the process of inoculation and infection by uredospores. The inocula- tion stage includes the entrance of the germ-tube into the stoma, and the swelling up of the tip to form the substomatal vesicle. Infection has taken place when filaments grow out from the vesicle and form haustoria in the cells of the host-plant. The substomatal vesicle varies in form with the different species. Disease of Bamboo.||—S. Hori describes a smut of bamboo caused by Ustilago Sbiriana P. Henn. It is produced on the growing points and internodes of the young branches, causing often deformation or distortion. The author recommends that the smutted branches should * Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 74-93 and 159-76. + Tom. cit., pp. 150-9. } Melbourne: R.S. Brain, 1906, vi. and 349 pp., 44 pls. § Trans. Brit. Assoc., 1905, pp. 595-6. || Bull. Imp. Agric. Exp. Station, i. (1905) pp. 73-89 (4 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 475 be burnt while still covered by the leaf-sheath, and before the spores are exposed and scattered. The disease is widespread in the bamboo forests of Japan, and causes much loss to the growers. Affinities of the Fungus of Lolium temulentum.*—E. M. Freeman calls attention to the discovery of the method of smut infection of wheat made by Frank Maddox, Tasmania, in 1895, and re-discovered lately by Hecke and Brefeld. The infection takes place by means of the stigma, and the fungus becomes imbedded in the seed, developing with the embryo the following year. Freeman compares the fungus found in the seed of Lolium temulentum with smut, and finds that the two plants are very similar. He considers that in the case of Lolium it is undoubtedly a smut that has gained entrance to the seed. The spores of the fungus have never been found, but he cites instances of smut infection where no spore formation took place. Tree-Root Rot.t—An account is published of Agaricus melleus, a widely distributed and very common British “toadstool.” It grows on the roots of living trees as well as on dead stumps, and causes much damage. Advice is given as to the measures to be taken to stamp out the disease, and a warning is added against wounding the base of the trunk or the roots of trees, as the fungus can only enter through a wound. Spores of Lycoperdon.t—Ch. Van Bambeke has examined the spores in this genus to determine to what extent the condition of the mature epispore is of assistance in the classification of species, which have been divided by systematists into smooth-spored and rough-spored groups. The author finds that in many species the smoothness or roughness of the spore depends on the medium in which it is examined, and on the degree of magnification. He is of opinion that none of the spores are quite smooth, but he would retain this character as an aid to deter- mination, making two groups, one of which would contain all spores distinctly echinulate, the asterospore, while the other, the subasterospore, would designate those with an almost smooth epispore. Influence of Parasites on the Biology of the Host Plant.§ — L. Montemartini finds that in some cases the fungal parasite accelerates, in others it hinders, the life processes. Leaves attacked by Uredinez show increased assimilation. Transpiration is generally stronger in infected than in sound leaves. Many parasites have no direct regular and constant influence on the absorption of water and salts. That depends rather on the conditions of transpiration and assimilation. Any excitation is really due to the toxin introduced into the plant by the parasite. Subterranean Fungi.||—As fungi grow abundantly in the dark and in humid conditions, a large flora was to be expected in the caverns * Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 32-4. + Journ. Board Agric., xiii. (1909) pp. 111-14 (1 fig.). ¢ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 23-8. § Atti Ist. Bot. Pavia, ix. (1905) 59 pp. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xiv. (1906) p. 246. || Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, iii. (1906) pp. 102-67. 212 476 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO explored botanically by Jacques Maheu. The low temperature, how- ever, is against them, and the soil is not always favourable. There are three classes of such fungi: (1) those that have been carried into the caves accidentally on detritus, pieces of wood, etc. ; (2) those that are developed from spores and show peculiarities of form; and (3) those that are completely acclimatised and transmit their acquired characters to their descendants. Monstrosities of form are continually met with, especially among the Hymenomycetes. The flora of the different caverns corresponds always with that occurring on the surface of the soil. The Ascomycetes are few and abnormal, often sterile, or only in conidial form. An Jsaria and a Laboulbenia were observed on insects. The pore-forming fungi are the most numerous among the Basidiomycetes, and they are almost always deformed or sterile. The author thinks that probably they arise from mycelium or spores coming from the exterior, and that they die out in a few generations. He sums up the deformations thus: lengthening of the stalk, disappearance of colour, reduction and polymorphism of the pileus, variation in the formation of the hymenium, loss of the power to form spores, disappearance of the sporiferous hyphee, and production of conidia. It is not only the darkness, he adds, that causes these abnormalities, but the whole of the conditions of cavern life. French Mycological Notes.—An account is given by M. Corfec* of a mycological excursion in the neighbourhood of Laval (Mayenne). He describes the kind of territory that was explored, and gives lists of the species of fungi collected. M. Barett is employed to verify the fungi exposed for sale in the market-place at Nantes. He gives a list of the species used for food, and notes those that were abundant or the reverse during the season. He gives a list of 26 species that were considered edible. R. Maire f reports on the various excursions taken by the French Mycological Society in 1905. The members met in Lorraine, and the specimens collected were exhibited at Nancy. An account of the routes taken is given for each day, and a list of the fungi collected in the various localities visited. Mycological Notes.—C. G. Lloyd§ publishes three double photo- graphic plates of various specimens of Bovistella, Lycoperdon, Calvatia, Arachnion, and Holocotylon, with notes on the species illustrated. He gives special descriptions of Arachnion, a specimen of which has recently been sent to him from Italy, the first record for Europe. He also gives a diagnosis of Holocotylon and the species H. Texense. Both these genera are distinguished by a chambered gleba, and by the absence of capillitium. W. W. Stockborger || remarks on the somewhat frequent occurrence of Anthurus borealis in Ohio. He gives. a note of the various places where the fungus has been collected. * Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 29-31. + Tom. cit., pp. 32-3. {t Tom. cit., pp. i.-xxxix. § Mycol. Notes Cincinnati, 1906, pp. 245-60 (3 pls. and 10 figs.). | Ohio Nat., vi. (1906) p. 517. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 477 British Mycology.*—The Transactions of the British Mycological Society contain an account of the autumnal meeting at Haslemere. 488 species of fungi were collected or identified during the foray. A list of these is published. The presidential address by R. H. Biffen dealt with the combating of fungoid diseases of plants. The author gives some data as to the havoc wrought by disease in plants, and groups his subject under three headings : (1) avoiding the conditions known to be favourable for the spreading of the disease; (2) destruction of plant tissues containing the resting forms of the fungus ; (3) exterminating the parasite without injuring the host. Under the latter heading he describes the hot-water method of killing smutted grain, the cases where fungicides are likely to be useful, and, finally, he draws attention to the advantage of selecting races and varieties immune to disease. A. Lorrain Smith contributes a note on Spheropsis Pinastri. The descriptions and synonymy of the species have been considerably confused. J. F. Rayner recommends mycology as a branch of nature study, pointing out the advantages to teacher and pupil in including this group of Cryptogams in the list of nature subjects. The list of “ Fungi New to Britain” is, as in previous years, supplied by A. Lorrain Smith and Carleton Rea. The novelties this year are mostly among the larger fungi. Ancestors of the Higher Fungi.j—P. A. Dangeard continues at great length his studies on the development of fungi. In a preliminary chapter he discusses the various theories as to their origin. He does not hold with those who derive them from algee—he traces their origin to the Amoebee through the Flagellatee—and he considers that the two great factors in securing evolution were teleomitosis, with its exact division of chromosomes, and the introduction of sexuality. In suc- ceeding chapters he develops his theories in tracing the detailed history of some special forms. Rhabdiwm Hedenii, a new genus of Chytridinez described by himself, had been placed by Atkinson in Harpochytrium. Dangeard insists on the correctness of his own views, and he gives a full account of the life-history of the fungus. It is one of the lower forms very near the Flagellatee, and probably without any sexuality. He finds a higher type in Myzocytium vermicolum, a parasite of Nematodes, which possesses both sporangia and gametangia. At the time of fecundation there is only one nucleus visible in the oogonium, the nucleus from the antheridium passes in, and fusion takes place. The oospore has one large nucleus. The author considers this a sort of prototype of the Peronosporeee ; there is no appreciable periplasm left in the oogonium, and the nuclei are reduced in number. Ancylistes Closterii is described and compared with other forms. The number of chromosomes in the dividing nucleus is two. The nuclei of the antheridium number six ; there are many more in the oogonium ; no fusion of the nuclei was observed, and the maturing oospore contains a number of nuclei, both * Trans. Brit. Mycol. Soc., 1905 (Worcester, 1906) pp. 101-31 (4 pls.). + Le Botaniste, sér. 9, fasc. 3-6 (1906) pp. 159-303 (18 pls.). 478 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO male and female. This persistence of both kinds of nuclei seems to be peculiar to Ancylistes. Succeeding chapters are devoted to a considera- tion of zygospore formation in the Mucorini, to the Hemiasci, more particularly Protascus and Protomyces, and to a general discussion on the development of sexuality in the lower fungi, the writer insisting that it was an autonomous development within the group. Fungi parasitic upon Scale-Insects.* — John Parkin publishes a general historical account of these economically useful fungi, and then turns to the Ceylon forms which he has studied for some years. He takes the various fungi in systematic order, referring briefly to those that occur elsewhere, and describing carefully the forms met with on the island. All these scale fungi, he states, are either complete Ascomyce- tous forms, or incomplete conidial stages. He does not make any new species, although many of the plants he has so carefully described must be new to science. These fungi often attack insects in epidemic fashion. Some of them have been successfully employed in the United States against scale-pests. As moisture and warmth favour their growth, Ceylon, the author considers, should be a suitable country for testing their efficacy as a remedy for scale-attacks. Tables are added of the fungus species and their hosts. . Harmful Fungi.t—K. von Tubeuf calls attention to the damage that may be done by the fungus Thelephora lacinata. It is not a parasite, but it spreads over the ground in a compact manner and smothers vegetation. It is particularly hurtful to young trees. He recordst{ the occurrence of witches’ brooms on Prunus Padus. It was probably caused by an Hzoascus, but asci were not found. He also publishes § a note on the occurrence of Zrametes Pini in Bavaria. Though rare on pines, it is found frequently on other Conifers. A fossil wood destroyed by 7'’rametes Pini has also been found. Plant Diseases.||— Fr. Bubak reports on the work on parasitic fungi done at Tabor (Bohemia) in 1904. He notes the almost complete dis- appearance of Rhizoctonia violacea from a district where it had been frequently met with. Considerable work was done on various forms of Uredinex. cidium Seseli was found to bea form of Uromyces graminis. The relationships of several other forms were verified. A number of new diseases caused by fungi were chronicled. G. G. Hedgecock ¥ describes a disease of cauliflower and cabbage caused by Sclerotinia Libertianit. Sclerotia were rather rare. The Peziza form was produced in abundance in the cultures of the fungus.** He also gives an account of an attack of Agave by Colletotrichum Agaves. Young plants were quickly destroyed. Bordeaux mixture is recommended as a suitable fungicide. * Ann. Roy. Bot. Gard. Peradeniya, iii. (1906) pp. 11-82 (4 pls.). + Nat. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw., ili. (1905) pp. 91-2. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 452. t Tom. cit., pp. 395-7. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 453. § Op. cit., iv. (1906) pp. 96-100. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 453. || Zeitschr. Landw. Versuch. Oesterr. (1905) 4 pp. { Rep. Miss. Bot. Gard. St. Louis (1905) pp. 149-51 (3 pls.). ** Tom. cit., pp. 153-6 (3 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 479 H. Klebahn * has investigated a fungus that attacks the bark and flower-buds of Syringa. He found, in the intercellular spaces, resting spores which, in their development, recalled the oospores, oogonia, and antheridia of the Peronosporez, but no conidial form was found. In artificial cultures he discovered that the hyphe were non-septate, but at intervals a ring-shaped thickening of the wall is formed. Oogonia and antheridia were also produced in these cultures. Klebahn places the fungus in the Peronosporez, from which it differs in the absence of conidial formation, and names it Phl@ophthora Syringa ge. et sp. n. A disease of tomatoes was found by V. Oven f to be due to Fusarium erubescens sp. n. It attacks and shrivels the fruit and the stalk. The fungus is a variable form, producing micro- and macrogonidia, chlamy- dospores, and sclerotia. H. C. Schellenberg { found a number of thirty-year-old fir trees destroyed on the Adlisberg. They showed a strong infection of Dasy- scypha calyciformis, identical with the fungus that attacks other Conifers. It is a wound parasite, and its growth is favoured by a too close planting of the trees, and by a damp atmosphere. The crown branches were most frequently attacked and growth was arrested. R. Laubert § chronicles a bad disease of Prunus Padus caused by Sclerotinia Padi. The fungus attacks the leaves, where it forms spores which infect the opening flowers. Sclerotia are formed in the flower, and in the following spring the Sclerotinia grow from the sclerotia, and the ascospores re-infect the young leaves. J. M. Van Hook || gives an account of a serious outbreak of disease of seed peas caused by Ascochyta Pisi. Stem, leaves, and pods were attacked by the fungus. It grows through the husk of the pod and destroys the seed. The writer describes the development of the fungus and the course of the disease. He also gives methods of treatment. Peas should not be re-planted on the same area, as the fungus lives on in the soil or compost as well as in the seed peas. Myxobacteria.{/—Alfred Quehl recalls to students the work done and published on these organisms, and gives us the results of his collections in the neighbourhood of Berlin, and of his laboratory cultures. He has the same experience as others have had, that these bacteria are nearly always found on laboratory material, very rarely in the open. He explains this by their fragility and their susceptibility to moisture, which causes the forms to collapse. He records a large number of species already found by Thaxter in North America, and he adds a number of new species in the genera Polyangiuwm and Myxococcus. He thinks that the new species, Myzococcus pyriformis A. L. Sm., the only species recorded as yet for Britain, is probably a good species on account of its * Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) p. 335. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 96. + Landw. Jahrb., xxxiv. (1905) pp. 489-521. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 96-7. } Nat. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw., xii. (1905) p. 512. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 98. § Gartenflora, 1905, p. 169 (1 pl.). See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 530. || Ohio Nat., vi. (1906) pp. 507-12. _4 Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 9-34 (1 pl. and 3 figs.). 480) SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO form and colour, but that it might possibly be a form of J/yxrococcus rubescens, which is a very variable species. He devoted special attention to the germination of the spores, and followed it out in Myzococcus rubescens. After 3-4 hours they were found to have increased in size; then they passed through an oval to a rod-shaped form. In this stage motion begins, and growth in length continues. Further, he notes that germination takes place by a small portion of the spore going through these stages more rapidly than the rest of the spore. He compares these results with those of Baur and Thaxter, and he gives his observations as to the influence of temperature and media on the growth of the organisms. He also records a series of observations on the development of the cystophore, stalk, and head. BusBak, FRANz—Zweiter Beitrag zur Pilzflora von Montenegro. (Second contribu- tion to the fungus flora of Montenegro.) [The list includes 256 species, of which 66 are new to science. There are two new genera, Schiinbornia (Excipulacese) and Trichofusariwm (Tuber- culariacez). } Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 393-408 and 473-88 (2 pls.). ButTsaGin, P. W.—Die chemischen Veranderungen des Fleisches beim Schimmeln. (The chemical changes in flesh induced by fungi.) [Spores of Penicillium glaucum and Aspergillus niger were sown on sterilised meat, and the changes noted. | Arch, Hygiene, lii. (1905) pp. 1-21 (2 pls.). See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 568. Fauut, J. H.—A Preliminary Note on Ascus and Spore Formation in the Laboul- beniacez. Science (n.s.) xxiii. (1906) p. 152. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 417. HENNINGS, P.—Fungi Africe orientalis. IV. [The fungi were collected by Zimmermann and others in East Africa. Many new species are described, and one new genus of Fungi imperfecti, Ascochytopsis.] Engler’s Bot. Jahrb,, xxxviii. (1905) pp. 102-18. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 446-7. FA f Fungi Camerunenses N. [Many new species are included in the list. ] Tom. cit., pp. 119-29. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) pp. 447-8. HENNINGS, P., Linpau, G., LinpnerR, P., & NeGur, F.—Kryptogamenflora der Mark Brandenburg. [The different authors take up the various orders and genera. | Leipzig: Gebr. Borntraeger, (1905) vii. pp. 1-160. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 89-90. JAAP, D.—Fungi selecti exsiccati. [Nearly all the species have been collected in Switzerland, Brandenburg, and near Hamburg. | Serie vii., Nos. 151-75, March 1906. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 497. KRIEGER, K, W.—Fungi Saxonici exsiccati. Fasc. 39. (Fungi from Saxony.) Konigstein, 1906. See also Bot. Centralbdl., ci. (1906) p. 498. rs 58 Einige neue Pilze aus Sachsen. (Some new fungi from Saxony.) Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 39-40. MAUBLANC, A.—Sur quelques espéces nouvelles ou peu connues de Champignons inferieurs. (Some new or little known species of lower fungi.) [There is one new genus, Melanobasidiwm (Hyphomycete). | Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 63-70 (13 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 481 MAvusBLANc, A.—Quelques Champignons de Vest Africain. (Some fungi from Hast Africa. Tom. cit., pp. 71-6 (8 figs.). OnrTeL, G.—Eine neue Rhabdospora-Art. (A new species, Rhabdospora Saccar- diana.) Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 35 (1 fig.). PATOUILLARD, N.—Champignons recueillis par M. Seurat dans la Polynésie francaise. (Fungi collected by M. Seurat in French Polynesia.) [There is one new genus, Mappea (Basidiomycetes). | Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 45-62 (2 pls.). Prox, C. H.—New Species of Fungi. [The larger and smaller fungi are both represented in the list. | Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxiii. (1906) pp. 213-21. Pxercu, I.—Descriptions of New Ceylon Fungi. [The fungi are all parasitic, and cause more or less damage to their hosts.] Ann. Roy. Bot. Gard. Peradeniya, iii. (1906) pp. 1-10. Porravuut, J.—Liste des Champignons supérieurs de la Haute-Vienne (Suite). [List of fungi from Haute-Vienne. | Bull. Acad. Géogr. Bot., 1905, Nos. 185-6, pp. 73-7. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 672. PRINGSHEIM, Hans H.—Ueber die sogenannte ‘‘Bios-Frage’’ und die Gewoh- nung der Hefe an gezuckerte Mineralsalznahrlésungen. (The so-called “ Bios- Question,” and the accustoming of yeast to a mineral solution.) Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 111-19. REHM—Ascomycetes exs. Fasc. 36. [Nos. 1626 to 1650 are listed ; a number of them are new to science. | Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 64-71. Rosrrup, E.—Norges Hymenomycetes. Efter Forfatterens Dod geunemset og affsluttet af Axel Blytt. (Norwegian Hymenomycetes collected and named by Axel Blytt, and published by Rostrup after Blytt’s death.) Videns-Selsk. Skrift. 1 Math-Naturw. Kl., 1904, No. 6 (Christiana, 1905) pp. 1-164. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 93. a CARDO, P. A.—Mycetes aliquot congoenses novi. (Some new fungi from the ongo.) [A list of known species is given, and descriptions of new forms. There are ten new species or varieties of Xylaria.] Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 72-7 (1 pl.). STARBAK, KaRnt—Ascomyceten der Schwedischen Chaco-Cordilleren Expedition. (The new genera recorded are Robertomyces and Hypoxylina. Many new species are described.] Arkiv Bot., v. (1905) No. 7, pp. 1-35 (1 pl.). Sypow, H. & P.—Neue und kritsche Uredineen. IV. (New and critical Uredine.) [Species of Uromyces, Puccinia, and Uredo are described. | Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 28-32. Lichens. (By, A. Lorrain SmirH.) Subterranean Lichens.*—Among the forms of vegetation described by Jacques Maheu as occurring in caverns, there are a fair number of lichens. They are confined, however, almost exclusively to the entrance ; they do not penetrate into the depths of the caverns, less, Maheu thinks, on account of the darkness than because of the great humidity. Some live in semi-obscurity, but they are very deformed ; a few crustaceous forms grow right in the caverns. The substratum seems to be one of the most important factcrs in the case: while there were but few in the lime * Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, ili. (1906) pp. 98-101. 482 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO caverns, there were still fewer on soils composed of gypsum, and on the latter substratum the thallus was less developed, and usually more sinuous. On silica both species and individuals are rare. American Lichens.—While publishing a list of lichens from the Peterboro Hills in New England,-R. Heber Howe* insists on the extreme desirability of such local lists being made all over the country, in order that the distribution of lichens may become better known. The list he himself has made includes 38 species which were all collected in one outing. Specimens merely observed were not enumerated ; only those that were collected. C. W. Harris t publishes also a local list of lichens collected at Chilson Lake, New York. The number is much larger, and many interesting forms are included. A short note by Bruce Fink { announces a Field Book for Beginners called “Common and Conspicuous Lichens of New England,” to be published in serial parts by R. H. and M. A. Howe. Readers are warned that microscopic examination is absolutely necessary for the determination of many species. R. Heber Howe § also gives further information about the distribu- tion of Ramalina rigida. He finds that it has quite a wide range along the New England coast. HLENKIN, A. A.—Species nove lichenum in Sibiria arctica a cl. Birula-Bialynizki collects (expeditio baronis Tol.) (New species of Lichens from Arctic Siberia, collected by Birula-Bialynizki.) [Species of Parmelia and Placodiwm are described. | Ann Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 36-8. Javtvra, A.—Lichenes lecti in Chili a cl. G. J. Scott Elliott, quos determinavit. (Lichens collected in Chili by Scott Elliott, and determined by A. Jatta.) [The list includes several new species. ] Malpighia, xx. (1906) pp. 3-18. Myxomycetes. Study of Myxomycete.||—G. Nadson and A. Raitschenko found Enteromyxa paludosa in a dish containing water and alge from a pond. It lives on the unicellular Synechococcus eruginosus, one of the Cyano- phycez. Sporocysts are formed containing usually 3-6 spores ; germi- nation was not observed. The authors consider the organism to be a Myxomycete belonging to the group Endosporee. Schizophyta. Schizomycetes. Bacillus violarius acetonicus: an Acetone-producing Microbe.{ L. Bréaudat describes a chromogenic microbe isolated from the drinking water of Saigon (Cochin China), which produces acetone from proteid matter. It is a short bacillus with rapid oscillatory movement, staining * Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 46-8. Tt Tom. cit., pp. 48-52. + Tom. cit., p. 52. § Tom. cit., p. 54. i Scripta Bot. Hort. Univ. Petrop., fase. xxiii. (St. Petersburg, 1905) 18 pp., 4pls. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 100. § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) p. 1280. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 483 easily and appearing oval with a clear centre and deeply coloured extremities ; it does not stain by Gram’s method; it is a potential aerobe, grows well at all temperatures between 30° and 37° C., and forms round spores at about the sixth day; on peptone-agar it forms violet colonies, and on potato a thick deep violet almost black expansion ; it grows well on liquid media, but produces no pigment in the absence of peptone, or in the absence of air; it produces acetone in peptone solutions, and also ethylic alcohol and volatile acids ; it liquefies gelatin ; it reduces nitrates to nitrites without forming gas; it coagulates milk, the culture becoming acid, and the coagulum being slowly and completely liquefied, the liquid containing casease. The author demonstrates the formation of acetone, by inoculating a mixture containing peptone, saccharose, sodium carbonate, and water, with a three-days-old culture, and subjecting this, after incubation for a month at 30° C., to repeated distillations. The amount of acetone is estimated by Jolles’ method, which consists in combining the acetone with bisulphite of soda and titrating to find the amount of the salt that has combined. The author finds that about 0°78 gr. of acetone is yielded by a litre of culture. He proposes to name the organism Bacillus violartus acetonicus. Cytology of Bacteria.*—A. Guilliermond describes his examination of Bacillus radicosus, which from its large size permits a study of its structure. In a less than ten-hours-old culture, after fixation in Zenker’s fluid and staining with iron-hematoxylin, almost every cell shows a large deeply stained central granule, which represents the first appearance of the site of transverse fission, and is formed by the union of two small lateral granules apparently derived from a concentration of the cyto- plasm ; this large granule, or biconcave disk, divides into two coloured bands through which the division of the two cells is effected. After 10 to 12 hours the cytoplasm becomes vacuolated and filled with fine stained granules of varying size, and later shows an alveolar structure filled with fine granules resembling granules of chromatin. The spore appears at one of the poles as a small deeply stained granule ; it enlarges, takes an oval form, and becomes surrounded by a thick membrane which prevents the penetration of stains. The spore appears to be derived in part from a condensation of the granules of the cytoplasm. The author concludes that a true nucleus does not exist in a bacterium, and that such as have been described by various authors are misrepresentations, but agrees with Schaudinn that bacteria contain a chromatin more or less mixed with the cytoplasm, differentiated at times and constituting the greater part of the spore. Streptococcus Bombycis and Disease in Silkworms.+t—S. Sarti- rana and A. Paccanaro made agar and gelatin plates from emulsions of the bodies of silkworms that had died from ‘‘ consumption,” and isolated in every case, besides various bacilli, a streptococcus which in cultural and morphological characters resembled the Streptococcus bombycis of other authors. It occurs in the worm and in the cultures as short chains * Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) p. 1285. + Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xl. (1906) p. 207. 484 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO of small cocci, stains by the ordinary dyes, and also by Gram’s method ; on gelatin it forms small greyish yellow round colonies, and causes no liquefaction ; it grows slowly on plain agar, the colonies having a deep brown colour ; it grows well on agar with guinea-pig or worm blood. Pure broth culture was inoculated into adult worms by the dorsal vessel, by the mouth, and by the stigmata, and from the results of these experi- ments the authors conclude that the Streptococcus bombycis must be regarded as the specific cause of the disease, which has the nature of a chronic enteritis. The authors think that the lethargy, so often one of the morbid phenomena, should not be considered as a special disease caused by a specific micro-organism, but as a result of a mixed infection. Chemical Action of Bacillus lactis aerogenes on Glucose and Mannitol.*—A. Harden and G. 8. Walpole, from quantitative examina- tions of the products of the fermentation of glucose and mannitol by Bacillus lactis aerogenes, showed that the ferment action differed from that of Bacillus coli, a proportion of 2:3 butylene-glycol and acetylmethyl- carbinol, in the first case, being Hee cd from the glucose. The authors point out that the alcohol produced by the Bacillus lactis aerogenes is slightly greater in amount than that produced by Bacillus coli, and that it is at the expense of that part of the molecule which in Bacillus coli fermentation yields acetic acid and lactic acid, that the Bacillus lactis aerogenes forms the new products. Resistance of Bacillus coli to Heat.j—St. de M. Gage and G. v. E. Stoughton have made a number of experiments on the resistance of Bacillus coli to heat. They find that in every culture a few of these organisms exhibit an extraordinary resistance, surviving in some cases 90° C. for five minutes; there was no evidence of true spores ;_ all attempts failed to obtain by subculturing a special highly resistant strain of this organism. The temperature at which final sterilisation occurred varied from 60° C. to 95° C. in 18 different tests; the thermal death point of the majority of the bacteria was between 50° C. and 55° C. The authors consider that the results obtained in the determinations of the normal thermal death point would lead to the belief that its application in the identification of bacterial species would be of more value than the determination of the absolute thermal death point. Plasmoptysis of Bacteria.t—A. Fischer has shown that plasmo- ptysis is an appearance found widely distributed among bacterial cultures. In order to demonstrate this, the organism must be allowed to develop in an unfavourable medium. The comma bacillus of Finkler Prior especially shows this pleomorphism. The medium used by the author was alkaline fleisch-wasser, to which was added 1 p.c. peptone and 1 p.c. cane sugar, and used as broth or with agar; after a few hours at 32° C., many of the vibrios have taken on oval or spherical forms, all more or less motile; later, these forms show short outgrowing stalks, often giving the appearance of a Cyclops with its pair of egg-cases, these forms being very numerous by the sixteenth hour ; later, the vibrios are regenerated. Hanging drops of fourteen-hour broth cultures were pre- * Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxxvii. (1906) p. 399. + Technology Quarterly, xix. (1906) p. 41. ft Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) p. 55. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 485 pared with incompletely closed chambers, so that the organism could be exposed to the influence of various volatile substances such as ammonia, acetic acid, formic acid : the author gives minute details in hours and fractions of a minute at which the various appearances occur in the organisms in the drop. The author cannot decide whether the plasmoptysis is to be attri- buted to changes in the elasticity of the cell membrane, or to a gradual impermeability of the protoplasm, whether due to changes in the osmotic action of substances inside the vibrio, or in the broth. Similar effects were observed with other vibrios, and also with the hay bacillus. Significance of the Anaerobic Putrefactive Bacilli in the Ripening of Cheese.*—A. Rodella, from chemical analysis of cultures, finds that various anaerobic putrefactive bacilli set up fermentations that produce butyric acid, valerianic acid, and caprionic acid, the amounts of which he estimates as salts of silver after the method of Orla Jensen. The author has isolated these organisms, and described their cultural charac- teristics. Bacillus leguminiperdus sp. n.{— EH. Oven describes a disease affecting the pods of peas and various beans, and which is caused by an actively motile bacillus that rapidly liquefies gelatin. Inoculation of healthy plants showed that the pods were not necessarily affected through any abrasion of the surface. Owing to the greater density of the inner wall of the pod, the disease does not penetrate to this part. A moist atmosphere favours the growth of the organism. ‘The author finds that the seeds may become infected from the soil, and that every part of the plant may be attacked. The organism isa short rod 0°8 by 2 y-2°3, very motile, with polar flagella 2-3 times the length of the bacillary body. It does not stain by Gram’s method ; sporulation occurs readily in fluid media, the spore being single, and situated at either end of the rod ; neither fer- mentation of sugar media, nor production of indol, was ever observed. The author has named the organism Bacillus leguminiperdus sp.n., but it is probable that other plants besides the Leguminosz are sus- ceptible to this bacillus. Tuberculosis of the “ Bee-moth” (Galeria melonella).{—S. Metal- nikoff finds that to the tubercle of man, beasts and birds, the grub of the ‘‘ bee-moth ” is immune, as is shown by the rapid destruction (under an hour) of the tubercle bacillus in the phagocytes, and in certain cases also in the blood plasma of the grub. When, however, the animal is inoculated with fish tubercle bacilli, these rapidly increase, and the grub dies. Bacterial Flora of Bottled Beer.§—F. Fuhrmann has observed the presence of Pseudomonas cerevisie in bottled beer ; it occurs as a short, actively motile rod with a bunch of 4-6 -fine wavy flagella at one end. On neutral nutrient gelatin at 22°C. it forms round, slightly yellow, translucent colonies cupped in the centre; after prolonged growth a slight sinking in of the gelatin occurs, though there is true liquefaction * Centralbl. Bakt., 2te Abt., xvi. (1906) p. 52. + Tom. cit., p. 67. ~ Op. cit., 1te Abt. Orig., xli. (1906) p. 188. § Op. cit., 2te Abt. xvi. (1906) p. 309. 486 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO only when there are many closely applied colonies. It forms yellowish, moist, shining colonies on moist, neutral nutrient agar at 22°C., and after a few days a yellow colour is diffused through “the medium. It grows as a moist, shining yellow brown expansion on potato ; in broth, a grey pellicle is formed, the medium is uniformly clouded, and there ts a yellow deposit, and later the liquid acquires a bright yellow colour. _ Its optimum temperature is 22°C.; at higher temperatures it forms long rods and threads, with slow, snake-like movements ; in glucose broth it produces no gas; it forms no indol, even after prolonged growth in pepton-water and broth cultures; it is a facultative anaerobe ; it grows on mineral media, and in tubes of calcium nitrate there is formation of nitrite. It is killed by exposure to 60°C. for an hour and a half; in beer containing 4—5 p.c. alcohol its resistance to heat is much diminished, and it is sterilised within half an hour. Bacteriology of Summer Diarrhea of Infants.*—H. de R. Morgan, from the results of an extended examination of the stools from 58 cases, has selected three organisms as possible causes of the disease. Bacillus No. 1, which is not normally present in human stools, sewage, or drinking water, was isolated in 28 cases; it caused diarrhoea and death in young animals, and could be isolated in pure culture from the spleens ; but in no case did the patient’s blood agglutinate this organism. Bacillus No. 3 was isolated in five cases, and in one instance the patient’s blood agglutinated this organism, and also the Bacillus typhosus, and it was shown that this bacillus was agglutinated equally well by dysentery (Flexner) serum and by typhoid” serum ; this organism was pathogenic to young rats which were fed on it, but produced no diarrheea. Bacillus No. 4 was isolated in three cases, and was selected chiefly on account of its resemblance to the Flexner group of dysentery bacilli ; this organism was pathogenic to young rats. The author regrets that in no case was the blood or the spleen of fatal cases examined bacteriologically. Virus of Glanders in Urine.t—G. Cagnetto finds that the Bacillus mallet appears in the urine of animals (horse, donkey, cat, and man) affected with glanders after 30-35 hours, and retains its pathogenic properties for at most 3-4 days, but undergoes remarkable morphological changes and diminution of its virulence. These changes appear much sooner in the urine of infected animals than in the urine of healthy animals, probably on account of some specific antibody that passes over from the blood into the urine. The diminished vitality of B. mallei when in contact with the urine of infected animals is more marked in regard to its behaviour on artifi- cial media than in its pathogenic action. The bacillus loses its virulence completely in horse urine when dried, after 20 hours. Bacillus choree paralytice ovis.{—D. J. Hamilton describes an organism found in the peritoneal fluid of sheep affected with “ louping- * Brit. Med. Journ., 1906, i., p. 908. t Centralbl. Bakt., 1 Abt. Orig., xli. (1906) p. 173. t Board of Agriculture Report, 1906. See also Brit. Med. Journ., 1906, i. p. 1472. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 487 ill.” ‘It is a coarse-looking rod with rounded ends, sometimes elongating into a thread, or it may be into a chain of rods. Its breadth is over 1 », and in length it varies from 8-12 » or more ; it is feebly motile, and forms spores with central or polar location. It is an essential anaerobe, and grows best on alkalin-glucose broth and glucose-gelatin covered with oil. During germination a gas with putrefactive odour is evolved. Italian Variety of Nitrosomonas europea.*—R. Perotti obtained samples of earth from different parts of Italy, and isolated therefrom in Omelianski’s medium (ammon. sulph. 2, sodium chloride 2, potass. phosphate 1, magnesium sulphate 0°5, iron sulphate 0°4, distilled water 1000) a variety of Nitrosomonas with similar morphological characters. It mostly occurred as a small coccus 0*6—-0°8 » in diameter, but showed indications of transition to bacillus form. In the monad stage the organism possesses a flagellum equal in length to the bacterial body. The movements are slow and jerky. It does not develop in media containing organic substances ; it produces nitrous acid from the salts of ammonium. Bacillus alatus sp. n.t—R. Greig-Smith found this pleomorphic slime bacterium when isolating Rhizobium leguminosarum from the nodules of Lupinus luteus. It is a motile rodlet with numerous peritrichous flagella. When stained with fuchsin it is acid-fast to 5 p.c. HCl, but is negative to Gram. The shape and size of the capsule vary with the medium. It forms indol and reduces nitrates to nitrites, and coagulates milk at 55° ©. On certain media with a vegetable base it forms a slime readily and luxuriantly ; from the slime was obtained a thick mucilage with the reactions of arabin. The gum seems from its reactions to lie between Macrozamia gum and Gum Acacia. Identity of Opsonins and Normal Agglutinins.{—R. Greig-Smith finds that opsonins and agglutinins have many points of similarity, and probably no points of difference. The similarities are: (1) Staphylo- coccus opsonin and agglutinin are not destroyed at 60° C.—their powers are only in abeyance. Contact with the bacteria for 20 hours induces a recovery. (2) In dilute saline solutions the recovery of the opsonic power is accompanied by an agglutination of the bacteria. (3) Potassium chloride gives a greater agglutinative and a greater opsonic effect than sodium chloride. (4) Dilution of the serum with saline solutions increases the agglutinative and the relative opsonic effects. (5) Longer cultivation of a weak race of staphylococcus increases the agglutinability and the opsonisation of the cells. Opsonisation appears to be the first phase of agglutination. Phagocytosis in vitro.$—M. Lohlein undertook some experiments to confirm Metchnikoff’s work on the ingestion of pathogenic organisms * Atti R. Accad. Lincei, xv. (1906) pp. 512-16. + Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., xxx. (1906) pp. 570-3 (1 pl.). } Tom. cit., pp. 555-69. § Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xix. (1905) p. 647. 488 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO by leucocytes freed from “substances sensibilatrices” Gmmune body, amboceptor). The leucocytes were obtained by injecting bouillon into the peritoneal cavity of guinea-pigs, and in 5-8 hours the fluid removed, which was rich in polymorphs, was centrifuged and repeatedly washed with saline solution. Hanging drop preparations were examined, and stained films at different periods made. A virulent anthrax culture suspended with leucocytes showed that ingestion started immediately at room tempera- ture. Films showed very early traces of phagocytosis, and in 1-2 hours nearly all were ingested. Often several leucocytes united to ingest one large filament. Similar results were obtained with human leucocytes obtained by Wright’s method. Attenuated staphylococci gave similar results, and also less virulent forms of streptococci. Two strains of coli were used im vitro, and controlled by injections i vivo into a guinea- pig’s peritoneal cavity, the fluid being withdrawn in 4 hours. Coli J was rapidly ingested im vitro, and the peritoneal fluid showed numerous leucocytes stuffed with bacilli and granules, which latter also were found free, and subcultures could not be obtained. Coli C was not ingested in vitro, and only a few of the peritoneal leucocytes contained some bacilli and granules: there were only a few free granules, and abundant subcultures were obtained. In hanging drop neither the shape nor motility of coli was altered, but they were seized alive, often exhibiting a certain amount of motility inside the phagocyte. Degeneration inta round granules occurred apparently in vacuoles, appearing a few minutes after ingestion, although no change occurred outside the cells in 30 minutes. Vibrio cholere likewise showed no extracellular change for 2 hour, when some of them were altered and showed granules, but the leucocytes were then showing signs of degeneration (cf. Wright and Douglas that granulation is due to the sera). Stained films showed alteration after ingestion, and some filaments appeared partly ingested with different staining appearances of the intra- and extra-cellular portion. Some further experiments are described with a view to determine the bacteriolytic action of the phagocytes, and tend to show that, whilst growth of bacteria is inhibited after treating with washed leucocytes, it is unaffected by leucocytes heated to 55° C. Anthrax was also found to be unaffected after treatment with guinea-pig’s serum, but was inhibited by peritoneal fluid of a guinea-pig. The author shortly dis- cusses the view that the leucocyte contains both an amboceptor and a cytase, and summarises his work as follows. Guinea-pigs’ leucocytes, washed frequently to remove any “substances sensibilatrices ” contained in the plasma, or any other substance capable of aiding phagocytosis, incorporate and digest in vitro pathogenic microbes (anthrax, cholera, some varieties of streptococcus, and B. coli) ; thus showing that phago- cytosis is a cell phenomenon which may occur without the intervention of active bodies contained in the plasma. Some microbes, however, such as certain varieties of streptococcus and B. coli, are not easily phagocyted either in vivo or in vitro. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 489 MICROSCOPY, A. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1) Stands. Zeiss’ Large Mechanical Stage.t—This stage (fig. 54) has a range of 50 mm. (2 in.) in one direction, and 35 mm. (12 in.) in the other ; } ( ns ; 2 ees o< | Nonias an ‘ opt. Werkstaette Eee |) el | a b Fic. 54. vernier scales record the variations in either direction. A third vernier scale enables the portions of the movable cheek-piece which secures the object-slide to be recorded. This arrangement facilitates the use of the apparatus as a “finder,” while the process of centring is much simplified by the use of a centring glass, i.e. a slide with a cross ruled on it. Zeiss’ Stand for Crystallographic and Petrographic Work.t—This instrument (fig. 55) is an example of a medium sized stand, and is so * This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation; (6) Miscellaneous. + Carl Zeiss’ Catalogue of Microscopes and Microscopical Accessories, 33rd ed. 1906, p. 36 (fig. 14). ¢ Tom. cit., pp. 50-1 (fig. 22), Aug. 15th, 1906 2K 490 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO = SS SSK Ay MHONGER JENA = Sa ee ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 491 constructed as to allow of subsequent additions to the stage and sub-stage equipment. The body is fitted with Berger’s micrometer movement, and the draw-tube is at its lower end provided with a slide to admit a mounted Amici-Bertrand lens through an opening in the outer tube. The instrument is furnished with analysers and polariser, with selenite, mica, and Biot-Klein quartz plates—suitable arrangement being made for inserting these plates in a sliding carrier above the objective. The revolving vulcanite stage is graduated at the circumference, and has a line index. The two upper lenses of the swing-out condenser, N.A. 1°40, are easily detachable, as their mount is not screwed but slipped on over the lowest lens. Additional accessory apparatus can be supplied. (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Zeiss’ Compensating Ocular 4* with Iris Diaphragm.*——Messrs. C. Zeiss have modified one of their series of compensating oculars by fit- ting it with a collecting-lens of large diameter (fig. 56). As compared with its predecessor 4, its field is considerably enlarged, though only adapted for use with objectives of 16 mm. and 8mm. The ocular is fitted with a il revolving collar, and can be fixed in any desired | i position by means of the clamping-screw K. An gee iris diaphragm supersedes the ordinary fixed sill diaphragm. The eye-lens is mounted in a sliding sleeve, so that a scale can be used if required. Fluid Lenses.t —W. A. Rublee, U.S. Consul- General at Vienna, states that a Hungarian chemist has succeeded in producing optical lenses by a simple and cheap process that are not only quite as good as the best massive glass lenses at present used, but that can be manufactured of a size three times as great as the largest homogeneous glass lens heretofore made. Though the invention is more important for astronomical work, lenses of smaller diameter for photographic purposes, _ for opera glasses, reading glasses, etc., can be produced at correspondingly smaller cost. The lens consists of a fluid substance inclosed between two unusually hard glass surfaces, similar to watch crystals, in which the refractive power and other characteristic properties are so chosen that the glass surfaces not only serve to hold the fluid, but:also combine with the fluid to overcome such defects as are scarcely to be avoided in ordinary lenses. It is for this reason that the lens is achromatic. The fluid contained in the lens is hermetically closed in, so that no air can enter and exercise a damaging influence. The fluid does not evaporate, and its composition is such that its properties are not affected by time or temperature. The coefficient of expansion, both of the glass and of the fluid, is approximately the same between the temperatures of * Carl Zeiss’ Catalogue of Microscopes and Microscopical Accessories, 33rd ed, , 1906, p. 18 (fig. 5). + English Mechanic, lxxxiii. (1906) p. 473. eke 2 492 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 15° of cold to 60° of heat. Another advantage of the lens is that on account of the fact that the fluid is not dense, and the glass crystals are thin, the whole lens combination through which the light penetrates is very slight. MALASSEZ, M. L.—Evaluation des distances fcco-faciales des Objectifs. [The substance of this treatise has already appeared in the Journal: 1905, tp. 500, and 1906, pp. 362-3}. Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 926-8. (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Zeiss’ Centring Achromatic Condenser.*—In this condenser (fig. 57), N.A. 1°0, and equivalent focal length 14 mm., the stopping down li Fic. 57. of the illuminating rays is effected by means of an iris diaphragm situated between the lenses. This entails a full opening of the dia- phragm of the illuminating apparatus. Spectrohelioscope (A. Sauve).—New Arrangement for procuring a Monochromatic Image of a Light-Source (A. Nodon).t—Both A. Sauve and A. Nodon, under the above dissimilar titles, have inde- pendently studied the improvement of spectroheliographs for photo- graphing the sun’s image with light of definite wave-length. Both authors have endeavoured to find means whereby the heavy spectrograph itself should be at rest during use, and whereby all adjustment should be attained by movement of the mirror which reflects the light on to the slit. In Sauve’s arrangement, the light which at first falls on the front of the mirror is, after a series of reflections and refractions, made to fall on the back of the same mirror before the final reflection into the observation tube. Nodon attains the same object by the use of two simple mirrors * Carl Zeiss’ Catalogue of Microscopes and Microscopical Accessories, 33rd ed. 1906, p. 31 (fig. 11). + Mem. della Soc. degli Spettroscopisti Italiani, xxxiiii. (1904) p. 54. See also Comptes Rendus, exli. (1905) p. 1010; and Zeit. f. Instr., xxvi. (1906) pp. 129-30. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 493 which can be clamped together on the same axis at any desired angle. The first mirror throws the beam of light, issuing from the projection- lens, direct on to the first slit of the spectral apparatus. The light emergent from the second slit is then reflected by a fixed mirror on to the second adjustable mirror, and thence into the observation tube. Spectroscope with Adjustable Dispersion.*—P. Kriiss found that the desirability of this instrument was suggested by the requirements of the dyeing industry. Most colouring materials have characteristic spectra, and it is, therefore, obviously necessary to make the spectrum as clear and as perfect as possible. It is found, however, that the spectrum is dependent on several factors, e.g. the most suitable solvent, the proper degree of concentration of that solvent, and the thickness of the layer placed before the slit of the instrument. But, in addition to these fairly obvious factors, the spectrum of a dye usually requires a suitable dis- persion. A dispersion suitable for one medium may be so unsuitable for another that the absorption bands may be indistinct and quite un- recognisable. At present the operator keeps several spectroscopes of various dispersive powers ready, but this inconvenience the author seeks WY Fia. 58. to remedy by the design of his iustrument. He places two direct-vision prisms behind one another, and rotates them equally in opposite directions about their common optical axis. This arrangement is similar to that adopted by Abbe for his refractometer. The two opposed rims R, R, (fig. 58) of the tubes carrying the prisms P and P,, are provided with engaging toothed wheels, and between these wheels is a driving wheel T, by which the two tubes are rotated through exactly equal angles in opposite directions. The two prisms P and P,, are perfectly similar to one another, and are direct-vision for a ray of medium wave-length. If one prism has a dispersion D, then the total dispersion will be 2D. If each is rotated through 90°, then the total is zero. Thus the limits lie between 2D and 0. If ¢ be the angle of rotation, measured from the position in which the refracting edges of both prisms are perpendicular to the direction of the slit, and if d be the length of the spectrum measured, from the ray which passes without deviation to a ray of desired wave-length, then the combined dispersion parallel to the slit is zero, and perpendicular to the slit 2d sin ¢; hence only the latter has to be measured. If the absorption-band attained in a single-prism * Zeit. f. Instr., xxvi. (1906) pp. 139-42 (2 figs.). 494 -.- SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO spectrum has a breadth b=d d,, then the breadth with two-prism spectrum will be 2 0 sin ¢. Fig. 59 represents a spectroscope equipped with such a direct-vision prism combination. The sleeve-collar of the one prism is provided with an external drum graduated in degrees. Fic. 59. Turron, A. E. H.—Das Elasmometer, ein neuer Interferenz-Elastizitatsapparat. [Full details and diagrams of this elaborate machine are given. | Zeit. f. Krystallogr. wu. Miner., xxxix. (1904) p. 321. See also Zeit. f. Instr., xxvi. (1906) pp. 163-7 (2 figs.). i(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Interferences produced by a Network limiting a thin Lamella.* G. Meslin gives an explanation of the rings observed when a network is placed on the convex surface of a lens of weak curvature, the strands of the net being perpendicular to the plane of incidence. Such rings are distinguished from Newton’s rings by the following properties :— 1. They are much wider and much further apart. 2. They are visible in white light, even if network and lens are not only not in contact, but several millimetres apart. 3. They are scarcely iridescent, and when viewed at an angle of 45° they are sensibly achromatic. 4. The diameter of these circles diminishes when the incidence in- creases : with Newton’s rings the opposite effect holds. The author attributes the phenomenon to the interference of the * Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 1039-42. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 495 two beams which, although having been both reflected in the thin lamella, have undergone diffraction by the net, one at its entrance into the lamella, and the other at its emergence. These fringes can be rendered more brilliant by increasing the reflecting power of the lower surface, e.g. by employing a metallic surface, a condition unfavourable for Newton’s rings. The fringes can be used with white light for con- veniently verifying the form of the lower surface, whether it be of glass, of metal, or of mercury. Entoptic Vision and the Entoptiscope.*—If a pinhole perforation through a card, or similar opaque object, be turned towards the light and held close to the eye, a circular disk is seen, which is the shadow cast by the circular aperture of the iris. By such means small opacities in the path of the rays in the eye are projected on the retina and become visible. This method of self-examination of obscurities within the eye- ball is termed entoptic. A casual experiment of this kind led W. F. Barrett to the unwelcome discovery that he had incipient cataract of both eyes. The entoptiscope is an instrument which he has invented for viewing, delineating, and measuring entoptic objects. Pl. XVII., fig. 1, shows the first form of the designer’s entoptiscope. It consists of a pair of vertical brass pillars supporting a head rest, which can slide from side to side so as to bring either eye vertically over the pin-hole contained in the revolving diaphragm of the eye-pieee. This diaphragm has pin-hole apertures varying in diameter from 0°1 to 2°5 mm., and a pair of pin-holes each 0°1 mm. diameter, and 2 mm. apart, so that by revolving the diaphragm either a single aperture of any given size, or a double aperture, can be successively brought before the eye. Below the pin-hole eye-piece is a transparent scale divided into fractions of a millimetre ; the shadow of this scale falls upon the eye of the observer, and is thence projected, much magnified, upon the ground- glass stage below, along with the shadows of any opacities seen in the eye. At the base of the instrument is a concave mirror, which can be adjusted so as to illuminate the eye-piece brilliantly, using the light of the sky or that of alamp. A sharply-pointed and hard pencil is used by the observer to trace the image seen on the ground-glass stage. The image of the pupillary disk, the projected shadow of the opacities in the eye, and the pencil point, are all seen in the same plane with perfect clearness. After the drawing has been made the ground-glass can be removed and photographed for future comparison. A later form of the instrument is shown in Pl. XVII. fig. 2. The vertical pillar P is hinged so that the observer may incline it to suit himself; a single pillar is used so as to leave the hand free to draw on the ground-glass stage G, which carries a supporting hand-rest R. The eye-pieces E E have cups shaped to fit the eye and bring the cornea within a definite distance of the pin-hole. In this way the pin-hole can be placed at the anterior focus of the eye (above half an inch from the cornea), and the stage is placed at a fixed distance so as to give a definite magnification. It is important that the observer in using the entoptiscope should be comfortably seated and completely at ease; he should have his hands * Scientific Proc. Royal Dublin Soc., xi., Nos. 7-8, March and May 1906. 496 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO free and not be troubled to keep one eye closed—it is much better, im fact, to keep both eyes open. This is done in using either of the in- struments ; in the smaller one the shaped sliding head-rest keeps all light from reaching the eyes except through the single revolving dia- phragm ; in the larger one there are two revolving diaphragms, one (shown at D) for each of the eye-pieces EE. The eye that is not under observation is kept in complete darkness by turning D until the index marks zero; at this position there is no aperture in the diaphragm. Thus either eye can be occluded with ease. The mirror M is plane and not concave, and made sufficiently large to cover the whole of the ground-glass G with a flood of light reflected from a neighbouring incandescent gas lamp or other source of light. As the mirror is carried by the stage and moves with it, the illumination of the field remains unaltered in adjusting the inclination of the pillar. The pillar, stage, and mirror move with stiff friction round the centre A, and can be clamped in any position. In order to avoid any shifting of the observer’s head, and also to avoid fatigue, a hinged and padded head-rest H is fixed in such a position that the forehead rests comfortably upon it. The head-rest is also made to rise and fall, and there is an arrangement for accommodating the diaphragms to the distance between the eyes.* WILSING, J.—Uber die Bildebenung bei Spektographen-Objektiven. [Shows how H. Hartmann’s equations and conditions can be almost exactly satisfied by choice of certain kindsof glass. ] Zeit. f. Instr., xxvi. (1906) pp. 101-7. (6) Miscellaneous. Construction and Fittings of a Microscope Room.t—The following extracts are taken from the report of N. A. Cobb, who describes very fully the construction and fittings of his Microscope room at Honolulu. The report also deals with the illustration room, dark room, and the camera-lucida. THE MICROSCOPE ROOM. For many years it has been customary in the best laboratories to mount various instruments of precision upon pillars of stone or masonry deeply imbedded in wells in the ground and passing upward through the floors of the laboratory without contact. The object of this arrange- ment is to prevent tremors. It is not often that the Microscope has received such special attention, but wherever high powers are used and especially when photo-micrographs are being prepared, or whenever high-power camera-lucida drawings are being made, the reduction of vibration is an important factor in the success of the work. For many years the writer has had Microscopes mounted in this way, and hereby testifies strongly in favour of this method of using the Microscope. The plan is carried out in cement and steel (see fig. 60). Below the * For the loan of the blocks in this Plate we are indebted to the courtesy of the Royal Dublin Society. + Rep. Exper. Stat. Com. Hawaian Sugar Planters’ Assoc., 1905, pp. 39-59. JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1906. Pl. XVII. ENG, De [To fuce p. 496. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 497 building is a large block of cement weighing several tons. In this block of cement three T-girders, two of which are approximately 8 in. in each dimension, are imbedded vertically to the depth of about 4 ft. The central one of the girders carries the Microscope, together with certain accessory apparatus connected with the illumination of the object. This girder is much smaller and shorter than the other two, extending only about 18 in. above the floor of the Microscope room. The other two girders are mates and extend to within about 18 in. of the ceiling of the room ; in other words, project upward into the room about 11 ft. Needless to say, the object of these girders is to afford attachment for all the necessary apparatus connected with the Microscope. The girders at every part clear the walls of the building by a fair margin. It is, however, best to place all the girders as close to the Microscope window as is convenient. The reason for this will be explained on a subsequent page. In the present instance the distance between the girders and the window casings is about 1 in. The general principle on which the accessory apparatus is attached to the girders is that of sliding metal sleeves that may be clamped in any desired position. A sleeve of in. sheet metal surrounds the small central girder and projects outwards—that is, towards the observer—sufiiciently to form a base on which the Microscope may rest. This base is from 1-2 times larger than the horse-shoe base of the Microscope. This gives a sufficient amount of space, so that the Microscope can be readily arranged for different classes of work, moved sidewise in either direction, or forwards or backwards. The sleeve carrying the Microscope is clamped to its pillar by 3 set-screws, and by means of this simple arrangement the Microscope can be raised and lowered to suit different operators and different classes of work. When, for instance, micro-photographs are being taken, it is most convenient to drop the sleeve to its lowest limit, so that the Microscope will rest on a base about 15 in. above the floor. For most photo-micrographic work this will enable the operator to bring the focusing plate of the camera (Fig. 60, 79) low enough to render it unnecessary for the operator to have any special step-ladder to assist him in obtaining an accurate focus. On the other hand, when it is necessary to place the Microscope high and the camera-lucida table low, one can obtain a distance as great as 24 ft. between the level of the eye-piece of the Microscope and the drawing table. This, together with the peculiar camera-lucida, which will be described later on, enables one to make his original sketches of such a size as to allow for that liberal reduction in the subsequent photographic process which gives the best results for book illustrations. The sleeve which carries the Microscope also carries a wooden front as wide as the Microscope window and about 2 ft. deep —in other words, about 3 ft. by 2 ft. This screen, which of course slides up and down with the Microscope and its sleeve, carries two aper- tures. One of these apertures is in front of the Microscope mirror, and is designed to allow the light from the special out-door illuminating screen to strike the mirror and pass through the Microscope. The second aperture is of much larger size, and is glazed with ground glass and opened or closed as desired by means of a hanging slide worked by foot-power. The object of this second opening is to secure a correct 498 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, illumination on the drawing board when the camera-lucida is in use (see fig. 60, 32, 36). We will next pass to a description of the Microscope window. This faces the sun, and preferably faces precisely south. It is so fitted with light-proof roller blinds that the light may be entirely shut off, or may be allowed full access. The roller blinds slide in lateral grooves 10 in. deep. The depth of these grooves must be sufficient to prevent the blinds bellying through the action of the wind. It is found when a window is tightly closed with flexible blinds, as is the case in this special Microscope window, that the pressure of the wind is sufficient to cause considerable inconvenience, unless the edges of these roller blinds are held in deep grooves. Should it be necessary to make a further pro- vision against the bellying of the blinds, they may be stiffened from place to place with ;4, in. wooden laths ; or wires may be strung across the window. The blinds may be of any opaque material, but if they EXPLANATION OF Fila. 60. 1, 1, 1, Pulleys for the sash cords 2; 2, 2, steel sash cords for the slides 12 and 21; 3, 3, two vertical steel girders passing through the floor without contact, imbedded in several tons of cement under the building; 4, 4, steel sash cords, same as 2; 5, wooden frame-work to stiffen the girders 3, 3; 6, 6, the two upper opaque sashes to the side windows of the bay; 7, 7, sash weights counterbalancing the cross-arms 12 and 21; 8, one of the two similar light-proof roller blinds ; 9, 9, Anti-friction bearing for the arms bolted to the cross-piece 12; 10, anti-friction bearings for the arms of the cross-piece 21; 11, lower opaque wooden sash of the left hand window; 12, cross-piece for the attachment of the camera 18 and the camera lucida prism 24; 18, screw clamp to cross-piece 12; 14, lower opaque wooden sash to right hand bay window; 15, slot in which the camera lucida arm 17 slides horizontally; 16, clamp to the cross-arm 21; 17, arm for the support of the camera lucida prism 24: 18, ordinary camera attached to arm 12; 19, Microscope camera attached to arm 21; 20, vertically sliding head-rest ; 21, wooden cross-arm supporting Microscope camera 19, and head-rest 20, and drop slide 32; 22, battery of. Microscope, using direct sky-light ; 23, serew clamp to cross-arm 21; 24, large 45° camera lucida prism; 25, location of the camera lucida drawing, vertically adjustable by means of steel cord and sash weights similar to 7; 26, pillow to head- rest; 27, wide thin metal curtain stick to the inside roller blind 8; 28, ways for the horizontal thin metal slide 29; 29, thin metal slide with diamond shaped opening 31; 30, small camera lucida prism of the usual pattern; 31, diamond- shaped opening in the slide 29; 32, thin opaque drop slide adjustable vertically through foot power, by means of simple pulleys located behind 17 and the foot power 40, 41, and 42; 33, left-hand adjustable leg-of-mutton shaped table; 34, right-hand adjustable leg-of-mutton shaped table ; 35, opaque dark cloth enclos- ing sub-stage of Microscope, preventing access of extraneous light; 36, aperture for the admission of light, glazed with ground glass, and opened and closed by means of slide 32 and foot power 40, 41, and 42 ; 37, steel sleeve carrying Micro- scope, and vertically adjustable on the pillow 38; 38, steel pillar for support of Microscope, passing through floor without contact, and imbedded in several tons of cement under the building; 39, aperture in floor for the passage of girder 38; 40, spring-roller foot power for the control of drop slide 32 by means of the string passing around the pulley 42; 41, spring roller of ordinary pattern, covered with sand-paper to give sole of foot efficient grip; 42, pulley turned by foot power, and winding or unwinding the string which raises or lowers the drop slide 32—the weight of drop slide 32 exactly counteracts the spring of the roller 41; 438, left- hand steel girder at height of floor; 44, steel sleeve sliding vertically on left-hand girder and affording attachment for table 33; 45, steel sleeve sliding vertically on right-hand girder and affording attachment for table 34. 09 “STH a TAN i t N 3 ‘ N N Ny N Ne NS \ 500 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO are very long, preferably of some thin material. The writer has found that ordinary green opaque window blinds can be sized black, so as to become practically light-proof, and as it is advisable in constructing a light trap to have two blinds, he finds that with two such blinds the light is wholly excluded, and, if necessary, the room can be used as a photographic dark-room. The wooden rollers used are of the ordinary pattern, and present no special peculiarity. They are built in, or boxed in, at the top in a light-tight manner. We turn next to the various sleeves sliding on the long, upright girders. Of these one of the most important is the right-hand lower sleeve, which carries a leg-of-mutton shaped table for use in connection with the production of camera-lucida drawings. This sleeve, as well as all the others, is balanced with a-sash-weight, so that it moves with the utmost freedom either up or down through a space of about 4 ft. The table may, therefore, be placed within 15 in. of the floor, or it may be raised to a distance of 3 ft. This adjustability is found to be highly convenient in the production of camera-lucida drawings of definite magnification. The peculiar shape of the table has been evolved from practical experience during many years. In general, its form is such that, when taken together with its mate on the other side of the Micro- scope, it presents a semicircular curvature, which gives the investigator a free play for hands and body. This table is painted black, as are all the other accessories used in this system (see fig. 60, 33, 34). Turning to the left-hand side of the Microscope, we find an entirely similar and symmetrical sleeve and table, which, however, is used for a very different purpose. This sleeve carries the mate to the camera- lucida table, and, of course, in the case of a left-handed operator, could be used in the same way as the right-hand table would be used by a right-handed operator. The usual position for the left-hand table is about on a level with the Microscope stage. This height is found to be convenient for several reasons ; first, under ordinary circumstances, it is about ordinary table height, and is convenient for supporting dissecting Microscope, which, as explained later on, has a special illumination of its own. Thus, in the preparation and examination of objects, the dissecting stand is as close as possible to the examination stand, and the objects may be transferred from one to the other with the greatest convenience ; a second reason for having the left-hand table on a level with the stage of the Microscope, is that the preparations may be moved on and off the stage of the Microscope with the least danger and with the greatest facility. A third reason is that, in this position, the left forearm finds it a most convenient rest in working the fine-adjustment screw. In addition to the three sleeves already described, the long girders carry two cross-pieces for the attachment of various accessories. These wooden cross-pieces slide up and down, and are weighted with sash-weights, so that their adjustment may be quickly and easily accom- plished. In order that the friction on the girders may not cause any inconvenience, arms extend upward from these cross-pieces for the purpose of carrying pulleys which are in contact with the edges of the girder, and so reduce the friction. These cross-pieccs are clamped in position by set-screws at the side. It will be at once evident that these ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 501 cross-pieces may be used for the attachment of a variety of accessories. Among the more important of these is the Microscope camera (see fig. 60, 29). This hangs above the Microscope, and is ever in readiness for instant use. The camera itself presents no very peculiar features. It is, of course, a vertical pattern, carrying the exposed photographic plate in a horizontal position. It cannot be used in a horizontal posi- tion. Experience has shown that the vertical position has very many advantages, and that if one is confined to a single outfit, the vertical outfit is the better, providing its attachment can be of the nature here described. In obtaining the focus, the cross-piece carrying the camera is loosened by unclamping the side screws, and is then moved upward and downward against the sash-weights, which counterbalance it. A scale is marked on the girders, so that the various magnifications are at once obtainable, or they may be obtained by special measurement in each case. The apparatus never needs any levelling, being, as before said, constantly ready for use. The operator loosens two hooks, and the camera drops instantly into position. The whole is ready for use in a few seconds’ time. If the photograph is being taken with a high power, and the illumination is, therefore, weak, and the exposure conse- quently long, one leaves his instrument during the exposure with the greatest confidence that nothing can disturb it. Any tremors in the building will not be received either by the Microscope or the photographic plate. A second attachment of great importance for the production of illustrations is the CAMERA LUCIDA. This presents a number of peculiarities (fig. 60, 77, 24). Any form of camera-lucida is an instrument well calculated for the destruction of eyesight. The writer has during many years of experi- ence been endeavouring to reduce the injury to the eyesight in connection with the use of the camera-lucida, and the following sug- gestions, embodied in the outfit here described, are the result of his experience. In the first place, he has substituted for the ordinary mirror a 45° prism (fig. 60, 24). The advantages obtained by this substitution are as follows :—(1) The prism may be of any desired size, so that it may be mounted at a considerable distance from the eye-piece of the Microscope. This secures an increased magnification of the drawing, and the advisability of this increased magnification will be dwelt upon on a subsequent page ; (2) a second advantage in the use of the prism as a reflector is the disappearance of the double reflection, and the securing of a total reflection. The light passes from the drawing-point through the lower face of the prism in a nearly perpen- dicular direction, and with very little loss. It is then totally reflected from the oblique face, and passes outward at nearly right angles to the vertical face, again with very slight diminution. The loss of light is, therefore, considerably less than in the case of the usual mirror, in addition to the securing of a total reflection destitute of doubles; (3) a third advantage, and one of considerable importance, is the stability of the apparatus here described ; it rarely gets out of register. 502 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ;* The second modification is the blind worked by foot-power (fig. 60, 32). The object of this blind is to illuminate the drawing with any degree of light at an instant’s notice, and to do this without in any way disturbing the adjustment of any part of the Microscope or camera- lucida. This is a matter of very great importance in the rapid produc- tion of good camera-lucida drawings. It often happens that the light coming through the instrument is so faint that it is only by shutting the light quite off from the drawing that the investigator can see the details of the structures to be sketched. With the foot-power arrange- ment, the light is shut off or let on without the operator’s disturbin the position of his body or his drawing-point. Moreover, the light can be so modified as to instantly bring about that adjustment which is most favourable for any particular part of the sketch. To describe the whole operation briefly, we may say that the operator’s left hand rests on the left-hand leg-of-mutton table on a level with the fine adjust- ment of the Microscope. His left hand, therefore, is in a position to work the fine-adjustment screw with the greatest ease and facility, and the most careful adjustments of focus can be easily accomplished. His right hand, carrying the drawing-point, rests on the drawing-board, and is engaged in the production of the sketch. As the light required for the various portions of the drawing varies, he can, by a slight movement of his right foot, which in no way disturbs either of his hands, and in no way disturbs the equilibrium of the instruments, effect the desired illumination of the drawing. It is found that the drawing suface best adapted to the production of camera-lucida drawings, is a dark, and preferably black, surface. On this surface a white drawing-point should be used. For most objects this is a considerable improvement over the ordinary pencil used on white paper, as will be at once admitted by EXPLANATION OF Fic. 61. Solar Camera, as used to facilitate the production of illustrations from nega- tives and from transparent objects. 1, steel girder to left of window affording part of the support to the ordinary camera 3; cross-piece supporting camera 3; 4, support for camera lucida, same being here represented as attached to an ordinary lens carrier; 5, vertically ad- justible horizontal platform; 6, drawing board; 7, horizontal ways for 6; 8, object in position to be drawn natural size; 9, mirror of ordinary camera lucida; 10, 11, camera lucida support; 12, light-tight roller-blind used, when unrolled as a diaphragm for the cone of light from the projector; 18, solar projector set in special window casing near floor; 14, the negative being projected at 23; 15, 15, uprights carrying the adjustable sheet of glass on which the drawing 23 is being produced from the negative; 14, 16, wooden frame for sheet of glass 18; 17,metal braces by which the frame 16 may be clamped at the required angle; 18, sheet of glass through which, as well as through the paper 22, the image is viewed; 19, roller blinds to shut off extra light; 20, 21, sticks to which the drawing paper is attached with drawing tacks, these sticks being easily adjustable under the sand- paper-lined wooden spring-bars 24; 22, drawing paper; 23, image being drawn; 24, wooden bar lined with sandpaper and hinged at 25 and constantly pulled in- ward by a spiral spring at 26, so as to lightly but firmly grip the sticks 20, 21; 27, screw legs on which, after the apparatus has been adjusted, it can be raised so as to remain firm during the subsequent operations of focusing and drawing; 28, one of the four castors on which the whole apparatus is adjustable back and forward on the floor to vary the magnification. Ps MTG: 61 504 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO anyone who makes a trial. The method found most effective in this laboratory is that of using a thin black tissue-paper, which is blued on the under side. A piece of enamelled board of suitable size for the drawing is placed on the drawing board—i.e. the right-hand leg-of- mutton table—and it is then covered with the black tissue-paper, with the blue side down. A tracing is now made with a white ivory point. This results in the production of a blue outline drawing on the enamelled board. This sketch is put aside for further reference, or for the produc- tion of a finished drawing whenever necessary, or may be finished up at once. The object to be secured in this blue sketch is a sufficiently good representation of the object to be illustrated, which shall have sufficient size to admit of a liberal reduction when the drawing is photo- graphed on metal preparatory to etching. Thus, if it is desired to publish an illustration having a magnification of 500 diameters, it is advisable to produce a blue sketch at from 1000 to 2000 diameters. This is easily accomplished with the apparatus that has been described. By placing the prism reflector at a considerable horizontal distance from the eye-piece of the Microscope, say 1 foot, and lowering the right hand leg-of-mutton shaped table sufficiently, magnifications of liberal dimensions are easily secured. Needless to say, the production of a large coarse drawing is an easier matter than the production of the same drawing on a smaller scale ; so that the operation is not only better, but considerably easier if carried out in the manner described. It is un- necessary to go into the details of converting the blue sketch into a pen-and-ink drawing. These present no peculiarities. It ought, per- haps, to be mentioned that the object of using the blue colour is to avoid trouble through the alterations that may be necessary in finishing the drawing. Any light blue lines which are left on the enamelled board need not be removed, as they do not affect the sensitive photo- graphic film sufficiently to cause any inconvenience in the production of an etched block. The black tissue-paper mentioned is produced by inking ordinary tissue. The ordinary blue carbon paper gives too dark a blue to meet the requirements. The blackened tissue is rubbed on one side with dry Prussian blue powder. This givesa light blue tracing. At an earlier stage it has been mentioned that all the accessories in connection with the Microscope are painted black. In addition to this precaution, such arrangements are made that the room itself can be darkened, in fact, converted into a photographic dark-room at will. This object is secured by having all the window blind connections light- tight. The oblong aperture, about 5 in. by 8 in., through which the Microscope receives its light, is screened by means of several thicknesses of flexible black cloth made into the form of a sleeve. This cloth sleeve attached around the perimeter of the opening, is notched above, so that it surrounds the Microscope just beneath the stage, and buttons on to one of the screws at the back of the Microscope. No light reaches the eye except that which comes through the instrument. If, now, the slide in front of the large glazed aperture be closed and the room be darkened, the operator sits in absolute darkness. Any one who has had experience with a photographic dark-room, must have observed how, after a period of from five to ten minutes therein, the eye becomes accustomed to the ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 505 darkness of the room, and is able to distinguish objects much more readily than at first. This is a principle which can be utilised to very great advantage in connection with high-power Microscope work. In fact, the writer is of opinion that it is this contrast between the ex- ternal and internal illumination which leads so many operators to use artificial light, and even in some cases to prefer working in the evening. Certain it is that if the surrounding light is dim, and the eye is allowed to adjust itself to this dimness, then on looking through the Microscope details may be seen much more clearly than in any other way. With the present apparatus the room is darkened. All light which could possibly get to the operator’s eye is excluded, except that which comes through the Microscope. There is no light coming upon the top of his object to cause confusing reflections in the Microscope. The image is as clear as it can be made, and the eye is given every facility to see this image, and is distracted by no others. The following contrivances are such as experience has shown the writer to be very useful for this pur- pose, especially in sunny climates. Outside of the Microscope window a universally adjustable white screen is placed in a sunny position, pre- ferably not more than 10 ft. away. The surface of this screen may be of any white material. It can be made of wood, painted white, or lined with plaster of Paris, or, what to the writer seems almost equally good, a plain wooden screen covered with several thicknesses of bleached cotton cloth. It is better if this screen can be adjusted from the interior of the Microscope room, but this is not essential. If a small mirror be attached to the screen, it will indicate the position of the screen that will reflect to the Microscope mirror a maximum of white light. Place the screen so that the flash of sunlight from the mirror strikes in the vicinity of the Microscope. Then, of course, the whole of the screen will be in a corresponding position, and will be reflecting a maximum of light. It is found that if the screen be placed in this position for several hours, the light from it remains practically constant, so that while an adjustment by cords from the interior is a convenience, it is not a very great necessity. If an adjustable screen is not available, it is generally best to arrange one or two fixed screens, and thus accomplish the same object—one screen for morning, and another for afternoon. The light from a blue sky is not a satisfactory light. A white cloud gives a very good light, but clouds are such fickle things that it is not wise to rely upon them where the Microscope is in constant use. It is much pre- ferable to construct a screen that will be available in a fixed position whenever the sun shines. When the sun does not shine the sky must serve. CAMERA LUCIDA FOR NATURAL SIZE OR REDUCED DRAWING. Ever since the introduction of the camera lucida, it has been more or less used for the production of natural size and reduced drawings ; in other words, it was soon seen that its application went beyond the instrument for which it was primarily designed. The writer has used the camera lucida to a greater or less extent in this manner for twenty-five years, and has seen plenty of evidence that others have Aug. 15th, 1906 2 L 506 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES used it in the same way. The following notes relate to a piece of appa- ratus which has been gradually developed during several years, and which has as its object the application of the ordinary Microscope camera lucida to the purposes we have mentioned. It is a piece of apparatus which in use is placed in front of a window, in fact, is usually attached either to the window, the window casing, or to special uprights near by. As exemplified in this laboratory, the apparatus is attached to two upright girders, the same two that carry the ordinary photographic camera. Both these attachments are slung on sash weights, and can be moved up and down, so that either may be brought into play while the . other is raised out of the way. The camera lucida attachment consists of two distinct frames, which are separated near the middle of the win- dow by a distance of 8-10 in. The left-hand frame is designed mainly to support the camera lucida; the right-hand frame to support the drawing board. Both frames carry adjustable brackets, and each bracket carries a horizontal shelf. The left-hand frame, therefore, has a hori- zontal shelf carrying the Microscopes, and this shelf is adjustable in the vertical direction, and can be clamped in any desired position. In a similar manner, the right-hand frame carries a horizontal shelf, or drawing board, also adjustable in the vertical direction. The drawing board presents the peculiarity of being also adjustable in the horizontal direction, and of rotating about a horizontal axis so as to pass the opposite shelf—it is required sometimes above that shelf and sometimes below it. The size of the apparatus is determined by that of the human body. The greatest distance that can be comfortably reached by an ordinary artist for drawing purposes is about 30 in.—i.e. when gazing through the camera lucida he cannot comfortably produce a drawing at a distance of more than 30 in. from his eye as the light travels. The camera lucida is usually carried on a piece of tubing clamped EXPLANATION OF Fic. 62. Sketch of the arrangement of a camera lucida for the production of drawings of objects at nearly the natural size. The apparatus is attached to upright steel girders, one at each side of a window. The artist faces the light. 1, 2, the two steel girders, which are imbedded in several tons of cement beneath the building, and pass through the floor without contact; 3, cross-piece to carry an ordinary camera 4, this cross-piece being hung on sash-weights, and sliding in the vertical direction and readily clamped by the side screws shown ; 4, ordinary camera pushed up out of the way, but easily brought into use, as shown in fig. 60; 5, anti-friction arms of the cross-piece 3, which roll against the edges of the girders 1, 2; 6, left-hand box of roller blinds; 7, right-hand box of roller blinds ; 8, light-tight vertically acting roller blind of the window; 9, 10, horizontally act- ing roller blinds from the boxes 6,7; 11, object to be drawn, held in stage forceps ; 12, mirror of ordinary camera-lucida; 13, horizontal stage, adjustable in the ver- tical direction, designed to support the object 11, which in this case is supported on the stage of a Microscope carrying no objective or eye-piece; 14, horizontal stage, adjustable in the vertical direction, designed to support the drawing board, which tips out to pass 13, and is also adjustable in the horizontal direction ; 15, 16, framework supporting all the apparatus 6-14, and slung on sash-weights so as to be easily pushed up out of the way when the window is used for other purposes ; 17, screw clamp to stage 14; 18, roller blind acting as a light trap and diaphragm when the window is used with the solar projector, as shown in fig. 61. NN iil] ‘ << TO HAAN | | INN | ~ ssh \ HH < \\\\\\ \\ \\\ AN \M | ii | i Ife Lf aa — SATAN M\\\\\\\ AW \ AX “ANI } “| \\ Wi Ss AWN 508 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO to an ordinary lens-holder, or empty Microscope barrel. The object to be drawn is placed below, without a lens, or with a reducing lens, or in some cases with a lens which slightly enlarges the object. The drawing board is then lowered or raised until the drawing to be made will have the necessary size. It will be observed, therefore, that the whole arrangement is a three-fold one. There is a support for the object, a support for the camera, and a support for the drawing board, and these must be adjustable within the limits of the artist’s | reach. It will be seen, however, that if two of these are adjustable, the whole system is, for all practical purposes, the same as if all three were adjustable. We now come to the most important matter in con- nection with the use of this apparatus—namely, the illumination of the object and the illumination of the drawing board. It is possible that it is in this respect that the apparatus hitherto put on the market fails to meet the requirements of the case. It is very desirable to fully control the illumination. Sometimes the object has to be strongly illu- minated, and the drawing board weakly illuminated ; sometimes the reverse iS the case, the object has to be weakly illuminated, while the drawing board has to be very strongly illuminated, and the variation in illumination should be as great as possible—from strong sunlight to absolute darkness, if possible. This is the main point in the successful use of the camera lucida for this class of work. This object is attained in the present piece of apparatus by placing the whole ata sunny window and modifying the light by a series of seven roller blinds. One of these, and one of the most important, is the blind attached to the window itself. This does not differ from those elsewhere described in this report. The other blinds for this piece of apparatus have the peculiarity of working in the horizontal direction, the rollers being placed vertically side by side, and enclosed in a light-tight box at the side of the window. The box on the right carries three of these rollers, and that on the left carries a corresponding set of three. These blinds are of varying nature. One of each set is white, another is nearly trans- lucent, and a third is somewhat opaque. By placing these blinds one over the other—that is, by adjusting them properly in the horizontal direction—the light may be varied in any degree required. No way has yet been found by which the light both upon the object and upon the drawing board can be fully controlled by foot-power, as in the case of the Microscope window previously described ; but it is believed that if sufficient thought were given to the subject, such a device might be evolved. In the meantime, the present arrangement works fairly satis- factorily, and avoids the use of complicated apparatus between the eye and what it is looking at, in the same way as does the apparatus previously described in connection with the Microscope window. Quekett Microscopical Club.—The 432nd ordinary meeting of the Club was held on June 15, the President, Dr. E. J. Spitta, F.R.M.S., etc., in the chair. Mr. A. E. Hilton read a paper “ On the Study of the Mycetozoa.” The names by which this group has been known were mentioned, and their distribution, habitat, and life-cycle, together with the method of classification, were described. The literature dealing ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 509 with the subject was referred to, and some useful hints were given for the collection and cultivation of these interesting organisms. The lecture was illustrated by a series of coloured drawings and a large number of preparations of Mycetozoa under Microscopes. Mr. J. Burton showed some active swarm-cells of Brefeldia maxima. B. Technique.* (1) Collecting Objects, including! Culture Processes. Cultivating and Preparing Hypotrichous Infusoria.;—L. L.-Wood- ruff cultivated these organisms on slides, having a central circular con- cavity with a capacity of about 5 drops of water. Cover-glasses were not employed. The slides were kept in moist chambers to prevent evaporation of the preparations. These were dishes about 10 in. in diameter and 3 in. deep. In the bottom of the dish was placed about 2 in. of wet sand. Over the sand was placed a glass plate, on which rested 4 parallel strips of glass, and on these the slides with the Pro- tozoa were arranged. The whole was covered with a ground-glass top. The Infusoria were handled with a pipette drawn out to a fine point ; each pipette was used for one purpose, and one only. For detecting the Infusoria, a simple lens with a magnification of about ten diameters was used. The culture medium was made from infusions of hay or fresh grass, and was prepared as follows :—about 3 grm. of grass or hay were washed in tap-water, and then placed in a beaker containing about 200 c.cm. of tap-water. This was boiled for 1 minute. In most cases the infusion was used shortly after it had cooled, but occasionally was allowed to stand for 24 hours. One individual from each line of the culture was removed daily, in order to prevent the possibility of endogamous conjugation. The maxi- mum and minimum temperatures of the laboratory in the vicinity of the culture were recorded daily. For the purpose of following the changes in cell-structure during the life of the cultures, permanent preparations were made from time to time. The specimen to be preserved was isolated by means of a pipette, and deposited on a slide, and then 3 or 4 drops of a saturated solution of sublimate with 5 p.c. acetic acid added. After about 5 minutes the specimen was transferred to another slide, and a few drops of 75 p.c. alcohol deposited thereon. The specimen was next removed to a third slide already smeared with egg albumen. When the albumen has coagulated and fixed the specimen, the slide is transferred to agar of 75 p.c. alcohol, and afterwards treated by ordinary methods. For staining, Ranvier’s picrocarmin was used, though Delafield’s * This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes ; (4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, etc. ; (6) Miscellaneous. + Journ. Expér. Zool., ii. (1905) pp. 585-632 (3 pls.). 510 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO hematoxylin gave quite satisfactory results. The preparation was cleared with xylol, and mounted in dammar. Rapid Filter for Agar.*—Drigalski uses the following form of filter for his agar media. It consists of two superposed cooking pots (fig. 63). The upper (F) has a perforated bottom ; it overlaps the side of the lower vessel (U), and holds a 4-fold layer of yellow, unsized, raw cotton wool. In the lower vessel is placed the nutrient solution with agar. The two pots being fixed, the whole is placed in a steamer, where the agar is dissolved; the wool becomes saturated with steam, and, together with the upper vessel, is sterilised. When the solution is complete, usually within 3 hours, the whole is taken out from the steamer, the upper vessel with the filter is separated, and the contents of the lower vessel is poured into it, and in the course of a few minutes 3 litres of a clear solution are obtained. Apparatus for Culture of Bacteria at High Oxygen Pressure.t—A. Meyer’s apparatus con- sists of a steel flask filled with compressed air, and fitted with a special reducing valve actuated by screws and levers, by which the pressure of the air emitted from the flask is varied and regulated ; the pressures in the flask and in the reducing Fig. 63. chamber being indicated by spring tube mano- meters. The compressed air is passed from the reducing valve, by a connecting tube, into the pressure chamber which is also provided with a manometer and a safety valve, and in which is a vessel for holding the cultures to be examined. The author supplies photographs and diagrams, and a minute description of his apparatus. Method for the Bacteriological Examination of Soil.t—Buhlert and Fickendey advocate a modification of Remy’s method for the bacterio- logical examination of soil. With a clean spade a hole is dug the depth of a furrow, and with sharp cut perpendicular sides, and from this a spadeful of the soil is removed. The upper surface of this is cleansed by scraping with a flame-sterilised iron spatula ; with a second sterilised spatula the earth is put into a sterilised glass vessel ; 300-500 grm. of the soil are now added to 300-500 c.cm. of sterilised tap water in a glass vessel with a wide mouth and a ground stopper; after the mixture has been thoroughly shaken for five minutes, a known amount of the washed soil is drawn up in a pipette and inoculated into media. For nitrification and nitrogen fixing 20 c.cm. are employed; for denitrification and peptone disintegration, 5 c.cm. * Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xli. (1906) p. 298 (1 fig.). + Op. cit., 2te Abt., xvi. (1906) p. 386 (9 figs.). t Tom. cit., p. 399. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51l Cultivation of the Leprosy Bacillus.*—C. Nicolle remarks that all his endeavours to cultivate B. lepre on artificial media failed, though in some cases there was evidence that growth had begun. These abortive attempts invariably occurred in the condensation water, and only when the sowing had been copious. Egg cultures also were failures. -The only occasions when there was distinct evidence of growth occurred on pieces of leprous tissue used for inoculating. Cultivation of the Spirillum of Tick-fever.t—C. Levaditi makes collodion sacs with a capacity of about 2 c.cm., and sterilises them in tubes filled with distilled water. The sac, emptied of water, is still kept in the tube while being filled with serum of Macacus cynomolgus or M. rhesus, animals sensitive to the infection of tick-fever. The test- tube and sac are then placed in a water-bath at 70° for a quarter of an hour. When cold the serum is inoculated with defibrinated blood of a monkey previously infected with spirillosis, and when sealed up is placed within the peritoneal cavity of a rabbit or a rat. The sac is opened in from 5-7 days, and advantage is then taken to make a sub-culture. In this way the spirillum of human relapsing fever may be cultivated in a semi-solid medium. (2) Preparing Objects. Studying Yellow Fever.t—E. Marchoux and P. L. Simond fixed pieces of the viscera in Borrel’s fluid (water 350, chloride of platinum 2, osmic acid, 2, chromic acid 2, acetic acid 20) or in saturated solution of acid sublimate. The nervous system was, however, fixed in equal parts of the two fluids, and after 3 days washed in running water for 54 hours. The stains used for pieces fixed in Birrel’s fluid were magenta- red and picro-indigo-carmin. Unna’s polychrome-methylen-blue also gave good results. Pieces fixed in sublimate were stained with hematein and orange G. The authors confirm the statement of A. Sodre and M.Conto that yellow fever must be regarded as a generalised steatosis. Studying Development of Pollen and Tapetal Cells in Ribes.§— G. Tischler fixed the buds with Flemming’s fluid (chromic acid 1-8 grm., osmic acid 0°5 grm., acetic acid 12 c.cm., water 420 c.cm.). Paraffin sections 5-7°5 ~ were made in the usual way. Staining was almost ex- clusively done with iron-alum-hzmatoxylin, and the differentiation of each preparation was controlled under the Microscope. The preparations were after-stained with light-green, or with acid-fuchsin. Studying the Microscopical Anatomy of the Vagina and Uterus of Mammals.||—K. Beiling fixed the fresh material in hot saturated sublimate-salt solution, or in 5 p.c. potassium bichromate, and then hardened in upgraded alcohols. Excess of sublimate was removed by * Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) pp. 389-406 (1 pl.). + Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 1099-1100. t Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) pp 161-205 (20 pls.). § Jahrb. wiss. Bot., xlii. (1906) pp. 545-78 (1 pl.). | Archiv Mikrosk. Anat., lxvii. (1906) pp. 573-687 (1 pl.). 512 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO frequent changes of alcohol, to which tincture of iodine had been added. The material was then imbedded either in paraffin or in celloidin. For staining, Bohmer’s hematoxylin and eosin, picrocarmin, or iron-alum- hematoxylin were used. Demonstrating Chromosome Reduction in the Microsporocytes of Lilium tigrinum.*—J. H. Schaffner killed stamens of various ages in weak chrom-acetic acid (chromic acid 0°3 grm., glacial acetic acid 0°7 c.cm., water 99 c¢.cm.). The material was then passed through graded alcohols up to 70 p.c., imbedded in paraffin, cut to 10-18 p» thick, and stained on the slide. Delafield’s haematoxylin was found to be the best stain for the chromatin network, and granules and saffranin-gentian- violet for the nucleoli. Demonstrating the Development of Dentine.t—L. Fleischmann examined the tooth-germ of a lower middle incisor of an eight months’ human embryo preserved in alcohol. The specimen was prepared by Schaffer’s method, being decalcified for several hours in 5 p.c. nitric acid and then imbedded in celloidin; a radial longitudinal section exhibits the dentine in all stages of development, the earliest traces being at the bottom, whilst on the top is fully developed dentine. The sections are stained after the method of Zachariades with safranin and subsequent treatment with warm 40 p.c. solution of caustic potash, on the slide, until the ground substance is dissolved. Studying the Organogenesis of Ovary and Testicle.t—G. Sain- mont used a complete series of embryos and ovaries of the cat. The animals were narcotised and then the uterus and adjacent parts were rapidly removed and placed in artificial serum previously heated to 37°. The embryos were then extracted and placed in the fixative ; the larger were sliced into to allow more ready penetration. In embryos 40 days old or so the sexual eminences were removed and fixed separately. The fixative solutions used were the strong Flemming, 24-48 hours, and acetic-sublimate solution, 1-7 hours; after the latter the objects were washed in iodine-alcohol 40 p.c. for 4-8 hours and then passed through upgraded alcohols. Objects fixed in Flemming were submitted to pro- longed washing in running water for from 8-36 hours according to size. After dehydration in up-graded alcohols paraffin sections were made. The stains used were iron-hematoxylin, Flemming’s triple stain, and occasionally gentian-violet used hot. It was found “that embryos would require 4 or 5 times as much orange as was necessary for the young or adult animal. Good differentiation was obtained by washing the stained sections with alcohol acidulated with 2 or 3 drops of hydro- chloric acid. Studying Cytological Changes in the Nectar Glands of Vicia Faba.s—C. R. Stockhard cut the glands from the stipules with a border of non-glandular tissue and immersed in various fixatives, the most * Bot. Gazette, xli. (1906) p. 184 (2 pls.). +t Arch. Mikrosk. Anat., lxviii. (1906) p. 297. t Arch. Biol., xxii. (1905, published 1906) pp. 71-162 (6 pls.). § Bull. Torrey Bot. Club., xxxiii. (1906) pp. 247-62 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51s satisfactory being Gilson’s fluid, though picro-acetic, chrom-acetic, and picro-corrosive gave favourable results. Auerbach’s methyl-green and acid-fuchsin stain was used for studying cell-contents. | Heidenhain’s iron-hematoxylin and Congo-red was found to be most valuable, and eosin-toluidin blue was also successful. § (4) Staining and' Injecting. New Microchemical Tests for Wood.*—V. Grafe adds to a solution of vanillin some drops of isobutyl-alcohol, and lets a little sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1°84) run down the side of the test tube. After heating, the mixture turns dark- red, with a shade of blue. On diluting with alcohol and repeated additions of acid, it changes through blue -ereen to pale green. The author recommends as a standard reagent the followi ing : 30. c.cm. isobutyl-alcohol plus 15 c¢.cm. sulphuric “acid. When wood- mash is treated with this reagent the wood turns black ; if now diluted with a little alcohol and the test tube be shaken, the wood turns blue or blue-green, while the fluid becomes red-violet. Sections of ligneous tissue treated with this fluid are at first red-violet and after a time blue. The sections should remain in the reagent for about an hour, and then be mounted in glycerin. Apparently the stain is not very permanent. A mixture of isobutyl-aldehyd and sulphuric acid also forms a useful reagent. A drop of the mixture placed on a micro-section gradually turns it red, and if after the lapse of about an hour it be placed in glycerin it assumes a wine-red or red-violet hue. Demonstrating Fat-Cells in Glandule Vesiculares of Cattle.t— G. Illng found that the best fixative for demonstrating the fat in the cells of the glandule vesiculares { was Podwyssozki’s fluid (1 p.c. chromic acid 15 c.cm., $p.c. sublimate 15 ¢.cm., 2 p.c. osmic acid 4 ¢.cm., acetic acid 6-8 drops). This showed the fat as black globules. The special fat stains, Scharlach R, sudan iii, and indophenol, were also used. For Scharlach R the pieces were fixed for 24 hours in 10 p.c. formalin, and after having been washed in running water for some hours were sectioned with a freezing microtome. The sections having been washed first in water and then in 70 p.c. alcohol, were immersed for 2-3 minutes in Herxheimer’s solution (absolute alcohol 70, 10 p.c. caustic soda 10, distilled water 10, Scharlach R. to saturation). The sections were then washed in 70 p.c. alcohol, and next after-stained with dilute aqueous hematoxylin solution, toluidin-blue, or methylen-blue. Having been washed with water, they were mounted in leevulose or in glycerin. Studying the Connective-Tissue Framework in Lymphatic Glands.§—J. Bartel and R. Stein fixed the material in Zenker’s fluid and made paraffin sections in the usual way. The sections were first stained with 0°1 p.c. aqueous acid fuchsin for 2—3 minutes. After wash- ing in water they were immersed in a 1 p.c. solution of phospho-molybdic * Oesterr. Botan. Zeitschr., lv. (1905) p. 174. Seealso Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., is (1905) pp. 581-2. + See also this Journal, 1905, p. 683. ¢ Arch. Mikrosk. Anat., Ixvi. (1905) pp. 121-7 (1 pl.). § Arch, Anat. Phys., 1905, pp. 141-58 (1 pl.). 514 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO acid for 5-7 minutes. They were then washed in water, and afterwards transferred to the following staining solution: anilin-blue 0°5 grm., orange G 0°2 grm., oxalic acid 2°0 grm., distilled water 100 c.cm. After 20 minutes or so the sections were washed quickly in water, de- hydrated in alcohol, differentiated with a couple of drops of anilin oil, cleared up in xylol, and mounted in balsam. Staining Capsules of Pneumococcus and Streptococcus.*—P. H. Hiss, jun., uses a half saturated aqueous solution of gentian-violet. Air-dried and heat-fixed films are stained for a few seconds with the solution. Water must not be used in making the films, but serum, or some similar fluid. After staining, the dye is washed off with 0°25 p.c. potassium carbonate solution, and the film examined in this fluid. Another method is to treat the film with a 5 or 10 p.c. solution of gentian-violet or fuchsin (5 c.cm. saturated alcoholic solution to 95 ¢.cm. H,0). Heat to vaporisation, and wash off with 20 p.c. solution of copper sulphate. Dry, and mount in balsam. The author confirms the observations of Ortmann (1888) and others that pneumococcus regularly develops capsules when cultivated in blood serum. From his own experience he finds that one of the most favour- able media for the development of capsules consists of 1 p.c. starch- bouillon and serum (serum 1 part, bouillon plus 1 p.c. starch 2 parts), and sterilised at 65°-70°. Metallography, etc. Influence of Velocity on the Law of Deformation of Metals.;— The pressures developed by explosives in guns are measured by the compression of small copper cylinders placed in crusher gauges. The accuracy of the measurement depends on the calculation of the pressure corresponding to a definite compression. The stress-strain relation for the cylinders is determined by submitting them to definite pressures applied much more slowly than under ballistic conditions, and measuring the compression. It has been established that the resistance of a rapidly compressed cylinder is greater than that of a cylinder slowly compressed to the same form. P. Vieille and R. Liouville point out that the resistance cannot be calculated from the amount and velocity of com- pression. Two cases are to be considered: (1) the measurement of maximum pressure; (2) the determination of the law of increase of pressure. The errors appear to be much greater for (2) than for (1). The authors promise an account of their work on the subject. The Equilibrium Curves of the System Iron and Carbon.{— H. v. Jiiptner reviews the determinations of freezing point curves made by Mannesmann and Osmond, Roberts-Austen, Carpenter and Keeling, and Wiist. Selecting those points which appear to be the most trust- worthy, the author has plotted a diagram showing the probable equi- * Journ. Exper. Med., vi. (1905) pp. 317-45 (12 figs.). + Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 1057-8. { Iron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906) pp. 377-82 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 5S librium curves. The end of the eutectic line lies at 2°07 p.c. carbon ; the eutectic composition is 4°3 p.c. carbon. A calculation of the molecular weight of carbon dissolved in iron, based on Rothmund’s equation Aya Gr m is given, but the results are doubtful owing to the uncertainty which exists as to the value of the latent heat of fusion of iron. Assuming It to be 20, the molecule of carbon dissolved in iron appears to contain 2 atoms. An Etching Method.*—J. A. Aupperle points out that determina- tions of silicon and oxygen in steel, supposed to distinguish crucible steel from that made by other processes, cannot be relied on to do this. He has employed the following etching method: Specimens of the steel 13 in. square are placed in dilute sulphuric acid containing perman- ganate of potash (90 c.cm. water, 10 c.cm. 1°84 s.g. acid, 3 grm. permanganate, for each specimen). The action is allowed to proceed over night; if the solution becomes coloured it is boiled until clear, more acid being added if necessary. The pieces are washed in water, and carbonaceous matter is wiped off. By this treatment open hearth and Bessemer steel are deeply etched in grooves: the edge is honey- combed and rough to the touch. Crucible steel is not etched in grooves but shows a close structure: the edges are smooth. Solidification of Copper.t—P. Dejean has studied the freezing point of copper with the object of deciding as to its suitability as a fixed point for the calibration of thermo-couples. Platinum, platinum-iridium couples were used, standardised daily by determining the melting point of a small quantity of gold wire, this being taken as 1065°. Other fixed points taken were the boiling point of sulphur 445°, and the solidifying point of aluminium 655°. The cooling curves were photographically recorded, three galvanometers being used on the induction system previously described by the author.f About 100 grm. pure copper, deoxidised by hydrogen, was melted under wood charcoal, and a cooling curve taken. Similar determinations of freezing points were made on 10 samples containing varying quantities of oxide, which was sub- sequently estimated. Each of these samples gave two freezing points until the eutectic composition was reached. As a check, the solidifying points of several copper-aluminium alloys were determined. The results given by the author are :— Freezing point pure copper, 1085°. Freezing point eutectic (copper, copper oxide), 1065°. Composition of eutectic, 4°5-5°0 p.c. oxide. The freezing point of the eutectic is somewhat lower when it is present only in small quantities. Its composition was verified by microscopic examination. ‘The lower freezing point of copper containing 2-3 p.c. * Tron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906) pp. 383-5 (2 figs.). t+ Rev. Metallurgie, iii. (1906) pp. 233-42 (10 figs.). t See this Journal, 1905, p. 777. 516 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO oxide, prepared by melting copper in an open crucible so that it oxidises freely, is recommended as a fixed point for calibrating thermocouples, and may be taken as 1062°. Rail Corrugation.*—G. Moyle discusses the singular phenomenon of roaring rails, i.e. rails which in use develop furrows across the running head, causing a deafening noise when a train passes over. The ascer- tained facts are briefly stated, and a list is given of the numerous causes suggested. A report on three “roarers,” drawn up at the Cooper’s Hill laboratory, states that the unevenness of surface is not due to the chemical composition or physical state of the rail but to some local cause. The author considers that the results of investigation are meagre and unsatisfactory. Microscopic examination appears to throw no light on the cause. Copper Steels.t—P. Breuil has investigated two series of steels con- taining copper, the carbon in the first being about 0°15 p.c., in the second about 0°35 p.c. The copper in the members of each series was 0°5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 p.c. Analyses of the top and bottom of the ingots showed that the copper was uniformly distributed, except in the ingot of the second series containing 32 p.c. copper. This practically con- sisted of two portions. The copper content varied from 21-75 p.c. The fractures of the ingots with 8 p.c. or more of copper showed a red coloration. The hardness of the steels increased with increase in copper content. Peculiarities in the position of the critical points were noted. The Crystallography of Iron.{—F. Osmond and G. Cartaud put forward an explanation of the structure of martensite. When a small piece of ordinary steel containing manganese is quenched from about 1100° in cold water, cracks may be developed. Around the cracks are very fine twin crystals. The microstructure of a polished section is exactly similar to that of martensite in carbon steels. The partial trans- formation of y iron into @ iron occurring during quenching produces stresses, owing to change of volume. These stresses cause the formation of twin crystals in great numbers, parallel in any one grain to the four pairs of faces of the octahedron; whence the frequency of square figures and equilateral triangles. The marked resemblance between the structures of martensite and of meteoric iron is pointed out. Critical Points of Steel.s—P. Fournel has succeeded in detecting A, and A, as well as A, by the variation of electrical resistance of steel with temperature. Wires 0°3 mm. diam. 30 cm. long were wound on mica and heated im vacuo in an electric resistance furnace. In series with the wire was a standard 1-ohm resistance ; a current of a few hundredths of an ampere was passed through, and the difference of potential between the two ends of the wire, and of the two ends of the standard resistance, measured by a potentiometer. Temperatures were measured by a thermocouple. Figures and curves for five steels are given by the author. * Tramway and Railway World, xix. (1906) pp. 558-61 (9 figs.). + Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 1421-4. } Op. cit., exlili. (1906) pp. 44-6. § Tom. cit., pp. 46-9 (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 517 Aluminium Zinc Alloys.*—E. S. Shepherd determined the densities of 11 alloys of aluminium and zinc, and from the form of the specific volume curve concluded that the phases present were approximately pure zinc, and a solid solution of zinc in aluminium with a limiting concen- tration of about 50 p.c. Cooling curves of the alloys containing 60 and 50 p.c. aluminium did not indicate any evolution of heat at the solidify- ing point of the eutectic, while the 50 p.c. alloy gave an evolution of heat. Alloys with more than 60 p.c. aluminium are microscopically homogeneous. At 60 p.c. some intercrystalline material is present : this disappears on annealing. A true eutectic is present in the 40 p.c. alloy. The author holds that the pyrometric and microscopic data are in perfect agreement with the deductions based on the specific volume relations. This series of alloys presents no definite compounds ; there are two solid solutions, zinc in aluminium (maximum 50 p.c.) and aluminium in zinc (4 p.c.), which form a eutectic containing about 5 p.c. aluminium. ANON.—Metallurgical Research at the National Physical Laboratory. Engineering Times, 1906, p. 218. 3 Rusting of Iron. [A brief account of the theories of Dunstan, Moody, and others, as to the chemical reactions which take place when rust forms on iron. ] Natwre, lxxiy. (1906) pp. 116-17. ARNOLD, J. O.—The Internal Architecture of Metals. Engineering, 1906, pp. 278-9. ANDREWS, T.—Microscopic Observations on Naval Accidents. Tom. cit., pp. 331-2. Bacu, C.—Strength of Mild and Cast Steel at High Temperatures. Tom. cit., pp. 401-4 (7 figs.). Dixon, H.—Nickel and Carbon Steels. Tom. cit., pp. 22-3. HaApDFIELD, R. A.—Unsolved Problems in Metallurgy. Engineering Times, 1906, p. 312. Lonemuir, P.—Manganese Bronze. [Describes the properties of a number of alloys, and points out that iron, aluminium, and manganese each have the effect of raising the tenacity of copper-zine alloys (brasses). High casting temperature has an in- jurious effect upon manganese bronze. | Foundry, xxvi. (1905) pp. 116-18. OusEn, T. Y.—Fragility of Iron and. Steel. [The Frémont method of determining brittleness is described, with full details of the construction of the machine, and a discussion of the advantages offered by the impact test.] Tom. cit., pp. 125-33 (8 figs.). PEAKE, A. H.—A Novel Instrument for Illustrating the Magnetic Properties of Tron. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., xiii. (1906) pp. 250-7 (7 figs.). Smiru, J. K.—Vanadium and its Services to Steel Manufacture. Engineering Times, 1906, p. 218. STEINHART, O. J.—Notes on Metals and their Ferro-Alloys used in the Manu- facture of Alloy Steels. Iron and Steel Mag., xi. (1906) pp. 394-400. * Journ. Phys. Chem. x. (1906) pp. 504-12 (2 figs. and 5 photomicrographs). PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. MEETING HELD ON THE 20TH OF JUNE, 1906, AT 20 HAaNovER Square, W., Dr. D. H. Scort, F.R.S., erc., PRESIDENT, IN THE CHAIR. The Minutes of the Meeting of the 16th of May, 1906, were read and confirmed, and were signed by the President. Mr. J. T. Holder exhibited and described an old Microscope made by Andrew Pritchard for Mr. T. M. Ray in 1846, which had been lent for exhibition by Mr. W. R. Reeves, of Liverpool. In addition to the set of objectives and apparatus described by Mr. Holder in his paper, there was a candle-holder fixed to one side, also invented by Pritchard. The thanks of the Meeting were voted to Mr. Holder for his paper, and to Mr. Reeves for sending this Microscope for exhibition. Dr. Hebb read a letter which had been received from Mr. Dollman, of Adelaide, Australia, with reference to his recent communication on Stereoscopic Photomicrography. The letter stated that since writing his paper, he had succeeded in making some photographs of objects under high powers, examples of which were exhibited in the room. The thanks of the Meeting were voted to Mr. Dollman for his letter and exhibit, and to Dr. Hebb for bringing them before the Meeting. Mr. Rheinberg’s paper “ On the Influence on Images of Gratings of Phase Differences amongst their Spectra,” was taken as read. Dr. D. H. Scott read a paper “On the Structure of some Carbon- iferous Ferns.” He began by pointing out the revolutionary change which had taken place during the last three years in our conception of the Carboniferous Ferns. Representatives of so many of the principal Fern-like genera were now either known to have borne seeds, or were under strong suspicion of the seed-bearing habit, that comparatively few undoubted Ferns were left, and the question had even been suggested whether, at least in the Lower Carboniferous, true Ferns existed. The problem was of the utmost importance with reference both to the history of the Ferns themselves and to the probable ancestry of the Pteridosperms and Seed-plants generally. There was one family, the Botryopteridee, which was generally PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 519 admitted to be an ancient group of Ferns, well represented in Lower as well as Upper Carboniferous times, and not at present betraying any symptoms of Spermophytic affinities. The family was chiefly known from structural specimens, very few impressions, showing the habit, having been as yet referred to it. Mr. Newell Arber, in a recent discussion at the Linnean Society,* proposed to establish a group Primofilices to include the Botryopteridex and other primitive Ferns of Paleozoic age. The object of the present communication was to give a few illustrations of this ancient race of Ferns, to which Professor Lignier had also called attention.t The Botryopterideze proper were first described, beginning with the type genus Lotrypteris, now represented by at least two British species in addition to the French form on which Renault founded the genus. Fructifications probably referable to the English species were shown, the multiseriate annulus being a characteristic feature of the genus. The genus Zygopteris was next considered, and attention called to the presence of central tracheides internal to the main ring of wood; besides Renault’s species, the British representatives Z. Grayi and Z. corrugata were described ; the former showing axillary branching, as. in the recent Hymenophyllacee, while in Z. corrugata the ramification was found to be rather of the nature of a dichotomy. The structure of the scale-leaves, or aphlebiz, described by Renault and Stenzel in Continental species, was demonstrated for the first time in a British form, Z. corrugata.~ Sporangia with a very broad annulus were: described, which might probably belong to species of Zygopteris, though it was not yet possible to compare them in detail with the well-known fructifications discovered by Renault. A new genus from the Lower Coal-Measures of Lancashire was then described, remarkable for possessing radially seriated wood, apparently of a secondary character. In other respects the structure had much in common with that of Zygopteris corrugata, the new genus, for which the name Sotrychiorylon was proposed, being related anatomically to- Zygopteris somewhat as Botrychium to Ophioglossum among recent Ferns. This was the first time that evidence of secondary growth in thickness had been obtained among the Botryopteridex. After two or three other examples of this family had been given, Dr. Scott described certain annulate Fern-sporangia,§$ borne on the: pinnules of a Sphenopteroid lamina, which were not uncommon in the calcareous nodules of the British Lower Coal-Measures. In some aspects the appearance of these sporangia was wonderfully Polypodiaceous, but transverse sections of the annulus showed that it was two cells in breadth. There was nothing to connect this fructification immediately with the Botryopteridez, but it might be placed provisionally within the broader limits of Mr. Arber’s Primofilices. An instance of spores caught in the act of germination within a * See New Phytologist, April 1906. + Equisétales et Sphénophyllales. Leur Origine filicinéene commune. Bull. Soc. Linn. de Normandie, 1903. ~ They were also present in Zygopteris Grayi, contrary to the opinions expressed. in the author’s Studies in Fossil Botany, p. 284. § Since named Pteridotheca Williamsom. 520 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. sporangium like that of a Fern had been previously described,* and was again demonstrated. Until now it had not been possible to identify the sporangium in question, but within the last few weeks similar stages of germination had been observed within a sporangium certainly belonging to Stauropteris oldhamia.t It was probable, from the structure of the former sporangium, that it too was referable to a species of Stauropteris. As the phenomena of germination in these cases were entirely similar to those in recent Ferns, it appeared to be established that the genus Stauropteris belonged to the Ferns and not to the Pteridosperms, a question previously left open. There was a certain affinity with Botryopteridez, but the characters of the exannulate sporangia differed from those of other fructifications of this family. Dr. Scott desired to acknowledge the help which he had received from his wife, Mrs. D. H. Scott, F.L.S., in the detection of these fossil germinating spores. The paper was illustrated by fossil and recent sections, thrown on the screen by means of the epidiascope, as well as by lantern slides. Mr. Karop said it would no doubt be their pleasure to return a very hearty vote of thanks to the President for his very interesting and in- structive address on a subject of which he was facile princeps. The motion, being put to the Meeting, was carried unanimously. The President, in responding, said that he was greatly obliged to the Fellows present, not only for their vote of thanks, but for the kind way in which they had received a communication which, to those who were not botanists, must have seemed very technical. It was announced that the rooms of the Society would be closed from August 17 to September 17, and that the next Meeting would take place on October 17, when the following papers would be read : “‘ New Indian Rotifers,’ by Mr. James Murray, and “ Cornuvia serpula : a Species of Mycetozoa new to Britain,” by Mr. J. M. Coon. The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :— Dr. Hebb :—High-power Stereo-photomicrographs, taken by Mr. W. P. Dollman. Mr. J. T. Holder :—An Old Microscope, by Pritchard, lent for ex- hibition by Mr. W. R. Reeves. The President :—Recent and Fossil Sections and Lantern Slides, shown on the screen, in illustration of his paper. New Fellow.—Mr. William Charles Greaves was balloted for and elected an Ordinary Fellow of the Society. * Scott, Germinating Spores in a fossil Fern-Sporangium, New Phytolog., iii. (1904). + Cf. Scott, Sporangia of Stawropteris Oldhamia, New Phytolog., iv. (1904). JOURNAL OF THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. OCTOBER, 1906. TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. —+o-— X.—On the Limits of Resolving Power for the Microscope and Telescope. By Epwarp M. NELSON. (Read March 21st, 1906.) Ir cannot be admitted that the theoretical resolving limits, both for the telescope and the microscope, are as satisfactory as the science of to-day requires. As the telescope and the microscope are mere variations of the same optical instrument, the theoretical resolving limits should be the same for both. Few, however, will 4"-56 aperture in inches with the column at the end of our Journal headed “Limit of Resolving Power in Lines to an Inch for White Light.” To make this subject at all intelligible to microscopical readers, it will be necessary to trace, very briefly, the position of the telescope limit, and we may well take this first, as its investigation predates that of the microscope by some forty years. A point of light, such as a star, is imaged both in a telescope and in a microscope as a bright disk surrounded by alternate dark and bright rings, It has been the received opinion that the radius of the first dark ring is the measure of the limit for the separation of a double star by a telescope, so that it is this radius which must for the present occupy our attention. The method of calculating this radius, when the aperture of the telescope is square, is quite simple, but it will suffice for our present purpose to accept the result, and refer the reader to text-books for the proof. It has been found that, when the aperture is square, the radius of the first Oct. 17th, 1906 2M recognise the identity of the telescope limit of 522 Transactions of the Society. dark ring subtends the same angle at the centre of the object- glass, as a single wave-length does at a distance equal to the length of a side of the square aperture of the object-glass. The length of the radius of the first dark ring in a telescope is determined by the formula ao where c is a coefficient, X the wave-length, 7 the focus, and a the aperture of the object-glass. The value of for white light will, throughout this paper, be that suggested by Mr. J. W. Gifford, viz. 53,7 inch = 5607 tenth metres. As the radius of the first dark ring subtends an angle at the centre of the object-glass of = and as the limit for the resolving power of a telescope is required in this angular measurement, the quantity f may for the present be disregarded. Lastly, we come to the coefficient c; the experimental determination of this quantity, both for the telescope and for the microscope, is the subject with which we are concerned this evening. When the aperture is square, the value of ¢ is unity, and so the formula just = Xr . 5 given above may be written = which expressed as an angle is 4"-55. Theoretically, then, a telescope, with a square aperture, will separate any double star whose components subtend an angle of 4-55 divided by the aperture of the telescope in inches. Now, as the object-glasses of telescopes are circular, and not square, mathematicians have integrated this quantity for a circular aper- ture, and have found the value of ¢ to be 1°2197; therefore the theoretical separating limit for a circular aperture, when expressed as an angle, is 5"*55, or one second more than that for a square aperture. We now come to the unsatisfactory part of the subject, viz. the practical separating limit for a telescope with a circular aperture is the same as the theoretical limit for one with a square aperture. In other words, the theoretical limit is 18 per cent. greater than it ought to be! The theorists say that the quantity determined is the radius of the first dark ring, which may not necessarily be the separating limit. This is true, but if the radius of the first dark ring be experimentally determined, it will be found to be 32 p.c. smaller than its theoretical value. What would be thought of the Newtonian theory of gravitation if the calculated distance of Mars from the Sun was 32 p.c. too great? The theoretical value of ¢ for the measurement of the first dark ring with a telescope having a circular aperture is, as stated above, 1°2197, while the value as experimentally determined is 0-8266, or 32 p.c. less. The empirical formula for the telescope limit employed by a most expert double star observer, the late Rev. W. R. Dawes, On the Limits of Resolving Power. By E. M. Nelson. 523 (5 , this being the theoretical limit for Dean of Hereford, was a telescope with a square aperture, and this is the limit which practical astronomers still use.* The star known as e, Lyre was examined, and widely sepa- rated, by a telescope of 1°575 in. aperture; the mean distance of the components, as lately determined by three different observers, is 3":045. The value of ¢ in this instance is therefore 1-053, or ", in angular measure it is — , a result not differing greatly from a that used by Dawes. The same telescope refused to separate the components of €, Lyre, which are 2”:28 apart. Here the value of ¢ is 0° 7884, and the angle is 2 oak therefore, between these two results, and probably nearer the first. Lord Rayleigh, experimenting with a rectangular aperture and a grating, obtained 1°0923 for the value of ¢; the greatest distance the grating was removed from the telescope was 196 in. The author’s experiments with circular apertures and gratings, at distances varying from 90 to 700 yards, gave for ¢ the slightly smaller value of 1:0649. Lastly, we have Rayleigh’s theoretical limit for the visibility of a dark bar upon a light ground, which gives c a value of 0°125; its value as practically measured appears to be 0°42. The theoretical value of ¢ for the length of the radius of the first bright ring is 1°63; its value, however, as practically determined in a microscope, is 1°16, or 29 p.c. less. It will be remembered that the difference between the theoretical and practical measurements of the radius of the first dark ring with a telescope amounted to 32 p.c., and now we have a very similar difference between theory and practice in a measurement by a microscope. The theoretical length of the radius of the first dark ring in a cnf a by writing for the diameter of the telescope objective, a, its micro- scopical equivalent, viz. 2 N.A. f, where N.A. stands, as usual, for the Numerical Aperture. The quantity f must now be restored to the formula, because the microscopical limit deals with linear measurements, and not with angular quantities. So the standard crf cr formula for the telescope, RE becomes INA’ The true telescopic limit lies, microscope may be determined from the telescope formula As we shall be dealing with a resolving limit expressed in “lines to the inch,” the reciprocal of this quantity will be re- * The Dean used a slightly larger wave-length; this makes the quantity 4”°56 instead of 4’’°55, as above. Jone, 524 Transactions of the Society. quired, and a further simplification may be effected by writing « for the reciprocal of X. The telescopic formula a is therefore : : ' : A. ; Ne expressed by its microscopic equivalent" (the numerical value of « being 45,287). If now ¢ be made equal to unity, for a square aperture, 2 N.A. « is precisely identical with the formula of Professor Abbe, based upon his spectrum theory, the numerical value of which is given in the “ Table of Resolving Limits” at the end of our Journal (see No. 5 in the following table). So long as the investigation proceeds upon the lines of the spectrum theory, it matters not an iota whether the objective be’ square or round (both in the telescope and microscope with a square aperture the line of separation must be placed parallel to a side of the square), for that table of microscopical limits only holds good when an objective is illuminated by a narrow pencil of extreme obliquity, and only a small portion at the opposite ends of a diameter of an object-glass is utilised—under which conditions the resultant limit must be the same whether an objective is square or round, and to integrate the action of interference over the circular aperture would be labour wasted. An astronomer is consistent, for he says that the theoretical limit for his telescope is so much, but that if it had a square aper- ture, theory points out that it would be able to show him still finer detail in an object: but, for some unexplained reason, his telescope with a circular aperture does in practice show him the detail theory assigns to a square aperture. An Abbe theorist, on the other hand, is wholly inconsistent, for he contends that, although the aperture of his objective is circular, the theoretical limit for its resolving power must be that for a square aperture. The experimental results and the theoretical values detailed above are arranged in the following synoptic table, where each telescopic experiment has its microscopic equivalent adjoined, and vice versa. The telescope limit is given in seconds, which must be divided by the aperture of the object-glass in inches. The micro- scope limit is given in the “number of lines to the inch” that an objective of N.A. 1:0 will resolve with a full cone, and with white light; to adapt it to any other objective whose N.A. differs. from unity, it must be multiplied by the N.A. of that objective. The experiments with artificial double stars did not prove satisfactory until the holes, which were 0°01 in. in diameter, were removed to at least 200 yards from the telescope, so that the holes themselves should subtend very small angles. The first dark ring No. 2 was measured by removing an artificial double star from a telescope until the dark rings made contact; the distance of the telescope from the star was then measured, and the separation of the On the Limits of Resolving Power. By E. M. Nelson. 525 stars being known, the angle was found. The bright ring No. 4 was measured by a microscope with a screw micrometer. With reference to Nos. 6 and 7, the telescope would doubtless divide a 2"°85 star, indicating a Al" 5 limit, and an unsuccessful search was made for one upon which to experiment. Late measure- ments of e, and e, Lyre were kindly supplied by Mr. Lewis, of Greenwich. No, 13 was very difficult to measure, and the value | | Telescope* | Microscopet ¢ | cr | 2NA.K | a PhRCun | [2s ik Bees. due freee for circular cleat 1°9197 BI BBB 74,300 2. ae ee ae for circular aper- ty 0-8966 | 3°65 | 110,000 3. Radius, (ey Hheoey for circular ac 1°63 749 | 55,600 4, ene aa poate ae for circular aper- 3) 11597 5/989 | 78, 100 5 . Dawes’ empirical limit = theoretical for 1:0000 4”"°555 | 90,574 a square aperture = Abbe’s table (at) the end of the Journal) . €, Lyre, when easily separated circular japexthee . €, Lyre, not separated . + \GRER TA. - Artificial double stars at 300 yds. distance, circular aperture . . Rayleigh’s experiments with gratings and, rectangular aperture, greatest distance } | 196 in. Mean value . | 1°053 | 4”-796 86 ,000 10, Author’s experiments with gratings | 0°7884 3”°591 | 115,000 0°9957 4"°535 | 91,000 Oo MAID 1:0923 4"°975 82,900 circular aperture at 90 to 700 yards Mean value : 11. Rayleigh’s theoretical limit for dark bar on bright grounds. 12. Mean value for dark bar, measured by circular aperture at 300 yards 13. Mean value for dark bar, sneaautea by a microscope ; 14. Maximum number of lines resolved by ; ”, Mr. A. A.C. Merlin . Yj] iro952 | 4-988 | 82,700 15. Value adopted in Table of Palas) 1:3000 | 5-921 69.672 1:0649 4”°85 85,100 0°125 0”:569 | 725,000 0:42 | 1-918 | 216,000 | 0:3713 1-691 | 244,000 Limits ”’ * Angular subtense of interval separated by 1 in. of aperture. + Number of lines resolved by an objective of N.A. 1:0 with white eit and full cone. here given is Fechebly a little too small. It is important to microscopists, because it forms the basis for the correction for anti- point in micrometrical measurements. ¢ Should any one wish to experiment further in this direction, the following formul will be useful: To find the value of c from an angle, multiply the number of seconds by 0°21956; to reduce c to an angle, multiply c by 4°5546; to find the value of c from the number of lines resolved, divide 90574 by the number of lines, and conversely to find the number of lines resolved from c, divide 90574 by c. 526 Transactions of the Society. We now come to the experiments which are of primary im- portance to microscopists. No. 14 is an example of what can be done with keen vision, the best lenses and apparatus, and expert manipulation. Mr. Merlin has resolved the Amphipleura pellucida with a long tube apochromatic 2 of 0°98 N.A., and with a full cone from an apochromatic condenser, using a Gifford’s F line- screen. His mean result with several objectives gives ¢ a value of 1°187, an angle of 5”:41, and 76,300 lines to an inch. This last value and that in No. 14 are for white light; they have been deduced from results kindly given by Mr. Merlin, and obtained by him with a Gifford’s screen. These are exceptionally high results, which cannot be approached by the ordinary microscopist, with a good outfit and with fair experience. However, it will be found quite easy, with a Gifford’s F line-screen and an ordinary paraffin lamp with a 3-in. wick, to see Grayson’s 25,000-band with the long tube 24 mm., and the 55,000-band with the apochromat 12 mm. A Leitz short tube No. 6 will show the 60,000 very strongly, and the No. 7 the 70,000 nearly as strongly. Results such as these ought to be within the grasp of every microscopist engaged upon serious work. The improvements in the optical portions of telescopes and pela ratio. The focus earliest achromatics by John Dollond had apertures equal to microscopes consist in the increase of the be those by Thomas Cooke were S ; the last Greenwich telescope is zk Zeiss apochromats are -, to Z As the denominators be- come smaller, the difficulties opticians have to overcome enormously if 8 sharper definition than an old rapid rectilinear did at us But what are we to say of microscopical apertures? Any lens of 0:5 N.A, has an aperture of t and similarly, a lens of N.A. 1:0 increase. In camera lenses a modern anastigmat at yields has an aperture of J In the face of these facts, it can hardly be expected that the practical telescope limit, where ¢ is a trifle less than unity, can be maintained as a microscope limit. Passing on, an answer must be found for the important question, What are the actual telescope and microscope limits? Is the 57°55 a Airy theoretical limit of to be accepted, or is the Dawes’ On the Limits of Resolving Power. By E. M. Nelson. 527 ie practical limit of ——— to remain, or is a new value to be found ? a In reply, first, the theoretical limit may be dismissed at once, as being quite hopeless. The physical nature of the image at the focal point is not yet fully understood, consequently the mathe- matical deductions do not agree with the practical results. Secondly, it is probable that Dawes’ limit, which has proved serviceable for so many years, will require a very slight modifica- tion on account of the improvement in the correction of modern telescope object-glasses. It might be suggested that 4"°5, divided by the aperture of the object-glass in inches, would more nearly represent the separating power of the best telescopes at the present time—this gives ¢ a value of 0°988. With regard to the micro- scope limit, it 1s not to be expected that objectives, possessing aperture focus ; a limit equal to those for a telescope, with a ratio which is ten, or twenty, times smaller. Now the microscope limit, printed at the end of the Journal, is a limit for a certain class of physical experiments performed with a microscope when used in a certain manner, and it in no way represents a limit for a microscope when legitimately used for the purposes for which it is intended. A microscope objective differs from a telescope object-glass, inasmuch as a_ telescope object-glass is always used at full power, not so a microscope objective; the greater part of practical work is done with a half or three-quarter cone of illumination, and only in exceptional cases is this last amount exceeded. Excepting very low powers, it is only objectives of the highest excellence that will stand a cone, and the best oil-immersions will not stand even this. No physicist has, so far as | am aware, offered any explanation of the pheno- menon. They have all, with the exception of the late Professor Abbe, treated the microscope lens as if it were a telescope object- glass, with the light spread over its entire surface. Professor Abbe, on the other hand, ignored the centre (in fact, he went so far as to recommend for the highest class of work that it should be stopped out), and confined his investigation to the two small areas at either extremity of a diameter of the aperture. It is upon this investigation that the table of limits, printed at the end of the Journal, is based. A biologist reports to a society the discovery of some minute structure, stating that it was made with a ,4 of 1:3 N.A,, with- holding the important fact that he had only used a third of the aperture of his lens, having illuminated the object with a cone of 0:4 N.A. from an ordinary Abbe condenser. This is a typical case of daily occurrence. Suppose, now, an astronomer such a large ratio as those of a microscope, can have 528 Transactions of the Society. stated that he had observed a minute rill on the moon with his 8-in. achromatic, and withheld the information that the aperture had been stopped down to 3in. Now, as an 8-in. will show a rill on the moon 2 of a mile wide, and a 3-in. a rill 1? miles wide, his statement would not be of much value, for his audience will think he is talking about a rill 2 of a mile wide, whereas the one he saw must have been at least 23 times wider. As it is impossible tc practically use the full aperture of most microscope objectives, a table, constructed upon an assump- tion that a narrow portion at the periphery of a lens is the de- termining factor for the limit, can only lead to wrong conclusions. If, to refer back to our hypothetical astronomer, it had been the accepted practice in the astronomical world to diminish the aperture of a telescope object-glass 24 times before estimating its limit, no false impression would have been produced among the audience; but the audience of the biologist, on the other hand, having been informed by the table at the end of the Journal that the screen limit for a 1°3 N.A. is 135,800 lines to an inch, is led to believe that the discovered structure is much smaller than it really is. Inthe Journal for 1893, p. 17, there is a table, “con- structed to meet the every-day wants of the practical microscopist,” which gave the resolving limit for objectives with a ? cone; « was 46,666, and c was 1°333, therefore the limit for N.A. 1°0 was 70,000 lines to an inch. During the thirteen years since that table was written, although apochromatic objectives remain pretty much as they were then, cheap semi-apochromats have been greatly im- proved, and some containing fluorite can now be purchased at a very moderate price, which in point of excellence run even apochromats very closely. In this interval, too, Mr. H. J. Grayson has produced his wonderful band-plates, which have greatly aided the practical establishment of a more accurate limit. It was thought better to draw up a new table, for the same purpose as the old; and as it was to be a table of “working limits,” rather than one of absolute limits, ¢c was made 1°3, so the difference between the two tables is not great. The limit in the following table will only be exceeded by a very few apochromats of super-excellent quality. A reference to the table shows that the structure discovered by our biologist must have been a good deal less than 104,500 lines to the inch, because that figure is the screen limit for a 1:3 N.A. with nearly a ¢ cone, and that if this quantity be halved, for, say, a 2 cone, the result will not be so very far from the truth. It would be an excellent plan if the announcement of any microscopical discovery were accompanied not only with a descrip- tion of the objective and magnifying power, as at present, but also with the Grayson band resolved, without the alteration of any of the adjustments except the focus : e.g. an investigator having made On the Limits of Resolving Power, By E. M. Nelson. 529 : a Working Limits = 2N-A.« Mluminat- | trating Rumerical | e=1's ; power | Foret 2 (n sin u=a) White Light. Blue Light. | Photography. Nee eh Woks A= 0°5607 p. A=0°4861 np. | A=O0'4000 p. = 3 Number of lines | Number of lines | Number of lines i iz N.A. in ;}5 in.|in 3; mm,/in ,3,in.in 3, mm, in ;3,in.jin 25mm. 0-025 aly | iG 20. | 8 24 10 “0004 | 52-0 0-050 Shin lie! 40 16 ye 49 19 °0015 | 26:0 0:075 52 21 60 24, 7 29 *0033 | 17°3 0-100 70 PY | 80 32 | 98 38 -0059 | 13:0 0:°125 87 34 100 40 | 1929 48 *0092 | 10°4 0-150 105 41 121 47 146 58 013 8°7 0:175 122 48 141 by) 34) alyal 67 -018 7:4 0-200 139 55 161 63 195 if *024 6°5 0:225 157 62 181 7i 220 87 -030 5:8 0-250 174 69 201 79 244 96 -037 5:2 0:°275 192 75 221 87 269 106 *045 4:7 0-300 209 82 241 95 293 115 *053 4°3 0°325 426 89 261 108) | ily 125 *063 4-0 0:350 244 96 281 ial lp ee 135 *072 3°7 0:°375 261 103 301 119 | 366 144 -083 3°5 0-400 279 110 321 127 391 154 *094 3°2 0:425 296 iy 342 ity, sl) 2515} 163 cata 3-1 0-450 314 123 362 142 | 439 iis: 212 2°9 0:°475 331 130 382 150 464 183 2718 2-7 0-500 348 137 402 158 488 192 "15 2°6 0:°525 366 144 429 166 513 202 16 2°5 0:550 383 151 4492 174 537 212 *18 2°4 0°575 401 158 462 182 | 562 221 +20 2-3 0-600 418 165 482 190 586 231 “21 2°2 0:625 | 4365 171 502 198 | 610 240 +23 2-1 0-650 453 178 522 206 635 250 sey 2-0 0:675 470 185 542 214 | 659 260 27 iLog 0-700 488 192 563 292 | 684 269 -29 1:9 0-725 505 199 583 229 708 279 *31 1°8 0-750 523 206 603 BBY) I) Yew 288 33 ICY / 0°775 540 213 623 245 | 757 298 36 1°7 0-800 557 220 643 253 781 308 -38 1:6 0°825 575 296 663 261 | 806 317 -40 1:6 0-850 592 233 683 269 830 327 -43 1°5 0:875 610 240 703 Putty |) sistas 337 *45 1:5 0-900 627 247 723 285 | 879 346 *48 1°4 0:925 644 254 743 293 903 356 °51 1°4 0-950 662 261 763 301 | 928 365 cad 1°4 0:975 679 268 784 309 | 952 375 56 ifos! 1:00 697 274 804 316 977 385 *59 11083 1°05 732 288 844 332 | 1025 404 65 uy) 1:10 766 302 884 348 | 1074 493 2, We 1:15 801 316 924 S64 23 449 “78 1,0n! 1:20 836 329 964 Bis). |) alalye 462 *85 iat 1°25 871 343 | 1005 396 | 1291 481 92 1:0 1°30 906 357 =| 1045 411 | 1270 500 1:0 1:0 1:35 941 370 1085 497 1318 519 een -96 1:40 975 384 1125 443 1367 538 1.2 *93 1:45 1010 | 398 | 1165 459 | 1416 558 1°3 -90 1°50 1045 412 | 1205. 475 | 1465 577 i193! 87 1°55 1080 425 1246 491 1514 596 1°4 *84 1:60 1115 | 4389 | 1286 | 506 | 1563 | 615 | 1°5 -81 530 Transactions of the Society. a discovery, should remove the slide and place a Grayson’s band- plate upon his stage, and see which band was resolved, without disturbing the illumination or any of the adjustments except the focus. The discovery should be recorded as follows: Structure seen, oil immersion 3/5 N.A. 1°3, comp. ocular 12, x 1500, Gifford screen, Grayson band 60,000. A statement such as this clears the announcement of all ambiguity, and it becomes apparent that either his objective, apparatus, or eyesight must have been defective, or else a small cone of illumination was employed. But in the absence of any such additional information, the conclusion one would naturally come to, with the table of limits printed at the end of the Journal before them, would be that the capacity of the investigator’s apparatus was about 135,000 to the inch. The statement made in my former paper,* to the effect that a screen did not make any difference in the limit with apertures higher than 0°8 N.A., requires correction. I have altered my opinion with regard to the effect of the blue-green screen. The experiments upon which the previous statement was based were performed with a light from a 4-in. paraffin wick, but, in order to bring out the effect of a screen, a much more powerful illuminant is required. An ordinary acetylene bicycle lamp will be found an admirable illuminant for high power microscopical work with screens. I believe the photographic limit with a wave-length of 0:4 w is too high, the true photographic limit being much the same as the screen limit. Probably the strongest resolving lens in existence, for its aper- ture, is the Zeiss long tube apochromatic 4mm. This lens will visually resolve, with a screen, the Amphipleura pellucida, but no one has ever heard or seen a photograph of Grayson’s 120,000 band taken with this lens, which, according to the 0°4 mu wave- length photographic table, is within its grip. It will be seen that this table differs in form from that at the end of the Journal. First, the three columns of equivalents in angular aperture are omitted. The information that an oil-immer- sion of 40° of aperture, a lens which is not made, and never has been made, is the equivalent of a water-immersion of 46° 2’, which is also a lens that has never been made, was thought to be hardly worth the space. In place of these three columns, the number of lines in the ¥ of a millimetre are given. The total number of figures has been reduced, by giving the number of lines in the zho5 of an inch, which in no way impairs the usefulness of the table. Ss W.A. is equal to Nee : this equivalent is used at the head of the C columns of illuminating and penetrating powers; these functions of a lens depend upon the amount of aperture utilised, and not upon * This Journal, 1893, p. 15. On the Limits of Resolving Power. By EF. M. Nelson. 531 the total aperture of the lens, which in most cases can never be utilised. The table has been arranged according to ascending, instead of descending values of N.A. Limits are given for each 0:025 N.A., from 0 to 1°0, after that for each 0:05 N.A. In the table at the end of the Journal the low apertures advance by 0°05 N.A., and the wider apertures by 0°01; the result being, that the percentage of the differences in the number of lines to an inch, in the low apertures, is very great, and in the wide apertures very small, At0:2 N.A. it isas much as 25 p.c., and at 1°4 N.A. it is0°7 p.c. The plan adopted in the present table tends to level up these differences, for at 0°2 N.A. it is 11 p.c., and at 1°4 N.A. it is 34 p.c. A table somewhat similar to this has been of much service to the author. This new one has been put forward in the hope that it may be found useful by some of the Fellows of this Society. 532 Transactions of the Society. XI.—On the Influence on Images of Gratings of Phase-Differcnces amongst their Spectra. By J. RHEINBERG. (Read June 20th, 1906.) ‘SOME interesting points in regard to the above subject are brought forward by Dr. Karl Strehl, of Erlangen, in the “ Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie” of last September. In his booklet on the “Theory of Microscopic Vision,” pub- lished in 1900,* Dr. Strehl has referred to phase-differences occurring in the diffraction spectra of complementary structures. He there applies Babinet’s principle, reasoning that, since the transparent portions of the two complementary structures together make up a surface of even illumination, the diffraction spectra of the two complementary structures must together be equivalent to the diffraction spectrum which the evenly illuminated surface would give, viz. a single undiffracted maximum. From which it follows that, whilst the zero maximum in the two sets of spectra would be in the same phase, all the other maxima would have to cancel out, and would, therefore, be opposed to each other in phase. He now shows how this fits in with the experiments and results forming the subject of my two notes to this Journal,t which he reviews. To follow matters more clearly, it may be useful to briefly re-state to what differences in phase are due, as they arise from two distinct and different causes, viz. :— 1. The phase-differences in the diffraciion spectra of gratings which arise from the position of the grating on the stage of the Microscope, and which were, I believe, first pointed out by R. T. Glazebrook. Given a grating, so placed that one of its slits is on the optic axis of the Microscope. If illuminated by plane waves, diffraction spectra will, of course, be formed in the back focal plane of the objective. Shift the grating in the stage through half a grating interval, so that one of its bars is on the optic axis. Whilst the grating is shifted, and its image in the view plane is shifted, the diffraction spectra retain their position unaltered ; the movement of the image in the view plane is accounted for by the changes of phase which occur in the spectra. Professor Everett showed that, whilst the grating moves through * The Blaesings Universitits-Buchhandlung Erlangen. t 1904, pp. 388-390; 1905, pp. 152-155. Influence of Phase-Differences. By J. Rheinberg. 533: one grating interval on the stage, the zero maximum of the dif- fraction spectra remains unchanged, the first maximum passes. through one complete phase period, the second maxima through two complete phase periods, the third through three periods, and soon. From which it is readily seen that if a grating has been moved by exactly half a grating interval, the zero, second, fourth,. and every alternate maximum will have the same phase as before, whilst there will be a difference in the phase of the first, third, and every alternate maximum of exactly half a phase period. 2. The phase-differences in the spectra of gratings, which depend on the relative width of the slits to the bars, as first pointed out by Mr. A. E. Conrady. That in the diffraction spectrum arising from a star disk—and, therefore, also in that of a single slit—there is a phase-difference: of half a period between consecutive maxima, was, it appears, first. shown by Sir George Airy. If we plot out the position of the diffraction maxima of a. regular grating on the curve of diffraction pattern of one of its slits, then the maxima which are situated between the first and second, or between the third and fourth minima of the single slit pattern, will differ by just half a phase period from those that are situate between the two first minima, or between the second and third, or fourth and fifth minima of the single slit pattern. The relative width of the slits to the bars determines the position of the maxima of the grating on the diffraction pattern of one of its slits. Whenever the slits are wider than the bars, then one diffracted maximum only is formed between the centre and the first minimum of the single slot pattern. From which it follows that in this case the first maximum of the grating and the central, zero, or undif- fracted maximum are alike in phase, whilst the second maximum will differ by half a phase period. When the bars are wider than the slits, then two or more of the diffracted maxima of the grating fall between the centre and first minimum of the single slit pattern. Such maxima will be in. the same phase as the central or zero maximum. In the photographs appended to my last note, an example is seen of the effects which may be produced by these phase-differ- ences, in the case of a reciprocal grating in which the ratio of the slits to the bars is 1-2 in the upper, and 2-1 in the lower half. Although in a reciprocal grating the position of the slits in the upper half corresponds to the position of the bars in the lower half, when all but the first and second maxima are blocked out in the back focal plane of the objective, the image in the view plane shows the slits in both upper and lower part of the grating coin- ciding in position. Dr. Strehl’s method of explaining this is as follows :—Pointing 534 Transactions of the Society. out that a reciprocal grating consists of two complementary struc- tures, and assuming that the grating lies on the stage, so that one of the comparatively narrow slits in its upper half is on the optic axis, then the zero, first and second maxima, are, as we have seen above, alike in phase. Call them + + +. Now if one of the comparatively wide slits in the lower half of the grating were on the optic axis, then, as we have seen above, the second maximum would differ in phase from the zero and first by half a phase period, so the three maxima would be represented by + + —. But we cannot have one of the slits in both upper and lower half of the reciprocal grating in the optic axis at the same time, for if a slit of the upper half lies on the axis, then a bar of the lower half must be there. That comes to the same thing as if the lower half of the grating had been shifted by half a grating interval, and this change in position, as was shown under (1), necessitates half a phase period difference in the first spectrum, whilst the second remains unchanged. Consequently, we actually have the phases of the lower half of the grating + — —, ie. the zero spectrum remains in the same phase as that of the upper half of the grating, whilst the other spectra are opposed in phase. All except the zero maximum cancel out, just as from Babinet’s principle we should be led to expect. It will be seen that Dr. Strehl has thus in a particularly simple way harmonised specific results with the general theory of diffrac- tion by complementary structures. SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO io) OnE Or Y. -A ND BOT AON ay (PRINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA), MERGE OS. €.0) Pry a. /Hite,* ZOOLOGY. VERTEBRATA. a. Embryology.t Inheritance of Coat Colour in Horses.{—C. C. Hurst has inferred from an examination of Weatherby’s “General Stud Book of Race Horses” that in modern thoroughbred horses chestnut colour is a Mendelian recessive to bay and brown, which are dominant characters. The consideration of other colours being excluded, bays and browns are of two kinds :—(a) Those that when mated with chestnuts will give no chestnut offspring ; (4) Those that when mated with chestnuts will give on an average, half their offspring chestnuts and the remainder bays and browns. Similarly, the recessive chestnuts, variously extracted from the dominant bays and browns, breed true, as a rule, when mated together, without reversion to their bay or brown ancestors. Nine exceptions were found in 1104 cases, and these may be due to errors in the records. The late Professor W. F. R. Weldon§ studying the same subject reached the following conclusions :-— 1. No simple Mendelian view of the relation between chestnut, bay, and brown, regarding chestnut as a simple recessive, can be maintained. 2. The chance of getting a chestnut foal from a chestnut mare is not constant for sires of any colour whatever, and there is no indication that sires of any colour can be sorted into groups such that those in each group will give chestnut foals in a Mendelian proportion when mated with chestnut mares. * The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial ‘“‘ we,”’ and they do not hcld themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub- lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously described in this country. + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and allied subjects. t~ Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxxvii., No. B 519, pp. 388-94. § Tom. cit., pp. 394-8. 536 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 3. These points, together with the values for parental and grand- parental correlations already given by Professor Pearson, make it probable that the facts of inheritance of coat colour in horses can be expressed in terms of the hypothesis outlined by Mr. Galton in 1872. Hurst replies to these objections. Heredity of Hair-length in Guinea-pig.*—W. E. Castle and A. Forbes find that while long-haired and short-haired conditions are sharply alternative to each other in heredity, the gametes formed by cross breeds are not in all cases pure. Frequently they consist of a blend or a mixture of the two alternative conditions, constituting in _ effect a new condition intermediate between the other two. This is in accordance with the results obtained for other characters, e.g. albinism, alternative in heredity. It is concluded that gametic purity is not absolute, even in sharply alternative inheritance. Origin of Polydactylous Race of Guinea-pigs.t—W. E. Castle, having found that in guinea-pigs not infrequently a fourth digit, or ‘extra toe,” occurs on the hind limb, set himself the task of establishing a race of four-toed examples. This was successfully accomplished from the progeny of a single polydactylous individual, and the present paper gives a detailed account of how it was done. It is evident from facts submitted that the inheritance of the extra toe is not a case of simple Mendelian dominance; most polydactylous parents in mating with normal individuals give a mixture of normal and polydactylous offspring, rarely equal to each other in number—the expectation if one parent be a Mendelian heterozygote and the other pure. There is, however, some evidence of Mendelian segregation, and on the whole it seems probable that the extra toe is inherited in a manner intermediate between blending and alternative inheritance. Theory of Development.{— W. Wedekind propounds a theory according to which alternation of generations was universally the most primitive form of ontogeny. By a process of constant abridgment “metamorphosis ” has arisen therefrom, and through continuous accelera- tion of the ontogeny “ direct development” has ensued from alternation of generations and metamorphosis. ‘‘ Direct development is everywhere the secondary process, which, in consequence of its great rapidity, is well nigh incomprehensible.” This theory is briefly enunciated, and the advantages and difficulties in the way of its acceptance are considered. Further development in fuller detail is promised in connection with the author’s theory of parthenogenesis and determination of sex in higher animals. Aortic Arches in Mammals.$—F. T. Lewis has investigated in particular the problem of the posterior aortic arches and the related pharyngeal pouches in the rabbit and pig. The order of development of the posterior part of the branchial system appears to be as follows :— * Carnegie Inst. of Washington Publications, No, 49 (1906) pp. 5-14. + Tom. cit., pp. 17-29. t Zool. Anzeig., xxix. (1906) pp. 790-5. See also Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xviii. *(1906) pp. 38-44. § Anat. Angeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 506-13 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 537 After the formation of the third pouch and of the fourth aortic arch behind it, the position of the post-branchial body can be identified at the postero-lateral corner of the pharynx. The pulmonary arch then develops behind this body with an irregular, often double, connection with the dorsal aorta. After the pulmonary arch is complete the fourth pouch appears. The interpretation of the post-branchial body in mammals as a fifth pouch, and of the irregular vessels in front of it as a fifth arch, is not supported by the author’s observations. Development of Sesamoid Bone.*—O. Charnock Bradley has in- vestigated the development of the inter-phalangeal sesamoid in several Ungulates and in the rabbit. In all forms examined the flexor tendon is well developed before any indications appear of cartilage in the position ultimately occupied by the sesamoid bone. The development is essentially the same in Ungulates and in the rabbit. The sesamoid is at no period intra-tendinous, but from the first is clearly peri-articular in character. It is probable that this sesamoid represents an ossification in a ligament homologous with the glenoid ligament of the distal inter- phalangeal articulation of man. An interesting point is that in the pig, where the third and fourth digits are the real weight-bearers, the sesamoid is not confined to these, but is present in all the digits. Structure and Development of Ovary and Testis of Cat.t— G. Sainmont has investigated these by the study of a number of embryos. His leading conclusions are that the interstitial cell is a connective cell differentiated like all adipose cells in other connective tissues. It has a trophic role to the epithelial- organs of the ovary and testis, but an internal secretory function is only problematic. The author in a postscript points out a parallelism between the development of this tissue in the testis of the horse (as investigated by Bouin and Ancel) and in the ovary of the cat. Development of Sex Structures in Marsupials.t—A. J. P. van den Broek gives an account of certain phases in the development and relations of the Wolffian and Miillerian ducts and other related parts as observed in Didelphys, Dasyurus, and Sminthopsis. Some of his points may be noted. The sex cords in the male remain during the whole period of development completely separated. In the female at the time of highest development of the primitive kidney they are separate throughout their extent; afterwards they unite about the middle of their course at the level of the later developed uterus and its junction with the vagina. The Miillerian duct appears to arise quite indepen- dently and free from the Wolffian. As in other mammals and in man, the germinal gland already shows sexual differentiation before the Miillerian duct is completely developed. The relations of the two ducts to each other are described fully. The course of the ureters is also indicated, and it is noted that in a specimen of Sminthopsis crassi- caudata of 13°2 mm. the ureters opened hypocystically, thus showing a relation to the Wolffian ducts such as persists throughout life in * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 528-36 (5 figs.). + Arch. de Biol., xxii. (1906) fasc. 1, pp. 71-161 (6 pls.). ¢ Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 579-94 (13 figs.). Oct. 17th, 1906 2N 538 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Monotremes. (It is not known whether the condition observed was unusual or not. Development and Structure of Fins.*—E. 8. Goodrich deals with the development, structure, and origin of the median and paired fins of fishes. He has made a series of observations on embryos of Scyllium canicula, and concludes that the development of the median dorsal fins is essentially similar to that of the paired fins. They arise as longi- tudinal folds into which grow buds from the myotomes. There is early concentration, chiefly due to the body growing faster than the fin. Neither the study of development nor of the adult structure affords any definite evidence that the primitive metamerism of the musculature is lost. All the fins remain throughout development in approximately the same position. Apparent change of place may be brought about by concentration being greater in the one direction than in the other. This is especially the case with the dorsal fins: the results give strong support to the lateral fold theory of the origin of paired fins, and their general bearing is fully discussed. Functional View of Development.t—M. EH. Henriksen propounds a functional view of development in relation to which Weismann’s theory of the structure of the germ-plasm is unnecessary. According ‘to this view, ‘“‘ the adult organism is not predelineated nor singly predetermined in the egg, but develops by progressive steps, one part dependent on the other, to establish proper relations within the cells as well as among the cells, and when properly nourished and in proper environment it will establish the equilibrium of the species ; it will form a body much like that of the parent.” The physiological interactions of the parts of the cell constitute the all-determining factor for establishing the relations between the blastomeres, and thus in a progressive manner the organism reaches a state of equilibrium peculiar to that of the species. Since each successive step in development is dependent on the preceding, it neces- sarily follows that the ontogeny must be a shortened recapitulation of the phylogeny of the organism. In support of his views the author discusses the results of recent experimental embryology, showing that inheritance is independent of structure—is, in fact, a functional problem. Text-Book of Teratology.{—E. Schwalbe has completed the first part of a text-book on teratology, which will be welcomed by many investigators. He discusses the facts in the light of embryology, com- parative anatomy, and pathology. We may call attention to the chapters on experimental teratology, on regenerative and regulative processes, on the formal and causal genesis of abnormalities, and on their classification. Bull with a Supernumerary Limb.§—José Rioja y Martin com- municates two photographs of a bull with a supernumerary leg of large size, arising dorsally above the shoulder, curving downwards and forwards, and ending in five huge curved claws. * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 198 (1906) pp. 333-76 (5 pls.). + Biol. Centralbl., xxvi. (1906) pp. 18-24, 33-7. ¢~ Die Morphologie der Missbildungen des Menschen und der Tiere. Ein Lehrbuch fiir Morphologen, Physiologen, praktische Aerzte und Studierende. I Teil. Allgemeine Missbildungslehre (Teratologie). Jena, 1906. § Boll. R. Soc. Espaii. Hist. Nat., v. (1905) p. 415 (2 pls.). ~ ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 539 Hypermely in the Frog.*—O. Bender has studied a case of a super- numerary hind leg in the frog. He gives a full description of the skeletal parts and the musculature, and discusses the question of origin. He supposes that at a very early stage some unknown agency divided the blastema of the appendages into unequal parts, the smaller of which, not containing a full complement of parts, developed into a defective extra limb. Origin of Supernumerary Limbs.t—Ludwig v. Méhely describes an interesting case of a toad (Pelobates fuscus) with three fore-limbs on the left side, one the original member, a second the super-regenerated left, and a third the corresponding right. In this hexapod animal there were three shoulder-girdles on the left side—three pre-coracoids, three coracoids, three scapulee, and a minute description of the maze of bones is given. The cause was doubtless a wound, and from each wound- surface a regeneration of the peripheral parts has gone on. The author discusses the general question of regeneration. It is necessary to re- cognise the physiological unity of parts like appendages, but it is not necessary to postulate any teleological principle. Cell Communications between Blastomeres.{—Cresswell Sheurer describes delicate intercellular strands connecting one blastomere with another in the developing ova of the Serpulid Hupomatus and in the gastrula of Polygordius. He discusses similar cell communications which other investigators have recorded. Our conception of the cell-theory needs some remodelling, as Sedgwick, Whitman, and Meyer have pointed out. In the words of Sachs, cells are “merely one of the numerous expressions of the formative forces which reside in all matter.” Behaviour of Vertebrate Spermatozoa in Solutions.$—H. Adolphi has investigated the behaviour of spermatozoa of various mammals, birds, amphibians, and fishes, with particular reference to currents. In the case of mammals, for example, in salt solution where there is no current they swim in straight lines in all directions, getting up a speed of about 40 » per second. Against a stream of 100 » per second they fought hard but were carried back. In streams of from 10» to 17 » they swam against the current with a speed of 33 »% to 25 w per second. A stream of 5 w has no directing influence. Similar results in general were obtained for birds. It is suggested that the pressing forward of the spermatozoa to the tube funnel of the oviduct is due to this peculiarity of going against the stream. Frogs’ spermatozoa, however, also swim against the stream, a fact which can have no significance for fertilisation. In fishes, the sperms of most individuals as far as investi- gated appear to swim in circles. The decided swimming against the stream evident in mammals is quite absent in fishes. Factors Determining Growth and Activity of Mammary Glands.| J. EH. Lane-Claypon and E. H. Starling have made experiments which * Morph. Jahrb., xxxv. (1906) pp. 395-412 (1 pl.). t Math. Nat. Ber. Ungarn, xx. (1905) pp. 239-59 (9 figs.). t Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxxvii., No. B 520 (1906) pp. 498-505 (1 pl.). § Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 1388-49 (2 figs.). { Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvii. No. B 520 (1906), pp. 505-22 (1 pl.). Pei? a 540 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO go to show that the growth of the mammary glands during pregnancy is due to the action of a specific chemical stimulus produced in the fertilised ovum. The amount of this substance increases with the growth of the foetus. Lactation is due to the removal of this substance, which is regarded as exerting an inhibitory influence on the gland-cells, hindering their secretory activity and furthering their growth. It is also suggested that the specific substance is diffusible. It is not claimed, however, that these conclusions are as yet firmly established. Placenta of Tragulus.*—Ciro Barbieri finds that the placenta of Tragulus meminna is typically diffuse, like that in pigs and horses. In Tr. javanicus there is this slight difference, that there is a partial atrophy of villi on the antimesometral side of the uterus. The superficial internal layers of the uterus are extraordinarily rich in leucocytes, which continuously engulf and assimilate the epithelial cells of the placental villi. Breeding Habits of Pipe-Fish.t—H. W. Gudger gives an interesting account of the “ Liebesspiel” of Siphostoma floride preparatory to the act of copulation. Both sexes swim around with their bodies in nearly vertical positions, but with head and shoulders sharply bent forward like the letter f. ‘Then they swim slowly past each other, their bodies touching, and the male being perhaps more demonstrative. Just before the actual transfer, the male becomes violently excited and demonstra- tive, shakes his head and anterior body parts in a corkscrew fashion, and with his snout caresses the female on the belly. The female responds to this, but does not become so excited. This is repeated several times, the fishes becoming more excited each time they touch each other. Presently, quick as a flash, the sexual embrace takes place, and then the fishes separate to begin again in a few minutes.” The embrace consists in the fishes intertwining their bodies like two letter S’s, the one reversed on the other, thus bringing them face to face. Thus they hold their bodies together while the eggs pass from the oviduct into the pouch of the male, fertilisation presumably taking place at this moment. Before the complete transfer is effected several contacts are made. The process is so carried out that any contact of the eggs and sperms with the sea water is absolutely prevented. The pouch and its contents appear to act as a “physiological placenta” ; the eggs and embryos depend on it for oxygen and food, and cannot survive out of it. The author has followed the segmentation of the egg through a considerable number of stages, and these he describes. b. Histology. Nerve-Endings in the Lung.t—F. Ponzio concludes that in the lung there are no true nerve terminations. There are terminal net- works which envelop and interpenetrate the cells investing the minute bronchioles, the alveoli, and the capillaries. The richness and intricacy of this nervous apparatus are probably an index of its great functional importance. * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 327-36 (5 figs.). + Proc. U.S. National Museum, xxix. (1905) pp. 447-500 (7 pls.). ¢ Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 74-80 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 541 Plasma Cells in Human Gasserian Ganglion.*—E. Meyer directs attention to the occurrence of numerous plasma-cells in the apparently quite normal Gasserian ganglion. They are quite similar to those which occur in inflammatory and degenerative conditions. It is possible that they may be auxiliary cells mediating between the blood and the intensely active ganglion cells. Histology of Sex Cells.|—E. Sjévall finds that the so-called “ Binnennetz” of Golgi and Kopsch, occurring in the spinal ganglion cells, are by no means confined to them, but are frequent m other types of cell during the whole embryonic period. He has investigated this “Binnennetz” in the sex-cells of white mice during spermato- and ovogenesis. The net appears topographically to have an intimate con- nection with the idiosome, but is really different in character and independent in development. Its significance is by no means clear, yet it is undoubtedly important. It is transmitted to the cells of the new generation from the ovum only—the male sex-cell taking no part in its formation. Ciliated Epithelium in Human Papille vallate.t—F. Heiderich describes several cases in which he has found a many-layered epithelium about 54 mu thick, bearing cilia 10-12 yw in length on the papille vallate. This epithelium was limited to a small space and occurred only on quite protected places. It had no relation to the minute glands lying in and under the papillee. Fat Cells in Acipenser.5—A. Nemiloff describes these cells in Acwenser ruthenus. Of particular interest is a protoplasmic network penetrating throughout the cells which the author is certain is not an artifact. This network in fat-cells, it appears, has not been observed in other vertebrates. Structure of Vagina and Uterus in Mammals.||—K. Beiling gives a detailed account of the structure, both micro- and macroscopic, of the mammalian vagina and uterus. A wide range of types has been examined, viz.: mole, rat, rabbit, guinea-pig, dog, cat, pig, goat, ape, etc. Only a few of his results can be given. The wall of the genital canal—vagina, uterus, and tubes—consists of three layers, a mucous membrane, muscularis, and serosa. This last is absent on a part of the vagina. There is no submucosa. Vagina, cervix, and tubes are devoid of glands. The corpus and cornua uteri possess the long uterine glands ; in Carnivora at the period of sexual attraction, smaller glands, the so-called crypts, arise. A periglandular lymph space around the uterine glands is not present. The epithelium of the vagina is simple or stratified, passing over gradually into the one-layered cylindrical epithelium of the uterus and tubes. Mucus occurs only in the epi- thelium of the cervix canal; special mucus-forming cells or glands are absent, so that the surface epithelium must be regarded as the place of its formation. * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 81-3 (1 pl.). + Tom. cit., pp. 561-79 (5 figs.). t Tom. cit., pp. 315-16. § Tom. cit., pp. 513-22 (6 figs.). | Arch. Mikr, Anat., lxvii. (1906) heft 4, pp. 573-637 (1 pl). 542 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Form of Human Blood Corpuscles.*—H. E. Radasch finds that the majority of the red blood-cells in the circulating blood both in foetus and adult are bell- and not disk-shaped. Contact with the air causes the bells to collapse and assume the disk form. Number of Chromosomes in Man.t—J. Duesberg notes that there is considerable discrepancy of statement as to the number of chromo- somes in man. The number has been given as 16, 18, 24, 32, and so on. Duesberg finds clear evidence that in the spermatocytes the number is 12, and therefore 24 in the spermatogonia and the somatic cells. Thus the number in man is the same as in mouse, salamander, snail, salmon, lily, hellebore, etc. Suprarenals and Sympathetic System in Protopterus.t—Ercole Giacomini describes the suprarenal bodies in Protopterus. 'Their seg- mental association with the intercostal arteries recalls a similar disposition in lampreys. The presence of chromaffin tissue beside the cranial portions of posterior cardinal veins recalls Teleosteans. In their relations with the intercostal arteries, and with the sympathetic, and in their segmental distribution, there is an approach to Elasmobranch conditions. The sympathetic, usually said to be absent, is represented by two very delicate trunks along the sides of the aorta and by distinct traces of ganglia. c. General. Mammary Glands and other Skin-Glands of Marsupials.§ — H. Eggeling points out that the integumentary glands of Marsupials, like those of Monotremes and higher mammals, fall into two great groups: (@) the “ vital-secretory,” permanently canaliculate, merocrinal glands; and (0) the “ necrobiotic-secretory”’ (where the cells are de- stroyed), temporarily canaliculate, holocrinal glands. The first group includes, besides the various kinds of mucous glands and the so-called sudorific glands, also the mammary glands; the second group includes the so-called sebaceous glands. The close connection between the mammary glands and sudorific glands is corroborated. In the Mono- tremes epithelial muscular fibres persist in the whole length of the mammary glands; in Marsupials these occur only at particular places ; in the higher mammals they seem to have almost entirely disappeared. In the teat-less Monotremes the external musculature of the glandular tubules co-operates in expelling the secretion. In Marsupials the secretion is liberated by the sucking of the young, but there are epithelial muscular elements left to help. In this respect, as in many others, the Marsupials occupy an intermediate position. Growth of the Bronchial Tree.|—J. M. Flint describes this in the pig, where there arise from the pulmonary primordium four sets of branches, all of which, with one exception, originate from the stem * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 600-4. + Tom. cit., pp. 475-9 (8 figs.). t Atti Rend. R. Accad. Lincei Roma, xv. (1906) pp. 394-6. § Semon’s Forsch. in Austral. u.d. Malay Archipelago, iv. lief 4, pp. 299-332. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 269-70. | Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 272-86. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 543 bronchus. There is an unpaired lateral evagination from the wall of the trachea on the right side a short distance above the origin of the two chief bronchi; in certain other animals it is often present on both sides. This evagination occurs early, during the formation of the primitive lung-sacs, in embryos of about 8 mm. long. Subsequent developments are discussed, and the methods of growth of the bronchial tree, as described by various authors, are discussed and criticised. Experimental Pathology and Animal Classification.*—B. Galli- Valério discusses the significance of recent work, particularly the bearing of the action of precipitins on zoological and botanical classification. These reactions show a close relationship between Hominidee and Simiidee, less close between Hominide and Cercopithecide. The anti- serum of Cercopithecide, however, gives a more marked precipitant with the blood of Hominid and Simiide than with that of Cebidee and Hapalide. The blood of lemurs is markedly distinct from that of all Primates. The antiserum of pigs precipitates Cetacean blood ; that of Mammalia generally does not precipitate with Monotremata, and similar tests mark the Marsupials as a distinct group showing relationship with neither. Analogous results with regard to other vertebrates are quoted, as well as those of Decapods and Arachnids. An interesting case is that of Limulus, whose antiserum precipitates the blood of Arachnids, but which gives no reaction with that of Decapods. Most of the results quoted in the paper are derived from the work of Nuttall. Skeleton of Musk Duck.t—W. P. Pycraft gives an account of the peculiarities of the skeleton of this Australian diving bird, Biziura lobata, noting specially the characters evolved in relation to its diving habits. Of these may be quoted first the peculiar shape of the lachrymal gland grooves. ‘There seem to be good grounds for associating the development of this groove with the necessity for a large supra-orbital gland in marine diving birds. This seems to be supported by the fact that in the mergansers, which are fresh-water diving ducks, this groove is wanting and the gland only feebly developed.” A parallel case is afforded by the grebes and divers. The former, which are fresh- water divers, have much smaller supra-orbital glands than the latter, which are marine. The occurrence of grebes and mergansers at sea appears to be a recently acquired habit. Long hypapophyses with horizontally expanded plates at the free ends of the spines, occur upon the thoracic vertebrae. “These have undoubtedly been developed to in- crease the power of diving.” The girdles, limbs, and ribs also show special adaptive features. Organ of Jacobson in Sphenodon.{—R. Broom, from a study of Sphenodon embryos, has been able to investigate the relations of this organ, and to give a detailed account of the same. It is much less developed than in lizards and snakes, and in structure comes nearer to this organ in the Geckos than in the other lizards. In the way in * Bull. Soc. Vaudoise Sci. Nat., xlii. (1906) pp. 65-70. + Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxix. (1906) pp. 396-407 (1 pl.). t Tom. cit., pp. 414-20 (2 pls.). 544 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO which the organ opens into the anterior part of the lower portion of the nasal cavity, the resemblance is much closer to the mammalian con- dition than to the lacertilian, and in general it may be said that its condition in Sphenodon affords additional evidence, if such be required, of the reptilian affinities of the mammalia. Multiple Testis and Liver.*—H. Gerhartz gives particulars of two cases of Rana fusca where, in addition to the normal testes, accessory glands were present showing sex-cells in normal development. One of the frogs further showed two minute sago-like structures attached to a vein in the body cavity. These were found to possess a liver structure, with cells apparently in an active condition. Coloration of Fishes.t—M. Popoff discusses the discoloration of fishes, with especial reference to its interpretation in terms of the formula of natural selection. Almost all fishes are silvery below, and darker above, but there are exceptions. In those living in large rivers, ponds, and seas that are not very clear, the silver of the under-surface is often partially hidden by a dull yellow veil; in Salmonide, some of which feed chiefly at night, or habitually hide under stones and water plants, the colour is often brown, or red or dark ; in most deep-sea fishes there is usually a dull colour over the whole body. The silvery coloration is usually associated with clear water. Mandoul has interpreted the silver shimmer as due to pigments of the uric series, to which guanin belongs, and has correlated its prevalence with defec- tive renal organs. But this interpretation by itself is far too general. Thayer’s suggestion as to the protective advantage, well seen in some birds, of having a lighter groundwork on the under-surface is then considered, but Popoff finds that it is not generally applicable. When the visual arrangements and powers of fishes are considered, it becomes evident that a lighter coloration on the under-surface will not protect fish against fish. Moreover, the under-surface is not merely light, it is silvery. A careful consideration of the conditions of illumination in the water leads, however, to the conclusion that the silvery under- surface seen against the silvery surface of the water is of great protective value. The author discusses various types of coloration which may be interpreted as in harmony with different conditions in the transparency and ulumination of the water. He gives particular attention to the Clupeidee, the Salmonide, the Percidee, the Gadidee, and the deep-sea fishes. Of particular interest are cases where different species of the same genus have different coloration in correspondence with their different habits. Thus Blennius rowai, which lives in the clear sea- water, is very silvery, while B. cagnotha, which lives in not very clear fresh-water, has a yellowish tint ventrally. Popoff’s general conclusion is that the silveriness of the under-surface in fishes is a subtly-developed protective adaptation. _ Spiracular Organ in Lepidosiren and Protopterus.t—W. EH. Agar gives some particulars regarding a tubular organ “enclosed in a hoop of cartilage springing from the lateral wall of the auditory capsule.” A * Anat, Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 522-8. + Biol. Centralbl., xxvi. (1906) pp. 272-82. q Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 298-304 (5 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 545 study of developmental stages shows that it is derived from the epiblastic invagination of the spiracular cleft. It has apparently no relation to the lateral line system of sense organs, and its function is doubtful. From the fact that it is deeply imbedded below the surface, and is intimately connected with one of the efferent branchial arteries, it is suggested that it may function as an organ for testing the osmotic pressure of the blood in these mud-burrowing fishes. The organ apparently does not occur in Ceratodus. Cranial Nerves in Chimera.*— F. J. Cole and W. J. Dakin describe various nerves and their distribution in Chimera. They note that the discrete nature of the fifth, seventh, and lateral line nerves makes Chimera a unique fish as regards its cranial nerves. It is presumed that such a simple condition is more primitive than the complex fusions and interminglings that obtain in other fishes. This separation may, however, be purely secondary, just as the form of the brain in Chimera undoubtedly is; but, on the other hand, the vagus is also in a very simple and unfused condition. This, indeed, is the condition of the cranial nerves generally. Membranous Labyrinth in Elasmobranchs.{—C. Stewart describes the membranous labyrinth and its innervation in Echinorhinus, Cestra- cion,and Khina. The most noteworthy feature occurs in Rhina squatina, where the otoliths are absent, their place being taken by sand-grains introduced from without through the comparatively large external opening of the ductus endolymphaticus. The sand-grains are often partly cemented into a thin plate. It is not likely that the otoliths are got rid of through the external opening, for they were proved absent in the young unborn examples, although occurring in specimens of the same age of Acanthias vulgaris. Vertebrate Fossils of Victoria.t—A. Smith Woodward describes from the Lower Jurassic of Victoria an interesting tooth, which appears to represent a new species of Ceratodus. It differs from all the known Mesozoic teeth of this genus in its narrowness, combined with the straightness of its inner margin and the direction of its second and third denticles. The fossil proves for the first time that the remarkable Dipnoan genus to which it belongs had already reached the Australian region so long ago as the early part of the Jurassic period. At that epoch Ceratodus was still living both in Europe and in North America, while it survived in the African and South American regions at least until the Cretaceous period. From the same rock as that in which the tooth occurred a claw of a carnivorous Dinosaur was taken. It appears to represent a genus related to Megalosaurus, and a detailed description is given. Influence of Vertical Currents on Marine Plankton.§— A. Nathansohn finds that Brandt’s theory of the influence of denitrify- ing bacteria on the quantitative distribution of the marine plankton is * Anat. Anzeig., xxviii. (1906) pp. 595-9 (1 fig.). + Journ. Linn. Soc., xxix. (1906) pp. 439-42 (1 pl.). ¢ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xviii. (1906) pp. 1-3 (1 pl.). § Bull. Mus. Oceanogr. Monaco, No. 62 (1906) pp. 1-12. See also Zool. Zen- tralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 225-6. 546 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO not in itself sufficient. Nitrifying organisms do not appear regularly in the sea; they arise in the neighbourhood of the continental coasts, and thus the operation of denitrifying bacteria is limited. Of great importance are the vertical convection-currents which bring the sinking dead plankton to the surface again, and thus enrich the nutritive supply at the surface and allow a stronger development of the plankton. In the Mediterranean, with its very slow vertical circulation, the plankton is sparse, but where there are vertical currents, as at Messina and on the coast of Algiers, it is much richer. This view explains local accumulations of plankton as well as the general distribu- tion. In high latitudes the vertical currents are more marked than in temperate seas; the plankton maximum is at the equator. Many particular cases as well as the general facts show that wherever there are well-developed vertical currents there the plankton is quantitatively rich. Migration of Plankton in Lakes.*—R. Monti points out that in small shallow clear lakes of the high Alps there is a horizontal migration of the Crustaceans which is apt to vitiate the method of samples. The Entomostraca leave the parts of the surface which are sunny or moved by the wind, and seek the shaded parts. This migration often leads to an accumulation of the whole mass of the plankton in a single bay, and it also affects the vertical distribution. Arctic Biological Station.t—Martin E. Henriksen reports that a biological station is about to be established on Disco Island, off Green- land, “a well-chosen vantage-ground for the study of arctic biology.” It will be open free to investigators, who should communicate with the director, M. P. Porseld, University, Copenhagen. The money for the erection of the station has been supplied by P. Holck, of Copenhagen, and the Danish Government will pay the current expenses. Everyone will wish this new station all success. Momentum in Variation.{}—F. B. Loomis gives a number of examples—e.g. the crania and teeth in sabre-toothed tigers, horns of Cervide, septal edge in Ammonites—to show “ that as a special feature develops, it attains a momentum which tends to carry it beyond the point of greatest utility.” ‘‘A variation started along any line tends to carry that line of development to its ultimate, being driven by momentum.” ‘This factor of momentum has not been given the importance due’ to it, . . . it should find an important place in the explanation of animal structures.” But unless the author can translate momentum into biological terms, he has merely suggested a metaphor. Marine Fossils from Crete$—R. A. Bullen records from a large Mammalian bone, of Pleistocene age, found in a cave at Kharoumes, Kast Crete, a number of Foraminifera, two Polyzoa, valves of Entomos- traca, and several marine Mollusca. Their evidence, along with other data, points to oscillations of the land surfaces, leading to their sub- mergence and re-emergence. * Rend. R. Ist. Lombardo, xxxviii. (1905) pp. 122-82. ¢ Biol. Centralbl., xxvi. (1906) p. 256. t¢ Amer. Nat., xxxix. (1905) pp. 839-43 (2 figs.). § Geol. Magazine, No. 506 (1906) pp. 354-8 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 547 Tunicata. Arctic and Antarctic Appendicularie.*—H. Lohmann describes five species of Otkopleura and two species of Fritillaria from polar seas. The only species distributed at both poles is Fritillaria borealis, but it occurs in- several forms and is practically cosmopolitan. The polar species of Oikopleura are characterised by a peculiar disposition of the primordiunm of the “house,” but the arctic and antarctic species are quite distinct. In the antarctic species the gonads invest the gut laterally ; in the arctic species they lie in the loop of the gut. According to Lohmann the polar species of Appendicularize are in no way old- fashioned or primitive species. On the contrary, the polar species of Oikopleura are probably the youngest and most highly developed species of their genus. There is no warrant for supposing a monophyletic origin for the polar Appendicularie. INVERTEBRATA. Mollusca. a. Cephalopoda. Phosphorescent Organ in Cephalopods.;—W. Th. Meyer has. examined this organ in Sepiola rondeletii ; he gives a description along with comparative notes regarding Heteroteuthis dispar. The organ in S. rondeletii is paired, lying right and left of the hind gut, is of the form of an “ear-shell,”’ and iridescent in the living animal. Three portions are recognisable, one of which is glandular. An interesting feature is the fact that this organ does not occur in all examples ; it is absent in one half to three-fifths of them. It is not a case of sexual dimorphism, for the organ may be present or absent in both sexes ; further, it may be absent in adults, and it has been found in immature individuals. It is possible that two varieties of S. rondeletii exist, whose only distinguishing feature is the presence or absence of this organ. Steenstrup describes two varieties differing amongst other things in the form of the ink-bag. It is a fact that this structure is modified considerably by the presence of the ‘‘ Leucht-organ.” Sex Organs of Cephalopods.t{—C. Chun gives an account of the sex apparatus in the two deep-sea genera Calliteuthis and Histioteuthis. W. Marchand describes the male organs of Ocythoé tuberculata, discussing the peculiarities of these in the Octopods, while W. T. Meyer deals with the same structures in Opisthoteuthis depressa. It would appear that. there are a number of points of difference in the male sex apparatus between Octopods and Decapods. y. Gastropoda. Behaviour of Pond Snail.§—H. EH. Walter has made a special study of the behaviour and reactions of Lymncus elodes Say. It is negatively * Zool. Jahrb., Supp. viii., Festschr. f. Mébius, 1905, pp. 353-82 (2 pls.). + Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 388-92 (3 figs.). { Op. cit., xxix. (1906) pp. 743-60. § Brooklyn Inst. Arts and Sciences, Cold Spring Harbor Monographs, No. 6 (1906) pp. 1-33. 548 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO phototactic ; negatively geotactic when in need of oxygen, and positively so when supplied with it, but mechanical stimulation interferes some- what with the character of geotactic responses. Numerous other results are recorded, and it is concluded that with increased knowledge of the animal its actions become the more referable to external stimuli. Nevertheless these responses are constantly modified from within the organism itself by the tonus, or physiological condition, in which the animal chances to be at the time. Arthropoda. a. Insecta. Locomotor Cuticular Outgrowths in Insect Larve.*—W. Leisewitz has made a detailed study of (1) undifferentiated hairs, (2) spines-result- ing from the coalescence of groups of hairs, and fixed to basal plates which may grow into cones, (3) tubercles which result from further growth and, it may be, fusion of basal cones with reduction of the spines, and (4) setee which are shorter and thicker than the hairs, and are often curved and expanded. Of course there are intermediate forms between hairs and spines, spines and tubercles, hairs and sete. The cuticular processes in burrowing larvee are disposed in relation to locomotor efficiency. Their particular character is adapted to the material in which the larve burrow. Their size is correlated with the degree of activity. They always point in a direction opposite to that of locomotion. They afford fine examples of convergence, for the cuticular processes of unrelated larvee living in similar conditions are often closely alike. Morphology of Insect Head.t—K. W. Verhoeff has made a detailed study of the head, especially in Thysanura and Dermaptera. He dis- tinguishes three groups of “ segments ”’— : (a) Those laid down in the young germinal streak and well developed in the older embryo, e.g. the antennary segments, the 3 jaw-seements, the 3 limb-bearing thoracic segments. (0) Those laid down in the young germinal streak, but less distinct or vestigial in the older embryo, e.g. the preemandibular segment. (¢) Those which are as such indistinct in the young germinal streak, but distinct in the post-embryonic stages, e.g. the 3 segments of the protocephalon and the primitive intermediary segments (Urzwischen- segmente) on the thorax and abdomen. Of the 7-8 segments in the head of Thysanura and Dermaptera, 4 belong to group (a), 1-2 to group (0), and 3 to group (c). He gives an account of these segments and their adult representa- tion: viz. the labral-, clypeopharyngeal-, fronto-ocellar-, antennary-, mandibular-, maxillipod-, and labiopod-segments. Abdominal Gland-Pockets in Insects.t—R. Oettinger gives an account of the structure and relations, including certain histological * Ueber Chitinose Fortbewegungs-apparate einiger (insbesondere fussloser) Insektenlarven, Miinchen, 1906, 143 pp., 46 figs. See also Zool. Zentralbl., xiii. (1906) pp. 376-9. + Nova Acta k. Leopold-Carol. Deutsch. Akad. Nat., lxxxiv. (1905) pp. 1-144 (8 pls.). t Zool. Anzeig., xxx. (1906) pp. 338-49 (9 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 549 details, of the gland-pouches on the abdomen of Periplaneta orientalis and Phyllodromia germanica. As to their significance, no definite con- clusion is arrived at, although it is noted that in Periplaneta they occur in both sexes, in young as well as adult, whereas in Phyllodromia germanica they are found in the mature male only. Haase has shown that the Secretion of the pockets in Periplaneta spreads the charac- teristically unpleasant smell, while the odour of the organ in Phyllo- dromia is not unpleasant. Structure and Function of Malpighian Tubules.*—A. Veneziani has investigated these structures with a view to elucidating their bio- logical significance. There appears to be a definite relation between the extent of excretory surface of these tubules and the mass of the body. Their number is not indefinite, they are reducible to three groups of 2, 4, or 6, which may be simple or ramified. They are really parts of the intestine differentiated for a renal function. The colouring matter present in the tubules is definite in composition, resembles urochrome, and is termed entomurochrome. The excreted substances are identical with those of vertebrates (uric acid, urea, urates, phosphates, calcium, oxalates), together with carbonates, leucin, lime salts, and an undetermined acid. The tubules possess gland-cells, identical in structure with renal epithelium. These absorb electively waste materials from the blood, which are excreted through pore-canals and subsequently transported to. the exterior. To the excretory function is added that of eliminating colouring matters from the circulation, and of elaborating calcareous. material. Himalayan Ants.t—A. Forel discusses the characteristics of the Himalayan ant fauna. He recognises 54 specialised Himalayan species, 51 Indo-Malay, and 10 Palearctic. The fauna is very specialised, and comparable to that of the Swiss mountains. Two new species from over 3600 metres are described. Fossil Hymenoptera from Colorado.t—T. D. A. Cockerell describes. certain Hymenoptera from the Tertiary shales of Florissant, Colorado, probably of Miocene age. In general terms, it may be said that these insects do not differ greatly from their modern representatives. While some of the extinct genera are apparently more primitive than the dominant genera of the same.groups to-day, they are scarcely more so- than certain genera which still exist in the modern fauna. The types. represented do not suggest tropical or sub-tropical conditions ; they accord well with the vegetation in indicating a climate like that of the austral zones of the temperate region. The families represented are exactly those dominant to-day in North America, and the absence of certain groups must no doubt be regarded as accidental. Biology of Hymenopterous Parasites.§—P. Marchal has investi- gated the development and relations to host of the minute hymen- opterous parasites known as Platygasters, belonging to the family * Redia, ii. (1904) fasc. 2, pp. 177-230 (3 pls.). + Bull. Soc. Vaudoise Sci. Nat., xlii. (1906) pp. 79-94. t Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, 1. (1906) pp. 33-58. § Arch. Zool. Expér., iv. sér, 4 (1906) pp. 485-640 (8 pls.). 550 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Proctotrupide. Special reference is made to the particular conditions of parasitism in different species, and the reactions provoked in the host’s tissues. Six different species are considered, all of them living on the larvee of Cecidomyiz. The developing ova usually produce gall-like cysts upon the tissues. Jnostemma piricola, for example, produces enormous cysts upon the brain of the larva of Diplosis pirwora. Geometride of United States.*—R. F. Pearsall gives a list of ‘Geometride collected on museum expeditions to Utah, Arizona, and ‘Texas. The list includes a number of new species, which are fully -described. Life-History of Trichoptilus paludum.t— T. A. Chapman gives -some observations on the egg, growth of larvee, and pupation of this the smallest and most delicate of British plume moths. The larva appears to have four instars, and is interesting in the fact that it finds its food plant in Drosera rotundifolia. Without any special means of protection it attacks Drosera with entire impunity. The glands with their secretion _are favourite items of food, especially when the larva is small. Rest Attitude of Butterflies.t—G. B. Longstaff records numerous ‘instances of so-called “ negative heliotropism” in various butterflies, -cases of “inverted attitude” of Lyceenids, and gives illustrations of a “ sideways attitude” or “list” in various Satyrines. It appears to be ‘beyond doubt that a number of butterflies, especially Nymphalids, settle with their backs to the sun. ‘The exact significance of this is not quite -clear, but there appears to be no doubt that in such species as Pararge megera and Precis clelia the diminution of the shadow when the wings -are closed helps to conceal the butterflies from their enemies. The inverted position of Lyceenids with the lobes of the anal angle of the hind wings resembling antennz, suggests a “false head” at the upper hind end of the body. These insects possibly by this means perplex or alarm their enemies especially as they may wave or otherwise move in .a deceptive way the false antenne. Genus Hematopota.§ — Gertrude Ricardo gives a very useful account of the species of this genus in the British Museum collection. The species are conveniently grouped in zoogeographical regions, for each of which a diagnostic species-table is given, as well as numerous photographs of wings, designed to save labour in the reading of deserip- tions necessary for identification. New Organ in Periplaneta Orientalis.||—Ruth M. Harrison gives -a preliminary account of an interesting glandular structure which appears to have hitherto escaped observation. It lies on the ventral side of the sixth abdominal segment, between the fifth and sixth abdominal ganglia, and opens to the exterior between the sixth and * Brooklyn Inst. Arts and Sci., Science Bulletin, i. (1906) pp. 203-20, + Trans. Entom. Soc. London, i. (1906) pp. 133-54 (1 pl). ~ Tom. cit., pp. 97-118. § Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xviii. (1906) pp. 94-127 (4 pls.). || Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 198 (1906) pp. 377-82 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 551 seventh sternites. The opening is median, and from it the gland extends upwards and forwards as two distinct lobes. In the male it measures about 2 mm. in length, in the female it is very much less. Some account of its histology is given. Insects Attacking Cocoanut Palm.*—Charles 8. Banks adds to his previous account of the Coleoptera attacking the cocoanut palm a descrip- tion of certain species of Lepidoptera and Coccide which are also injurious, e.g. the cocoanut skipper, Padraona chrysozona Plotz (Hesperiide), Thosca cinerea marginata Banks (Limacodide), and the transparent scale, Aspidiotus destructor Sign. Hive-Bees Nesting in the Open Air.t—E. L. Bouvier reports the rare occurrence (two cases) of hive-bees nesting in the open air on a tree. He describes the number and form of the combs, and the fixing and pro- tecting of the large edifice. No drone cells were seen in either case, and there was no evidence of queens being reared. Most of the workers died off in winter, and the last survivors died in early spring. Bouvier calls particular attention to the collective industry which was manifested —very effectively too—in entirely unwonted conditions. Monograph of Coniopterygide.{—Giinther Enderlein gives a mono- graphic account of this family, which has a cosmopolitan distribution. They are typical Megaloptera (Neuroptera), closely related to the Hemerobiide. The mealy dust on the wings and body is very charac- teristic ; the only analogy is in the Aleurodide (Rhynchota). It seems likely that the dust is a secretion which hardens in the imaginal stage, and may have the same function as scales. The larve feed to a large extent on plant-lice. They spin a larval web on tree stems, which closely resembles a flat spider’s cocoon. A systematic account of the nine genera and numerous species is given. 6. Arachnida, Development of Thelyphonus Caudatus.§ — W. Schimkewitsch describes the segmentation, the origin and formation of the germ-layers, and development of organs up to the time of hatching. An account of the structure of the young Z7helyphonus is given, and some considera- tions bearing on the phylogenetic relations of the Arachnids are also added. The Genus Gamasus and other Acari.||—A. Berlese supplies a monograph upon the genus Gamasus, in which most of the species described have been found in Italy. Included in the memoir is a con- spectus of nymphs, admittedly incomplete and provisional, but likely to be of service. In two earlier papers { the same author describes a number of new Acari, one collection from Java, and another European. * Philippine Journ. Sci., i. (1906) pp. 211-28 (10 pls.). + Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 1015-20. t Zool. Jahrb., xxiii. (1906) pp. 173-242 (6 pls. and 3 figs.). § Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool., lxxxi. (1906) heft 1, p. 1-95 (8 pls. and 11 figs.). || Redia, iii. (1905) fase. 1, pp. 66-304 (18 pls.). q Op. cit., ii. (1904) fasc. 2, pp. 154-76 (3 pls.), and pp. 231-8. 552 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Hydrachnid Fauna of Scotland.*—W. Williamson gives a list of all the recorded Hydrachnide for Scotland. It would appear that these are mainly confined to the neighbourhoods of Oban, Edinburgh, Glasgow, and West Kilbride, so that this fauna does not seem to have been much worked. Fifty-four species in all are known, and of these fourteen are now recorded for the first time for Scotland. New Pycnogonid from the Bahamas.j—Léon J. Cole describes Barana latipes sp. n., the only Pycnogonid obtained during an expedi- tion to the Bahamas. The genus Barana Dohrn is undoubtedly very close to Parazetes Slater, and the two should perhaps be united. e, Crustacea. Regeneration of Lost Parts in Lobster.t—Victor E. Emmel finds that antennules, antennee, maxillipedes, chelipeds, walking legs, first abdominal appendages, swimmerets, telson, beak, etc., may be re-grown when injured. The thoracic appendages have a varying power of regeneration at different levels, but most at the “ breaking-plane” between the second and third basal segments. As this is the region at which the limbs when injured are almost always “autotomously” severed, the comparative perfection of re-growth at this region may be the result of selection. Regenerated chelipeds of young lobsters attained a normal size at the third moult. Repeated removal of the right cheliped showed in each successive regeneration a larger percentage of difference between the lengths of the regenerated and the normal limbs. There is an adapta- tion of both regenerative and moulting processes to the regenerating limb, favourable to the development of a functional appendage at the first moult after injury. Larve of Macrura Eucyphota.§s—H. Coutiére describes the curious larval forms of Caricyphus, Diaphoropus, Hectarthropus, Icotopus, and Thalassocaris. It seems that very diverse species have a prolonged mode of development, characterised by a uniform larval phase, much elongated, adapted to pelagic life, inherited from Schizopod ancestors, and doubtless terminating in an abrupt genital crisis, with probable reduction of size. Antarctic Isopods.||— Harriet Richardson discusses the Isopods collected by the French Antarctic Expedition. The collection is marked by the multiplicity of special forms, and by the gigantic dimensions of some of them. Two new genera—Antias and Austrimunna—are established. Male of Nicothoa astaci and the Suctorial Apparatus.—A. Quidor has studied the insufficiently known male of this parasite of the crayfish. In the early immature stages the two sexes are indistinguishable, except * Trans. Edinburgh Field Nat. and Micr. Soc., 1905-6, pp. 1-3. + Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 217-22 (2 pls.). ¢ Twenty-fifth Report Inland Fisheries Rhode Island (Providence, 1905) pp. 81-117 (2 pls.). § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 847-9. : | Tom. cit., pp. 849-51. q Tom. cit., pp. 465-8 (2 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Sr) by an examination of the gonads. It is suggested that the subsequent dimorphism is determined by the ethological differences. The sedentary habits of the female induce a hypertrophy of the digestive functions, impossible in the pelagic male. A minute description is given of the suctorial apparatus. Spermatozoa of Decapoda.*—N. K. Koltzoff discusses in a very exhaustive manner the spermatozoon in Decapods as an introduction to a consideration of the problem of cell-form. There is a chapter on comparative morphology, which includes an account of the development of the various structures, nuclear and cytoplasmic, with a statement of homologies with the usual sperm type; a chapter on biophysics, in which are discussed, inter alia, the dependence of the external form of the Decapod sperm upon osmotic pressure, the origin of the form in histogenesis, and its fixation ; a chapter on physiology, dealing with the movements of the sperm appendages, the capsule explosion, and the functions of the separate sperm “organs”; and a concluding section, treating of such matters as the significance of the central body and the mitochondria, and the organisation of the cell. Annulata. Collateral Budding in a Syllid.t—Akira Izuka describes in T'ry- panosyllis misakiensis sp. n. the production of numerous collateral buds at the posterior end of the body. There were fourteen sexual zooids attached to the ventral aspect of the posterior end. After full maturity the buds will evidently separate from the asexual mother individual. Nephridia of Arenicola.t—R. 8S. Lillie gives a full account of the structure, origin, and histological differentiation of the nephridia in A. cristata ‘Simpson. Particular attention is given to the relation of the nephridia to the body segmentation and to the septa, and the mode of development of nephrostome, glandular portion, and terminal vesicle. There is also added a brief account of the anatomy and histology of the adult nephridium. Heteronereis of Thames Estuary.s—H. C. Sorby gives some in- teresting notes regarding the Heteronereis of several species of Nereis. He has spent several months in the year for more than twenty years on the waters of the Thames estuary, and only on five occasions has he seen large numbers of Heteronereis swimming at the surface. Some account of these occurrences is given, and also other notes upon the following species:—V. diversicolor, N. dumerilu, N. longissima, NV. pelagica, N. cultrifera. Nematohelminthes. Reducing-division in Ascaris.||—R. F. Griggs presents evidence which seems to him conclusive that the reduction-division in Ascaris is * Arch. Mikr. Anat., Ixvii. (1906) heft 3, pp. 364-571 (3 pls. and 37 figs.). + Annot. Zool. Japon, v. (1906) pp. 283-7 (4 figs.). t Mitth. Zool. Station Neapel, xvii. (1905) pp. 341-405 (4 pls. and 1 fig.). § Journ. Linn. Soc., xxix. (1906) pp. 434-9. || Ohio Nat., vi. (1906) pp. 519-27 (1 pl.). Oct. 17th, 1906 2 0 554 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO a true reducing-division in Weismann’s sense. In Ascaris megalocephala bivalens the tetrads arise, not by a double longitudinal split of the original spirem-thread, but by a folding of adjacent segments together (conjugation of univalent chromosomes) along with what is believed to be a single longitudinal split. The two split loops which form the two tetrads appear very early in the continuous spirem, and in their later development simply break apart, shorten, thicken, and straighten out till the tetrads are formed. Since of each tetrad only one component chromosome remains in the ripe ovum, there is a reducing-division in Weismann’s sense, by which paired chromosomes are -separated from each other in the egg, and the hereditary characters transmitted by the chromosomes thereby modified. Anatomy of Nematodes.*—F. H. Stewart describes in some detail the anatomy of Oncholaimus vulgaris Bast., a free-living Nematode, and gives some notes on the reproductive system of Ascaris clavata and on the excretory gland in the larva of an Ascaris from the cod. Of special interest are the observations on the ccelom. The cavities containing the testes and ovary are true gonoccels or protocceloms. In the forms described a series is made out. In the immature female or mature male of O. vulgaris there is a simple gonoccel ; next in the mature female the gonoccel is slightly more complex ; there is a narrow conical outgrowth from the original cavity, which is represented by the ovarian cecum ; finally in A. clavata the entire gonoccel has become enormously elongated and convoluted. The call for this latter development is the need for an enormous increase in the reproductive products on changing from a free to a parasitic life. Platyhelminthes. Structure and Development of Cysticercus.t—H. Schaaf discusses, with particular reference to Tenia solium, the structure and develop- ment of cysticerci, of which he has had abundant material of different. ages. The cysticerci of 7. serrata, T. saginata, and 7. marginata are also described. Echinoderma. Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon.{—G. C. Chubb has endeavoured to interpret in terms of the cell-metabolism the structural changes exhibited by the growing ovarian ovum of Antedon bifida Penant. Throughout the whole growth of the oocyte the nucleolus inter- mittently discharges groups of deeply basophile spherules into the cytoplasm. In the young oocyte these ‘“ nucleolar spherules ” accumulate in the cytoplasm, where they form small groups near the germinal vesicle. In slightly older oocytes the increased fluidity of the cytoplasm which results from the progressive accumulation of metaplastic material in preparation for yolk-formation, causes the discharged nucleolar substance to lose its spherular form, and to diffuse on the neighbouring cytoplasm. The more deeply staining area of the cytoplasm to which * Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., No. 197 (1906) pp. 101-50 (3 pls.). + Zool. Jahrb., xxii. (1906) heft 3, pp. 435-76 (2 pls. and 13 figs.). ${ Proc. Roy. Soc. London, Series B, lxxvii. No. B 519, pp. 384-7. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 555 this diffusion gives rise is the yolk-nucleus. As the cytoplasm becomes still more fluid, the yolk-nucleus becomes a concavo-convex lens em- bracing the spherical germinal vesicle. The yolk-nucleus is simply a region of the cytoplasm on to which waste material discharged from the nucleolus has diffused, and its subsequent movement to the periphery and its other changes are all determined by the progressive change in the physical consistence of the cytoplasm which precedes and accom- panies yolk-formation. The spherical form of the nucleolus, a form in which minimum surface area is associated with maximum bulk, stands in striking contrast to the subdivided condition of the chromatin, and indicates the absence of any reaction between the caryolymph and the nucleolar substance at the surface of the nucleolus; the latter structure passively growing by the deposition of material on its surface from solution in the caryolymph. The nucleolar material consists of two substances : the one acidophile and extending throughout the nucleolus, the other deeply basophile and borne by the acidophile ground substance, to which its presence imparts a considerably firmer consistence. Nucleolar activity, which proceeds from within outwards, results in the breakdown of the basophile con- stituent, the products of which are eventually discharged into the caryolymph. On the completion of yolk-formation all indication of nucleolar activity abruptly ceases. The supply of the basophile con- stituent of the nucleolus also ceases, but the acidophile constituent continues to be deposited on the nucleolar surface, where, no longer being incorporated by the now inactive nucleolus, it forms lens-shaped accumulations. The acidophile constituent is probably due to the chromatin, the basophile to the cytoplasm. The steady growth of the nucleolus is not due to the accumulation of waste material, but to an increased production of the “ground substance” by the chromatin in order to cope with the ever-increasing production of waste material by the cytoplasm of the growing egg. From the nucleolus this waste material, now presumably inert and harmless, is discharged into the cytoplasm, where it slowly dissolves away. As metabolism increases, the chromatin is more sub-divided ; this facilitates reaction with the surrounding caryolymph, and indicates that the chromatin obtains its food-material by active incorporation. The source is outside the cell, and the chromatin is the cell-structure with which the raw food-material supplied by the parent organism first comes into relation. The elaborated food-material is passed on from the chromatin, in part to the nucleolus, but mainly to the cytoplasm. During the period preceding yolk-formation, which is marked by the progressive accumulation of metaplastic material in preparation for this process, the avidity with which the cytoplasm takes up the products of chromatin activity causes the latter structure to appear faintly stained. With the commencement of yolk-formation this avidity is greatly reduced, and the products of chromatin activity, now being produced in excess of the requirements of the cytoplasm, accumulate on the chromatin threads, causing the increase in the staining capacity of the latter and the formation of the basophile droplets. Throughout the whole growth-period of the oocyte there is a gradual DOL 2 556 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO accumulation in the cytoplasm of metaplastic material in preparation for yolk-formation. This is accompanied by an increase in the basophile staining capacity and fluid consistence of the cytoplasm. The process of yolk formation, that is the actual appearance of the definitive yolk- spherules, is unaccompanied by increased nuclear or nucleolar activity, and consists simply in the rapid and automatic conversion of the accumulated material into a form sufficiently stable to survive the period of quiescence which succeeds the completion of the growth of the egg. The oocyte constitutes an osmotic system, of which the cell-wall forms an outer, the nuclear membrane an inner semi-permeable mem- brane. The accumulation in the cytoplasm of soluble substances in preparation for yolk-formation causes an increase in the osmotic intensity at the outer membrane, and a corresponding decrease of that at the inner. The loss of turgescence which thus results permits of the assumption of an irregular form during fixation. Up to the expansion due to the formation of the definitive yolk- spherules, the size of the germinal vesicle shows a close relation to that of the egg, and is determined when equilibrium is established between the rate of diffusion of nutritive substances through the nuclear mem- brane on the one hand, and the requirements of the chromatin on the other. Nervous System of Asteride.*—R. Meyer deals with the finer structure of the nervous system in Asteride, describing the radial system, the cuticula, the covering or support cells (Stiitzzellen), gland-, sense-, and ganglion-cells in Asterias rubens. With reference to the ‘“‘enteroccel nervous system,” described by Cuenot, as existing in the dorsal peritoneal epithelium in A. glacialis and other starfish, the author expresses doubt. He failed to find it in A. rwbens, and points out that Cuenot himself could not observe it in Asterina. On account of these facts he is inclined to question the existence of an enteroccel nervous system. Ccelentera. Sexual Dimorphism in Aglaophenia.t—H. B. Torrey and Ann Martin find that, in those species bearing both closed and open corbule which they have examined (A. diegensis Torrey, A. pluma (Linn.), A. stouthionides Murray, and A. inconspicua Torrey ), the female gonophores are contained solely in those corbulee which have completely fused leaflets (closed) ; the male in those where the leaflets are more or less free from one another (open).. They therefore consider it highly probable that other species of Aglaophenia, and perhaps even other genera, may show sex characters of a similar nature in their phylac- tocarps. Structure of Isis Hippuris.{—J. J. Simpson, in view of the fact that the genus Jsis has hitherto been but imperfectly described and * Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., lxxxi. (1906) heft 1, pp. 96-144 (2 pls.). + Univ. California Publications (Zool.) iii. No. 4 (1906) pp. 47-52 (9 figs.). ¢ Journ. Linn. Soc., xxix. (1906) pp. 421-33 (1 pl.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 557 insufficiently known, gives a precise detailed description of this species, which is also the sole representative of a distinct family. The previous literature of Jsis is reviewed, and a note of its distribution as far as recorded is given. Porifera. New Clionid.*—E. Topsent describes Cliothosa seurati g. et sp. n., a new boring sponge, from the Gambier Islands. There are no somatic microscleres, and the choanosomic asters are amphiasters. Protozoa. *Biometrical Study of Conjugation in Paramecium.t— R. Pearl has made a study of variation and correlation in conjugating and non- conjugating examples of Paramecium caudatum. 'The author’s aim has been to determine whether the portion of the Paramecium population, which is in a state of conjugation at a given time, is differentiated in respect of type or variability, or both, from the non-conjugating portion of the population living in the same culture at the same time; and further whether there is any tendency for like to pair with like (“ homogamy”’), and if so, how strong this tendency is. The results showed that there is a differentiated “ conjugant type ” of Paramecium ; and that this “conjugant type” is relatively fixed and constant under varying environmental conditions, as compared with the general popula- tion in fission generations. Thus it follows that if the individual Paramecia of a given race must conform to a definite and relatively fixed morphological type every time they conjugate, what they may acquire during fission generations is clearly of no particular account to the evolutionary history of the race in the long run. Rhizopoda in Human Spinal Fluid.{—V. Ellermann describes from the spinal fluid in two cases of poliomyelitis acuta, rhizopods showing a well marked development of filose pseudopodia. They bore no resemblance to polynuclear leucocytes, but were quite characteristic. No bacteria were found associated with them. Trypanosome of Horse.§ —J. J. Vassal describes a trypanosome affecting horses in Annam. lLaveran and Mesnil|| have conducted a series of immunity experiments with a view to determining its relation to the organism of Surra, which it resembles. Their main conclusion is that it is probably a variety of the same; it is not distinct from Surra in the sense that Nagana is. Spirillum of Bat.¢—C. Nicolle and C. Comte describe a fatal spirillum disease of Vespertilio kuhli from Tunis. The source of infec- tion is apparently undetermined. * Bull. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1905, pp. 94-6. + Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, Ixxvii., No. B 518, pp. 377-83. ¢ Centralbl. Bakt. Parasit., xl. (1906) heft 5, pp. 648-53 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). § Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) pp. 256-95. || Tom. cit., pp. 296-303. q Tom. cit., pp. 311-20 (1 pl.). 558 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Myxosporidium of Trout.*—L. Léger gives a brief account of Chloro- myzum trutte sp. n., occurring in the gall-bladder of T’rutta fario L. at Dauphiné. It closely resembles C. fluviatile. The hosts suffer from enteritis, the liver is discoloured, and the gall-bladder enormously dis- tended. The fins and all clear parts of the skin turn yellow, there is marked emaciation, and death usually results. The parasites, which live free in the gall-bladder and its ducts, have been found only in sickly trout. * Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 655-61. 1 Or © ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. BOTANY. GENERAL, Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants. Cytology, including Cell-Contents. Cytology of Nectar-Glands of Vicia Faba.*—C. Stockard has examined the nectar-glands on the stipules of Vicia Faba, and finds that they contain rows of cells, the contents of which have different chemical reactions, shown in life by different colours; these are probably due to differences in metabolic activity. The colour response resembles that of litmus, acids turning the cell-contents red, and bases turning them blue. When young the gland-cells differ but slightly from ordinary cells. The nuclei are granular, sometimes coarsely vacuolated, with one or more plasmosomes surrounded by vacuoles; they are spherical when young, but later on are shrunken and irregular. They are generally central, and probably give out material to the cytoplasm which ultimately gives rise to granules. Rarely the nucleus loses its chromatin and takes plasma stains. During secretion the cytoplasm first becomes vacuolar, then slightly granular, and takes nuclear stains. These changes are con- trolled by the nucleus which seems to be the centre of metabolic activities, sharing in the formation of the secreted substance, but taking no part in the actual process of secretion. Structure and Development. Vegetative. Investigations on the Anatomy of Allied Plants.j—A. Sarton has tested the constancy of anatomical characters under varying condi- tions of soil and climate. He calls attention to two kinds of species, viz., Linnean and Jordanian, which vary according to the different values placed upon external morphological characters. The author believes that where the anatomical differences of allied species are experimentally interchangeable, such species should not be regarded as distinct, however unlike may be their external appearance. On the other hand, those whose anatomical differences are constant under experiment are true species, though agreeing in their external appearance. The chief value of this investigation is in the evidence as to what anatomical characters vary under given conditions. Physiology. Nutrition and Growth. Chlorosis in Malvacee.t—Baur has investigated the infectious chlorosis of the Malvacez, using for his experiments 4 butilon striatum, * Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxiii. (1906) pp. 247-62 (2 pls.). + Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.), sér. 9, ii. (1905) pp. 1-117 (4 pls.). ~ SB. Akad. Wiss., 1906, pp. 11-29. 560 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO a plant capable of transmitting its variegation by grafting. He finds that if the leaves are removed from variegated plants, and the plants are then kept in the dark, new shoots appear with only two or three variegated leaves, and if the latter are removed the plant remains per- manently green, unless infected afresh by grafting. If latent axillary buds on old parts are forced into growth they produce variegated leaves, which infect all the rest of the plant. If all variegated leaves are removed and the plant exposed to light, it becomes permanently green. Similar results were obtained with A. arborewm. The author believes that the variegation is caused by a virus formed only in the light in the affected parts of the plant ; also that this virus is formed only in small quantities, which are quickly used up if the infected leaves are at once removed. It is only able to infect embryonic leaves, and is then stored for months in an inactive form. Experiments show that the virus moves in the cortex and not in the transpiration current. When variegated A. Thomsoni is grafted with immune A. arboreum, the scions grow well but are not infected, although if these scions are them- selves grafted with a susceptible species, the virus passes through the immune parts and infects the susceptible species. This virus may thus be compared to the supposed shoot-forming substance of Sachs and the growth-enzymes of Beijerinck. Starch in the Bryophyta.*—El. and Em. Marchal have carried out a series of physiological researches on the presence of starch in hepatics and mosses. In the first chapter they describe in detail their experiments made upon some 50 hepatics and 90 mosses, to determine the existence and localisation of starch in them. ‘Their first list is systematic. For convenience they then class the species in three groups according to whether they contain much, little, or no starch. In the first group are 27 hepatics and 52 mosses; in the second, 12 hepatics and 24 mosses ; in the third, 11 hepatics and 14 mosses. Types of the first group, where freshness is constant, are Cincinnulus trichomanis, Atrichum undulatum ; types of the second group, exposed to short and rare periods of desic- cation, are Lophocolea bidentata, Ceratodon purpureus; types of the third group, adapted to withstand prolonged desiccation, are Radula com- planata and Neckera crispa. Ja the second chapter they consider the effect of light, heat, water, and nutritive solutions upon the production and fluctuation of the stores of starch, and find that the Muscinee react in precisely the same way as do the chlorophyllose Phanerogams. Direction of Growth in Hepatics.;—B. Nemec has been studying the direction of growth of the sporogonium and vegetative shoots of certain hepatics in darkness both under the action of gravity and freed from it. Varied results were obtained. The plants examined were Lophocolea bidentata, Lejeunea serpyllifolia, Aneura pinguis, Pellia caly- cina, and P. epiphylla. Most of these were geotropic, and grew ortho- tropically or plagiotropically upwards in the dark; but the first two species were ageotropic. * Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique, xliii. (1906) pp. 115-214. + Flora, xcvi. (1906) pp. 409-50 (9 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 561 Respiration in Leaves attacked by Peronospora.*—L. Pavarino finds that normal respiration is accelerated by the presence of Peronospora in the tissues ; the absorption of oxygen is increased. Intra-molecular respiration is more active in diseased leaves, but it becomes exhausted, while it continues in healthy leaves. He finds also an increased quantity of oxydase not only in leaves invaded by a parasite but also in wounded leaves. This is due, he considers, to the reaction of the protoplasm against the parasite or the poisonous substances excreted by it. The experiments were made on vine-leaves. Terry, O. P.—Galvanotropism of Volvox. Amer. Journ. of Physiology, xv. (1906) pp. 235-44. General. Graft Hybrids.t—Noll, having examined the graft-hybrids resulting from grafting Mespilus germanica upon Crategus monogyna, is of the opinion that they originate through nuclear fusion in the callus. The cells of the hybrid branches have not double the sporophyte number of chromosomes, so that if these branches arose from fusion of two vegeta- tive cells, there must have been some method of reduction. The greater resemblance of the hybrid to the stock or scion is explained by the assumption that in each fusion the nucleus which moved into new cytoplasmic surroundings was so weakened that in the reduction process it contributed fewer determinants than did the stationary nucleus to the hybrid nucleus. The author hopes to succeed in recreating the hybrid Laburnum Adami, which is said to give similar results. Nectaries of Crucifere.{—Armando Villani finds that the nectaries of Cruciferee are referable to one primitive type, viz., two at the base, external to each stamen, constituting a dimerous, external whorl, and two at the base, and between each member of each pair of long stamens, constituting an internal dimerous cycle. The author thinks that the Crucifersze may be divided into types and generic groups according to the number and position of their nectaries. He regards the whole flower as dimerous, the tetramery of the corolla being only apparent. Variation of Flowers.§—G. Klebs, as a result of experimental work on the variations of flowers, offers a substitute for De Vries’s intracellular pangenesis. He is convinced that all variations are due to the influence of external factors upon the inherent potentialities of the organism, and. has made use of various conditions of temperature, darkness, wounding, and artificial food, using Campanula Trachelium and Sempervivum Funku for his experiments. He shows that the taxonomic limits of a given species are easily passed if external conditions favour the expression of potentialities inherent in the organism. The influence of external con- ditions is much greater before inception of the organs than after. He * Atti Ist. Bot. Pavia, xi. (1906) p. 16. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 38-9. t+ SB. Niederrhein Ges. Nat. u. Heilkunde, Bonn (1905). See also Bot. Gaz., xli. (1906) pp. 358-9. t Malpighia, xix. (1906) pp. 399-439. § Jahrb. wiss. Bot. xlii. (1906) pp. 155-320 (1 pl.). 562 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO regards a species as characterised only by its constant relation to the outer world, or in other words, as comprising all individuals which have arisen by vegetative reproduction or self-fertilisation, and showing identical characters for many generations. The potentialities of Klebs are Immaterial as compared with the pangens of De Vries, which are material and carry the unit characters. Preserving Plants.*—G. Pollacci finds that plants preserved in a weak solution of sulphur-dioxide retain their form and are kept in good condition for sectioning. The colour may be preserved by immer- sion in an aqueous solution of copper-sulphate before being placed in the preservative. CRYPTOGAMS. Pteridophyta. (By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.) North American Ferns.—A. B. Klugh? gives a list of 79 ferns which form the fern-flora of Ontario. He records the stations at which they have been found, and briefly describes the geological characters of the province, and the mean yearly temperatures of its counties. L. H. MeNeillf gives an account of Botrychium biternatum, a rare species found in the neighbourhood of Mobile, Alabama, and relates how it was pointed out to him about 30 years ago by the late Dr. Charles Mohr, in a spot now covered with buildings. On searching for the plant two years ago, he re-discovered it in two places. He describes the manner of growth of the plant, the kind of habitat which it prefers, and the characters which satisfy him that it is a distinct species not to be con- founded with Bb. obliguum. W. Palmer, § discussing the occurrence of green and red stiped lady ferns in North America, requests botanists to help him in defining the geographical distribution of the two forms, and in ascertaining whether the form with green stipe is boreal and the red austral. W. N. Clute|| describes the distribution of Botrychium Lunaria in North America, and gives his reasons for the opinion that B. ononda- gense cannot be separated from it specifically. E. L. Lee gives an account of a hidden shaded nook in the Cumberland mountains near South Pittsburg, Tennessee, the only recorded station for Scolopendriwm in the south, and suggests that the apparent rarity of the plant may be due to the secluded nature of its haunts. G. E. Davenport,** writing on the forms of Botrychium simplex, points out that the fully matured form of the plant is Lasch’s var. compositum, of which that author described a binate and a ternate form; that this variety bears the lamina low down near the base of the frond, while Milde’s var. fallax bears the lamina above the middle of the frond. W.N. Clute tt continues his check list of the North American fernworts. Mrs. J. R. Sanford ttf * Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital., 1905, p. 242. + Fern Bulletin, xiv. (1906) pp. 65-74. t Tom. cit., pp. 74-6. § Tom. cit., pp. 78-9. || Tom. cit., pp. 80-1 (1 pl.). q Tom. cit., pp. 82-4. =e Lom: cit., pp. 84-5. tt Tom. cit., pp. 86-90. ti Rhodora, viii. (1906) pp. 113-14. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 563 describes how she found a likely spot in Massachusetts for the reputed hybrid Asplenium ebenoides, the soil being favourable, and the two ferns Asplenium ebeneum and Camptosorus rhizophyllus present in plenty, and after a short search discovered A. ebenoides (a new record for Massa- chusetts), and close by it a variant form of C. rhizophyllus verging towards A. ebenoides. South American Ferns.—G. Hieronymus* gives the first instalment of his enumeration of the ferns collected by Dr. A. Stiibel in 1868 during his geological explorations in Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, and Bolivia. Though not a botanist, Stiibel made the best use of his exceptional opportunities for collecting from the plains right up to the eternal snows, his object being to bring back specimens typical of the various zones visited by him; and his collection was at the time by far the best ever made in that region. Hight new species are described and figured, six of them belonging to the genus Alsophila. P. Dusén, f in his account of the flora of the Serra do Itatiaya in Brazil, gives a list of 26 Pteridophytes collected by him during his expedition in May-July 1902, on behalf of the National Museum at Rio de Janeiro. The speci- mens were almost all determined by H. Christ. H. Christ { publishes a list of 28 Brazilian ferns collected by J. Huber and Madame A. Goeldi for the Goeldi Museum at Para, during an expedition to the frontier of Peru, up the river Purus, an important tributary of the Amazons. The collection shows no trace of a sub-andine character, but is of the type found over the great Brazilian plain. Four new species are described. Japanese Ferns.s—J. Matsumura publishes an index of Japanese plants with the species arranged alphabetically under their classes. The habitat, Japanese name, citations of literature, synonyms, and a biblio- graphy are added. The Pteridophyta are 621 in number, including 25 fossil ferns. Norfolk Island Ferns.||—J. H. Maiden, in his account of the flora of Norfolk Island, publishes a list of 55 species of Pteridophyta with critical notes on doubtful points, synonymy, etc. Six of the species appear to be new records for the island. Rare Form of Asplenium Ruta-muraria.{—R. Pampanini discusses “lusus depauperatum Rosenstock,” a monstrous form of A. Ruta-muraria described by Christ in his monograph of the many variations of the species.** The original plant was found near Castelruth in South Tyrol, and Pampanini has obtained further specimens from the sub-alps of Belluno. He describes the plant, and calls attention to its peculiarities, the lanceolate form of the leaves, the linear lacinez, the marginal sori, and the longly ciliated indusium—these are but exaggerations of what occurs in other forms of the species; and despite its very distinct external appearance, depauperatum must not be mistaken for some other * Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 215-838 (4 pls.). + Arch. Mus. Nacion. Rio de Janeiro, xiii. (1903) pp. 105-9. } Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 190-4. § Index Plantarum Japonicarum. Tokio: Maruzen, 1904, i. pp. 284-363, 382-96, | Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xxviii. (1903-4) pp. 729-40, q Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xiii. (1906) pp. 229-35 (1 pl.). ** Hedwigia, xlii. (1903) p. 170. 564 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO species, nor even for a hybrid. The indusium of A. Ruta-muraria is one of the most typical characters of the species; it is longly ciliate. And yet, curiously enough, authors have described it so diversely as erose, denticulate, lacerate, fimbriate, etc. (scores of citations are given in foot- notes) ; and in their figures they have almost all either omitted it or represented it as entire, crenulate, eroso-lacerate, denticulate, or very shortly ciliate. Pampanini has, by numerous observations, determined it to be more or less longly ciliate at first, the cilia equalling the width of the undivided part of the indusium or even being twice as long. After maturation of the spores, the cilia break off, and the membrane becomes lacerate. Figures are given. How Ferns Grow.*—M. Slosson, in her freely illustrated book “ How Ferns Grow,” points out the principal features of the develop- ment of form and venation in fronds as seen in the ferns of the North- Eastern United States. Highteen species are treated, each in a chapter by itself, containing a description of a mature plant followed by a detailed account of the evolution of the fronds from the earliest simple form of the first year, to the fully developed frond of a mature plant. Sufficient examples of these often strangely diverse stages occurring in one and the same species are well represented by photography in the plates. Structure of Tree-Ferns.t—W. Schiitze treats of the physiological anatomy of some tropical ferns, especially the tree-ferns. He gives a brief summary of such little work as has been done on this neglected subject, and attempts to supply in this paper such information as botanists require. His material comprises the genera Cyathea, Alsophila, Hemitelia, and Dicksonia, and also Lygodium and Drimoglossum. First he treats of the epidermis, the corky sub-epidermal layers, and epidermal structures. Passing on to the vascular tissue, he describes the form and course of the main bundle, of the medullary and cortical bundles, the hadrome and protohadrome, tylosis, the leptome and protoleptome, the parenchyma sheath and endodermis, the external parenchyma. He then deals with the mechanical system, its structure and arrangement, the mechanical cells, the brown colouring-matter in the walls of the un- lignified stereome-cells ; and concludes with remarks on the secretory system and the stores of excreted matters. Bud-formation on Fern-leaves.{—W. Kupper treats of the forma- tion of buds on certain fern-leaves, especially Adiantum Edgeworthu. In this and some seven other species apical buds occur. He discusses the various modes of development of the buds in relation to the leaf-apex. The bud-bearing leaves usually are prolonged at the apex, so that the bud is made to touch the earth and takes root as an independent plant. The author describes the various modifications of the first leaves of the buds formed by the different species. In Trichomanes pinnatum buds are produced on each side of the lengthened rachis in place of pinne, and arise like these from marginal cells. In Asplenium obtusilobum and * New York: Henry Holt, 1906, viii. and 156 pp., 46 pls. + Beitr. wiss. Bot., v. (1906) pp. 329-76 (figs.). t Flora, xcvi. (1906) pp. 337-408 (figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 565 A. Mannii normal and bud-bearing pinna-less leaves arise in alternation ; in A. Mannii, the buds arise from marginal cells, and in A. obtusilobum from the upper surface. In both these species the elongated rachis is therefore monopodial with theoretically unlimited growth ; and in A. obtusilobum, if the apex of this rachis is cut off the first leaf-rudiment of the youngest bud becomes converted into a continuation of the pro- liferous apex. The author then gives a list of numerous ferns grouped according to the positions occupied by the buds on the leaves. Systematic Value of Sporangium-wall.*—-K. Schnarf adds to our knowledge of the structure of the sporangial-wall in Polypodiaceee and Cyatheaceze, and discusses its systematic importance. He gives a brief account of the use made by previous authors of the taxonomic characters afforded by the sporangia, and expresses his opinion that the sporangia of the Leptosporangiate afford sufficient characters for a natural division of the ferns, but that the annulus by itself is not enough, being in- fluenced by external factors ; yet in combination with the structure of the sporangial-wall it affords ample material for establishing the natural relationships of the ferns. He describes in detail the structure of the sporangium in all its parts, selecting Blechnum as a typical example. Applying his ideas to Asplenium, he gives a list of many species examined by him and arranged in five sections by Diels, and finds that they are all characterised by similar sporangial characters, but that, Diplazium and Athyrium are entirely different, while Ceterach, Scolo- pendrium, and Pleurosorus entirely agree with Asplenium. Other botanists have reached the same conclusion in other ways. Similarly in Cyatheaceze the author’s theory holds good, but is more difficult of application ; and he discusses the question as-to whether Dicksoniew and Cyathee ought to be united in one family. Gold and Silver Ferns.t—W. Zopf publishes an account of some experiments on the coloured secretions of the gold and silver ferns, Gymnogramme chrysophylla, G. sulphurea, G. calomelanos. By dipping the fronds for an instant into neutral purified ether, he readily dissolved these secretions, and obtained them in a pure state by distilling off the ether. From the yellow secretion of G. chrysophylla and G. sulphurea he isolated two substances—a chrome-red crystallising aromatic body, which melts at 159°, C,,H,,0,;, and a neutral wax, which melts at 63°. From G. calomelanos he obtained a colourless, crystallising body, with a camphor-like smell, and melting at 141°, C,,H,,0,. They are not fatty substances, nor are they resinous. Whether the wax comes from the glands or from the epidermis, he has been as yet unable to determine. Tracheids in Node of Equisetum.{—M. G. Sykes has experimented upon the tracheids found in the nodal region of Hguisetum maximum, and shows that their function is the conduction of water from the canals of the internode on one side of the node to those of the internode on the other side. This was demonstrated by forcing a solution of eosin * SB. k. Akad, Wiss. Math. Nat. Wien, exiii. (1904) pp. 549-78 (1 pl.). t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 264-72. } New Phytologist, v. (1906) pp. 129-32 (figs.). 566 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO along a stem under atmospheric pressure, and then cutting sections to ascertain the route followed by the solution. Germination of Ophioglossum.*— D. H. Campbell describes the germination of the spores of Ophioglossum moluccanum, O. intermedium, and O. pendulum, and the earliest stages of growth up to the formation of four, three, and thirteen cells respectively. Structure of Stolons of Nephrolepis.tj—A. Sperlich describes the function and behaviour of the stolons of Nephrolepis cordifolia, and states that the secondary stolons are positively geotropic and throw out roots, but may be converted into aerial stolons by decapitation of the primary stolons. These secondary stolons he would style ‘* wurzeltrager ” (root-bearers). The first rudiments of the stolons are formed at the growing point, and many of them remain dormant. The roots also are first traceable at the growing point in the initial layer, whence are derived the parenchyma and endodermis. The structure of the aerial and rooting stolons is similar, except that in the former the cortical tissue retains its living condition to a distance of as much as some decimetres behind the apex, being chlorophyllose, and provided with intercellular spaces connected with stomata. The tough, elastic cha- racter of the stolons is due to a sub-epidermal sheath of 6-7 layers of lignified cells. The rooting and aerial stolons form a canal-system, protected from crushing and from desiccation. The author compares them with the rhizophores of Selaginella. Past History of Ferns.{—E. A. N. Arber discusses the past history of the ferns in the light of recent discoveries, and sums up his main results in a diagrammatic figure, which shows the geological periods during which the Cycadophyta, Cycadofilices, Primofilices, Lepto- sporangiate, Hydropteridez, and Eusporangiate, respectively attained to the position of dominant factors. The name Primofilices is suggested for the ancient stock from which the Mesozoic Leptosporangiate were derived. Recent research tends to show that the fern-like fructifications, formerly regarded as belonging to the Eusporangiate ferns of Paleozoic times, are the male organs of Pteridosperms. Hence, it can no longer be held that the Eusporangiatee were a dominant group in Paleozoic times, nor that they constitute a more primitive type than the Lepto- sporangiate. The Hydropteridee are but doubtfully represented in Mesozoic times, and hence are the youngest group considered in the paper. Parichnos.§—T. G. Hill discusses the presence of a parichnos in recent plants. Having briefly summed up the results obtained in Lepidodendron and other fossil plants by previous workers, he suggests that the seeming discrepancies that are obvious in the various accounts and figures may be explained simply by the view that the parichnos has been preserved in different stages of development, varying froma definite * Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906) p. 321. + Flora, xcvi. (1906) pp. 451-473 (2 pls.). ¢ Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906) pp. 215-32 (fig.). § Tom. cit., pp. 267-73 (2 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 567 parenchymatous strand to the final stage of disintegration—an open canal. Starting from the middle cortex it bifurcates, forming two branches situated on each side of the foliar bundle. He then describes. the investigations made by himself and others upon the presence of a. parichnos in recent plants—Jsvetes and Lycopodium—and shows its identity with that of fossil plants. The parichnos of recent plants is primarily concerned in the production of mucilage. In fossil plants it has been held to represent a glandular tissue, a gum-canal, a transpira- tory or respiratory organ, comparable to the function of lenticels. It is possible that its function was at first secretory, and subsequently, after the leaves had been shed, it became respiratory. Lepidodendron obovatum.*—D. H. Scott describes a specimen of this fossil plant obtained from the Lower Coal-measures at Towneley, which presents the rare feature of permitting its anatomical structure to be investigated, while by its external characters it allows its specific identification to be established. But for its superficial characters, it would, from its anatomy, have been placed in Lepidophloios, its stem structure being in close agreement with that of Z. fuliginosus. Jdenti- fications of Lepidophloios, based solely on anatomical features, are, therefore, open to suspicion. Megaspore of Lepidostrobus.t—R. Scott describes and figures instances of a curious structure, forty examples of which she observed when revising 1500 slides of fossil plants from the Coal-measures. It has the appearance of a crumpled megaspore, with an appendage attached to it. Similar structures were found in 25 out of 36 slides of Lepido- strobus foliaceus ; and finally, a good instance of it in Williamson’s type cone of that species. That cone had previously been regarded as purely microsporangiate ; it is now shown to be heterosporous. CHRISTENSEN, C.—Index Filicum. (Index of Ferns.) (Continuation of the alphabetical enumeration of species and synonyms. from Polystichwm aculeatum to Trichomanes gibberosum.] Copenhagen : Hagerup, 1906, fasc. x., pp. 577-640. Bryophyta. (By A. GEppP.) Classification of Mosses.{t—V. F. Brotherus, in parts 224 and 226 of Engler and Prantl’s “ Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien,” treats of the moss-families Spiridentaceee, Lepyrodontaceze, Pleurophascaceze (represented by a single genus containing only one species, which is confined to the western mountains of Tasmania), and Neckeracee. The latter family is sub-divided into ten sections, rich in genera and species. The narrative breaks off in Lembophyllacez. New British Mosses.s—L. J. Cocks gives an account of a moss found by him on Ben Lawers on July 15, 1902, and referred by him to * Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906) pp. 317-19. + New Phytologist, v. (1906) pp. 116-19 (plate and figs.). { Leipzig: Engelmann, 1906, pp. 769-864 (58 figs.). § Journ. of Bot., xlv. (1906) p. 242, 568 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Mnium medium, on account of its synoicous inflorescence. In this con- clusion he is confirmed by Dr. Hagen, who points out that the specimen possesses all the more stable characters of the species—structure of stem and nerve, form of leaf, and structure of leaf-teeth, which, near the basal margin, consist sometimes of one, sometimes of two cells; and shows how the Ben Lawers specimen differs from other species—e.g. M. affine and M. cuspidatum. The species is an addition to the British flora, and, curiously enough, Hypnum turgescens, another addition to our flora, was gathered on the same day upon Ben Lawers. New Plagiochila from Ireland.*—F’. Stephani describes and figures two new species of Plagiochila from Killarney—P. Owenw and P. kil- larniensis. The latter was published and figured last year by W. H. Pearson,t but Stephani has discovered further details which require explanation. He also publishes new names for three exotic species of Plagiochila described in his monograph of the genus in his Species Hepaticarum. Worcestershire Mosses.{—J. B. Duncan enumerates seven mosses which are additions to J. E. Bagnall’s Worcestershire moss list published in 1903. One of these is Amblystegium compactum, which in Britain had previously been recorded only from damp calcareous stations in Sutherlandshire and Derbyshire ; it has now been demonstrated to occur on dry, slightly calcareous, triassic sandstone in Worcestershire. An- other unexpected record is Andreea Rothii on similar sandstone only 200 feet above sea-level. New stations for five previously recorded species are added. Yorkshire Bryophyta.s—W. Ingham givesa list of 44 hepatics grow- ing around York within a circle of 20 miles radius. At a somewhat greater distance are found Petalophyllum Ralfsu, Pallavicima Flo- towiana, Scapania subalpina, S. rosacea, and Jubula Hutchinsie. Of the Sphagnacee he gives lists with field-notes for Skipwith and Strensall Commons, and other localities. For the mosses he describes the habitats in which several species and varieties are found on Skipwith Common and Jackdaw Crag Quarry, and adds a list of 112 of the less common species occurring within 20 miles of York. North American Bryophyta.||—C. C. Haynes gives a list of 48 hepatics collected near Little Moose Lake, in the Adirondacks; and A.M. Smith a list of 103 mosses from the same district. B.D. Gilbert] publishes notes on two anomalies: first, Lewcobryum glaucum growing in spheroidal cushions entirely unattached, as it often does in this country ; and, secondly, a fine growth of Sphagnum acutifolium var. quinguefarium on a steeply-inclined bare rock kept moist by a slight trickle of water. A. J. Grout ** issues Part III. of his ‘“ Mosses with Hand-lens and Microscope,” giving a richly illustrated and rather * Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 213-14. + Journ. of Bot., xliii. (1905) p. 281. t Op. cit., xliv. (1906) pp. 243-4. § Handbook to Brit. Assoc., York, 1906, pp. 300-14. || Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 62-6. q Tom. cit., p. 72. ** Brooklyn, New York, pp. 167-246 (20 pls. and 55 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 569 simplified account of the moss-families comprised between Tortulacez and Leskeacez. Hepatics of Middle Europe.*-— K. Miiller continues his general treatment of the hepatics in Rabenhorst’s ‘‘ Kryptogamenflora von Deutschland,” finishing the account of the reproductive organs, and passing on to the sporophyte, which he discusses under the heads: development of the embryo; stalk ; capsule ; spores and their develop- ment; elaters. Vegetative reproduction includes sections in which gemme, adventive shoots, and tubers are treated. The biology of the hepatics comprises questions of symbiosis and adaptability to dry or wet environment. Finally, hints to the collector are supplied. Mosses of Baden.t —T. Herzog brings to an end his bryogeo- graphical sketch of the moss-flora of Baden. He discusses the cha- racters of the moss-floras of the Franconian Jura, the Bodensee region, the Rhine-plain, the Kaiserstuhl, the Odenwald, and concludes with a long table exhibiting the horizontal distribution of the species in Baden, which for the purpose is here divided into eleven districts. Mosses of Zurich.t —P. Culmann publishes a supplement to the catalogue of mosses issued a few years ago by himself and J. Weber. It consists of a list of hepatics of the canton of Zurich, including parts of the valleys of the Rhine, the Toss, the Glatt, the Limmat, the Sihl, and the Reuss. Ninety-seven species are recorded. Moss-flora of Tyrol.S—A. Holler published as the last paper before his death, a list of the mosses from Tyroland the neighbouring Bavarian Alps, represented in his large herbarium. Records from Eastern Allgiu are also included. The list includes important finds made by Sendtner, Molendo, Progel, Berggren, Sauter, Bamberger, Arnold, and others. The height above sea-level is always indicated. Hypnum pygmeum Molendo is the true H. condensatum Schimper according to the original plant of Sendtner in Herb. Schimper; forms of H. revolutum and of H. Vaucheri were distributed by Molendo under that name. H. conden- satum Schimp. belongs to H. revolutum Mitten, not to H. Bambergeri Schimp. New Austrian Mosses.||—V. Schiffner and J. Baumgartner describe two new mosses from the Wachau, or valley of the Danube, in Lower Austria, to wit, Cinclidotus danubicus and Didymodon austriacus. The latter is most closely related to D. cordatus and D. rigidulus. Cineli- dotus danubicus is an aquatic species closely related to C. riparius, with which it often grows intermixed. The authors compare the characters of the two species in parallel columns. Both the new species are widely distributed in the district, and, according to the authors, are distinct and good species. * Leipzig: Kummer, 1906, vi. lief 2, pp. 65-128. + Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 551-70, 621-48. ~ Tom. cit., pp. 571-81. § Ber. Nat.-Med. Ver. Innsbruck, xxix. (1906) pp. 71-108. See also Hedwigia, xly. (1906) Beibl., p. 135. || Oesterr. Bot. Zeit., lvi. (1906) pp. 154-8. Oct. 17th, 1906 2p 570 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Hepatice of Dalmatia.*—V. Schiffner publishes a complete list of all the species of Hepatice hitherto known from Dalmatia. The total number of species is thirty-eight, among which are two species new to science, Riccia Leviert and Cephalozia Baumgartneri, which are both described at some length. The former is most closely allied to Riccva macrocarpa, from which it is distinguished by the presence of marginal cilia, by a difference in the spores, etc. Cephalozia Baumgartner: is a calcareous species, and most nearly allied to C. Bryhni Schiffner, but is a coarser plant, and differs in many details as well as in the manner of growth and in habit. In appearance (. Baumgartner resembles C’. stellulifera, but differs also from that species in several points. The small number of species recorded from Dalmatia is partly the result of the small area of woodland and damp ground in that country, and partly arises from the absence of collectors. The author records eighteen species new to Dalmatia. Bohemian Mosses.t—F. Matouschek publishes the first part of his revision of the moss herbarium in the Landes Museum at Prague. All the plants, even the oldest, are recorded. The synonymy in this paper. is of great value, for the collection includes authentic species and varie- ties of P. M. Opiz. Many critical species are here re-described, and of others the distribution in Bohemia is given more accurately. Many species must be removed from the list of Bohemian plants. A new variety, Rhacomitrium heterostichum Hedw. var. epilosum Mat. is described. Hepaticee are added at the end of the paper. The second part of the work will appear in 1907. Hungarian Mosses.{—lI. Gyérffy, continuing his moss-flora of the Hohe Tatra, publishes some additions to our knowledge of Plagwobryum Zierii and P. demissum. He shows how the water-conducting tissue is not confined to the costa, but includes other parts of the leaf; the deuter-cells in the costa are sometimes three instead of two; the chloroplasts in the leaf-cells are few, the leaves and stems being too. crowded to permit of free assimilation ; on the other hand, the neck of the capsule is long, well provided with stomata, and eminently fitted for its assimilative work; the stomata are sunk in depressions, though hitherto described as on a level with the neighbouring cells, which is commonly the case among mosses. The distribution of the species is rare in Hungary,-except in the Hohe Tatra. As to the other species, P. demissum, the leaves are ovate-lanceolate and long-pointed; the curvature of the thick yellow seta and asymmetric capsule bend the tiny operculum down till it is hidden in the tuft, and the neck of the capsule is uppermost and exposed to the light, and acts as an assimilative organ. The stomata lie on a level with the surrounding cells, and are abundant on the neck. The spores persist in tetrads. The author has found the species in Hungary, but only in the Hohe Tatra, and says it is probably overlooked because of its small size. I. Gyorffy § publishes notes upon the following new or rare Hungarian * Verh. k.k. Zool. Bot. Gesell. Wien, lvi. (1906) pp. 263-80 (1 pl.). © + Mitt. Ver. Natur. Reichenberg, xxxvii. (1906) pp. 1-22. See also Hedwigia, xly. (1906) Beibl., p. 135. } Magyar Bot. Lapok, v. (1906) pp. 210-18 (2 pls.). § Tom. cit., pp. 228-31. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 571 mosses : — Polytrichum piliferum var. Hoppei Rabenh.; Catharinea Hausknechtii Broth., with fruit ; Neckera Besseri var. rotundifolia Mol. ; Anomodon attenuatus f. integer, new form with fruit; Fissidens decipiens De Not. ; Hylocomium splendens Br. et Sch., with fruit. Hepatics of Naples.*—E. Migliorato has compiled a_ bibliography of the hepatic flora of the Abruzzi and Naples districts, giving the results in three lists: 1. Alphabetical list of authors, with their works. 2. Chronological table of the authors. 3. List of the localities, with the names of the authors who studied their hepatic flora. Migliorato has prepared a manuscript alphabetical catalogue of the species contained in these works, and puts it at the disposition of hepaticologists interested in the districts. Bryology of Sorrento.;—G. Negri gives an account of the mosses of this district, founded on collections made by himself in December and April of 1903 and 1904. He delimits the peninsula topographi- cally, and points out that it includes three groups of mountains, the height and extent of which he describes. The geological formations and the climate are also considered, and the effect of these on the moss-flora. Certain species are enumerated which are found in the highest zones of the mountain regions, and also occur lower down ; and a list is also given of the Mediterranean species of the district. After deducting these two short lists and the cosmopolitan species from the total number of species recorded, it is found that the sub-mountainous region provides a good third of the remainder. As regards the influence of the calcareous stratum on the moss-flora, it is found that of 116 species and varieties 21 are exclusively calcareous, 26 prefer it, 29 are indifferent, 19 tolerate it, and 20 are calcifugous. In the general enu- meration of the species the attitude of each as regards this point is stated. A new variety, augustifolium, is described for Mnium albicans Simp. Sicilian Bryophytes.t{—G. Zodda begins a series of contributions to the bryology of Sicily and the adjacent islands. The bryophytes of Messina are excluded, as they have been already treated of in another series of papers by the author, the first of which appeared last year. The material on which the present short list is founded was collected at Riesi, a town in the province of Caltanissetta, in Southern Sicily ; at Linosa in 1884, by Dr. Solla; and at the same place, in April of last year—on a volcanic rock entirely covered by lichens—by the author himself. The two former collections were found by Dr. Zodda in the herbarium of the Royal Botanic Institute at Messina, and all the species, numbering 15, given in the present paper constitute the first records for their respective localities. Three hepatics were also found in Dr. Solla’s collection. They were recorded as growing intermixed with Tortula estiva on voleanic tufa of Monte Bandiera. Brazilian Hepatics.$—P. Dusén, in his account of the flora of the Serra do Itatiaya in Brazil, gives two lists of hepatics—one consisting of * Annali di Botanica, iv. (1906) pp. 294-300. + Atti Rend. Accad. Sci. Torino, xli. (1906) pp. 559-74. ¢ Malpighia, xx. (1906) pp. 90-4. § Arch. Mus. Nacion. Rio de Janeiro, xiii. (1903) pp, 109-19. a 4 572 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 42 species, five of which are new, from the upper parts of the mountain ; the other consisting of 19 species, one of which is new, from the lower slopes. They were collected by him during his expedition, undertaken on behalf of the National Museum at Rio de Janeiro, in May to July 1902 ; the specimens were determined by Stephani. Bryophytes of Norfolk Island.*—J. H. Maiden, in his account of the Flora of Norfolk Island, publishes a list of eight mosses and ten hepatics that have been recorded as occurring in the island. Japanese Muscinee.t—F. Stephani publishes lists of hepatics from the provinces of Kai and Tosa, amounting in all to 76 species. F. Stephani and V. F. Brotherus} give lists of 17 hepatics and 41 mosses respectively, all collected on Mount Koya. G. Kono§ gives an account of two new mosses, Grimmia Konoi and Brachythecium Konot, both named by Brotherus. The text is in Japanese. J. Matsumura publishes an index of Japanese plants with the species arranged alpha- betically under their classes. The habitat, Japanese name, citations of literature, synonyms, and a bibliography are added. The hepatics number 240 species, and the mosses 725. New Species of Sphagnum.—C. Warnstorf describes seven new species and a new variety of Sphagnum, all collected by Mosén in Brazil, and preserved in the Stockholm Botanical Museum. Their main cha- racters are figured in the text, and the species belong to the groups acutifolium, subsecundum, and cymbifolium. European Species of Philonotis.**—L. Loeske publishes a critical revision of the European species of Philonotis. In a paper in the same journal a few months previously, he showed by a few examples how in- adequately some forms of this difficult genus have been treated in the past. Since then he has examined numerous specimens sent to him by leading bryologists who have pressed for his opinion. He has accord- ingly put together his principal results in the present paper, his projected monograph being postponed for the present. He recognises twelve European species as valid :—P. rigida Brid., P. marchica Brid., P. media Bryhn, P. Arnellii Husnot, P. Ryani Philib., P. caespitosa Wils., P. Osterwaldii Warnst., P. tomentella Molend. (including P. borealis Limpr. and P. anceps Bryhn), P. fontana Brid., P. seriata Lindb., P. calearea Schimp., P. Schliephackei Roell. Each of these is critically discussed, and its synonymy is appended. Riccardia major.t}—V. Schiffner publishes some observations on Riccardia major 8. O. Lindb., being a vindication of his views on the great value of characters: founded on the structure of the sporogonial wall, characters upon which the late Abbé Boulay had cast some doubt. * Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xxviii. (1903-4) pp. 740-1. + Tokyo Bot. Mag., xx. (1906) pp. 52-4. } Tom. cit., pp. 64-65, § Tom. cit., pp. 79-82. || Index Plantarum Japonicarum. Tokio: Maruzen, 1904, i. pp. 222-83, 368-82, 4 Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xx. (1906) pp. 128-39 (figs.). ** Hodwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 195-212. +t Oesterr. Bot. Zeit., lvi. (1906) pp. 169-74. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 5To Schiffner had demonstrated the presence of certain semicircular thicken- ings on the inner tangential walls of the innermost cell-layer of the sporogonial wall in R. major, and their entire absence in R. sinuata. Boulay attributed the absence of these thickenings in the material of . sinuata examined by Schiffner to the damp nature of its habitat. But Schiffner points out that A. sinwata is always a semi-submerged plant, and maintains that the sporogonial structure of any species of hepatic is, in his wide experience, never altered in any essential point by a mere change of habitat. And having carefully repeated all the work, he finds that his results were absolutely correct. After indicating further distinctions between the two species, he gives the geographical distribu- tion of A. major as represented in his own herbarium, a distribution now extended from Scandinavia to France, Bulgaria, and California. Lophocolea.*—F. Stephani continues his systematic exposition of descriptions of hepatics of the whole world, being now chiefly concerned with the genus Lophocolea, and in particular with those species which occur in the Southern Hemisphere. These amount to 60; and 10 of them are described as new; but all of the 60 are redescribed on a uniform plan. Mounting Mosses.t—J. F. Collins gives some hints about mounting mosses for the herbarium. He has abandoned the method of attaching the envelopes or pockets containing the specimen to the sheet with pins, and uses instead gummed wafers—half inch disks of paper gummed on both sides. These are obtainable of all stationers in the United States, and are cheaper even than pins. A single wafer is enough to hold most envelopes firmly; and the gum sticks at once. If necessary the envelope can be easily detached at any time by one sweep of a paper- knife, the wafer splitting readily. If the specimens are to be mounted exposed on the sheet, the method of procedure is as follows : commercial liquid glue, diluted with about an equal quantity of vinegar or water, is brushed in a thin layer over a sheet of glass ; upon this the specimen is rapidly pressed and transferred to its position on the herbarium sheet. Finally, those specimens which, being small, have been mounted with a lump of the soil they grew on, and which give trouble through the crumbling away of the soil, are easily hardened by the application of a few drops of diluted white shellac—1 part of shellac to 3 parts of 95 per cent. alcohol. Monecism of Funaria.t—L. A. Boodle, finding the inflorescence of this species to be described as moncecious in bryological works, and as dicecious in botanical text-books, has closely examined the case. His results are that the plants are as a rule monecious. The main axis is terminated by a male flower. The female stem is a branch of the male, is situated upon it anywhere from high up to low down, and usually has a tuberous rooting base, which, when detached, gives it the appearance of an independent plant. The female branch may be borne on a male * Bull. Herb. Boissier, vi. (1906) pp. 535-50, 649-64. + Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 60-2. ¢ Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906) pp. 293-9 (figs.). 574 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO axis which is itself a branch of a male stem. If dicecism occurs at all in the species it is very rare. Multiple Chromatophores in Anthoceros.* — D. H. Campbell collected in Java an Anthoceros which showed frequent instances of double chromatophores in the superficial cells and multiple chromato- phores in all the inner cells. The plant has spiral elaters, and no stomata in the sporophyte, thus approaching more to Dendroceros ; but the thallus is that of a typical Anthoceros. The solitary antheridium and the presence of chlorophyll in the ripe spores recall Dendroceros. Perhaps an intermediate genus will have to be founded. Spores of Riccia glauca.t—R. Beer has studied the development of the spores of Riccia glauca in the light of modern methods, and adds to the facts established by the researches of Leitgeb, Strasburger, Garber, and Lewis, upon other species of the genus. He describes the delicate primary membrane that separates off the spore-mother-cells from one another, and its secondary thickening layers, the mucilaginous degenera- tion which the latter partly undergo when the spore-mother-cells round themselves off and separate ; the absence of food material between the separated mother-cells; the structure of the resting nucleus of the mother-cell, its nucleolus, chromosomes, and division phenomena ; the primary membrane of the daughter-cells and its subsequent thickening, its cuticularisation and lamination; the callose plugs of mucilage at the equatorial rim; the nature of the endospore ; the active part played by the protoplast in forming its membranes ; the source of the material used for wall-formation ; the doubtful origin of the mucilage among the spore-tetrads. Gemme of Amblystegium.{—C. Warnstorf describes the vegetative reproduction of Amblystegium densum Milde, the history and relation- ships of which he briefly sketches. Juratzka called attention to the pro-embryo threads on the leaf-points, and rhizoids on the back of the costa. Limpricht regarded the produced leaf-apex as being only a rhizoid. Warnstorf now points out that the threads on the back of the costa are true rhizoids having oblique transverse walls, while those arising from the leaf-apex are true protonema with transverse walls placed at right angles. The rhizoids are much branched, pale, yellowish, and warty ; they occur in clusters on creeping stems of a fragile nature. The real reproductive organs, the true protonema threads are simple, filamentous, yellow, smooth, subclavate, about 16 » thick, and arise from initial-cells on the back of the leaf point, and are easily detached. Monstrous Peristomes.$—I. Hagen writes an historical note on “‘acrosyncarpie renversée” in mosses. In the previous number of “ Hedwigia,” Ménkemeyer had described and figured for Dicranella varia and Bryum saxonicum some instances of abnormal supplementary peristomes intercalated between the operculum and the normal peri- stome, in the belief that such an occurrence had not been recorded * Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906) p. 322. + Tom. cit., pp. 275-91 (2 pls.) t Allg. Bot. Zeitschr., xii. (1906) pp. 106-8. § Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 239-40. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 575 before. Hagen admits the novelty of the instance in which two extra peristomes are intercalated upside down between the normal peristome and the operculum, but points out that simpler cases of this abnormality have been described for other species—e.g. Camptothecium lutescens, Homalothecium sericeum, and Mnium medium——by Giimbel, Schimper, and Lindberg. Thallophyta. Algee. (By Mrs. E. 8. Gepp.) North American Alge.*—F. 8. Collins publishes diagnoses of the new species, etc., issued in the “‘ Phycotheca Boreali-Americana,” the first fascicle of which was issued by Collins, Holden and Setchell in February 1895. The author has distributed in that work a number of neW species, varieties and forms, and in some cases the diagnosis was printed in the label, while in others a reference was given to the publication elsewhere. To prevent possible future complications, the de- scriptions in question are reprinted in the present paper, and if the rule for higher plants should be made to hold good for Cryptogams, this article would be the original reference. Hight new species are described, one new combination, and 26 varieties and forms. Marine Flora of Jan Mayen.j—F. R. Kjellman gives an account of the marine alge of this island, founded on previous collections and on some plants brought home by Dr. Gran in 1900, and determined by the present author. This collection consists of 26 species, of which seven are new to science, though the author thinks some of them may have been included in other lists under another name. Critical notes are nade on most of the species recorded, and following on the systematic treatment is a consideration of the marine. flora of the island from various points of view. The author holds that Jan Mayen must be regarded as a separate province in the Arctic region of geographical distribution, having a certain relationship to Spitzbergen and Greenland. As regards the ecological conditions, nothing is known, but the flora appears to be entirely from deep water. Nothing is recorded of a littoral vegetation. Hauck mentions the occurrence of Mucus evanescens at a depth of 20-30 metres, and the same depth is given for Ascophyllum nodosum. The depth at which vegetation begins is said to be 5 metres. Very little is known about the formations, though, from remarks made by Hauck, it may be inferred that species of Laminaria and of Fucus and Ascophyllum nodosum are common. The author believes that the apparent poverty of the flora of Jan Mayen is due merely to the slight knowledge we have of it. Algeze appear to be drifted to the island by currents from the east. Marine Algex of the Mediterranean.{—F. Ardissone completes his review of the alge of the Mediterranean, the first part of which was published in 1901, and contained an account of the Rhodophyceze. The * Rhodora, viii. (1906) pp. 104--113. + Arkiv f. Botanik, v. (1906) No. 14, pp. 1-30 (3 pls.). t Rend. R. Ist. Lombardo Sci. Lett., xxxix. (1906) pp. 156876. 576 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO present part contains the treatment of the Pheeophycee, Chlorophyceex, and Cyanophycee. Interesting observations are made on Haplospora Vidovichit Born., Ectocarpus confervoides Le Jol., Giffordia Lebelii Batt., and Myrionema punctiforme Harv. V. Spinelli * has made a study of the marine algee of Sicily, from which island he records 160 species. Special observations are made on the following : Schizymenia Dubyi J. Ag., Halymenia ligulata J. Ag., Cally- menia demissa J. Ag., Nitophyllum uncinatum J. Ag., and Codium elongatum Ag. Marine Alge from New South Wales.t—A. and E. 8. Gepp pub- lish notes on a Small collection of marine alge made by Mr. A. H. 8. Lucas mainly in the neighbourhood of Sydney. The novelties described are: Dictyota prolificans, Gracilaria Lucasui, new varieties of Rhabdonia robusta and Grateloupia filicina, and a new form of Pterocladia lucida. The cystocarps of Kallymenia tasmanica and Grateloupia australis have been found for the first time in this collection, and the latter species is also here described, having been till now merely a nomen nudum. The characters of the fertile frond of Dictyota nigricans are figured to show the difference between this species and D. prolificans ; no figure of the former species had hitherto been published. Gracilaria Textorit is here recorded from New South Wales, being the only locality in which it has been found outside Japan. Mr. Lucas’s notes on each species are added to the critical notes of the authors. Norfolk Island Algze.{—A. H. 8S. Lucas gives a list of ten marine alow in J. H. Maiden’s account of the flora of Norfolk Island. They were collected by Robinson, Maiden, and Boorman in November 1902. No alge, save Plocamium hamatum, appear to have been previously recorded for the island. Japanese Algw.§—J. Matsumura publishes an index of Japanese plants, with the species arranged alphabetically under their classes and sub-classes. The habitat, Japanese name, citations of literature, synonyms, and a bibliography are added. The alge attain a total of 1357 species, including 21 Schizophycee, 557 Diatomacee, 134 Con- jugate, 115 Chlorophyces, 17 Characew, 174 Pheophycex, and 339 Rhodophycev. Yorkshire Fresh-water Alge.||—W. Ingham gives a list of twenty- one of the more interesting fresh-water alge recorded for the York district. Most of these come from Pilmoor, where so many as 130 species of Desmids have been found. Fresh-water Alge from Finland.{—A. J. Silfvenius publishes some notes on the distribution of Chlorophyceze and Cyanophycez in Finland. He enumerates 111 species, of which 92 are Chlorophycee * Atti Accad. Sci. Nat. Catania, xviii. (1905) 55 pp. + Journ. of Bot., xliv. (1906) pp. 249-61 (1 pl.). ¢ Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xxviii. (1903-4) pp. 745-6. § Index Plantarum Japonicarum. Tokio: Maruzen, 1904, i. pp. 3-127, 364-5. || Handbook to York, Brit. Assoc., 1906, pp. 294-5. { Meddel. Soc. Fauna Flora Fennica, xxix. (1904) pp. 10-22. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 577 and 19 Cyanophyceze. Seven species are new records for Finland. A new form, f. major of Spirogyra longata Kuetz. is described and figured. New England Desmids.*—J. A. Cushman gives a list of the species of Desmids belonging to the sub-family Saccoderme, found in New England. Twenty-seven species and varieties are recorded, of which one species, Mesotenium minimum, and three varieties of other species, are new. This list doubles the number previously known from that region, but the author anticipates a further increase of records, when the White Mountain region shall have been carefully worked. At the end of the paper a key is given to the New England genera and species, which, though based upon the species from that district actually seen by Ee author, will, nevertheless, largely apply to the North-eastern United tates. Morphology and Biology of Chara delicatula f. bulbillifera A. Braun.t—O. Kuezewski publishes a dissertation on this subject under the following headings: 1. Structure and development of the shoots and leaves of Chara delicatula Ag. and C. fragilis Desvaux. 2. Investigations into the vegetative reproduction of C. delicatula f. bul- billifera. The first part of his paper is divided into (1) external morphology ; (2) development of the main stem ; (3) lateral organs of the main stem, in which the author deals with the leaves, cortication, and stipules, axillary and accessory shoots. The second part of the paper consists of a treatment of the bulbils of the stem and root, the development of which is described and figured. Finally, the biological signification of these bulbils is considered, and experiments in connec- tion with their growth are described. North American Charee.t—C. B. Robinson gives an account of the Chareze of North America. He begins by describing the group as a whole, their habit, method of reproduction, development from the ger- minating oospore, the cortex of stem and leaves, etc. The author points out that the great majority of plants, when thoroughly understood, fall with perfect distinctness into a few well-marked groups, although within these groups the differences may be very considerable and of the most varied nature. The grouping defies all laws of geographical distribution. The forms of many species are so well marked and con- stant that some authors have been disposed to enlarge the number of species. The aim in the present work has been to take a middle course, as a wide view of species seems also untenable. A short history of past work on Characeze is given, and the author points out the two views as to their affinity which have been followed respectively by Engler and Prantl, and Strasburger : the former regard them as the highest order of Chlorophycee, related to Coleochete, while the latter make them into a separate sub-kingdom. A synopsis of the genera of Characez is followed by a key to the 50 North American species of Chara, the only genus represented in that country. Each species is described in full, and 15 are new. References are given to existing illustrations, and * Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxiii. (1906) pp. 343-51. + Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xx. {1906) pp. 25-75 (2 pls., figs. in text). ¢t Bull. New York Bot. Garden, iv. (1906) pp. 204-308. 578 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO exsiccate, and the distribution of each species throughout the world is noted. A bibliography of Characeze and an index conclude the work. Characee from the Cape Peninsula.*—H. and J. Groves describe a small collection of eight numbers, representing seven species, made by Major Wolley-Dod on Table Mountain and the adjacent hills. Among them are two of our common European species, Chara vulgaris and (. fragilis, the rest being apparently endemic to Africa, and one being a new species, C. Tanyglochis. The plants were very scarce. Since the earlier half of the last century little has been done in collecting Characez in Cape Colony and Natal. The most interesting feature of the Chara flora of Cape Colony is the presence of species intermediate between the two sections Diplostichze and Triplostiche, which in other parts of the world are fairly distinct. Polysiphonia violacea.t—S. Yamanouchi gives a brief preliminary sketch of his cytological studies on Polysiphonia violacea Grev., dividing his notes into methods, germination of the carpospore and _tetraspore, spermatogenesis, oogenesis and fertilisation, tetraspore formation, and abnormalities. He finds that the germinating carpospore contains forty chromosomes, and the tetrasporic plant the same number ; from which he infers that the tetrasporic plants come from carpospores. The ger- minating tetraspore contains twenty chromosomes, and the sexual plants the same number, from which he infers that the sexual plants come from tetraspores. The nuclei of the gametes contain each twenty chromo- somes. The fusion nucleus has forty chromosomes, and gives rise to a series of nuclei, some of which enter the carpospores. Tetraspore forma- tion terminates the sporophytic phase with typical reduction phenomena, so that the tetraspores are prepared to develop the gametophytic generation. There is thus an alteration of sexual plants (gametophytes) with tetrasporic plants (sporophytes) in the life-history of Polysiphonia, and the cystocarp forms a part of the sporophytic phase. Spermatozoids of Fucacee.t—G. Retzius, who has been occupied for some time on a study of the spermatozoids of the Evertebrata, has now turned his attention to those of the Fucaceze. He finds that, on the whole, the spermatozoids of the lower animals and of Fucaceze show a remarkable similarity, but he is unable to say whether this extends also to other groups of alge. He finds in both the Fucacee and in many of the worms, molluscs, etc., a rosette of 4-5 spherules, which constitute the body described by Guignard and others as the nucleus. It does not lie within the body of the spermatozoid, but is outside it, and belongs to the protoplasmic mantle. In front of the rosette of spherules is the eye-spot, or chromatophore, which also lies outside the _ pear-shaped body of the spermatozoid. The author then describes the two cilia, of which the posterior one is always longer than, sometimes twice as long as, the anterior one. The cilia are stout encugh to be examined in detail, and the author finds that both suddenly taper to a fine point at their free end. This is also found among the lower * Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxvii. (1906) pp. 285-7 (1 pl.). + Bot. Gazette, xli. (1906) pp. 425-33. {t Arkiv f. Botanik, v. (1906) No. 10, pp. 1-9 (figs. in text). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 579 animals. The author is inclined to think that the cilia are connected at their point of attachment, but he has not been able to decide this question definitely. Colouring Matter of Pheophycee.*—M. Tswett continues his researches on this subject, and in the present paper treats of the so-called phycopheein and of the true colouring matter of the chromatophores of Pheeophyceee. He finds that living ‘Phwophycez contain no pigment soluble in water—i.e. “ phycopheein.” Their chromatophores are tinged with chlorophyllin a and y, fucoxanthin, carotin, and fucoxanthophyll, the combination of which forms the natural brown-green colour of these alge. The green discoloration often met with arises from the dissolution or destruction of the fucoxanthin, which is reddish-brown in a fixed condition, but yellow in solution. Actinococcus.t—F. Heydrich has succeeded in finding the sexual organs of Actinococcus pelteformis Schmitz, and gives an account of them in the present paper. The material was collected in Marseilles, and contained three male and two female plants. Tetrasporangia, antheridia, and procarpia are described in detail and figured. The carpogonia are seated inside the thallus cushion at varying depths, and are apparently somewhat difficult to recognise. According to the author the peculiar structure of the fruit entitles Actinococcus to a systematic position in a group of its own, Actinococcales, between Nemalionales and Gigartinales. The distinguishing character of the group is that the carpogonium takes no part in the formation of spores, and although an auxiliary cell is present, the two extra intermediate cells are wanting. A resemblance is pointed out between the procarpia of Actinococcus and Eleutherospora, inasmuch as in both genera the hypogynous cell bears the carpogonium with the trichogyne, and in both that same cell becomes the auxiliary cell, and bears the spores directly. The author holds that single cushions are the result of spore germination, while those which form a group are propagated by rhizoids creeping in the host-plant. Fibres in Cladophora.t—F. Brand has established without doubt the presence of fibres and fibrils in the membrane of three species of Cladophora, C. hospita Kiitz, C. intertexta Collins and C. Montagnei Kiitz. var. waianeana. Till now, the existence of fibres in the cell- membrane of Cladophora has been a disputed point, but the present paper settles the question. The fibres and fibrils do not cross each other like the threads of linen, but pass near and over each other. For the present the author can give no complete treatment of the subject, but he will do so in a later work. Meanwhile, he gives a detailed account of his successful method of reviving dried Cladophora material. Roughly, it is as follows: soak for at least twenty-four hours in acidified distilled water, then treat with Schultze’s macerating solution, slightly warming it the while, then for a few minutes with very strong chromic acid solution ; wash, and stain with a weak solution of ruthenium red. * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 235-44. + Tom. cit., pp. 71-7 (1 pl.). + Tom. cit., pp. 64-70 (1 pl.). 580 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Some Endophytic Algz.*—A. D. Cotton records some observations on the life-history of Endoderma viride Lagerheim, and deals also with two species of Streblonema, S. intestinum, and S. Zanardinii. The plants of Endoderma studied by the author were endophytic in Nito- phyllum Hille, and in case future authors should regard this Hndoderma plant as distinct from the typical endophytic form in Derbesia, it is here named f. Nitophylli. The vegetative structure is described, as well as the formation of zoospores. The germinating spores are rarely seen on NV. Hillie, and the plant spreads very readily by a purely vegetative method. No light is thrown on the difficult question of what becomes of the spores during the winter. The growth of Endoderma viride f. Nitophylli takes place entirely within the substance of the host-plant, and there is no trace whatever of external branches or hairs. It is not in any way parasitic. A list of species is given in which this endophyte has been found. The original description of Streblonema intestinum (Entonema Reinsch) being quite inadequate, a new description is here given, based entirely on Reinsch’s preparations. The species differs from S. parasiticum Sauv., which occurs in Cystoclonium and Ceramium by the larger sporangia, and by the apparent absence of external fila- ments. A short note on S. Zanardinu De Toni adds to our somewhat scanty knowledge of the plant. The plurilocular sporangia are described, and a bifurcating example is figured. On “ Zoochlorella” in Convoluta.t—F. Keeble and F. W. Gamble give a preliminary account (1) of experiments proving that the green cells (zoochlorelle) of Convoluta roscoffensis result from infection from with- out; (2) of the means whereby the infecting organism may be cultivated outside the body of the animal; and (3) of the nature of the infecting organism. A detailed account is given of the mature alga which, in the opinion of the authors, belongs to Chlorophycez, and is allied to Chlamydomonas. The presence of four equal flagella suggests that they belong to the genus Carteria. Fossil Diatoms.{—A. M. Edwards reports on 16 samples of in- fusorial earths containing diatoms sent to him by the United States Geological Survey. They are interesting as coming from the great plain of Fremont in Utah, Nevada and California, called by the author the Occidental Sea. Lists of species found in each of the samples are given. The author makes some remarks on the geology of the tract examined. He maintains that the lakes Bonneville and Lahontain were formed in the earlier Tertiary, possibly the Eocene or the Cretaceous, and that the * infusorial earth,” which is clayey, was formed before the clay Oligocene of California from Monterey, Redondo Beach, etc. The infusorial clay of the Great Plain constitutes the bed of an extinct sea, the Occidental sea. North Atlantic Plankton.§s—C. H. Ostenfeld publishes a catalogue of the species of plants and animals observed in the plankton collected during periodical expeditions from August 1902 to May 1905, under- * Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxvii. pp. 288-97 (1 pl.). + Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, xxvii. (1905) No. B 514, pp. 66-8. t Nuov. Notar., xvii. (1906) pp. 102-7. § Copenhagen: Hoest et fils, 1906, 122 pp. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 581 taken by the International Commission for the exploration of the sea. The region explored includes the Arctic, North Atlantic, Norwegian Sea, North Sea, the Channel, Skager-Rak, Cattegat, the Sound, Danish Sea, Baltic, Finland Gulf, and Gulf of Bothnia. Phytoplankton of Temperate Seas.*—B. Schréder gives a pre- liminary account of the characteristics of the phytoplankton of temperate waters, being the result of investigations by himself and others. He regards it as pre-eminently “ polymiktes” plankton, for it consists almost entirely of many species which are represented by but few individuals ; it rarely occurs that one species is largely predominant or forms great masses. As an instance of this variety of species in tem- perate waters, the author points out that while his material from the Indian Ocean showed 118 species, that from Japanese waters contained 147. Special cases are quoted in which certain species were found to predominate: Chetoceras Schiittii Cleve in the Bay of Naples in autumn, a certain diatom which formed slimy masses at Triest, Chatoceras in the same locality, Ceratium volans Cleve in the Indian Ocean, etc. Lists are given of the principal species characteristic of (@) the warm Atlantic and Mediterranean ; (6) the Indo-Malay Sea; (¢) West Pacific (South and East China Sea and Japanese waters). It is noted that cold water species vary their form in temperate waters, and examples of this change are given. Baltic Benthos and Plankton.t—H. Fraude divides his subject into two parts, a general and a special part. In the first he treats of the region studied, with its physico-chemical and biological properties, the phytoplankton of the Baltic, and the researches already made there. In the special part he deals with the first Holsatian expedition in 1887, with others by Cleve and Aurivillius in 1896, by Schiitt in 1895, by Appstein in 1889, the second Holsatian expedition in 1901, and with his own personal collections. In the 36 plates the alge are figured in systematic order. Plankton of Lake Worth in Carinthia.{—K. v. Keissler continues his reports on the plankton of Carinthian lakes, and in the present paper enumerates the species found between March and September 1905 in Lake Worth. To each species is appended a note on its seasonal dis- tribution, and the list is also summarised in tabular form. Ceratiwm plays but a small part in the composition of the plankton, while Lyngbya limnetica Lemm. is well represented in August and September. Clathro- cystis is also not uncommon in this lake, though rare in other Austrian Alpine lakes; it is common in North Germany. Raphidium and Richteriella are also recorded. The species of Lake Worth are compared with those of Lake Ossiach and the Millstitter lake, showing that the differences are not inconsiderable. BIaANcuI, F.—Ricerche su un laghetto alpino (Il Lago Deglio). (Researches on a small Alpine lake, Lago Deglio.) Rivista Geograf. ital. xiii. (1906) p. 15 (figs.). * Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 260-3. + Jahresb. Geogr. Gesell. Greifswald, x. (1906) 125 pp., 36 pls., 1 map. } Oesterr. Bot. Zeit., lvi. (1906) pp. 195-202. 582 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Der GaspaRis, A.—Le Alghe delle argille marnose pleistoceniche di Taranto. (The alge of the Pleistocene marly clay of Taranto.) Att. Accad. Sci. Napoli, xii. (1905) 8 pp. (1 pl.). GutwinskIi, R. & Z. CHIMELEWSKI1.—Contribution a l’etude des Algues du Kameroun. (Contribution to a study of the algee of Cameroon.) Amn. biol. lacustre, i. (1906) pp. 168-79. KsgLumMAn, F,. R.—Om frammande alger ilanddrifna vid Sveriges vastkust. (On foreign algze washed ashore on the west coast of Sweden.) Arkw f. Botamk, v. (1906) No. 15, pp. 1-10. Koroip, C. A.—Dinoflagellata of the San Diego Region. 1. On Heterodinium, a new genus of the Peridinide. [The author proposes the name of Heterodinium for a new genus which is to include 13 species, of which five are new. It is divided into three sub- genera. | Umw. Califorma Publications, Zoology, ii. (1906) pp. 341-68 (3 pls.). Mazza, A.—Saggio di Algologia oceanica. (Essay on oceanic algology.) [A continuation, which includes Acrotylus, Hndocladia, Chondrus, Iridea, and Gigartina. } Nuov. Not., xvii. (1906) pp. 81-101. Miauua, W.—Thome’s Flora von Deutschland. Kryptogamen. (Flora of Germany. Cryptogams.) [Continuation, finishing Diatomacez and beginning Desmidez. | Gera: Zezschwitz, 1906, vi. lief. 30, pp. 353-84 (5 pls.). Ross, H.—Contribuzioni alla conoscenza della flora Sicula. (Contributions toa knowledge of the Sicilian flora.) [The author records seven species of Characez with varieties, adding critical notes thereon. The plants were collected in 1884-5 and 1887-97, and determined by L. Holtz.) Bull. Soc. Bot. Ital. (1905) pp. 254-8. Fungi. (By A. Lorrain Smits, F.L.S.) Nuclear Fertilisation in the Mucorini.*—Dangeard holds that the cells which fuse to form the zygospore in the Mucorini are not to be regarded as gametes, but as gametangia. The protoplasm of the zygo- spore passes through a series of changes: from a dense condition it becomes vacuolar, then reticulate, and again vacuolar. At the close of the reticular period, the nuclei are seen to fuse in pairs ; the mature zygospore contains a large number of the fused nuclei, which provide, on germination, the nuclei of the new hyphe. Dangeard maintains that the nuclei which fuse come from the different gametangia. The fusions take place progressively as the different nuclei come into contact. Contribution to the Study of the fleshy Discomycetes. t — J. Lagarde divides his paper into two parts; the first treats of the history, terminology, and technique of these fungi. The second and longer part includes the results of his own observation and research, and falls into three divisions—the general anatomy, the descriptions of different species and individuals; and finally, the conclusions he has drawn from the consideration of the group. Lagarde follows Boudier in regarding the dehiscence of the ascus as an important factor in classification, and he recognises two great groups : those in which the ascus opens by a lid or cap, and those in which the * Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 645-6. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) p. 647. + Ann. Sci. Nat., ix. (1906) pp. 125-256 (2 pls. and 58 figs.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 583. spores escape by a pore. The first group includes the Morchellacee, Helvellaceze, Pezizaceze, and Ascobolacee. Those of the second group, in which the ascus opens by a pore, are the Geoglossacez, the Helotiacee, and the Mollisiacee. He finds that these two great groups form two series connected with each other by transitional forms. The Morchellaceze and Helvellaceze are distinguished from each other by the position of the hymenium, the contents of the spores, the form and dimensions of the paraphyses, and by the structure of the trama. The anatomical structure of the different forms bears out Boudier’s original classification. Pyrenomycetes of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland.*—Under this heading H. Rehm proposes to supplement the work done for these fungi by Winter, and to examine the mass of material accumulated since his day. He gives diagnoses where these are necessary, but, as a rule, he: only cites the literature and adds the habitat, with explanatory notes in some cases. New Genus of African Fungi.j—Hariot and Patouillard describe a remarkable fungus from Hast Africa, Colletomanginia g.n., which combines the characters of Helvellacesee, Hypocreacez, and Spheriacez. It forms a large, furrowed, hemispherical, hollow mass 17 cm. in diameter ; the asci are inclosed in perithecia, which occur at the base of the furrows. The spores are simple, black, and appendiculate. Origin of Yeasts.t—Paul Vuillemin discusses the bearing of Viala. and Pacottet’s discovery on the yeast-plants. Formerly, true yeasts were regarded as those which, on cultivation, produced the so-called asci and endospores. The discovery that the yeast-forms of other fungi belonging to the Ascomycetes also form these endospores, leads them to be regarded. as sporocysts, and though Saccharomyces as a genus must be preserved, its affinities must be looked for among the Fungi imperfecti. Cysts of Gleosporium and their Role in the Origin of Yeasts.$ Viala and Pacottet continue their studies in this field of work. They have produced in a suitable medium the cysts of Gleosporium ampelo- phagum, and describe them as dark-coloured, smooth, somewhat brittle, and containing one or several brown spores 8-10 » in length. The cysts. of G. nervisequum are darker in colour and rough on the surface, with paler and more spherical spores, 8-14 » in diameter. In each species, cyst-formation is induced by desiccation, sudden. lowering of temperature, etc. The spores produce on germination septate and variable filaments. In a sugar solution, these filaments. break up and begin to bud out, forming yeasts. Relation of Fungi imperfecti to Ascomycetes.|| —H. Klebahn sums up the cases in which he has proved a connection between different fungi by infection experiments ; Gnomonia leptostyla with Marssonia * Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 257-72. + Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 224-6. See also Bot. Centralbl., ci. (1906) . 652. ¢ Rév. gén. Sci. pures et appliquées, xvii. (1906) pp. 214-29 (figs. 1-30). See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 65. § Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) pp. 518-20. || Centralbl. Bakt., xv. (1905) p. 336. 584 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Juglandis ; Gnomoniella tubiformis with Leptothyrium alneum ; Myco- spherella sentina with Septoria nigerrima ; and Pseudopeziza Ribis sp. n. with Gleosporium Ribis. Details are promised in a future communi- cation. Some of his results are published * in a more recent paper on these fungi, his object being to establish the relationships between the different forms. He selected Glwosporium Ribis, which attacks the red currant, for examination, and obtained good infection results by sowing the spores on healthy leaves, and thus reproducing the Glwosporium. During the winter he sought for the ascus form on the decaying leaves. Among other forms of the fungus he found a Discomycete, which he places as a new species in the genus Pseudopeziza. He givesa detailed account of his various cultures and inoculations ; he succeeded in reproducing the Gl@osporium from the ascus spores of the Pseudopeziza. He draws attention to the fact that one cannot determine what may be the alternate form of any fungus without actual proof. In one case Gleosporium alternates with a Pyrenomycete; in this case the higher fungus is a Discomycete. Notable -Pycnidial Type.t— Tycho Vestergren describes a new species of Spheropsideee, Diplodina Rostrupii. He takes occasion to discuss the different types of this family, Spheeroidacez, Excipulaceze, and Leptostromace, distinguished from each other by the formation of the pycnidium. The species under discussion grew on the previous year’s capsules of two forms of Ericacese, Phyllodoce and Andromeda, in the higher regions of Lapland. Vestergren describes the growth and appearance of mycelium, pycnidium, etc., the opening of the pycnidium, the hymenium, conidiophores, and conidia. Pycnidia and conidia vary in size to a great extent; the larger pycnidium containing the larger ‘conidia, and different sized individuals occurring on the same capsule. The author warns systematists against making the size of conidia a specific character. Botrytis cinerea——Much damage is caused each year to grapes by this fungus, and J. M. Guillon { reports the results of some inoculation experiments he instituted to find out the mode of attack by the Botrytis. He sowed spores on grapes that had been pricked, and in each case the rotting of the fruit followed. Results were not so quick nor so universal with undamaged grapes, but a very large percentage of these also were infected. The resistance offered by the pellicle to the penetration of the hyphee was complete only in some cases. Rhacodium cellare.§—F. Guéguen has published a morphological and biological study of this cave fungus. He traces its appearance in literature from the “ Byssus tenerrima, nigra, doliolaris” of Ray (in 1690) down to Schroéter’s account of it in 1893. In wine growing countries it is considered to be harmful to the wines, as along with Penicillium and Dematium, it gives the objectionable cork odour. The various specimens examined differed slightly in colour and form, but * Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xvi. (1906) pp. 65-83 (2 pls.). + Arkiv Bot. v. (1906) No. 11, 14 pp. (2 pls.). t Comptes Rendus, cxlii. (1906) pp. 1346-9. § Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 77-95, 146-63 (3 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 585 the variations were not constant enough to be specific. The fila- ments are rigid, branched, and septate, and have a somewhat rougher membrane. By means of cultures he was able to follow the spore development—elongate, simple conidia borne in clusters at the tips of the fertile branches, and recalling the conidiophores of Cladosporium and Dendryphium. Spore production is rather rare. Guéguen cultivated the fungus on a large number of nutritive media, the details of which are given, and he reproduced in them the differences in colour, structure, etc., that had been noted in the various specimens examined. He classifies Rhacodium in the group Dematiee of the Hyphomycetes. Perithecia and pycnidia that have been found in conjunction with Rhacodium cellare belong to some other fungus. New Genus of Hyphomycetes.*— Paul Vuillemin found this new fungus on a growth of Aspergillus; it formed a star-like structure, hyaline at the centre, brown towards the rays owing to the presence of brown spores. These are produced at the ends of the fertile filaments. He calls the new fungus Hemispora stellata g. et sp. n. Uredinee.—C. L. Shear t considers that he has good evidence from observation and from the results of open-air inoculation, for assuming a connection between Peridermium cerebrum on Pinus virginiana and Cronartium quercuum. He holds also that the Japanese fungus Per- dermium giganteum is identical with P. cerebrum, the latter name having many years’ precedence. Both forms of the fungus occur on several host species. In his “ Rust Notes for 1905,” J. M. Batest chronicles the finding of various Uredinez in their several stages. He found an eidium on Ocnothera biennis, and its uredo-form on a Carex close at hand, which have been proved to be new. H. L. Bolley and F. J. Pritchard § publish an account of wheat rust. They give notes as to resistant varieties, and recommend attention to cleanness of seed, land free from weeds, with the destruction of wild grasses and barberry shrubs to keep the crops free from contamination. Notes on Mycenastrum Corium.— Bulgaria, collected in six different localities. Sixty-one species are enumerated, belonging to Schizomycetes, Floridez, Cyanophyceze, and Chlorophyceee. This is the author’s fifth contribution to a study of the fresh-water algze of this country. Sicilian Alge.t—F. Cortesi, in his ‘“TIllustrazione dell’ Erbario Borgia,” gives a list of 44 marine alge from Catania, re-determined by G. B. de Toni, and preserved in the neglected herbarium which was put together by Count Cesare Borgia, who died in 1837. The best represented genus is Cystoseira, 9 species of which are recorded. The old names and notes on the labels are all given. Nereocystis Luetkeana.§S—T. C. Frye has studied this alga in its native habitat, and makes some interesting notes on it. The report of a * Rhodora, viii. (1906) pp. 157-61. + Nuov. Notar., xvii. (1906) pp. 151-61. ¢{ Annali di Botanica, iv. (1906) pp. 262-7. § Bot. Gazette, xlii. (1906) pp. 143-6. 694 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO plant 90 m. in length he regards as incorrect, and quotes MacMillan’s record of 80 ft. As to the question whether or not it is an annual, he | says that, except for a few stragglers, all the plants noticed by him the previous summer had gone in March of this year. Young plants of 1°25-2°5 m. long, with bulbs 12-38 mm. in diameter, and fronds 30-90 cm. in length, were to be seen growing on the bottom, 3-9 m. under the water. They do not reach the surface the first year, but remain out of reach of waves, pushing rapidly up in the second season, only to die when winter overtakes them. The growth is very rapid, and the author calculates that it is as much as 25 cm. a day at one time. The stalk is firmly anchored to the rocks by holdfasts covering an area as much as 30 cm. in diameter. Constantinea.*—W. A. Setchell has made a study of this genus, and comes to the following conclusions :—1. The genus Constantinea is to be restricted to the three species, (. rosa-marina, C. simplea, and C. subulifera. 2. Thus constituted, it is a genus of the Dumontiacee, as defined by Schmitz and Hauptfleisch ; it is characterised by the possession of cylindrical, annulate, and more or less dichotomously branched stipes, bearing orbicular lamine, at first peltate or nearly so, later perfoliate, entire, or more or less radiately split, and by the posses- sion of nemathecia containing zonate tetraspores accompanied by unicellular paraphyses. 3. C. rosa-marina is identical with C. sitchensis P.and R. 4. The author founds his new species, C. subulifera, on the plant collected by Harvey in N.W. America, and named by him C. sttchensis. 5. The genus is confined to the Northern Pacific and Behring Sea. The separation of the species is clearly shown by means of an analytical key. The synonymy of the three species is detailed, with a list of exsiccatee ; and C. subulifera is described. Cladophora crispata and the Section Mgagropila.t— F. Brand publishes the result of his further studies on Cladophora, and deals with the differences between the attached and the free-swimming forms. He shows that C. fructa is no independent species, but merely the free- swimming form of C. crispata. He gives an emended diagnosis of C’. crispata, to which he reckons also C. vitrea Kutz., C. regularis Kutz., C. virescens Kutz., C. brachyclados Kutz., C. putealis Kutz., C. brachy- stelecha Rabenh., and C. glomerata var. stagnalis Brand ex parte. His former treatment of the section Aigagropila is supplemented by further remarks and a description of a new fresh-water species of the group which was found by Professor Lagerheim in a lake in the neighbourhood of Stockholm. Brand names the plant C. Lagerheimii ; it is distinguished from all other species of the group by the occurrence on some of the filaments of pinnate branching. An amplified diagnosis is also given of C’. profunda Brand. 'The difficulty of determination of species is realised by the author, and comparative tables are given of the habit and struc- ture of C’. glomerata, C. crispata, and C’. fracta, as representing Euclado- phora, and the group of Euegagropila. A valuable summary is given of the characters of fixed, as opposed to free-swimming, species. Plants * Nuov. Notar., xvii. (1906) pp. 162-73. + Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) pp. 241-59, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 695 which begin life attached, change their characteristics when they become free-swimming. Yorkshire Diatomacee.*——-M. H. Stiles gives some lists of Yorkshire Diatoms gathered in 1905. These form a supplement to R. H. Philip’s report in a previous number of the same journal. One of the lists is an enumeration of 31 species and varieties not previously recorded for Askern, among these being Philip’s new variety of Fragilaria capucina, with a curious median inflation; this is figured as var. inflata. The other list comprises 64 species and varieties from a small hillside streamlet at Ilkley. Rk. H. Philipt publishes notes on some Diatoms collected in the district round Hull in 1904-5. In all some 13 ‘species or varieties were found which had not been previously recorded, and these are all figured. Ten of them are marine, and the rest came from fresh-water. The rare Stephanopyzis turris was found again in Ascidian molluscs. The plate is re-published in the “ Naturalist” } with an abstract of the paper. R. H. Philip § gives lists of Diatoms collected in a pond in Boynton Woods (18 species) and in a stream falling into Little Thornwick Bay (18 species). In the lower part of this stream a marine species, Coscinodiscus radiatus, is very plentiful considerably above high-water mark. Only one other marine species was found. In ponds at Speeton a few species of Desmidez occur in abundance. Fossil Diatoms.||—A. M. Edwards records the finding of 10 species of Bacillarize in the rocks of the Hudson River Epoch of the Lower Silurian Age in New Jersey. All the species are identical with the Bacillarize of the present day. He describes the method employed for the separation of the specimens from the rocks, and shows that it is im- possible for them to have become introduced during the process of cleansing. They must therefore be fossil. Polymorphism of Cyanophycee.§—H. Royers shows that Meyen’s new alga, Listia crustacea, from the Laacher See, is synonymous with Rivularia minutula Born. et Flah. It germinates from resting spores which are formed at the thick end of the plant, and the filaments with their false branching form a hemispheroidal green thallus, held together by tough gelatinoid matter. After dissolution of this thallus the individual threads become attached to submerged stones and grow in the form of a Schizosiphon. They reproduce themselves by means of hormogonia. They must not be confused with the Scytonema-forms which occur in the same place and are reproduced in the same manner. Under certain conditions pieces of the Rivularia become converted into a Nostoc-thallus, regarded by the author as being Nostoc lichenoides Vauch. In other circumstances, when associated with certain fungal hyphe, the plant forms the lichen Collema pulposum var. hydrocharum Ach. A bibliography and illustrations are added. * Naturalist, 1906, pp. 128-9 (1 fig.). + Trans. Hull Sci. and Field Nat. Club, 1906, pp. 217-18 (1 pl.). } Naturalist, 1906, p. 67. § Tom. cit., pp. 262-3. || Nuoy. Notar., xvii. (1906) pp. 174-80. q Jahresb. Nat. Verein. Elberfeld, 1906, pp. 3-40 (3 pls). 696 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Reproduction of Stigeoclonium.*—A. Pascher describes phenomena connected with the reproduction of a species of Stigeoclonium, which is probably iS. nudiusculum. In calm water there was observed a rich formation of hairs. By transferring material from disturbed to calm water, the author was able to bring about in every case the formation of swarm-spores. The reproductive bodies were either macrospores or microspores, which either became resting-spores, or formed zygotes, or were transmuted into aplanospores. Zoospores with two cilia and akinetee stages, as well as the Palmella condition, seemed to be entirely wanting. From an examination of other species, the author finds that morphologically similar species of Stigeocloniwm do not by any means always show similar forms of reproduction, or the same behaviour of the swarm-spores. Details of the spores, size, etc., are given of the material, regarded by the author as either S. tenue or S. falklandicum, on which some of his conclusions are based. Copulation was several times observed between the microspores. Icelandic Plankton.t —C. H. Ostenfeld and C. Wesenberg-Lund publish an account of the plankton of two lakes—Thingvallavatn and Myvatn, in the south-west and north of Iceland respectively. The phytoplankton has been worked out by Ostenfeld, and the zooplankton by Wesenberg-Lund. In Myvatn, no phytoplankton was found at all, and in Thingvallavatn there were no plankton Myxophycew, and indeed the main interest of the algal collections lies in the non-occurrence of forms which one would have expected to find. The Diatoms constitute the main part of the species, and the commonest of these are the Melo- sire and Asterionella formosa. Fragilaria crotensis occurs very sparingly and only at the highest temperatures. The limnetic Chlorophycez are not abundant, and Ceratium hirundinella and Dinobryon are absent. Since the samples were collected regularly every fortnight during a whole year, the authors are able to draw conclusions of great value from the results of their examination. They think it probable that the plankton of the arctic lakes consists mainly of zooplankton, to a much greater degree than is the case with that of more southern countries ; also that the phytoplankton, especially in summer time, only plays an insignificant part. In arctic and sub-arctic lakes it consists in all prob- ability of algee with yellowish or yellowish-brown chromatophores ; algee with green or blue-green chromatophores being almost entirely wanting. As exceptions to this rule may be mentioned Spherocystis, the semi- limnetic Desmids, anda few rare Chlorophyceee. The authors conclude their interesting paper by remarks on W. and G. 8. West’s “ Freshwater plankton of the Scottish Lochs.”{ A list of literature is followed by two plates and a photograph of Thingvallavatn. Griffithsia acuta Zan.$—G. B. de Toni has made a study of this alga, which was never described by its author, and the original specimen of which is preserved with the rest of Zanardini’s herbarium in the * Archiv Hydrobiol. u Planktonk., i. (1906) pp. 433-8. t Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xxv. (1906) pp. 1092-1197 (3 pls., figs. in text). t Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 1905, p. 477. § Comptes Rendus Assoc. Francaise pour l’Avancement d. Sci., 1905, pp. 402-5. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 697 Municipal Museum at Venice. No fructification has been found, and it is therefore impossible to place the species with certainty in its right section of Griffithsia, though it probably belongs to Acrocladia. The original specimens do not exceed 3 cm. in length, and are irregularly dichotomous.. Some of the branches have a tendency to form hooks such as are seen in Hypnea and Campylephora. A careful comparison of G. acuta with @. furcellata J. Ag. and with G. Duri@i Mont. brings the author to the conclusion that they are all the same species, G. acuta forming the connecting-link between the other two. They must now be known under the name of G. furcellata J. Ag. as being the oldest name. ‘The nearest ally of this conjoint species is G. setacea Ag. BREEMEN, P. J., v AN—Bemerkungen iiber einige Planktonformen. (Remarks on certain plankton forms.) Verh. Rijksinst. Onderzoek. d. Zee, i. (1906) 8 pp., plate. Mazza, A.—Saggio di Algologia Oceanica. (Hssay on oceanic algology.) [A continuation of this work, including the genera Phyllophora, Steno- gramma, Gymnogongrus, Ahnfeltia, Actinococcus, Colacolepis, Sterro- colax, Mychodea, and Dicranema. | Nuov. Notar., xvii. (1906) pp. 129-50. NAMIKAWA, S.—Fresh-water Algez as an Article of Human Food. Bull. Coll. Agr. Tokyo, vii. (1906) p. 123. Ripuey, H. N.—An Expedition to Christmas Island. [This paper includes a list of 22 marine alge, identified by A. and H. S. Gepp, the notes upon which have been published in the ‘“ Journal of Botany.” No alge had been recorded previously from the island. | Journ. Straits Branch R. Asiatic Soc., 1905, pp. 255-7. Fungi. (By A. Lorrain Smita, F.L.S.) Fungus of Economic Importance.*—R. and E. Smith describe a new disease that attacks stored lemons, causing very great loss. It is a brown rot with a peculiar odour, and the writers have succeeded in isolating and cultivating the fungus that is the cause of the mischief. On the lemons it appears as a sterile mycelium, and in many of the culture media nothing else grew; but on soil, where a diseased lemon had lain, or on wet filter paper similarly affected, the spore stage developed abundantly. This was very much like Pythiwm: a fine septate branching mycelium with terminal sporangia containing swarm- spores. No indication of sexual reproduction was observed. The name Pythiacystis citrophthora g. et sp. n., has been given to the fungus by the authors, who consider it to be intermediate between Saprolegniaceee and Peronosporee. = Cytology of the Entomophthoracee.t;—Lincoln Ware Riddle has studied material of several species of Hntomophthora and of Hmpusa Grylli, and he considers that the cytological evidence he has gained enables him to trace the descent of this family from a Mucor ancestor. * Bot. Gazette, xlii. (1906) pp. 215-21. + Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci., xlii. (1906) pp. 178-97 (8 pls.). 698 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO He finds such an ancestor in Sporodinia, where the resting spore, the zygote, is formed by the fusion of primitive coenogametes with numerous nuclei, and where azygospores are frequent. He looks on the conidium of Hmpusa as a sporangium into which has been extended the ccenocytic habit. Apogamy has become constant in Hmpusa, resulting in the formation of multinucleate azygospores, as in Sporodinia. Thus from Sporodinia he traces the development of Hmpusa, Entomophthora, and Basidiobolus, indicating in each genus the points that establish his theory of descent. Fungus Flora of Luxemburg.*—Joh. Feltgen published a pre- liminary account of the Ascomycetes for this flora. After his death in May 1904, his son, Ernest Feltgen, continued the work, and has published a further instalment. The substratum, locality, and date of growth are given in each case, and many new species are described. There are also included full descriptions of many rare forms. Biology of Pyronema confluens.t—P. Kosaroff found that this fungus appeared constantly on burnt soil, and he made a series of culture experiments to determine the conditions favourable or unfavour- able to its growth. He failed to induce growth on unsterilised soil, and concluded that there must be some poison in such soil which hindered the development of the fungus. Its frequent appearance on burnt ground must be due to the effects of heat and sterilisation, as charcoal alone was not sufficient to insure a growth. Ergot.t—E. Tschermak discusses the appearance and prevalence of this disease in cereals. The sclerotium makes its appearance in the flower whether fertilised or not. In rye-plants that have a prolonged flowering season (as in winter rye), the number of infected plants tends to be much greater than in those with quick flowering. In barley the naked varieties suffer more than those with glumes. The conditions of moisture and temperature at the flowering period have much to do with the spread of the fungus. In a dry season and on dry soil, the time of flowering passes quickly, and the risk of infection is correspondingly diminished. Production of Stable Yeasts from Fungi.s—G. Odin, who had already produced yeasts from Penicillium and Coremium, has continued his experiments with other fungi—sSterigmatocystis versicolor and Asper- gillus fumigatus. He obtained the yeasts by cultivating the spores of the fungi in a sugar solution contained in a sealed chamber. The yeasts so developed were transferred to carrot or potato, and did not revert to the filamentous condition. He tested the effect of the yeasts of A. fumigatus, which is known to be pathogenic on rabbits, ete., and found that they retained unimpaired the pathogenic properties of the parent stock. * Beilage Ber. Ver. Luxemburger Natur., xv. (1905). See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 197-8. + Arb. k. Biolog. Anst. Land. Forstw., v. (1905) p. 126. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 375-6. } Fubling’s Landw. Zeit., lv. (1906) pp.194-9. See also Ann. Mycol, iv. (1906) pp. 369-70. § Comptes Rendus, exliii. (1906) pp. 468-70. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 699: North American Species of Peridermium.*— J. C. Arthur and F. D. Kern describe 27 species of Peridermium. As understood by them, the genus includes all dcidia possessing peridia, inhabiting the Pinaceee and Gnetaceze. Only three of the species have been definitely connected with other growth-forms, but from the structure of the Acidia they are able to determine the genus to which they will probably be found to belong. There are seven of these genera: Coleosporium, Cronartium, Pucciniastrum, Calyptospora, Melampsorella, Melampsori- dium, and Chrysomyxa. Several new species are given by the authors, and keys are drawn up of the hosts as well as of the parasites. Hyphomycetes.t—Lindau began, in fascicle 98, the description of the large parasitic genus Ramularia, which is continued through the following fascicle and on to p. 532 of part 100. It is a leaf disease causing spots which are disfiguring even when not greatly harmful. Several new species are described. The Hyalohelicospore and the Hyalostaurosporee conclude the Mucedinex. The first section of the Dematiaceze with simple brown spores is begun. As in previous. numbers, the genera and some of the species are illustrated in the text. In part 101 { he continues the description of the Torule. The principal genera dealt with are Torula, Hormiscium, and Cyroceras. Some new species are described by the author. The Echinobotryeze and Periconiee are also described, and the Arthriniz are begun. Keys to the genera head the different chapters. The illustrations, as usual, are abundant and clear. ‘Fungus Parasitic on Elodea.§— Werner Kegel describes an un- usual form of Hyphomycete, which he names Varicosporium Elodea, and which he found constantly infesting plants of Hlodea. The conidia are elongate septate, and are borne in acropetal succession but at right angles to each other, so that a confused branching system of conidia is formed. He found also pycnidia, but could: not connect the two fungi together. Australian Rusts.||—D. McAlpine contributes a further list of hosts for the new Uredineous genus Uromycladium. The genus is confined to acacias, and the rusts grow usually on the phyllodes. The list also. includes the species of Uromyces within the same genus of host-plants. McAlpine describes a new Acidium, the first to be detected on any acacia in Australia. It grows on the shoots and fruits of Acacia farne- stana, and is recorded from Queensland and West Australia. Infection Experiments with Ustilago Carbo.§—Nazareno Strampelli has followed up Hecke’s account of the propagation of the smut of cereals by a series of inoculation experiments carried out with every precaution as to sterilisation and protection during growth. Those plants that were inoculated with smut spores at the time of flowering, became completely carbonised; others, that were grown as control * Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxiii. (1906) pp. 403-38. + Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen-Flora, i. Abt. 8, Lief. 99 (Leipzig, 1906) pp. 438-512; Lief. 100, pp. 513-76. t Op. cit., Lief. 101 (Leipzig, 1906) pp. 577-640. § Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv (1906) pp. 213-16. || Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 322-6. 4 Atti Reale Acad, Lincei, ccciii. (1906) pp. 211-13. 700 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO cultures, and that were protected from all spore contamination, remained healthy. Corn Smuts and their Propagation.*X—T. Johnson writes a popular account of the various smuts. He sketches the history of our know- ledge of these organisms, and of the works published concerning them by the brothers Tulasne, Kiihn, and Brefeld. The latter writer dis- covered quite recently that smut infection of oats takes place when the host is a seedling ; in the case of wheat and barley, it is the flower that gives entrance to the fungal pest. In Indian corn any young tissue is liable to attack. The best methods of cure for the different types of smut are described. Abnormalities in Agarics.;—E. Tobias writes on the abnormal forms assumed by various fungi, as, for instance, when a “cap” turned upside down is borne on another. He explains the occurrence thus : that the two plants grew close together and the stronger tore the weaker from its base and carried it up. Form Development in Agarics.t—Werner Magnus has devoted much attention to the study of this subject. He has made observations on the growth and expansion of the normal plants, and he has tested the power of recuperation of the various parts by wounding the tissues, or cutting off the different organs and then watching further growth. Shortly before the period of expansion he found that the function of each part was determined, and if that part was cut away it did not grow again. He tested the vegetative power of growth of isolated hyphe, and found that they grew in a nutritive solution or in distilled water from almost any part of the organism. He discusses also the instances of teratological formations, the most frequent of which is the doubling of the fruit-body. He records instances of monstrosities, and gives his views as to their origin. The phylogenetic problem is also reviewed, with reference to the growth and form of the hymenium, etc. New Belgian Gasteromycete.$—Ch. Van Bambeke describes the somewhat rare Pisolithus arenarius Alb. and Schwein., which has re- cently been found growing in Belgium. He describes the fungus, which is usually found growing on sandy soil, and gives the distribution of the species, rather a wide one; it is rare in Europe and America, but fairly common in Australia. Mycological Notes.||—C. G. Lloyd has recently issued two numbers of his “ Notes.” The first, almost wholly written in French, gives an account of some of the more rare Gasteromycetes, Arachnion album, species of Bovistella, Battarrea, Calvatia, Lycoperdon, etc. The writer thinks that European botanists have not given sufficient attention to this group of fungi. He records a new genus, Whetstonia, from Minnesota. The gleba consists of spores contained in persistent cells ; * Science Progress, i. (1906) pp. 137-49. + Zeitschr. Nat Abt. Deutsch. Gesell. Kunst. u. Wiss. Posen, xii. (1906) p. 79 (figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl , cii. (1906) p. 256. { Berlin: R. Friedlander & Sohn, 1906, 161 pp. (6 pls.). § Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belg. xlii. (1906) pp. 178-83 (1 pl.). || Mycological Notes, Nos. 22 and 23 (Cincinnati, 1906) pp. 261-92 (5 pls.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 701 capillitium none. The second number is devoted to a consideration of the genus Bovistella, with diagnoses and notes on the species. There are also remarks on some rare Australian fungi, and an account of botanical work at Geneva. Tylostomee.*—C. G. Lloyd continues his study of Gasteromycetes, and has recently published an account of the Tylostomez. This family includes the genera Queletia, Dictyocephalos, Schizostoma, Battarrea, Battarreopsis, Chlamydopus, and Tylostoma. The last mentioned is by far the largest genus, though only one British species is included in it. The plants of this family are, with a few exceptions, of very rare occur- rence. Some of the genera are founded on a species that has been collected only once. Lloyd writes descriptions and notes on each of the species, and they are all illustrated by photographic reproductions. Mycorhiza-producing Fungus.{——The fungus in question—Cortin- arius rubies sp. n.—has been described by C. H. Kauffman. It is distinguished by its brick-red mycelial strands and stem. The colour of the mycelium made it possible to trace its course in the soil, and it was found that it was attached as an ectotrophic mycorhiza to red oaks, a sugar-maple, and to Celastrus scandens which wound round one of the oaks. The fungus was curiously selective ; inthe case of Celastrus, it neglected the oaks to attach itself to that plant. Some other trees in the vicinity were also ignored. The writer presumes that “it is dependent for its initial attachment on certain environmental factors.” Notes on various Fungi.t—G. Bainier records work done recently at the School of Pharmacy. Several species of Penicillium, P. Costantini, P. rufescens, and P. patulum, are described and compared. He cultivated the mould, Helicostylum elegans, and found that so many differences were present that it was necessary to remove the plant to another genus, Chetostylum. Notes and observations are also published on Dispira cornuta, the genus V@mansia, and a new species of Hyphomycete, Acrostalagmus nigripes, so named from the black colour of the stalk, the verticils and conidia being colourless. Economic Use of Fungi.§—R. Reissinger calls attention to the use made of the green-coloured wood which is permeated by the fungus Peziza eruginosa. He proposes to increase the quantity by growing the fungus on beech wood. New Fungus Stain.||— F. Guéguen recommends Sudan iii. dis- solved in lactic acid as a coloration of the oily substances in fungi. He gives careful descriptions as to the preparation and employment of that and other stains for fungi. Sudan ii. is useful also in the examination of Lichens, and even in the histological study of the higher plants. * Cincinnati, U.S.A., 1906, 28 pp., 12 pls. and 6 figs. + Bot. Gazette, xlii. (1906) pp. 208-14. ft Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 205-23 (5 pls). § Nat. Zeitschr. Land, Forstw., iv. (1906) pp. 164-6. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 280. || Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 224-6. Dec. 19th, 1906 w ; pa 702 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Notes on Cases of Poisoning by Fungi.*—These notes are con- tributed by M. Boué and M. Demange. Boué experienced symptoms of poisoning after eating Amanita junquillea. Demange made inquiries as to harmful fungi in Tonkin, and found that the species in question was Hygrophorus conicus. Of six persons attacked, four died from the effects of the poison ; two others responded to treatment and recovered. Outlines for the Observation of some of the more Common Fungi. G. F. Atkinson gives directions to beginners in mycology for the collec- tion and study of various fungi. The present part deals with poisonous and edible Agarics, Polyporei, Clavarize, and some Ascomycetes. Spread of Fungus Diseases by means of Hibernating Mycelium.t A paper on this subject has just been issued from Kew. Well-known cases of hybernating mycelium are cited, such as potato disease which is carried over in the tubers, darnel grass, and others. An account is given of experiments proving the influence of weather and tempera- ture on the spread of fungus diseases: potato tubers infected by Phytophthora were planted in pots and kept, some in damp warm condi- tions, others in a dry cool atmosphere. The latter showed no sign of disease after many weeks ; the former had all succumbed sooner or later. The writer insists on the danger of using seed, tubers, bulbs, etc., pro- duced in an infected area, in the case of plants known to be capable of perpetuating a disease by means of hybernating mycelium. American Mycology.s—W. A. Kellerman gives an account of a botanical trip to Central America for the purpose of collecting parasitic fungi. He describes the climate, topography, vegetation, etc., of the different places visited, indicating where fungi were most pr evalent. A list of fungi is promised. Vera K. Charles || has found that a disease of 7'heobroma, which resulted in the rotting of the pods, was due to Lasiodiplodia, probably L. tubericola, but that is not yet ascertained. G. G. Hedgecock and Percy SpauldingG have invented a method of mounting microscopic fungi for the herbarium. They are grown on agar-agar ; the culture is then transferred to a card and allowed to dry, and finally covered with a perforated piece of cardboard of varying thickness. J.C. Arthur** desires a new classification of the Uredinales. He claims that the various stages in the life-cycle should be recognised in nomenclature, and points out the anomaly of ignoring the A¥eidium, which is the sexual stage. A. P. Morgantf commences an account of the North American species. of Lepiota, of which some 80 species have been enumerated. . Morgan gives diagnoses of 12 species. The same writer {{ publishes “ Descriptive Synopses of Morgan’s. * Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 227-82. + Plant World, viii. (1905) pp. 245-55. t Journ. Board Agric., xiii, (1906) pp 257-64. § Journ. Mycol., xii. (1906) pp. 137-45. || Tom. cit., pp. 145-6. q Tom. cit., p- 147, 5 ** Tom. cit., pp. 149-54. tt Tom. cit., pp. 154-9, tt Ton cit., pp. 159-62. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 703 North American species of MJarasmius,” and the synopsis to North American species of Heliomyces. Articles on these genera were previously published. Field notes * on the Uredinexw are contributed by A. O. Garrett. ae species described were collected some thirty miles from Salt Lake ‘ity. Italian Fungi.t—Teodoro Ferraris publishes a first instalment of a projected list of fungi for Piedmont, which he has been preparing and arranging during the years 1901-6. He records 289 species, a few of which are new to science. C. Massalongof states that since the publication of the Veronese flora in 1902, a considerable number of additions have been made to the fungi, and he publishes a list of these, 82 in number. Several are new species, and diagnoses of these are given. Plant Diseases.§—E. Zederbauer describes the canker of pine-trees caused by Dasycypha calyciformis. It enters the tree by wounds caused by injury to the bark or by breaking of branches, etc. Infection appears first in the soft bast, from which it spreads both to the wood and the cortex. EK. Mead Wilcox || gives an account of diseases that have affected fruit trees in Alabama. He classes them under the plants attacked, beginning with apple, and describing the various rots, cankers, blights, etc. The latter pages of the bulletin are devoted to an account of fungicides, their preparation, and methods of applying them. In another paper] Mead Wilcox takes up the diseases of sweet potato—black and dry rot, scurf, etc.—all due to various forms of fungi. A. Stift ** records the damage done to plants in Hungary during the year 1905 both by insects and by fungi. He notes the occurrence of Gymnosporangium Sabine, Afcidium Grossularie, and Phyllosticta - fragaricola. Arsenio Puttemans tf gives an account of the cultivation of lucerne in the state of 8. Paulo. It is found that in that region it lasts only three years instead of ten or fifteen years as in the Argentine Republic. The author thinks that its disappearance is due at least in part to the action of various fungal parasites, of which he gives a descriptive list. These are difficult to eradicate, but advice is given as to methods of cultivation that will strengthen the lucerne and render it less liable to disease. Puttemanstt{ publishes another paper on a disease of haricots in * Journ. Mycol., xii. (1906) pp. 162-4. + Malpighia, xx. (1906) p. 125-58. t Tom. cit., pp. 159-70. § Centralbl. Gesamte Forstw., i. (1906) 5 pp., 4 photographs. See also Hedwigia, xlv. (1906) Beibl., p. 142. || Bull, Alabama Agric. Exper. Station, No. 132 (1905) 142 pp. 9 pls. q Op. cit., No. 135 (1905) 16 pp., 4 figs. ** Oesterr.-ungar. Zeitschr. Zuckerind. Landw., 1906, p.28. See also Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) pp. 748-50. tt Rev. Agric., Nos. 119-121 (S. Paulo, 1905) 23 pp., 17 figs. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 199. tt Op. cit., No. 130 (1906) pp. 200-4 (83 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 227. 3A 2 704 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Brazil caused by a fungus 7'sariopsis griseola. It forms brown polygonal patches on the leaves and also on the pods. The damage is often increased by the presence of Hrysiphe communis and Uromyces appendi- culatus. rj, The same writer * has also given his attention to the rust of cereals in 8S. Paulo, where it is very frequent. The species found there is Puccina rubigo-vera and not P. graminis. He explains the absence of the latter by the long distance, which the uredospores are unable to traverse, and by the unfavourable conditions for the germination of the teleutospores (absence of low temperatures and want of Serberis) ; P. coronata is common on oats, and does great damage ; P. Sorghi is also found at 8. Paulo, but is comparatively harmless. Wm. Stuart t has experimented with potatoes to find disease-resisting varieties. Those of an upright habit, with firm, hairy, medium-sized leaves were found to be most resistant. Some hybrids showed high resistance to disease, but with slight formation of tubers, and were valuable only to hybridise with well-known cultivated varieties. F. W. Neger{ describes the ravages of Dermatea carpinea, a wound- parasite on the beech-trees. It establishes itself on dead branches and passes into the living parts of the tree, which it destroys. The spores are disseminated by damp winds. Neger produced the conidial-form in artificial cultures. A leaflet § has been issued with information concerning the Tree- root rot (Armillaria mellea). It attacks almost any kind of tree, travelling along the ground as rhizomorphous strands. Instructions are given for detecting the fungus, and for the best way of eradicating it. BankeEr, H. J.—A Contribution to a revision of the North American Hydnacee. [The writer introduces two new genera, Leaia and Grandinoides. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xii. (1906) pp. 99-194. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 331-2. DiEetT4HL, P.—Beschreibungen einiger neuer Uredineen. (Description of some new Uredinez.) [The species are from India, Japan, America, ete.] Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 303-8. FAIRMAN, CHARLES E.-—New or Rare Pyrenomycete from Western New York. [Most of the species described are new to science. | Proc. Roch. Acad. Sci., iv. (1906) pp. 215-24 (8 pls.). 3 + Pyrenomycete nove in leguminibus Robinia. (New Pyrenomycetes on the pods of Robinia pseud- acacia). [Fairman describes five new species. ] Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 326-8 (4 figs.). * Ext. de Annuario Esc. Polyt. (S. Paulo, 1905) 20 pp., 10 figs. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 226. + Vermont, Agric, Exper. Stat., Bull. cxxii. (1906) pp. 107-36. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 199. tf Tharandter Forstl. Jahrb., lvi. (1906) pp. 49-62. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 338-9. § Board of Agric. and Fish., Leaflet No. 174 (1906) 3 pp. (1 fig.). ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY ETC, 705 GLATFELTHR, N. M.—Preliminary List of Higher Fungi collected in the Vicinity of St. Louis from 1898-1905. [About 500 Basidiomycetes are included in the list; a number of them are described as new species. | Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Lowis, xvi. (1906) pp. 33-94. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 198. Hasevuorr, E., & Macu, F.—Ueber die Zersetzung der Futtermittel durch Schimmelpilze. (The destruction of fodder stuffs by fungi.) [Aspergillus and Penicilliwm destroy the fat of rice meal.] Mitt. Landw. Versuch. Marburg Landw. Jahrb., 1906, pp. 445-65, See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 309-10. Harior, P., & ParourtuARD, N.—Note sur le genre Colletomanginia. (Note on the genus Colletomangimia.) [A full description is given, and several figures to illustrate this new African fungus. ] Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 201-4 (1 pl. and 2 figs.). MatirR5, RENE—Notes Mycologiques. [Notes and descriptions of new or rare species, mostly of microfungi. } Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 329-35 (1 fig.). Matsumura, J.—Index Plantarum Japonicarum. (Index of Japanese plants.) [Fungi and lichens are included in the list.] ~ Maruzen (Tokio, 1906) pp. 127-221 and 365-8. PATOUILLARD, N.—Champignons Algero-Tunisiens nouveaux ou peu connus. (New or little known fungi from Algiers and Tunis.) [A number of new species are described. ] Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxii. (1906) pp. 195-200 (4 figs.) Prcx, C. H.—New Species of Fungi. [The new species are from various parts of American territory. ] Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxiii. (1906) pp. 213-21. Poutocs, J. B., & KAurFrMANN, C. H.—Michigan Fungi. [A continuation of a previous list by Longyear, chiefly microfungi.] Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci., vii. (1905) pp. 57-67. RAYNER, J. F.—A List of the Fungi of the New Forest. H. M. Gilbert and Son, Southampton and Winchester, 1906, 22 pp., 2 pls. ReuHm, H.—Ascomycetes novi. [New Ascomycetes of North America, France, Greece, and South Africa. ] Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 336-41. Rick, J.—Fungi Austro-Americani, Fase. iii. et iv. [Nos. 43-80 are listed ; several new species are added. | Tom. cit., pp. 309-12. * Pilze aus Rio Grande do Sul. [New species of Basidiomycetes, Gasteromycetes, and Ascomycetes are described. ] Broteria, v. (1906) 53 pp., 6 pls. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 361-2. ScHULZE-WEGE, JOHANNA—Verzeichnis der von mir im Thiiringen gesam- melten und gemalten Pilze. [Catalogue of fungi collected in Thuringia, and printed by the author.] Mitth. Thiir. Bot. Ver., xx. (1904-5) pp. 63-8. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 229. Sypow, H. & P.—Nove Fungorum Species. III. (These new fungi are from widely separated regions; there is one new genus, Botryoconis (Melanconiacez). Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 343-5. Ursprouna, A—Ueber den Bewegungsmechanismus des Trichia Capillitiums. (On the movement mechanism of the Trichia capillitium.) [The author discusses the movements and the changes in the capillitium. ] Ber. Deutsch, Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) pp. 216-22. 706 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO Wit, H.—Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Sporspilze ohne sporenbildung, Welche in Brauereibetrieben und deren Umgebung vorkommen. (Contributions to the knowledge of yeast-fungi, without spore-formation, which occur in brewing industries.) [Several species of Saccharomyces are described. | Centralbl. Bakt., xvii. (1906) pp. 1-7. Lichens. (By A, LoRRAIN SMITH.) French Lichens.*—K. Monguillon publishes a supplement to his Catalogue of Lichens for the Department of Sarthe. He gives a list of 200 species, half of them being new for the district. The others are published with additional localities. The number of rare species is notable. Relation of Lichens to Trees and Soil.t—Von Tubeuf finds that the smooth, bright bark of the Weymouth pine becomes dull black, uneven and bumpy under growths of lichens such as Xanthoria parvetina and Parmelia. The bumps are largest towards the centre of the growth, and are covered with small cracks. Microscopic examination showed an increase of cellular growth at these points which had burst the epidermis. He attributes this to the retention of water. A covering of moist cotton wool produced the same effect on healthy branches. In discussing the growth of mosses and lichens in the pine woods, E. Zederbauer { finds that Cladonia pyzidata and Peltigera horizontalis grew only on ground that had been cleared of leaves. Lichens grew more plentifully on trees where there was thick planting. In those places the growth of the bark was slow, and the trees were sometimes quite surrounded by lichens. British Coenogoniacez $—A. Lorrain Smith finds that the two genera belonging to this order are both represented in Britain. Raco- dium rupestre, of which the symbiotic alga is a Cladophora, has been found in several localities. Canogonium germanicum is more frequently met with; it is associated with TZ'rentepohlia aurea. Neither of these plants has been found in fruit. The writer traces the history of these plants in botanical literature where they have been described as Byssus nigra, Cystocoleus ebeneus, or Racodium rupestre, and the two plants have been constantly confused. A description is given of each, and measurements of various specimens of Canogonium germanicum. Anatomy of Collema.||—Abbé Hue finds three types of structure among the species of Collema he has examined. (1) The hyphe become vertical towards the surface, anastomose more frequently, and so form a rudimentary cortex. (2) At the summit of the vertical hyphe one or * Bull. Acad. Internat. Géogr. Bot., 1906, 30 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) p. 312. + Nat. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw., i. (1906). See also Centralbl. Bakt., xvi. (1906) p. 753. ~ Mitth. k.k. Forstl. Ver. Mariabrunn. Wien: Wilhelm Frick, 1906, 13 pp., 9 figs. See also Bot. Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 129, 130. § Journ. of Bot., xliv. (1906) pp. 266-8. \ Journ. de Bot., xx. (1906) pp. 5-18. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 707 two of the cells become larger, and a more advanced type of cortex results. (3) A true cortex is formed by the terminal cells of these hyphz becoming rounded off as well as larger and by sending out short branches, the whole forming a kind of plectenchyma. The development of the fruits is also traced, and detailed descriptions given of five new species and of several varieties. Cladonias in the Islands of the North Sea.*—M. Sandstede follows Nylander and Wainio in his study of this lichen genus. In the introduction he gives the characters which distinguish the species and forms of the genus. ach species is described and critically compared with the plants from the different exsiccatea. The islands proved to be less rich in species than the mainland, but several additions were made to the flora, and three new varieties are described. Notes on Cladonia.j—Bruce Fink continues his descriptive and critical notes on American species of Cladonia. He finds that Cladonia subcariosa differs from Cl. cariosa in having larger squamules and less fissured and carious podetia. Cl. mitrula and C1. leptophylla, which are also passed under review, are very near to each other, but are dis- tinguished by the smaller squamules and podetia of the latter. They both grow usually on soil. “Chemical Tests” in Determining Lichens.t{——The late Dr. William Nylander found that the tissues of lichens reacted differently, according to the species, to the application of various chemical solutions. These were chiefly potassium hydrate and calcium hypochlorite. Since his day, opinions have differed as to the diagnostic value of these tests. G. K. Merril sums up the evidence for and against their employment. Most of the American lichenologists have pronounced against their use. Merril himself considers them of great use in the determination of species, and in this matter he is in harmony with workers on the Continent at the present day. ERICHSEN, E.—Beitrage zur Flechtenflora der Umgegend von Hamburg und Holsteins. (Contributions to the lichen flora of the neighbourhood of Hamburg and Holstein.) [The list includes 300 species from a somewhat small area. ] Verh. Nat. Ver. Hamburg, xiii. (1905) pp. 44-104. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 380. Herre, A. W. C. T.—The Foliaceous and Fruticose Lichens of the Santa Cruz Peninsula, California. Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., vii. (1906) pp. 325-96. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 380-1. Hussn, O.—Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Flechten und ihrer charakteristischen Bes- tandteile. (Contribution to the knowledge of lichens and of their characteristic constituents. ) ; [A study of the chemical constitution of Usnea, Alectoria, Cetraria, and others. } Journ. Prakt. Chemie, nf. \xxiii. (1906) pp. 1138-76 See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 381-2. Howe, Ruc. Heser, JUN.—Lichens of Mount Monadnock, New Hampshire. [A list is given of 71 species, with the habitat. | Amer. Nat., xl. (1906) pp. 661-5. * Abh, Nat. Ver. Bremen, xviii. (1906) pp. 384-456 (4 pls.). See also Bot Centralbl., cii. (1906) pp. 121-2. + Bryologist, ix. (1906) pp. 57-60 (1 pl.). } Tom. cit. pp. 60-71, 708 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO ZAHLBRUCKNER, A.—Lichenes rariores exsiccati. Decades vii., viii. [The species issued belong to very varied genera. ] Vienna, 1906. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 382-3. Beitrag zur Flechtenflora Kretas. (Contribution to the fungus flora of Crete.) [The list includes 89 species. It corresponds fairly well with the flora of the Grecian main- land, SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien. Math.- Nat. K1., exv. (1906) pp. 502-23. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 383. % +5 Neue Beitrage zur Flechtenflora des Pozsenyer Komitates. (New contributions to the lichen flora of the Poz- senyer country.) [The conditions of the country round the Car- pathians are described, along with the lists of lichens new to the neighbourhood or to science. | Verh. Ver. Nat. Heilk. Preszburg, xxv. [1904] (1905) pp. 119-31. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) p. 383. Y, Die naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien Ascolichenes. [An account of lichens including Cladome, some of the crustaceous forms, and a large part of the group of lichens associated with blue-green alge. | Engler und Prantl, Lief. 225, pp. 145-92. Leipzig, Wilhelm Engelmann, 1906. Zoprr, W.—Zur Kenntnis der Flechtenstoffe. (The knowledge of lichen con- stituents.) [A large number of lichens have been examined, and their products de- scribed. | LInebig’s Ann. Chemie, cccxlvi. (1906) pp. 82-127. See also Ann. Mycol., iv. (1906) pp. 384-5. Schizophyta. Schizomycetes. Bacillus flavo-aurantiacus sporogenes.* —W. N. Klimenko has isolated from Lisle’s antisyphilitic serum a bacillus that forms spores, and stains by Gram’s method. It coagulates milk, producing an acid reaction; it forms orange-yellow colonies on mannite agar, yellow colonies on simple agar; it exhibits a brownish-yellow pigment when grown on potato ; it is not pathogenic for animals. The organism is a long motile bacillus with rounded ends, and 10-20 flagella distributed over the surface. The spore is oval and usually central. The optimum temperature is 37° C. When grown on gelatin the medium is liquefied ; broth is at first clouded, but later a fine pellicle forms at the surface, and there is a slimy yellow deposit ; old broth cultures have a cheesy odour ; on Petruschky’s medium after 24 hours there is a production of acid, but later (72-96 hours), it shows an alkaline reaction. Media containing methylen-blue are not decolorised ; there is no formation of indol. Spirillosis of Fowls.t—Levaditi and Manouglian find that the Spiriilum gallinarum, the parasite of “ septicémie brésilienne” described * Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xlii. (1906) p. 221. + Ann. Inst. Pasteur., xx. (1906) p. 593. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 709 by Marchoux and Salimbeni, is not confined to the vascular system, but invades the glandular tissues and enters into contact with the various cellular elements, though it does not appear to penetrate the protoplasm of the cells. The crisis that terminates the spirillar infection is caused by the phagocytosis of the spirilla by the macrophages of the spleen and liver. The authors find that this spirillum is able to infect the ovule of the animal. Microbe of Whooping-Cough.* —J. Bordet and O. Gengou, by means of their special blood agar medium,f have isolated from the expectoration of early cases of whooping cough a small ovoid bacillus, much resembling the influenza bacillus, staining more deeply at the contour and at the ends, and not staining by Gram’s method. The organism is unlike B. znfluenze in its inability to develop on the ordinary media, and has a much less tendency to produce involution forms. Serum tests served to demonstrate the specific nature of the bacillus, and to confirm it as the causative element of whooping-cough. Experimental Production of Transmissible Varieties of B. tuber- culosis and of Antituberculous Vaccine.j{—-S. Arloing, after referring to his previous experiments by which he succeeded in establishing by a process of selection, a constant strain of human BA. tuberculosis of lowered virulence, notes that by sub-culturing this organism in broth at gradually increasing temperatures, he was able to obtain a constant variety of B. tuberculosis that grew at 43°-44° C., and possessed a markedly lowered pathogenicity, and he employed this organism successfully for antituberculous vaccination. Fibrillar Structure of Bacteriacee.$—J. Kunstler and C. Gineste find that, besides the vesicular elements of the parenchyma and the longitudinal striation of the tegument, which are doubtless of a special fibrillar nature, there is observable in the parenchyma of Bacteriaceze certain characteristic figures that suggest a possible fibrillar constitution. From observations on Spirillum periplaneticum (a spirillum parasitic on Periplaneta americana), the authors noted the fundamental arrangement of these figures, the aspect of which differed with the age of the individual and with the optical plane studied, the general appearance being that of a trabecular network traversing the parenchyma of the cell. Spirochete of Balanitis and of the Mouth.||—E. Hoffmann and S. v. Prowazek find that the so-called flagella of Spirocheta pallida Schaudinn occurs also with other varieties of Spirochzetee—e. g., those of balanitis and of the mouth. The structure is not of the nature of a bacterial flagellum, but is, as is well demonstrated in Spirocheta buccalis, a continuation of the cell-protoplasm (periplast). Morphology of Vibrio cholere asiatice.¢—H. Hammerl, referring to the various forms the Vibrio cholere assumes under different sur- rounding conditions, considers that the appearances are to be regarded * Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) p. 731. + See this Journal, 1906, p. 727. t Comptes Rendus, exlii. (1906) p. 1395. § Op. cit., clxiii. (1906) p. 84. || Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xli. (1906) p. 817. 4] Op. cit, xlii. (1906) p. 1. 710 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO not as results of involution and degeneration, but as due to physiological variations in the permeability of the body-membrane of the organism. Disease of Guinea-pigs that resembles Plague.*—K. Byloff has iso- lated from guinea-pigs a bacillus that produces symptoms and morbid appearances resembling those of bubonic plague. The organism is very slightly motile, and a single flagellum was demonstrated by Zettnow’s method. The site of infection is in the digestive tract, a general infection spreading hence by the blood and lymph channels. The bacillus should be classed,with the bacteria of hemorrhagic septicaemia. The author contrasts this organism with B. pseudotuberculosis of other writers, and has named it B. pestis intestinalis cavie. Bi-polar Staining of the Plague Microbe.{—N. v. Westenrijk finds that the superficial layers of an agar culture of this organism show mostly cocco-bacillary forms with marked bi-polar staining, the deeper layers showing bacillary forms mostly uniformly stained or showing vacuoles. After cultivating the organism in atmospheres of hydrogen, carbonic dioxide, and oxygen, the author considers that the variation in form and staining reaction is due to the abundance or otherwise of oxygen. The vacuolation of the microbe is the result of its metabolism, and is dependent and proportional to it. The bi-polar staining is the result of a physiological plasmolysis. Action on Bacteria of Electrical Discharges.{—A. G. Foulerton and A. M. Kellas have shown that when bacteria suspended in water are exposed in an atmosphere of air or of pure nitrogen, to the action of electrical discharges of high potential and rapid frequency, sufficient quantities of nitrous and nitric acids are taken up in the solution within fifteen minutes to sterilise the emulsion. If the discharge takes place inan atmosphere of hydrogen, or carbonic dioxide, or carbonic monoxide, sufficient peroxide of hydrogen is formed after a time to exercise a distinct germicidal action. In no case did the authors find any evidence that under the time conditions, the electrical current or its discharge had any direct injurious influence on the bacteria, apart from the accompanying formation of chemical germicidal substances, and from whatever effects may be exercised by the heat rays. Streptococci Pathogenic for Man.S—F. W. Andrewes and T. J. Horder have made a detailed study of Streptococci, more especially of those pathogenic for man. The authors have grouped these organisms into five main types, Streptococcus pyogenes, Streptococcus saliwvarius, Streptococcus angiosus, Streptococcus faecalis, and Pneumococcus, accord- ing to their reactions with Gordon’s nine tests, viz., reactions to, milk, neutral-red, saccharose, lactose, raffinose, inulin, salicin, coniferin, mannite ; their growth on gelatin ; their morphology (longus or brevis) ; and their pathogenicity. Referring to the bearing of their observations on the treatment of streptococcal infections, the authors point out that the polyvalent sera * Centralbl. Bakt., 1te Abt. Orig., xlii. (1906) p. 5. + Tom. cit., pp. 181-283. + Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxxviii. (1906) p. 60. § Lancet, 1906, ii. pp. 708=855. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. yalat now used are only polyvalent in the sense of having been prepared from a number of strains of Streptococci derived from different sources, but not necessarily presenting any differences in chemical reactions, and probably often really univalent. Bacterial Test whereby Particles shed from the Skin may be Detected in the Air.*—M. H. Gordon finds that one particular Staphy- lococcus, with uniform and definite characters—=St. epidermidis albus— may be considered as characteristic of the epidermis of the hand, cheek, scalp, and forearm, and its detection in air may be regarded as indicat- ing the presence of particles shed from the skin. The author gives the cultural and biochemical tests by which this organism may be recognised. The Production of Arabin by Bacteria.t—W. Ruhland finds that B. spongiosus produces a gum consisting of pure arabin. The sources of the gum are cane-sugar and raffinose. The gum formed by the cherry is an arabin-galactin mixture belonging to the galactose group and clearly distinguishable from bacterial gums. The bacterial origin of the gum described by Greig Smith in a Phanerogam is not evident and very improbable. Physiological Action of the Chemical Products of B. enteriditis sporogenes.t—S. Martin grew B. enteriditis sporogenes in broth, liquid serum, alkali-albumen, broth, and on solid serum, which was rapidly liquefied by the organism. After the bacilli had been filtered from the culture media, the filtrate was found on experiment to possess no toxic properties. Specific Agglutinins Formed by B. coli communis, B. typhosus, B. paratyphosus, and B. proteus vulgaris.$—S. Martin has found that the agglutinin of B. proteus vulgaris has no action against B. typhosus, B. coli communis, or B. paratyphosus. The other micro- organisms show some overlapping in their agglutinating reactions in low dilutions; the agglutinin of B. typhosus reacts slightly with B. coli communis and B. paratyphosus; the agglutinin of B. coli communis reacts very slightly with B. typhosus, but not at all with B. paratyphosus ; the agglutinin of B. paratyphosus reacts slightly with B. typhosus, and more markedly, though irregularly, with B. coli communis ; in high dilutions—1 in 5000 and 1 in 1000—this overlapping is not observed. Contagious Epithelioma of Birds.||—Et. Burnet contributes a study of this disease which has the nature of a contagious affection resembling molluscum contagiosum, and producing local epidermic proliferations which have an epitheliomatous appearance, and the virus of which is able to pass through a Berkefeld filter. The disease affects farmyard poultry, appearing on the non-feathered parts of the head as small tumours, which after three or four weeks dry up and disappear without leaving a scar ; when more extensive and affecting the feathered parts, the bird * Rep. Local Gov. Board Med. Officer, Supp., 1904-5, p. 387. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) p. 395. + Rep. Local Gov. Board Med. Officer, Supp., 1904-5, p. 377. § Tom. cit., p. 381. || Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xx. (1906) p. 742. 712 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO often succumbs to some secondary infection. From observations on the pigeon, the author finds that the disease can only be produced by ingestion, and that although contact is a possible means of infection, it is probably not in this way that natural infection occurs. The virus is especially resistant to drying, but in solution it is readily destroyed. The immunity produced artificially by moculation of the virus was irregular in its duration; only the living virus can confer immunity. Sections of the tumours prepared and stained according to various methods, all showed the same appearance of the cell-inclusions, which the author considers are of microbial nature, and not parasitic or pro- ducts of cell-secretion or degeneration formed by the action of some unknown virus; but the bacterial nature of these inclusions must remain doubtful until cultivations can be obtained. Bacterial Disease of Oleander.*—C. O. Smith finds that a disease affecting the stem and leaves of Oleander, causing the formation of hard woody knots, is due to a bacterium, the cultural and morphological characters of which enable it to be identified with Bacillus Olew, an organism producing a similar disease of the olive. * Bot. Gazette, xlii. (1906) pp. 301-10 (4 figs.). + See this Journal, 1887, p. 286; 1890, p, 498. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1418 MICROSCOPY, A. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* (1) Stands. Old Portable Microscope by Dollond—Major F. R. W. Sampson has kindly presented to the Society this instrument (fig. 76). The Society has not hitherto possessed one of this form, and it is therefore a very desirable acquisition, more especially as it bears the maker’s name. It seems to be an adaptation of Cuff’s New Constructed Double Microscope, the body, stage, and some other details and the acces- sories, being similar to those of Cuff’s instrument, but the pillar, instead of being fixed, is hinged to a bracket secured to the inside of the bottom of the case. The Microscope always remains in the case, which serves as a base for it. When packed the instrument lies horizontally in its box, but it can be set at any position from the horizontal to the vertical. One end of the box is hinged so as to let down and allow the mirror to project beyond when the body is elevated. To economise space in packing, the body is removed from the socket of the arm, and the stage is racked down low enough to allow of the lower part of the body being passed through the stage. The latter is then racked up until the eye- piece enters the socket of the arm from below: the body is thus securely held in place. The pillar is square, and, as already mentioned, hinged at its lower end. The stage is attached to a sliding bracket, and is focused by rack-and-pinion. ‘There are two springs under the stage for holding a small tube for observing objects in water. The tube is held in a diagonal position to prevent the water running out, and it also permits any air to escape and not remain to obstruct the vision as it would do if the tube were corked and used in a horizontal position. The mirror is concave, and can be moved up and down on the pillar. The body slides into a socket at the end of a short arm that is secured to the top of the pillar. The part of the body standing above the arm forms the eye-piece, the eye-lens. of which is compound, consisting of two lenses, the upper one being plano-convex and the other bi-convex. The field- lens is also bi-convex. There is a micrometer scale ruled in squares, forty to the inch, screwed into the eye-piece just below the diaphragm. Originally there were six powers—simple lenses—but No. 1, the highest power, is missing. The remaining apparatus consists of the usual spring-holder for “sliders,” a cone for cutting off extraneous light from the mirror, a lieberkuhn and fitting that slides on the lower part of the body, bull’s-eye and arm, stage forceps, etc. There are also two * This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. 714 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO lenses of low magnification which may have belonged to a sub-stage condenser, but there is now no fitting for them. This Microscope resembles one that had belonged to Sir David Brewster, and was exhibited at the Meeting of the Society on November 17, 1897, by Mr. C. Lees Curties. An illustrated description by Mr. Nelson appeared in the Journal for February, 1898. From the particulars Fic. 76. there given Sir David Brewster’s instrument appears to have been larger. Its general appearance was very similar to the one now exhibited, but the stage is rectangular and has clips upon it for holding slides in position. The case measures outside 114 in. by 54 in. by 54 in. deep. The total length of the body over all, from eye-cap to nose-piece, is 6} in., ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 517 and from nose-piece to field-lens 4 in. The concave mirror is 14 in. diameter and 35 in. focus; there is no plane mirror. The pillar is 9¢ in. in length, from top to centre of rule-joint, and is }}in. square in section. The limb, or arm, is fixed ; the centre projecting 1,°, beyond the pillar. Granger’s Pocket Microscope.— The Society is indebted to a Member of the Quekett Microscopical Club, who desires to remain anonymous, for this interesting little pocket Microscope (fig. 77). The donor writes that it was given to the person from whom he obtained it some thirty years ago, or more, by one of the Grangers, who were a family of lawyers. On the underside is engraved the following :— “ B. Granger, Tettenhall, 1790.” This little object seems to have been a forerunner of the modern pocket magnifier. It is a sort of multum in parvo, for, besides an arrangement for viewing an object impaled on the point of a needle, it contains two other magnifiers, one of which is packed away within the mount of the other. The inner magnifier has an arrangement for Fie. 77. containing a minute living or other object between two glasses, one of which is concave. The lenses are all of very low power. In this connection it may be mentioned that among the apparatus belonging to the Pritchard Microscope exhibited at the June Meeting by Mr. Holder, was an object that no one could then understand. It is evidently part of a similar box of magnifiers. The lens and needle for viewing opaque objects, and the bottom cover, are missing, and the inner magnifier is different, for, instead of the arrangement for con- taining a live or other object, it is fitted with a second lens, thus increasing its magnifying power. scree These two specimens have been shown to Mr. Nelson, who says he has seen several similar to them, but they were made of ivory. In the figure, A represents the brass box closed. B represents the dome C removed, and shows the arrangement for viewing an object fixed on the point of the needle. E is a magnifier formed of the central part or body of the box, the top and bottom covers being removed. It has a lens of low power mounted at the upper end. The magnifier D, which has a lens at its upper end and a live-box at its lower end, goes inside E when the box is closed. 716 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO The following are some of the dimensions of this toy :—Total height of A 1Z in.; diameter of base 1,}; in., diameter at centre 33 in. ; height of dome © 13 in.; height of E between screwed parts ? in. ; height of D 11 in.; diameter at top in., at bottom 33 in. Watson’s Junior Metallurgical Microscope.*— This instrument (fig. 78) is on the lines of an ordinary Student’s Microscope, but the stage is a solid one designed especially for holding metal specimens, and can be raised and lowered in the optic axis, and permits of a separation between the nose-piece of the Microscope and the surface of the stage of 5 in. The interest which is being shown in the study of Metallurgy has caused students to inquire for an instrument of simple form and less costly design than the large models which have hitherto been available. Zeiss’ Measuring Microscopes.j—1. Microscopes for Metal Testing. Models A, B, C of these instruments are intended for the measurement of short lengths of metals (to 20 mm.), with an accuracy of 0°01 mm. Their upper structure is essentially alike, and consists mainly of an ordinary Microscope with rack-and-pinion, the Microscope being movable on a horizontal slide by means of a screw of exactly 1 mm. thread. The spindle is rotated about its long axis by a micrometer drum whose circumference is graduated to a hundred parts. Hach part corresponds, therefore, to a longitudinal movement of the Microscope equal to 0°01 mm. The magnification of the Microscope can be adapted to the object by alteration of objective and ocular. Models A and B have been constructed to the design and requirements of Dr. Schwinning. Model A (plate XX. fig. 1). The object is placed on a simple ebonite stage-plate. The horseshoe foot rests on its base with four points only, two of the points being the rounded ends of the screws 8, and 8,. If the piece of work, on which the measurement is to be made, be large enough and approximately plane, the Microscope can itself be placed thereon and sharply adjusted with rack-and-pinion on to the object at a distance corresponding to that of the stage-plate T. The whole of the upper structure of the Microscope is fastened to the lower part merely by means of a stout horizontal plug fitting into a strong cut collar H clamped by a screw K. It is thus possible to remove the upper part and adapt it to a laboratory stand for more convenient examination of any large object (plate XX. fig. 2). A magnification of 15-20 diameters is found to be sufficient. Model B. This is especially intended for measurement in two mutually perpendicular directions. This convenience might be of im- portant application in certain cases (e.g. in testing surfaces not perfectly plane), and is attained by equipping the lower part with a rotatory object- stage bearing on its circumference two grooves at 90° apart into which a spring engages. After measurements in one direction, the stage is rotated through 90°, and then a second series of measurements can be made. The upper part of the Microscope remains the same as in * Watson and Sons’ Special Catalogue, 1906. + Carl Zeiss’ Special Catalogue, Jena, October 1906. VA? >, 1906. JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 2 O14 6 (OIA [To face p. 716. Pl. XXII. 1906. JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. a See Fie, 4. Oo =) Lili Erc. 6: Istteh, a, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. FDPcDnR?azHP?}.§| pil Fig. 78. Dec. 1 9th, 1906 717 718 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO model A. The instrument can be applied to a large object, either directly or by help of a laboratory stand, exactly as A. 2. Measuring Microscope for Negatives —This (plate XX. fig. 3) is, in the first instance, intended for the measurement of photographs of physical observations, e.g. spectra. It has the same ranges of movement and accuracy as models A and B. It may also be used for exploring plates of 6 by 9 cm., and for many other purposes. It differs from the previous instruments in possessing a stable understage with illuminating mirror, and a strong stage with central aperture of about 3 cm. diameter. But it resembles them in being provided with the collar H, and similar overstage. It has the same facilities for adaptation to a laboratory stand. The square strong stage is so worked on its right and left side planes that these can serve as guides to a metal frame sliding on the stage top. On this frame the plate to be measured is secured with two springs ; the plate is then pushed on to the millimetre divisions serving asa bed. The frame can thus be pushed perpendicularly to the direction of the slide-guides and clamped by the screw N. Comparison of equal intervals of spectra is attained by this movement of the frame. Besides these millimetre graduations, there is also a second series, perpendicular to the first and readable through a window pierced in the frame. The two series serve as co-ordinates for localising any spot on the plate. 3. Capillary Measuring Microscopes.—These are made in two models (D, E), and have been suggested by the firm of F. A. Kihnlenz. They are intended for direct reading of the internal diameters of capillary tubes of any length, and therefore facilitate the rapid sorting of large quantities of such tubes according to their bore. The Microscope is adjustable with rack-and-pinion T, and has a magnification of about 100 diameters. The ocular contains a scale (plate XXI. fig. 5) reading the object to the hundredth part of a millimetre. Plate XXI. fig. 4 shows model D, about half full size. The capillary tubes, which may be 13 metres long, are placed on the board B, and the operator com- mences to read the lowest layer. As the Microscope is more easily moved than the heavy tubes, the instrument is placed on a slide which traverses the row by means of the hand-wheel R. In this way every tube of the lowermost layer can be successively brought into the field of view of the Microscope. Plate XXI. fig. 5 shows the appearance presented in the ocular. It is found convenient to take first the higher reading (28 in this case) and then the lower, as the figures are then conveniently placed for subtraction. It would, of course, be possible to place one edge of the circumference on the zero and take the diameter by direct reading ; but experience shows this to be a slower way. By means of the screw §, the board is lowered till the next layer of tubes comes into view. These are tested in similar fashion. The instrument may also be used for calibrating thermometer tubes. In that case the spindle carries a micrometer screw, and the hand-wheel has a micrometer drum divided into 100 parts. Model EH, seen in plate XXI. fig. 6, consists of a Microscope with rack-and-pinion. It has the same optical equipment as model D, but is mounted on a pillar of adjustable height. It may be used for the tubes, ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 719 as above, but by application of suitable objectives and oculars, may also be used as a reading Microscope for general laboratory use. FaBpRE, Cu.—Les nouveaux microscopes. [Gives some account of recent progress in the manufacture of instruments. ] Memoirs de V Acad, des Sci. de Toulouse, v. (1905) pp. 289-96. PuatTE, L.—Demonstration eines Schau-Mikroskopes fiir 6ffentliche Museen. Compt. Rend. des Séances du Congrés internat. de Zool. Berne, 1904. Basle, 1905, pp. 529-30 (1 fig.). (3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. Watson’s Ball-bearing Sliding Bar—The illustration (fig. 79) shows the method by which this sliding bar is adapted to the stages in Watson and Sons’ Microscopes. A grooved edge is provided in the stage, and lil UNL TM, Fira. 79. two steel balls fit into the grooves and are maintained in position by a light spring pressing on the back. A very soft movement is obtained by this means. Simple. Photometer.*—Stolze suggests the use of two right-angled prisms, cde and ¢ fg, rig. 80, fastened to a thin sheet of opal glass. Assuming the light sources to be at @ and 6, the prisms have only to be shifted tojthe right or left till the illumination is even, and the Fie. 80. distances ac and bc measured; then the intensities of the lights will be as (ac): (6c), This arrangement can obviously also be used to compare the actinic power of the two lights, and would be useful in measuring the power of the various illuminants for the Microscope. Tswett’s Luminoscope.t—M. Tswett, in discussing the interest universally excited by ultramicroscopes, draws attention to his lumino- * Brit. Journ. Photography. See also English Mechanic, Ixxxiv. (1906) p. 299 1 fig.). eae Zur Ultramikroscopie, Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxiv. (1906) p. 234. See also Zeitschr. wiss. Mikrosk., xxiii. (1906) p. 199. : 3B 720 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO scope, invented and described as far back as 1901.* In this instrument a strong beam of light is axially directed through a test-tube filled with the fluid to be examined, the tube being ina dark box. The lght- trajectory is observed perpendicularly through a lateral ocular-tube. If the fluid is capable of fluorescence, or in a stricter sense not optically empty, the appearance presented is that of a luminous (fluorescent or opalescent) beam. A polarising prism applied in the ocular opening distinguishes between fluorescence or opalescence, for the latter, being polarised, is extinguished by rotation of the prism. ‘T'swett’s lumino- scope does not render possible the direct observation of ultramicroscopic particles, but it establishes in a general way the presence of such particles. In physiological-chemical investigations (e. g., of chlorophyll pigments), where the observer has to be specially careful with regard to purity or accuracy of the solutions, or where he has to deal with mere traces of fluorescent materials, he will find the luminoscope an indis- pensable instrument. (4) Photomicrography. Principles on which Direct Photography of Colours Depends ; Direct Colour-Photography Depending on Prismatic Dispersion. f M. G. Lippmann points out that two conditions are necessary in order that a photographic proof may reproduce the colours of the model. 1. The sensitive plate should clearly distinguish the differences existing between the various radiations combined in an incident ray: in other words, the system employed should analyse the incident ray. 2. In order that this incident ray, after impact, should be recon- stituted with its colour, the system employed should be reversible, so as to effect the synthesis of elementary colours. Now, prismatic dispersion as used in a spectrocope is such a system. A photographic spectroscope is composed essentially of a slit f, a prism, a lens, and a sensitive plate. It evidently effects the analysis of the light incident on the slit ; thus it remains to show that the apparatus is by itself reversible and that it does reconstitute after impact, the coloured light which has impinged on the slit. Let us suppose that the sensitive plate has been developed, a positive ob- tained, and the plate replaced by the positive. If the slit has been illumin- ated by (e.g.) red rays, these rays will have produced in the spectrum an image 7 of the slit. This image is transparent on the positive proof and constitutes a kind of slit which, when the plate has been replaced, is the conjugate image of f. Inversely f is the conjugate image of r. It follows that, if f be illuminated with white light, the transparent region r will receive only the rays which have formed it, and will only transmit those. If the light is inverted and r is illuminated by white light, only those rays will be transmitted which have left their trace on r. This reasoning applies to light of any refrangibility whatever. When the positive proof is replaced by its negative the slit is illuminated by a light exactly complementary to that radiation which had acted on it, and thus * Vorrichtung zur Beobachtung von Fluoreszenz- und Opaleszenzerscheinungen, Zeit. Physik. Chemie, xxxvi. p. 450; Constitution physicochimique du Grain de Chlorophylle, Trav. de la Soc. des Naturalistes de Kazan, xxxv. p. 58.. + Comptes Rendus, exliii. (1906) pp. 270-2. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 721 r in the spectrum is opaque. Thus, this particular radiation will not be able to reach the slit, for the only radiations of this kind which would have been able to fall upon the slit would have had to pass through r. In order to apply these principles to the reproduction of colours the author has installed the following apparatus. The single slit of a spectro- scope is replaced by a series of slits very close together, viz. the fine transparent lines of a web, five threads to the millimetre, as used in industrial photography. This web is fixed in the opening of a photo- graphic enlarger, i.e. of a box fitted at the mouth with a slit carrying a sensitive plate, a convergent lens being fixed inside. A small-angled prism is arranged before this lens with its edge parallel to the lines of the web. The image is projected on the web; the sensitive plate is then developed and replaced. When the apparatus is illuminated with white light the image is seen with its colours. Each line of the web acts as the slit of a spectroscope. At the distance of distinct vision the lines of the web are no longer seen and the image appears continuous. The experiment was at first made with the spectrum of electric light, which was reproduced complete with its colours, a positive being used. With a negative the colours were replaced by their complementaries. A coloured window, red and green, projected on this web was similarly successfully reproduced. It is necessary that the prism should have an angle so small that each spectrum should have a length less than an interline, otherwise the spectra will overlap. It is also necessary that the photometric plate should be re-inserted in exactly the same position. Very sensitive orthochromatic plates may be used. It must be admitted that the necessity of having to replace the proof in the same apparatus which has produced it is not very convenient. When seen in the hand the proof has the ordinary black-and-white appearance. Seen with a lens it appears lined, and each line is divided into small zones which are the parts of an elementary spectrum. The author suggests the following as a possible improvement of the process. Insert a sensitive plate in an ordinary dark camera, without a prism, but with a web of, say, five threads to the millimetre. Superpose on the web a network of 500 threads to the millimetre. Every luminous point projected on the plate is received as a spectrum and so photographed. On applying the web with its network upon the developed proof the colours of the original ought to be seen, the only condition being that the eye should occupy the position of the objective. The system is, in fact, reversible in virtue of the reasoning above given. Lippmann, M. G.—Remarques générales sur la photographie interferentielle des couleurs. Comptes Rendus, cexliii, (1906) pp. 273-4. (5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. Brass, A.—Ueber die Doppelbrechung. a Centralbl. Zeit. f. Opt. w. Mech., xxvii. (1906) pp. 192-4 (1 pl.). Harz, H.—Kin Modell zur Erlanteruug der Zerlegung eines linear polarisierten Lichtstrahles bei der Doppelbrechung. ; : Zeitschr. f. Unterricht, xix. (1906) p. 175. Korrser, F.—Ein Freihandversuch zur Ermittlung des Brechungsexponeten des Glases. Tom. cit., p. 167. 1a2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO (6) Miscellaneous. Principles of Microscopy: being a Handbook to the Microscope.* This book fills a gap in the literature of the subject, inasmuch as it is written for the information and guidance of microscopists, to whom the theory of the instrument with which they work is a matter of practical, as distinguished from speculative interest. Although the undulatory theory and the mathematical analysis of light pervade the work, they are never suffered to become either the subject-matter of discussion or its medium. The author absolutely eschews the “ inarticulate” method of expression by means of mathematical signs, with the result that the book is a literary work from end to end. Notwithstanding the abstruse nature of many of the problems attacked, it is readable by everybody, mathematician or not, to whom the Microscope is practically familiar. The work is divided into two parts. ‘The first part deals with the “object picture,” a term used to denote the object under that aspect which furnishes a picture to the eye. Object pictures are classified under four heads—as “outline pictures, colour pictures, outline and colour pictures, and pictures in relief.” The advantages and dis- advantages which attach to these various kinds of images—considered as means of revealing the form and structure of objects—and their liability to originate false impressions, form the subject matter of the first chapter. The next three chapters of the first part are devoted to the examination of the practical consequence deducible from the principles developed in the first chapter, and in these the theory and practice of illumination, mounting, and staining are successively dis- cussed, while the fifth chapter sums up the whole result, and points the moral of what has preceded. These five chapters together thus form a treatise upon the preparation and exhibition of transparent objects in the Microscope, with special reference to such objects as occur in the course of medical practice and research. The second part is much the larger part of the book, and is devoted to the image formed by the Microscope. This part of the work, there- fore, covers more familiar ground than the first, since all the text- books which treat of the theory of the Microscope deal with this subject. The mode of treatment is, however, in this part equally original, and an impression which the author is very successful in leav- ing on the mind of his reader is that there is nothing occult about the theory of the Microscopic image. The optical laws involved, even where high magnification is concerned, are all illustrated by experiments which can be made with low-power lenses and large scale objects. The notion that microscopic vision is something sz generis finds here no quarter. Ten chapters are devoted to this division of the work. The first of these—the sixth chapter of the book—is devoted to the discussion of images formed by simple apertures, from which the general laws of image-formation are very ingeniously deduced, and the main ideas, such as magnification, illumination, definition, and resolution—with which the reader is concerned to become familiar—are easily intro- * By Sir A. EK. Wright, M.D. F.R.S. London: Archibald Constable and Co., Ltd., 1906, xxii. and 250 pp., 18 pls. and 97 figs. in text. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 723 duced and clearly illustrated. Following this is a chapter upon image- formation by means of lenses, or, as our author says with greater exactitude, by means of “ lens-armed” apertures. The essential im- portance of the aperture in the formation of an image is never allowed to escape the reader’s attention, and leads in the end to a notable eluci- dation of some of what are commonly supposed to be the more abstruse problems in the theory of the Microscope. But it is true—and a truth of which the reader of this book grows very conscious as he proceeds— that abstruseness is a matter depending almost wholly upon the point of view and mode of approach. Many things which seem remote and abstract when treated merely as aberrations become very concrete and very intelligible when presented as fundamental facts. The question whether a particular phenomenon shall take rank as the rule or the exception is usually a question simply of the point of view. Sir A. E. Wright chooses to build up his theory of the Microscope about an aperture as its essential element. The various lenses and combinations of lenses which enter into the composition of the instrument are merely so many appliances for supplying the deficiencies of the “vacant aperture.” They improve the definition of the image which the simple aperture yields, and increase the resolving power of the beam which it transmits, but the theory of the instrument and of its image is nowhere involved with the theory of lenses; and the reader—working out by easy steps the properties of the simplest imaginable images—finds that he is successfully grappling with some of the tougher problems of image formation almost before he is aware that he is fairly launched upon the subject. Thus the seventh chapter, which for the first time in- troduces the lens and its function to the reader’s notice, puts him in possession, and almost without effort, of matters so “abstruse” as Huyghen’s law of wave-front propagation, and La Grange’s numerical relation between magnifying power and the diameter of the Ramsden disk. Succeeding chapters treat of the defects which occur in the image through aberration caused by the lens, and diffraction produced by the aperture—in connection with which latter subject a singularly complete series of experiments serves to illustrate the effect which the form and dimensions of the antipoint have upon the appearance of the image. In this connection the ‘“ Abbe theory” comes up for discussion, and an exposition of the optical system of the eye, and of the psychological factors involved in the use of the Microscope, completes what may be called the abstract theory of image-formation with the aid of lenses. What is really a subdivision of this second part commences with the eleventh chapter, in which the simple Micro- scope is discussed. Following upon this bya regular development comes a chapter dealing with image-formation in the compound Microscope, and another in which the anatomy of the compound instrument is discussed in detail. We thus come to the fourteenth chapter, which deals with the much-neglected subject of dark-field illumina- tion, and following this is a chapter in which the corners of the subject are swept up by the discussion of various adjustments neces- sary for securing a critical image. The sixteenth (and last) chapter is 724 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO devoted to the question of the limit of resolving power, and the problems especially associated with high magnification. Very remarkable is the way in which the whole subject is illustrated by experiments, and experiments conducted by means, for the most part, of apparatus of extraordinary simplicity. The writer’s resource in this direction may be illustrated by his discussion of subjective colours, which is based, in fact, upon a coloured plate facing page 20. Excellently coloured diagrams accompany the text and make the mean- ing clear to the eye, and by an ingenious use of the tissue paper em- ployed to protect the plate from contact with the printed page opposite to it, the effect of letting a top light in to the stage of the Microscope is most strikingly and successfully imitated. The work is spoken of in the preface as a task which has occupied the author for many yea s, and it may be admitted that the unusual amount of original work of which the reader finds traces on almost every page, seems to warrant this statement being taken au pied de la lettre. The book is admirably printed and illustrated, so that its publishers may fairly claim to have placed the work before their readers in the best possible form. Note on Sir A. E. Wright’s Resolving Limit.*—Mr. Nelson writes: “The wave-length selected by Sir A. E. Wright in his examples for ultimate resolution is 0°6 »; this lies on the red side of the sodium or D line, whereas the one commonly used is that of maximum visual intensity, which is situated on the blue side of the D line, about one-third of the distance between D and E. “Tt is therefore not possible to compare his results with those in the table at the end of this Journal, or with those in my table on p. 529 of Sir A. E. Wright’s Resolving Limits with the usual values of A. 2 Pee 2a sea ee UN Ala: Illuminat-| Pene- Numerical e=i2 = = Limit = = = _ Aperture. A ¥ Pour trae (n sin u= a) | (oe 2 c White Light. | Blue Light. Photography. —=) N.A. A= 0°5607 p. A = 0°4861 p. A = 0°4000 pn. Number of lines | Number of lines | Number of lines in 545 in.|in 3;mm. in ;3; in Jin. 7; mm) in ;3, in./in 7;mm, “2 151 59°4 174 68°6 212 83°3 *028 6:0 °3 226 89°2 |} 261 102°8 317 125-0 *063 4°0 “5 377 148°6 435 171°4 | 529 208 °3 aT 2°4 oY / 528 208-1 609 240°0 | 741 291°7 “34 1 Gof 1-1 830 | 327:0| 958 | 377-1 | 1164 | 458-3 “84 1-1 1°3 981 386°4 | 1132 445°7 | 13875 541°7 1:2 0:92 this Journal (1906), before bringing them to terms of the same denomin- ation. It will be noticed that the value of ¢ adopted in the ‘ Principles of Microscopy’ is 1:2. “The values for objectives with N.A.’s other than those in this table may be found by inspection, by halving or doubling the values there * Principles of Microscopy, 1906, by Sir A. E. Wright, p. 231. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 725 given. Example: Required, the number of lines in the +3, of an inch that can be resolved by an objective of 0°65 N.A., with white light. “Take the half of 0°3 and the half of the corresponding number of lines, and we find that an objective of 0°15 will resolve 113 lines ; this added to those opposite to 0°5 gives the answer—490 lines in the yoo Of an inch that can be resolved by an objective of 0°65 N.A. with white light. “This method of inspection is much quicker than that of multiplying a constant out by the N.A., but this rule does not apply to the columns “Tlluminating and Penetrating Powers” : those figures must be worked out independently. “Tf the values given in the table at the end of the Journal be multiplied by 0°833 they will be reduced to Sir A. E. Wright’s limit, and if they are multiplied by 0°769 they will be reduced to those given in my table on p. 529 (1906). To reduce my table to Sir A. E. Wright’s, multiply by 1°083. Application of the Method of Rotary Disks to Microscopical Technique.*—H. Lebrun has given much attention to the best means for attaining rapid and systematic examination of microscopic objects. With this purpose in view he has constructed several contrivances. 1. The Microstereoscope-—This is intended for the examination by museum visitors of small creatures visible, but whose characters are only revealed by a microscopic view. The author arranges a kind of endless chain, on the principle of what are called American stereoscopes, working obliquely upwards. Each link of the chain carries a slide provided with an object, and this object at a certain part of the chain motion falls into a position suitable for observation by a fixed Microscope. Fifty slides are mounted in this way, and can be varied by the museum curator as he thinks fit. The whole arrangement is inclosed in a wooden case pro- vided with a suitable window for admission of light. The body of the Microscope and certain adjustment screws are the only parts visible outside the case. The author uses a binocular, and the magnification employed does not exceed 70 diameters. 2. A Microscope Table—This arrangement is suitable for the use of objects requiring high powers. k “ue Earland, A., Foraminifera of Shore-Sand of Sussex, 36 — Method of Producing Stereo-Photo- micrographs, 252 Earthworm, Spermatogenesis, 27 — — Studying, 615 — Toxicity, 13 — Unfertilised, in Tenthredinide, Mat- uration, 437 Ehretberg, P., Loss of Nitrogen in Soils. 93 Elasmobranchs, Gullet Teeth, 16 — Jaw and Branchial Muscles, 432 — Membranous Labyrinth, 545 — Urogenital System, 285 Elastic Limit of Metals, Measurement, 635 Elateride, Species, 665 Electrical Discharges, Action on Bacteria, 710 Eleutheroschizon duboseqi, a New Sporo- zoon, 323 Eliot, C., British Nudibranchs, 434 Ellermann, V., Rhizopoda in Human Spinal Fluid, 557 | Ellingsen, E., South American Pseudo- scorpions, 173 Elodea, Fungus Parasitic on, 699 Elytron and Cirrus in Aphroditide, 671 Embiidz and the Morphology of Insects, 300 770 Embryo and Embryo-sac of Cucumis sativus, 186 — Double, of Florida Alligator, 284 — — of Lizard, 284 — Formation of Hemoglobin in, 424 — Human, Three-weeks’, 162 Embryo-sac, Fixing and Staining Cells, 378 Embryology and Affinities of Sipunculide, 670 — Foundations, 281 — of Amentiferze, Demonstrating, 618 — of Strongylus filaria, 444 — of Sturgeon, 162 — of Vertebrates. See ConTENTs, Viii Emmel, VY. E., Chorda tympani in Micro- tus, 432 — Regeneration of Lost Parts in a Lobster, 952 Empusa, Morphology and Development, 342, 376 Emulsin, Probable Existence in Yeast, 187 Enamel of Teeth in Man, Hardening, 166 — Physiological Injection for Studying Development, 625 — Prisms, 165 End-organs of Rhynchobdellida, Study- | ing, 616 Enderlein, G., Monograph of Conioptery- gids, 551 Endocellular Nets in Ganglion Cells, 287 Endophytes of Orchidex, 78 Endo’s Fuchsin-agar, 101 — Medium, Modification, 101 Endothelia, Vascular, and Blood of Am- phibia, Studying, 616 Engel, C. 8., Non-nucleated Blood Cor- puscles in Vertebrates, 656 Engelke, C., Conidial Form of Aspergillus niger, 73 — Observations on Claviceps purpurea, 72 England, H. M., Stylasterina of Siboga | Expedition, 181 Enriques, P., Alleged Senile Degenera- tion in Infusorians, 37 — — — — in Protozoa, 37 — Blood Vessels of Sipunculus nudus, 310 — Oscillating Circulation in Phoronis, 32 Entameba bucealis, 36 Enteman, W. E., Coloration in Polistes, 21 Enteroxenos éstergreni, Studying Germ- Cells, 621 Entomophthoracezw, Cytology, 697, 730 Entomostraca, Galvanotaxis, 26 Entoptic Vision and the Entoptiscope, 495 Entoptiscope and Entoptic Vision, 495 Entz, G., Peridinex, 197 — Studies on Peridinex, 450 Enumerating Leucocytes, New Method, 383 Eosin-Methylen-blue, Staining Blood and Bacteria, 627 Eosphora digitata, Male, 32 INDEX. Ephemerids, Ocelli, 171 Ephippium of Daphnia hyalina, 27 _ Epiderm Cells, Human, 286 | Epidermis and Cutis in Saurians and Crocodiles, Demonstrating Connection between, 236 — of Lepadogaster, 655 Epididymis, Human, Epithelium, 656 — Studying, 618 Episternum and Sternum of Mammals, 658 Epithelioma of Birds, Contagious, 711 | Epithelium, Ciliated, in Human Papille vallate, 541 — Glandular, Canals, 655 — of Human Epididymis, 656 Equisetum, Tracheids in Node, 565 Ergot, 698 Eriksson, J., American Gooseberry Mildew in Europe, 587 — Origin and Spread of Plant Rusts, 74 — Vegetative Life of the Rust Fungus, 201 Ernst, W., Bacillus renalis and the Pseudo- Diphtheria Bacillus of Man, 90 Errera, L., Hygroscopicity as a Cause of Physiological Action at a Distance, 686 Erysiphacez, Studies, 198 Erythrocyte of Salamander, Demonstrating Striated Membrane, 626 _ Erythrocytes, Human, Shape of, 427 — of Siredon pisciformis, Demonstrating Structure, 622, 656 Ksterly, C. O., Nervous System of Cope- poda, 442 Esteva, D. J.. Anomalous Fungi, 347 Etching Method, 515 Etching Velocity of Metallographic Re- agents, 635 Kternod, —., Trophoblast of the Placeuta, 651 Ethology of Tubifex and Lumbriculus, 443 Etienne, —., Liquid Crystals and Plastic Crystals, 385 Evans, A. W., Hepatic of Bermuda, 337 — — of New England, 337 — — of Puerto Rico, 337 Evans, I. B. P., Infection Phenomena in Uredinex, 474 Ewart, A. J., Galvanotropic Irritability of Roots, 44 Ewart, J. C., Relationships of the Tarpan, 429 Excremental Pollution, Bacterioscopic Analysis, 728 Excretory and Nervous Systems of Fresh- water Triclads, 674 — Organ, New, in Hydrachnids, 24 | — System in Fresh-water Triclads, 313 Exhibition of Coloured Lantern Slides of Plant Structure, 389 — of Microscopie Aquatic Life, 391 INDEX. Exhibition of Slides of Oribatidw presented { by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, 252 Exner, A., Action of Radium Rays on Skin, 169 Exner, 8., Tapetum of Abramis brama, 654 ae A. C., Habits of Necturus, 291 : Eye and Nasal’ Cavity, Experimental Studies in Development, 653 — Compound, Mechanism, 436 — in Selachians, 295 — of Cuttlefish, Photogenic Organs, 169 — of Frog, 291 — of Spalax typhlus, 429 — Vesicle in Vertebrates, Formation, 7 Eye-piece, New Form of Ehrlich, for Counting Blood Corpuscles, 362 Eye-pieces for the Microscope. See Con- TENTS, XXXV Kyes, Beetles’, Number of Facets, 301 — Hydrachnid, Structure, 25 — of Cephalopods, 433 —of Periophthalmus and Boleophthal- mus, 167, 294 — of Pulmonate Gastropods, 434 — of Selachians, 662 — Reduction in Gammarids, 308 EF. Fabry, C., Use of the Cooper-Hewitt Lamp as a Source of Monochromatic Light, 365 Facets in Beetles’ Eyes, Number, 301 Fage, L., Demonstrating Segmentary Organs of Polychzete Annelids, 624 Fairy Rings, Growth, 203 Families and Genera of Thysanura, Key to, 667 Fantham, H. B., Sporozoon from Mucous Membrane of Human Septum nasi,,451 — Staining Piroplasma muris, 623 — The Genus Piroplasma, 683 Farmer, J. B., Nuclear Division in Hepa- tice, 325 — Plimmer’s Bodies and Reproductive Cells, 12 Farneti, 1t., Disease of Pear-Trees, 200 Fat-Cells in Acipenser, 541 — — in Glandule vesiculares of Cattle, Demonstrating, 513 Faull, J. H., Development of Ascus and Spore-formation in Ascomycetes, 71 Fauna, Cape Verde Marine, Notes, 16 — Hydrachnid, of Scotland, 552 — of Gulf of Trieste, 169 — of Natal, 428 — Origin of the Deep-Sea, 427 — Wild, of Kew, 657 Fauré-Fremiet, E., New Vorticellide, 38 Fauré-Fremiet, Structure of Cytoplasm in Protozoa, 319 fp Faussek, V., Parasitism of Anodonta Larve, 18 Favaro, G., Vascular System of the Lam- prey, 16 Feathers and Hairs, Whitening in Winter, 427 — Primary, Interlocking in Flight, 290 Federici, F., New Method of Staining Plasma Cells, 735 Federley, H., Influence of Temperature on Lepidoptera, 436 Felt, E. P., Injurious Insects of the State of New York, 667 — New York Mosquitos, 302 — Studies on Culicids, 22 Feltgen, J., Fungus Flora of Luxemburg, 698 Ferment, Fat-splitting, of Higher Fungi, 687 Fermentation Produced by a Sarcina, 592 Ferments of the Placenta, 284 “Fern” Syangium from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore, Lancashire, 1, 119 Fern-Flora of Connecticut, 331 Fern-leaves, Bud-formation, 564 Ferns, American, Notes, 189 — Anatomy, 328 — and Fern-Allies of Costa Rica, 331 — Carboniferous, Structure, 518 — Chinese, 330, 688 — Exotic, 459 — Gold and Silver, 565 — How They Grow, 564 — Hybrid, 331 — Japanese, 563 — Norfolk Island, 563 — North American, 331, 459, 562 — of Christmas Island, 688 — of Florida, 688 — of Madagascar, 688 — of the Philippine Islands, 688 — Past History, 566 — Sicilian, 688 — South American. 563 Ferraris, T., Italian Fungi, 703 Fertilisation and Impregnation, 651 — and Maturation in Porpoise, 422 — History of Division Centres, 650 — in Mucorini, 343 — in Spherotheca, 199 Fibres in Cladophora, 579 Fick, R., Individuality of Chromosomes, 422 Fickendey, —., Method for the Bacterio- logical Examination of Soil, 510 Fiddes, J. D., Antarctic Axinellid, 679 Field, C., Some Notes on Laurent Polari- scope Readings, 224 Figdor, W., Regeneration of the Lamina in Scolopendrium, 328 Filaria banerofti, Biology, 312 Filicum, Index, 460 772 Filter, Doulton’s White Porcelain, 727 — for Mounting and other Media, devised by Mr. Taverner, 748 — Rapid, for Agar, 510 Filtration, Rapid, of Nutrient Agar, 374 Finder for the Microscope, New Form, 255, 274 Fink, B., Notes on Cladonia, 707 Fink, B., and another, American Lichens, 353 Fins, Accessory, in Raia batis, 432 — Development and Structure, 538 — Role in Fishes, 15 Fischel, A.. Human Skull without Inter- maxillary, 8 Fischer, A., Oolemma of Mammalian Ovum, 422 — Plasmoptysis of Bacteria, 484 Fischer, E., Uredinez, 202 Fischer, G., Bronchial Tree in Birds, 13 Fish, New Abyssal, 662 — Tubercle grown at 37° C., 728 Fishes, Bony, Ovarian Sac, 6 — — Respiration, 431 — Branchial Filter, 15 — Chemistry of Respiration, 16 — Club-Cells in Epiderm, 164 — Coloration, 544 — Kast African, 16 — Fossil Flying, 430 — Function of the Lateral Line Organs, 15 — Galvanotropism, 660 — Infundibulum, 287 — Loricariid, Notes, 293 -— Mechanism of Air-bladder, 660 — Parasites, 30 — Pectoral Girdle, 167 — Respiratory Processes, 294 — Role of Fins, 15 — Swim-bladder, 661 Fitch, R., Action of Insoluble Substances in Modifying the Effect of Deleterious Agents, 686 Fitzgerald, M. P., Investigating the Struc- ture of Spinal Cord of Macayue Monkey, 617 Fixation, Influence on Volume of Organs, 615 — Method for Demonstrating Bacterial Capsules, 377 Fixative, Trichloracetic Acid as, 233 Fixing and Stainiug Cells of Embryo-sac, 378 — — — Goblet Cells in the Epidermis of Fishes, 105 — Pyrosoma, 237 Flagella of Motile Bacteria, Demonstra- tion, 239 — of Tubercle Bacillus, 119 Flagellata in Melophagus ovinus, 321 Flagellate Parasites, 37 — — New. 37 — Parasite, New, of Bombyx mori, 37 INDEX. Flagellates in Human Alimentary Canal, Flatters, A., Clockwork-driven Turntable, 243 — Exhibition of Coloured Lantern Slides of Plant Structure, 389 — Methods of Microscopical Research : Vegetable Histology, 111 Fleischer, M., New Families of Mosses, 52 — New Malayan Mosses, 52 Fleischmann, L., Demonstrating the De- velopment of Dentine, 512 — Structure of Tooth Canaliculi, 11 Flemming’s Triple Stain, Modification, 382 Flint, J. M., Growth of the Bronchial Tree, 542 Flogel, J. H. L., Monograph on Aphis ribis, 23 Flora, Chinese, 45 — exsiccata bavarica, 53 — Marine, of Jan Mayen, 575 — of Kew Gardens, 335 — of Malignant Growths, 90 — of Tropical Africa, 45 Flounders with Spinulated Scales, 16 Flower of Umbelliterze, Anatomy, 325 Flower-visiting Insects in Styria, 668 Flowers and Bees, 20 — Variation, 561 Flustrella hispida, Collecting and Study- ing, 611 — — Development, 675 Flying-Fish Flight, 293 Foa, A., New Flagellate Parasites, 37 Foa, P., Staining Bacillus typhosus in tissues, 382 Fetus, Immunity, 162 Foods, Vegetable, Microscopy of, 371 Foraminifera of Shore-Sand of Sussex, 36 Forbes, A., Heredity of Hair Length in Guinea-pig, 536 Forel, A., Himalayan Ants, 549 | — Sexual Selection, 424 Formalin, Hardening of Organs, 739 Formula, Simple, for Mixing any Grade of Alcohol Required, 631 Forster, J.. Method of Detecting Bacillus anthracis in the Blood and Tissues, 374 Forsythia, Sclerotial Disease, 199 Foslie, M., New American Coralline Algee, 341 — New Coralline Algse, 467 — New Squamariacea, 468 — Remarks on Northern Lithothamnia, 407 Fossils, Marine, from Crete, 546 — Vertebrate, of Victoria, 545 Fossombronia, Development, 191 Foucault, L., Photomicrographs, Donation of, by A. Nachet, 122 Foulerton, A. G., Action on Bacteria of Electrical Discharges, 710 INDEX. Foundry Work, Metallography applied to, 246 Fournel, P., Critical Points of Steel, 516 Fowler, H. W., Habits of Sphagnum Frog, 14 Fowls, Spirillosis, 708 Fracture and- Deformation in Iron and Steel, 741 — Type of, and Micro-structure of Steel Test-pieces, Relation between, 740 Fractured Surfaces of Test-Pieces, Pre- sence of Greenish-Coloured Markings, 247 Fraser, H. C., Fertilisation in Spherotheca, | 99 — Sexuality of Ascomycetes, 324 — — of Uredines, 324 —Studying the Development of the Ascocarp of Humaria granulata, 379 Franz, V., Eye in Selachians, 295, 662 Fraude, H., Baltic Benthos and Plankton, 581 Freeman, E. M., Affinities of the Fungus of Lolium temulentum, 475 Freeman, R., Rotifera of Norfolk, 316 Friedenfelt, T., Minute Structure of Vis- caral Ganglion of Anodonta, 664 — Studying the Structure of Visceral Ganglion of Anodonta, 617 773 Fujii, K., Studying the Nutritive Relations of the Surrounding Tissues to the Arche- gonia in Gymuosperms, 621 Fulmek, L., Heart of Mallophaga, 171 Fulton, H. R., Chemotropism of Fungi, 457 Fulton, T. W., Ichthyological Notes, 292 Funaria, Moneecism, 573 Functional View of Development, 538 Fungi, Action on Cellulose, 187 — African, New Genus, 583 — American, Notes, 587 — Ancestors of the Higher, 477 —and Acid Excretion of Roots, 458 — and Orchids, Symbiosis, 327 — Anomalous, 347 — Ascomycetous, Sporulation of Yeasts, 344 — Chemistry, 684 — Chemotropism, 457 — Destruction of Wood, 586 — Economie Use, 701 — grown in cultures for the Herbarium, New Method of Mounting, 737 — Harmful. 478 — Higher, Fat-splitting Ferment, 687 _ — imperfecti, Relation to Ascomycetes, 583 ' — in Cheese Ripening, 585 Frémont, C., Corrosion Grooves in Boiler | Plate, 114 — Mechanical Properties of Single Crys- tals of Iron, 115 Fritsch, F. E., Fresh-water Alge in Kew Gardens, 340 Fritsch, K., Flower-visiting Insects in Styria, 668 Frog, Adrenal Tumours, 15 — Eye, 291 — Hermaphroditism, 660 — Hypermely, 539 — Larva, Lymphatic System, 660 — Studying Spinal and Sympathetic Ganglion Cells, 619 — Viviparous, 285 —in Relation to Atmospheric Nitrogen, 455 — Italian, 703 — Notes on Cases of Poisoning by, 702 — Notes on various, 701 ' — of Kew Gardens, 349 — on Juncacex, 587 — Origin of Parasitism, 349 -— Outlines for the Observation of some of the more Common, 702 i Parasitic, New Genus, 344 Frog’s Eggs, Resistance to Temperature, 5 | — Eye, Optic Cells, 10 Froriep, A., Formation of Eye Vesicle in Vertebrates, 7 Froriep, R., Primitive Occipital Vertebre, — | — Flora of Luxemburg, 698 653 Fruit-fly, Exotic, Ravages near Paris, 666 Frye, T. C., Nereocystis Luetkeana, 693 Fucaces, Spermatozoids, 578 Fuchsin-Agar, Endo’s, 101 Fuhrmann, F., Bacterial Flora of Bottled Beer, 485 — New Acetic Acid-forming Bacterium, 214 — Nuclear Division in Yeast, 473 Fuhrmann, O., Studies on Tapeworms, 672 —— Teniz of Birds of Prey, 672 —— — on Scale Insects, 478 — Pocket Atlas, 350 — Poisoning by, 206 — Production of Stable Yeasts from, 698 — Poisonous, Notes, 586 — See CONTENTS, xxix — Subterranean, 475 — Underground, in Hungary, 200 — — of Portugal, 71 Fungology, Guide to, 78 Fungus Diseases Spread by means of Hibernating Mycelium, 702 — Mycorhiza-producing, 701 — of Economic Importance, 697 — of Lolium, Poisonous Nature, 347 — Parasitic on Elodea, 699 — Smut, Infection of Cereals, 74 — Spores in the Atmosphere, 205 — Stain, New, 701 | — Submerged, 472 | Fiirntrat, K., Endo’s Fuchsin-Agar, 101 | | First, C. M., Development of the Retina in the Salmon, 652 114 G. Gabboto, L., Hyphomycete Parasitic on the Vine, 200 Gaehtens, W., Modification of Endo’s Me- dium, 101 Gage, 8. de M., Resistance of Bacillus coli to Heat, 484 Gage, S. P., Three-weeks’ Human Em- bryo, 162 Gaidukoy, M., Complementary Chromatic Adaptation of Algewe, 341 Gaidukov, N., Ultramicroscopical Examin- ation of Plant Cells, 608 Galesensu, P., New Method of Staining Diphtheria Bacilli, 627 Galimard, J., Cultivation of Microbes in Media of Definite Chemical Composi- tion, 729 Gall-midge, Habits and Structure, 666 Gallagher, F. E., The Alloys of Antimony and Tin, 634 Gallaud, J., Modifications of Tropical Plants in Changed Surroundings, 456 Galli-Valerio, B., Bacillus Isolated from Rhinoscleroma, 594 — Experimental Pathology and Animal Classification, 543 — Staining of Treponema pallidum, 626 Galls, Cynipid, Two New, 23 — Microfungi, 348 — Moss, 461 Galvanotaxis of Entomostraca, 26 Galvanotropism of Fishes, 660 Gamasus and other Acari, 551 Gamble, F. W., “ Zoochlorella ” in Conyo- luta, 580 — Zoochlorelle of Convoluta roscoffensis, 314 Gammarids, Reduction of Eyes, 308 Ganglia, Cranial and Spinalin Amphioxus, 662 Ganglion Cells, Endocellular Nets, 287 — — Spinal and Sympathetic, of the Frog, Studying, 619 — Visceral, of Anodonta, Minute Struc- ture, 664 Ganzer, H., Physiological Injection for Studying Development of Enamel, 625 Garstang, W., Respiration in Sand-burrow- ing Crabs, 174 Gas-gland in Swim-bladder, Structure, 427 Gasserian Ganglion, Human, Plasma Cells, O41 Gasteromycete, New Belgian, 700 Gastine, G., New Method for Detecting Starch in Wheat Flour, 630 Gastropoda. See ConTENTS, xiii Gastropods, Protoconch, 17 — Pulmonate, Eyes, 434 — Spinning, 170 Gastrulation of Horned Toad, 651, 731 INDEX. Gautier, L., Toxin of Aspergillus fumiga- tus, 345 Gay, F. P., Relation of the Sensibilisatrice (amboceptor) to the Alexine (comple- ment), 594 Geets, V., Culture of Treponema pallidum, 610 Geheeb, A., German Mosses, 463 Gelatin Mass for Fixing and Mending Bone Preparations, 739 Gemelli, F. A., Infundibulum in Fishes 287 Gemme of Amblystegium, 574 Gendre, E., Staining Neuroglia in Ichthyo- bdella, 736 Géneau, L., Deformations caused by Gym- nosporangium, 346 Genera and Families of Thysanura, Key to, 667 Genera, New :— Botany : Acanthostigmella, 79 Acrosorus, 688 Aerobryopsis, 52 Amphiloniopsis, 209 Ascochytopsis, 480 Bonanseja, 590 Botrychioxylon, 519 Cladocephalus, 194 Colletomanginia, 583 Corynespora, 205 Dendroalsia, 54 Didymascina, 79 Didymogenes, 65 Endothiella, 589 EKurychasma, 82 Fairmania, 589 Grandinoides, 704 Hemispora, 585 Heterodinium, 582 Hypoxylina, 481 Leaia, 704 Lentomitella, 348 Lindauopsis, 474 Litholepis, 467 Macrothamnium, 52 Mappea, 481 Melanobasidium, 480 Miillerobryum, 52 Parisia, 689 Phlceophthora, 479 Pleurorthotrichum, 55 Pseudocryphea, 54 Pterobryopsis, 52 Pyrenomycetes, 83 Pythiacystis, 697 Robertomyces, 481 Sceptiridium, 188 Schoénbornia, 480 Thayeria, 688 Thyrsidina, 79 Trachypodopsis, 52 Trematovalsa, 344 INDEX. 775 Genera, New (Botany) cont. : Trichofusarium, 480 Uleobryum, 690 Uromycladium, 75, 699 Whetstonia, 700 Zoddoa, 195 Zoology : Acropsopilis, 25 Adiaptomus, 669 Allomachilis, 667 Anglia, 25 Anotomys, 289 Antias, 552 Aphambranchion, 433 Archipenzopsis, 442 Atlanticella, 449 Austrimunna, 552 Bathyaleyon, 677 Bathyonyx, 308 Beatricella, 27 Brachioptera, 662 Brachynillus, 22 Bradypodicola, 665 Bulborhynchus, 444 Calonympha, 37 Charcotia, 298 Cliothosa, 557 Conochiloides, 180 Oryaster, 446 Ctilopsis, 298 Cytocladus, 680 Devescovina, 37 Dicopia, 296 Ganeo, 178 Gigantopterus, 430 Glossinella, 302 Guy-Valvoria, 298 Hemocystidium, 321 Halosoma, 176 Heterochcerus, 673 Hexacrobylus, 296 Hydroctena, 34 Laidlawia, 30 Lamellariopsis, 298 Neopenzopsis, 442 Oligorchis, 672 Palatinella, 681 Paraphorhynchus, 32 Parartemisia, 442 Paruterina, 672 Patagium, 178 Phanerocephalus, 662 Podotherena, 440 Pseudoparastrophia, 298 Pyrgopsis, 669 Rhinosporidium, 451 Ripaster, 446 Sanguinicola, 30 Tachytherena, 440 Zeugorchis, 445 Gengou, O., Medium for Cultivating Delicate Microbes, 727 — Microbe of Whooping-Cough, 709 Genital Appendages of Tsetse-Fly, 23 — Glands and their Secretions, 6 — — Organs of Leech, Abnormality, 311 | — — of Polycera, 17 — Tract, Female, Demonstrating Nerves, 625 | Genitalia of Diptera, Demonstrating, 732 — of Lymnea, 18 Genitals, External, of Sheep, Develop- ment, 163 Gennadas, Distribution, 307 — Relationships, 307 Genus, New Chrysomonad, 681 Genus, New, of African Fungi, 583 — — of Gymnoplea from Natal, 669 — — of Hyphomycetes, 585 — — of Plankton Alga, 65 Geometridz of United States, 550 Gephyreans, Philippine, 28 Gepp, A., & E.S., Marine Ales from New South Wales, 576 Gerhartz, H., Multiple Testis and Liver, 544 Germ-Cells of Aphides, 171 ——of Enteroxenos dstergreni, Studying, 621 | Germination of Moss Spores, 335 — of Ophioglossum, 566 — of Pollen, Physiology, 455 Gerould, J. H., Embryology and Affinities of Sipunculidee, 670 Gessard, C., Chemistry of Fungi, 684 Giacomini, E., Suprarenals and Sympa- thetic System in Protopterus, 542 Giard, A., Peecilogony, 165 — Ravages of Exotic Fruit-fly near Paris, 666 Gil, A. C., Spanish Mosses, 333 Gibbon, Species of Strongylus in, 672 Gibbs, T., Luminosity of Schistostega, 690 Gilbert, B. D., and others, North American Ferns, 459 Gilkinet, A., Sexuality of Spores in Di- oicous Mosses, 335 Gill, T., Carps and their Relatives, 294 Gillot, X., Notes on Poisonous Fungi, 586 Gineste, C., Fibrillar Structure of Bac- teriacez, 709 — Modifications of Cytoplasm of Opalina, 684 — Trophoplasmic Spherules in Ciliata, 320 | Gland Cells, Rod-like, in Fishes are Spo- rozoa, 287 | — Intermaxillary, of Toad, 15 | — System in Ixodes, 668 Gland-Pockets, Abdominal, in Insects, 548 Glanders, Cultivation, 611 — in Urine, Virus, 486 Glands, Pericardial, of Bivalves, 664 - Glandular Epithelium, Canals, 655 ' | Glososporium, Cysts of, and their Role in the Origin of Yeasts, 583 776 Glowacki, J., Austrian Mosgses, 463 Glucose in Pneumococcus Cultures, 104 Glycogen in Sporozoa, 39 — Staining, 241 Gnathastome Type, Unity of, 292 Goblet Cells, Acidophil, in Torpedo, 10 — — in Epidermis of Fishes, Fixing and Staining, 105 Godlewski, KE. jun., Hybridisation of Sea-Urchin and Comatula, 33 Goebel, K., Morphology of Australasian Muscineex, 460 Goggio, E., Development of Pancreas in Discoglossus pictus, 285 Goldschmidt, R., Amphioxides and Amphi- oxus, 663 — Chromidia of Protozoa, 184 Goldstein, K., Neurological Studies, 164 Gomont, M., How to Collect Algz, 692 Gonvcoccus, Cultivation, 614 Gonoducts in Platodes, Origin, 178 Gonyaulax triacantha, Structure, 321 Goodall, G. L., New Form of ‘‘ Container ” for Use in Museums of Economic Botany, 630 Goodrich, E. §., Development and Struc- | ture of Fins, 538 Gordon, J. W., 752 — Advances in Microscopy: The Micro- scope at Work, 227 — Dark Field Illumination, 157 — New Retro-Ocular or ‘lop Stop, for Obtaining Dark Ground Illumina- tion with High Powers, 254 — Post-Objective Stop, 305 — On the Use of a 'TopiStop for Developing Latent Powers of the Microscope, 745 — Simple Wave-length Spectroscope, 418 — The Microscope adapted to Special Duty, 228 Gordon, M. H., Ability of Vibrio cholerz asiatice to Decompose Starch, 612 — Bacterial Test whereby Particles shed from the Skin may be Detected in the Air, 711 — Differentiation and Identification of Streptococci and Staphylococci, 87 Gordon, M. M. O., Lime-forming Layer of | the Madreporarian Polyp, 182 Gorini, C., Bacterial Research on Gorgon- zola Cheese, 357 Gotch Ophthalmic Spinthariscope, 609 Goto, S., Meristic Variation in an Isopod, 442 — Meristic Variations in Toad, 430 Gou; il, —., Ferments of the Placenta, 284 Graeffe, E., Fauna of the Gulf of Trieste, 169 — Two New Cynipid Galls, 23 Grafe, E., Development of Kidney in Chick, 161 Grafe, V.. New Microclemical Tests for Wood, 513 Primitive INDEX. | Graff, L. von, Turbellaria acela, 177 | — ot Seed Plants. | Griinberg, K., Blood-sucking | Graft Hybrids, 561 Graham-Smith, G. 8., Péroplasma canis, 184 Gran, H. H., Diatoms, 64 Granger’s Povket Microscope, 715 Granulation of Vibrios, 595 Granules, Demonstrating Chromatic or Nucleoid, 624 Graptolites, Studies, 679 — Victorian, 182 Gratings, Images of, Influence on, of Phase-Differences amongst their Spectra, 532 Giatzianow, V., Peculiar Group of Rays, 662 Gravier, C., Mistaken Case of Budding in Polychets, 310 — Mobility of Virgularids, 679 — New Type of Virgularid, 679 — Red Sea Polychets, 309 Graydon, J. T., Histology of Optic Nerve 655 Green, J. R., Germination of Seeds of the Castor Oil Plant, 42 Gregarines, Castration due to, 452 — Demonstrating Reproduction, 379 — Monoeystid, Reproduction, 328 — Observations, 451 Grégoire, V., Maturation Divisions, 282 Greig-Smith, R., Bacillus alatus, 487 — Identity of Oposonins and Normal Agglutinins, 487 Gribben, W., Using a Lathe as a Micro- tome, 106 Griffiths, W., Mounting Delicate Vege- table Tissues in Xylol-Balsam, 249 Griffithsia acuta, 696 Griggs, RK. F., Reducing-Division in As- caris, 553 Grillus campestris, Stridulation, 667 Grimbert, L., Diagnosis of Bacteria by their Biochemical Functions, 87 Gross, J., Ovaries of Mallophaga and Pediculidsx, 172 Grosser, O., Metamerism in Integumentary Structures, 168 Grosz, 8., Accessory Sex-glands in In- sectivora and Rodents, 7 Groves, H and J., Characezw from the Cape Peninsula, 578 Growth in Hepatics, Direction, 560 See CONTENTS, XXiii Gruber-Widal Reaction, Technique, 104 Muscide, 302 Gruvel, A., New Operculate Cirriped, 669 | Grysez, —., Meningococcus, 354 Gudger, E. W., Breeding Habits of Pipe- Fish, 540 — Studying the Segmentation of Sipho- stoma floride, 615 Guéguen, F., Morphological Notes, 350 INDEX. Gueguen, F'., New Fungus Stain, 701 — lRhacodium cellare, 584 Guieysse, A., Hepatic Tubes of Aniloera | Frontalis, 442 Guillemard, A., Cultivation of Anaerobic Organisms Applicable to Water Analy- sis, 372 - Guillery, —., Measurement of the Elastic Limit of Metals, 635 Guillet, L., Cementation, 387 — Nickel-Chromium Steels, 635 — Nickel-Manganese Steels, 115 — Nickel-Vanadium Steels, 245 — Quaternary Steels, 741 — Recent Researches upon Industrial Alloys, 386 — Special Brasses, 633 Guilliermond, A., Conjugation of Yeast- spores, 73 — Cytology of Bacteria, 483 — Karyokinesis in the Ascomycetes, 41 Guillon, J. M., Botrytis cinerea, 584 Guinea-pig, Heredity of Hair-length, 536 Guinea-pigs, Disease of, that resembles Plague, 710 — Origin of Polydactylous Race, 536 Gummosis and Wounds injthe Amygdala, 206 — in Amygdala, 347 Gurney, R., Life-history of Cladocera, 174 Gussow, H., Plant Diseases, 205 Gut, Pre-oral, in Bird Embryos, 284 Gymnoplea, New Genus of, from Natal, 669 Gymnuosperms, Studying Nutritive Rela- tions of Surrounding Tissues to Arche- gonia in, 621 Gymnosporangium, Deformations Caused by, 346 Gyortfy, I., Austro-Hungarian Mosses, 691 — Mosses of Hungary, 333, 570 1alb Haass, E., Actinomycetes, 213 Haberlandt, G., Chloroplast in Selaginella, 188 Hackel, E., Poisonous Nature of the Lolium Fungus, 347 Haddock, Myxobolus from Head, 682 Hamatopota, Genus, 550 Hematozoa, Ceylonese, 321 — from Partridge and Turkey, 322 Hemin Crystals, New Method of Ob- taining. 632 Hemoceele ‘Theory, 166 Hemoflagellata, 681 Hemoglobin in Embryo, Formation, 424 Hemosporidia of Bats, 322 Hagen, I., Monstrous Peristomes, 574 — Various Moss Notes, 692 Hager, P. K., Relation of Jaw Muscles to Salivary Glands in Snakes, 14 Hahn, C. W., Gastrulation TUE of Horned Toad, 651 — Studying the Gastrulation of the Horned Toad, Phrynosoma cornutum, 731 Hair-length in Guinea-pig, Heredity, 536. Hairs and Feathers, Whitening in Winter, 427 Haleyonium, Spicule Formation, 34 Hall, A. D., Function of Silica in the Nutrition of Cereals, 455 Hall, T. 8., Victorian Graptolites, 182 Haller, B., Ovarian Sac in B ny Fishes, 6 — Pectoral Girdle in Fishes, 167 — Structure of Oliva peruviana, 298 Hallez, P., Rheotropism in Hydroids and Buzula, 447 — Rheotropism of Hydroids, 34 Halocyprids of San Diego, 442 Hamilton, D,. J., Bacillus chorex para- lytice ovis, 486 Hammerl, H., Morphology of Vibrio cholerzx asiatice, 709 Handlirsch, A., Palseozoic Insects, 436 Hands of Japanese, 659 Hansen, I., Nuclear Division in Saccharo- mycee ellipsoideus, 345 Haplosporidia, Affinities, 322 : Harden, A.. Chemical Action of Bacillus lactis aerogenes on Glucose and Man- nitol, 484 — Voges and Proskauer’s Reaction for Certain Bacteria, 613 Hardening Organs with Formalin, 739 Hardness of the Constituents of Iron and Steel, 742 Hares, European, 658 Hariot, —., New Genus of African Fungi, 583 Harmand, A., French Lichens, 590 Harmand, J.. French Lichens, 83 Harms, W., Structure of Spongodes, 478 Harrison, F. C., New Chromogenic Slime- producing Organism, 212 Harrison, L. W. H., Variations of Lycena astrarche in Britain, 437 Harrison, R. M., New Organ in Periplaneta orientalis, 550 Hartigiella and Meria, Identity of the Genera, 74 Hartog, M., Dual Force of the Dividing Cell, 425 Haselhoff, E., Anaerobic Nitrogen-fixing Organisins, 610 Hasler, A., Uredinex, 202 Haswell, W. A., Studies on Turbellaria, 673 Hatschek, B., Acromerite of Amphioxus 432 Havelock, T. H., Artificial Double Refrac- tion, due to lotropic Distribution, with Application to Colloidal Solutions and Magnetic Fields, 226 778 Hay, W. P., Hermaphroditism in Cray- | fishes, 305 Haynes, C. C., North American Bryo- phyta, 568 Haynes, C. C., and others, North American | Muscinez, 690 Head, A. P., Manufacture of Cartridge Cases for Quick-Firing Guns, 385 Head-Ganglia and Sensory Line in Sela- chia, 165 Head, Insect, Morphology, 19 Heape, W., Ovulation in the Rabbit, 4 Heart and Arteries of Rhipidoglossa and Docoglossa, Demonstrating, 105 — — — in Diotocardia, 170 — Isolated, Activity, 288 — of Mallophaga, 171 — Structure in Bivalves, 664 Heath, H., New Species of Semper’s Larva from the Galapagos Islands, 448 Hebb, R. G., 119, 121, 122, 390, 746 — Apparatus for Collecting Blood for Bacteriological Examination, 375 — Cultures of Bacteria on Blood-Serum INDEX. Helly, K., Studies on the Islands of Lan- gerhans, 164 Helminthological Studies, 32 Helminthosporium gramineum, Biology, 201 Hemileia, Revision of Genus, 347 | Hemiparasite, Rhacodium cellare, 201 Hemiptera, Copulation and Oviposition, Hemsley, W. B., Julianiaces, a New Family of Seed-plants, 687 Henderson, J. R., Coral-infesting Crab, 668 Henderson, W. D., Viviparity in Alcyo- nacea, 678 Henriksen, M. E., Arctic Biological Sta- tion, 546 — Functional View of Development, 538 Henry, T. A., Cyanogenesis in Plants, 687 — Probable Existence of Emulsin in Yeast, 187 _ Hepatic, British, New, 336 — Tubes of Anilocra frontalis, 442 Hepaticz, European, 190 — French, 690 — Nuclear Division, 325 | — of Bermuda, 337 and Agar, Preserved in Formalin, 388 | | — of New Caledonia, 337 | — of New England, 337 — Dry and Water-Immersion + by Ross, 22] — Filter for Mounting and other Media, devised by Mr. Taverner, 748 — Objective, to be used either as a Wet or Dry Lens, made by Ross, 249 — Porcelain Filter Doulton and Co., 747 Objective teriological Examination, 388 — Tubes containing Sterilised Nutrient Broth and Plugged with Paraffin Wax, 388 made by Messrs. | — of Dalmatia, 570 — of Puerto Rico, 337 Hepatics, Analytical Keys, 54 — Brazilian, 571 — British, 336 — — Key, 336 | — Direction of Growth, 560 — Syringe for Obtaining Blood for Bac- | | — of Middle Europe, 569 Hecke, L., Infection of Cereals by the | Smut Fungus, 74 Hedgecock, G. G., New Method of Mount- ing Fungi grown in Cultures for the Herbarium, 737 Hedley, C., South Australian Nudibranchs, 298 Hefferan, M., Agglutination and Biological Relationship in the Prodigiosus Group, 592 Heidenhain, M., Azocarmin and Chromo- trops as Contrast Stains, 381 — Staining and Mounting Ossifying Cartilage, 241 — Trichloracetic Acid as 233 Heiderich, F., Ciliated Epithelium in Human Papille Vallatz, 541 Heinricher, E., Witches’ Broom on Cherry, 343 — Witches’ Brooms, 205 Heinze, B., Fungi in Relation to Atmo- spheric Nitrogen, 455 Helly, K., Acidophil Goblet Cells in Torpedo, 10 a Fixative, — North American, 465 — of Naples, 571 — of the Jura, 465 Hepatomonas of Kala-azar, Development, 451 | Hermaphroditism in Crayfishes, 305 — in Frog, 660 — of Male Apus, 669 Hérouard, E., Parasitic Copepod in Am- phiura squamata, 669 | Herzig, E. M., Sexual Organs of New Polyclad Genus, 30 Herzog, M., Bacillus aureus foetidus, 215 Herzog, T., Moss-Distribution in Baden, 52 — Mosses of Baden, 569 Hess, C., Eves of Cephalopods, 433 Hesse, E., Myiasis of Toads, 665 — Wall of Myxosporidian Spores, 323 Heteronereis of Thames Estuary, 553: Heterotypic Division, 40 — — Achromatic Spindle, 40 Hewitt, E. G., Copulation and Oviposition in Hemiptera, 439 | Heydrich, F., Actinococcus, 579 Heyman, G., New Distomide from Chelo- nians, 178 Hickson, 8. J., Precious Corals, 678 — Stylasterina of Siboga Expedition, 181 INDEX. Hieronymus, G., South American Ferns, 563 Hill, E. C., Modification of Schultze’s Clearing Method, 628 Hill, E. G., The Oil of Indian Mites, 172 Hill, 'T. G., Parichnos, 566 Hill, M. D., Maturation of Ovum in Aleyo- nium digitatum, 182 Hilzheimer, M., European Hares, 658 Hind, W., Hinge-plate in Aviculopecten semicostatus, 299 Hinge-plate in Aviculopecten semicostatus, 299 Hirschler, J., Development of Catocala nupta, 665 Hiss, H., Classification Bacilli, 86 Hiss, P. H., Staining Capsules of Pneumo- coccus and Streptococcus, 514 Histogenesis of Cercarizum helicis, Study- ing, 616 of Dysentery | Howe, R. H., Tig Howe, M. A., Phycological Studies, 194 and others, American Lichens, 482 _ Howland, ©. W., Instrument for Centring, Histology of the Pancreas, Studying, | 375 — of Vertebrates. See ConTENTs, x Hive-Bees Nesting in the Open Air, 551 Hlavya, S., Conochiloides, New Genus of Rotifers, 180 Hockauf, J., Poisoning by Fungi, 206 and of the Mouth, 709 Hohnel, F. v., Contributions to Mycology, 79 — Mycological Notes, 348 Holden, Isaac, Phycological Notes, 63 Holder, J. T., Old Microscope made by Andrew Pritchard, 518 Holler, A., Moss-Flora of Tyrol, 569 Hollos, L., Underground Fungi in Hun- gary, 200 Hollrung, M., Plant Pathology, 79 Holmes, 8. J., Alaskan Amphipods, 176 Holothurian Spicules, 446 ; Holothurians, Antarctic, 33 Holothyrids, 304 Holzinger, J. M., and another, American Mosses, 334 Hoofs of Sheep, Abnormal, 659 Hopkinson, J., British Fresh-water Rhizo- pods, 679 Hoplophoride, Affinities, 307 Horder, T. J., Streptococci Pathogenic to Man, 710 Hori, 8., Disease of Bamboo, 474 Horned ‘Toad, Phrynosoma cornutum, Studying the Gastrulation, 731 Horse, Interstitial Testicular Gland, 7 — Intestinal Streptococcus, 90 — Trypanosome, 557 Horses, Inheritance of Coat Colour, 535 Houstonia cerulea, Studying the Pollen- tube, 730 Howe, M. A., New American Coralline Alge, 341 North Marking, and Testing Lenses, 221 Howorth, H. G., The Presence of Greenish- Coloured Markings in the Fractured Surfaces of Test-pieces, 247 Hoyer, H., Development of Lymphatic System in Tadpoles, 9 Hoyer, H., jun., Lymphatic System of Frog Larva, 660 Huber, G. C., Rapid Method of Preparing Large Numbers of Sections, 623 Hue, A., Anatomy of Collema, 706 Hugounenq, L., Formation of Hemoglobin in the Embryo, 424 Human Embryo, Three-weeks’, 162 Humaria granulata, Studying Develop- ment of Ascocarp, 379 Hume, H. H., Plant Diseases, 205 Humphrey, H. B., Development of Fossom- bronia, 191 Hurst, C. C., Inheritance of Coat Colour in Horses, 535 Husnot, P., Motility of the Echinococcus Scolex, 673 | Hybridisation of Sea-Urechin and Comatula, Hoffmann, E.,Spirochete of Balanitisand 33 | Hybrids, Graft, 561 Hydra, New Species, 182 Hydrachnid Eyes, Structure, 25 — Fauna of Scotland, 552 | Hydrachnids, New Excretory Organ, 24 Hydroids and Bugula, Rheotropism, 447 — New Natal, 677 — Rheotropism, 34 Hydrophobia, Demonstrating Presence of Negri’s Bodies, 737 Hygroscopic Properties of Mosses, 53 | Hygroseopicity as a Cause of Physical Action at a Distance, 686 | Hymenopiera, Fossil, from Colorado, 549 _ — Parasitic, Polyembryony, 19 Hymenopterous Parasite, Polyembryony, 19 — Parasites, Biology, 549 Hypermely in Frog, 539 Hyphomycete Parasitic on Vine, 200 Hyphomycetes, 699 — New Genus, 585 Hypocrea alutacea, Life-history, 200 — riccioidea, 199 Hypotrichous Infusoria, Life-history, 449 Fr Ichthyobdella, Staining Neuroglia, 736 Icthyological Notes, 292 Icthyopsida, Lymphoid Tissue, 12 Idiogenes, Scolex, 31 _ Ikeda, I., Philippine Gephyreans, 28 780 Ikeda, R., Epithelium of Human Epididy- mis, 656 — Studying the Epididymis, 618 Illing, G., Demonstrating Fat-Cells in Glandule Vesiculares of Cattle, 513 Illuminating and other Apparatus. CONTENTS, XXXV — Apparatus for Loup Preparations and for Microscopy, 603 Illumination, Dark Field, 157 Images of Gratings, Influence on, of Phase- Differences amongst their Spectra, 518, 532 Imamura, T'., New Photobacterium, 359 Imbedding Method, Aceton-Paraffin, 623 See — Objects. See CONTENTS, xxxix — Rapid, Acetone-Celloidin Method, 105 Imhof, O. E., Wing-structure in Cicads, 302 Immersion Oil Bottle, 738 — Spot Lens, by Reichert, 745 Immunity of Foetus, 162 Impregnation and Fertilisation, 651 Incertz Sedis. See CONTENTS, xix Incubator, Low Temperature, Electrically Controlled, 102 Index Filicum, 688 Indigo, Demonstrating Presence, 234 Indol and Cholera-red Reactions, Demon- stration, 240 Infundibulum in Fishes, 287 Tnfusoria, Conjugation, 320 — Hypotrichous, Cultivating and Pre- paring, 509 — — Life-history, 319 Infusorians, Alleged Senile Degeneration, 37 — Alveolar Structure, 681 — Ciliated, within Eggs of Rotifer, 316 Ingham, W., British Hepatics, 336 — Yorkshire Bryophyta, 568 — — Mosses, 690 7 — — Fresh-water Algz, 576 Injecting Objects. See ConTENTS, xl Injection, Intravenous, Apparatus, 373 — Physiological, for Studying Develop- ment of Enamel, 625 Insect Development, Effect of Tempera- ture on, 436 — Head, Morphology, 19, 548 — Larve, Locomotor Cuticular growths, 548 — Ovary, Structure, 20 Insecta. See CONTENTS, xiv Insectivora and Rodents, Accessory Sex- glands, 7 Insects, Abdominal Gland-pockets, 548 — Attacking Cocoanut Palm, 551 — Circulatory System, 299 — Flower-visiting, in Styria, 668 — Injurious, of the State of New York, 667 Out- INDEX. Insects, Injurious to Cocoanut Palm, 302 — Morphology of, and Embiidze, 300 — Paleozoic, 436 — Sense Organs, 172 — Treatise, 299 Insoluble Substances, Action in Modifying the Effect of Deleterious Agents, 686 Instruments, Accessories, etc. See Con- TENTS, XXXV Integument, Structureand Development, 11 Interferences Produced by a Network Limiting a thin Lamella, 494 Interferential Photography ; Variation of Incidence ; Polarised Light, 604 Intermaxillary, Human Skull without, 8 Intestinal Bacteria, Isolating, 375 Intra-vitam Staining of Retro-cerebral Ap- paratus of Rotifers, 735 Invertebrata. See CoNTENTS, xiii Inwards, R., Microscopic Slides in Drawers, 631 Tris Diaphragm, Beck’s, 99 Tron and Carbon System, Equilibrium Curves, 514 —and Steel, Deformation and'Fracture, 741 — — — Hardness of Constituents, 742 — Crystallography, 516 — Influence of Nickel and Carbon on, 248 — Mechanical Properties of Single Crys- tals, 115 — Overstraining by Tension and Com- pression, 384 — Questions in the Chemistry, 739 “Tron and Steel Magazine,” The, 635 Tron-Carbon Alloys, with High Percent- ages of Carbon, 385 Tron- Nickel-Manganese-Carbon Alloys, 636 Trritability, Galvanotropic, of Roots, 44 — in Algae, 43 — of Seed Plants. See ConTENTS, xxiv | Ischnura heterosticta, Dimorphism in Fe- male, 24 Isis hippuris, Structure, 556 Islands of Langerhans, Studies, 164 Isopod, Meristic Variation, 442 lsopods, Antarctic, 552 — Commensalism of Two, 442 — Monograph of North American, 306 — of North-West Coast of North America, 175 — Subterranean, 26 Issakowitsch, A., Determination of Sex in Daphnids, 176 Issel, R., Italian Oligocheta, 310 — New Rotifers, 446 Istvanffi, G. de, Diseases of the Vine, 204 Ixodes, Gland System, 668 — Notes on Structure, 304 Txodes reduvius, Structure, 441 Izuka, A., Collateral Budding in a Syllid, 553 — Japanese Palolo, 28 INDEX, J. Jaap, O., German Mosses, 691 Jackson, B. D., Botanical Glossary aud Encyclopedia, 45 Jackson, C. F., Key to Families and Genera of Thysanura, 667 Jackson, C. M., Topography of Human Fetal Pancreas, 162 Jackson, H., Germination of Seeds of the Castor-Oil Plant, 42 Jacobesco, N., New Genus of Parasitic Fungi, 344 Jacobi, A., Spinning Mite on Conifers, 173 | Jacobson Organ in Sphenodon, 543 Jaczewski, A. de, and others, Plant Dis- eases, 587 Jaderholm, G. A., Endocellular Nets in Ganglion Cells, 287 Jahn, E., Studies in Myxomycetes, 350 Jammes, L., Conditions of Development in Ascaris vitulorum, 671 Janet, C., Degeneration of Muscles of Flightin Ants after Nuptial Flight, 664 Janicki, C. v., Mammalian Cestodes, 673 Janse, J. M., Morphology of Caulerpa, 341 Janssens, F. A., Spermatogenesis in Ba- trachoseps attenuatus, 283 Januschke, H., Taupetum of Abramus brama, 654 Japanese, Hands of, 659 Jatta, A., New Lichen Genus, 209 Jaw, Mammalian, Angle of, 659 — Muscles, Relation to Salivary Glands in Snakes, 14 Jeftrey, E. C., Structure of Cretaceous Pine-wood, 685 Jenkins, —., 250 Jennings, H. 8., Behaviour of Sea Anem- ones, 677 Johnson, T., Corn Smuts and their Pro- pagation, 700 Johnston, J. B.,Cranial and Spinal Gang- lia in Amphioxus, 662 — Cranial Nerves in Petromyzon, 165 Johnstone, J., Flounders with Spinulated Scales, 16 — Parasites of Fishes, 30 Jolly, W. A., Gistrous Cycle in Dog, 282 — Ovary as an Organ of Internal Secre- | tion, 282 Jorgensen, H., Protista Plankton, 65 Joseph, H., New Species of Chloromyxum, 38 Jost, L., Physiology of Germination of Pollen, 455 Joubin, L., Bathypelagic Nemertines, 674 — Photogenic Organs in the Hye of a Cuttlefish, 169 Juday, C., Halocyprids of San Diego, 442 Juel, H. O., Uredinee, 201 Julianiacez,a New Family of Seed-plants, 687 Dee. 19th, 1906 781 Juncacer, Fungi on, 587 Jungermannia barbata and its Allies, 465 Jiiptner, H. v., Questions in the Chemistry of Iron, 739 — The Equilibrium Curves of the System Tron and Carbon, 514 Just, J., Ultramicroseopy of Oleosole, 366 K. Kala-azar, ment, 451 Kalichewsky, M., Malacostraca of the Gulf of Odessa, 669 Karop, G. C., 389 Karsten, G., Phytoplankton of the Antarc- tic Ocean, 196 Karwacki, L., Flora of Malignant Growths, 90 Karyokinesis in the Ascomycetes, 41 Kauffman, C. H., Mycorhiza - producing Fungus, 701 Kayser, E., Bacillus of “ La Graisge,” Dis- ease of Wine, 357 Kayser, H., Fixation Method for Demon- strating Bacterial Capsules, 377 Keeble, F., On “ Zoochlorella ” in Conyo- luta, 580 — Zoochlorelle of Convoluta roscoffensis, 314 Keegan, P., The Chemistry of Some Com- mon Plants, 44 Kegel, W., Fungus Parasitic on Elodea, 699 Hepatomonas of, Develop- Keissler, K. v., Plankton of Lake Worth in Carinthia, 581 Kellas, A. M., Action on Bacteria of Electrical Discharges, 710 Kellermann, W. A., and others, American Mycology, 702 — — — Uredinesx, 346 Kempen, P. N. yan, Tympanic Region in Mammals, 13 Kepner, W. A., Leptophrys, 450 Kern, F., Muscinez of the Dolomites, 691 | Kern, F. D., North American Species of Peridermium, 699 Kerr, R., Nature through Microscope and Camera, 113 Kesteven, H. L., Protoconch in Gastropods, 17 Kidney, Primitive, in Chick, Development, 161 Kiernik, E., Muscles of Pedicillariz, 33 | Kilimenko, W. N., Bacillus paraty phosus B e cane, 594 Kindberg, N. C., Notes on European Mosses, 332 Kiralyfi, G., The Value of Malachite Green Medium for Differentiating B. typhosus and B. coli. 729 3 F 782 Kirkman, T., Second List of Rotifera of Natal, 263 Kirkpatrick, R., Oscules of Cinachyra, 34 Kishinouye, K., Species of Acetes, 26 Kjelimann, F. R., Marine Flora of Jan Mayen, 575 Kjer-Petersen, —., Slide-Basket for Stain- ing Twelve Sections Simultaneously, 382 Klaptoez, B., Polyonchobothrium polyp- teri, 673 Klebahn, H., Relation of Fungi imper- fecti to Ascomycetes, 583 Klebs, G., Variation of Flowers, 561 Klein, E., Bacillus enteritidis Gaertner, and Bacillus pseudo-tuberculosis Pfeiffer, 85 — Bacterioscopic Analysis of Excremental Pollution, 728 — Influence of Symbiosis on the Virulence of Pathogenic Microbes, 93 — Observations on Types of Bacillus pestis, 91 Klein, W., New Distomide from Rana, 178 Klimenko, W.N., Bacillus flavo-aurantiacus sporogenes, 708 Klinkhardt, W., Head Ganglia and Sen- sory Line in Selachia, 165 Klugh, A. B., North American Ferns, 562 Kuiper, T., Respiration in Bony Fishes, 431 Koch, R., Distinctions between Species of Trypanosoma, 321 Kock, —., Plant Diseases, 205 Koehler, R., Antarctic Echinoderms, 446 — Peculiar Larval Asterid, 676 Kofoid, C. A., New Peridinid, 320 — Structure of Gonyaulax triacantha, 321 Kohl, F. G., Colouring Matter in the Chromatophores of Diatoms, 466 Koltzoff, N. K., Spermatozoa of Deca- poda, 553 —- Studying Sperm-Cells of Decapods, 236 Korff, K. v., Development of Dentine in Mammalia, 163 Kormann, B., Histology of Mammalian Nostril, 426 Korotneff, A., Comephorus, 294 — Embryology of Pyrosoma, 297 — Fixing Pyrosoma, 237 Kosaroff, P., Biology of Pyronema confluens, | 698 Koschkaroff, D. N., Morphology of Teleo- stean Skeleton, 661 Kostanecki, K., History of Division Centres in Fertilisation, 650 — Origin of Centrioles of First Cleavage | Spindle in Myxostoma, 29 Kourbatoff, —., Etching Velocity of Metal- lographic Reagents, 635 Kowalewski, M., Helminthological Studies, 32 Kraskovits, G., Cell-division gonium, 684 in Cdo- | INDEX, Krassin, P., Demonstrating the Regenera- tion of Peripheral Nerves, 625 Krause, R., Demonstrating the Endings of the Auditory Nerve in Petromyzon fluviatilis, 237 — Nerves of Auditory Organ in Petro- myzon fluviatilis, 287 Krauss, F., Demonstrating the Connection between Epidermis and Cutis in Saurians and Crocodiles, 236 — Skin of Reptiles, 426 Kravetz, L. P., Sternum and Episternum of Mammals, 658 Kreidl, A., Immunity of Foetus, 162 — Stridulation of Gryllus campestris, 667 Krieg, W., Uredinesx, 202 Kriiss, P., Spectroscope with Adjustable Dispersion, 493 Krzysztalowiez, F., Life-history of Spiro- cheta pallida, 683 Kuczewski, O., Morphology and Biology of Chara delicatula f. bulbillifera, 577 Kiikenthal, W., Japanese Alcyonarians, 448 Kulisch, P., and another, Plant Diseases, 348 Kunstler, J., Fibrillar Structure of Bac- teriaceze, 709 — Modifications of Cytoplasm of Opalina, 681 — Trophoplasmic Spherules in Ciliata, 32 Kunze, G., Acid Excretion of Roots and Fungi, 458 Kupper, W., Bud-formation on Leaves, 564 Fern L. Laackmann, H., Reproduction of Tintin- nodex, 681 Labbe, E., Micro-organisms as Aids to Digestion in Drosera rotundifolia, 686 Labyrinth, Membranous, in Elasmo- branchs, 545 — — in Sharks, 432 Lacomme, L., Cultivation of Microbes in Media of Definite Chemical Composi- tion, 729 — Spleen Emulsion as an Antagonist of Nagana Trypanosomes Introduced into Dogs, 682 Lacouture, C., Analytical Keys to the Hepaties, 54 Ladreyt, F., Polian Tubes in Sipunculus, 28 Lafar, F., Handbook of Technical My- cology, 79 Lagarde, J., Contribution to the Study of the Fleshy Discomycetes, 582 — Studying Discomycetes, 614 Lagerheim, G., Plant Diseases, 205 INDEX. Laguesse, E., Rod-like Gland-Cells in Fishes are Sporozoa, 287 Laidlaw, F. F., Deep-Sea Nemertines, 314 Lambert, M., Activity of the Isolated Heart, 288 Lambert, P., Arrangement for Simulta- neously Obtaining Minimum Deviation with Several Prisms, 608 Lamella, Interferences Produced by a Net- work Limiting a Thin, 494 Lamellibranchiata. See ConTENTs, xiv Lamellicorns, Bionomics of South African, 438 Lamina in Scolopendrium, Regeneration, 328 Lamp, Adjustable Microscope, 98 — Cooper-Hewitt, Use of, as a Source of Monochromatic Light, 365 — Nernst-Paul High-Power Electric Pro- jector. 97 — Sub-stage Spark Gap for Microscope, 223 Lamprey, Vascular System, 16 Lane-Claypon, J. E., Factors Determining Growth and Activity of Mammary Glands, 539 — Interstitial Cells in Ovary of Rabbit, 281 Lang, P., Structure of Hydrachnid Eyes, 25 Lang, W. D., Reptant Eleid Polyzoa, 315 Langerhans, Islands, Studies, 164 Lankester, E. R., New Species of Cephalo- discus, 315 Lantern, Nernst-Paul Electric Science, 97 — — Optical Electric, 96 — Slides, of Plant Structure, Exhibition, 389 Largaiolli, V., Diatoms of the Trentino, 65 Larva, Frog, Lymphatic System, 660 — of Echiurus, 670 Larve, Amphibian, Peripheral Nervous System, 9 — Dipterous, from Deep Water in Lakes, 23 — Insect, Locomotor Cuticular Out - growths, 548 — of Bryozoa, Studying, 621 — of Macrura eucyphota, 552 Lateral Line Organs, Function of in Fishes, 15 Lathe, Using as a Microtome, 106 Laudenbach, J., Semicircular Canals in Birds, 291 Laurent Polariscope Readings, Notes, 224 Lauterborn, R., New Chrysomonad Genus, 681 — Northern Marine Rotifers, 180 Laveran, A., Hematozoa from Partridge and Turkey, 322 — Identity of Surra and Mbori, 450 — New Trypanosome, 682 783 Law, E. F., Brittleness and Blisters in Thin Steel Sheets, 740 Lea, A. M., Blind Coleoptera of Australia, 302 Leake, H. M., Demonstrating the Presence of Indigo, 234 Leaves Attacked by Peronospora, Respira- tion of, 561 Lebedinsky, J., Development of Pedicellina echinata, 178 Lebrun, H., Application of the Method of Rotary Disks to Microscopical Tech- nique, 725 Leche, W., Vestige of Notochord in Skull of Centetes, 289 Ledebur, —., Cementation, 386 Leech, Abnormality of Genital Organs, 311 — Digestion. 311 Lefevre, G., Artificial Parthenogenesis in Thalassema, 443 Lefevre, J., Effect of Light on Green Plants in Absence of Carbon-dioxide, 456 Legendre, R., Bielschowsky’s Method of Staining Nervous Tissue, 735 — Habits of Acera bullata, 297 — Pathological Nature of Holmgren’s Canaliculi in Nerve-Cells, 427 Léger, L., Myxosporidium of Trout, 558 — New Myxosporidian from the Tench, 682 — Wall of Myxosporidian Spores, 323 Leguminose, Winged Stele in some, 453 Lehmann, H., Aortic Arches in Mammals, 425 Leinemann, K., Number of Facets in Beetles’ Eyes, 301 Leisewitz, W., Locomotor Cuticular Out- growths in Insect Larvae, 548 Leishman, W. B., New Method of Enu- merating Leucocytes, 383 — Method of Producing Chromatin Staining in Sections, 240 Leitner, M., Habits and Structure of Gall- midge, 666 Lejeune, P., Etching Velocity of Metallo- graphic Reagents, 636 Lemmermann, E., Fungi on Juncacex, 587 Lens, Chick’s, Amnion Invagination in the Formation, 284 Lenses, Cheap Glass, 364 — Fluid, 491 — Howland’s Instrument for Centring, Marking, and Testing, 221 Lenzmann, R., Simplified Method of Staining Blood Films, 380 Leontowitsch, A., Intra-vitam Stains for Nervous Tissue, 242 Lepadogaster, Epidermis, 655 Lepidodendron obovatum, 567 Lepidoptera, Experimental Alteration of Colours, 21 By ay 2 784 Lepidoptera, Influence of Temperature on, 436 — of Morocco, 301 Lepidosiren and Protopterus, Spiracular Organ, 544 Lepidosiren paradoxa, Chromosomes, 656 Lepidostrobus, Megaspore, 567 Leposphilus labret, 308 Leppin and Masche’s Mirrormegascope, 602 Leprosy Bacillus, Cultivation, 511 Leptophrys, 450 Lerat, P., Demonstrating the Phenomena of Maturation in Oogenesis and Sper- matogenesis, 233 — Oogenesis and Spermatogenesis in Cyclops strenuus, 670 Lesage, A., Amosbe of Dysentery, 36 Lesdain, Bouly de, French Lichens, 209 Leucocyte Paths, and Intercellular Bridges, 286 Leucocytes, Demonstrating Life-history, 619 — New Method of Enumerating, 383 Leuriaux, G., Culture of Treponema palli- dum, 610 Levaditi, —., Spirillosis of Fowls, 708 Levaditi, C., Cultivation of the Spirillum of Tick-Fever, 511 — New Flagellate Parasite of Bombyx mori, 37 — New Method of Demonstrating Spiro- cheta pallida in Hereditary Syphilis, 242 Lewin, L., Photography of the Absorption Rays of the Colouring Matters of Blood, 605 Lewis, C. E., Riccia, 337 Lewis, F. T., Aortic Arches in Mammals, 536 Lewkowicz, X., Cultivation of Bacillus fustformis, 613 Lichen Genus, New, 209 — Parasite, New, 473 Lichens, American, 353, 482 — Bavarian, 83 — Biological and Morphological Observa- tions, 353 — “Chemical Tests” in Determining, 707 — Chemistry, 210 — Dye-stuffs, 590 — French, 83, 209, 590, 706 — of Kew Gardens, 358 — Relation to Trees and Soil, 706 — See CoNTENTS, xxxi — Silicious, Research, 210 — Some French, 84 — Subterranean, 481 Lie-Pettersen, O. I., Marine Rotifera of Norway, 316 Ligamentary Structures in Bivalves, 18 Light, Effect on Green Plants in Absence of Carbon-dioxide, 456 — Emission, and Bacteria, 85 INDEX. Light Filters, Method of Determining Exact Colour, 226 — Influence on Pigmentation of Amphi- bian Ova and Larve, 285 Lilium tigrinum, Demonstrating Chromo- some Reduction in Microsporocytes, 512 Lillie, R. 8., Demonstrating Structure of Nephridia of Arenicola, 237 — Nephridia of Arenicola, 553 Limax tenellus, Re-discovery in Britain, 663 Limb, Bull with Supernumerary, 538 — Skeleton, Adaptive Modifications, 657 Limbs, Supernumerary, Origin, 539 Lime Trees, Parasites, 203 Lime-forming Layer of the Madreporarian Polyp, 182 Limnocodium at Munich, 181, 447 Lindau, G., Hyphomycetes, 699 Linden, M. y., Assimilation of Carbon- dioxide by Chrysalids, 435 — Colouring Matter in Vanessa, 21 — Experimental Alteration of the Colours of Lepidoptera, 21 Lindinger, L., Spinning Gastropods, 170 Lingard, A., Measurement of Trypano- somes, 244 Linstow, v., Ascaris halicoris, 444 Linstow, O. v., New Nematodes and other Parasites, 672 Linton, E., Cestodes from a Porpoise, 31 Liouville, R., Influence of Velocity on the Law of Deformation of Metals, 514 Lippmann, M. G., Principles on which Direct Photography of Colours Depends; Direct Colour-Photography Depending on Prismatic Dispersion, 720 Liquids, Simple Method for Determination of Refraction Index, 367 Lister, J. J., Dimorphism of English Num- mulites, 449 Lithothamnia, Northern, Remarks, 467 Litomastix truncatellus, Life-history, 300 Liver, Adipogenic Function, 12 — and Multiple Testis, 544 — Cells, Secretion, 287 — Preparing, for Demonstrating Hepatic Ferments, 239 Liverworts, Regeneration, 338 Lizard, Double Embryo, 284 Lloyd, C. G., Mycological Notes, 700 — Tylostomez, 701 Lloyd, C. G., and another, Mycological Notes, 476 Lloyd, F. E., Lycopodium in the American Tropics, 330 Loach, New Microsporidian, 323 Lobster, Life-history, 25 — Regeneration of Lost Parts, 552 Lobsters, Larval, Phototropism, 441 Locusta viridissima, Spermatogenesis, 667 Loeb, J., Improved Method of Artificial Parthenogenesis, 161 INDEX. Loefiler, —., Differentiation of Pacillus typhosus, 612 Loeffler, E., New Method of Obtaining Anti-bodies, 111 Loeper, —., Glycogen in Sporozoa, 39 Loeske, L., European Species of Philonotis, 572 —«C- — Variability in Philonotis, 190 Loewenthal, N., Demonstrating Chromatic | or Nucleoid Granules, 624 Lohlein, M., Phagocytosis in vitro, 487 Lohmann, H., Arctic and Antarctic Appen- dicularize, 547 Lohnis, F., Bacterium agreste, 213 Loisel, Secretions, 6 G., Genital Glands and their | — Toxic Properties of Seminal Fluid, 283 — — Toxicity of Eggs, 13 Lolium Fungus, Poisonous Nature, 347 Lolium temulentum, Affinities of Fungus of, 475 Loman, J. C. C., Coloured Skin Secretion | in Opilionides, 303 London, E. S., Peripheral Nervous System of Mammals, 428 Longstaff, G. B., Bionomics of South African Lamellicorns, 438 — Rest Attitude of Butterflies, 550 Lonnberg, E., New Species of Orycteropus, 289 Loomis, F. B., Momentum in Variation, 546 Looss, —., New Bilharzia in Man, 31 Lophocolea, 573, 692 Lopriore, G., Microspores of Araucaria | Bidwillii, 42 Lorch, W., Apparatus for Rapidly Cleans- ing Sand and Gravel, 631 Lord, J. E., Acanthocystis pertyana, 680 Loricariid Fishes, Notes, 293 737 Lozinski, P., Structure of the Heart in Bivalves, 664 Lubenau, —., Bacillus peptonificans caus- ing an Epidemic of Gastro-enteritis, 356 Lubimotf, L. V., Distribution of Dry-Rot in Russia, 203 Lucas, A. H. 8., Norfolk Island Algze, 576 Lucet, —., Hematozoa from Partridge and Turkey, 322 Ludwig, F., Phosphorescent Collembola, 24 z Liihe, Max, Babesia, 322 Lumbriculus and Tubifex, Ethology, 443 Lumbriculus variegatus, Regeneration, 176 Lumiuoscope, Tswett’s, 719 Luminosity of Schistostega, 690 Lung, Nerve-endings, 540 Lungs in Tropidonotus, Levelopment, 163 — of Domesticated Animals, Studying the Histology, 730 785 Luther, A., Origin Platodes, 178 Lutz, L., Symbiotic Yeast, 473 oe astrarche, Variations in Britain, ot Lycoperdon, Spores, 475 Lycopodium in American Tropics, 330 Lymnea, Genitalia, 18 Lymphatic System in Tadpoles, Develop- ment, 9 of Gonoducts in ae Frog Larva, 660 — Vessels of Prostate, Demonstrating, 617 Lymphoid Tissue in Icthyopsida, 12 Lyon, H. L., New Genus of Ophioglossacem, 188 M. Maas, O., Medusz from Amboina, 317 McAlpine, D., Australian Rusts, 699 — Native or Blackfellow’s Bread. 203 | — New Genus of Uredinew: Uromycla- | — Natural dium, 75 — Rusts of Australia, 474 McAndrew, J., Hypocrea riccioidea, 199 Macaque Monkey, Investigating Structure of Spinal Cord, 617 | McAtee, W. L., Life-history of Cave Sala- mander, 660 Macchiati, L., Bacterium chlorometa- morphicum, 89 | MacGillivray, A. D., Wings of Tenthre- dinoidea, 665 Machilidz, Notes, 667 | McIntosh, W. C., Life-history of Blennius pholis, 166 History Notes Andrews, 296 from St. | — Photogenic Marine Animals, 288 Lowden, M. M., Demonstrating the Pres- | ence of Negri’s Bodies in Hydrophobia, | Mackinney, V. H., A New Spectrometer: its Uses and Advantages, 224 Macrura eucyphota, Lary, 552 Macrura of the ‘ Hassler’ and ‘ Blake,’ 442 Macvicar, S. M., Key to British Hepatics, 336 MeWilliam, A., The Thermal Transforma- tions of Carbon Steels, 247 Madreporaria and Actiniaria, Currents, 182 — Collected by the ‘ Albatross,’ 677 Madreporarian Polyp, Lime-forming Layer, 182 Magnesium Phosphate in the Preparation of Media, 231 Ciliary | Magnin, A., French Mycology, 586 Magnus, W., Form Development in Agarics, 700 Maheu, J., Subterranean Algal Flora of France, 469 — — Fungi, 476 — — Lichens, 481 _ — — Moss-Flora of France, 462 786 Maiden, J. H., Bryophytes of Norfolk Island, 572 — Norfolk Island Ferns, 563 Maire, R., Studies in Erysiphacez, 199 Malacostraca of the Gulf of Odessa, 669 Malarial Crescents, Phagocytosis, 415 Malassez, L., Evaluation of the Power of Microscope Objectives, 363 — Magnifying Power of Microscopical Objectives, 362 Malenkovié, B., Cultivating Wood-Destroy- ing Moulds, 612 — Destruction of Wood by Fungi, 586 Males in Odonata, Supposed Numerical Preponderance, 24 Malignant Growths, Flora, 90 Malkoftf, K., Bacterial Disease of Sesamum orientale, 593 Mallophaya and Pediculide, Ovaries, 172 -— Heart, 171 Malpighian Tubules, 171 — — Structure and Function, 549 Malvacez, Chlorosis, 559 Mammalia, Development of Dentine, 163 Mammals, Aortic Arches, 425, 536 — Peripheral Nervous System, 428 — Secretion in Urinary Ducts. 168 — Sternum and Episternum, 658 — Structure of Vagina and Uterus, 541 — Studying the Microscopical Anatomy of Vagina and Uterus, 511 — Tertiary, Evolution, 13 — Tympanic Region, 13 Mammary Glands and other Skin-glands of Marsupials, 542 — — Factors Determining Growth and Activity, 539 Man, Number of Chromosomes, 542 Manceau, E., Bacillus of “ La Graisse,” Disease of Wine, 357 Mandl, L., Immunity of Foetus, 162 Manipulation, Microscopical. See Con- TENTS, XXXVi Mano, T. M., Demonstrating the Structure of Nucleoli and Chromosomes, 234 — Relation of Nucleus and Chromosomes, 40 Manouélian, J., Origin of the Optic Nerve, 8 Manouglian, —., Spirillosis of Fowls, 708 Marais de Beauchamp, P., Retro-Cerebral Organ in Certain Rotifers, 446 Marchal, EK]. and Em., Starch in the Bryophyta, 560 Marchal, P., Biology of Hymenopterous Parasites, 549 — Poly-embryony in Parasitic Hymenop- tera, 19 Marchoux, E., Stegomyia fasciata and Yellow Fever, 438 — Studying Yellow Fever, 511 Marcinowski, K., Studying the Vascular Peele and Blood of Amphibia, 616 INDEX. Marcus, H., Maturation in Ascaris canis, 1 — Rachis Nucleus in Ascaris, 177 Maréchal, J., Development of Chromosomes in Teleostei, 6 Margaritifera panasese, Natural History, 454 Marino, M. F., Action of Micro-organisms on the Solution of Blue Azur in Methyl- Alcohol, 211 Marion, G. E., Jaw and Branchial Muscles in Elasmobranchs, 432 ° Mark, E. L., Spermatogenesis of Honey Bee, 665 “ Markflecke,”’ Cause, 666 Markings of Wing-scales of Butterfly, Notes, 648, 754 Marpmann, G., Bacteria of Mustard Seeds and lable Mustard, 592 Marshall, F. H. A., Gstrous Cycle in Dog, 282 — Ovary as an Organof Internal Secretion, 282 Marsupials, Development of Sex Struc- tures, 537 — Mammary Glands and other Skin- glands, 542 Martel, E., Anatomy of the Flower of the Umbelliferse, 325 Martens Stand, Zeiss’, 598 Martin, A., Conditions and Development of Ascaris vitulorum, 671 — Sexual Dimorphism in Aglaophenia, 556 Martin, 8., Physiological Action of the Chemical Products of B. enteriditis sporogenes, 711 — Specific Agglutinins formed by Bacil- lus coli communis, B. typhosus, B. para- typhosus, and B. proteus vulgaris, 711 Martini, E., Observations on Arcella vul- garis, 36 Massalongo, G., Italian Fungi, 703 Massee, G., Revision of the Genus Hemi- leia, 347 ; Massee, G. M., Fungi of Kew Gardens, 349 — Origin of Parasitism in Fungi, 349 Matouschek, F., Bohemian Mosses, 570 Matsumura, J., Japanese Algze, 576 — Japanese Ferns, 563 Matthewson, C. A., Studying the Pollen- tube in Houstonia cerulea, 730 Mattirolo, O., Underground Fungi of Portugal, 71 Maturation and Fertilisation in Porpoise, 422 — Divisions, 282 Maurizio, A., Resisting Powers of Tyro- glyphinz, 668 Mavrojannis, —., Differential Criteron be- tween Cholera Vibrio and certain other Vibrios: the Action of Formalin on their Gelatin Cultures, 85 INDEX. Maximow, A., Studying the Cell-forms of Connective Tissue, 376 Maxon, W. R., Exotic Ferns, 459 Mayer, A., Rachis in Ovaries and Testes of Nematodes, 444 Mayer, W.,Studying End-organs of Rhyn- chobdellida, 616 Mazé, P., Microbes in Cheese-making, 88 oe —., Notes on Poisonous Fungi, 6 ‘“‘Maznn,”’ Armenian, Bacteriology of, 211 Mbori and Surra, Identity, 450 Meade-Waldo, E. G. B., Lepidoptera of Morocee, 301 Measles, Bacteriology, 213 Measurement of Trypanosomes, 244 Media, Magnesium Phosphate in the Pre- paration, 231 —of Definite Chemical Composition, Cultivation of Microbes in, 729 Medium, Bile Culture, Cultivation of Bacillus typhosus from Blood by means of, 729 — Malachite Green, Value for Diffvrentia- ting B. typhosus and B. coli, 729 Medusa, Fresh-water, in River Niger, 447 Meduse from Amboina, 317 Megaspore of Lepidostrobus, 567 Mehely, L. v., Origin of Supernumerary Limbs, 539 Melophagus ovinus, Flagellata in, 321 Melosira, Pleomorphism, 466 Mendel’s Laws applied to Silk-worm Crosses, 437 Meningococcus, 354 Menneking, F'., Demonstrating the Struc- ture of Corals, 233 — Sclerites and Canals of Primnoids, 318 Mereschkowsky, ©., Nature and Origin of Chromatophores, 186 Meria and Hartigiella, Identity of the Genera, 74 Meristic Variations in Toad, 430 Mermis albicans, Structure, 672 Mermithidez, Family, 311 Merrifield, F., Effect of Temperature on Insect Development, 436 Merton, H., Retina of Nautilus and other Cephalopods, 17 Mesenchytreeus and Molosoma, Nephridia, 410 Meslin, G., Interferences produced by a Network Limiting a Thin Lamella, 494 Mesnil, F., Affinities of Haplosporidia, 322 — Life-history of Orthonectids, 445 Mesonitrophiland Oligonitrophil Bacteria, 211 Mestayer, R. L., 746 Metallographic Reagents, Etching Velo- city, 635 Metallography applied to Foundry Work, 246 — See ConTeENTs, xli 787 Metallography, Progress since 1901, 740 Metallurgical Congress, Liége, Papers read, 116 Metalnikoff, 8., Tuberculosis of the ‘* Bee- moth” (Galeria melonella), 485 Metals, Influence of Velocity on the Law of Deformation, 514 — Measurement of Elastic Limit, 635 — Plastic Crystalline, Pressure and Per- cussion, Figures on, 245 Metamerism in Integumentary Structures, 168 Metcalf, H.,Report on the Blastof Rice, 588 Metchnikotf, E., Whitening of Hairs and Feathers in Winter, 427 Metchnikow, W. C., Staining of Spirocheta vel Spironema pallida, 110 Methan, Carbon from, obtained by Bac- teria, 212 Methods in Plant Histology, 113 —of Microscopical Research: Vegetable Histology, 111 Meves, F., Demonstrating the Striated Membrane in the Erythrocyte of Salamander, 626 — Moist Chamber for Studying the Throm- bocytes of Salamander’s Blood, 620 — Red Blood Corpuscles of Amphibia, 166 Meyer, A., Apparatus for Culture of Bac- teria at High Oxygen Pressure, 510 — Plasmoptysis of Bacteria, 593 Meyer, E., Plasma Cells in Human Gasserian Ganglion, 541 Meyer, K., Sphxroplea annulina, 469 Meyer, P., Method for Making Permanent Preparations of Amyloid Degeneration, 382 Meyer, R., Nervous System of Asteridz, 556 — Studying the Nervous System of Asterias rubens, 234 Meyer, W. T., Phosphorescent Organ in Cephalopods, 547 Meylan, C., Hepatics of the Jura, 465 —NewFormof Orthotrichumcupulatum,33%9 — and another, Notes on Sphagnum, 334 Michael, A. D., 127, 250, 255 Michael, E., Guide to Fungology, 78 Micoletzky, H., Nervous and Excretory Systems of Fresh-water Triclads, 674 Micro-chemical Test for Zine, 738 — Tests for Wood, New, 513 Micro-chemistry, 324 Micro-organisms, Action on Solution of Blue Azur in Methyl-Alcohol, 211 — as Aids to Digestion in Drosera rotundi- folia, 685 — encapsuled, Method of Staining, 736 Micro-structure and Type of Fracture of Steel Test-pieces, Relation between, 740 Microbe of Whooping-Cough, 709 Microbes, Cultivation in Media of Definite Chemical Composition, 729 — Delicate, Medium for Cultivating, 727 788 Microbes in Cheese-making, 88 — Pathogenic, Influence of Symbiosis on the Virulence, 93 Microfungi of Galls, 348 Microscope Adapted to Special Duty, 228 — and Camera, Nature through, 113 — and Telescope, Limits of the Resolving Power, 521 — Beck’s “ Class” Dissecting, 600 — by Dollond, presented by Mr. C. Lees Curties, 747 — Culpeper, presented by Mr. Wynne E. Baxter, 747 — Dissecting, Beck’s New Portable, 94 — Granger’s Pocket, 715 — Lamp, Adjustable, 98 — Metallurgical, Improved Form, 146 — — New Form, 250 — Metallurgical, Watson’s Junior, 716 — Old, by Dollond, 744 — Old, made by Andrew Pritchard, 518, 596 — Old Portable, by Dollond, 713 — — presented by Mr. H. J. Morgan, 390 — Preparation, New Construction, 361 — Reichert’s New Handle, 95 — — — Large Mineralogical Stand, 216 — — — Stand VII., 95 — Room, Construction and Fittings, 496 — Small Pocket, 744 — Stand for Crystallographic and Petro- graphic Work, Zeiss, 489 — Watson and Sons’ Club, 216 —-—-—— Metallurgical, for use of Students, 745 — — — — Praxis Petrological, 216 — — — — School, 216 — Zeiss’ Martens Stand for Metallurgical Work, 598 Microscopes and Telescopes, Simple Ques- tions on Images of, 369 — Reichert’s Dissecting, with Handle, 360 — Zeiss’ Martens Stand for Metallurgical Work, 748 — — Measuring, 716 Microscopic Estimate of Bacteria in Milk, 629 — Preparation, Direct, of Cheese, 92 — Slides in Drawers, 631 Mieroscopica] Anatomy of the Vagina and Uterus of Mammals, Studying, 511 — Manipulation. See Conrents, xxxvi — Optics. See ConTENTS, xxxvi — Research Methods: Vegetable Hist- ology, 111 — Sections, Apparatus for Staining simul taneously numerous, 627 — Technique, Application of the Method of Rotary Disks, 725 — — See Contents, xxxvii Microscopy, Advances in: The Microscope at Work, 227 — and Cinematograph, 100 INDEX. Microscopy and Loup Preparations, Illu- minating Apparatus, 603 — Principles of: Being a Handbook to the Microscope, 722 — See CONTENTS, XXXV Microgpores of Araucaria Bidwillii, 42 Microsporidian, New, from Loach, 323 Microtome, Catheart-Darlaston, 734 — Reichert’s New, with Double Bearings, 238 — Triepel’s Cylinder-Rotation, 107 . — Using a Lathe as, 106 Microtomes. See ConTENTS, XXxix Microtus, Chorda tympani, 432 Miehe, G., Triepel’s Cylider-Rotation Microtome, 107 Miethe, A., Photography of the Absorption Rays of the Colouring Matters of Blood, 605 Migliorato, E., Hepatics of Naples, 571 Migration, Bird, Relation of Wind to, 290 Migrations, 168 Mildew, American Gooseberry, in Europe, 587 Miller, T. 1., Sub-stage Spark-gap Lamp for the Microscope, 223 Miller, W. S., Arrangement of Bronchial t:lood Vessels, 429 Millspaugh, C. F., Yucatan Plants, 328 Minchin, E. A., Sporozoon from Mucous Membrane of Human Septum nasi, 451 — Structure of the Tsetse-Fly, 22 Minelli, 8.. Agglutination Properties of Ficker’s Paratyphus diagnostica, 594 Mirrormegascope, Leppin and Masche’s, 602 Mite, Spinning, on Conifers, 173 Mites, Indian, Oil of, 172 Mitosis and Resting Nuclei, 9 Miyake, —., Spermatozoids of Cycas, 685 Moeller, J., Microscopy of Vegetable Foods, 871 Moffat, E., Method for Determining the Exact Colour for Light Filters, 226 — Portable Photomicrographic Camera, 99 — Stain for Photomicrography, 242 Moist Chamber for Studying Thrombo- cytes of Salamanders’ Blood, 620 Molisch, H., Bacteria and the Emission of Light, 85 Moller, A., Mycorhiza and Nitrogen Assi- milation, 686 Molliard, M., Nutrition of Plants in Ab- sence of Carbon-dioxide, 326 Mollison, T., Dorsal Gland of Dendro- hyrax, 168 Mollusca, Demonstrating the Structure, 580 — Marine, South African, 663 — See CONTENTS, xiii Molluscs, Mutation, 434 INDEX, 789 Momentum in Variation, 546 Monguillon, E., French Lichens, 706 Monkemeyer, W., Abnormal Moss Cap- sules, 461 Monkey, Piroplasina, 184 Monoblepharidex, Study, 71 Monochromatic Image of Light-source, New Arrangement for Procuring, 492 — Light, Use of Cooper-Hewitt Lamp as a Source, 365 Moneecism of Funaria, 573 Monopterus javanicus, Respiration and Circulation, 293 Montemartini, L., Influence of Parasites on the Biology of the Host Plant, 475 Monti, E., Observations on the Drigalski- Conradi Method of Diagnosing Typhoid Bacilli, 103 Monti, R., Migration of Plankton in Lakes, 546 Moore, A. C., Nuclear Division in Hepa- tice, 325 Moore, B., Effects of Alkalis and Acids on | Developing Ova of Sea-Urehin, 421 Moore, J. KE. 8., Behaviour of Nucleolus in Spermatogenesis of Cockroach, 172 Cells, 12 Moore, J. P., Alaskan Polychets, 310 of Definite Chemical Composition, 729 — Formation of Hemoglobin in the Em- bryo, 424 Morgan, A. P., and others, American My- cology, 78 Morgan, H. de R., Bacteriology of Summer Diarrheea of Infants, 486 — Isolating Intestinal Bacteria, 375 Morgan, H. J., Old Microscope Presented by, 390 Morison, C. G. T., Function of Silica in the Nutrition of Cereals, 455 “Morley, C., Palearctic Bassides, 301 Morphological Notes, 350 Morphology and Development of Empusi, 342 Mosca olearia, Bacteria, 357 Mosquitos, New York, 302 Moss Notes, Various, 692 Moss-Capsules, Abnormal, 461 Moss-Distribution in Baden, 52 Moss-Flora of Tyrol, 569 — — Subterranean, of France, 462 Moss-Galls, 461 Moss-Rhizoids, 461 Mosses, African, 464 — Antarctic, 190, 332, 463 — Arctic, 333 — Australian, 464 — Austrian, 463 — Austro-Hungarian, 691 — Bohemian, 570 Mosses, British, Notes, 332 — Classification, 567 — Dioicous, Sexuality of Spores, 335 — European, Notes, 332 — German, 463, 691 — Hungarian, 570 — Hygroscopic Properties, 53 | — Index, 464 — Mounting, 573 — New Austrian, 569 — — British, 567 — — Families, 52 — — Malayan, 52 — New Scotch, 690 — North American, 334, 464 — of Asia, 333 — of Baden, 569 | — of Formosa, 52 — of Hungary, 333 — of Mark Brandenburg, 463 — of New Caledonia, 689 — of Tonkin and Cayenne, 689 — of Zurich, 569 | — South American, 690 — Spanish, 333 | — Tasmanian, 191 — Plimmer’s Ledies and Reproductive | — Worcestershire, 568 _ — Yorkshire, 690 | Moth Parasitic on a Sloth, 665 Morel, A., Cultivation of Microbesin Media | Moths and Coleoptera of United States, 438 | Motility of Echinococcus Scolex, 673 Mottier, D. M., Heterotypice Division, 41 _ Moulds, Wood destroying, Cultivating, 612 Mounting and Staining Ossifying Carti- lage, 241 — Delicate Vegetable Tissues in Xylol- Balsam, 249 — Diatoms, 244 — Fungi Grown in Cultures for the Her- barium, New Method, 737 — Mosses, 573 — Objects. See Contents, xli — Stereoscopic Views, 726 Moyle, G., Rail Corrugation, 516 Mrazek, rs Tenia acanthorhyncha, 312 Mucorini, Fertilisation, 343 — Nuclear Fertilisation, 582 — Study, 471 Mucous Membrane of Human Alimentary Canal, 11 | Mucus, Role in Corals, 448 | Mudge, G. P., Abnormal Dogfish, 431 Muir, J., Overstraining of Iron by Tension and Compression, 384 Miller, J., Studying the Histology of the Lungs of Domesticated Animals, 730 Miiller, K., European Hepatice, 190 -— Genus Scapania, 338 — Hepatics of Middle Europe, 569 | Miiller, O., Pleomorphism of Melosira, 466 | Muratel, L., Motility of the HMchinococcus Seolex, 673 | Muride, Aquatic Genus, 289 790 Murillo, P., Method for Keeping Cultures Alive Indefinitely, 232 Murray, G., New Rhabdosphere, 36 Murray, J, Bdelloid Rotifera of the Forth Area, 315 — New Rotifers, 446 — Some Rotifera of the Sikkim Himalaya, 637, 745 Murray, J. A., Chromosomes of Lepidosiren paradoxa, 656 Musca marginalis, Synonymy, 439 Muscidz, Blood-sucking, 302 Muscinex, Australian, Morphology, 460 — British, 462 — Japanese, 572 — North American, 690 — of Christmas Island, 690 — of French Guiana, 464 — of the Dolomites, 691 — Swiss, 691 Muscle, Attachment and Origin in Arthro- pods, 19 Muscles, Jaw and Branchial, in Elasmo- branchs, 432 —of Flight in Ants, Degeneration after | Nuptial Flight, 664 — of Pedicellariz, 33 Mushroom Culture, 350 Musk Duck, Skeleton, 543 Mustard Seeds and Table Mustard Bac- teria, 592 Mycelium, Hibernating, Spread of Fungus Diseases by means of, 702 Mycenastrum corium, Notes, 585 Mycological Notes, 78, 348, 476, 700 — — French, 476 — Observations, 586 Mycology, American, 78, 702 — British, 477 — Contributions to, 79 — French, 586 — Technical, Handbook, 79 Mycorhiza and Nitrogen Assimilation, 686 Mycorhiza-producing Fungus, 701 Myiasis of ‘Toads, 665 Mylostoma, Structure and Relations, 432 Myriopoda, Spermatogenesis, 173 — See Conrents, xvi Myxine, Thyroid, 296 Myxobacteria, 479 Myxobolus from Head of Haddock, 682 Myxomonas betex, 588 Myxomycete, Study, 482 Myxomycetes, Studies, 350 — See ConTENTS, xxxii Myxosporidian in South African Rotifer, 683 — New, from Tench, 682 — Spores, Wall, 323 Myxosporidium of Trout, 558 Myzostoma, Origin of Centrioles of First Cleavage Spindle, 29 INDEX. N; | Nachet, A., Letter accompanying Dona- tion of Daguerrotypes by Léon Foucault, 122 Nadson, G., Study of Myxomycete, 482 Nasal and Eye Cavity, Experimental Studies in Development, 653 — Fossa of Vertebrates, 8 Nathansohn, A., Influence of Vertical Cur- rents on Marine Plankton, 545 Natural History Notes from St. Andrews, 296 Nature through Microscope and Camera, 113 Nauplius of Artemia salina, Cervical Cap, 308 Nautilus and other Cephalopods, Retina, I7/ Nebalia, Development and Systematic Position, 669 — Studying Development, 622 Nectar-glands of Vicia faba, Cytology, 559 Nectaries of Cruciferse, 561 Necturus, Habits, 291 Neger, F. W., Mycological Observations, 586 Negri, G., Bryology of Sorrento, 571 Negri’s Bodies, Demonstrating the Pres- ence in Hydrophobia, 737 Negri’s Bodies, Presence in Rabies. 233 — Corpuscles, Demonstrating, 626 Nelson, E. M., A Simple Wave-length Spectroscope, 418 — Dry and Water-Immersion 4 Objective by Ross, 221 — Flagella of ‘Tubercle bacillus, 119 — Note on Sir A. E. Wright’s Resolving Limit, 724 — The Limits of Resolving Power for the Microscope and Telescope, 256, 521 Nelson, J. A., Sexual Reproduction in AKolosoma, 443 Nematodes, Anatomy, 554 — and other Parasites, New, 672 — Rachis in Ovaries and Testes, 444 Nematohelminthes. See ConTENTS, xviii Nemec, B., Direction of Growth in Hepa- ties, 560 Nemertines, Bathypelagic, 674 — Deep Sea, 314 Nemiloff, A., Fat Cells in Acipenser, 541 Nephridia of Aeolosoma and Mesenchy- treus, 310 — of Arenicola, 553 — — — Demonstrating Structure, 237 Nephrolepis, Structure of Stolons, 566 Nereocystis Luetkeana, 693 Nernst-Paul Electric Science Lantern, 97 — High Power Electric Projector Lamp, 97 — Optical Electric Lantern, 96 INDEX, Nerve, Auditory, in Petromyzon fluviatilis, — Demonstrating the Endings, 237 — Optic, Histology, 655 — Tentacular, of Snail, Degeneration, 663 Nerve-Cells, Pathological Nature of Holm- gren’s Canaliculi, 427 Nerve-endings in the Lung, 540 Nerve-Fibres, Degenerated, Donaggio’s, Method of Staining, 622 Nerves, Cranial, in Chick, 429 — — in Petromyzon, 165 — — of Varanus bivittatus, 430 —in Female Genital Tract, Demonstra- ting, 625 —of Auditory Organs in Petromyzon | fluviatilis, 287 — Peripheral, Demonstrating Regenera- tion, 625 Nervous and Excretory Systems ot Fresh- | water Triclads, 674 — System in Asteride, 556 — — Metamorphosis Independent of, 424 — — of Asterias rubens, Studying, 234 — — of Copepoda, 442 — — Peripheral, in Amphibian Larve, 9 — —- — of Mammals, 428 — Tissue, Bielschowsky’s Staining, 735 — — Intra-vitam, Stains for, 242 Neumayer, V. L., Hardening of Organs with Formalin, 739 Neuro-fibrils, Staining, 109 Neuroglia in Ichthyobdella, 736 Neurological Studies, 164 Method of 791 Noack, —., Biology of Helminthosporium gramineum, 201 Noack, F., Plant Diseases, 204 Noe, G., Sensory Organs on Wings, 302 Noel, B., Endophytes of Orchidex, 78 Noll, —., Graft Hybrids, 561 Nordenskiold, E., Gland System in Ixodes, 668 — Structure of Ixodes reduvius, 441 Nordon, A., New Arrangement for Pro- curing a Monochromatic Image of a Light-Source, 492 Nordstedt, O., Nomenclature of Desmids, and other Algological Notes, 468 North, Rt. Hon. Sir F., Death of Mr. Vezey, 253 Nostoc Colonies and Anthoceros, 692 Nostril, Histology of Mammalian, 426 Notochord in Skull of Centetes, Vestige, 289 Nuclear Division in Hepatic, 325 — — in Saccharomyces ellipsoideus, 345 | ——in Yeast, 186, 473 — Fertilisation in the Mucorini, 582 Nuclei, Double and Polymorphic in Triton, 10 — Resting, and Mitosis, 9 Nucleinie Acid, Use of the Sodium Salt in Bacteriological Diagnosis, 610 Nucleoli and Chromosomes, Demoustrating the Structure, 234 Nucleolus in Spermatogenesis of Cock- roach, Behaviour, 172 Nucleus and Chromosomes, 40 | — Rachis, in Ascaris, 177 Neustead, R., Tick Fever in Congo Free | State, 304 Nicholson, W. E., Notes on British Mosses, | 332 Nickel and Carbon, Influence on Iron, 248 Nickel-Chromium Steels, 635 Nickel-Manganese Steels, 115 Nickel-Vanadium Steels, 245 Nickolsky, A., Reptiles and Amphibians of Russia, 430 Nicoll, W., Some New and Little Known Trematodes, 445 — Trematodes of Bivalves, 313 Nicolle, C., Cultivation of the Leprosy Bacillus, 511 — Spirillum of Bat, 557 Nicolle, M , Cultivation of Glanders, 611 Nicthoa astaci, Male, and the Suctorial Apparatus, 552 Nidamental Organ of Dogfish, 168 Nielsen, J. C., Cause of “ Markflecke,” 666 Nierstrasz, H. F., Notes on Chitonids, 299 Nitrogen and Mycorhiza, Assimilation, 686 — Atmospheric, Fungi in Relation to, 455 — in Steel, 245 — Loss of, in Soils, 93 Nitrogen-fixing Anaerobic Organisms, 610 Nudibranchs, Antarctic, 298 — British, 434 — South Australian, 298 Nummulites, Dimorphism of English, 449 Nusbaum, J , Regeneration in Polychets, 176 — Structure of Gas - gland bladder, 427 Nusbaum, J., The “Oval” of the Swim - Bladder, 661 Nussbaum, M., Regeneration in ‘Testes, 7 — Testis of Batrachia, 659 Nutrition of Seed Plants. xxiii in Swim- See CoNTENTS, | Nuttall, G. H. F., Piroplasma canis, 184 | Nylander, W., “‘ Chemical 'I'ests”’ in De- Nitrosomonas europea, Italian variety, 487 | termining Lichens, 707 O. Obituary :— Lionel Smith Beale, 277 John Jewell Vezey, 279 Object-holder, Sauveur’s Bridge, 99 Objective, Dry and Water-Immersion + by Ross, 221 Objectives, Microscope, Power, 363 — Microscopical, Magnifying Power, 302 Evaluation of 792 Objectives. See CONTENTS, XXXV Occipital Vertebree, Primitive, 653 Ocelli of Ephemerids, 171 Octanemus, Genus, 297 Ocular, Simple Compensator, 600 -— Zeiss’ Compensating 4% with Iris Dia- phragm, 491 Oculomotor Nerve of Chick, Demon- strating Development, 235 INDEX. | Oogenesis and Spermatogenesis in Cyclops strenuus, 670 Oolemma of Mammalian Ovum, 422 Oort, E. D. v., Skeleton of Tail in Birds, . 291 Opalina, Modifications of Cytoplasm, 681 Ophioglossacesee, New Genus, 188 Ophioglossum, Germination, 566 _ Ophryotrocha puerilis, Regeneration of Odin, G-., Production of Stable Yeasts from _ Ophthalmic Spinthariscope, Gotch, 609 _ Opilionids, Coloured Skin Secretion, 303 — Supposed Numerical Preponderance of | Fungi, 698 Odonata, Permian, 667 Males, 24 O’Donohoe, T. A., Photography of Diatoms, 156 — Photomicrographs of Diatoms Podura Seales, 123 Odontoclasts, 165 Oeder, R., Intermaxillary Gland of Toad, 15 — Tooth-band in Toad, 8 Cdogonium, Cell-division, 684 (Esophageal Pouches in Polygordius and Saccocirrus, 309 Cstrous Cycle in Dog, 282 Oettinger, R., Abdominal Gland Pockets in Insects, 548 Ognew. 8. J., Hermaphroditism in Frog, 660 Oil of Indian Mites, 172 Oka, A., New Genus of Synascidian, 433 Oleander, Bacterial Disease, 712 Oleosole, Ultramicroscopy of, 366 Olizocheta, Italian, 310 — Relationships, 310 Oligochasts, New Species, 671 and Head End, 28 Opsonins and Normal Agglutinins, Iden- tity, 487 Optic Cells of Frog’s Hye, 10 — Nerve, Histology, 655 — — Origin, 8 Optical Bench, Beck’s, 748 — — for Illuminating with either Ordinary or Monochromatic Light, 225, 249 Optics, Microscopical. See ContTENTS, XXXvVi Oram, W. C., Counting Bacilli, 629 Orchidex, Endophytes of, 78 | Orchids and Fungi, Symbiosis, 327 Organism, Anaerobic, Resembling the Influenza Bacillus, 89 _ Organisms, Anaerobic, Cultivation Applic- able to Water Analysis, 372 _ Organogenesis of Ovary and Testicle, Studying, 512 | Orgaus, Hardening with Formalin, 739 | — Terminology of, in Various Conditions Oligonitrophil and Mesonitrophil Bacteria, | 211 Oliva peruviana, Structure, 298 Olive, E. W., Morphology and Develop- ment of Empusa, 342 — Studying the Morphology and Develop- ment of Empusa, 376 Olive-trees, Tubercular Disease, 89 Olive Tubercle, Bacillus, 88 Oliver, F. W., 119 of Development, 652 Oribatide from the Sikkim Himalaya, 255, 269 Orszig, O., Simple Method of Staining Spores, 625 Orthonectids, Life-history, 445 | Orthoptera, Studying the Tympanal Ap- Oltmanns, —., Morphology and Biology of | Alges, 62 Onagracez, Development of Pollen-grain aud Anther, 454 Ontogeny and Interpretation of Siphono- phore Colony, 317 Onychophora, Australian, 440 — Monograph, 170, 303 Oochoristica, Genus, Geological Age, 313 Oocyte in Antedon, Growth, 554 Oocytes of Queen Termite, Effects of Parasites on, 302 Oogenesis and Spermatogenesis, Demon- strating the Phenomena of Maturation, 233 Distribution and paratus, 729 Orthotrichum cupulatum, New Form, 335 | Ortmann, A. E., Origin of the Deep-Sea Fauna, 427 Orycteropus, New Species, 289 Osborn, R. C., Dragon-flies in Brackish Water, 666 Osburn, R. C., Adaptive Modifications of Limb Skeleton, 657 Oscules of Cinachyra, 34 Osmond, F., Corrosion Grooves in Boiler Plate, 114 — Crystallography of Iron, 516 — Effect of Chromium in Steel, 115 — Mechanical Properties of Single Crystals of [ron, 115 — Pressure and Percussion Figures on Plastic Crystalline Metals, 245 — Progress of Metallography since 1901, 740 Ost, J., Regeneration of Antenns of Wood Louse, 307 | Ostenfeld, C. H., Icelandic Plankton, 696 INDEX. Ostenfeld, C. H., North Atlantic Plankton, 580 Osterwalder, A., Sclerotial Disease of For- sythia, 199 — Yeasts, 472 Ostroumoff, A., Embryology of Sturgeon, 162 Ostwald, W., Seasonal Dimorphism in Daphnids, 27 Otte, H., Spermatogenesis in Locusta viri- dissima, 667 Oudemans, A. C., Genital Traches in Chernetidz and Acari, 441 — New Classification of Acarina, 303 | Pancreas, Ova, Amphibian, Physical Equilibrium | during Maturation, 6 Light on Pigmentation, 285 — of Sea-Urehin, Developing, Effect of Alkalis and Acids on, 421 — Unfertilised, of Tenebrio molitor, 22 **Oval”’ of the Swim-bladder, 661 Ovarian Sac in Bony Fishes, 6 Ovaries of Mallophaga and Pediculida, 172 Ovary and Testis of Cat, Structure and | Development, 537 — as an Organ of Internal Secretion, 282 — of Rabbit, Interstitial Cells, 281 Oven, E., Bacillus leguminiperdus, 485 Oven, V., Plant Diseases, 205 Overstraining of Iron by Tension and Compression, 384 Oviposition and Copulation in Hemiptera, 439 Ovulase, Alleged, of Spermatozoa, 283 Ovulation in Rabbit, 4 Ovum in Aleyonium digitatum, Maturation, 182 — Mammalian, Oolemma, 422 Oxalic Acid, Formation by Stzrigmatocystis nigra, 187 Oxner, M., Club-cells in Epiderm of Fishes, 164 — Fixing and Staining the Goblet-cclls in the Epidermis of Fishes, 105 Oxyuris in Vermiform Appendix, 671 Oyster, Life-history of a Trematode of, 445 Oysters of Senegambia, 18 iP: Pacaut, M., Amitosis and Multinucleate Cells in Epithelium, 165 — Salivary Glands of Snail, 169, 297 Paccanaro, A., Streptococcus Bombycis and Disease in Silkworms, 483 Pace, R. M., Collecting and Studying Flustrella hispida, 611 — Development of Flustrella (Fabricius), 675 Pacottet, —., Cysts of Gloosporium and their Role in the Origin of Yeasts, 583 hispida 793 Pacottet, P., Sporulation of Yeasts of Ascomycetous Fungi, 344 Peederini, American, Revision, 22 Pagny, G., Some French Lichens, 84 Painter, W. H., and another, British Muscinese, 462 Palacky, J., Ferns of Madagascar, 688 Paleeozoic Insects, 436 Palm, Cocoanut, Insects Injurious to, 302 Palolo, Japanese, 28 Pampanini, R., Cheilanthes Szovitsii, 329 — Rare Form of Asplenium ruta-muraria, 563 Development in Discoglossus pictus, 285 | —- Foetal, Human, Topography, 162 —and Larve, Amphibian, Influence of | — Histological Changes, 655 | — Physiology, 289 — Studying the Histology, 375 — — the “ Islets of Langerhans,” 378 Pantoesek, J., Fossil Diatoms, 65 Pantopoda, Classification, 305 Papille vallate, Human, Ciliated Epithe- lium, 541 Pappenheim, P., Saw of the Sawfishes, 431 Parallel Brass Rings, 111 Parameecium, Biometrical Study of Con- jugation, 557 Parasite, Lichen, New, 473 — New Flagellate of Bombyx mori, 37 — of Acute Exanthema, 450 | Parasites and Nematodes, New, 672 | — Flagellate, 37 — Hymenopterous, Biology, 549 — Influence on Biology of Host-plant, 475 | — New Flagellate, 37 — of Fishes, 30 — of Lime-trees, 203 Parasitism in Fungi, Origin, 349 — of Anodonta Larve, 18 Parathyroids, Function, 167 Paratyphoid Bacilli, 355 Paratyphus diagnostica, Ficker’s, Agglu- tination Properties, 594 Parichnos, 566 Paris, E. G., African Mosses, 464 — Hepatice of New Caledonia, 337 — Index of Mosses, 464 — Mosses of Tonkin and Cayenne, 689 — Muscineex of French Guiana, 464 | Parker, F. St. J., Collecting and Pre- serving Volvox globator, 614 Parker, G. H., Function of Lateral Line Organs in Fishes, 15 Parkin, J., Fungi Parasitic upon Scale- Insects, 478 Parsons, F. A., 744 Parthenogenesis, | Anhydrobiosis, Phototropism, 428 — Artificial, 422 — — Improved Method, 161 — — in an Annelid, 176 — — in Ova of Silk-moth, 301 and 794 Parthenogenesis, Artificial, in Thalas- sema, 443 — — in Vertebrata, Experiments, 6 — in a Beetle, 22 — in Sea-Urchin Ova, 33 — of Artemia salina, 307 Pascher, A., Reproduction clonium, 696 Pathology, Experimental, and Animal | Classification, 543 Patouillard, —., New Genus of African Fungi, 583 Paul, H., Effect of Calcium Salts on Sphagna, 455 Paul, R. W., Adjustable Microseope Lamp, | 98 — Nernst-Paul Electric Science Lantern, oF —Nernst-Paul High Power Projector Lamp, 97 — Nernst-Paul Optical Electric Lantern, 96 Electric of Stigeo- | INDEX. Pepere, A., Use of the Sodium Salt of Nucleinie Acid in Bacteriological Diag- nosis, 610 Percussion and Pressure Figures on Plas- tic Crystalline Metals, 245 Pérez. C., Staining Neuroglia in Ivhthyo- bdella, 736 Peridermium, North American Species, 699 Peridines, 197 — Studies, 450 | Peridinid, New, 320 Periophthalmus and Boleopthalmus, Eyes, 167, 294 Periplaneta orientalis, New Organ, 550 Peristomes, Monstrous, 574 Peronospora, Respiration Attacked by, 561 Perotti, R., Cultivation of Azotobacteria, 374 in Leaves | — Italian Variety of Nitrosomonas europea, Paulsen, J., Galvanotaxis of Entomostraca, 26 Pauly, A., A Simple Method for the Determination of the Refraction-Index of Liquids, 367 Pavarino, L., Respiration in Attacked by Peronospora, 561 Pauly, A., Simple Compensator Ocular, 600 Pavillard, J., Phytoplankton of Lake Thau, 196 Pearce, N. D. F., On some Oribatidee from the Sikkim Himalaya, 255, 269 Pearl, R., Biometrical Study of Conjuga- tion in Paramecium, 557 Pearl-producing Cestode, 312 Leaves States, 550 Pearse, A. S., Reactions of Tubularia crocea, 676 Pearson, W. H., New British Hepatic, 336 Pear-trees, Disease, 200 Pectin, Ruthenium-red as Test, 627 Pectoral Girdle in Fishes, 167 — Skeleton of Teleosteans, 8 Pedicellariz, Muscles, 33 Pedicellina echinata, Development, 178 Peglion, V., Rhacodium cellare as a Hemi- parasite, 201 Peirce, G. J., Anthoceros and its Nostoe Colonies, 692 Pelagic Animals, 288 Pellegrin, J., East African Fishes, 16 Pelourde, F., Anatomy of Ferns, 328 oueencer, P., Bivalve with T'wo Mouths, 299 Penard, E., Studies on Sareodina, 184 Peneus Genus, 25 Pentacrinus, Anatomy, 317 Pentacrinus decorus, Structure, 180 487 — Oligonitrophil and Mesonitrophil Bac- teria, 211 Perrier, R., Antarctic Holothurians, 33 Perrin, W. 8., Life-history of Pleistophora periplanetx, 322 — Life-history of Trypanosoma balbianii, 45] | — Observations on the Structure of Pleis- tophora periplanet#, 234 — Structure and Life-history of Pleisto- phora periplanetx, 452 Perriraz, J , Fixing and Staining Cells of Embryo-sae, 378 Pesker, D. J., Peripheral Nervous System of Mammals, 428 | Petch, T., Re-discovery of Limas tenellus Pearsall, R. F., Geometride of United | in Britain, 663 Peter, K., Marking the Plane on Blocks for Reconstruction, 380 | — Modifications in Development of Sea- Urchins, 317 Petersen, H. K., Marine Phycomycetes, 198 Petersen, O. V. C. E., Secretion in Urinary Ducts in Mammals, 168 Pethybridge, G. H., “ Blowing” of Con- densed-milk Tins, 376 | Petit, P., Diatoms from near Lake Chad, Pediculidz and Mallophaga, Ovaries, 172 | 340 Petkoff, 8., Bulgarian Algee, 197 | — Fresh-water Algz of Bulgaria, 693 Petri, L., Bacteria of Mosca olearia, 357 Petromyzon, Crauial Nerves, 165 | Petromyzonfluviatilis, Demonstrating End- | | | ings of Auditory Nerve, 237 — — Nerves of Auditory Organ, 287 Pfeiffer, C., Flagellata in Melophagus ovinus, 321 | Pheophycez, Colouring Matter, 66, 579 Phagocytosis and Excretion in Branchio- pods, Demonstrating, 379 — — — in Phyllopods, 307 INDEX. Phagocytosis in vitro, 487 — of Malarial Parasite, 390, 415 Phase-Differences amongst Gratings, Influence on their Images, 532 Philip, R. H., Yorkshire Diatoms, 340, 695 Philonotis, European Species, 572 — Variability; 190 Phoronis, Affinities of, and Norwegian Actinotrocha, 675 — Oscillating Circulation, 32 Phosphorescent Collembola, 24 — Organ in Cephalopods, 547 Photobacterium, New, 359 Photogenic Marine Animals, 288 ~— Organs in the Eye of Cuttlefish, 169 Photographs of Diatoms taken with Ultra- Violet Light, 117 — of Objects under Microscope, Stereo- scopic, 746 Photography, Direct, of Colours, Princi- ples on which it Depends; Direct Colour-Photography Depending on Prismatic Dispersion, 720 — interferential, Variation of Incidence, Polarised Light, 604 — of Diatoms, 156 — of the Absorption Rays of the Colouring Matters of Blood, 605 Photometer, Aitchison, 99 — Simple, 719 Photomicrographic Camera, Portable, 99 Photomicrographs by Léon Foucault, Donation of, by A. Nachet, 122 —of Diatoms and Podura Scales, by T. A. O’Donohoe, 123 — taken by Dr. Kohler, with the Zeiss Ultra- Violet Light Apparatus, 391 Photomicrography, Stain, 242 — See CoNTENTS, XxXVi Phototropism, Anhydrobiosis and Parthe- nogenesis, 428 — of Larval Lobsters, 441 Phragmidium, Genus, 75 Phycological Notes of the late Isaac Holden, 63 — Studies, 194 Phycomycetes, Marine, 198 Phyllactinia corylea, Variation, 344 Phyllirhoid, New, 298 Phyllopods, Phagocytosis and Excretion, 307 Phylogeny and Segmentation of Arthro- pods, 664 — of Crustacean Limb, 306 Physa fontinalis, Embryology, 170 ‘Physiology of Seed Plants. See ConTENTS, xxiii Phytoplankton of Lake Thau, 196 — of Temperate Seas, 581 — of the Antarctic Ocean, 196 Piabuca, Characinoid Genus, Dentition, 292 Picea excelaa, Pollen-grain, 453 Pierce, G. J., Irritability in Alga, 43 Spectra of 795 | Pieri, G., Cutaneous Infection with An- kylostomum, 29 — Notes on Ankylostomum, 312 Pieszezek, A., Variability of Cobas Myrmi- done, 21 Pietschmann, V., Axial Organ and Ventral Blood Spaces in Asterids, 32 Pigment-producing Bacteria, Two New, 92 Piguet, E., Rythonomus lemani, 177 Pine-wood, Cretaceous, Structure, 685 Pineles, F., Function of Parathyroids, 167 Pintner, T., Cestode Studies, 31 Piorkowski, —., Differentiation of Bacillus typhosus and Bacillus fecalis alcaligenes, 355 Pipe-fish, Breeding Habits, 540 Piroplasma canis, 184 — Genus, 683 — in Monkey, 184 — muris, Staining, 623 Pizon, A., Alleged Ovulase of Spermatozoa, 283 — Development of Diplosoma spongiforme, 433 — — of Diplosomide, 296 Placenta, Ferments, 284 — of Tragulus, 540 — Trophoblast, 651 Placentation in Ungulates, 283 Plagiochila, New, from Ireland, 568 Plague, Disease of Guinea-pigs that re- sembles. 710 — Microbe, Bi-polar Staining, 710 Plaice and Sea-Urchin, Effect of Acids and Alkalis on the Eggs, 421 Planarians, Effect of Starving, 30 — Migrations in Mountain Streams, 30 — Terrestrial, 30 Plankton and Benthos, Baltic, 581 — from the Schénenbodensee, 196 — Icelandic, 696 — Marine, Influence of Vertical Currents, 545 — Migration in Lakes, 546 — North American, 580 — of Danish and Scottish Lakes, 195 — of Lake Worth in Carinthia, 581 — of Some Irish Lakes, 470 Plant Diseases, 76, 204, 348, 478, 587, 703 — — in Britain, 77 — Histology. Methods, 113 — Host-, Influence of Parasites on the Biology, 475 — Pathology, 79 — Rusts, Origin and Spread, 74 Plant-cell: Studies, 41 Plant-cells Ultramicroscopical Examina- tion, 608 Plants, Action of Sulphur-dioxide on, 456 — Allied, Investigations on the Anatomy, 559 — Behaviour towards Aluminium, 457 796 Plants, Chemistry of some Common, 44 — Cyanogenesis, 687 — Green, Effect of Light in Absence of Carbon-dioxide, 456 — Nutrition in Absence of Carbon-dioxide, 326 —- Preserving, 562 — Tropical, Modifications in Changed Surroundings, 456 — Yucatan, 328 Plasma Cells in Human Gasserian Gang- lion, 541 — — New Method of Staining, 735 Plasmoptysis of Bacteria, 484, 593 Plassard, —., Notes on Poisonous Fungi, 086 Plate, Boiler, Corrosion Grooves, 114 Platodes, Origin of Gonoducts, 178 Platydesmide, Structure, 440 Platyhelminthes. See ConTENTS, xviii Plehn, M., Parasitic Turbellaria, 29 Pleistophora periplanetz, Life-history, 322 — — Observations on the Structure, 234 — — Structure and Life-history, 452 Pleomorphism of Melosira, 466 Plimmer’s Bodies and Reproductive Cells, 12 Pneumococcus and Streptococcus, Staining Capsules of, 514 — Cultures, Glucose in, 104 Pocket Microscope, Granger’s, 715, 744 Peecilogony, 165 Pohl, H., Genital Organs in Polycera, 17 Pohlman, A. C., New Projection Drawing Board, 601 Poisoning by Fungi, Notes on Cases, 702 Polarisation - Microscope - Polymmeter, Brunnee’s, 362 Polariscope, Laurent, Some Notes on Readings, 224 Polian Tubes in Sipunculus, 28 Polistes, Coloration, 21 Poliacci, G., Preserving Plants, 562 Pollen and Tapetal Cells in Ribes, Study- ing Development, 511 — Physiology of Germination, 455 Pollen-grain and Anther in Onagraces, Development, 454 — of Picea excelsa, 453 — Variation, Demonstrating, 382 Pollen-tube in Houstonia cerulea, Study- ing, 730 Pollock, J. B., Demonstrating Pollen-grain Variation, 382 — Pollen-grain of Picea excelsa, 453 Polycera, Genital Organs, 17 Polychets, Alaskan, 310 — Mistaken Case of Budding, 310 — Red Sea, 309 — Regeneration, 176 — West Indian, 443 Polyclad Genus, New, Sexual Organs, 30 Polycystis, Fresh-water Species, 674 INDEX. Polydactylous Race of Guinea-pigs, Origin, Polyembrony and Sex Determination, 435 —- in a Hymenopterous Parasite, 19 — in Parasitic Hymenoptera, 19 Polygordius and Saccocirrus, Gisophageal Pouches, 309 Polymorphism of Cyanophycez, 695 Polynoins, Species, 28 Polyonchobothrium polypteri, 673 Polysiphonia, Regeneration, 341 Polysiphonia violacea, 578 — — Studying, 620 Polytrichacex, Biology, 53 Polyzoa, Reptant Eleid, 315 Pond Life, Microscopic, Exhibition, 391 Ponselle, A., Method of Demonstratin® Spirocheta pallida in the Blood, 734 Ponsot, M., Interferential Photography ; Variation of Incidence; Polarised Light, 604 Ponzio, F., Nerve-endings in the Lung, 540 Popoff, M., Coloration of Fishes, 544 Popoff, N., Spermatogenesis of Harthworm 27 Popovici-Baznosanu, A., Circulatory Sys- tem in Insects, 299 Porifera. See CONTENTS, xxi Porpoise, Cestodes from, 31 — Maturation and Fertilisation, 422 Porta, A., Cetacean Echinorhynchi, 444 Portable Dissecting Microscope, Beck’ New, 94 Poser, M., Zeiss’ Microscope for Photo- micrography in Metallurgical Work, 748 Post-Objective Stop, 365 Potamilla, Peculiar Regenerative Process, 309 Potato, Cultivation of Bacillus tuberculosis, 374 Power, Magnifying, Objectives, 362 — of Microscopical Objectives, Evaluation, 363 Praeger, R. Botany, 327 Pratt, E. M., Ceylonese Alcyoniide, 181 — Digestion in Alcyonaria, 317 Preen Gland Secretion, 167 Preparing and Cultivating Hypotrichous Infusoria, 509 — Objects. See ConTENTS, xxxviii Preservative Fluids. See ConTEeNTs, xli Preserving Plants, 562 President’s Address: Life and Work of Bernard Renault, 129 President, The, 117, 118, 120, 121, 122, 127, 128, 252, 391 Pressure and Percussion Figures on Plas- tic Crystalline Metals, 245 Primnoidez, Monograph, 318 Primnoids, Sclerites and Canals, 318 of Microscopical L., Irish ‘Topographical | Prince, E. E., Swim-Bladder of Fishes, 661 INDEX. Prisms, Arrangement for Simultaneously Obtaining Minimum Deviation with Several, 608 Pritchard, Andrew, Old Microscope made by, 518, 596 — — Slides by, Presented by Mr. N. D. F. Pearce, 119 Prodigiosus Group, Agglutination and Biological Relationship, 592 Projection Apparatus, Leppin and Masche’s Mirrormegascope, 602 Proskauer and Voges’ Reaction for Certain Bacteria, 613 Prostate, Demonstrating Lymphatic Ves- sels, 617 Protista Plankton, 65 Protococcoides, 469 Protoconch in Gastropods, 17 Protoplasm, Structure and Movements, 35 Protoplasmic Continuity, 324, 685 — Motion and Excitation, Genesis, 288 Protopterus and Lepidosiren, Spiracular Organ, 544 — Suprarenals and Sympathetic System, 542 Prototracheata. See CoNTENTS, xvi Protozoa, Alleged Senile Degeneration, 37 — Antarctic, 680 — Blood-inhabiting, 682 — Chromidia, 184 — Structure of Cytoplasm, 319 — See CONTENTS, xxi Prowazek, S., Entameba buccalis, 36 — Flagellate Parasites, 37 —§pirochete of Balanitis and of the Mouth, 709 Pseudoscorpionide, Habits, 303 Pseudoscorpions, South American, 173 Pseudospora volvocis, 183 Pseudotyphoid and Colon Bacilli, New Method of Differentiating from Eberth’s Bacillus, 104 Pteridophyta. See ConTENTS, xxiv Pterygotus osiliensis, Chitin in Carapace, 305 Ptychozoon homalocephalum, Regenerated Tail, 14 Pyenidial Type, Notable, 584 Pycnogonid, New, from the Bahamas, 552 Pycnogonids, Antarctic, 304 — Feeding Habits, 304 — of the West Coast of North America, 176 Pycraft, W. P., Skeleton of Musk Duck, 543 Pyrenomycetes of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland, 583 Pyronema confluens, Biology, 698 Pyrosoma, Embryology, 297 — Fixing, 237 Dec, 19th, 1906 Q. Quajat, E., Artificial Parthenogenesis in Ova of Silk-moth, 301 | Quartz-plate Readings in Saccharimetry, 224 ' Quehl, A., Myxobacteria, 479 | Quekett Microscopical Club, 229, 370, 727 Quelle, F., Barbula Fiorii, 689 — Biology of Polytrichaceex, 53 Quenching of Steel, 114, 386 Quidor, A., Antarctic Copepods, 309 — Leposphilus labret, 308 — Male of Nicothoa astaci and the Suc- torial Apparatus, 552 R. Rabbit, Interstitial Cells in Ovary, 281 — Ovulation, 4 Rabies, Presence of Negri’s Bodies, 233 Rachis in Ovaries and Testes of Nema- todes, 444 — Nucleus in Ascaris, 177 . Raciborski, M., Allantodia, 329 Racibowski, M., Chemotropism of Fungi, 457 Radasch, H. E., Form of Human Blood Corpuscles, 542 — Shape of Human Erythrocytes, 427 Radium, Action on Chromogenic Bacteria, 356 — Rays, Action on Skin, 169 Radl, E., New Sense-organ on Head of Corethra Larve, 438 Raia batis, Accessory Fins, 432 Rail Corrugation, 516 Raitschenko, A., Study of Myxomycete, 482 Ramalina, Anatomical Study, 352 Ramlow, G., Development of Thelebolus stercoreus, 471, 614 Rana, New Distomide, 178 Randolph, F. A., Irritability in Alge, 43 | Rant, A., Gummosis in the Amygdale, 347 — Wounds and Gummosis in the Amyg- dale, 206 Rat, Trypanosoma, 183 Rathbun, M J., Alaska Decapods, 175 Rats, Inheritance of Coat-Colour, 286 _ Rauther, M., Structure of Mermis albicans, 672 Ravaut, P., Method of Demonstrating Spirochxta pallida in the Blood, 734 Rays, Peculi:r Group, 662 | Reagents, Metallographic, Etching Velo- city, 639 | Receptaculites, Genus, 183 Reconstruction, Blocks for, Marking Directing Plane, 380 3G 798 Red Pigment, Bacillus producing only on | a Single Medium, 88 Redikorzew, W., Salpa, 169 Reducing-division in Ascaris, 553 Reese, A. M., mander, 660 tropic Distribution, with Application to Colloidal Solutions and Magnetic Fields, 226 — Electric Double, Dispersion in, 608 — Index of Liquids, Simple Method for Determination, 367 Regan, C. T., Notes on Loricoriid Fishes, 293 — South American Cichlid, 292 — Vendaces of British Lakes. 292 Anatomy of Giant Sala- | ‘The Visual Organ of | INDEX. Resolving Limit, Note on Sir A. E. Wright’s, 724 — Power for the Microscope and Tele- scope, Limits of, 256, 521 Respiration and Circulation in Monopterus javanicus, 293 | — Chemistry of in Fishes, 16 — Double Embryo of Florida Alligator .284 | Refraction, Artificial Double, due to Allo- | Regen, J., Stridulation of Gryllus cam- | pestris, 667 Regeneration in Lumbriculus variegatus, 176 — in Polychets, 176 — in Testes, 7 Rehm, H., Bavarian Lichens, 83 — Py renomycetes of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland, 583 — Submerged Fungus, 472 Reichensperger, ie Anatomy of Penta- crinus, 317 — Structure of Pentacrinus decorus, 180 Reichert’s Dissecting Microscopes, with Handle, 360 — Immersion Spot Lens, 745 — New Handle Microscope, 95 — New Large Mineralogical Stand, 216 — New Microtome, witl Double Bearings, 238 — New Stand VII., 95 Reinke, F., Intercellular Bridges and Leucocyte Paths, 286 Reis, C.. The “Oval” Bladder, 661 Reis, K., Structure of Gas-gland in Swim- bladder, 427 Reissinger, R., Economie Use of Fungi, 701 Reitmann, K., Staining Spirocheta pallida, 109 Reitter, E., Blind Bombadier-Beetle, 22 — Species of Elaterids, 665 Renault, Bernard, Life and Work, 129 Renkauf-Weimar, E., Tracya hydrochari- dis, 346 Rennie, J., Accessory Fins in Raia batis, 432 Report of Council for 1905, 124 Reproduction in Copepods, 174 — in Gregarines, Demonstrating, 379 Reptile Brain, Morphology, 168° Reptiles and Amphibians of Russia, 430 — Skin, 426 of the Swim- — in Bony Fishes, 431 — in Sand-burrowing Crabs, 174 Respiratory Processes in Fishes, 294 Rete mirabile, Origin, 161 Ketina in Salmon, Development, 652 | — of Nautilus and other Cephalopods, 17 — Studying the Histogenesis, 731 Retro-cerebral Organ in Certain Rotifers, 446 — — in Rotifera, 179 Retro-Ocular or Top Stop, New, 254 Retterer, E., Growth and Renewal of Dermis, 427 — Structure and Development of Integu- ment, 11 | — Structure and Histogenesis of Bone, 11 Retzius, G., Spermatozoids of Fucacez, 578 Rhabdoceelid, Antarctic, 314 Rhabdocelids, Autogamy, 314 Rhabdosphere, New, 36 Rhacodium cellare, 584 — — as a Hemiparasite, 201 Rheinberg, J., 252, 749 — On the Influence on Images of Gratings of Phase-Differences amongst their Spectra, 518, 532 — Photographs of Diatoms taken with Ultra-Violet Light by Zeiss Appara- tus, 117, 391 Rheotropism in Hydroids and Bugula, 447 —- of Hydroids, 34 Rhinoscleroma, Bacillus isolatcd from, 594 Rhipidoglossa and Docoglossa, Demon- strating the Heart and Arteries, 105 Rhizopod, Barium Sulphate in, 449 Rhizopoda in Human Spinal Fluid, 557 Rhizopods, Fresh-water, Britis!), 679 Rhumbler, L., Amceboid Movements, 319 Rhynchobdellida, Studying End-organs, 616 Ribes, Studying Development of Pollen and Tapetal Cells, 511 Ricardo, G., Genus Heematopota, 550 Riccardia major, 572 Riccia, 337 Riccia glauca, Spores, 574 Rice, Report on Blast of, 588 Richards, A. W., Overheated Steel, 246 Richardson, H., Antarctic Isopods, 552 — Isopods of North-West Coast of North America, 175 — Monograph of North American Isopods, 306 \ Richter, O., Micro-chemistry, 324 Richters, F., Revivification of Tardigrada, 441 INDEX, Riddle, L. W., Cytolozy of the Entomo- phthoracez, 697, 730 Ridley, H. N., Dispersal of Seeds by Wind, 44 — Ferns of Christmas Island, 688 — Muscinex of Christmas Island, 690 Rings, Brass, Parallel, 111 Rioja y Martin, J., Bull with Super- numerary Limb, 538 — Free-living Variety of Adamsia ron- deletii, 447 Rippert, —., Plant Diseases, 204 Ritter, W. E., The Genus Octacnemus, 297 Roaf, H. E., Effects of Alkalis and Acids | 42 Robertson, M., Blood-inhabiting Protozoa, | 682 — Pseudospora volvocis, 183 Robertson, T. B., Genesis of Protoplasmic Motion and Excitation, 288 Robinson, C. B., North American Chares, | 577 Robinson, L. E., Behaviour of Nucleolus in Spermatogenesis of Cockroach, 172 Robinson, M., Development and Systematic Position of Nebalia, 669 — Studying the Development of Nebalia, 622 Rochebrune, A. T. de, Oysters of Sene- gambia, 18 Rodella, A., Differentiation of the Bacillus putrificus, 230 — Direct Microscopic Cheese, 92 — Significance of the Anaerobic Putre- factive Bacilli in the Ripening of Cheese, 485 Rodents and Insectivora, Accessory Sex- glands, 7 Preparation Roewer, C. F., Studying the Histogenesis | of Cercarizum helicis, 616 Rogers, A. F., Revision of Coccacex, 86 Rogers, L., Development of Herpetomonas of Hala-azar, 451 Rogers, L. A., Electrically-controlled Low Temperature Incubator, 102 Rohler, E., Antennal Sense-organs in Diptera, 666 — Sense-organs of Insects, 172 Rolte, G. W., Quartz-plate Readings in | Saccharimetry, 224 — Some Notes on Laurent Polariscope Readings, 224 Rolland, L., Notes corium, 585 Romanowsky’s Method, Section Staining by, 241 Ronceray, P.. Dye-stuffs in Lichens, 590 Roots, Acid Excretion, and Fungi, 458 — Galvanotropie Irritability, 44 Rose, Seale-insect, 23 on Mycenastrum on Developing Ova of Sea-Urchin, | 1 of | 2g | Rosenfeld, A., Flagellates in Human Ali- mentary Canal, 321 Rosenhain, W., 251 — Deformation and Fracture in Iron and Steel, 741 — On an Improved Form of Metallurgical Microseope, 146, 250 Rosenheim, O., Chitin in Carapace of Pterygotus osiliensis, 305 Rosenvinge, 1. K., Floating Marine Alge, 194 Ross, Dry and Water Immersion } Obiec- tive, 221 Ross, P. H., Piroplasma in Monkey, 184 Rosseter, T. B., New Species of Tapeworm, 445 — Sexual Organs and Development of a Tapeworm, 444 Rossi, C., Commensalism of Two Isopods, 442 Rot, Tree-root, 475 Rotary Disks, Application of the Method to Microscopical Technique, 725 Roth, G., European Sphagna, 462 Rothert, W., Behaviour of Plants towards Aluminium, 457 Rothman, E. A., Cultivation of Gono- coccus, 614 Rotifer Eggs, Ciliated Infusorians within, 316 — South African, 683 Rotifera, Bdelloid, of Forth Area, 315 — Collecting, 371 — from Indo-China, Sumatra, Java, etc., 79 — in Iceland, 180 — Marine, of Norway, 316 — of Kew Gardets, 316 — of Natal, Second List, 263 — of Norfolk, 316 — of Sikkim Himalaya, 637, 745 — of South Africa, A Contribution to our Knowledge of, 255, 393 — Retro-cerebral Organ, 179, 446 — See ConTreNTS, xx Rotifers, Intra-vitam Staining of Retro- cerebral Apparatus, 735 — New, 446 : — New Genus, Conochiloides, 180 — Northern Marine, 180 Rousselet, C. F., 745, 747 — A Contribution to our Knowledge of the Rotifera of South Africa, 255, 393 — Copeus triangulatus, 252 Myxosporidian in, | — Old Microscope presented by Mr. H. J. Morgan, 390 — Rotifcra of Kew Gardens, 316 Roux, E., Staining of Spirochxta vel Spiro- nema pallida, 110 Roux, G., Spleen Emulsion as an Antago- nist of Nagana Trypanosomes Introduced into Dogs, 682 3 G4 2 800 Roux, L., Anaerobic Bacteria producing Necrosis and Suppuration in Cattle, 90 Rowntree, W. S., Dentition of Characinoid Genus Piabuca, 292 Royers, H., Polymorphism of Cyanophy- ces, 695 Ruata, G. Q., Granulation of Vibrios, 595 Rubaschkin, W., Canals of Glandular Epi- thelium, 655 — Double and Polymorphic Nuclei in Triton, 10 — Maturation and Fertilisation in Por- poise, 422 Rublee, W. A., Fluid Lenses, 491 Rugosa, Septa, 677 Ruhland, W., The Production of Arabin by Bacteria, 711 Russ, V. K., Anaerobic Organism Resem- bling the Influenza Bacillus, 89 Rust Fungus, Vegetative Life, 201 Rusts, Asparagus, and Asparagus in Cali- fornia, 75 — of Australia, 474, 699 — Plant, Origin and Spread, 74 Ruthenium-red as Test for Pectin, 627 Rynberk, G. v., Chemistry of Respiration in Fishes, 16 — Respiratory Processes in Fishes, 294 Ss. Sabrazes, J., Motility of the Echinococcus Scolex, 673 Saccharimetry, Quartz-plate Readings, 224 Saccharomyces anomalus, Occurrence in the Brewing of Saké, 73 — — Nuclear Division, 345 Saccocirrus and Polygordius, Gisophageal Pouches, 309 Sacquepée, E., Paratyphoid Bacilli, 355 Sainmont, G., Structure and Development of Ovary and Testis of Cat, 537 — Studying the Organogenesis of Ovary and Testicle, 512 Saito, K., Fungus Spores in the Atmo- sphere, 205 . — Occurrence of Saccharomyces anomalus in the Brewing of Sake, 73 Saké, Occurrence of Saccharomyces ano- | malus in the Brewing of, 73 Salamander, Cave, Life-history, 660 — Giant, Anatomy, 660 Salensky, W., Larva of Echiurus, 670 — Msophageal Pouches in Polygordius and Saccocirrus, 309 — Structure of Appendiculariz, 17 Saling, T., Unfertilised Ova of Tenebrio molitor, 22 Salivary Glands of Snail, 169, 297 Salmon, Development of Retina, 652 Salmon, E. S., Flora of Kew Gardens, 335 — Studies in Erysiphacex, 198 Salmon, E. 8., Urophlyctis Alfalfx, 342 INDEX. Salmon, E., Variation in Phyllactinia corylea, 344 Salpa, Visual Organ, 169 Salt, Rock, Ultramicroscopical Investiga- tions upon the Colours, 368 Salvi, G., Pre-oral Gut in Bird Embryos, 284 Sampson, IF. R. W., Old Portable Miero- scope by Dollond, 713 Sand and Gravel, Apparatus for Rapidly Cleansing, 631 Sandstede, M., Cladonias in the Islands of the North Sea, 707 Sap, Ascent, 454 Saprolegniesx, Study, 343 Sarcina, Fermentation produced by, 592 Sarcodina, Studies, 184 Sarda, —., New Method of Obtaining Hemin Crystals, 632 Sargassum filipendula, 340 — — Collecting Material for Study, 376 Sartirana, S., Streptococcus Bombycis and Disease in Silkworms, 483 Sarton, A., Investigations on the Anatomy of Allied Plants, 559 Saurians and Crocodiles, Demonstrating Connection between Epidermis and Cutis, 236 Sauvageau, C., Cladostephus verticillatus, 468 — Dictyotacee and Aglaozonia, 66 Sauve, A., Spectrohelioscope, 492 Sauveur, A., Metallography applied to Foundry Work, 246 Sauveur’s Bridge Object-holder, 99 Sawfishes, Saw of, 431 Seale-Insect of Rose, 23 Seale-Insects, Fungi Parasitic upon, 478 Scales, Spinulated, on Flounders, 16 Scapania, Genus, 338 Schaaf, H., Structure and Development of Cysticereus, 554 Schiidel, A., Method of Staining encapsuled Micro-organisms, 736 Schaeffer, C., Coleoptera and Moths of United States, 438 Schaffer, J., Study of Cartilage, 287 — Thyroid of Myxine, 296 Schaffner, J. H., Demonstrating Chromo- some Reduction in the Microsporocytes of Lilium tigrinum, 512 — Terminology of Organs in Various Conditions of Development, 652 Schaffnit, E., Anatomy of Seeds of Acan- thacez, 326 Scharff, R. F., Wild Cat in Ireland, 290 Scheben, L., Spermatozoa of Asearis mega- locephala, 29 Schellenberg, H. C., Action of Fungi on Cellulose, 187 Schepotieff, A, Norwegian Actinotrocha and the Affinities of Phoronis, 675 — Structure of Cephalodiscus, 179 INDEX. Schiff-Giorgini, R., Tubercular Disease of Olive Trees, 89 Schiffner, V., Bryological Fragments, 191 — Hepatic of Dalmatia, 570 — Moss Galls, 461 — New Austrian Mosses, 569 — Riccardia major, 572 — Variation of Form in the Bryophyta, 689 _ Schimkewitsch, W., Classification Pantopoda, 305 — Development of Thelyphonus caudatus, 551 ae A., Heemosporidia of Bats, 22 of aie japonicum in the Philippines, 3 Schistostega, Luminosity, 690 Schizomycetes. See ConrENTS, xxxii Schizophyta. See Contents, xxxii Schizopod, Sense-organ, 25 Schmalhausen, J.J., Development of Langs in Tropidonotus, 163 Schmidle, W., A New Genus of Plankton Algee, 65 Schmidt, J. E., Mucous Membrane of Human Alimentary Canal, 11 Schnarf, K., Systematic Value of Sporan- gium-wall, 565 Schneider, C. M., Botannical Glossary and Encyclopedia, 46 Schneider, G., Origin of Species in Cestodes, 177 Schneider, J., Dipterous Larve from the Deep Water in Lakes, 23 — Uliramicroscopy of Oleosole, 366 Schneider, K. C., Optic Cells of Frog’s Eye, 10 — Structure and Movements of Proto- plasm, 35 Schneider, O.. Uredinex, 202, 474 Schockaert, R., Maturation and Fertilisa- tion in Thysanozoon brocchi, 674 Schoene, K., Moss Rhizoids, 461 Scholz, F., Aceton-celloidin Method of Rapid Imbedding, 105 Schonfeldt, H. v., Mounting Diatoms, 244 Schoppler, H., Oxyuris in Vermiform Appendix, 671 Schottelins, E., Technique of the Gruber- Widal Reaction, 104 Schridde, H., Human Epiderm Cells, 286 Schréder, B., Phytoplankton of Temperate Seas, 5x1 Schroder, O., Antarctic Protozoa, 680 — New Species of Cytocladus, 680 Schuberg, A., Cilia and Trichocysts, 183 Schultz, E., Regeneration in Annelids, 28 Schultze, O., Influence of Light on Pig- mentation of Amphibian Ova and Larve, 285 — Peripheral Nervous System in Amphi- bian Larve, 9 801 Schultze’s Clearing Method, Modification, 628 Schulze, F. E., Barium Sulphate in a Rhizopod, 449 — Xenophyophore, 449 Schumacker, —., Streptococcus mucosus, O91 Schiitze, W., Structure of Tree-Ferns, 564 Schwabe, J., Studying the Tympanal Apparatus of Orthoptera, 729 Schwalbe, E., Text Book Teratology, 538 Schwartz, M., Natural History of Tomo- pteridee, 175 Sclerites and Canals of Primnoids, 318 Sclerotial Disease of Forsythia, 199 Scolex of Echinococcus, Motility, 673 — of Idiogenes, 31 Scolopendra heros, Demonstrating Sperma- togenesis, 105 — — Spermatogenesis, 173 Scolopendrium, Regeneration of Lamina, 328 Scott, D. H., Lepidodendron obovatum, 567 — Life and Work of Bernard Renault, 129 — On the Structure of Some Carboniferous Ferns, 518 Scott, R., Megaspore of Lepidostrobus, 567 Scott, T., Crustacea of the Forth Region, 306 — Revision of Certain British Copepoda, 26 Scutigera, Variation, 24 Scutigeridsx, Studies, 440 Sea-Urchin and Comatula, Hybridisation, 33 —and Plaice, Effect of Alkalis on the Eggs, 421 — Developing Ova of, Effects of Alkalis and Acids on, 421 — Ova, Parthenogenesis, 33 Sea-Urchins, Modifications in Develop- ment, 317 Seaweeds, 63 Section Cutter, Darlaston, 735 Sections, Rapid Method of Preparing Large Numbers, 623 Seed-plants, Julianiacee, A New Family, 687 Seeds, Dispersal by Wind, 44 — of Acanthacex, Anatomy, 326 —of the Castor-oil Plant, Germination, 42 Seeliger, O., Studying the Larva of Bryozoa, 621 Segmentary Organs of Polychete An- nelids, Demonstrating, 624 Segmentation and Phylogeny of Arthro- pods, 664 — of Siphostoma floridz, Studying, 615 Seiler, W., Ocelli of Ephemerids, 171 Sekera, E., Autogamy in Rhabdocoelids, 314 Acids and 802 Selachia, Head Ganglia and Sensory Line, 165 Selachians, Eye, 295, 662 Selaginella, Chloroplast, 188 Sellards, E. H., Permian Odonata, 667 Seminal Fluid, Toxic Properties, 283 — Vesicle-duct of Queen Bee, 21 Semozay, —., The Quenching of Steel, 114 Semper’s Larva, New Species from Gala- pagos Islands, 448 Senile Degeneration, fusorians, 37 — — — in Protozoa, 37 Sense-organ in Schizopod, 25 — New, on Head of Corethra Larve, 438 Sense-organs, Antennal, in Diptera, 666 — of Insects, 172 Sensory-organs on Wings, 302 Septa of Rugosa, 677 Sergent, —., Trypanosome of El-debab, 38 Sesamoid Bone, Development, 537 Sesamum orientale, Bacterial Disease, 593 Setchell, W. A., Constantinea, 694 Seurat, L. G., Pearl-producing Cestode, 312 Alleged, in In- Sex, Chromosomes in Relation to Deter- | mination of, 5 — Determination and Polyembryony, 435 Sex in Daplinids, Determination, 176 Sex Production, New Theory, 423 — Structures in Marsupials, Development, 537 Sex-cells, Histology, 541 — of Chrysemys, Origin, 650 INDEX. | Shimmer, H. W., Peculiar Variation of Terebratula transversa, 179 | Siedentopf, H., Ultramicroscopical Investi- Sex-glands, Accessory, in Insectivora and | Rodents, 7 Sex-organs of Cephalopods, 547 Sexton, A. H., Corrosion of Condenser Tubes, 246 Sexual Differences of Chromosome Groups, 424 — Dimorphism in Aglaophenia, 556 — Organs and Development of Tapeworm, 444 — — of New Polyclad Genus, 30 — Reproduction in Molosoma, 443 — Selection, 424 Sexuality of Ascomycetes, 324 — of Spores in Dioicous Mosses, 335 — of Uredinex, 324 Sharks, Membranous Labyrinth, 432 Shear, C. L., and others, Uredines, 585 Sheep, Abnormal Hoofs, 659 — Development of External Genitals, 163 che EK. 8., Aluminium-Zine Alloys, lie — ole Strength of Copper-Tin Alloys, 3+ Sheurer, C., Cell Communications between Blastomeres, 539 ae H. W., Old Age in Brachiopods, 315 gations upon the Colours of Rock Salt, 368 Siedlecki, M., Life-history of Spirocheta pallida, 683 Siegel, —., Demonstrating the Parasites of Smallpox, 110 Siegel, G., Demonstrating Cytoryctes luis, 381 Siegel, J., Parasite of Acute Exanthema, 450 Silfvenius, A. J., Fri sh-water Algze from Finland, 576 Silica, Function in Nutrition of Cereals, 455 Silk-moth, Artificial Parthenogenesis in Ova, 301 Silk-worm Crosses, Mendel’s Law appiied, 437 Sillem, C., Monograph on British Wood- lice, 306 Silver Impregnation Method, part played by Sodinm-chloride, 624 Silvestri, F., Arachnological Notes, 24 — Development of Ageniaspis fuscicollia, 439 | — Life-history of Litomastiz truncatellus, 300 | ie Notes on Machilidz, 667 — Polyembryony in a Hymenopterous Parasite, 19 Simond, P. L., Stegomyia fasciata and Yellow Fever, 438 — Studying Yellow Fever, 511 | Simons, E. B., Collecting Material for Study of Sargassum filipendula, 376 — Sargassum filipendula, 340 Simpson, J. J., Structure of Isis hippuris, 556 | Sinclair, F.G., Structure of Platydesmide, 440 | Siphonophore Colony, Interpretation of and Ontogeny, 317 Siphostoma sloride, Studying Segmenta- tion, 615 | Sipunculide, Embryology and Affinities, 670 Sipunculus, Polian Tubes, 28 Sipunculus nudus, Blood-vessels, 310 Siredon pisciformis, Demonstrating Struc- ture of Erythrocytes, 622, 656 — — Erythrocytes, 656 Sitowski, L., Digestion in Caterpillars, 21 Sitsen, A. E., Aceton-Paraffin Imbedding Method, 623 Sjéval, E., Histology of Sex-cells, 541 Skeleton, Limb, Adaptive Modifications, 657 — of Musk Duck, 543 | — 'Teleostean, Morphology, 661 Skin, Action of Radium Rays on, 169 INDEX. Skin of Reptiles, 426 Skin-glands of Echinaster, 316 Skoda, ©., Gelatin Mass for Fixing and Mending Bone Preparations, 739 Skull, Human, without Intermaxillary, 8 Slack, F. H.,. Microscopic Estimate of Bacteria in Milk, 629 Sleby, A. H., Diseases of Tobacco, 204 Slide-Basket for Staining Twelve Sections Simultaneously, 382 Slides. See Contents, xli Sliding Bar, Watson’s Ball-bearing, 719 Slime-formation in the Sea, 428 Slime-producing Organism, New Chromo- genic, 212 Slosson, M., How Ferns Grow, 564 Sloth, Moth Parasitic on, 665 Sluiter, C. P., Two Remarkable Ascidians, 296 Smallpox Parasites, Demonstrating, 110 Frog, 15 Smethlage, E., Muscle Attachment and Origin in Arthropods, 19 Smidt, H., Species of Strongylus in Gibbon, 672 Smirnow, A. E. v., Demonstrating the | Structure of Erythrocytes of Siredon pisctformis, 622, 656 Smith, A. E., Nature through Microscope | and Camera, 113 Smith, A. L., British Coenogoniaces, 706 — British Mycology, 477 Smith, C. O., Bacterial Disease of Oleander, 712 Smith, E. A., Mollusca, 663 Smith, E. F., Bacillus of the Olive Tuber- cle, 88 : — Bacteriological Technique, 113 South African Marine Smith, F., Relation of Wind to Bird | Migration, 290 — Relationships in Oligocheta, 310 Smith, F. P., New Spider, 25 Smith, G., Castration due to Gregarines, | 452 | — of Ascaris megalocephala, 29 — Eyes of Pulmonate Gastropods, 434 — High and Low Dimorphism, 425 Importance, 697 Smith, R. E., Asparagus and Asparagus Rusts in California, 75 Smith, R. G., Bucillus indurans, 84 Smreher, E., Enamel Prisms, 165 Smut, Work on, 74 Smuts, Corn, and their Propagation, 700 Snail, Degeneration of Tentacular Nerve, | 663 — Pond, Behaviour, 547 — Salivary Glands, 169, 297 Snake, Spermatozoa, Movements, 652 803 : | Snakes, Relation of Jaw Muscles to Sali- — Secretion, Coloured, in Opilionide, 303 | vary Glands, 14 | — Sea, Notes, 430 Sodium Chloride, Part played in Silver Impregnation Method, 624 Séhngen, N. L., Bacteria that Obtain their Carbon from Methan, 212 | Soils, Loss of Nitrogen, 93 | Solidification of Copper, 515 | Sommerfeldt, E., Microscopical Axial- angle Determination of very small Crystals, 368 Sorby, H. C., Heteronereis of Thames Kstuary, 553 Southwell, T., Migrations, 168 Spalax typhlus, Hye, 429 | Sparrow, Formation of Yolk in Egg, 423 | Spaulding, P., New Method of Mounting Fungi Grown in Cultures for the Herbarium, 737 : | Species and Varieties; their Origin by Smallwood, W. M., Adrenal Tumours in Mutation, 654 Spectrohelioscope (A. Sauve), 492 Spectrometer, New: Its Uses and Adyan- tages, 224 _ Spectroscope, SimpleW ave-length designed by Mr. Nelson and Mr. Gordon, 390, 418 — with Adjustable Dispersion, 493 - Spengel, J. W., Gullet Teeth of Elasmo- branchs, 16 — Monozoic Nature of Cestoda, 313 | Sperlich, A., Structure of Stolons of Nephrolepis, 566 Sperm-cells of Decapods, Studying, 236 Spermatogenesis and Oogenesis, Demon- strating the Phenomena of Ma- turation, 233 — — — in Cyelops strenwus, 670 | — in Batrachoseps attenuatus, 283 | — in Locusta viridissima, 667 — in Myriopod ioltic — of Eartliworm, 27 | —— — Studying, 615 — of Honcy Bee, 665 — of Scolopendra heros, 105, 173 Spermatozoa, Alleged Ovulase, 283 — of Decapoda, 553 | — Snake, Movements, 652 Smith, R. and E., Fungus of Economic — Vertebrate, Behaviour in Solutions, 539 Spermatozoids of Cycas, 685 — of Fucacesx, 578 Sphzroplea annulina, 469 Spherotheca, Fertilisation, 199 Sphagna, Effect of Calcium Salts, 455 — European, 462 Sphagnum Frog, Habits, 14 — in Essex, 334 | — New Species, 572 | — Notes, 334 | Sphenodon, Organ of Jacobson, 543 Spicule, Formation, Studies, 35 804 Spicule-formation in Haleyonium, 34 Spicules, Holothurian, 446 Spider, New, 25 Spiders, Classification, 175 — Collections, 668 — Ovarian Eggs, 175 Spiegel, O., Staining Blocd and Bacteria with Hosin-Methylen-blue, 627 Spiess, C., Digestion in the Leech, 311 Spillmann, J., Demonstrating the Heart and Arteries of Rbipidoglossa and Docovlossa, 105 — Heart and Arteries in Diotocardia, 170 Spinal Cord of Macaque Monkey, Investi- gating Structure, 617 Spinthariscope, Gotch Ophthalmic, 609 Spiracular Organ in Lepidosiren and Protopterus, 544 Spirifers, Devonian, 179 Spirillosis of Fowls, 708 Spirillum of Bat, 557 — of Tick Fever, 511 Spirocheta pallida and Syphilis, 452 — — Demonstrating in Bone, 621 | — — Demonstrating Presence, 380 | — — in Hereditary Syphilis, New Method | of Demonstrating, 242 — — Life-history, 683 — — Method of Demonstrating in Blood, 734 — — Staining, 109, 381, 628 — vel Spironema pallida, Staining, 110 Spirocheete of Balanitis and of the Mouth, 709 Spironema vel Spirocheta pallida, Staining, 110 Spitta, E. J., Mechanism of Compound Hye, 436 | Sponges, Californian, 319 — New Silicious, 319 Spongilla lacustris, Bengal Variety, from Brackish Water, 448 Spongodes, Structure, 678 Sporangial Trichomes, 329 Sporangium-wall, Systematic Value, 565 Spore-formation and Development of | Ascus in Ascomycetes, 71 Spores, Fungus, in the Atmosphere, 205 — in Dioicous Mosses, Sexuality, 335 — Moss, Germination, 335 — of Lycoperdon, 475 — of Riccia glauca, 574 — Simple Method of Staining, 625 — Tetanus, 355 — Truffle, Germination, 472 Sporozoa, Glycogen, 39 — Inter-relationships, 38 — Rod-like Gland-cells in Fishes, 287 Sporozoon from Mucous Membrane of Human Septum nasi, 451 Sporulation of Yeasts of Ascomycetous Fungi, 344 Spot Lens, Immersion, by Reichert, 745 INDEX. Spuler, A., Moth Parasitic on a Sloth, 665 Squawariaceze, New, 468 Squamosal Bone in Tetrapodous Verte- brata, 658 Ssilantjew, A. A., Parthenogenesis in a Beetle, 22 Stage, Zeiss’ Large Mechanical, 489 Stahlecker, E., Research on _ Silicious Lichens, 210 Stain for Photomicrography, 242 — New, for Fungi, 701 Staining and Fixing Cells of Embryo-sae, 378 -~ — — Goblet Cells in the Epidermis of Fishes, 105 —and Mounting Oxsifying Cartilage, 241 — Bacillus typhosus in Tissues, 382 — Bi-polar, of Plague Microbe, 710 — Blood and Bacteria with Methylen-blue, 627 — — Films, Simplitied Method, 380 — Chromatin in Sections, Method, 240 — Chromophilous Cells of Hypophysis cerebri, 241 — Degenerated Nerve-fibres, Donaggio’s Method, 622 — Diphtheria Bacilli, New Method, 627 — Encapsuled Micro-organisms, Method, 736 — Glycogen, 241 — Intra-vitam, Retro-cerebral Apparatus of Rotifers, 735 — Nervous Tissue, Bielschowsky’s Method, 735 Eosin - | — Neurofibrils, 109 | — Neuroglia in Ichthyobdella, 736 — numerous Microscopical Sections Simul- taneously, Apparatus for, 627 — Objects. See Contents, xl — Piroplasma muris, 623 | — Plasma Cells, New Method, 735 _ — Sections by Romanowsky’s Method, 241 | — Spirochexta pallida, 109, 110, 381, 628 | — Spirochzta vel Spironema pallida, 110 — Spores, Simple Method, 625 — Treponema pallidum, 626 — Twelve Sections Simultaneously, Slide- Basket for, 382 Stains, Azocarmin and Chromotrops as Contrast, 381 — Intra-vitam, for Nervous Tissue, 242 | Stands, Microscope. See CONTENTS, XXXY | Staphylococci and Streptococci, Differen- tiation and Identification, 87 Starei:;, Ability of Vibrio cholere asiaticz to Decompose, 612 — in Bryophyta, 560 —in Wheat Flour, Detecting, 630 Starling, E. H., Factors Determining Growth and Activity of Mammary Glands, 539 New Method for INDEX. Staubli, C., Migration of Trichina Em- bryos, 29 Stead, J. E., Overheated Steel, 246 — The Thermal Transformations of Carbon Steel, 247 Steel and Iron, Deformation and Fracture, 741 — — — Hardness of Constituents, 742 — Critical Points, 516 — Effect of Chromium, 115 — Nitrogen in, 245 — Overheated, 246 — Quenching, 114, 386 — Sheets, Thin, Brittleness and Blisters in, 740 — Test-pieces, Relation between Type of Fracture and Micro-structure, 740 — Tool, Defective Bar, 385 Steels, Carbon, Thermal Transformations, — Copper, 516, 740 — Nickel-chromium, 635 — Nickel-manganese, 115 — Nickel-vanadium, 245 — Quarternary, 741 Stegomyia fasciata and Yellow Fever, 438 Stein, R., Studying the Connective-tissue Framework in Lymphatic Glands, 513 Steinert, J., Mushroom Culture, 350 Stele, Winged, in some Leguminose, 453 Stempell, W., Observations on Volvox, 681 Stenochlena, Genus, 330 Stephani, F., Japanese Muscines, 572 — Lophocolea, 573, 692 — New Plagiochila from Ireland, 568 Stereo-photomicrographs, Simple Method of ‘Taking and Mounting the Prints without Cutting, 252, 257, 260 — Production, 605 Stereoscopic Views, Mounting, 726 Sterger, E., Photography of the Absorption Rays of the Colouring Matters of Blood, 605 Steriqgmatocystis nigra, Formation of Oxalic Acid, 187 Stern, M, Secretion of the Preen Gland, 167 Sternberg, K., Section Staining by Romanowsky’s Method, 241 Sternum and Episternum of Mammals, 658 Steuer, A., Branchial Filter of Fishes, 15 Stevens, N. M., Germ-cells of Aphides, 171 Stewart, C., Membranous Labyrinth in Elasmobranchs, 545 — Membranous Labyrinth in Sharks, 432 Stewart, F. H., Anatomy of Nematodes, 554 Stictis panizzei, Biology, 199 Stigeoclonium, Reproduction, 696 Stiles, M. H., Yorkshire Diatomacez, 695 Stirton, J., New Scotch Mosses, 690 805 | Stockard, C., Cytology of Nectar-glands | | Strampelli, N., of Vicia faba, 559 Stockard, C. R., Development of Thyroid in Bdellostoma stouti, 653 — Studying Cytological Changes in the Nectar-glands of Vicia faba, 512 Stohr, P., Nature of the Thymus, 289 | Stokes, A. C., Notes on Markings of Wing- scales of a certain Butterfly, 64%, 754 Stolons of Nephrolepis, Structure, 566 Stolze, —., Simple Photometer, 719 Stoltzner, H., Influence of Fixation on the Volume of Organs, 615 Stop, Post-Objective, 365 Stopes, M. C., Studying the Nutritive Relations of the Surrounding Tissues to the Archegonia in Gymnosperms, 621 Stoppenbrink, F., Effect of Starving on Planarians, 30 Stoughton, G. v. E., Resistance of Bacillus coli to Heat, 484 Infection with Ustilago carbo, 699 Experiments | Strand, E., Ovarian Eggs of Spiders, 173 Streptococci and Diplococci on Blood Media, 354 — and Staphylococci, Differentiation and Identification, 87 — pathogenic to Man, 710 Streptococcus and Pneumococcus, Staining. Capsules of, 514 — Intestinal, of Horse, 90 Streptococcus bombycis and Disease in Silk- worms, 483 — mucosus, 591 — — capsulatus, 591 Stress, Measurement by Thermal Methods, 584 | Striated Membrane in the Erythrocyte of Salamander, 626 Stridulation of Gryllus campestris, 667 Stromsten, F. A., Venous System of Che- lonia, 14 Strong, R. P., Pathology of Balantidium coli, 18+ Strongylus filaria, Embryology, 444 — Species in Gibbon, 672 Struckmann, C., Embryology of Strongylus filaria, 444 Structure and Development of Seed Plants, Reproductive. See Con- TENTS, XXili — — — of Seed Plants, Vegetative. See CoNTENTS, XXiii Studer, T., Axis of Aleyonarians, 318 Studnitka, F. K., Epidermis of Lepado- gaster, 655 — New Application of the Abbe Conden- ser, 364 — New Construction of the Preparation Microscope, 361 Sturgeon, Embryology, 162 Stursberg, —., Anguillula intestinalis, 444 806 Stylasterina of Siboga Kxpedition, 181 Styles of Tethya, Structure, 183 Stylipide, Collecting, 439 Suctorial Apparatus, Male of Nicthoa astact and, 552 Sulphur-dioxide, Action on Plants, 456 Supernumerary Limbs, Origin, 539 Suprarenals and Sympathetic System in Protopterus, 542 Surra and Mbori, Identity, 450 ’ Svedelius, N.. Distribution of Marine Algze, 468 Swellengrebel, M., Nuclear Division in Yeast, 186 Swellengrebel, N. H., Cytology of Bacillus maximus buccalis, 593 Swim-Bladder of Fishes, 661 — “Oval” of, 661 — Structure of Gas-gland in, 427 Swinnerton, H. H., Pectoral Skeleton of Teleosteans, 8 Sykes, M. G., Tracheids in Node of Equi- | setum, 565 Syllid, Collateral Budding, 553 Symbiosis, Case of, 78 genic Microhes, 93 — of Orchids and Fungi, 327 Sympathetic System and Suprarenals in Protopterus, 542 Synangium, “ Fern” from Lower Coal Measures of Shore, Lancashire, 1, 119 Synaptid, New Brood-nursing, 676 Synascidian, New Genus of, 433 Syringe for Obtaining Blood for Bacterio- logical Observation, 388 Systematic Notes, 349 Szakall, J., Eye of Spalaa typhlus, 429 Szilly, A., Amnion-Invagination in the Formation of Chick’s Lens, 284 Ae ‘Tadpoles Caught by Bladderwort, 450 — Development of Lymphatic System, 9 — Giant, 284 Tenia acanthorhynca, 312 Teniz of Birds of Prey, 672 Tail in Birds, Skeleton, 291 — Regenerated, in Ptychozoon homalo- cephalum, 14 Tandler, J., Origin of a Rete Mirabile, 161 Taniguchi, N., Biology of Filaria ban- | crofti, 312 INDEX. Tarozzi, G., Tetanus Spores, 355 Tarpan, Relationships, 429 Taste-organs in Mouth of Crocodile, 14 Taverner, H., A Simple Method of Taking Stereo-plotomicrographs, and of Mount- ing the Prints without Cutting, 252, 260 — Filter for Mounting and other Media, 748 Taylor, T. G., First Recorded Occurrence of Blastoidea in New South Wales, 676 Techet, C., Effect of Bora on Marine Algz, 63 Technique, Microscopical. See CONTENTS, XXXvVli Teeth, Guillet, of Elasmobranchs, 16 Teleostean Skeleton, Morphology, 661 Teleosteans, Pectoral Skeleton, 8 Teleostei, Development of Chromosomes, 6 Telescope and Microscope, Limits of the Resolving Power, 521 Telescopes and Microscopes, Simple Ques- tions on Images of, 369 Tellyesniezky, K. v., Resting Nuclei and Mitosis, 9 | Temperature, Effect on Insect Develop- — Influence on the Virulence of Patho- | ment, 436 — Influence on Lepidoptera, 436 | — Resistance to, in Frog’s Eges, 5 | Tench, New Myxosporidian from, 682 Tenebrio molitor, Unfertilised Ova, 22 Tennant, D. H., Life-history of a Trema- tode of the Oyster, 445 — Studying Bucephalus haimeanus, 235 Tensile Strength of Copper-Tin Alloys, 634 Tenthredinids, Maturation of Unfertilised Eggs, 437 — Preparing Unfertilised Eggs, 235 Tenthredinoidea, Wings, 665 Teratology, Text-book, 538 Terburgh, J. T., Bacilli growing on Drigalski-Conradi Nutrient Agar, 215 Terebratula transversa, Peculiar Variation, 179 Terminology of Organs in Various Condi- tions of Development, 652 Termite, Queen, Oocytes, Effect of Para- sites, 302 Test, Bacterial, whereby Particles shed from the Skin may be detected in the Air, 711 — Pieces, Presence of Greenish-coloured Markings in Fractured Surfaces, 247 | Testes, Regeneration, 7 ‘Yanner-Fulleman, M., Plankton from the | Schénenbodensee, 196 Tapetum of Abramis brama, 654 Tapeworm, New Species, 445 — Sexual Organs and Development, 444 — Studies, 672 Tardigrada, Revivification, 441 — Structure and Position, 305 Testicular Gland, Interstitial, of Horse, 7 — Secretion, 283 Testis and Ovary of Cat, Structure and Development, 537 — of Batrachia. 659 — Multiple, and Liver, 544 Tetanus Spores, 355 Tethya, Structure of Styles, 183 Thalassema, Artificial Parthenogenesis, 443 INDEX. Thallophyta. See Conrenrs, xxvii Thelebolus stercoreus, 471 — — Studying the Developnent, 614 Thelyphonus caudatus, Development, 551 Thermal Methods, Measurement of Stress by, 384 — Transformations of Carbon Steels, 246 Thermohilic Bacteria, Role of, in Intes- tinal Tract of Man, 592 Thiele, J., Phylogeny of Crustacean Limb, 306 Thienemann, A., Trichoptera Pups, 23 Thierfelder, H., Barium Sulphate Rhizopod, 449 Thiesing, C., Syphilis, 452 Thilo, O., Mechanism of Air-bladder in Fishes, 660 Thiselton-Dyer, W. T., Wild Fauna of Kew, 657 — and others, Chinese Flora, 45 Tholander, H., Nitrogen in Steel, 245 Thom, C., Fungi in Cheese-ripening, 585 Thomas, F., Growth of Fairy Rings, 203 Thomas, O., Aquatic Genus of Muride, 289 Thomson, J. A., Antarctic Axinellid, 679 — Viviparity in Aleyonacea, 678 Thon, K., Holothyrids, 304 —- New Excretory Organ in Hydrachnids, 24 in Spirochete pallida and Thymus, Nature, 289 Thyng, F. W., Squamosal Bone in -Tetra- podous Vertebrata, 658 Thyroid in Bdellostoma stouti, ment, 653 — of Myxine, 296 Thysanozoon brocchi, Maturation and Fer- tilisation, 674 Thysanura, Key to Families and Genera, 667 Tick Fever, Cultivation of Spirillum of, oul — — in Congo Free State, 304 Ticks, Bovine, as Carriers of Disease, 440 Tieeghem, P. v, Winged Stele in some Leguminos, 453 Tillman, O. [., Embryo-sac and Embryo of Cucumis sativus, 186 Tillyard, R. J., Dimorphism in Female of Ischnura heterosticta, 24 — Supposed Numerical Preponderance of Males in Odonata, 24 Timm, R., German Mosses, 691 Tin and Antimony, Alloys, 634 Tintinnodez, Reproduction, 681 Tischler, G., Studying Development of Pollen and Cells in Ribes, 511 Tischutkin, N. P., Apparatus for Staining simultaneously numerous Microscopical Sections, 627 Tison, A., Mechanism of the Fall of cer- tain Terminal Buds, 325 Develop- 807 Tissue, Connective, Studying the Cell- forms, 376 Toad, Horned, Gastrulation, 651 — Intermaxillary Gland, 15 — Meristice Variations, 430 — Tooth-band, 8 Toads, Myiasis, 665 Tobacco, Diseases, 204 Tobias, E., Abnormalities in Agaries, 700 Tobler, F., Regeneration in Polysiphonia, ' 341 — Ruthenium-red as Test for Pectin, 627 Toldt, C., Angle of the Mammalian jaw, 659 Tomopteride, Natural History, 175 Toni, G. B. de, Griffithsia acuta, 696 Tooth-band in Toad, 8 Tooth Canaliculi, Structure, 11 ‘lop Stop, On the Use of, for Developing Latent Powers of the Microscope, 748 Topsent, E., New Clionid, 557 Tornier, G., Viviparous Frog, 285 Tornquist, 8. L., Studies on Graptolites, 679 | Torpedo, Acidophil Goblet Cells, 10 | Torrey, H. B., Californian Shore Anemone, 447 — Sexual Dimorphism in Aglaophenia, 556 * Toxicity of Eggs, 13 Toxin of Aspergillus fumigatus, 345 | Toyama, K., Mendel’s Laws applied to Silk-worm Crosses, 437 Trachese, Genital, in Chernetide Acari, 441 Trachei's in Node of Equisetum, 565 Tracya hydrocharidis, 346 and | Tragulus, Placenta, 540 Trapani, —., New Method for Differenti- ating Eberth’s Bacillus from Pseudo- typhoid and Colon Bacilli, 104 Treasurer, Wynne E. Baxter, Appointed, 254 Treasurer’s Account, 125, 126 Treboux, O., Organic Acids as a Source of Carbon in Alge, 187 Tree-Ferns, Structure, 564 Tree-root Rot, 475 Trematode of the Oyster, Life-history, 445 Trematodes of Bivalves, 313 — Some New and Little Known, 445 Treponema pallidum, 626 — — Culture, 610 Tretjakoff, D., Structure of Eye of Frog, 291 | Trichina Embryos, Migration, 29 Trichloracetie Acid as a Fixative, 233 Trichocysts and Cilia, 183 Trichomes, Sporangial, 329 Trichoptera pupz, 23 Trichoptilus paludum, Life-history, 550 Triclad Studies, 674 Triclads, Fresh-water, Excretory System, 313 — — Nervous and Excretory Systems, 674 808 INDEX. Triepel’s Cylinder-Rotation Microtome, | Tylostomez, 701 107 Tympanal Apparatus of Orthoptera, Triton, Double and Polymorphic Nuclei, 10 Troostite, Nature of, 247 Trophoblast of Placenta, 651 Trophoplasmic Spherules in Ciliata, 320 Tropidonotus, Development of Lungs, 165 Trotter, A., Microfungi of Galls, 348 Trout, Myxosporidium, 558 Trowbridge, C. C., Interlocking of Primary Feathers in Flight, 290 Truffle Spores, Germination, 472 Trypanosoma Balbianii, Life-history, 451 Trypanosoma, Distinctions betweenSpecies, 321 — of Rat, 183 Trypanosome, New, 682 — of El-debab, 38 — of Horse, 557 Trypanosomes, Measurement, 244 — Nagana, Introduced into Dogs, Spleen Emulsion as an Antagonist, 682 Tschassownikow, 8., Histological Changes in Pancreas, 655 — Studying the Histology of the Pan- creas, 375 Tschermak, E., Ergot, 698 Tsetse Fly, Genital Appendages, 2 —- — Habits, 666 — — Structure, 22 Tswett, M., Colouring Matter of Phzo- pyhceze, 66, 579 — Tswett’s Luminoscope, 719 Tubercle Bacilli, Defatted, 85 — Bacillus, Composition, 358 — Fish, grown at 37° C.. 728 Tubercular Disease of Olive Trees, 89 Tuberculin, Action, 358 Tuberculosis and Acid-fast Bacilli, 358 — of the “ Bee-Moth ” (Galeria melonella), 485 Tubes, Condenser, Corrosion, 246 — containing Sterilised Nutrient Broth and Plugged with Paraffin Wax, 383 Tubeuf, v., Relation of Lichens to Trees and Soil, 706 Tubeuf, K. v., Harmful Fungi, 478 Tubifex and Lumbriculus, Ethology, 443 Tubularia crocea, Reactions, 676 Tunicata. See ConTEnTs, xiii Tur, J. J. Double Embryo ofa Lizard, 284 Turbellaria aceela, 177 Turbellaria, parasitic, 29 — Studies, 673 Turntable, Clockwork-driven, 243 Turntable with Ball-bearing, Watson’s “ Facile,” 738 Turro, R., Glucose in Pneumococeus Cul- tures, 104 Tuzson, J., Diseases of the Red Beech, 203 Studying, 729 Tympanic Region in Mammals. 13 Typhoid Bacilli, Observations on the Drigalski-Conradi Method of Dia- = fonosing, 103 — Fever, Early Diagnosis, 231 Tyroglyphine, Resisting Powers, 668 U. Ultramicroscopical Examination of Plant- cells, 608 ; — Investigations upon the Colours ‘of Rock Salt, 368 Ultramicroscopy of Oleosole, 366 Ultra-violet Light, Photographs of WES toms taken with, 117 Umbelliferz, Anatomy of Flower, 325 Underwood, L. M., Alcicornium, 188 — Genus Stenochlena, 330 — Lycopodium in the American Tropics, 330 — North American Ferns, 331 soy Unfertilised Eggs of Tenthredinide, Pre- paring, 235 Unger, L., Morphology of Reptile Brain, 168 Ungulates, Placentation, 283 Urban, F., Californian Sponges, 319 Uredinesx, 201, 346, 474, 585 — Infection Phenomena, 474 — New Genus, Uromycladium, 75 — Sexuality, 324 Urinary Ducts in Mammals, Secretion, 168 Urogenital System of Elasmobranchs, Uromycladium, New Genus of Uredine, Urophlyctis Alfalfz, 342 Ursprung, A., Ascent of Sap, 454 Ustilago car bo, Infection Experiments, 699 Uterus and Vagina of Mammals, Structure 541 ‘Ve Vacuole, Coniractile, Function, 680 Vagina and Uterus of Mammals, Structure, 541 Vanessa, Colouring Matter, 21 Vaney, C., Peculiar Larval Asterid, 676 Vansteenberzhe, P., Meningococcus, 354 Varanus bivittatus, ‘Cranial ‘N erves, 430 Variation, Momentum, 546 — of Flowers, 561 — of Form in Bryophyta, 689 INDEX, Varieties and Species: their Origin by Mutation, 654 Vascular System of Lamprey, 16 — — of Young Ammoceete, 662 Vassal, J. J., Trypanosome of Horse, 597 Vaughan, T. W., Madreporaria Collected by the ‘ Albatross,’ 677 Vayssitre, A., Antarctic Nudibranchs, 298 — Antarctic Rhabdoceslid, 314 Vegetable Foods, Microscopy, 371 — Histology: Methods of Microscopical Research, 111 Vejdovsky, F., Nephridia of AHolosoma and Mesenchytreus, 310 — Reduction of Eyes in Gammarids, 308 — The Hemoceele Theory, 166 Velocity, Influence on the Law of Defor- mation of Metals, 514 Vendaces of British Lakes, 292 Venema, A. T., Detection of Bacillus coli in Water, 374 Veneziani, A., Degeneration of Tentacular Nerve of Snail, 663 — Donaggio’s Method of Staining Degene- rated Nerve-fibres, 622 — Malpighian Tubules, 171 — Structure and Function of Malpighian Tubules, 549 Venous System of Chelonia, 14 Verhoeff, K. W., Embiidz, and the Mor- phology of Insects, 300 — Morphology of Insect Head, 548 — Studies on Scutigeride, 440 — Variation in Scutigera, 24 Versluys, J., Conjugation in Infusoria, 320 — Monograph on Primnoide, 318 — New Type of Alcyonarian, 677 Vertebre, Occipital, Primitive, 653 Vertebrata, Experiments on Artificial Parthenogenesis, 6 — Tetrapodous, Squamosal Bone, 658 — See CONTENTS, viii Vertebrate Fossils of Victoria, 545 Vertebrates, Formation of Eye Vesicle, 7 — Nasal Fossa, 8 — Non-nucleated Blood Corpuscles, 656 Vestergren, I., Uredinez, 201 Vestergren, T., Notable Pycnidial Type, 584 Vezey, J. J., 127, 128, 279 — Death of, 253 ; Viala, —., Cysts of Gloeosporium and their Role in the Origin of Yeasts, 583 Viala, P., Sporulation of Yeasts of Ascomy- cetous Fungi, 344 ‘ Vibrio cholere asiatice, Ability to De- compose Starch, 612 — — — Morphology, 709 Vibrios, Granulation, 595 Vicia faba, Cytology, 559 809 Vicia faba, Studying Cytological Changes in Nectar Glands, 512 Vieille, P., Influence of Velocity on the Law of Deformation of Metals, 514 Vigier, P., Salivary Glands of Snail, 169, 297 Viguier, C., Parthenogenesis Urchin Ova, 33 Villani, A., Nectaries of Cruciferse, 561 Vine, Diseases of, 204 in Sea- | — Hyphomycete Parasitic on, 200 Vire, A., Subterranean Isopods, 26 Virgularid, New Type, 679 Virgularids, Mobility, 679 Visceral Ganglion of Anodonta, Studying Structure, 617 Visual Organ of Salpa, 169 Vitalism, 656 Viviparity in Aleyonacea, 678 Voges and Proskauer’s Reaction for Certain Bacteria, 613 Voigt, W., Migrations of Planarians in Mountain Streams, 30 Volpino, G., Demonstrating the Presence of Spirocheta pallida, 380 Volvox globator, Collecting and Preserving, 614 Volyox, Observations, 681 Volz, W., Eyes of Periophthalmus and Boleophthalmus, 167, 294 — Respiration and Circulation in Mono- pterus javanicus, 293 Vorticellide, New, 38 Vosmaer, G. C. J., Structure of the Styles of Tethya, 183 Vourloud, —., Cultures of Bacillus typho- sus, Bacillus coli, and some other allied Bacteria on Drigalski-Conradi Medium, 357 Vredenburg, E., Occurrence of Apus in Baluchistan, 175 Vries, H. de, Species and Varieties: their Origin by Mutation, 654 Vuillemin, P., Indentity of the Genera Meria and Hartigiella, 74 — New Genus of Hyphomycetes, 585 — Origin of Yeasts, 583 — Parasites of Lime Trees, 203 W. Wagner, F. y., Ethology of Tubifex and Lumbriculus, 443 — Regeneration in Lumbriculus variegatus, 176 Wagener, G., Plant Diseases, 205 Walker, C. E., Demonstrating Life-history of Leucocytes, 619 — Plimmer’s Bodies and Reproductive Cells, 12 810 Walpole, G. S., Chemical Mannitol, 484 Walter, H. E., Behaviour of Pond Snail, | 547 Wandolleck, B., Abdomen of Female Chafer, 438 Warfuringe, E., Studying the Spinal and Sympathetic Ganglion Cells of the Frog, 619 Warnstorf, C., Gemmez of Amblystegium, 574 — Mosses of Mark Brandenburg, 463 — New Species of Sphagnum, 572 Warren, E., Abnormal Hoofs of Sheep, 659 — Fauna of Natal, 428 — Myxosporidian in South African Roti- fer, 683 — New Natal Hydroids, 677 — Notes on Convoluta roscoffensis, 674 Water, Detection of Bacillus coli, 374 Waterhouse, G. B., The Influence of Nickel and Carbon on Iron, 248 Watkinson, G. B., Cranial Nerves of Varanus bivittatus, 430 Action of | Bacillus lactis aerogenes on Glucose and | INDEX. Wesché, W., 252 — Demonstrating the Genitalia of Diptera, 732 — Genital Appendages of the Tsetse-fly, 23 Wesenbure-Lund, U., Icelandic Plankton, 696 | — Plankton of Danish and Scottish Lakes, 195 — Rotifera in Iceland, 180 West, W. and G.S., British Desmidiacesx, 195 | — Fresh-water Algw from the Orkneys and Shetlands, 64 _ — Plankton of some Irish Lakes, 470 Wutson, A. T., Peculiar Regenerative | Process in Potamilla, 309 Watson and Sons’ Ball-bearing Sliding | Bar, 719 — Cathcart-Darlaston Microtome, 734 — Club Microscope, 216 — Darlaston Section Cutter, 735 — “Facile” Turntable with Ball-bearing, | 738 — High-Angle Condenser Carrier for Petrological Microscopes, 223 — Immersion Oil Bottle, 738 — Junior Metallurgical Microscope, 716 — Praxis Petrological Microscope, 216 — School Microscope, 216 Westenrijk, N. v., Bi-polar Staining of the Plague Microbe, 710 Weymouth, W. A., Tasmanian Mosses, 191 Weysse, A. W., Studying the Histogenesis of the Retina, 731 Whale-Shark, History, 295 Wheat Flour, New Method of Detecting Starch in, 630 Wherry, W. B., Demonstration of the Indol and Cholera-red Reactions, 240 Whitelegge, T., Australian Mosses, 464 Whitening of Hairs and Feathers in Winter, 427 _ Whitley, E., Effect of Acids and Alkalis on the Eggs of Plaice and Sea- Urchin, 421 — Effects of Alkalis and Acids on De- veloping Ova of Sea-Urchin, 421 | Whooping-cough, Microbe, 709 Widakowich, V., Nidamental Organ of Dogfish, 168 _ Wieler, A., Action of Sulphur-dioxide on Watson, D. M. S., On a “Fern” Synan- gium from the Lower Coal Measures of Shore, Laneashire, 1, 119, 121 Watts, W. W., Australian Mosses, 464 Wave-length Spectroscope, Simple, 418 Wax-forming Organs in Social Bees, 20 Wax-glands of Bees, 20 Webb, W. M., Monograph on British Wood-lice, 306 Weber, E. T., Rotifera from Indo-China, | Java, ete., 675 Wedekind, W., Theory of Development, 536 Weidenreich, F., Structure of Amphibian Red Blood Corpuscles, 164 Weil, P. E., Culture of Bacillus lepre, 230 Weller, 8., New Brachiopod, 32 Wellman, F. C., Habits of Tsetse-Flies, 666 Wery, J., Bees and Flowers, 20 Plants, 456 Wiclowieyski, H. R. v., Structure of the Insect Ovary, 20 Wierzejski, A,, Embryology of Physa fontinalis, 170 Wijsmann, H. P., Structure of the Styles of Tethya, 183 | Wilhelmi, J., Excretory System in Fresh- water Triclads, 313 | Willcox, M. A., Structure of Aemzxa testu- dinalis, 434 Willey, F’., Ceylonese Heematozoa, 321 Williams, A. W., Demonstrating the Presence of Negri’s Bodies in Hydro- phobia, 737 | Williams, J. L., Periodicity of the Sexual Cells in Dictyota dichotoma, 66 | Williamson, H. C., Life-history of the Lobster, 25 Williamson, W., Hydrachnid Fauna of Scotland, 552 Willson, H. S., New Method of Isolating Bacillus typhosus from Infected Water, 232 INDEX. Wilson, E. B., Chromosomes in Relation to Determination of Sex, 5 — New Theory of Sex-production, 423 — Sexual Differences of Chromosome Groups, 424 — Studies on Chromosomes, 426 Wind Dispersal of Seeds, 44 Wings of Tenthredinoidea, 665 — Sensory Organs, 302 Wing-scales of a certain Butterfly, Notes on Markings, 648, 754 Wing-structure in Cicads, 302 Winslow, C. EK. A., Revision of Coccacee, 86 Winton, A. L., Microscopy of Vegetable Foods, 371 Wintrebert, P., Metamorphosis Indepen- dent of Nervous System, 424 Witches’ Brooms, 205 Wolf, E., Reproduction in Copepods, 174 Wolf, R., Life-history of Cyathocephalus truncatus, 312 Wolff, —., Staining Neurofibrils, 109 Wolff, M.. Nerve Elements in Amnion of Cat, 1z Woltereck, R., Ontogeny and Interpreta- tion of Siphonophore Colony, 317 Wood, Destruction by Fungi, 586 — New Microchemical Tests, 513 Wood-bee, Stomach, 301 Wood-lice, Monograph of British, 306 Wood-louse, Regeneration of Antenne, 307 Woodeock, H. M., Demonstrating Life- _eycle of Cystobia irregularis, 377 — Hemoflagellata, 681 — Observations on Gregarines, 451 Woodland, W., Holothurian Spicules, 446 — Spicule-formation in Alcyonium, 34 — Studies in Spicule-formation, 35 Woodruff, L. L., Cultivating and Prepar- ing Hypotrichous Infusoria, 509 — Life-history of Hypotrichous Infusoria, 319, 449 Woodward, A. §., Vertebrate Fossils of Victoria, 545 Woolley, P. G., Schistosoma japonicum in the Philippines, 673 Woronin, M., Study of Monoblepharidez, 71 Worthmann, F., Demonstrating Nerves in Female Genital Tract, 625 Wright, C. H., Chinese Ferns, 688 Wright, Sir A. E., Principles of Microscopy, being a Handbook to the Microscope, 722 — Resolving Limit, Note on, 724 Wulff, 'T., Protoplasmic Continuity, 324 — Studies of Protoplasmie Continuity, 685 Wiist, F., Iron-Carbon Alloys with High Percentages of Carbon, 385 811 X. Xenophyophure, 449 Xylol-balsam, Mounting delicate Vegetable Tissues, 249 Ne Yamanouchi, §., Polysiphonia violacea, 578 — Studying Polysiphonia violacea, 620 Yatsu, N., Formation of Centrosomes in Enucleated Egy-fragments, 161 — Young Discinisca, 32 Yeast, “ Anomalous,” 473 — Nuclear Division, 186, 473 — Probable Existence of Emulsin in, 187 — Symbiotic, 473 Yeast-spores, Conjugation, 73 Yeasts, 472 — Cysts of Gloeosporium and their Role in the Origin of, 583 —of Ascomycetous Fungi, Sporulation, 344 — Origin, 583 — Stable, Production from Fungi, 698 Yellow Fever, Studying, 511 Yendo, K., Principle of Systematising Corallinee, 194 Yolk, Absorption, in Angu/s fragilis, 651 — Formation, in Egg of Sparrow, 423 Yung, E., Giant Tadpoles, 284 Z. Zach, F., Case of Symbiosis, 78 Zahlbriickner, A., A New Lichen Parasite, 473 Zederbauer, E., & others, Plant Diseases, 703 Zeiss’ Centring Achromatic Condenser, 492 — Compensating Ocular 4% with Iris Diaphragm, 491 — Large Mechanical Stage, 489 — Martens Stand, 598, 748 — Measuring Microscopes, 716 — Stand for Crystallographic and Petro- graphic Work, 489 Zellner, J., Chemistry of Fungi, 684 — Fat-splitting Ferment of the Higher Fungi, 687 Ziemann, H., Death from Infection with Ascaris, 177 Zikes, H., Yeasts, 473 - Zine, Micro-chemical Test, 738 Zine-Aluminium Alloys, 517 812 Zlatogoroff, 8. J., Bacteriology of Measles, 214 Zodda, G., Sicilian Bryophytes, 571 Zograf, N. de, Cervical Cap in Nauplius of Artemia salina, 308 Zograf, N. y., Hermaphroditism of Male Apus, 669 “ Zoochlorella”’ in Convoluta, 580 Zoochlorellz of Convoluta roscoffensis, 314 Zoogleic Tuberculosis, Variety, 91 INDEX. Zopf, W., Biological and Morphological Observations on Lichens, 353 — Chemistry of Lichens, 210 — Gold and Silver Ferns, 565 Zschokke, F., Dipylidium caninum in Man, 178 — Distribution and Geological Age of Genus Oochoristica, 313 Zwack, A., Ephippium of Daphnia hyalina, 27 LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED GREAT WINDMILL STREET, W., AND DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E.